Pan Sys UG

EPS PanSystem User Guide

Version 3.0
December 2001
Edinburgh Petroleum Services Ltd
(C) Copyright EPS Ltd
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
1
EPS PanSystem User Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Chapter 1 - Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1. 1. PanSystem Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.1.1.Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
1.1.2.Installation Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
1.1.3.PANSYS30.INI and the Registry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
1.1.4.Start-Up Security Error Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1. 2. PanSystem Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.2.1.Preparing and Editing Welltest Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
1.2.2.Analysing Welltest Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
1.2.3.Computing well deliverability and forecasting long-term production . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.2.4.Designing Well Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.2.5.Preparing Detailed Reports on Welltest Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
1.2.6.PanMesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
1. 3. PanSystem Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
1.3.1.Gauge Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
1.3.2.System Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.3.3.Tide Table Files (optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
1.3.4.Text-only Report File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1.3.5.Word Document Report File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1.3.6.Saving Files and File Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
1. 4. Preparing Data For Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
1. 5. Using PanSystem For Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
1. 6. Test Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
1. 7. PanSystem Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
1.7.1.Tool Buttons Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
1. 8. On-Line Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
1. 9. On-Line Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
1.9.1.Tooltips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1. 10. PanWizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1.10.1.The Wizards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
1.10.2.PanWizard Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 EPS PanSystem User Guide
1.10.3.Model Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
1.10.4.Test Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
2
Basics Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53
Chapter 2 - File Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
2. 1. New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
2. 2. Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
2. 3. Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2. 4. Save As... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2. 5. Save as V2.3.... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
2. 6. V1.80 Import... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2. 7. Graphics Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
2. 8. Send as E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
2. 9. Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
2. 10. Page Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
2. 11. Print Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
2. 12. Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Chapter 3 - Edit Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
3. 1. Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
3. 2. Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
3. 3. Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
3. 4. Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
3. 5. Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
3. 6. Datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
3. 7. Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
3. 8. View Co-ordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
3. 9. Plot Rate Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
3. 10. Overlay Pressure... . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
3. 11. Mark points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
3. 12. Marker Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3. 13. Delete Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3. 14. Show Marker Text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
3. 15. Plot Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 EPS PanSystem User Guide
Chapter 4 - Report Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
4. 1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
4.1.1.PanSystem Reports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78
4.1.2.EUB Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4. 2. Printing a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4.2.1.Print Report option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
4.2.2.Export to Word Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
4.2.3.Print from a Listed Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
3
4. 3. Configure Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
4.3.1.Loading a Report Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.3.2.Customizing a Report Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82
4.3.3.Saving a Report Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
4. 4. Report Cover Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
4.4.1.Customizing the Cover Page for EUB PAS file export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
4. 5. EUB Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4.5.1.TRG.PAS Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
4.5.2.AOF.PAS Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Chapter 5 - Configure Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
5. 1. About Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
5. 2. General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
5. 3. Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5.3.1.Selecting a Units System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
5.3.2.Creating a New Units System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
5.3.3.Editing a Units System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5. 4. Gauge Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
5. 5. Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
5. 6. Fonts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121
5. 7. Customer-Supplied Reservoir Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Dataprep Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Chapter 6 - Gauge Data Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
6. 1. About Gauge Data Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
6.1.1.Definitions of Data Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
6.1.2.Where To Access Gauge Data? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
6. 2. Data File Manipulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
6.2.1.Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
6.2.2.Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
6.2.3.Rate Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
6.2.4.Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
6.2.5.Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
6.2.6.Test Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 EPS PanSystem User Guide
4
6. 3. Selecting Master Data For Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
6. 4. Selecting the Data For Plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
6. 5. Data Edit Plot and Tool Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
6.5.1.General Use of Data Edit Plot and Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
6.5.2.Zoom in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
6.5.3.Zoom Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
6.5.4.Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
6.5.5.Data Reduction and Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
6.5.6.Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
6.5.7.Undo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
6.5.8.Confirm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
6.5.9.Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
6.5.10.Copy and Paste a Section of Data (including Time) from Another File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
6.5.11.Copy, Re-sample and Paste a Single Column from Another File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
6.5.12.Copy, Re-sample a Column to Create a New Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
6.5.13.Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
6.5.14.Difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
6.5.15.Exact Point for Flow Period Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
6.5.16.Nearest Point for Flow Period Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
6.5.17.Define Point from Intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
6.5.18.Automatically Generate Flow Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
6.5.19.Calculate Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
6.5.20.Group Flow Periods into Test Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
6.5.21.Ungroup Flow Periods in Test Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
6. 6. The Ruler Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Chapter 7 - Well and Reservoir Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
7. 1. Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
7.1.1.Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
7.1.2.Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
7.1.3.Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
7.1.4.Condensate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
7. 2. Fluid Type Multi-Phase Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
7.2.1.Multi-Phase Perrine Method (oil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 EPS PanSystem User Guide
7.2.2.Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
7. 3. Pseudo-Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
7.3.1.Edit Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
7.3.2.Calculate Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
7.3.3.Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
7.3.4.Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
7. 4. Principal Well Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
7.4.1.Vertical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
7.4.2.Horizontal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
5
7. 5. Well Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
7.5.1.Well Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
7.5.2.Add Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
7.5.3.Delete Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
7.5.4.Copy Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
7.5.5.Active, Inactive and Principal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
7. 6. Layer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
7.6.1.Add Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
7.6.2.Delete Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
7.6.3.Copy Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
7.6.4.Active / Inactive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
7.6.5.Layer Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
7.6.6.Layer Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
7.6.7.Create Composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
7.6.8.Create Commingled . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
7.6.9.Fluid Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
7.6.10.Datum correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
7. 7. Customer-Defined Flow Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
7.7.1.External Models Supplied with PanSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Chapter 8 - Well and Reservoir Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
8. 1. Reservoir Geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
8.1.1.Drawing the Reservoir Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
8.1.2.Deleting the Reservoir Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
8.1.3.Moving Nodes, Moving the Reservoir Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
8.1.4.Moving the x- and y-axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
8.1.5.Internal Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
8.1.6.External Angles Less Than 180° (“Concave”) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
8.1.7.Creating More Than 20 Nodes for the Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
8.1.8.Regions and Areal Heterogeneity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
8.1.9.Deleting a Region or Internal Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
8.1.10.Control Points and Internal No-Flow Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
8.1.11.The User Menu and Short-Cuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
8.1.12.Importing a Template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
8.1.13.Upper, Lower and Outer Boundary Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
8.1.14.Dip, Layering and Node Editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
8.1.15.Defining a Radial Region Around the Wellbore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
8.1.16.3-D View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
8. 2. Well Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
8.2.1.Well Geometry and Open Intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
8.2.2.Wellbore Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
8. 3. Material Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
8.3.1.Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
8.3.2.The Sub-Layer and Region Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
8.3.3.Wellbore Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
6
8. 4. Run Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
8.4.1.Mode Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
8.4.2.Batch Control Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
8.4.3.Setting-Up a Batch Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Chapter 9 - Tidal Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
9. 1. Maritime Tide Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
9. 2. Sub-Sea Pressure Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
9. 3. Tidal Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
9.3.1.Tidal filter mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
9.3.2.Calculate Tidal Lag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
9.3.3.Apply Tidal Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Analysis Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Chapter 10 - Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
10. 1. Functional Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
10. 2. Analysis Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
10.2.1.Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
10.2.2.Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
10.2.3.Suggest Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
10.2.4.Autofit Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323
10.2.5.Pressure Extrapolation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
10.2.6.Time Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
10.2.7.Pressure Transformation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
10.2.8.Non-Darcy Skin Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
10.2.9.Correct for Rate Dependency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
10.2.10.Export TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330
10. 3. Toolbar Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
10.3.1.Standard Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
10.3.2.Plot Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
10.3.3.Line Fitting Tools: Log-Log Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
10.3.4.Line-Fitting Tools: other plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
10.3.5.Curve-Fitting Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
10.3.6.General Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Chapter 11 - Simulate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
11. 1. Quick Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
11. 2. Auto Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
11.2.1.Automatic Matching Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383
7
11. 3. Advanced Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387
11. 4. PanFlow Rate Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392
Chapter 12 - Numerical Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
12. 1. PanMesh: New Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
12.1.1.The Main Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
12.1.2.The Reservoir View Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400
12.1.3.The Mesh Edit pop-up menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
12.1.4.The Graph Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
12.1.5.Graph pop-up menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408
12.1.6.Pressure Visualization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
12.1.7.Pressure at a Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
12.1.8.Flow Vectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
12.1.9.Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
12.1.10.Saving Simulation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414
12.1.11.The Real-Time and Pressure Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415
12.1.12.PanMesh Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
12.1.13.The Menu Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
12.1.14.Status Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
12. 2. PanMesh Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
12.2.1.Open the History File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
12.2.2.Replay Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 425
12. 3. From Existing TCX File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
12.3.1.Layer, Well and Fluid Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
12.3.2.Generating the Welltest Response at the Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
12.3.3.Generating the Welltest Response at a Remote Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427
12. 4. Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
12.4.1.Example 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428
12.4.2.Example 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
12.4.3.Example 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
12.4.4.Example 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442
Chapter 13 - Deliverability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
13. 1. Deliverability: Oil/Water systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
13.1.1.Deliverability Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 EPS PanSystem User Guide
13.1.2.Toolbar Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
13. 2. Deliverability: Gas and Condensate systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
13.2.1.Calculations: Transient and LIT Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
13.2.2.Toolbar options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452
13.2.3.Calculations: C-and-n Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454
13.2.4.Toolbar Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
13. 3. Production Forecasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
13.3.1.Forecasting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
8
Advanced Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 468
Chapter 14 - Advanced Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
14. 1. Advanced Simulation - Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
14. 2. Preparation of Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
14.2.1.Well data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
14.2.2.Layer Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
14.2.3.Layer Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
14.2.4.Fluid Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
14.2.5.Flowrates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
14. 3. Advanced Simulation Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476
14. 4. Simulated Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481
14.4.1.Simulated Pressures and Flowrates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
14.4.2.Creating Type-Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Other Useful Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 491
Chapter 15 - Equations (A) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
15. 1. Radial Flow Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
15.1.1.Log-Log Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
15.1.2.Semi-Log Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 493
15.1.3.Cartesian Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 505
15.1.4.Deliverability Analysis - Oil Wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
15.1.5.Production Forecasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
15. 2. Linear Flow Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
15.2.1.Fracture Linear Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513
15.2.2.Reservoir Linear Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
15. 3. Bi-Linear Flow Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 516
15. 4. Spherical Flow Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
15. 5. Horizontal Wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
15.5.1.Semi-Log plot: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
15.5.2.Log-Log plot: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518
15.5.3.Square-Root plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 519
15. 6. Type-Curve Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521
15.6.1.Plot Axes for Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 521 EPS PanSystem User Guide
15.6.2.Homogeneous Reservoir Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 522
15.6.3.Wellbore Storage Type-curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 523
15.6.4.Bounded System Type-Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
15.6.5.Slug Test Type-Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525
15.6.6.Fractured Well Type-Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 526
15.6.7.Dual-Porosity Type Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 528
15.6.8.Ei Type-Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 529
15.6.9.Dual-Permeability Type-Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .529
15.6.10.Radial Composite Type-Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530
15.6.11.Partial-Penetration and Gas Cap/Aquifer Type-Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 531
15.6.12.2-Cell Compartmentalised Type-Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 532
15.6.13.Horizontal Well Type-Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 533
9
15. 7. PanWizard Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
15.7.1.Testing Time Advisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Chapter 15 - Equations (B) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536
15. 1. Radial Flow Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
15.1.1.Log-Log Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
15.1.2.Semi-Log Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 538
15.1.3.Cartesian Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 544
15.1.4.Transient Analysis with Rate-Dependent Skin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
15.1.5.Deliverability Analysis - Gas Wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
15.1.6.Production Forecasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
15. 2. Linear Flow Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
15.2.1.Fracture Linear Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
15.2.2.Reservoir Linear Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 554
15. 3. Bi-Linear Flow Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
15. 4. Spherical Flow Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
15. 5. Horizontal Well Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
15.5.1.Semi-Log plot: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
15.5.2.Log-Log plot: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 556
15.5.3.Square-Root plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 557
15. 6. Type-Curve Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
15.6.1.Plot Axes for Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558
15.6.2.Homogeneous Reservoir Calculations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
15.6.3.Wellbore Storage Type-Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 559
15.6.4.Bounded System Type-Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
15.6.5.Fractured Well Type-Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
15.6.6.Dual-Porosity Type-Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
15.6.7.Ei Type-Curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 560
15.6.8.Dual-Permeability Type-Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .560
15.6.9.Radial-Composite Type-Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
15.6.10.Partial Penetration and Gas Cap/Aquifer Type Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
15.6.11.2-Cell Compartmentalized Type-Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 561
15.6.12.Horizontal Well Type Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 562
15. 7. PanWizard Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563 EPS PanSystem User Guide
15.7.1.Testing Time Advisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
15.7.2.Flow Rate Advisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Chapter 16 - File Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
16. 1. Type-Curve File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
16.1.1.Filename Extensions and Associated Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
16.1.2.File structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
16. 2. . PAN File Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
16. 3. PSP Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
16.3.1..PSP File structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570
16.3.2.Definition of Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571
10
16. 4. .PIC pressure/z-factor/viscosity file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
16. 5. .SEA Maritime Tide Table File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Worked Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 574
Chapter 17 - Dataprep - Gauge Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
17. 1. Overview of Dataprep Work Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
17.1.1.Files For This Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575
17. 2. Importing Gauge Data Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
17.2.1.Selecting and Naming Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576
17.2.2.Defining The Data Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 577
17. 3. Plotting TPR Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
17. 4. Shifting Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580
17. 5. Data Quality - Generating Differences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581
17. 6. Editing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582
17. 7. Copying Data From File To File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
17.7.1.Copy and Paste a Block of Data, Including Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
17.7.2.Copy, Re-sample and Paste Single Column of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 584
17. 8. Re-sampling Data - Creating Composite TPR Stream . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 585
17. 9. Defining Flow Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
17.9.1.Exact Coordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
17.9.2.Nearest Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
17.9.3.Intersecting Lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 587
17.9.4.Rate History Prior To Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588
17. 10. Creating Flowrate Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
17. 11. Reducing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
17.11.1.Point Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
17.11.2.Block Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
17.11.3.Undoing Deletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
17.11.4.Data Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
11
17. 12. Grouping Flow Periods into Test Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
17. 13. Saving Data to PanSystem Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
17. 14. Exporting Gauge Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 590
Chapter 18 - Manual Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
18. 1. Overview of Data Entry Work Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
18. 2. Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591
18. 3. Well Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
18. 4. Fluid Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
18. 5. Principal Well Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
18. 6. Layer Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
18. 7. Fluid Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 594
18. 8. Pressure and Rate Data Entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
18. 9. Plotting Raw Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 598
18. 10. Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600
18. 11. Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
18. 12. Type-Curve Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
Chapter 19 - Gas Well DST and Deliverability Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
19. 1. Overview of Gas Test Analysis Work Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611
19. 2. Gas Fluid Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
19. 3. Initial Build-Up Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 614
19. 4. Final Build-Up Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615
19. 5. Flow-After-Flow Transient Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
19. 6. Full Test Sequence History Match & Refinement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620
19. 7. Deliverability From Transient Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623
19. 8. Flow-After-Flow LIT Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624
19. 9. Flow-After-Flow C-and-n Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625
19. 10. Production Forecasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Chapter 20 - Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
20. 1. Overview of Reporting Work Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
20. 2. Files For This Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 EPS PanSystem User Guide
20. 3. Altering Printer Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
20.3.1.Selecting a Printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
20.3.2.Changing Printer Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
20. 4. Changing the Report Font . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 630
20. 5. Configuring a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
20.5.1.Changing the Report Content . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631
20.5.2.Changing the Cover Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
20. 6. Printing a Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
20. 7. Export to Word Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 633
20. 8. Using Report Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
20.8.1.Loading and Saving Template Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 634
12
20. 9. Creating a Text-Only Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
20.9.1.Printing a Report to a File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635
Chapter 21 - Test Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
21.0.1.Overview of Test Design Work Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
21. 1. Setting up the Test Design Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
21.1.1.Entering the Wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
21.1.2.Entering layer and fluid descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639
21.1.3.Entering Flowrates for the Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 640
21.1.4.The Advanced Simulation controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641
21. 2. Analysis of the Simulated Responses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
21.2.1.Analysing the Simulated Data - Principal Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 642
21.2.2.Preparing the Simulated Data for Analysis - Observation Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 643
21.2.3.Analyzing the Simulated Data - Observation Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 646
21. 3. Changing the Test Design Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 647
21. 4. Analysing Multiple Test Design Scenarios . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 648
21. 5. Changing the Design Test Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649
Chapter 22 - References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Alphabetic Index: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 656
Notice
PanSystem is produced and owned exclusively by:
Edinburgh Petroleum Services Ltd,

Research Park,
Riccarton,
EDINBURGH EH14 4AP
Scotland, UK.
PanSystem (C) Copyright EPS Ltd. 1994 to 2001. PanMesh (C) Copyright EPS Ltd and Kepler
Engineering 1998 to 2001. All rights reserved. Portions of PanMesh are copyright of Criterion
Software Ltd (UK) 1993 - 1996 and their Licensors.
This manual and software is licensed under the terms of a software licence between Edinburgh
Petroleum Services (EPS) Ltd and the software user. Use of the software outside the terms of this
licence is illegal. Duplication of the software or of this manual, in part or in whole, is strictly
prohibited except as provided for under the terms of the licence, or with written authorisation from
EPS Ltd.
This manual describes a technical computer application package and instructions for data preparation
and use of the package. The software has been thoroughly tested and every effort has been made to
achieve accuracy and completeness in both the software and documentation. No warranty, express or
implied, is made in the application of the package. In the event of unsuccessful use of the package in
any application for which it is intended, or undetected errors in the package or documentation, the
liability of EPS Ltd or its authorised agents is, in any event, limited to the package usage charges or
royalties attributable to that application.
Acknowledgements
Reference is made to a number of trademarks throughout this manual:
Windows, Windows 95, 98, 2000, Windows NT, Word, and Excel are marks of Microsoft Corp.
Nodal is a mark of Schlumberger.
DemoShield and InstallSHIELD are marks of InstallShield Software Corporation.
Drover’s Professional Toolbox is a mark of Prescription Software Inc.
Novell is a mark of Novell Inc.
Sentinel Licence Manager and Software Sentinel are marks of Rainbow Technologies.
FLEXlm is a mark of Globetrotter Inc.
The licence manager portion of this product is based on: Élan Licence Manager © 1989-1996
Élan Computer Group. Inc. All rights reserved. Élan Licence Manager is a trademark of Élan
Computer Group. Inc.
15
About This Publication
This guide is aimed at petroleum engineers wishing to use PanSystem. It covers each of the
activities users will perform when using PanSystem. Each section consists of one or more
chapters.
Chapter 1 - "Introduction"
Read this before using the software. This chapter contains important information that users need
to know when operating PanSystem. It introduces PanSystem’s features, how to get help, the files
that will be worked with, the procedures that should be followed and the PanSystem interface.
Throughout this manual users will see screen shots which are representative of PanSystem. Some
of these screen shots are in Windows 3.11 format and some are in Windows 2000 format. The
layout changes are minimal, and whichever platform is being used these should be clearly
understood.
Section 1: Basics
This section covers the basic information users should know in order to operate PanSystem.
Chapter 2 - "File Menu Options"

This chapter covers the options available on the File menu. These deal mostly with opening and
saving files and printing and setting up the printer.
Chapter 3 - "Edit Menu Options"

This chapter covers the options available on the Edit menu. These options are used to specify the
details of how plots are displayed on the screen.
Chapter 4 - "Report"
This chapter provides information about the options available in the Report menu. The chapter
discusses each option and offers the background information needed to understand reports.
Chapter 5 - "Config"
This chapter provides information about the options available in the Configure menu. These
options are used to configure PanSystem features, such as the units system or the fonts used. The
chapter discusses each option and offers the background information required to perform
configuration tasks.
Section 2: Data Preparation

This section contains information on the facilities PanSystem provides for preparing and editing
gauge, reservoir and tide data. Each data type is covered in a separate chapter within the section.
Chapter 6 - "Gauge Data"

This chapter provides information on how to import, edit and prepare gauge data for analysis and
test design. All of these functions are accessed using the Gauge Data option on the Dataprep
menu.
16
Chapter 7 - "Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical)"
This chapter provides information on how to enter and edit the reservoir and fluid parameters for
use in diagnostic plot analysis and analytical simulation. Reservoir data consists of Well Control
parameters, Layer Control parameters, Fluid Type parameters and Well Orientation parameters.
These are accessed using the Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical) option on the Dataprep
menu.
Chapter 8 - “Well and Reservoir Description (Numerical)"

This describes the reservoir and fluid data preparation area for the PanMesh finite element
welltest simulator.
Chapter 9 - "Tide Table"

This chapter provides information on how to create and complete a Tide Table and how to filter
the data. PanSystem uses this information to remove the effects of the tide from the recorded
pressure data. This option is accessed directly from the Dataprep menu.
Section 3: Analysis
This section covers the facilities PanSystem provides for analysis.
Chapter 10 - "Analysis"
The Analysis menu contains options for selecting reservoir and boundary models and for
analysing plotted data by straight-line techniques and type-curve matching. This chapter
provides information on how to use these options and offers the background information
required to perform analysis tasks.
Chapter 11 - "Simulate"
The Simulate menu contains options for analysing well data by simulation: pressure simulation
for simple and complex models, automatic regression, and the simulation of flowrate from
pressure. This chapter provides information on how to use the analytical simulation options and
offers the background information required to perform simulation tasks.
Chapter 12 - "Numerical Simulation"
This is PanMesh, the finite element welltest simulator. The chapter describes how to run it, and
how to view and use the results.
Chapter 13 - "Deliverability"
This chapter provides information on how to calculate the deliverability of a well. It also
describes the production forecasting facility to predict long-term productivity and reservoir
pressure behaviour.
Section 4: Advanced Simulation
In this section, users will find information on Test Design and Advanced Simulation.
17
Chapter 14 - "Advanced Simulation"
The Simulate menu contains options for multi-well, multi-layer analytical simulation. This
chapter provides information on how to use these options and offers the background information
required to perform advanced simulation tasks. To use the Numerical Simulation facility, please
refer to Chapter 12.
Section 5 - Other Useful Information

This section contains useful information which will give users a better understanding of
PanSystem and help them to use the software more effectively.
Chapter 15 - "Equations"
This chapter contains details of the equations PanSystem uses to make calculations.
Chapter 16 - "File Structures"
This chapter contains a description of the structure of the files PanSystem uses.
Section 6 - Worked Examples
Chapters 17 to 21
These contain a number of worked examples that will give users practical, hands-on experience
with PanSystem.
Chapter 22 - "References"
This chapter contains a references to other sources of information which have been used in
designing and developing PanSystem.
What Users Should Know

This publication is a guide to using PanSystem (including PanMesh). The publication provides
all of the background information required to use the PanSystem features, but assumes that users
already understand the theory of well testing.
PanSystem has been developed as a Windows program, and uses typical Windows displays,
dialog boxes and techniques. It is assumed that users already have a working knowledge of
Windows. In order to make the information contained in this guide as clear and usable as
possible, basic instructions which will be familiar to Windows-users have been avoided. If users
are not familiar with Windows, they are advised to perform the tutorials that come with
Windows, before using PanSystem.
How To Use This Publication
The chapters in this publication are arranged in logical order (e.g. users should know about
PanSystem basics before preparing data or beginning analyses).
Users are advised to read chapter one before beginning, then refer to each section in turn as they
carry out the related function. There is a detailed index at the end of the manual.
Throughout the publication, a program option is described before specific or detailed
information is provided on how to use it. These descriptions let users quickly decide if they want
to use a particular option. These descriptions can also be used to skim through the publication
and decide when more information is required for a particular option.
18
PanSystem Product Support
Help System
The first thing users should try when they have a problem or question is the on-line Help system.
This is available in PanSystem either by:
• Using the Help option on the main menu bar. This is described in “On-Line Help”, on page
43.
• Hitting the F1 key when a menu item is highlighted, or when a dialog box is active.
• SHIFT+F1 gives users the option to get help on graphic screen regions by clicking the area
of interest (menu bar, toolbar, plot legend, axes, etc.). A large question mark appears beside
the mouse pointer when this is active.
• PanWizard: this is an on-screen Help system designed for those who are just starting with
PanSystem, or who have forgotten what they learned last time they used it. If the PanWizard
is switched on, a series of screens (the "Wizards") will guide users step-by-step through Data
Preparation and into Analysis.
• Tool Tips: when the cursor is moved over a button in any of the Toolbars, captions are shown
which identify the button’s function.
The Manual
The next place to try is this manual. A detailed index is provided to guide users to the right place.
An explanation of the problem may be found here. Please look here first, before calling EPS. It is
well worthwhile for users to install the electronic version of the manual on their hard-disk or
network drive.
Internet
At http://www.e-petroleumservices.com users will find the EPS web-site. The site is continually
being developed to provide a support base for our clients. The support area of the web-site
provides details of Upgrades and Fixes, Release Notes, Known Issues and other information.
EPS Support
If users cannot find an answer to a problem, or if they have a question about the program which
is not answered anywhere, then it is time to call for help.
Support Desk
Provided users have a maintenance contract with EPS, they can either call their local agent or the
EPS Head Office to get help with problems relating to the software. Depending on the nature of
the problem, one of the following may happen:
• EPS may be able to tell users verbally what they are doing wrong, and thus rectify the
situation.
• If a program bug is suspected, the support staff will try to repeat the problem at EPS. It may
be necessary to ask users to send more details or the actual data being used, so that the
problem can be verified. If the problem is serious, EPS would consider issuing a fix,
otherwise the problem will be logged in the bug/enhancement database for attention in the
next scheduled release.
19
• Conversely, users may be calling to inform EPS that a problem has been fixed (either by
advice from EPS, by a bug fix, or by users doing things differently). This is still important, as
EPS are then aware that the item can be checked off in the support database, allowing staff to
concentrate on other program improvements.
• If a problem is document-related, EPS can rectify the situation quickly (new pages are usually
issued with each scheduled release).
• It may be that users are asking the program to do something it cannot do, and was not
designed to do. In this case, EPS will provide advice on how to work round the difficulty, and
treat the call as an enhancement request. It will be entered in the bug/enhancement database,
and may become part of a future version of the software, or indeed a new module in its own
right.
• EPS are often asked for advice on welltest behaviour (unusual derivatives, etc.) or how to
analyse a particular test. Although EPS are happy to discuss welltest data (the plots are often
interesting!), users will appreciate that support staff have to limit the time spent on looking at
data that is not being analyzed in the context of a bug or enhancement.
EPS have a Support Database on the company network, and all calls received will be logged
here. This will ensure that any query, bug or suggestion is recorded, and at any time in the future,
the company will be able to produce reports containing the status of all reported bugs and
suggestions.
Windows, networks and peripherals: Some problems may be caused by the Windows set-up
on a user’s machine, or the type of network or peripheral being used. EPS cannot always
undertake to fix these type of problems, although advice will be offered where appropriate.
Windows is a complete operating system, and it contains all the device drivers for screen,
printers and networks, etc. PanSystem does not have control over these items, and EPS is not
usually in a position to fix them. In principle, if Windows itself can output to certain devices and
communicate with a network, then PanSystem should be able to do so too.
If the problem relates to the Windows installation on a user’s machine, Microsoft have their own
technical help line to deal with such matters (EPS occasionally have cause to use it as well!), and
users should call them. Please see the next section.
Contacts
The Head Office in Edinburgh can be contacted for help or other enquiries. However, if some
users have normally dealt with one of the branch offices, or a local agent, they may prefer to call
there first, since a more local service will be provided and the regular EPS contact will be kept
fully aware of how users are finding the software.
The Houston office has local support staff covering North and South America.
Web-site
http://www.e-petroleumservices.com
Head Office:
Technical Support - PanSystem
EPS Ltd
Research Park
Riccarton
Edinburgh EH14 4AP
UK
Tel: (+44) 131 449 4536 Fax: (+44) 131 449 5123
e-mail: support@e-petroleumservices.com
20
Americas Office:
EPS Americas Inc.,16430, Park Ten Place,
Suite 635,
Houston,
Texas,
77084,
USA
Tel: 001-281-599-1900 Fax: 001-281-599-1991
REGIONAL SUPPORT: epsa.support@e-petroleumservices.com
China Office:
EPS Beijing,
Room 1118, Building Q,
Huiyuan Apartments,
No. 8, East Beichen Road,
Andingmen Wai,
Beijing,
100101,
CHINA
Tel: 0086-106-499-2942 Fax: 0086-106-492-3567
REGIONAL SUPPORT: asia.support@e-petroleumservices.com
Far East Office:

EPS Malaysia,
1-3 (2nd. Floor),
SS23/15, Taman SEA,
47400 Petaling Jaya,
Selangor Darul Ehsan,
MALAYSIA
Tel: 0060-3780-54-932 Fax: 0060-3780-42-053
REGIONAL SUPPORT: asia.support@e-petroleumservices.com
Mexico Office:
EPS Mexico,
Edinburgh Petroleum Services de Mexico S.A. de C.V.,
Jose Mart No. 101 Oficina 309, 3er Piso,
Fracc Lidia Esther,
Villahermosa,
Tabasco,
86040,
MEXICO
Tel: 0052-93-12-17-09 / 93-12-17-24 Fax: 0052-93-12-17-24
Venezuala Office:
EPS Venezuela,
Final Calle la Fila,
Edificio Dvida,
Apto. 4-3,
Altoprado,
Caracas,
VENEZUELA
Tel: 0058-2-977-3196 Fax: 0058-2-977-3196
21
Introduction
Chapter 1- Introduction
This section provides information users should know before operating PanSystem.
Users will find information on:
• PanSystem installation
• PanSystem features
• PanSystem files
• Recommended procedures for using PanSystem
• PanSystem interface.
Users are advised to read this section entirely before operating PanSystem.
1.1. PanSystem Installation

1. 1. 1. Hardware Requirements
To run PanSystem, users require the following hardware:
• Intel or compatible 486 or Pentium-based chip.

• A hard disk with at least 5 Megabytes of free space on it for the program files, type-curves,
etc. More disk space will be needed for personal data files and work space for temporary and
paging files.
• Windows 95, 98, 2000 or NT installed on the user’s machine. This requires that the PC has
graphics capability of EGA-resolution or above.
• A valid software security key enabled for the appropriate options.
To run PanSystem + PanMesh, users require the following hardware:
• Intel or compatible Pentium PC. (The faster the better! EPS recommend a P550 or faster.)
• A hard disk with at least 17 Mb of free space on it for the program files, type-curves, etc.
More disk space will be needed for personal data files and work space for temporary and
paging files. EPS recommend at least 50 to 100 Mb of diskspace for this.
• Windows 95, 98, 2000 or NT. This requires that the PC has graphics capability of SVGA-
resolution or above. (The minimum screen resolution recommended is 800 x 600 using small
Chapter 1 - Introduction
fonts with 16k colours). As PanMesh is a graphically intensive application, the on-screen
presentation of results will improve with higher resolutions and number of colours.
• At least 64 Mb of memory. Except for very simple models, PanMesh will run faster the more
memory that is available. Although it will run with less memory, computation time will be
considerably greater.
• A valid software security key (supplied by EPS) enabled for the appropriate options.
22
Introduction
1. 1. 2. Installation Procedure
From version 2.6 onwards PanSystem is a 32-bit application for Windows 95, 98, 2000 and NT.
It will not run under Windows 3.1 or 3.11.
If installing from the CD under Windows 98, 2000 and NT, the welcoming screen will
automatically open and users can continue through the installation options. If users are running
Windows 95, or have disabled the auto-run feature on their system, this screen may be opened by
running LAUNCH.EXE in the root directory of the CD.
If installing from floppy disk, after inserting the first PanSystem disk in the floppy drive, run the
SETUP.EXE file from this disk and follow the instructions.
Once the installation has commenced, users can monitor the progress of the installation on the
two background graphics on the screen:.
Figure : 1.1.2 - 1 Installation Status Bars
The Installation Status Bars provide users with information relating to the processing of the
installation:
1.Percentage of space left on the drive that PanSystem is to be installed onto.

2.Percentage of current installation copied from CD.
3.Percentage of each individual file copied during the installation.
4.If the percentage of free space available drops below 10% (bar 1), the Low indicator lights
up red.
1. 1. 2. Installation Procedure
Figure : 1.1.2 - 2 Copying Files Status Box
The Copying Program Files status box indicates the current percentage of files copied to the PC.
Users may create shortcuts to the PANSYS.EXE file by selecting this in Windows Explorer or
My Computer and using the right mouse-click option for Create Shortcut. After performing this
operation, drag and drop the Shortcut to the Windows Desktop, or copy it to the Start Menu.
23
Introduction
1. 1. 3. PANSYS30.INI and the Registry
The Registry is a hierarchical database utilized by the 32-bit versions of Microsoft Window
including Windows 95, 98, 2000 and NT. It is used to store system settings and options and also
contains information and settings for all the hardware, software, users and preferences of the PC.
When a user applies changes to Control Panel settings, File Associations, System Policies or
installed software, these changes are reflected and stored in the Registry.
The Registry has replaced all of the .ini files that were present in Windows 3.x applications. The
data formerly contained in pansys2x.ini, etc. are now all contained within the Registry, along
with hundreds of other system settings. All Windows-specific programs now store their
initialization data within the Registry instead of within .ini files situated in the Windows folder.
The Registry cannot be viewed or edited with a normal editor - a Registry Editor program
included with Windows must be used:
• regedit for Windows 95/98/2000.

regedit32 for Windows NT 4/5.
To run this program, click on the Start icon at the lower left of the Windows screen display, then
select Run to open a Run dialog box. Follow the instructions and type in regedit or regedit32
depending on the user’s system. The program can also be selected from the drop-down list on the
right-hand side of the dialog input field. This procedure will start the Registry Editor and if
required, this can be added to the Start Menu or to the Desktop for easier editing.
The Registry Editor is divided into two panes. The left pane contains a hierarchical tree structure
of keys (similar to Windows Explorer) and the right pane shows the string values for the curently
selected branch. These string values contain the actual information stored in the Registry.
There are a number of main branches and each contains a specific portion of the information
stored in the Registry. For users of PanSystem, the most important branches are:
• HKEY_CURRENT_USER - This branch links to a section of HKEY_USERS appropriate

for the user currently logged onto the system.
• HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE - This branch contains computer-specific information about
the type of hardware, software and other preferences on a given machine; this information is
used for everyone who logs onto the machine.
The PanSystem installation procedure automatically creates a sub-folder called PANSYS30.INI
within the HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE branch of the Registry. This sub-folder contains details
of the PanSystem set-up, location of the executables, data file directories, units system locations,
etc. The current version number is included in the sub-folder name, to avoid confusion with the
settings from earlier versions.
Under normal operating circumstances, there will be no need to worry about the PANSYS30.INI
sub-folder, since any alterations made while running PanSystem (e.g., a change of data directory
or selecting a new unit system) will be recorded automatically to the sub-folder when users exit
the program.
Users may apply certain changes to their set-up that require changes to be applied in the Registry
sub-folders for PanSystem.
String values that may need to be updated manually in PanSystem are listed below:
24
Introduction
In the Configuration sub-folder of the Registry under HKEY_CURRENT_USER:
• HLLC_K_L This registry entry applies to horizontal well models using the line fitting and
calculation option with a Linear Flow Plot in Analysis. If the Effective Well Length (Lw) and
Vertical Permeability (Kz) terms are already known and users wish to invoke the Mechanical
(True) Skin Factor (S) calculation option, the registry default setting should be changed in the
PANSYS30.INI sub-folder by setting HLLC_K_L = 1. Conversely, to calculate the Effective
Well Length (Lw) and Convergence Skin (Sconv), leave HLLC_K_L = 0 (default).
• VertFract-FinCond This registry entry applies to vertical well models using the vertical
fracture, finite conductivity option. When a Linear Flow Plot is used in Analysis, the line
fitting and calculation option can either be used to calculate the Dimensionless Fracture
Conductivity (Fcd) and Fracture Conductivity (Kfw), by setting VertFrac-FinCond = 1
(default), or remove the calculations and only display extrapolated pressure (P*), by setting
VertFrac-FinCond = 0.
• Units-System (VFP Table) The first time users import a VFP table for Deliverability
Forecasting, PanSystem will try to determine the nature of the units (SI or oilfield Units).
This information is then provided on the Current File line in the import dialog. PanSystem
assumes that this will then be the default VFP units setting. Users may change the default
setting in the Configuration folder by editing the line, units-system = 0 for Oilfield Units
(default) or units-system = 1 for SI Units.
Other Registry settings that users may wish to customize include:
• Reporting (see “Report Cover Page”, on page 87).

• Graphs (see “Graphs”, on page 120).
• Fonts (“Fonts”, on page 121).
Warning: The Registry Editor should always be used with great care and there are three
very important points to remember:
• There is no undo option available in the Registry - if a key folder is deleted accidentally it is
permanently gone.

• When the Registry is edited, all changes are saved instantly - there is no option to “re-load”
the Registry if something has been done incorrectly.
• Users will never know if they have done something wrong - there are no warning pop-up
dialogs to inform users of mistakes, errors, etc. The Registry Editor will allow users to wipe
everything clean without supplying a warning.
Windows 95, 98, 2000 and NT all have a simple Registry back-up mechanism that is quite
reliable, but users should never rely on this alone. Always remember to make a back-up of the
Registry. The back-up and restore methods will vary depending on the version of Windows that
is being used - consult the Registry Editor Help menu for version-specific details of these
methods.
For additional information relating to the Registry and the operations that can be performed in
the Registry Editor, users should also refer to:
• The Registry Editor Help menu.

• The dedicated website guide for the Windows Registry accessed from the URL’s http://
registry.winguides.com/ or http://www.regedit.com/.
25
Introduction
Note: Other Registry entries that may be customized are described in this manual within the
context of their appropriate dialog setting (to find details on specific entries refer to the
Alphabetic Index for this manual under Registry Entries).
1. 1. 4. Start-Up Security Error Message

On start-up, PanSystem checks for the presence of a security key on the computer (a hardware
dongle or a license file). If it finds one, the program will run.
If it does not find one, rather than issue a warning immediately, it checks for a possible network
security key. If this check is performed satisfactorily, the program runs.
If this is unsuccessful, it issues the first of a series of error messages referring to the absence of a
license file or server host name (depending on the user’s set-up). Finally, the local security error
message appears, informing users that an EPS security device could not be found, or that it has
expired, etc., depending on the nature of the problem.
At his stage users should either try to sort out their dongle or network problem, or contact EPS
for help.
1.2. PanSystem Features

Welcome to PanSystem.
PanSystem is a powerful tool for:
• Preparing and editing welltest data
• Analysing and history matching welltest data using analytical and numerical* methods
• Computing well deliverability and forecasting long-term production
• Designing welltests
• Preparing detailed reports on welltest analysis.
All these functions are provided in one integrated program. (*The PanMesh numerical simulator
is an optional extra.) PanSystem uses a Windows interface making it easy for users to move
1. 1. 4. Start-Up Security Error Message

around, get to know the program and find the options that they require.
1. 2. 1. Preparing and Editing Welltest Data

PanSystem has very extensive facilities for editing and preparing recorded test data for analysis.
Each PanSystem .PAN file can be configured for up to 5 wells. For each well, up to 20 separate
gauge data files can be imported, with up to 100 columns of data in each file, including non-
analysable data such as temperature and other gauges.
The size of data file that can be read in is limited only by the capacity of the user’s computer -
PanSystem itself has no limit.
All PanSystem programs are fully integrated, so there is no need to save data when going from
one part of the program to another. Simply switch between Dataprep tasks and Analysis,
Simulation or Reporting tasks.
Editing can be performed in the following two ways, or by combination of both:
• By displaying the data in tabular format and editing individual or ranges of cells
• By plotting the data on the screen and editing sections of the plotted data.
26
Introduction
The following illustration shows the type of dialog box that is used to edit data in table format:
The following illustration shows a typical screen for editing plotted data.
1. 2. 2. Analysing Welltest Data
The tool bar, under the menu bar, contains options for editing the data. The options available at
any time vary with the menu function and type of plot.
1. 2. 2. Analysing Welltest Data

Using PanSystem welltest data can be analyzed from many test types: Constant Rate Drawdown/
Injection, Variable Rate Drawdown/Injection, Constant Rate Build-up/Fall-off and Variable Rate
Build-up/Fall-off, Slug tests (wellbore fill-up or leak-off), Interference tests. Variable rate tests
include those where the flowrate varies during the test.
27
Introduction
Data can be analyzed from both oil and gas wells, vertical/slant and horizontal. A special rate-
versus-skin analysis technique allows Darcy and turbulent (non-Darcy) skin terms to be
identified.
PanSystem allows users to analyze test data in the following three ways:
• Straight-line techniques.
• Type-Curve matching.
• Analytical response generation via Quick Match, Auto Match, Advanced Simulation and
PanFlow.
• Numerical response generation using PanMesh.
Analysis by Straight Line Techniques
In PanSystem users can analyse a welltest by fitting straight lines to the plotted test data. By
analyzing the different flow regimes in this way, PanSystem can calculate various wellbore and
reservoir properties.
Users can distinguish between different flow regimes by plotting data on different types of
pressure and time axes: refer to the following table.
Pressure Axis Time Axis Type of Flow Regime

pressure time Well bore storage,
Semi steady state

log pressure log time All flow regimes *
pressure log time Radial flow
pressure square root time Linear flow
pressure 4th root time Bilinear flow
pressure 1/square root time Spherical flow
* On a log pressure/log time plot, the derivative is also plotted to help users identify the different types of flow. 1. 2. 2. Analysing Welltest Data
Analysis by Type-Curve Matching
Users can analyze test data by matching the plotted data to a set of pre-defined type-curves for
the appropriate flow model. PanSystem provides a number of default curves which have known
parameter values. By matching the plotted test data to one of the default curves users can
establish the values appropriate to the test data.
28
Introduction
Analysis by Quick Matching and Auto Matching
Using the PanSystem options Quick Match and Auto Match it is possible to verify the results of
the analysis very quickly. PanSystem Quick Match generates a theoretical response curve using
specified input parameters, which can be compared with the measured welltest data. These input
parameters would normally have been derived from analysis of the welltest, or arrived at by trial
and error through successive attempts with Quick Match, or obtained by regression using the
parameter optimization facility Auto Match.
If the generated response curve matches the measured data plot, then the parameters used are
"correct" (with the usual proviso about non-uniqueness!). If the curves do not match, then users
should experiment with the parameter values or consider a different flow model.
Quick Match and Auto Match use a single well, single layer welltest simulator (although some
“single layer” models such as dual permeability do have an implicit second layer).
Analysis using Advanced Simulation and PanFlow
1. 2. 3. Computing well deliverability and forecasting long-term production

Advanced Simulation extends the capabilities of Quick Match to cover multiple wells and
multiple layers. PanFlow simulates flowrate from pressure, providing a useful means of model
validation where in-situ flowrates have been measured, such as in multi-layer tests (MLT).
Analysis using the PanMesh Numerical Simulator

PanMesh is a finite element numerical welltest simulator. This can be used instead of the Quick
Match or Advanced Simulation analytical simulators to match welltest responses in complex 3-
Dimensional geological models. It is a single-well simulator, but will model anisotropic,
heterogeneous reservoirs consisting of multiple layers with internal crossflow, and can compute
rigorous interference test responses.
1. 2. 3. Computing well deliverability and forecasting long-term

production
In the Deliverability section of PanSystem, users can compute the semi-steady-state inflow
performance using analytical or production test data. The production forecasting facility will
predict the decline in well productivity and reservoir pressure versus time over any desired
period, and compute the volume of hydrocarbon produced. Long-term transient behaviour is
modelled as well as semi-steady-state or steady-state.
1. 2. 4. Designing Well Tests

PanSystem allows users to define the parameters of a reservoir and well that they wish to test,
and then to predict the response of pressure and downhole flowrate that would be seen for a given
surface flowrate schedule. This response can then be "analyzed" to see if a satisfactory test
design has been derived in terms of ability to identify the required parameters. The analytical
simulation facility (Advanced Simulation) allows for up to five layers and five wells, while the 3-
Dimensional numerical simulator PanMesh will handle one well and up to 15 anisotropic,
heterogeneous layers.
1. 2. 5. Preparing Detailed Reports on Welltest Analysis

PanSystem has an extensive reporting facility enabling users to create clear, comprehensive and
finished reports quickly and easily. Reports can contain the following sections:
29
Introduction
• Report Cover and Remarks Pages - this can be used to give introductory information about
the report, such as: field name, well name, test date, analyst's name, etc., and comments on
the test and its analysis.
• Input Data - reservoir description parameters, fluid properties, layer parameters, layer
boundary parameters, layer model data and gauge data.
• Analysis Results - results calculated from analysis of the well data. The plots from which the
results were calculated can also be plotted.
• Deliverability Results - results calculated using the Deliverability menu options.
Deliverability and Production Forecasting plots can also be included.
In PanSystem report templates can be created in a similar manner to pre-defined reports in
database programs. To print a report all users need to do is to select the correct template and
print. PanSystem provides default system templates that can be used for printing reports and as a
basis for creating custom templates.
1. 2. 6. PanMesh
PanMesh is a 3-D finite element welltest simulator. It has been integrated into PanSystem as an
additional option - Numerical Simulation - on the Simulate menu. Data for mesh generation are
input via a new Well and Reservoir Description (Numerical) option on the Dataprep menu.
The rate schedule can be entered in the usual way via the Test Design facility, or, if users are
matching existing gauge data, the rates pertaining to the test (as listed in the Rate Changes table)
can be used.
When all necessary input data have been specified, the Numerical Simulation option will
invoke PanMesh.
The mesh is generated first. PanMesh then computes a dimensionless constant rate drawdown
pressure response for the specified model. This response includes mechanical skin factors, but
not wellbore storage, rate variations or turbulent skin.
Users are then returned to PanSystem, where this dimensionless response serves as the model
into which wellbore storage, and superposition effects if a multi- rate history has been specified,
are convolved. Rate-dependent skin effects are also added at this stage for gas and condensate
reservoirs.
The resulting simulated pressure response is then available as a channel of data which can be
used as an overlay for history matching, or can be inspected and analyzed in the same way as any
other pressure data. The dimensionless constant rate drawdown response is also saved to file.
Summary of features
• Vertical, slant and horizontal wells, with up to 6 open intervals.
• In plan view, the reservoir may be a polygon of up to 20 sides. (This can be extended to 218 if
required.)
1. 2. 6. PanMesh
• The outer boundaries and top and bottom surfaces of the reservoir can be no-flow or constant
pressure (or mixed).
• There can be a maximum of 15 sub-layers and one well in the reservoir.
• Oil, gas or condensate reservoirs can be modelled. Flow is assumed single-phase, though
some multi-phase flow scenarios can be modelled using pseudo-pressure.
30
Introduction
• Reservoir top, bottom and/or the interface between sub layers may be dipping independently.
Maximum dip of any surface is ± 45° from the horizontal.
• Internal faults (intersecting and non-intersecting) and no-flow boundaries of finite length can
be set within the reservoir.
• Areal heterogeneity is modelled by dividing the reservoir into regions (up to 100). Different
material properties (rock and fluid) may be specified in each region. A radial composite
region can also be configured around the wellbore.
• Non-turbulent skin is represented by an altered region around the wellbore which is
incorporated in the mesh. Turbulent skin is added analytically to the computed pressure
response.
• Anisotropy is possible for permeability (kx, ky, kz). Principal axes for permeability can be
defined relative to North.
• Option to run single file or run batch files for multiple runs.
1.3. PanSystem Files
With the introduction of 32-bit operating systems (Windows 95 and Windows NT) there were
cross-platform compatibility problems with .PAN files. This problem was rectified in PanSystem
version 2.4, therefore the following rules for reading files will apply:
1.The16- or 32-bit versions of V-2.4 or later will read any earlier 16-bit PAN files.
2.The 32-bit version of V-2.4 or later will read any earlier 32-bit PAN files.
3.The 16-bit version of V-2.4 or later will only read 16-bit versions of earlier PAN files.
4..PAX files of any version will be readable on either operating system (Win 3 or
Win95/98/2000/NT), irrespective of which operating system the file was created on.
5.The Save As 2.3 option will generate a PAN ASCII file that can be read by any version of
PanSystem from 2.3 onwards, provided it is the on same platform as the version that saved
the file. So if the Save As 2.3 option from V-3.0 (32-bit) is applied, users will be able to
read the file into 32-bit V-2.6, 2.5, 2.4 or 2.3, but not into the 16-bit versions. Only data that
was available in V-2.3 will be saved, so data related to newer features will be lost.
6.Files from the DOS-based V-1.80 can be read into any version of PanSystem on any
platform.
While operating PanSystem users will work with different types of file. It is important to know
about these before starting. PanSystem uses the following types of files (default extensions in
brackets):
• Gauge Data files (.TPR)
1. 3. PanSystem Files
• System files (.PAN - or .PAX pre-PanSystem version 2.4)

• Tide Table files (.SEA).
• Report files (text only) (.RPT)
• Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure files (.PSP)
• Pressure-z-viscosity file (.PIC).
• Pressure ASCII Standard file (.PAS).
31
Introduction
Note: The file extensions (.TPR, .PAN, etc) are default file extensions used in PanSystem. Users
may, if they wish, assign their own extensions.
1. 3. 1. Gauge Data Files

A Gauge Data file (.TPR) contains the recorded gauge test data. This will normally be supplied
on disk by the company that carried out the welltest.
Up to 20 columns of data can be read in via the spreadsheet method, and 9 columns by the non-
spreadsheet method. Two of these must contain the Time (T) and Pressure (P) values, which are
mandatory for analysis. An optional Flow Rate (R) data column may also be read in for use in
analysis. Any other columns of data (such as temperature) will not be used in analysis but users
may still want to import them into PanSystem for editing, reporting, plotting, etc. Users may also
have another set of pressure data in the same file, in which case they will be able to compare two
(or more) gauge records, and analyze each in turn.
Users need to tell PanSystem which type of data is in which column before importing the file for
analysis.
Once the data has been imported, additional columns can be created through editing, smoothing,
copy/pasting, up to a maximum of 100 columns per file.
*;# File name:
*;# Service:
*;# Company:
*;# Well:
*;# Comment:
*;# Gauges
*;# Gauge Measuring Point:
*;# Job name:
*;# Data from: 24-JAN-96 17:15:00:00
*;# to: 02-FEB-96 12:00:00:00
*;# Interval: 60 sec
*;***************************************************************
****************
*DATE TIME GCP1 GCT1 GCP2 GCT2
* [psia] [degF] [psia] [degF]
*;***************************************************************
****************
24-Jan-96 17:15:00 4202.32 143.20 4202.05 143.26
24-Jan-96 17:16:00 4200.97 143.20 4200.72 143.27
1. 3. 1. Gauge Data Files
24-Jan-96 17:17:00 4199.92 4199.65

24-Jan-96 17:18:00 4199.02 4198.74 143.27
24-Jan-96 17:19:00 4198.24 4197.93
24-Jan-96 17:20:00 4197.48 4197.16
Table 1: Section from a Sample Gauge Data File
To prepare the gauge data for analysis, PanSystem’s extensive data preparation facilities in the
Dataprep menu can be used. For example, users might:
• Reduce the number of data points
• Remove unwanted data
• Clean up noisy data
32
Introduction
• Smooth noisy data
• Patch, splice and merge data from more than one gauge or file
• Mark the beginning and end of different flow periods
• Mark and annotate significant events.
By reducing the number of data points, the amount of memory required to store and work with
the file is also reduced, thus speed up plotting and calculation facilities.
In this manual, an unedited Gauge Data file is referred to as a "raw" data file and an edited Gauge
Data file is referred to as a "clean" file.
Gauge Data File Requirements
The data in the Gauge Data file must be arranged in columns separated by spaces or other valid
delimiters (commas, tabs, semi-colons, etc.), as is the case for any delimited table. Colons are
only considered as valid data column delimiters if they are not already being used in the time
format (e.g. hh:mm:ss). Various import modes are available depending on the layout of the data.
A special fixed column width mode can be used to import date information and columns
containing missing data (see Table 1 above).
Depending on the import mode selected, PanSystem will either import file header information
intact for display in the program, or ignore its textual content and import only the numerical
content, in which case it will appear as spurious data, which can be subsequently removed using
the Dataprep editing facilities.
Hint: Where practical (i.e. for small data files), before importing a raw Gauge Data file, use an
editor and mark non-numeric fields with a * at the start of each line. PanSystem will then
completely ignore such fields when it reads the gauge data. For large files, just let the program
read in the data and then edit in Dataprep if necessary.
1. 3. 2. System Files
A System file contains all the information required to carry out an Analysis or Test Design in
PanSystem. This includes:
• Description of each well - up to five wells
• Description of each layer within the reservoir (up to five layers) and Boundaries (per layer)
• Description of the fluids within each layer
• Edited gauge data - up to 100 columns of data per file, up to 20 files per well. Each well can
be assigned its own data sets
• Record of screen configuration settings (e.g. plot title, axes scales, markers and annotation)
• Pseudo-pressure and pseudo-time tables for each layer (gas wells)
• A record of the status of the analysis on each plot when the file was saved (e.g. lines fitted,
flow regime markers, results). This allows users to save the file and then continue at a later
time from where they left off previously
1. 3. 2. System Files
• Report format
All numerical data are written in oilfield (abs) units.
1. 3. 3. Tide Table Files (optional)

The Tide Table files (.SEA) contain details of the local tide heights while the test was being
recorded. PanSystem uses these as one way to filter out the effects of the tide on the test data.
33
Introduction
Note: these files are in written in ASCII format from V-2.6 onwards. However, earlier binary
files from 16-bit and 32-bit versions as far back as V-2.3 can still be read in.
1. 3. 4. Text-only Report File

The File/Print and Report/Report Output/Print Report commands provide the option to strip out
the textual content of a report (i.e. no graphics) and save it in ASCII format (.RPT). The textual
and graphical content of a plot or report can be saved in HPGL/2 or encapsulated postscript
format by selecting an appropriate printer driver and printing to file.
1. 3. 5. Word Document Report File

The Report/Report Output/Export to Word Document command allows users to save the report to
an MS Word (*.DOC) file with graphics embedded. This option writes the same items to file as
are normally printed directly via the alternative Print Report menu option, except that in this case
graphics are included. MS Word can also be opened within PanSystem and the Report contents
can be viewed, edited, printed, saved and re-formatted (i.e. plot re-sizing, page number insertion,
application of headers/footers, etc.).
Note: If users do not have MS Word, this facility cannot be used. It is not possible to specify an
alternative program.
1. 3. 6. Saving Files and File Extensions

The file extensions .TPR (Gauge Data files), .PAN (System files), .SEA (Tide Table files) and
.RPT (Report Text files) are default extensions used by PanSystem. Different extensions can be
used if required. The extension .PAX, which was used in earlier versions for the ASCII
alternative to the .PAN system file, is no longer available for saving files. However, earlier .PAX
files can still be read in.
1. 3. 4. Text-only Report File
34
Introduction
1.4. Preparing Data For Analysis
The following diagram shows the sequence of events users should follow to create a System file
for analysis.
1. 4. Preparing Data For Analysis
35
Introduction
1.5. Using PanSystem For Analysis
The following diagram shows the sequence of events users should follow when using PanSystem
to analyze welltest results. Information on each option is situated in the Analysis section of this
manual.
1. 5. Using PanSystem For Analysis
36
Introduction
1.6. Test Design
The following diagram shows the sequence of events users should follow when using PanSystem
for Test Design and Advanced Simulation.
1. 6. Test Design
37
Introduction
1.7. PanSystem Interface
PanSystem is a Windows-based program, and uses standard Windows interface techniques; users
who are familiar with Windows will easily find their way around PanSystem.
The following illustration shows a typical PanSystem screen. The screen has four main parts.
Figure : 1.7.0 - 1 Typical PanSystem Screen
Menu bar - displays the PanSystem menus. By selecting an option on the menu bar, users can
access a pull down menu which contains associated options.
Ruler Bar - allows selection of time-dependant data.
Tool bar - contains other options which are used when preparing or analyzing a test. The options
available on the tool bar change as users proceed through PanSystem to display only those
options required for the current job being performed.
1. 7. PanSystem Interface
Plot area - shows a graphical display of the data when users are editing or analyzing data.
When users are analyzing, they can View the data on different types of time axis to distinguish
different flow regimes (e.g. logarithmic time axis for radial flow, or a square root time axis for
linear flow). Users can choose from a selection of time functions to allow for superposition
effects.
It is also possible to modify the range of the axes to adjust the horizontal and vertical scaling of
the plot.
38
Introduction
1. 7. 1. Tool Buttons Quick Reference
Dataprep Tools
- zoom in
- zoom normal
- delete
- options for data reduction and smoothing
- restore initial data (cancel current session of data reduction and deletion)
- undo last data reduction or deletion
- confirm data reduction/deletion to file
- display number of points in file/test period
- Copy and Paste a Block from another file (including the time)
- Copy, Resample and Paste a Column from another file (interpolate data)
- Copy, Resample and Create a new column in another file
- shift data
- generate data stream difference column
- exact cursor position for flow period start/end definition
- nearest data point for flow period start/end definition
- identify start/end of flow period using intersection of lines through data (select 4 points)

- automatically generate flow periods
- calculate rate column from Rate Changes Table or dP/dt
- group flow periods into a test period
- ungroup test periods into flow periods
- tidal filter mode
- calculate tidal lag
- apply the tidal filter
39
Introduction
Analysis Tools
- zoom in
- zoom normal
- delete
- time function
- test overview plot
- Cartesian plot
- radial flow plot (Semi-Log)
- linear flow plot (square-root)
- bilinear flow plot (fourth-root)
- spherical flow plot (1/square-root)
- Log-Log plot
- type-curve matching plot
- skin vs. flowrate plot
- plot tiling option
- point selection for Auto Match
- flow regime definition
- confirm graph results to reservoir description

- change T or P (start of test period)
o o
- display details/results for the selected line
- horizontal line
- unit slope line
- half slope line
- quarter slope line
- negative half slope line
- floating line
- line type alteration
40
Introduction
- derivative display and derivative smoothing for log-log plot
- line-fit option (least squares)
- fit known line slope
- fit line parallel to currently selected line
- compute average slope of lines (if more than one present)
- time mark
- type-curve match
- type-curve: go back to previous stage
- type-curve: go to next stage
- allows derivative/Pd curve to be hidden
- allows derivative smoothing constant to be changed for type-curve plot
- force a parameter value for first stage match
- allows entry of extrapolated pressure
Deliverability Tools
The first two are on the Analysis Test Overview plot for Gas & Condensate:
- LIT analysis method (gas)
- C-and-n analysis method (gas)

Deliverability IPR
- calculate IPR (oil or gas)/View results
- linear display of IPR derived from transient and/or SSS analysis (oil or gas)
- log-log display of IPR derived from transient and/or SSS analysis (gas)
- linear display of IPR derived from production test data (oil)
- linear display of IPRs derived from transient/SSS analysis and prod test data (oil)
- linear display of IPR derived from LIT analysis (gas)
- log-log display of IPR derived from LIT analysis (gas)
- log-log display of IPRs derived from transient/SSS analysis and LIT
41
Introduction
- linear display of IPRs derived from transient/SSS analysis and LIT
- linear display of C-and-n plot (gas) with extended data
- log-log display of C-and-n plot (gas) with extended data
- linear display of C-and-n plot (gas) with stabilised data
- log-log display of C-and-n plot (gas) with stabilised data
- linear display of C-and-n plot (gas) with extended and stabilised data
- log-log display of C-and-n plot (gas) with extended and stabilised data
Deliverability Forecasting
- return to Production Forecasting input dialog
- plot production rate vs time
- plot production rate and cumulative produced volume vs time
- plot average reservoir pressure and cumulative produced volume vs time
- plot average reservoir pressure and bottomhole flowing pressure vs time
- export computed data vs time to file.
42
Introduction
1.8. On-Line Help
Please refer also to “PanWizard”, on page 44, for the interactive help facility using "Wizards".
There are three ways to generate on-line Help in PanSystem:
• using the Help option on the main PanSystem menu bar. This is described in this section.
• hitting the F1 key when a menu item is highlighted, or when users are operating in a dialog
box.
• SHIFT+F1 gives users the option to get help on graphic screen regions by clicking the area of
interest (menu bar, toolbar, plot legend, axes, etc.). A large question mark appears beside the
mouse pointer when this is active.
• The on-line Help can be accessed from the main menu.
Figure : 1.8.0 - 1 Main Help Drop-Down menu
1.9. On-Line Manual

If users have installed the PanSystem manual and the Adobe Acrobat Reader v4 (both supplied
on the PanSystem installation CD), they can open the manual from the User Guide option on the
Help menu. Use the Configure User Guide option to specify the paths to the manual and
Reader:
1. 8. On-Line Help
Figure : 1.9.0 - 1 Configuration dialog for the User Guide and Adobe Acrobat Reader
43
Introduction
1. 9. 1. Tooltips
The identity and actions of buttons can be viewed by passing the mouse cursor over the button
without clicking as illustrated below.
1.10. PanWizard
This is an on-screen help system designed for infrequent users, those who are just starting with
PanSystem, or those wishing to re-cap on certain features. If the PanWizard is switched on, a
series of screens (the "Wizards") will guide users step-by-step through Data Preparation and into
Analysis. Each Wizard answers the question:
"What Next?"
The Wizards are intended to be brief, concise and easily assimilated; an alternative to the on-line
Help, or reference to the Technical Manual. In the same spirit, the following description simply
informs the user how to switch the PanWizard on or off - the rest should be self-explanatory.....
1. 10.1. The Wizards

When users start a newly-installed PanSystem program, the PanWizard dialog box is generated:
For users who are already familiar with PanSystem and do not want to be guided by the Wizards,
switch-off the Always Enter PanWizard on System Start-Up option, by unchecking the check
box and select the Quit button. The Wizard dialog will not be generated again unless users select
the PanWizard option on the main menu and re-enable the Wizards (See Section 1. 10. 2
1. 9. 1. Tooltips
“PanWizard Menu”, on page 48).
To proceed with the Wizards, select the Next>> button on the PanWizard dialog box.
If users select Next>> on the first PanWizard dialog box, the Wizard for loading or entering data
appears:
44
Introduction
• Raw gauge data: If users have a raw gauge data file (.TPR) to load, select Next>>. This path
will guide users through the loading of raw data and the initialization of fluid, well and
reservoir parameters. A system file (.PAN) will be created which can then be analyzed.
• .PAN system file: If users already have a formatted system file (.PAN) - for instance, one of
the supplied example files - select Load PAN File. Users will then be able to check their
input data, or proceed with an analysis. Once the file has loaded, select the PanWizard
option on the main menu and then select What Next? to proceed.
To follow the PanWizard path through data preparation and analysis, select the Next>>
button on the PanWizard dialog box. To leave PanWizard at any stage, select Quit. To
go back a step, select <<Back.
When the Next>> button is selected on some Wizards, users will be taken into a PanSystem
dialog box. In this case, the Wizard will appear as an icon:
If users want to re-display the Wizard (to re-read the instructions, for example), just double-click
on the icon.
For instance, suppose users have advanced through to the Reservoir Description Wizard:
1. 10. 1. The Wizards
45
Introduction
Figure : 1.10.1 - 1 Reservoir Description data entry Wizard
Select the Next>> button to proceed to the Reservoir Description dialog box:
Figure : 1.10.1 - 2 Reservoir Description dialog box with PanWizard icon (bottom left) 1. 10. 1. The Wizards
46
Introduction
The Wizard is retained as an icon at the bottom of the screen. Double-click on the PanWizard
icon to re-display the Wizard instructions:
Figure : 1.10.1 - 3 Reservoir Description Wizard redisplayed

The dialog box is still active behind it. Just drag the Wizard to one side if it is obscuring the
dialog, or select the ’minimise’ button in the top right corner of the Wizard to return it to icon
status (see the figure above).
If at any time users press the Quit button to exit from Wizard mode, PanSystem will be ask if any
new data is to be saved or discarded.
1. 10. 1. The Wizards
Figure : 1.10.1 - 4 Quitting from PanWizard
Select OK to retain any new data and settings that have been entered during the current Wizard
session. If users do not want new data and settings to be retained, they should select the Discard
all New Data button before selecting OK.
Cancel will simply take users back into the Wizard.
47
Introduction
1. 10.2. PanWizard Menu
If users have quit PanWizard or disabled it, and they want to invoke it at any stage, they should
select the PanWizard option on the main menu.
What Next? - will generate a Wizard related to where users are currently situated in the program.
Run On Start-up? - check this option on or off (a tick will appear/disappear) to have PanWizard
enabled/disabled each time PanSystem is started.
Other options - select one of these to go directly to the Wizard for a particular part of the
program. Options may be enabled or disabled (grey), depending on the current status of the
program (e.g. Analysis will only be accessible if users have correctly prepared the data).
1. 10.3. Model Selection

Although the use of the various Wizards is intended to be self-explanatory, a brief explanation is
included on the Wizard for Model Selection, to highlight the main features of a very useful
option.
The model selection Wizard is designed to be used in conjunction with the log-log plot.
1. 10. 2. PanWizard Menu
Figure : 1.10.3 - 1 The Model Selection option
48
Introduction
If desired, users may identify flow regimes on the plot by first using the FR icon (optional). For
this purpose, it is best to set the Reservoir Flow Model to Free Model and the Boundary Model
to Infinite Acting (via Dataprep Reservoir Parameters, or Analysis Model), as this will provide
the full choice of available flow regimes.
Now select Model Selection option from the PanWizard menu to access the Wizard:
Figure : 1.10.3 - 2 Model Selection Wizard
A picture of the data is displayed on the left. A library of characteristic derivative shapes is
presented in the right-half of the screen to help users identify the model. This is divided into
Reservoir Flow Models and Boundary Models. (The full library of derivatives is displayed
regardless of any flow regime markers that users may have placed on the plot.)
Use the up/down arrows to the right of the Reservoir Flow Model panel to browse the selection
of reservoir derivative shapes. If users click on any particular one, a text description will appear
in the Selected Reservoir Flow Model panel at lower left.
Similarly, users can scroll through the possible Boundary Models.
The OK button can be selected at any time to exit the Wizard. The Quit button option was
described earlier on page 47.
Set Model button:

1. 10. 3. Model Selection
If users have identified a tentative model and wish to proceed with parameter estimation,
select the Set Model button. An information box will appear confirming the choices:
Select OK to proceed. The inner (Reservoir) and outer (Boundaries) models will be set
automatically in PanSystem, so there is no need to go into the Analysis Model section to set them
manually.
49
Introduction
If users select Cancel, they will return to the Wizard screen.
• Suggest Models... button:

This button provides users with a short-list of possible model types. This short-list will
respect any flow regimes that may have been defined on the log-log plot. (For example, if
users have marked a radial flow period followed by linear flow, the Boundary Model list
will be restricted to those geometries that can include linear flow. A linear flow period
preceding radial flow will restrict the list of reservoir flow models to the vertical fracture
set.)
If desired, users can browse available models from the two lists and display the pressure
derivatives by selecting the More Details... button, and/or make the choice of models here
and proceed to Analysis by selecting the Set Model button.
Figure : 1.10.3 - 3 The Suggest Models screen for a horizontal well
Further selection criteria are provided in the Questions panel. Selecting No to any of these
will remove the appropriate (or, rather, the inappropriate) models from the list.
The Close button simply returns users to the main Model Selection screen.
The Set Model button serves the same purpose as on the main Model Selection screen
described above. Users can (optionally) make their model selection here by highlighting
the desired choices and selecting Set Model. These will then be set-up in PanSystem and
users can proceed with their analysis of the data.
The More Details... button generates a dialog box containing pictures of the derivative
shapes for any Reservoir Flow Model and Boundary Model that has been highlighted in the
1. 10. 3. Model Selection
lists.
50
Introduction
Figure : 1.10.3 - 4 The More Details dialog box (shown here for vertical well models)
In the figure above, (shown for a list of “vertical well” Reservoir Flow Models), the Radial
Homogeneous Reservoir Model has been selected with the Parallel Faults Boundary
Model. Where several different derivative shapes are possible, up/down arrows will appear
in a scroll-bar.
The OK button returns users back to the Suggest Models screen.
1. 10.4. Test Design
The Test Design facility on the PanWizard menu offers guidance on setting-up a Reservoir
Model and Test Rate Schedule.
1. 10. 4. Test Design
In particular, the Test Schedule option offers:

• Flow Rate Advisor - choice of flowrate based on:
- stable reservoir inflow performance using the IPR module
- well production vs time using the Production Forecasting module
- maximum recommended rate for gas or condensate wells to avoid erosion of tubulars
- minimum recommended rate for gas or condensate wells to avoid liquid load-up.
51
Introduction
• Testing Time Advisor - choice of producing/shut-in time:
- time to end of wellbore storage (including calculation of the storage coefficient)
- time to detect a boundary at a specified distance (including, if desired, the effects of
gauge noise and resolution on the required test duration)
- time to reach semi-steady state in a closed boundary geometry.
52
Basics Section
Basics Section
53
File Menu Options
Chapter 2- File Menu Options
In this chapter users will find information about the options available in the File menu. The
chapter discusses each option and provides the background information required to use these
options.
2.1. New
Description
Use this option to prepare a new System file. PanSystem clears the computer’s internal memory
ready for users to input new data. There is no need to use File New if another file is going to be
loaded, as File Open will automatically clear any old data.
What users see

When the New option is selected, PanSystem clears anything that was displayed in the plot area.
It also clears all other current data.
What to do next
To start entering or editing data, use the options in the Dataprep menu. Please refer to the
Dataprep section.
Chapter 2 - File Menu Options
CAUTION
This option will clear any data currently stored in the computer’s internal memory. To
keep this data, it must be saved using the Save or Save As... options.
2.2. Open
Description
Use this option to load an existing System file (either a .PAN file or a .PAX file (pre-version
2.4)).
The names of the last four .PAN files opened appear at the bottom of the File menu. To open one
of these, there is no need to use the Open option - just click the filename once.
54
File Menu Options
CAUTION
This option will overwrite any data currently stored in the internal memory. To keep
this data, save it using the Save or Save As... options.
What users see

When the Open option is selected, the following dialog box appears on the screen. This is like a
standard Windows File Open dialog box. For assistance with Windows options, please refer to
the appropriate Windows reference manual.
The default file type is the .PAN file. Users may select the alternative ASCII-formatted .PAX file
in the List Files of Type area. Then double-click on the desired file in the list. Alternatively, click
once so the filename appears in the title bar, then select OK.
If users are trying to locate a PanSystem file with specific criteria, a Search button is located at
the base of the dialog for this purpose. Select this button to open a Search Criteria sub-dialog
and specify:
• The Directory to search for appropriate files via the Browse button.
• Specify the Search Criteria to locate appropriate files by checking the relevant fields
(e.g. Field, Well, Reservoir Model, Fluid Type, Number of Layers, etc.) and selecting/
inputting appropriate information (where required).
2. 2. Open
55
File Menu Options
On selecting OK, a Search Results sub-dialog is generated. When files are selected/highlighted
in the list field, the report parameters from the selected file (e.g. test data, well details, etc.), are
displayed in the lower text field part of the dialog. Select/highlight the required file, then select
the Open button to load the file into PanSystem.
Users can preset the data directory to locate their files via the Config General menu option.
What to do next
2. 2. Open
When a file has been opened, users can start to enter, edit or analyze the data. To enter or edit data
use the Dataprep menu options. These are described in detail behind the Dataprep tab. To
analyze the data use the Analysis menu options. These are described in detail behind the Analysis
tab.
56
File Menu Options
2.3. Save
Description
Use this option to save the data currently in the computer’s internal memory. PanSystem will give
the file the default extension .PAN. Users can change this and use another extension if required.
CAUTION
If an existing file is bing edited, Save will overwrite it with the current data. No warn-
ing is given. To retain the original file, use the Save As... option and choose a new
file name.
What users see

This depends on whether a new file is being saved or an existing file is being refreshed. If users
are refreshing an existing file, it will be overwritten without warning. If users are saving a new
file, a File Save As dialog box will appear (described next). If assistance is required with
Windows options, please refer to the appropriate Windows reference manual.
2.4. Save As...

Description
Use this option when an existing file is being edited and the data currently in the computer’s
internal memory is to be saved, but the original data is not to be overwritten. This option prompts
users to provide a new name for the data.
What users see

When this option is selected, the following dialog box appears on the screen:
This is similar to a standard Windows File Save As... dialog box.
2.5. Save as V2.3....

Description
Use this option when an existing file is being edited and the data is to be saved in V-2.3 format,
rather than V-3.0. This option allows users to save files from V-3.0 that they might want to check
2. 3. Save
in a previous version of PanSystem for some reason. Users will be prompted to give a name to
the data file.
There have been a number of changes in file format between V-2.3 and V-3.0, and although files
from earlier versions can be read by V-3.0, the converse is not true unless saved using this option.
57
File Menu Options
What users see
When this option is selected, a dialog box similar to that for Save as... (described earlier)
appears.
2.6. V1.80 Import...

Description
Use this option to recall data that were prepared using PanSystem V-1.80 or earlier versions.
These files will normally have extensions .OIL, or .GAS and .PRO. Once recalled, users will be
able to proceed with analysis in the normal way. Save the data as a PanSystem compatible system
file using the File Save As... option.
What users see

The following dialog box appears:
Select the file type to be recalled, then select OK. Users will then see a File Open dialog box,
with the appropriate default file extension displayed.
The data directory can be pre-set to locate V-1.80 files via the Config General menu item.
What to do next
When the file has been opened users can start to enter, edit or analyze the data. To enter or edit
data use the Dataprep menu options. These are described in detail behind the Dataprep tab. To
analyze the data use the Analysis menu options. These are described in detail behind the Analysis
tab.
Note: For V-1.80 gas welltests, users must also import the gas pseudo-pressure tables in the
.PRO file. Once loaded into PanSystem, the tables can be saved as part of the .PAN file and are
no longer separate.
2.7. Graphics Export

Description
This is a graphics viewing and compression utility. It allows users to capture PanSystem plots
and save them as files for inclusion in other documents. Existing graphics files may also be
loaded and viewed.
2. 6. V1.80 Import...
Windows 95 users should set the Color Palette in the Display Properties section of the Windows
Control Panel to either High Color (16 bit) or True Color (24 bit) to ensure faithful color
replication. This setting does not appear to be important under Windows 2000 and NT.
58
File Menu Options
What users see
The following window is displayed.
Users are initially presented with a blank viewing window.
• The File menu is a typical Windows utility and allows users to: Load an existing graphics file
into the viewing window by using an Open dialog box; or Save As a Joint Photograhic
Experts’ Group JPG, Compuserve GIF, (Dib) device-independent bitmap BMP, or tagged
image file format TIF, using the following dialog box:
Users may also Exit from the Graphics Export utility from the File menu.
• On the Edit menu, the Capture command is used to transfer the current PanSystem plot into
the viewing area.
2. 7. Graphics Export
59
File Menu Options
What to do next
With a graphic captured in the viewing area, use the Save As option to save the image to a
suitable folder, using either the jpg, gif, bmp or tif format. Users may then incorporate the saved
images into other documents or programs which accept the file types provided by this utility.
Other ways to export graphics

Another way to capture the plot for use in a word processor or graphics application is to use the
Edit Copy option on the plot menu in Analysis or Dataprep to transfer the plot to the Clipboard.
From here it is available for pasting into other applications. (See Section 3. 1 “Copy”, on page
67.)
Note: When using the Clipboard, plots may be transferred and “embedded” as Bitmaps or
Windows Metafiles depending on the application they are being placed in. Metafiles are
generally economical in terms of size. Bitmaps tend to use a lot of disk space, largely because of
the color information. Cheap utility programs are available which can (among other things)
reduce plots to monochrome. If users have concerns about file size, use the Graphics Export
utility with the GIF Save As option, as this file type uses file compression.
2.8. Send as E-mail

Should users have a MAPI compliant e-mail system this option will attach the currently selected
PanSystem .PAN file to a new e-mail message.
2. 8. Send as E-mail
60
File Menu Options
Figure : 2.8.0 - 1 A PanSystem file “GASEXAMP.PAN” as an attachment in a new e-mail

message
2.9. Print
Description
Use this option to print the currently displayed plot to hard copy or file, along with some optional
additional information. The minimum output is just the plot. Users may also include comments
and results summaries beneath the plot, and a page header and footer. Choose what is to be
displayed along with the plot (if anything) via the File Page Setup option (see Section 2. 10
“Page Setup”, on page 62).
If users want to print out a series of plots and results, and include a cover page, input data, etc.,
select the more flexible Report facility from the main menu. This provides dedicated page
configuration options and a report template facility.
Select the printer and configure it as required (e.g. for portrait or landscape output) via File
Printer Setup (See Section 2. 11 “Print Setup”, on page 64).
Now select File Print.
What users see

Users have the choice of printing the plot and optional extras to a selected printer, or to save just
the textual results content (normally printed beneath the plot) to an ASCII text file.
2. 9. Print
If the text file option is selected, users will receive a Save As... type of dialog box to save a file,
default extension .RPT. The contents will take the following form...
61
File Menu Options
Radial Flow Plot Model Results
Radial homogeneous
Infinitely acting
Value
Permeability 88.893 md
Permeability-thickness 474.156 md.m
Radius of investigation 694.49 m
Flow efficiency 0.812
dP skin (constant rate) 154.22 kPa
Skin factor 2.054
Extrapolated pressure 34474.994 kPa
... and can be pasted into a word processor. (The above are results output to text file from a Semi-
Log plot analysis).
If users send to a printer, a box showing the status of the printer appears on the screen while the
plot is being printed.
Plots, without the additional text, can be saved as graphics files (BMP, JPG, etc.) using the
graphic viewing and compression utility described in Section 2. 7 “Graphics Export”, on page
58. They can then be imported into a word processor.
Alternatively, users can export the plot and text in HPGL2 or encapsulated postscript format by
selecting an HPGL- or postscript-compatible printer driver and configuring to FILE (see Section
2. 11 “Print Setup”, on page 64). The postscript file usually gives better results than HPGL.
These files can be printed later by sending to an appropriate printer using the DOS Type or Copy
command, or Windows equivalent, (e.g. the command:
type plot1.eps > LPT1
will send the encapsulated postscript file plot1.eps to a printer (postscript!) via port LPT1). Users
can import these files into a word processor document or graphics package, but may not be able
to view them on-screen - this depends on the printer driver, and the application being used. They
are considerably smaller than the bitmap equivalents imported via the Clipboard or as .BMP
files.
To print a fuller report consisting of an input data summary, the results of several selected plots,
and other data, the Report menu should be used.
2.10. Page Setup

Description
File Print is used to print off individual plots. Use Page Setup to set how the plot will appear on
2. 10. Page Setup
the printed page and what is to be included. Choose portrait or landscape mode for the paper via
the Printer Setup option.
To print out a series of plots and results, and include a cover page, input data, etc., use the more
flexible Report facility on the main menu. This provides dedicated page configuration options.
62
File Menu Options
What users see
When this option is selected, the following dialog box appears on the screen:
Print Contents area: users can append text items beneath the basic plot. The font is configurable
via the Config Fonts menu option (select Report Font). Check the appropriate box to determine
what extra items (if any), are to be printed.
- Plot - this will print the screen plot, with line(s), legend and results box if present. If only
this box is checked, nothing else will appear on the page.
- Header/footer - allows users to include text that will be printed at the top and bottom of the
page, outside the plot frame. The contents of the header and footer are configured via
Report Configure Report using the Edit layout option, and can include a company logo
(see Section 4. 3 “Configure Report”, on page 81).
- Model Results - lists the results obtained from line-fitting (which appear in the results box
in the plot area), in a framed area beneath the plot, using a full textual description of
parameters (e.g. "Permeability" instead of "k").
- Quick Match - lists the parameters used for Quick Match response generation. (These need
not necessarily be the same as the Model Results from line-fitting.)
- Line Results - lists the statistical parameters (slope, intercept, etc) associated with any lines
drawn on the plot (see LR icon).
- Description box - the Description box is described in Section 3. 5 “Description”, on page
70. If users have entered text in the description box for a particular plot type (e.g. a Log-Log
plot), it will be printed beneath that plot if the box has been checked.
Margins area: allows users to set the page margins for the drawing area. The default Top/Bottom
setting is 0.75 inches (19 mm). The drawing area defined by the printer driver is usually already
slightly smaller than the page, so a setting of zero will still leave a small margin.
Size area: allows users to select how the plot is printed on the page. The following alternatives
exist:
- Screen Size: prints the plot at the current screen size and aspect ratio, subject to margin
constraints. Results and description boxes, if enabled, are printed beneath the plot.
2. 10. Page Setup
- Fit to Page: sizes the plot to be as large as possible within the margins, while retaining the
same aspect ratio as the screen plot. This is the default setting. Results and description boxes,
if enabled, are printed beneath the plot.
- Full Page: the aspect ratio is adjusted to fill the page out to the margins. Results and
description boxes, if enabled, are printed on a separate page.
63
File Menu Options
With the exception of the margins and plot sizing, these settings are global, and will apply to all
plots and all files. The margins and plot size settings apply to all plots but are file specific (i.e.
they are saved to file).
2.11. Print Setup

Description
Use this option to select and set up the printer to be used with PanSystem. Users can also select
portrait or landscape orientation for plots.
What users see
When this option is selected a dialog box prompts users to select which printer driver they wish
to use, from among those that are connected. (Printer drivers and connections must first be
configured in the Windows Control Panel, Printers section in Windows 3.1/3.11 or from the
Printers sub-menu of the Settings option of the Start Menu in Windows 95/98/2000/NT.)
In addition to changing printers, users can select portrait or landscape orientation and the
paper size (A4, US Letter, etc.).
The dialog box that appears and the other options available depend on the printer that has been
selected. Usually users can also opt to set-up some of the other printer parameters via an
Options/Properties button.
The Network button opens a Connect to Printer sub-dialog that allows users to browse the
existing system network to select a suitable shared printer:
2. 11. Print Setup
64
File Menu Options
2.12. Exit
Description
Use this option to quit PanSystem.
What users see

If users have data in memory which has not been saved, the following dialog box appears (unless
it has been switched off in Configure General):
Cancel returns users to the program, and retains the current data.
2. 12. Exit
65
Edit Menu Options
Chapter 3- Edit Menu Options
In this chapter users will find information about the options available in Edit Menu. The chapter
discusses each option and provides the background information required to use these options.
Some changes made to a particular plot type via the Edit Menu are globally configurable items
(i.e. they apply to all plots of that type, with any data file). They are written to the Config
Graphs settings (see Section 5. 5 “Graphs”, on page 120). The Graphing settings selected by
users are written to the Windows Registry under HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/EPS/
Pansys30.ini/Graphing as global configuration changes (until changed again).
Some changes are written to the .PAN file and are specific to a particular plot type in a particular
file (i.e. they are not global attributes). The following table summarises the status of different
plot attributes:
File-specific (for each plot type) Global (for each plot type)
Axis scale min and max values Axis grid settings (color, ticks, rounding, on/
off, etc)
Axis labels
Title text and title on/off Title color
Legend on/off Legend color
Results box on/off Results color Chapter 3 - Edit Menu Options
Description text, color
Markers and text Data symbols/lines style*
Margins (Page Setup, same for all plots in All other Page Setup items (same for all
file) plots)
* Data Edit Plot, Test Overview Plot and diagnostic plot symbol and line styles can be set
independently.
66
Edit Menu Options
For example, suppose a test is being analyzed and on the Log-Log plot, the user selects red for
the title color, edits the title text to "Final Buildup: Log-Log Plot", and saves to file as
REDTEST.PAN. If a different file is then recalled (e.g. EXAMPLE.PAN), the Log-Log plot title will
be red (because this is a global attribute), but the title text will just say "Log-Log Plot" (because
the title text is file-specific). If REDTEST.PAN is recalled, the title will be red (global), but will say
"Final Build-Up: Log-Log Plot" (because the title was saved with the file).
3.1. Copy
Description
This option copies the contents of the screen plot to the Windows Clipboard. It can be used for
pasting into other documents and applications.
It is similar to the Windows Alt+Print Screen command, except that the plot image that is
transferred has been stripped of menus and borders, and the layout is changed slightly. (Alt+Print
Screen transfers the entire window, including menus and borders.)
See Section 2. 7 “Graphics Export”, on page 58 and “Print”, on page 61, for alternative ways of
exporting graphics to other applications.
3.2. Title
Description
The title appears at the top of the plot. Use this option to:
• Change the title text (plot type specific, saved to file)
• Choose the title's color (plot type specific, global setting)
• Decide whether or not to show the title (plot type specific, saved to file).
Double-clicking on the plot title is equivalent to selecting Title from the Edit menu
What users see

The following dialog box appears on the screen:
To change the font size or type, use the Config Fonts option on the main menu bar, and select
3. 1. Copy
Title Fonts.
67
Edit Menu Options
3.3. Legend
Description
The legend box identifies the plotted data.
Use this option to:
• Specify if the legend box should appear or not (plot type specific, saved to file).
• Choose the color for the box frame and text (plot type specific, global setting).
The legend name displayed for a column of plotted data is the same as its column name in the
gauge data file. It can be edited via the Dataprep menu, Gauge Data, Edit, Names.
The box can be moved around by simply clicking it and dragging. Double-clicking the box is
equivalent to selecting Legend from the Edit menu. Users can permanently set the position of the
box, at top or bottom right or left, in the Config Graphs option on the main menu bar (global
setting, same for all plot types).
What users see

When this option is selected, the following dialog box appears on the screen.
3. 3. Legend
68
Edit Menu Options
3.4. Results
Description
The results box displays the results computed for a line fit ("Model Results") or curve match
("Quick Match Results").
Use this option to:
• Specify if the results box appears or not (plot type specific, saved to file).
• Choose the color for the box frame and text (global, same for all plot types).
The box can be moved around by clicking it and dragging. Double-clicking on the box is
equivalent to selecting Results from the Edit menu. Users can permanently set the position of the
box, at top or bottom right or left, in the Config Graphs option on the main menu bar (global
setting, same for all plot types).
What users see

When this option is selected after a line-fit, the following dialog box appears on the screen:
Switch off the Show Results box to hide the results box.
If Quick Match has been run, the Edit Results dialog has an additional checkbox - Show
Match:
3. 4. Results
69
Edit Menu Options
If any lines were fitted to the plot before running Quick Match, these results will have been
obscured by the Quick Match results. The Show Match checkbox can be unchecked to remove
the Quick Match results and generated curve(s) from the plot. The line results will be re-
displayed. Check this box again to restore the Quick Match curves and results to the plot.
The Quick Match Traces area is described in the Section “Review Multiple Quick Match
Traces”, on page 380.
3.5. Description
Description
A short description of the current plot can be printed in a box directly beneath the plot. This is
useful for presenting additional information. The description of a particular plot can be saved to
file, and is only associated with that plot type in that file.
Use this option to:
• Write, view or edit the description text (plot type specific, saved to file). Users can enter up to
20 lines of description.
• Choose the color for the box frame and text (plot type specific, saved to file).
The description is not visible on the plot screen. It can be printed beneath the plot on hard copy
via File Print, or Report. The box can be switched on or off in File Page Setup (see Section 2.
10 “Page Setup”, on page 62). If no text has been entered, no box will be printed.
What users see

When this option is selected, the following dialog box appears. If users have already entered a
description for this plot, it is displayed in the text panel.
3. 5. Description
70
Edit Menu Options
3.6. Datasets
Description
Use this option to:
• Specify how the data appear on the plots. Each dataset can either be represented as distinct
point symbols, as a continuous line of chosen thickness, or hidden (global setting).
• Select the color and style of the plotted data (global setting).
The dataset style selected on a diagnostic plot will be applied to all other diagnostic plots. The
dataset styles for the Test Overview and Data Edit plots can be set independently.
What users see

When this option is selected, the following dialog box appears on the screen.
For the Lines style option, the Line Thickness can be varied between 1 and 5. This option has
been added because single thickness lines appear very fine on a hi-res (600 dpi) printer.
Note: A thickness of 3 for example, may not look very nice on the screen display, but it looks
good on the printed page.
Also related to printing is the Symbol Weight option. Increasing weight allows Points to appear
bolder in the print.
3. 6. Datasets
71
Edit Menu Options
3.7. Axes
Description
Use this option to:
• Set the Min. and Max. values of the plot axes (plot specific, saved to file).
• Lock a particular axis scale setting to prevent it from changing (setting not saved).
• Invoke axis scale rounding (global setting, plot type specific).
• Change the axis labels (setting not saved).
• Change the axis/grid colors (global setting, plot type specific).
• Display or hide the grid, ticks, axis label and/or scales (global setting, plot type specific)
• Choose the spacing between the grid lines or axis ticks (global setting, plot type specific).
What users see
When this option is selected a sub-menu appears for the selection of the axis to be configured: the
X-axis (bottom), the Y-axis (left), the T-axis (across the top) or the R-axis (right).
When an axis is selected, a dialog box appears for configuration of the axis parameters. The
following illustration shows the dialog box that is displayed if the X-axis of the Data Edit plot is
selected.
Figure : 3.7.0 - 1 Edit Axis dialog
The number of divisions on a plot equals the number of ticks minus one. This automatically sets
the axis numbering between the specified Min and Max Values. The Ticks box is not enabled
for logarithmic scaling.
3. 7. Axes
The Ticks setting for the right-hand R-axis (if present) can be set independently of the left-hand
side Y-axis, provided Show Grid is not checked. If it is checked, the R-axis takes on the gridding
defined for the Y-axis.
72
Edit Menu Options
The Round option sets the Min. and Max. axis values so the ticks will be round numbers, taking
into account the range covered by the data.
Lock scales will hold the axis scaling at its current setting and prevent any automatic re-scaling.
The Logarithmic option is only enabled on plots with logarithmic axes. It is on by default, to
display a logarithmic grid.
Show date: If users have imported date information with the gauge data, they have the option to
plot the date on the time axis of the Data Edit Plot and Test Overview. Choose the
(DATE)hh:mm:ss time format (e.g. by suitable choice of end values and ticks, users can have
each axis division corresponding to 12 or 24 hours):
Figure : 3.7.0 - 2 Time axis showing date
3.8. View Co-ordinates

Description
Use this option to switch the co-ordinate display on and off. The co-ordinate display appears in
panels in the horizontal bar at the bottom of the plot. It is switched on by default when a file is
loaded.
When switched on, a 9 will appear against this option in the Edit menu. PanSystem then
displays the co-ordinate values of the mouse pointer as it is moved around the plot area. This is
very useful for determining the precise values at specific points on the plot.
Values for all configured axes are displayed.

3. 8. View Co-ordinates
Figure : 3.8.0 - 1 Data plot with View co-ordinates enabled
To switch the co-ordinate display off, select the Edit View Co-ordinates option again.
73
Edit Menu Options
3.9. Plot Rate Changes
Description:
Switch this option on to display the test rate schedule on the Data Edit and Test Overview plots
(it is on by default). The time and rate data are read from the Rate Changes table (see Gauge
Data in the Dataprep section) and are plotted in step form. Switch the option off to remove the
schedule from the plot(s).
Figure : 3.9.0 - 1 Data Edit Plot with Rate Change Data (blue) Displayed
Test Overview Plot:

By default, the Test Overview Plot displays the master pressure and rate channel plus the Rate
Changes, presented as a step profile, based on the Rate Changes table (the same as in the Data
Edit Plot).
3. 9. Plot Rate Changes
By extending the x-axis scale to the left, any rate changes that occurred before the pressure data
were recorded can also be displayed.
The status of the Rate Changes (on or off) is saved to file.
74
Edit Menu Options
3.10. Overlay Pressure...
Description:
Use this option to overlay another pressure record (e.g. pressure from another gauge run on the
same test) with the currently displayed pressure being analyzed. This overlay option is available
on all diagnostic plots (left-hand dialog displayed below) and the Test Overview Plot (right-hand
dialog displayed below).
The additional gauge pressures must be columns already present in the current master data file.
For an explanation of what this means, refer to the Dataprep section for guidance.
If additional gauge pressures are present, but are not listed when the Overlay Pressure option is
selected, this is because they are not part of the current master data file. See Section 6. 5. 12
“Copy, Re-sample a Column to Create a New Column”, on page 167, for instructions on how to
rectify this situation by copying the gauge data into the master file.
What users see:

The following dialog box appears. It will list any other pressure data column(s) present in the
master file. Select the pressure(s) to be overlaid and check the Show checkbox.
If users do not have any other pressure data in the current master data file selected for analysis,
no pressure column names are listed. If users expect a pressure column name to appear and it
does not, refer to the Dataprep section for guidance.
3. 10. Overlay Pressure...
The P0 for overlaid pressure

2
(i.e. the pressure at the start of the test period) is important for any
plot which has ∆p, ∆p or ∆m(p) on its y-axis (e.g. the Log-Log plot), because this obviously
affects the y-axis values. (The pressure value corresponding to T0 will be read automatically. If
there is not a value exactly at T0 it will take the next earlier data point if there is one.) Change the
value in the edit box if required. To re-set it to the default value, click on the pressure name in the
list box. It will be re-set to the default value each time the dialog is entered.
To remove the overlays, select the Edit Overlay Pressure menu option again to uncheck the
check mark from this menu item.
75
Edit Menu Options
3.11. Mark points
Description:
This option allows users to indicate events on a plot in the Dataprep and Analysis sections by
numbering selected data points. Text can be associated with each mark and displayed on the plot
(see Section 3. 12 “Marker Text”, on page 77 and see Section 3. 14 “Show Marker Text”, on page
77). Users can place up to 50 marks. The marks and text are carried through to all other plots, and
are saved with the .PAN data file.
The font used for the marker text is the same as the one selected for the legend (see Section 5. 6
“Fonts”, on page 121).
What to do:
On the plot, click the mouse cursor on the point or points to be marked. (To de-select a point,
click on it again. To de-select all points, press the {Esc} key. Then select Edit Mark Points.
What users see:

The Edit Marker Text dialog box will appear.
The points will be numbered in order of increasing time, and listed in the Marker Text List area.
(The time format is the same as the one last selected in Dataprep Gauge Data Edit.)
To append text to a number, click on it in the list area and type the text into the Marker Text area
(as shown above for mark #3). The text will then appear beside the point in the Text List (as
shown above for marks #1 and 2), and on the plot when users OK from the dialog box:
3. 11. Mark points
To remove a mark or marks, select the Edit Marker Text option, select a mark and click the
Delete button. Alternatively, click once on the point(s) on the plot (they will become highlighted)
and select the Delete Marker option on the Edit menu. The selected marks and text will
disappear, and any remaining markers will be re-numbered accordingly. The data points
themselves will not be deleted!
76
Edit Menu Options
3.12. Marker Text
Description:
This option allows users to edit existing text for markers that have already been placed, and
delete markers. It takes users straight to the Edit Marker Text dialog box described in the
previous section.
To place new markers and add text, use the Mark Points option.
3.13. Delete Marker

Description:
Use this option to delete one or several markers and any associated text. Click once on the point
or points whose marker(s) are to be cleared (they will become highlighted) and select the Delete
Marker option on the Edit menu. This is only suitable for low point densities where the marked
point can be identified more easily.
A less "hit-and-miss" method (i.e. when a large number of points is involved), is to select the
Marker Text option on the Edit menu, select a mark in the list and click the Delete button.
The selected marks and text will disappear, and any remaining markers will be re-numbered
accordingly. The data points themselves will not be deleted!
3.14. Show Marker Text

Description:
This option will show or hide the marker text on the plot. The marker numbers will still be
displayed. When switched off, the text is retained in the Edit Marker Text dialog, and can be
displayed again by switching the option on.
To modify marker text, use the Marker Text option on the Edit menu.
3.15. Plot Annotation

Description:
This feature supplements the Mark Points option described earlier in this section. However, the
annotation in this case is unique to the plot onto which it is inserted (e.g. plot annotation applied
to the Semi-Log plot will not appear on the Log-Log plot - use the Mark Points option for this).
What to do:
Press the Ctrl key and right-click the mouse button to activate a text box, then enter text as
required. Press the Esc key to exit the text box and return to the plot; the text will appear on the
3. 12. Marker Text
plot (i.e. without the box) and can be moved around by left-clicking and dragging. Other features
are summarized below:
• Re-enter the box to edit text by double left-clicking on the text.

• Delete the box and text by double left-clicking on the text, highlight text, then press Esc.
• Edit font size, color, etc., by right-clicking on the text (text box mode), or double right-
clicking on the text (plot mode), to generate a font editing dialog.
77
Report Menu Options
Chapter 4- Report Menu Options
This chapter contains information about the options available in the Report menu. The chapter
discusses each option and provides the background information required to understand reports
and use the Report menu options. (see “Reporting”, on page 629), in the Examples section for
detailed instructions on the use of this topic.
4.1. Overview
PanSystem has an extensive reporting facility, enabling users to create clear, comprehensive and
finished reports quickly and easily. There is an overview below, and a detailed description in the
following sections.
Users may also export or import a keyworded report file (including gauge data) using the
Pressure ASCII Standard (PAS) format specified by the Alberta Energy and Utilities Board
(EUB), using the EUB Report option described in Section 4. 5 “EUB Report”, on page 91.
4. 1. 1. PanSystem Reports
The PanSystem report pertains to the plots and results of the test period currently being analyzed.
If there are several test periods, make a report for each, separately.
The current report format settings are saved to the .PAN file by File Save or File Save As ..., and
can be recovered when the file is loaded.
Chapter 4 - Report Menu Options

Reports can contain the following sections:
• Report Cover Page - this can be used to give introductory information about the report, such
as: well field name, well name, test date, analyst's name, etc. and remarks.
• Input Data - Well and Reservoir Description parameters (i.e. fluid parameters, layer
parameters, layer boundary parameters, layer model data), gauge data, rate history, pseudo-
pressure and gas property tables, etc.
• Analysis Results - plots and results calculated from Analysis of the well data.
• Deliverability Results - results calculated using the Deliverability menu options.
Deliverability plots can also be included.
In PanSystem, users can create report templates, similar to the pre-defined report formats in
database programs. To print a report, all users need to do is to select the correct template and
print. PanSystem provides default system templates that can be used for printing reports and as a
basis for creating customized templates.
78
Report Menu Options
In a report template, the following items are defined:
• Sections the report will contain (i.e. input data, analysis results, deliverability results).
• Fields within each section.
• Page layout settings (e.g. header, logo, footer, etc.).
4. 1. 2. EUB Report
This option is available for the export of welltest data and reports in the Pressure ASCII Standard
(PAS) format defined by the Alberta Energy and Utilities Board (EUB) of Canada in their Draft
Guide 52 "Electronic Capture of Well Test Data" dated June 1998, revised Jan 1999. Submission
of test data in PAS format became mandatory on 1-March-1999. Updates to Guide 52 are posted
on the EUB web-site, http://www.eub.gov.ab.ca.
Users should check Section 16 of Guide 52 (January 1999 and any subsequent updates) and
ensure that they have met the EUB system and security requirements before submitting PAS files
to the EUB for certification.
The export and import of PAS format data are described in Section 4. 5 “EUB Report”, on page
91.
4.2. Printing a Report

4. 2. 1. Print Report option
Description:
Use the Print Report sub-menu option from the Report Output menu to print a report as defined
in the current report configuration (i.e. the last template used to print from, or the last one that
was customized, as explained later).
If users are unsure what the current report configuration is, select the Configure Report option
to check (see Section 4. 3 “Configure Report”, on page 81). Then use it or change it as required.
The Print Report option generates the following dialog box:
4. 1. 2. EUB Report
The ... to Selected Printer option will send the report and graphics to the user’s current printer.
(See Section 2. 9 “Print”, on page 61, Section 2. 7 “Graphics Export”, on page 58, and Worked
Example 4 in the Examples section of this manual, for instructions on setting-up a printer, and
saving the report to a graphics file).
79
Report Menu Options
The ...to Text File option will list the textual content of the report in ASCII format to a file with
extension .RPT, in the reports sub-directory. This is a useful way of exporting data from
PanSystem for transfer to other applications, since it is organized in an easily readable format
and the data items are clearly identified. Tables such as pressure vs m(p) can be copied to a
spreadsheet editor, while selected input or output parameters could be extracted by writing a
suitable utility to locate and read them.
4. 2. 2. Export to Word Document
Select the Export to Word Document sub-menu option from the Report Report Output menu to
save the report to an MS Word .DOC file with graphics embedded.
Note: If users do not have MS Word, this facility cannot be used. It is not possible to specify an
alternative program.
This is a standard Windows Save As dialog, described as follows:
• Save In: Select a suitable folder using the drop-down menu system to browse for a folder, or
accept the default setting (i.e. PanSystem/Reports)
• File Name: Enter a suitable report filename in this data entry field with the extension .DOC.
• Save As Type: Accept the default document file setting .DOC.
After naming the document and saving it to the required folder with the Save button, users are
supplied with a prompt to view the document. After selecting Yes to the prompt, MS Word is
opened and the Report contents can be viewed, edited, printed, saved and re-formatted (i.e. plot
re-sizing, page number insertion, application of headers/footers, etc.).
This option writes the same items to file as are normally printed directly via the alternative Print
Report menu option (See Section 4. 2. 1 “Print Report option”, on page 79). To ensure that the
generated Word report will have the required content check the settings in Configure Report
(See Section 4. 3 “Configure Report”, on page 81).
4. 2. 3. Print from a Listed Template

A list of all the available report templates is displayed as part of the Report menu. (They appear
in alphabetical order with Windows 2000 and NT, but not with Windows 95 or 98.) The quickest
way to print a report is to select one of the templates.
4. 2. 2. Export to Word Document
This assumes users know what each of the templates will produce (see below). EPS supply seven
generic templates, and users may add their own customized templates to the list.
The Print Report dialog box (described earlier in Section 4.2), will be generated.
Generic Template List

The supplied report templates listed in the menu are:
80
Report Menu Options
-ANALYSIS: reports the data relevant to the analysis of a particular test period (plot or plots,
results, time functions, etc.) for all selected plots analyzed so far.
- br: customer template, supplied as part of the installation.
- COMPLETE: reports full input, analysis and deliverability (if any) results (= INPUT +
ANALYSIS + DELIVER).
- DELIVER: reports the results of deliverability analysis.
- INPUT: reports the Data Edit plot and the complete set of input data for the well and layer.
- QUICK: reports a reduced set of input, analysis and deliverability (if any) results (=
QUICKINP + QUICKANL + DELIVER).
- QUICKANL: reports a reduced set of data relevant to the analysis of a particular test period,
for all plots analyzed so far.
- QUICKINP: reports a reduced set of input data for the well and layer.
Note: As an example of the use of customized templates, users might create a custom template,
m(p), for listing out the pseudo-pressure table, which would subsequently appear in this drop-
down list.
4.3. Configure Report

Description:
Use this option to customize a report based on one of the existing templates. When the new
report format has been set-up, it can be saved as a template for future use. Users can also print the
report from within this option.
To customize a template and print with it:
• Load the template.
• Modify as required (optional).
• Save the new template (optional).
• Format and print the report.
What users see:
When this option is selected, the following dialog box appears:
4. 3. Configure Report
81
Report Menu Options
To start from an existing template, use the Load Template button. After making changes, users
can save the new template with the Save Template button. If users Format the new
configuration, the number of pages in each section will be displayed in the bottom panel. Users
may also Print the report from here (the Print command will format automatically if formatting
has not been applied already).
4. 3. 1. Loading a Report Template
To load an existing report template, select the Load Template button in the Configure Report
dialog box. A File Open type dialog box will appear - select the template file in the usual way.
This template can now be used to print reports using the Print option, or it can be customized as
explained in the next section.
4. 3. 2. Customizing a Report Template

What to do
1.Load the template to be modified, as explained in the previous section.

2.Customize the template. Specify the sections to be included (Input Data, Analysis
Results, Deliverability Results) by checking the appropriate checkboxes.
4. 3. 1. Loading a Report Template
3.Select the corresponding Edit buttons in turn to choose the fields that are to be included in
each section. A specific dialog box is generated for each section and users can check the
fields they wish to include.
82
Report Menu Options
Input Data:
This is the dialog box that is generated when users edit Input Data:
A few of the items listed here require further explanation:
Numerical Input:
A Numerical Simulation (PanMesh) must have been performed or an existing Numerical
Simulation file opened, before this area becomes active. To include input data from the Well and
Reservoir Description (Numerical) section of PanSystem in the report, check the checkbox.
Select the Edit Numerical... button to generate the Numerical Reporting Options sub-dialog and
edit the numerical input data topics to be included or excluded from the report, by checking the
relevant checkboxes. The dialog box is illustrated below:
83
Report Menu Options
Include Master TPR Data:
This will include a listing of selected columns from the gauge data file versus clock time. Select
the Master TPR... button, to generate the following dialog box:
Select the well (if several) and the gauge data file name (if there are several for this well). Users
would normally leave the default well and "master" file name selected here, since this is the data
set used in analysis.
Now click once on each of the data channels to be listed. They will become highlighted. Click
again to de-select. Time is always listed in the report.
Include Rate Change Data: a summary of the rate changes (as entered in the Rate Change table
in Dataprep) will be included.
Include Quick Match Data: this will list the most recent set of simulated pressure data
(generated by Quick Match) versus time. To obtain a listing for an entire test sequence rather
than a test period, perform Quick Match on the Test Overview plot, then print the report.

Include Data Edit Plot:
The plot area is only enabled if users have the Data Edit plot on the screen (in Dataprep Gauge
Data). A commented description box can be included beneath the plot in conjunction with
annotated point markers (See Section 3. 12 “Marker Text”, on page 77).
84
Report Menu Options
Analysis Results:
This is the dialog box generated when users edit Analysis Results:
The panel at the top of the dialog box displays all the plots that users have analyzed to this point
for a particular test period in the current session.
Only the plots that have been tagged as "Selected" will be included in the report. To select or de-
select a plot, highlight the plot in the list box and then either check the Selected or Not Selected
button as appropriate. Each plot is individually configurable, so it can be allocated custom
settings in the Topics to Include area. Some of the items from this section also need a few words
of explanation:
Include Transformed Data: this will include a listing of the x- and y-axis values of the plotted
gauge data (e.g. time and pressure, superposition function versus rate normalised pseudo-
pressure, etc., depending on the plot. The derivative is also listed for a Log-Log plot.)
Include Simulated Data: this will include a listing of the x- and y-axis values of the plotted
simulated data (if any) generated by Quick Match.

Include Time Marks: a few diagnostic plots use time markers to estimate a reservoir parameter
(e.g. time-to-end-of-bilinear-flow on the fourth-root time plot).
Include Auto-Match Statistics: this option is only enabled if users have performed an Auto
Match on the selected plot and have also displayed the Confidence Intervals screen by selecting
the Confidence... button at the end of the regression. If switched on, the report will include the
table of confidence intervals for each parameter, and the correlation parameters.
85
Report Menu Options
Deliverability Results:
This is the dialog box generated when users edit Deliverability Results:
A commented description box may be included beneath the plot (See Section 3. 5 “Description”,
on page 70).
4.Return to the Configure Report dialog box, then select the Edit Layout... button to fix the
page layout settings. The following dialog box is generated:
Cover Page area: The contents of the cover page and remarks can also be edited via the Report 4. 3. 2. Customizing a Report Template
Cover Page option on the main Report menu (See Section 4. 4 “Report Cover Page”, on page
87).
Report Header area: Modify the text if required (max 3 lines). If users check Include Header,
it will appear across the top of every page. The modified header can be saved to the template for
use with other files in the future - just load the template next time. The header is saved to the
PAN file, and will appear next time users load that file, regardless of current program settings. To
modify it, either edit it or load the appropriate report template.
If users check the Show Logo checkbox, the EPS logo will appear on the left in the header.
The EPS logo is stored in black and white form as LOGO.BMP in the \REPORTS sub-directory
(created under the PanSystem run directory during installation), and will be loaded
automatically. A colored version is supplied as EPSCOL.BMP - this should be renamed
LOGO.BMP if users want PanSystem to pick this up instead.
86
Report Menu Options
Company logo: Users can also insert their own company logo on the right-hand side of the
header. Copy the logo as a Windows bit-map file called CLIENT.BMP into the \REPORTS sub-
directory and check the Show Logo checkbox. To display a company logo, but not the EPS
one, users can either:
• call it LOGO.BMP instead of CLIENT.BMP, to replace the EPS logo on the left
• delete the EPS logo file LOGO.BMP, but keep the company logo file as CLIENT.BMP to
display it on the right.
The aspect ratio of a logo will be respected provided it does not exceed 2:1, otherwise it
will be re-scaled to fit. Users should ensure that they do not have an empty border area
around the logo, as this will be included, making the actual logo smaller. Remember that
complex colored logos will use up printer memory and may prevent hard copy from being
output correctly, particularly from LaserJet printers.
Report Footer area: Check the footer components to be included in the report, and edit the text
if required. Switch all of them off to hide the footer. Footer text is saved to the .PAN file.
5.OK out of this dialog box, then Save Template to save the newly defined template to the
\REPORTS sub-directory.
4. 3. 3. Saving a Report Template

The Save Template button on the Configure Report screen will bring up a File Save as... type
of dialog box. Type in a file name and save the new template to the \REPORTS sub-directory.
4.4. Report Cover Page

Description
This option is used to enter the well and test details that are required on the first page of the
report, plus any additional remarks that users may wish to add.
• Cover page: Normally this would be used for introductory information about the report, such
as field name, well name, test date, gauge number, etc. To print this as part of the report,
check the Include Cover Page checkbox in the Edit Report Layout dialog box (refer to
previous section).
• Remarks page: This option can also be used to enter a summary or remarks section which
will also be printed at the beginning of the report, just after the cover page notes. Check the
4. 3. 3. Saving a Report Template

Include Remarks checkbox in the Edit Report Layout dialog box (see previous section).
What users see:
87
Report Menu Options
The right-hand side is for information pertaining to the test being analyzed. Users can type in up
to about 60 characters per line for a 10-pitch font like Arial (see Configure Fonts - Report Font).
This information is saved with the test data and results to the PAN file.
The 16 subject entries in the left-hand side of the cover page can also be edited here if desired.
The changes can be saved with the PAN file, and will be invoked any time that this file is
4. 4. 1. Customizing the Cover Page for EUB PAS file export

recalled.
The original default settings will appear for any new file that has been set-up. Users may change
the default settings permanently for new files by editing the Pansys30.ini Folder contained in the
Windows Registry. Open the Windows Registry Editor (i.e. via Start/Run/Regedit commands in
Windows), then select HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/EPS/Pansys30.ini/Description. The
editing process is described below under Customizing the Cover Page for EUB (TRG PAS) File
Export. When a PAN file is subsequently recalled, these new settings will take precedence over
the defaults.
To enter further remarks, select the Edit Remarks button. A new dialog box is generated for
users to enter the information. If fewer than 45 lines are entered below the word Remarks, users
will get the cover page panel and remarks panel on a single printed page. Otherwise, the remarks
will be continued on a new page.

These comments are intended for use with the EUB Report PAS Export option from the Report
menu, described in Section 4. 5 “EUB Report”, on page 91.
If users would like to be able to transfer some or all of the information on the report cover page
to the PAS file, they simply need to enter the appropriate data mnemonic, enclosed in square
brackets, anywhere on the left-hand side of the cover page. The Transfer Values from
PanSystem to Report button will check for the presence of a mnemonic and transfer the data
entered on the right-hand side of the cover page to the appropriate field in the PAS file.
To modify the left-hand side permanently for all new PAN files , block copy the following text
and paste it over the existing entry within the Description sub-folder of the Pansys30.ini Folder
within the Registry (as described in the previous section).
88
Report Menu Options
(Within the Directory sub-folder of HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/EPS/Pansys30.ini)
prompt1=Analyst name
prompt2=Company [COMP]
prompt3=Well ID [UWI]
prompt4=License Number [WLIC]
prompt5=Formation [FORM]
prompt6=Test Start Date/Time [STRT]
prompt7=Test Type [TTNC]
prompt8=Depth Reference - MSL
prompt9=Gauge Type [GTYP]
prompt10=Gauge Number [GSER]
prompt11=Gauge Depth (Measured)
prompt12=Gauge Depth (TVD) [SDGA]
prompt13=Formation Top (log) [TTOPL]
prompt14=Formation Bottom (log) [TBASL]
prompt15=Perforated interval top (log)
prompt16=Perforated interval bottom (log)
Other mnemonics that can be substituted are:
Formation Top (TVD) [TTOPT]
Formation Bottom (TVD) [TBAST]
These could replace TTOPL and TBASL, for example, or be used at prompt15 and prompt16

instead of the perforated intervals.
The 13 mnemonics cited above are currently the only ones that can be transferred from the cover
page.
Users may also modify the text in any of the above lines, or re-arrange their order. The mnemonic
can also be placed anywhere in the line - it does not have to be at the end - but it MUST be
enclosed in square brackets [ … ] to be recognised during Transfer.
Changes applied in the Registry are only effective for new files. To modify the cover page in an
existing PAN file, re-type the left-hand side of the cover page and save the file. Alternatively,
block copy the following 31 lines (including line-breaks), from Analyst name down to
Perforated interval bottom (log) and open the PAN file in a text editor. The section pertaining to
the cover page is near the top of the file. Block-select the 31 lines starting at Analyst name and
ending at Perforated interval bottom, and paste the new text over this section, being careful not
to introduce any extra line-breaks. If users already have text in the line-breaks, they should copy/
paste the 16 text lines individually to avoid obliterating their data.
89
Report Menu Options
Analyst name
Company [COMP]
Well ID [UWI]
License Number [WLIC]
Formation [FORM]
Test Start Date/Time [STRT]
Test Type [TTNC]
Depth Reference - MSL
Gauge Type [GTYP]
Gauge Number [GSER]
Gauge Depth (Measured)
Gauge Depth (TVD) [SDGA]
Formation Top (log) [TTOPL]
Formation Bottom (log) [TBASL]
Perforated interval top (log)
Perforated interval bottom (log)
90
Report Menu Options
4.5. EUB Report
Figure : 4.5.0 - 1 EUB Report Sub Menu
Two reports are offered under this menu option:
• TRG.PAS - (Transient Gauge Test): used to report transient welltests (build-ups, fall-offs,
etc.). This facility allows the import of gauge, well and reservoir data from a PAS file into
PanSystem for analysis and the export of data and results for submission to the EUB. A
suggested procedure is provided in “Hints on Preparing Data in PanSystem for the TRG.PAS
Export Facility”, on page 103.
• AOF.PAS - (Absolute Open Flow test): This summarises the results of a deliverability
analysis. An AOF submission should generally be accompanied by a PRD Production Test
Data file (not available in PanSystem) and a pressure test. A suggested procedure is provided
in “Hints on Preparing Data in PanSystem for the AOF.PAS Export Facility”, on page 110.
The PAS files contain input and analysis data and, in the case of the TRG.PAS, the gauge time,
pressure and temperature data used in the analysis, plus data from up to 4 other gauges.
All relevant data present in PanSystem can be transferred automatically into the PAS file.
Additional data must be typed in. PanSystem can also import welltest and supporting data from a
TRG.PAS file supplied from another source.
Data formats are checked for correctness by PanSystem when the PAS file is saved to disk, and
users will be warned if any mandatory items are missing. Provided all mandatory items have
been entered, and all numerical data meets the required consistency checks run by the EUB, the
PAS file will be certified upon submission. Apart from checking the format, PanSystem does not
validate any of the data entered by the user.
4. 5. 1. TRG.PAS Reporting
Select the supplied CANSI (PAS EXPORT) units system before proceeding. This is the same as
the CANSI Canadian SI units system, but has wellbore radius (HLID) in mm, gas viscosity
(UGAS) in mPa.s and fluid densities (RDOIL, RDGAS and RDWTR) in grm/cm3. All the
other units in the CANSI system are compatible with PAS units.
Selecting the TRG.PAS menu option opens up the set of tabbed dialog boxes for Transient
Gauge Test Digital Data reporting.
4. 5. EUB Report
91
Report Menu Options
The Version Tab
Users will enter at the Version tab:
Figure : 4.5.1 - 1 TRG report - Version Tab
This first tab provides the basic control for the report. The latest PAS format identification
appears at the top:
Figure : 4.5.1 - 2 Format Identification Information
On opening this dialog, PanSystem has automatically picked up a template (TRG.EUB) stored in
the \Reports directory, containing the textual part of the PAS file, with the data fields blank. It is
based on the most recent documentation supplied by the EUB, and EPS will endeavour to keep
the supplied template up to date. Some minor changes - change of number or character format,
change of mandatory/optional status, etc. - can be accommodated by simply editing the template
with a text editor.
The tabbed pages of the PAS export facility have been arranged in the order they appear in the
PAS file.
There are two ways to set up the data for a PAS file, depending mainly on how users are going to
import their gauge data:
• Import gauge data (TPR) into PanSystem and enter well and reservoir parameters, etc. via the
Dataprep menus, perhaps perform an analysis, then transfer this data into the PAS report.
Type in any missing data in the PAS editor under the relevant tab. This is described in
“Transfer Values from PanSystem to Report”, on page 93.
• Open an existing PAS report file (e.g. a file containing gauge data submitted by a service
company, or a partially-completed file worked on previously), then type in any missing data
under the relevant tab. (Optionally, transfer parameters from PanSystem if any have been
entered there, to fill in any gaps.) This is described in “Open existing PAS file”, on page 94.
92
Report Menu Options
Transfer Values from PanSystem to Report
If users have opened a PAN file, or set up data in the DataPrep section, the Transfer Values from
PanSystem to Report button allows users to populate part of the PAS file automatically. If users
have already loaded their gauge data using the Dataprep Gauge Data Import facilities in
PanSystem, EPS recommend that users complete their operations in the Gauge 1 tab in the PAS
Report dialog before using the Transfer Values from PanSystem to Report button for the first
time (see Section “The Gauge 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Tabs”, on page 100).
The following data can be transferred from PanSystem:
• Well, reservoir and fluid properties
• Gauge data (date, time, pressure, temperature, marker text)
• Analysis results
• Cover page information. If users customarily enter information in the standard PanSystem
report cover page, they will be able to transfer up to 13 PAS mnemonics related to well,
gauge and formation into the PAS file. (This will require some minor changes to the cover
page format.) Once set up, this will reduce the amount of duplicated typing required to fill in
future PAS files. This is described in Section 4. 4. 1 “Customizing the Cover Page for EUB
PAS file export”, on page 88.
Items in red are mandatory, black are optional, blue are mandatory or optional depending on the
situation. The PAS file will be rejected by the EUB certification process if any mandatory items
are missing, so mandatory items not available in PanSystem must be typed in. PanSystem checks
number formats and for the absence of any mandatory items when the PAS file is saved.
However, it does not check for the numerical consistency of the data entered.
Users may repeat the Transfer action any number of times. If there is a number already present in
a field in the PAS editor and the PanSystem value being transferred is different, users will be
warned and given the choice of overwriting or not.
Should the data be incomplete, PanSystem will warn users of any deficiencies in the transferred
data.
Figure : 4.5.1 - 3 Incomplete Data Warning
When the data has been transferred the following message is displayed:
Figure : 4.5.1 - 4 Transfer Completed
93
Report Menu Options
Transfer Values from Report to PanSystem
Once a TRG.PAS format file has been opened in the EUB Report section, the Transfer Values
from Report to PanSystem button allows users to transfer any welltest and supporting data into
PanSystem itself. Once transferred, the data can be edited, analyzed, etc., in PanSystem like any
other welltest data, and transferred back into the PAS file if desired.
Incoming data will overwrite any existing PanSystem data without warning. (Null entries in the
PAS file will appear as zeroes in PanSystem.) For example, if the PAS file does not have an entry
for layer thickness and users type a value in the Layer Parameters section of Dataprep, it will be
overwritten by zero when the Transfer Values from Report to PanSystem button is selected.
Therefore, users should always open and transfer the PAS file data first, before typing any
additional data within PanSystem.
Save PAS file
The Save PAS file button opens a standard Windows Save As dialog box , allowing users to
record a new name for the report, or select an existing file name. The PAS file is written to disk
in the \Reports directory by default.
PanSystem checks the report prior to a save, and if there are entries missing from the mandatory
data fields, users are informed with the following message:
Figure : 4.5.1 - 5 File Not Yet Complete
Users may save, then continue editing, re-save, and so on. When the file is saved:
• Data formats are checked for consistency with EUB certification requirements (e.g. if users
have entered two characters in a [CHAR 1] format field, only the first character will be
written to file. If users have entered 1273 for a depth which should have a [NUM 5.5] format,
it will be written as 1273.00000. If users enter 65.352 in a [NUM 3.2] field, it will be rounded
to 65.35).
• All lower case alpha characters are converted to upper case.
• Alpha characters entered in numeric fields are ignored.
To see these changes, simply read the file in again (with the Open Existing PAS file button), or
check it in a text editor or spreadsheet.
Open existing PAS file

The Open Existing PAS file button allows users to open a PAS file from a standard Windows
File Open dialog, which points to the default \Reports directory.
Users may load a PAS file they were working on previously, or one which has been provided
from another source, via Open Existing PAS file, and continue editing it. This option should be
used if the gauge data has been supplied in PAS format from a service company.
As both the TRG and AOF PAS reports use the same file extension, the Open command checks
to see if the selected report is in the correct format. If the format is not correct then an error
message is displayed.
94
Report Menu Options
Additional blank or comment lines are permissible anywhere in a PAS file provided they
commence with a # sign. The first valid line in the file must be the ~VERSION,TYPE ……line.
Find mnemonic
The Find button and its associated Find Mnemonic field allows users to search through all the
TRG reporting tabs in the dialog to locate a report entry. This is particularly useful if users have
a few records to add to a file.
Figure : 4.5.1 - 6 Find mnemonic area of dialog box
To find a data entry field, enter the full name of the mnemonic or just part of it, and select the
Find button.
Note: For mnemonics which feature in several tabs in the report (e.g. GSER), or for partial
searches, only the first instance of the target mnemonic will be located.
Close
The Close button exits the EUB Report section. Users will be prompted to save a PAS file if they
have not already done so. All current PAS data will then be cleared from the EUB report section.
The TRG Report Tabs

Each of the other tabs in the dialog box refers to a category of test data. In each of these tabs,
PanSystem identifies the mnemonic and descriptions in three key colours:
Red- Mandatory items.
Blue - Optional or Mandatory items (depending on the situation).
Black - Optional items.
The PAS file will be rejected by the EUB certification process if any mandatory items are
missing. PanSystem checks number formats and also checks for the absence of any mandatory
items when users save the PAS file. It does not check for the numerical consistency of the data
entered.
95
Report Menu Options
The Well Information Tab
Figure : 4.5.1 - 7 Well Information tab
UWI (unique well identifier):

This must already exist on the EUB system. As per EUB Guide 19, the format for UWI in
Alberta is 1XX/99-99-999-99W9/9 (for example: 100/03-12-067-08W6/0).
WLIC (well license number):
WLIC must match the license number for this UWI on the EUB system. The format for license
numbers is X 9999999 X. The alpha characters are only used if reporting a test on an old well
with this type of license number. However, using the full license number as above will not cause
a file to be rejected. An example of a valid number is 193685.
FORM (formation name):
The name may differ from the EUB pool definitions, and will not be checked against them. The
layer name can be transferred from the entry in PanSystem Layer Parameters, or from the Report
Cover Page.
WSFL (well fluid status at test date):
01 Crude oil 07 Brine 11 Air
02 Gas 08 Waste 13 Carbon dioxide

05 Undesignated 09 Solvent 15 Nitrogen
06 Water 10 Steam 16 Liquid petroleum gas
For a well that has not produced yet, use the WSFL code for the dominant fluid expected to be
recovered (most likely crude oil (01) or gas (02)). This code is required for use in EUB programs,
but will only be checked to ensure it is a valid code, not edited against actual fluid production.
WSMO (well mode status at test date):
00 Not applicable 11 Pumping
10 Flowing 12 Gas Lift
"00" is an acceptable code for cases where a well would not have a mode (i.e. some water
injectors).
96
Report Menu Options
WSTY (well type status at test date):
00 Not applicable 05 Observation 10 Cyclical
02 Storage 06 Training 11 Source
03 Injection 08 Farm 12 SW steam assisted gravity drain
04 Disposal 09 Industrial
"00" is an acceptable code for cases that do not have a specific code listed. Many producing wells
will use this code.
WTYP (well type indicator):
V Vertical wellbore
D Deviated wellbore
H Horizontal wellbore
If WTYP=H, HZFL (horizontal well length in formation) must be non-zero in the ANALYSIS
SECTION.
OHCI (open hole completion indicator):
Y - yes (open hole completion). See HLID, CSLD and LINR.
N - no (cased hole completion)
HLID (hole diameter), CSLD (depth at which casing is landed) and LINR (casing liner indicator)
are mandatory if OHCI (open hole completion indicator) = “Y”. They are optional otherwise.
Note: that HLID is in mms.
LINR (casing liner indicator):
Y - yes
N - no
The Test Data Tab
Figure : 4.5.1 - 8 Test Data tab
PRPS (test purpose - EUB required survey?):

Y - yes. If PRPS is Y and TTYP is 04 or 06, then analysis is required.
N - no
97
Report Menu Options
As specified in Guide 40, users must submit all tests conducted, even if the test was conducted
for personal use. Tests that are not intended to fulfil any requirements, if marked as PRPS = “N”,
will be accepted for information purposes only and will not be edited. (They will just be checked
to ensure the license number matches the unique well identifier (UWI), that the test date is valid,
and that all information is readable and all mandatory elements contain valid data.)
The EUB Guide 52 recommends that, if such tests meet all the certification criteria, they be
flagged as required tests (PRPS=”Y”) anyway, since they will then be recognised by the EUB
should the need arise in the future.
TTYP (test type code):

04 - bottom hole buildup. If PRPS is Y and TTYP is 04, then analysis is required.
05 - bottom hole undefined (segregation, interference, etc.)
06 - bottom hole fall-off. If PRPS is Y and TTYP is 06, then analysis is required.
08 - pressure sentry (permanent downhole gauge)
SERCO (service company code): Refer to Guide 52 Appendix D - Codes For Service
Companies And Laboratories.
TTOPL: (test interval top at log depth) must be > 0.0.
TBASL: (test interval base at log depth) must be > 0.0 and > TTOPL.
TTOPT: (test interval top at TVD (KB)) must be > 0.0.
TBAST: (test interval base at TVD (KB)) must be > 0.0 and > TTOPT.
TISI (time well shut in):

Mandatory for all tests because the data is used by EUB systems to calculate the duration of shut-
in and determine if a pressure is stable. The “HHHH” part of the time format is actually HHMM
(without separator). For wells that have been shut-in for a long period of time, report the date the
well was suspended. (Use 1200 noon where the time is not available on suspended wells.) For an
initial test on a well that has not produced, although there is no actual shut-in time, use the date
and time the last treatment or disturbance occurred.
FTDT (final test date):

Must be >spud date and < = current date or abandoned date.
98
Report Menu Options
The Results Summary Tab
Figure : 4.5.1 - 9 Results Summary tab
The PAS file for a transient pressure test must either include analysis, or the raw data must reflect
a stabilised reservoir pressure. Files not passing these edits will be rejected, with a message
indicating that analysis is required.
SDGA (gauge stop depth): TVD below KB.
GRSD (representative pressure gradient): Average pressure gradient (kPa/m) between gauge
stop depth (PRGA) and mid-perforation depth (MPP).
PRGA (pressure at stop depth): last, or representative, pressure measured at gauge stop depth
SDGA. This is required by the EUB as a stabilised reservoir pressure estimate and is mandatory.
Note: This is a critical edit and must correspond exactly to one of the pressures in the
Gauge 1 (source gauge) data table section of the PAS file. If the EUB program cannot
match the exact value reported in RESULTS SUMMARY [PRGA] to a pressure point in
the Gauge 1 data table, the file will be rejected.
The difference in pressure over the 6 hours prior to this value must be equal to or less than 12 kPa
(2 kPa per hour as defined in section 5.1 of Guide 40). If a pressure reading cannot be found at 6
hours prior to PRGA, the edit will look for the next previous reading and determine if the 2 kPa/
hr limit has been met. 4. 5. 1. TRG.PAS Reporting
The pressure in the last entry in the Dataprep Rate Changes Table will be transferred to PRGA.
This is supposed to be the best final shut-in pressure estimate. While preparing the gauge data in
Dataprep it is therefore important to mark the end of the test at the last good quality pressure
reading. It is assumed to be the last value in the Rate Changes Table. Users can overtype the
transferred data in the PAS editor, but ensure that the new value corresponds to a measured
pressure.
PMPP (representative bottom hole pressure): last measured, calculated, or most representative
pressure (PRGA), corrected to mid-perforation depth (MPP) using gradient GRSD.
TRES (reservoir temperature): can be transferred from the PanSystem Layer Temperature.
99
Report Menu Options
The Gauge 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 Tabs
Figure : 4.5.1 - 10 Gauge 1 tab
Gauge 1 should be the “most representative” gauge, and is assumed to be the one used for the
analysis, and test summaries, if several were run. The analysis results will be written out to the
ANALYSIS - INTERPRETATION (1) section of the PAS file when users Transfer Values from
PanSystem to Report.
Users may include supplementary gauges 2 to 5 in the file if desired, but since PanSystem only
holds one analysis at any given time, any associated results cannot be included. The gauge
numbers represented in GAUGE (n) are not intended to indicate the sequence of gauges in the
run.
The following instructions apply to any of the gauges. To make the most of the gauge data
transfer facilities, please read “Analysis tab”, on page 102 before proceeding.
Transferring Gauge Data from PanSystem to the PAS Report
If the gauge data already exists in PAS format, refer to the next section - Opening and Editing
an Existing PAS file.
If users have imported the data into PanSystem using Dataprep, proceed as follows:
• Switch on the Include Gauge tick box. 4. 5. 1. TRG.PAS Reporting

• Select a pressure and temperature channel.
• As soon as a pressure channel is selected, the time of the first data point in the gauge record
will appear in the GSTD (gauge start date/time) field, in HHMM:SS format. If the date was
also imported, it will appear here.
• If dates were not imported, the date will appear as "0000 00 00", in which case users should
type the correct date for the first data point in the YYYY MM DD part of the GSTD field.
• Type the appropriate dates/times into the GONB (gauge on bottom) and GOFB (gauge off
bottom) fields. These are mandatory. The “HHHH” part of the time format is actually
HHMM (without separator).
• Type the mandatory gauge depth into the SDGA (gauge stop depth - TVD below KB) field.
Alternatively, this data can be transferred from the PanSystem Report Cover Page if it has
been set-up for data transfer. SDGA also appears in the RESULT SUMMARY page.
100
Report Menu Options
• There is no need to type anything into GSPD (gauge stop date/time) - this will be updated on
Transfer if it has been marked as the last entry in the Rate Changes Table.
This is the minimum preparation required in order to transfer available gauge-related data from
PanSystem to PAS. When users next select the Transfer Values from PanSystem to Report
button on the Version screen, PanSystem will:
- transfer the pressure and temperature data into the PAS gauge data table (or tables if users
have nominated more than one gauge)
- assign dates to the rest of the gauge times, starting from the GSTD entry
- update GSPD (gauge stop date/time) from the very last data point
- transfer GTYP (gauge type), GSER (gauge serial number) and/or SDGA (gauge depth)
from the Report Cover Page if users have set this up for data transfer
- enter the gauge depth in the SDGA (gauge stop depth) column between the times
corresponding to GONB and GOFB
- transfer any marker text into the GCOM (events comment) column.
The gauge data table cannot be viewed itself in the PAS editor. To inspect the table, users should
save the PAS file and read it with an external text editor.
Opening and Editing an Existing PAS File
If the gauge data already exists in PAS format, users can bring it directly into the PAS Report
section. Any other data in the PAS file will also be imported.
After selecting the Open Existing PAS file button, if a gauge table was already present in the
PAS file, when users go to the Gauge 1 page they will see the Include Gauge checkbox is
checked on, but the pressure and temperature channel selections will say "Not used". In this
status, the gauge selections are not linked to any particular data sets.
• If users do not have a PAN file loaded, they can leave this setting at "Not used", edit the PAS
file, and save it without disturbing the associated gauge data table.
• If users do have a PAN file loaded, they can:
- leave the setting at "Not used", edit the PAS file, and save it without disturbing the
associated gauge data table, or:
- re-select the gauge channels by name. From this point onwards, when the Transfer Values
from PanSystem to Report button is selected, the data table in the PAS file will be
updated, because users have established a link into the PAN file.
101
Report Menu Options
The Analysis Tab
Figure : 4.5.1 - 11 Analysis tab
Gauge 1 is assumed to be the one used for the analysis. The results will be written out to the
ANALYSIS - INTERPRETATION (1) section of the PAS file.
Users may include data from supplementary gauges 2 to 5 in the file if desired, but since
PanSystem only holds one analysis at any given time, users cannot include any associated results
in the PAS file, unless they edit it externally.
All the ANALYSIS parameters are optional, with the exception of HZFL and PAVG or PEXTR,
which are mandatory under certain conditions.
• HZFL (horizontal well length in formation) must be non-zero if WTYP = H (horizontal) in

WELL INFORMATION. It can be blank or zero for the other WTYP settings.
• Analysis is mandatory for PAS-TRG only if TTYP (test type) = 04, 05, 06, 08 and PRPS (test
purpose) = Y in the TEST DATA section. In this case, the minimum “Analysis” simply
means that either:
PAVG (average reservoir pressure at mid-perf depth) must be > 0.0
or
PEXTR (extrapolated/false pressure (p*) at mid-perf depth) must be > 0.0.
Note: that these pressures are specified at mid-perf depth, not at gauge depth. 4. 5. 1. TRG.PAS Reporting
The current layer pressure in the PanSystem Layer Parameters will be transferred to the PAVG
field on Transfer Values from PanSystem to Report. There is no direct transfer of PEXTR from
PanSystem - use the PAVG value (and delete PAVG) if this is more appropriate.
The EUB Guide 52 considers PAVG to be the more reliable estimate of actual reservoir pressure
and recommends that it be used wherever possible. PEXTR can be used for initial pressure tests,
and tests where the difference between the last measured/calculated pressure and the
extrapolated pressure is very small.
Note: if the last measured/calculated pressure is below minimum operating pressure (MOP),
PEXTR is not acceptable to indicate that the reservoir pressure is above MOP. Users may be
asked to shut-in their well until a test clearly indicates a measured pressure above MOP.)
102
Report Menu Options
For very prolific wells, where there is not 6 hours of build-up time, but the pressure has
stabilized, report stabilized pressure as PAVG to pass edit; otherwise the file will be rejected if
analysis is not included. Use a comment line (starting with #) to explain.
Non-Critical Edit
If analysis results are present, the following check is used to identify cases where reservoir
pressure estimates differ markedly from the last measured pressure PRGA in the RESULTS
SUMMARY section. If this condition is not met, the PAS file will not be rejected, but users may
be asked to validate their analysis.
PAVG (average reservoir pressure):

If PAVG >0, then (PAVG - PRGA) must be less than or equal to 0.3(PRGA)
PEXTR (extrapolated reservoir pressure):

If PAVG is absent, and if PEXTR >0, then (PEXTR - PRGA) must be less than or equal to
0.3(PRGA)
Hints on Preparing Data in PanSystem for the TRG.PAS Export Facility

An example PanSystem file TRGEX1.PAN and associated PAS file TRGEX1.PAS are provided
as part of the installation and will be found in the data and reports folders respectively.
• Select the supplied CANSI (PAS EXPORT) units system. This has wellbore radius (HLID) in
mm, gas viscosity (UGAS) in mPa.s and fluid densities (RDOIL, RDGAS and RDWTR) in
grm/cm3. All the other units in the CANSI system are compatible with PAS units.
• Load the PAN file if one exists, or import gauge data and set up the data in PanSystem, in the
usual way.
If the gauge data are provided in PAS format, they should be imported via the EUB Report
TRG.PAS facility using Open Existing PAS File, then Transfer Values from Report to
PanSystem.
It is possible to import PAS format gauge data with the Gauge Data Import facility on the
main Dataprep menu, treating the PAS file as a TPR file and using the Space/tab de-limited
option in spreadsheet mode (see “Import”, on page 129), but this is less straightforward than
direct import into the EUB Report section and transfer to PanSystem.
• The Well, Layer and Fluid Parameters sections of PanSystem should be correctly initialized,
and a build-up analysis performed. Users may enter the well ID and formation name in the
Well and Layer Parameters sections for transfer to the UWI and FORM mnemonics
respectively.
• If some minor modifications are made to the format of the Report Cover Page, some data
normally entered here can be transferred to the PAS file (see Section 4. 4 “Report Cover
Page”, on page 87).
• If importing gauge data via Dataprep, if the gauge times are in decimal hours, ensure that the
first data point corresponds to actual clock time (e.g. if the gauge started recording at 16:30,
the first data point must be at 16.5000 hrs - make a time-shift if necessary).
• Assuming users are analyzing a build-up or fall-off test, when defining the Rate Changes on
the Data Edit Plot, position the Rate Change denoting the end of the build-up exactly on the
last good build-up pressure (i.e. avoid any noise and end-effects). This value will be
transferred to PRGA (pressure at stop depth) when users transfer data from PanSystem to the
PAS file. It is assumed to be the last value in the Rate Changes Table. It can be changed later
if required, but PRGA is a critical edit, so ensure it corresponds to one of the measured
pressure points, or the PAS file will not be certified.
103
Report Menu Options
• Annotate events on the Data Edit plot if required, using the Edit/Mark Points facility. Any
remarks entered as marker text will be transferred into the GCOM comments column of the
data table, at the corresponding data point. This facility is useful for marking the time of
gauge on-bottom, well shut-in, last useful build-up pressure, gauge off-bottom, problems, etc.
• While in the Data Edit Plot users will need to note down the gauge on-bottom (GONB) and
gauge off-bottom (GOFB) dates and times for manual entry into the PAS editor. (They are
not transferred automatically.) This can most conveniently be done as follows:
- set the time format in Gauge Data Edit to DD:HH:MM:SS. if dates have been imported,
note the date in the first line (corresponding to DD=00).
- return to the Data Edit Plot, click on the pressure points corresponding to gauge on-bottom
and gauge off-bottom and select the Mark Points option on the Edit menu.
- the exact times of each marked point will be displayed in DD:HH:MM:SS in the Edit
marker text dialog and all users have to do is work out the date. Note these down for future
entry in the PAS editor.
• GONB and GOFB do not in fact have to correspond to exact data points, but this is a
convenient way to do it. Users do not need to note down any other information.
• Enter the EUB Report TRG.PAS section. The tabbed pages of the PAS export facility have
been arranged in the order they appear in the PAS file. EPS recommend that users start at the
Gauge 1 page before using the Transfer Values from PanSystem to Report button for the
first time. After transfer, check the data and fill in the missing mandatory items and any
others required for the report.
4. 5. 2. AOF.PAS Report
Select the supplied CANSI (PAS EXPORT) units system before proceeding. This is the same as
the CANSI Canadian SI units system, but has wellbore radius (HLID) in mm, gas viscosity
(UGAS) in mPa.s and fluid densities (RDOIL, RDGAS and RDWTR) in grm/cm3. All the
other units in the CANSI system are compatible with PAS units.
Selecting the AOF.PAS menu option opens up the set of tabbed dialog boxes for Absolute Open
Flow Digital Data reporting. Users will enter at the Version tab::
Figure : 4.5.2 - 1 AOF report - Version tab
104
Report Menu Options
PanSystem has automatically picked up a template (AOF.EUB) stored in the \Reports directory,
containing the textual part of the PAS file, with the data fields blank. It based on the most recent
documentation supplied by the EUB, and EPS will endeavour to keep the supplied template up to
date. Some minor changes - change of number or character format, change of mandatory/
optional status, etc. - can be accommodated by simply editing the template with a text editor.
The Version tab options are described in Section 4. 5. 1 “TRG.PAS Reporting”, on page 91. The
only difference lies in the nature of the data that can be transferred between PanSystem and the
report:
Transfer Values from PanSystem to Report: If users have a .PAN welltest file loaded,
they will be able to populate part of the PAS file with the data in the PAN file using this
button:
•Well, reservoir and fluid properties
•Results of simplified (C-and-n) or theoretical (LIT) analysis
•Cover page information: if users customarily enter information in the standard PanSystem
report cover page, they will be able to transfer up to 13 PAS mnemonics related to well,
gauge and formation into the PAS file if some minor changes are applied to the cover page
format. Once set up, this will reduce the amount of duplicated typing required to fill in
future PAS files. This is described in Section 4. 4. 1 “Customizing the Cover Page for
EUB PAS file export”, on page 88.
Check over the transferred data, and type in the rest of the mandatory data and any optional data
to be entered, before making the final save. The Save PAS File operation formats the data
correctly, and EPS recommend that users read the file in again (with the Open Existing PAS File
button), to view the data in the correct formats.
Report data tabs

Each of the other tabs in the dialog box refers to a category of test data. In each of these tabs,
PanSystem identifies the mnemonic and descriptions in three key colours:
Red- Mandatory items.
Blue - Optional or Mandatory items (depending on the situation).
Black - Optional items.
The PAS file will be rejected by the EUB certification process if any mandatory items are
missing. PanSystem checks number formats and also checks for the absence of any mandatory
items when the PAS file is saved. It does not check for the numerical consistency of the data
entered. 4. 5. 2. AOF.PAS Report
105
Report Menu Options
The Well Information Tab
Figure : 4.5.2 - 2 Well Information tab
UWI (unique well identifier):

This must already exist on the EUB system. As per EUB Guide 19, the format for UWI in
Alberta is 1XX/99-99-999-99W9/9 (for example: 100/03-12-067-08W6/0).
WLIC (well license number):

WLIC must match the license number for this UWI on the EUB system. The format for license
numbers is X 9999999 X. The alpha characters are only used if reporting a test on an old well
with this type of license number. However, using the full license number as above will not cause
a file to be rejected.
FORM (formation name):

The name may differ from the EUB pool definitions, and will not be checked against them. The
layer name can be transferred from the entry in PanSystem Layer Parameters, or from the Report
Cover Page.
WSFL (well fluid status at test date):

01 Crude oil 07 Brine 11 Air
02 Gas 08 Waste 13 Carbon dioxide
05 Undistinguished 09 Solvent 15 Nitrogen
06 Water 10 Steam 16 Liquid petroleum gas
For a well that has not produced yet, use the WSFL code for the dominant fluid expected to be
recovered (most likely crude oil (01) or gas (02)). This code is required for use in EUB programs,
but will only be checked to ensure it is a valid code, not edited against actual fluid production.
WSMO (well mode status at test date):

00 Not applicable 11 Pumping
10 Flowing 12 Gas Lift
"00" is an acceptable code for cases where a well would not have a mode (i.e. some water
injectors).
106
Report Menu Options
WSTY (well type status at test date):
00 Not applicable 05 Observation 10 Cyclical
02 Storage 06 Training 11 Source
03 Injection 08 Farm 12 SW steam assisted gravity drain
04 Disposal 09 Industrial
"00" is an acceptable code for cases that do not have a specific code listed. Many producing wells
will use this code.
WTYP (well type indicator):

V Vertical wellbore
D Deviated wellbore
H Horizontal wellbore
OHCI (open hole completion indicator):

Y - yes (open hole completion). See HLID, CSLD and LINR.
N - no (cased hole completion)
HLID (hole diameter), CSLD (depth at which casing is landed) and LINR (casing liner indicator)
are mandatory if OHCI (open hole completion indicator) = “Y”. They are optional otherwise.
Note: that HLID is in mms.
LINR (casing liner indicator):

Y - yes
N - no
The Test Data Tab
Figure : 4.5.2 - 3 Test Data tab
PRPS (test purpose- EUB required survey?):

Y - yes
N - no
107
Report Menu Options
As specified in Guide 40, all tests that are conducted must be submitted, even if the test was
conducted for personal use. Tests that are not intended to fulfil any requirements, if marked as
PRPS = “N”, will be accepted for information purposes only and will not be edited. (They will
just be checked to ensure the license number matches the unique well identifier (UWI), that the
test date is valid, and that all information is readable and all mandatory elements contain valid
data.)
The EUB Guide 52 recommends that, if such tests meet all the certification criteria, they be
flagged as required tests (PRPS=”Y”) anyway, since they will then be recognised by the EUB
should the need arise in the future.
AOFTY (AOF test type code):

01 - Single Point (simplified (C-and-n) analysis)
02 - Multi-Point (simplified (C-and-n) analysis)
03 -Theoretical (Laminar-Inertial-Turbulent (LIT) analysis)
04 - Incomplete (i.e. "field analysis", "failed attempt")
SERCO (service company code): Refer to Guide 52 Appendix D - Codes For Service
Companies And Laboratories.
TTOPL: (test interval top at log depth) must be > 0.0
TBASL: (test interval base at log depth) must be > 0.0 and > TTOPL.
TTOPT: (test interval top at TVD (KB)) must be > 0.0
TBAST: (test interval base at TVD (KB)) must be > 0.0 and > TTOPT.
FTDT (final test date):

Must be >spud date and < = current date or abandoned date.
VGAS (gas produced in cleanup/test): Total gas volume produced during cleanup and test.
GPTO (method of test production): Flag indicating gas was produced to:
P - pipeline
V - vent
F - flare.
GPTH (description of gas produced): Flag indicating gas was produced through:
C - casing
T - tubing
B - casing and tubing.

FDUR (flow duration hours): Hours well flowed during test.
QFGAS (final gas production rate): Gas production rate at end of test.
QDAT (date of production rates): Date production rate QFGAS was measured.
TRES (reservoir temperature): can be transferred from the PanSystem layer Temperature.
108
Report Menu Options
The Results Summary Tab
Figure : 4.5.2 - 4 Results Summary tab
It is mandatory to complete either the “wellhead” group - PFWH, AOFWH and NWH - or the
“sandface” group - PFSF, METHC, AOFSF and NSF.
LIT (LIT analysis indicator): must be Y or N:
Y - LIT analysis was performed. If Y, NSF (sandface inverse slope) must be blank.
N - LIT analysis not performed. If N, a simplified analysis must be presented and either NSF
(sandface inverse slope) or NWH (wellhead inverse slope) must be => 0.5 and <= 1.0.
QGST (stabilised rate): stabilised flowrate. This can be transferred from PanSystem.
PFSF (stabilised flowing sandface pressure): measured stabilised flowing pressure at the
sandface - must be > 200 kPaa, and < PAVG (average reservoir pressure). Mandatory if AOFSF
> 0. METHC must also be entered.
PFWH (stabilised flowing wellhead pressure): measured stabilised flowing pressure at the
wellhead - must be > 200 kPaa, and < PAVG (average reservoir pressure). Mandatory if AOFWH
> 0.
PAVG (average reservoir pressure at MPP): best estimate of average reservoir pressure at mid-
perf depth. Can be transferred from the PanSystem Layer Pressure.
METHC (comment re sandface pressure): state method of measuring or calculating sandface

pressure. Mandatory if PFSF > 0.
AOFSF (stabilised sandface AOF): must be => QGST (stabilised gas rate) and < 15,000 E3M3/
day. Mandatory if AOFWH is blank. Can be transferred from PanSystem if “sandface” analysis
selected.
NSF (inverse slope at sandface): n-exponent from C-and-n analysis. Mandatory if AOFSF>0.
Can be transferred from PanSystem if “sandface” analysis selected.
109
Report Menu Options
AOFWH (stabilised sandface AOF): must be => QGST (stabilised gas rate) and < 15,000
E3M3/day. Mandatory if AOFSF is blank. Can be transferred from PanSystem if “wellhead”
analysis selected.
NWH (inverse slope at wellhead): n-exponent from C-and-n analysis. Mandatory if AOFWH>0.
Can be transferred from PanSystem if “wellhead” analysis selected.
Tests where AOFSF or AOFWH differ from the EUB’s AOFP system calculation by more than
15% will be flagged.
Hints on Preparing Data in PanSystem for the AOF.PAS Export Facility

An example PanSystem file AOFEX1.PAN and associated PAS file AOFEX1.PAS are provided
as part of the installation and will be found in the \data and \reports folders respectively.
• Select the supplied CANSI (PAS EXPORT) units system. This has wellbore radius (HLID) in
mm, gas viscosity (UGAS) in mPa.s and fluid densities (RDOIL, RDGAS and RDWTR) in
grm/cm3. All the other units in the CANSI system are compatible with PAS units.
• Load the PAN file if one exists, or import the gauge data and set-up the data in PanSystem, in
the usual way.
If the gauge data are provided in PAS format, users should import them via the EUB Report
TRG.PAS transient gauge data facility using Open Existing PAS File, then Transfer
Values from Report to PanSystem.
It is possible to import PAS format gauge data with the Gauge Data Import facility on the
main Dataprep menu, treating the PAS file as a TPR file and using the Space/tab de-limited
option in spreadsheet mode (“Import”, on page 129), but this is less straightforward than
direct import into the EUB Report section and transfer to PanSystem.
• The Well, Layer and Fluid Parameters sections of PanSystem should be correctly initialized.
Users may enter the well ID and formation name in the Well and Layer Parameters sections
for transfer to the UWI and FORM mnemonics respectively.
• Perform a C-and-n or LIT analysis.
• Enter the EUB Report AOF.PAS section, select the Transfer Values from PanSystem to
Report button, then check the data which has been transferred, then fill in the missing
mandatory items and any others to be reported.
110
Configure Menu Options
Chapter 5- Configure Menu Options
In this chapter users will find information about the options available in the Configure menu.
The chapter discusses each option and provides the necessary background information required
for using the Configure menu options.
5.1. About Configure

From the Configure menu users can carry out the following tasks:
• Define the directories where PanSystem stores and looks for files
• Specify whether the last file used is to be opened automatically when PanSystem is loaded
• Specify if PanSystem will prompt users to save the current file when they leave the program
• Select, create and edit the units system PanSystem uses
• Define how a gauge behaves within PanSystem
• Define how the plots are displayed on the screen
• Specify the fonts PanSystem uses to display information on the screen and in reports.
5.2. General
Description:
Use this option to do the following:
• Define the directories where PanSystem stores and looks for files
Chapter 5 - Configure Menu Options

• Specify if PanSystem will automatically load the last file used
• Specify if PanSystem will prompt users to save the current file when they exit the program
• Enable the regular auto-save option
• Specify the default Page Setup for printing individual plots.
What users see:

111
Figure : 5.2.0 - 1 General Configuration dialog
Directories: The path names are set-up when PanSystem is installed. These will be the default
directories that appear during File Open and Save As... operations. Users can change the path
name temporarily when opening or saving a file, but to make a permanent change, type the new
path name(s) here, or use the browse button. To the right of each directory path is a browse
button , this allows users to open a Browse dialog to graphically select a new directory:
Figure : 5.2.0 - 2 Browse dialog for the Report directory
The Paging directory is important for large file handling if the data cannot be stored in high
memory - PanSystem stores the data on disk in a quick-access paging directory, and moves (i.e.
5. 2. General
“pages”) chunks of the data into memory as it needs them. It is also the destination of the auto-
save file. The Customer Model directory is where customer-supplied reservoir models can be
stored in the form of DLL files (See Section 5. 7 “Customer-Supplied Reservoir Models”, on
page 122).
112
Miscellaneous: The auto-save option writes the current data to a back-up file in the paging
directory at the specified time interval. The back-up file has the extension .BAK and the same
name as the .PAN file users are working on. If a current file name has not yet been assigned (i.e.
"Untitled"), the backup file will be called PANSYS.BAK.
The auto-load option opens the last file that users were working on (i.e. during their previous
session), when PanSystem is started-up again.
The Reporting area defines the default report destination - printer or text file. This can be altered
at the time of outputting the report if desired (see Section 4. 2. 1 “Print Report option”, on page
79).
The Page Setup Definition area defines the configuration of hard-copy plots (size, contents)
output as single pages via File Print. These can also be altered via File Page Setup (see Section
2. 10 “Page Setup”, on page 62 for a fuller description).
5.3. Units
Description:
Use this option to do the following:
• Select the units system PanSystem will use

• Create and edit a personal/customized units system.
PanSystem provides the following standard units systems:
- oilfield with psi absolute (OILFABS): STP = 14.7 psia, 60°F

- oilfield with psi gauge (OILFGAG): STP = 0 psig, 60°F
- SI for Canada (CANSI): STP = 101.325 kPa, 15°C
- SI for Norway (NORSI): STP = 1.01325 barsa, 15°C
- SI for Germany (GERMSI): STP = 1.01325 barsa, 0°C
- SI for Hungary (HUNGSI): STP = 0.101325 MPa, 15°C
- SI for Brazil (PETROSI): STP = 1.0332 kgf/cm2, 20°C
- SI for Austria (abs) (OMVABS): STP = 1.01325 bar, 0°C
- SI for Austria (gauge) (OMVGAU): STP = 0 bar-g, 0°C
- SI for Shell (LIBRA[SI]): STP = 101325 Pa, 273.16K
- Field SI for Shell (LIBRA[FIELD SI]): STP = 1.01325 bar, 273.16K
- Imperial for Shell (LIBRA[IMPERIAL]): STP = 14.696 psi, 519.67°R
- SI for Canada (CANSI) [PAS Export]: STP = 101.325 kPa, 15°C
These supplied systems can be used as the basis for creating a personal/customized units system.
What users see:

5. 3. Units
113
Use the View option to look at the units and conversion factors for each parameter in the
highlighted system.
Use the Create option to create a copy of an existing units system under a new name. This can
then be used as the basis for customization.
Use the Edit option to edit a user-defined units system (users cannot edit any of the supplied
systems directly, only copies of them). The screens and options appearing when editing a units
system are similar to those for creating a new units system (see the Section below).
Use the Delete option to erase a units system from the list. Users cannot delete any of the
supplied units systems.
5. 3. 1. Selecting a Units System

To select the units system PanSystem will use, highlight the name of the system in the list and
press OK. PanSystem will use this system until a different one is selected. Any data and results
already present will be converted automatically. Data in system files (.PAN, .PAX) that were
written in different units will also be converted when loaded.
5. 3. 2. Creating a New Units System
5. 3. 1. Selecting a Units System

Description:
Use the Create option to create a personal/customized units system. Users will be able to change
the units of a whole class of parameters (e.g. all pressures) or individual parameters (e.g. some of
the pressures). The alternative units can be selected from the supplied alternatives, or new ones
can be defined.
What to do
1.Users should first select an existing units system to base the new units system on, by
selecting and highlighting a suitable system in the list (e.g. if users want to work in psia
and STB/day, but with depths in metres, start from OILFABS).
114
2.Press the Create button. The following dialog box appears.
3.Type a new name in the Units System box (mandatory!). Type any reference notes in the
Comments box (optional).
4.Press OK when finished. The ensuing dialog boxes are the same as those generated by
selection of the Edit button (described next).
5. 3. 3. Editing a Units System

Use the Edit option to edit a custom units system (users cannot edit an EPS-supplied system -
make a copy of one of the supplied systems with the Create option first). Users will be able to
change the units of a whole class of parameters (e.g. all of the pressures) or individual parameters
(e.g. some of the pressures). The alternative units can be selected from the supplied alternatives,
or new ones can be defined.
What to do
1.Select the units system to be edited, by selecting and highlighting it in the list.
2.Press the Edit button. The following dialog box appears. This dialog allows users to make a
global change to an entire unit class (e.g. all parameters with the units of pressure).
5. 3. 3. Editing a Units System
115
3.The dialog box lists the various classes of units. To change the units for an entire class,
click the appropriate down arrow button and select a new unit from the list. This will save
users from having to switch the units of every parameter in that class individually on a
subsequent screen.
For example, to select metres for all depths, click on the down arrow in the Length box and
select m from the list.
The selected unit will be applied to all the parameters associated with that class (in this case:
layer thickness, distance to boundary, well length, etc.).
• New Unit: use this option to create a personal, user-defined unit and apply it to a unit class. A
dialog box similar to the following one appears:
All parameters are converted by PanSystem internally to oilfield absolute units. Units
conversions are defined by means of the shifts and multipliers needed to convert the number
in "internal" units to the correct number in "user" units. The internal unit is displayed in the
bracket in the User unit = equation:
User unit = (Internal Unit + Shift) x Multiplier
Enter the new name, and the required shift and multiplier values to convert the internal unit
to the new unit.
In the illustration above, the user simply wanted the length class unit - metres - to appear as
“mt” instead of the supplied form “m”. The new Unit name has been typed in as mt. The
shift is zero, the multiplier is 0.3048 so that:
mt = ft x 0.3048
"ft" being the internal unit. 5. 3. 3. Editing a Units System
The new user-defined unit is applied to all parameters that are associated with that class (in
this case: layer thickness, distance to boundary, well length, etc. are all in the "Length" class).
• Units detail: use this option to change the units for individual parameters (rather than an
entire class). For instance, continuing with the example above, users may want only some of
the parameters with the units of length to be in "mt". Users will be able to set the ones they
want to "ft" or whatever.
To change the units for a particular parameter, click the Units detail button. The following
dialog box appears:
116
Select the parameter by highlighting it in the Unit Title list and then choose the alternative
unit from the Current user unit drop down list box.
In this example, note that the new user-defined unit “mt” appears in the list along with the
three supplied length units.
• New Unit: use this button to create a new user-defined unit. Select the parameter by
highlighting it and click the New Unit button. This is functionally the same as the New Unit
option described above.
Enter the new unit name, and the required shift and multiplier values to convert the internal
unit to the new user-defined unit.
• Edit Unit: use this option to edit an existing user-defined unit (users cannot edit any EPS-
supplied units). Select the parameter whose unit is to be edited by highlighting it, and click
the Edit Unit button. The dialog box that appears is the same as that generated for the New
Unit option described previously.
5.4. Gauge Details
Description:
Use this section to specify the technical characteristics of the pressure gauge, and where to use
them in PanSystem. This is optional - users may ignore real gauge characteristics if they wish.
• radius of investigation
• superpose gauge characteristics on simulated data in Advanced Simulation to generate more
realistic pressure responses.
5. 4. Gauge Details
The settings are saved in the PAN file.
What users see:

When this option is selected, the following dialog box appears.
117
In the Radius of Investigation area, users may choose how the radius of investigation (Rinv)
should be calculated. Rinv is displayed in the status bar beneath the diagnostic plots for any
position of the mouse pointer. Maximum Rinv for the test is an output from the Semi-Log plot
analysis and appears in the results box after a line-fit to the radial flow portion of the data.
Use classical calculation - this option determines the radius of investigation using the classical
equation (Equation 15.1.2 - XXVII, on page 499 ), and assumes a gauge with perfect resolution
and no drift or noise.
Use gauge resolution and noise - this option allows users to take the gauge’s resolution and
noise characteristics into account (Equation 15.1.2 - XXIX, on page 499 ). If this is selected,
users should enter a value for the gauge resolution and/or noise in the lower area of the dialog.
More details about this area of the dialog are provided below.
Base Rinv on ’n’ times (resolution+noise) - the decision that an anomaly in the pressure trend
on a diagnostic plot does or does not represent a heterogeneity is subjective. For instance, one
user might want to see a deviation from the radial flow line by 2 times gauge resolution at a
certain time on a Semi-Log plot, whereas to be certain it represents an anomaly at a certain
distance, another user might feel happier with 4 times gauge resolution. The calculation of radius
of investigation must take this criterion into account. Values of n from 2 to 4 appear to be quite
reasonable. If users include noise in the gauge details, this is also incorporated in the
computation.
5. 4. Gauge Details
Note: that this refers to the detection of an anomaly at a distance Rinv, not characterization of the
anomaly as a fault, change of kh, etc. This would require about another log cycle of testing time.
Maximum R inv in build-ups to be limited by Tp - check this checkbox to impose the

popular (but not universally held) opinion that the radius of investigation of a build-up cannot
exceed that attained by the preceding flowing period of duration Tp. It is off (i.e. unchecked) by
default.
118
The Advanced Simulation effects area is where users can specify the pressure gauge
characteristics:
- to use them in the calculation of radius of investigation: enter values for resolution and/or
noise. There is no need to check the checkboxes on at this point.
- to use them in the simulation of the pressure response using Advanced Simulation, check on
the checkboxes for the effects to be included, and enter values.
Gauge type: This field is linked to a data file containing a list of gauge types and their
characteristics.
The file is called GAUGES.TXT and resides in the main PanSystem directory. It is in ASCII
format and can be edited (externally) so users can add their own gauge types and data at will. The
basic file comes with the generic gauge types and typical values for resolution. If certain gauges
are used frequently, it would be worth entering them in the file. (If so, remember to update the
number at the top of the file to reflect the increased number of gauges.)
If users select a gauge type from the list, the associated parameters for that gauge will appear in
the drift, resolution and noise fields. Users may overtype these if required. Alternatively, leave
it as Not specified and type in values.
• Include gauge drift - enter the expected gauge drift (positive for downward drift) and check
the checkbox to include it in Advanced Simulation.
• Include gauge resolution - users should enter the gauge resolution and check the checkbox
to include it in Advanced Simulation, or leave the checkbox unchecked if they only want to
include it in the radius of investigation.
Note: that the data transmission system may have poorer resolution than the gauge itself.
• Include noise - users should enter the maximum noise amplitude and check the box to
include it in Advanced Simulation, or leave the checkbox unchecked if they only want to
include it in the radius of investigation. Noise is considered to have a uniform probability
distribution between plus/minus the amplitude value specified.
If users are including noise and resolution, they have the further option to Add noise
BEFORE resolution in the Advanced Simulation calculations. This is off by default, and
noise is assumed to originate after the sensor (eg: in the data transmission system). The
appearance of the simulated pressure is radically different if the noise is introduced before
resolution.
5. 4. Gauge Details
119
5.5. Graphs
Description:
Use this option to specify how plots appear on the screen. These user-selected settings are written
to the Windows Registry under HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/EPS/Pansys30.ini/
Graphing. When a new PAN file is subsequently created, these new settings will take precedence
over the defaults used by PanSystem.
This is equivalent to using the main Edit menu while displaying a particular plot. (See Section 3
“Edit Menu Options”, on page 66, where this is discussed in more detail.)
What users see:

Select the plot using the Plot drop-down list, then specify the X-Axis, Y-Axis, Legend and
Results settings required. Users can do this for each plot.
An alternative way of achieving the same results is to use the Edit option on the main menu.
5. 5. Graphs
120
The following illustration shows some of the components of a plot:
5.6. Fonts
Description:
Use this option to set the fonts PanSystem uses to display information on the screen and to print
reports.
PanSystem already has default fonts specified. Users can select their own fonts and save these as
the new defaults.
What users see:

To change the fonts for any of the display items or the report, select the appropriate button. A
dialog box similar to the following one is generated to let users select the font they want to use.
5. 6. Fonts
121
If users want a new set of font settings to become the defaults, click the Save As Defaults button.
The Font settings selected by users are written to the Windows Registry under
HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/EPS/Pansys30.ini/Fonts. When a new PAN file is
subsequently created, these new settings will take precedence over the defaults.
If users subsequently alter any fonts (but do not save as defaults), it is possible to reinstate the
defaults from the Registry via the Restore Defaults button.
5.7. Customer-Supplied Reservoir Models

There is a facility in PanSystem for users to implement their own reservoir models. These can be
fully integrated into the Analysis and Simulation (Quick Match, Auto and Advanced Simulation)
functions of the program by means of a DLL link. This enables the code defining a model to
remain external to PanSystem, and to be modified, or new models added, at any time.
5. 7. Customer-Supplied Reservoir Models

The path to the DLL files is specified in the Config General dialog box (See Section 5. 2
“General”, on page 111). Several new models using the DLL link are supplied with the current
release of PanSystem (See Section 7. 7 “Customer-Defined Flow Models”, on page 253).
For details of the format required to integrate personal flow models, please contact the nearest
regional EPS representative, or the Edinburgh office directly.
122
Dataprep Section
Dataprep Section
123
Dataprep Flow Chart
Dataprep Section
124
Gauge Data Preparation
Chapter 6- Gauge Data Preparation
In this chapter users will find information on how to use the Gauge Data command from the
Dataprep menu, and the Dataprep Toolbar and Ruler Bar to import and prepare gauge data for
analyzing, simulation and test design.
Some of the options available depend on the fluid type selected in the Reservoir Description
(See Section 7. 1 “Fluid Type”, on page 184).
Note: Users should ensure that if they have gas well gauge data to prepare, the fluid type must
first be changed to gas (the default setting is oil).
6.1. About Gauge Data Preparation

Gauge Data Preparation consists of several steps:
• Import columns of data from raw Gauge Data file(s) into PanSystem
• Quality-control the raw data
• Edit gauge data - with shifts, copy and paste, data resampling, smoothing, etc.
• Optionally, export edited columns of gauge data to file
• Select the Gauge Data file or data column to be analyzed (if several have been imported)
• Identify and enter flow rate changes within the test
• Apply tidal corrections (optional, see Chapter 8).
Chapter 6 - Gauge Data Preparation

The raw Gauge Data files are ASCII files which contain the Time (T), Pressure (P) and
optionally Rate (R) data used in analysis. The files may contain other data, including other
pressure records, but only the time, pressure and rate are used in analysis. Users can import other
columns of data for editing, plotting and inclusion in reports.
At the end of Gauge Data Preparation, users can proceed to analyze any one of the data sets by
selecting it as the Master Data File. Any other gauge data file read in can be analyzed by simply
selecting it as the Master. All the imported data can be stored in the PAN system file, along with
supporting information about the well, fluids and reservoir.
6. 1. 1. Definitions of Data Types

There are several types of data used in PanSystem which are referred to throughout the program.
Users need to have a thorough understanding of these data types to be able to understand this
manual fully and to be able to understand the way in which the program works.
125
Well - up to 5 wells can be defined in PanSystem. Select and define in the Well and Reservoir
Description dialog box. Each well can have up to 20 independent data files stored with it (e.g. 20
separate tests, or 20 sets of gauge data on the same test), and each can be plotted, edited and
analysed.
Data Files - the time, pressure, rate and any other gauge data held internally by PanSystem under
a file name. Up to 20 files can be held at any time for each well. There can be up to 100 columns
(= channels) in each file and there may be more than one pressure and rate column. All data files
are saved for all wells to the PanSystem data file. Gauge data can be edited via the Gauge Data
option on the Dataprep menu.
Master Data File - the data file selected for analysis. The selected Master file is also used as the
time base for certain data editing functions where other gauges are involved (if present).
System Data File - the data file which PanSystem writes to disk, containing all input gauge data,
fluid and reservoir description, etc., plus analysis results. The "system file" may contain gauge
data from several different raw "data files" if more than one was imported. If several wells have
been configured, the "data files" for all wells are saved to the one system file.
Column - term used for a channel (sequence, stream) of data in a data file. The "time column",
for instance, is the gauge clock record for the welltest; the "pressure column" is the associated
pressure readings. They appear as columns when listed on-screen.
Master Pressure and Rate Columns - the selected columns of data in the Master Data File,
with which analysis will be performed. The selected Master pressure also has a special status on
the Data Edit plot in certain data editing functions involving other gauges.
Users can select different Master pressure and rate columns if there are several to choose from in
a given Master Data File. PanSystem Analysis requires a rate value to accompany each time-
pressure pair. Generally, the gauge record will not include simultaneously recorded rates (unless
a flowmeter was run), so users will not have a Rate Column as such. In this case, PanSystem will
create a rate column for users automatically, by digitizing the manually-entered Rate Change
data.
Users can also create a rate column from the Data Edit plot (See Section 6. 5. 19 “Calculate
Rate”, on page 175), but this is not usually necessary except for special applications.
Rate Changes - these are events where the surface flow rate changes. This includes rate history
6. 1. 1. Definitions of Data Types
(prior to a test, perhaps before the gauge started recording), and major rate variations during a
test or sequence of tests. Users may have up to 2000 lines in the table. Associated with a rate
change event are: the time, the flowrate leading up to the rate change, and the pressure (not
always required). Edit from a dialog box, or on the plot. The rate changes will be marked as
arrows along the lower half of the Data Edit plot ruler bar (Figure 6.1.2 - 2, “Data Edit Plot,” on
page 128).
When a particular test period is being analyzed, PanSystem computes superposition for the
period up to the start of that test period by referring to the Rate Changes table. Superposition
during the test being analysed is computed from the rates in the Master Rate column.
Flow Periods - are the time intervals between rate changes. They are the spaces between the rate
change arrows along the lower half of the ruler bar.
126
Test Periods - are time intervals, spanning one or several “flow periods”, on which analysis will
be performed. Test Periods are marked on the Data Edit plot ruler bar as tick marks along its
upper half - see Figure 6.1.2 - 2, “Data Edit Plot,” on page 128. These can be edited on the plot.
Each “flow period” defined in Dataprep automatically becomes a “test period” in Analysis.
Users may group several flow periods into a single test period. In Figure 6.1.2 - 2, “Data Edit
Plot,” on page 128, two flow periods have been grouped into a single test period.
Test Periods are classified as Normal, Slug or Interference. Select a test period by clicking in the
ruler bar over the plot. Edit by double clicking them.
Rate Column - values of flowrate sampled at the gauge clock times. (See previous comments
about the Master Rate Column.)
6. 1. 2. Where To Access Gauge Data?

The Dataprep Gauge Data menu command generates the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation
dialog box. To plot columns of data for editing, select the columns and then select the Add to
List button. The selected columns subsequently appear in the List to Plot panel. To plot the data
on the screen select the Plot button.
This dialog box is described in more detail in the sections that follow.
6. 1. 2. Where To Access Gauge Data?

Figure : 6.1.2 - 1 Gauge Data Preparation dialog box
All the gauge data preparation functions are accessed through the:
• Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog box (above).
• Toolbar on the Data Edit plot, which is generated from the Pressure and Rate Data
Preparation dialog box
• Ruler Bar on the Data Edit plot.
The Data Edit plot is shown in Figure 6.1.2 - 2, “Data Edit Plot,” on page 128. It contains the
Dataprep Toolbar and Ruler Bar. These are used to perform tasks on the data, and to select and
display various types of data.
127
Figure : 6.1.2 - 2 Data Edit Plot

The different types of data described (See Section 6. 1. 1 “Definitions of Data Types”, on page
125) are listed below, with the means of access or edit briefly indicated: the term “dialog box”
refers to the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog box (Figure 6.1.2 - 1, “Gauge Data
Preparation dialog box,” on page 127), “plot” means the Data Edit plot, (Figure 6.1.2 - 2, “Data
Edit Plot,” on page 128). “Plot Tools” refer to the button icons displayed along the Plot Toolbar.
• Well - Select from the dialog box. Create in the Reservoir Description dialog box.
• Data Files - Import, Export, Edit, Delete, Plot from the dialog box.
• System Data File - Open, Save, Save As, Save As V-2.3 (and Import V-1.80 files) from the
main File menu.
• Master Data File - Select in the dialog box.
• Master Pressure and Rate Columns - Select in the dialog boxes. If no sampled flowmeter
data are available as gauge data, PanSystem will read rates from the Rate Changes table.
• Rate Changes - Enter/Edit in tabular form from the dialog box. Create or edit on the plot
using Plot Tools.
• Flow Periods - Can be grouped and ungrouped on the plot using Plot Tools.
• Test Periods - Edit on the plot using Ruler Bar by double-clicking them (top half of Ruler
Bar).
• Rate Column (optional) - Edit contents from the dialog box. Can be created using the 'Q' tool
on the plot.
6. 2. Data File Manipulation
6.2. Data File Manipulation

Data Files are manipulated in the Data File area of the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation
dialog box (Figure 6.1.2 - 1, “Gauge Data Preparation dialog box,” on page 127). This contains
functions to let users:
• Import columns of data from raw Gauge Data files (ASCII format).
• Edit columns of gauge data - use this function to enter, edit and view selected columns of
data files in spreadsheet format.
• Export edited gauge data to disk as a new Gauge Data file - use this option to write selected
columns of data from one file to a new file.
128
• Edit Rate Changes - use this function to enter, edit and view Rate Change data.
• Edit Test Design - use this function to enter, edit and view the flowrate schedule to be used in
test design for Advanced Simulation.
• Delete Data Files, or selected columns within Data Files (this deletes from memory, not from
disk!).
Each function is described in more detail in the following sections.
Note: ASCII format Gauge Data files (.TPR) are loaded and saved using the Import and Export
buttons. System files (.PAN, .PAX) are loaded and saved using the Open and Save/Save as...
commands on the File menu.
6. 2. 1. Import
Description:
Use this option to import columns of data from a Gauge Data file into PanSystem. Users must
import the time column from the file, and can select any of the other data columns present. If
desired, users can append the incoming data to another file which has already been imported.
There is no limit to the number of data points (i.e. lines of data) that can be imported, provided
users have enough disk space.
Up to 20 data files can be imported (or more if users are appending to existing files) for each well
configured, with a maximum of 5 wells. Users may have a maximum 100 columns of data in
each data file.
If users have sufficient memory, large files will be transferred automatically into memory
immediately after import - otherwise Dataprep will page to hard disk. (Repeated hard disk access
makes plotting and editing slower). The transfer to memory can only be made if there are fewer
than 160,000 lines of data - in excess of this, disk paging is used.
All the imported gauge data files from one or several wells can be saved to one system file.
Individual data files can be exported in ASCII format (.TPR).
What to do:
1. Select the well that the imported gauge data is to be associated with, from the Well to Edit
box. Normally users will just have one well.
2. Select the Import function. The dialog box in Figure 6.2.1 - 1, “File Import dialog box,”
on page 130 appears.
6. 2. 1. Import
129
Figure : 6.2.1 - 1 File Import dialog box

3. Select the Gauge Data file that the data is to be imported from, in the Files list (or type in
the file name). Note that the default file extension is .TPR.
4. PanSystem provides users with two options for the import of data files. These are
described in detail in the next sections:
- Spreadsheet style: This option allows users to preview their data files in the form of a
spreadsheet, and select and name the columns to be imported. This is a very flexible
import facility that will handle a wide range of data formats (including dates and
columns with missing values), and will import file headers. TPR files that do not
contain a date column can be assigned dates by typing in a start date. An example is
shown in Figure 6.2.1 - 5, “Spreadsheet Import Mode (Space/Tab de-limited),” on page
132.
- Non-spreadsheet style (Spreadsheet style switched off): This is a much simpler import
facility with less flexibility (in particular, no dates, columns with missing values, or file
headers). An example is shown in Figure 6.2.1 - 10, “Non-Spreadsheet Style Import,
with File Contents Displayed,” on page 137.
5.Append to file: If users are appending this data to a file that has already been imported,
check the Append to file box and select the file that the new data is to be appended to. The
incoming file will be appended to the end of the previous file, regardless of time values.
6. Click the Open button to proceed to the file preview. The file contents will be displayed, and
users will be able to specify exactly what they want to import. The next two sections describe
the Spreadsheet style and Non-spreadsheet style import methods.
6. 2. 1. Import
130
Spreadsheet Style Import
After a pause which may last several seconds, depending on the file size, all the columns in the
data file will be displayed as in Figure 6.2.1 - 5, “Spreadsheet Import Mode (Space/Tab de-
limited),” on page 132. Users will be able to import up to 20 columns of data.
File Header
If the data file contains header information, users can import this as a separate block of data from
the gauge record. Enter a value in the Number of Lines in Header field. The lines covered will
appear in blue. Adjust the number if necessary. The example below has 5 lines of text and 2 blank
lines in the header:
Figure : 6.2.1 - 2 Seven-Line Header (Fixed column width mode)

If users are in Space/Tab de-limited mode, they will only see the numerical content of the header
on screen. However, the full header will be read-in when users import:
Figure : 6.2.1 - 3 Seven-line header (Space/Tab de-limited mode)

If the header lines have been tagged with a * character at the beginning, they will be
automatically recognized by the spreadsheet viewer as header data. In this case, the entire text
strings will be displayed in both modes:
6. 2. 1. Import
131
Figure : 6.2.1 - 4 Header Lines Tagged with Asterisks

Data Column Definition
Now users need to specify whether the data columns are de-limited (by spaces, tabs, commas,
etc.), or are of fixed width, by checking either the Space/Tab de-limited button or the Fixed
column widths button at top right of the dialog.
This will probably affect the organization of the gauge data on the screen, depending on how the
incoming file is structured. Some file structures lend themselves to both methods, some do not.
• With Space/Tab de-limited mode, the data are automatically allocated to columns based on
valid de-limiters such as spaces, tabs, commas, semi-colons (but not colons).
Figure : 6.2.1 - 5 Spreadsheet Import Mode (Space/Tab de-limited)

This mode will not handle columns with missing data (blank entries - zeroes are OK). If
users select this mode, it is a good idea to scroll down through the file to make sure all the
data has been correctly grouped before proceeding. However, files without a date column can
be assigned dates by entering a start date when the Date button is checked (described later in
this section). Initially, the associated data entry field is grayed-out (i.e. Enter Optional Start
Time).
6. 2. 1. Import
• With Fixed column widths users define the individual columns using the mouse. This mode
MUST be used where columns contain gaps (sections of null data) and also allows users to
read in the date, (it is also a convenient way of avoiding the date, if users do not want to read
this in).
This may involve re-positioning existing column boundaries (vertical lines) and/or creating
new ones.
132
The example below contains dates, and has gaps in the temperature sampling in Column 5.
Figure : 6.2.1 - 6 Spreadsheet Import Mode (Fixed Column Width)

- To move an existing column boundary hold down the Ctrl key and drag a column edge
with the left mouse button.
- To create a new boundary, hold down the Ctrl key and click with the left mouse button to
the right of the last character in the column - a new column boundary will appear.
- To delete a column boundary, press Ctrl and double-click the left mouse button on the
boundary.
The date format is flexible and will accommodate any order, any valid de-limiter, and the
month as a number or word. The dates will normally appear in every line of data, but it is also
acceptable to have the date appearing only at the start of each new day, with blank entries
between, provided that the column width is preserved.
When defining the date columns, choose a separate column for the day, the month and the
year. Position the right-hand side of the column to the right of the de-limiter. In the example
below, the date format is day-month-year with a dash as a separator. 24-Feb-96 should be
divided up as 24-| Feb-| 96|:
In the next example, the date format is month/day/year with a slash as a separator. 08/04/99
should be divided up as 08/| 04/| 99|:
Now decide which columns are to be imported and identify the type of data in each column.
Users do not have to import every data column in the file. For analysis, only time and pressure
are required (plus optional simultaneous rate), but other columns can be imported for editing and
display. If users are importing a record of the rate history, it will probably be time and rate only.
6. 2. 1. Import
Click on a column and select from the upper middle area: Date, Time, Gauge or Skip.
133
• Date: when enabled in Space/TabDe-limited mode, the data entry field is entitled Enter
Optional Start Date. Click on the date column, then click inside the data entry field and
enter a valid start date (i.e. if no date column is present in the imported data). The date
column in the imported data should then have a start date assigned to the first data point, a
date in each line and new days starting as time passes through each 24 hr. period.
When enabled in Fixed Column Width mode, a selection field with drop-down menu is
present. Click on the date column, then select Day, Month or Year as appropriate.
Select the (DATE)hh:mm:ss time format if date information is being read in.
• Time: Click the column, click the Time button, and select the time format from the
dropdown list. Make sure only one time column is defined. If the file contains more than one
time column, pick only one of them. A number of different formats are available. Figure 6.2.1
- 7, “Time Formats for Data Import,” on page 134, shows some examples.
Figure : 6.2.1 - 7 Time Formats for Data Import

- hours - cumulative decimal hours.
- hhhh:mm:ss - the de-limiter can be a colon, comma, space, etc. If the hours are in 24-
hour clock format, and reset to zero at the start of each new day, switch the 24 hr.
update option on (it will add 24 hrs. to the counter each time it resets). If the clock
time is cumulative (increasing monotonically, no zero reset), do not switch the update
option on.
- dd:hh:mm:ss - Cumulative days. The hours should reset to zero at the start of each new
day. The delimiter can be a colon, comma, space, etc.
- minutes - decimal minutes.
- seconds - decimal seconds.
- (DATE)hh:mm:ss - This is a time column in hh:mm:ss format, associated with a date,
which appears in a separate column (as in the examples above). The hours will be 24-
hour clock, and will restart at zero each new day.
- (DATE)hh:mm:ss:c - same as - (DATE)hh:mm:ss, but with
1/10th secs after the last de-limiter.
- hhhhmmss - no delimiter between hours, minutes and seconds. See the comment under
hhhh:mm:ss about 24 hr. update.
- ddhhmmss - no delimiter between days, hours, minutes and seconds. Cumulative days,
6. 2. 1. Import
hours in 24-hr clock format.

- hhhh:mm:ss:tt - the delimiter can be a colon, comma, space, etc. tt is “ticks”, or 1/60th
seconds. See the comment under hhhh:mm:ss about 24 hr. update.
- dd:hh:mm:ss:tt - as for dd:hh:mm:ss, but with 1/60th secs.
134
- hhhh:mm:ss:cc - the delimiter can be a colon, comma, space, etc. cc is 1/100th seconds.
See the comment under hhhh:mm:ss about 24 hr. update.
- dd:hh:mm:ss:cc - as for dd:hh:mm:ss, but with 1/100th secs.
- hhhh:mm:ss:c - same as hhhh:mm:ss, but with 1/10th secs after the last de-limiter.
- dd:hh:mm:ss:c - same as dd:hh:mm:ss, but with 1/10th secs after the last de-limiter.
• Gauge: Click the column, click the Gauge button, and select the type of gauge:
With Automatically set name ticked on, the Column name will change according to the
gauge type selected. If one pressure column has already been identified - auto-named
Pressure #1 - and users then pick a second one, the auto-name Pressure #2 will appear. Users
may overtype names. Switch-off the auto-naming button to disable it.
With these options selected the numbered column entries will then be automatically titled. If
users have a number of pressure gauge columns then the system will successively number
these Pressure # 1, Pressure # 2 etc.
• Skip: if users have a column they do not wish to import, click the column, and click the Skip
button.
In Figure 6.2.1 - 6, “Spreadsheet Import Mode (Fixed Column Width),” on page 133, date,
time, pressure and temperature have been selected for import; the remaining columns will be
skipped.
File name: If users want to give the file a new internal working name, enter it in the File name
box (i.e. the "File name" used here does not have to be the same as the physical data file name).
TPR format template: If other files are to be imported, which have the same column
characteristics, users can reduce the tedium by saving the format as a template.
After preparing the initial import settings as described above, click on the Save Template button.
This will open up a Save As dialog box for the .tpt template file type. The default directory is the
one nominated for PanSystem reports.
6. 2. 1. Import
Figure : 6.2.1 - 8 TPR Import Template - Save As dialog box
135
The template can be applied to any file of the same format. Instead of setting the columns, etc. by
hand, use the Load Template button.
Import: When users have prepared the columns, and (optionally) saved the template, they are
ready to import the data. The Import button will read in the data and return users to the Pressure
and Rate Data Preparation dialog.
Import and Plot: will import the data and take users directly into the Data Edit Plot.
For large files, there will be a pause after the last line has been read in, while the data are
transferred into memory (explained in the introduction to this Import section). Large files will
take some time (approx. 30 secs on a P266 for a 300,000-point file, including transfer to
memory).
On the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog box, the newly imported data will now be
listed in the Data File/Column List:
Figure : 6.2.1 - 9 Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog box after
file import
Non-Spreadsheet Style Import
With Spreadsheet Style switched off, users will invoke the “non-spreadsheet” method. The
more flexible Spreadsheet Style method (described above) has largely superseded this simpler
method.
This import facility will read in up to 9 columns of data, but will not handle columns with
missing values (blank entries) correctly. It can handle most forms of "non-data" such as lines of
heading information, date entries, and electronic noise (smiley faces, etc.), in the sense that their
presence will not prevent reading in the gauge data. However, date columns cannot be imported
as dates and must be skipped. Headers cannot be imported intact - their numerical content (gauge
number, test date, etc.) will be read in as spurious gauge data, but can usually be identified when
the data is plotted and then edited out graphically.
It is feasible to pre-edit small data files to remove possibly troublesome entries, using an external
editor. An alternative is to insert an asterisk at the beginning of any line of non-data. Dataprep
Import will ignore any line marked in this way.
6. 2. 1. Import
Complex file structures should be read in using the Spreadsheet Style import method (see
previous section).
The worked example “Dataprep - Gauge Data”, on page 575, demonstrates the import of a data
file containing a header tagged with asterisks.
136
Referring to Figure 6.2.1 - 10, “Non-Spreadsheet Style Import, with File Contents Displayed,”
on page 137, use the View Data File... button to preview the data format. (The File Import dialog
box remains active behind the data display window, so users can switch freely between the two.)
Figure : 6.2.1 - 10 Non-Spreadsheet Style Import, with File Contents

Displayed
File name: The name of the incoming file will be the default in the File name box. If users want
to give the file a new internal working name, just type it in (i.e. the "File name" used here does
not have to be the same as the physical data file name).
Time column number: Specify the number of the column where the time is recorded.
Time format: Select the appropriate time format. The different formats available are described
in the previous section (Figure 6.2.1 - 7, “Time Formats for Data Import,” on page 134).
Column number: Enter the number of each column of data to be imported from the file.
Note: Where a time format consists of several columns joined by a separator (e.g. the
hhhh:mm:ss format), it counts as a single column. The same applies to dates in the form 31-Oct-
95 or 10/31/95, etc.
Suppose a service company supplies data in the following format:

Date Time 1 Time 2 Temperature Pressure
10/31/95 14:00:00 0.00000 179.65 4115.96
10/31/95 14:00:05 0.00139 179.80 4118.25
If users want to import Time 1, Pressure and Temperature. They should specify:
- Time: Column 2, (The date counts as one column because the numbers in the date
are joined by a “/”. Just skip the date column.) The time format is hhhh:mm:ss.
6. 2. 1. Import
- Temperature: Column 4. [Time 1 is grouped as one column because the numbers are
joined by colons. Time 2 is, of course, one column.
- Pressure: Column 5.
137
If users had wanted to read in Time 2 instead, they would have specified:
- Time: Column 3, format hours.
Column type: Specify the type of data under Column Type by selecting from the drop-down
list:
Figure : 6.2.1 - 11 Selecting the imported Column Type

Column name: Give the data a working Column name. This is the name that is used to identify
the data in PanSystem (e.g. "Upper Gauge" or "Pressure #1”, etc).
In Figure 6.2.1 - 10, “Non-Spreadsheet Style Import, with File Contents Displayed,” on page
137, the file to be imported is called TESTING. The browser shows that it contains time data in
decimal hours in column 1, pressure in column 2, and temperature in column 3. All three
columns have been selected for import: the pressure data is to be called “Upper Gauge”, the
temperature column name has been left as “Temperature”.
When users have defined all the columns to be imported, select Import. The data will be read in
and users will return to the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog.
For large files, there will be a pause after the last line has been read in, while the data are
transferred into memory (as explained in the introduction to this Import section). Large files will
take some time (approx. 30 secs on a P266 for a 300,000-point file, including transfer to
memory).
The newly imported data will now be listed in the Data File/Column List of the Pressure and
Rate data Preparation dialog:.
6. 2. 1. Import
Figure : 6.2.1 - 12 Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog box after
file import
138
6. 2. 2. Edit
Description:
Use this option to type in new data, or to view or edit existing columns of data in spreadsheet
form. For Graphical editing: See Section 6. 5 “Data Edit Plot and Tool Bar”, on page 156.
What to do:
Referring to Figure 6.2.1 - 12, “Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog box after file import,”
on page 138:
1. From the Well to Edit box, select the well that is associated with the data to be edited
(normally there will be only one well).
2. Select the Edit button. The dialog box in Figure 6.2.2 - 1, “Select Data to Edit dialog
box,” on page 139 appears.
Figure : 6.2.2 - 1 Select Data to Edit dialog box

3. To edit an existing file go to step 10.
4. To create a new file, select New. The dialog box in Figure 6.2.2 - 2, “Define New Data
File dialog box,” on page 139 appears.
Figure : 6.2.2 - 2 Define New Data File dialog box

5. Enter the name of the new file in the Data file name box.
6. Specify the number of rows in the new file (rows can be added/removed later so this is
not critical at this stage).
6. 2. 2. Edit
7. PanSystem automatically sets aside column #1 for the time data.

Specify the type of data in column #2 by clicking the down arrow key and selecting a
Column Type from the list. This selection is what defines how the data is to be treated
in the program.
139
8. Give the column a name. This is simply a name that is used to identify the data.
9. Repeat steps 6 and 7 for any other column(s) to be created in the new file. When users
have defined and named each column, select OK. PanSystem returns users to the
Select Data File to Edit dialog box (Figure 6.2.2 - 1, “Select Data to Edit dialog box,”
on page 139).
10. (... continued from step #3 for existing data files.) On the Select Data File to Edit
dialog box (Figure 6.2.2 - 1, “Select Data to Edit dialog box,” on page 139), if there are
several files, select the one to be edited from the Data File to Edit drop-down list.
11. Click on the column(s) to be edited. If users want to edit all columns, check the Edit
All Columns checkbox, and select OK. The Edit dialog box (Figure 6.2.2 - 3, “Edit
Gauge Data dialog box,” on page 140) is generated.
12. Edit the selected columns of gauge data. Users can edit any individual cell by
highlighting it (double-click or Tab) and entering a new value. The button options
situated down the right-hand side of the dialog box can also be used. Each of these
options is described below.
Figure : 6.2.2 - 3 Edit Gauge Data dialog box

Only 16 rows can be viewed on-screen at a time. Users can scroll through the file using the
scroll bar on the right-hand side of the table field to move cell-by-cell (i.e. apply a left mouse-
click on up/down arrow keys) or page-by-page (i.e. left mouse-click on scroll bar either side
of slider bar).
For Windows 2000 users, the scroll bar also has right mouse button functionality. By
selecting anywhere on the vertical scroll bar with the right mouse button, a short menu is
activated that allows users to move the table cells to selected locations (e.g. with the menu
6. 2. 2. Edit
command Scroll Here - the table cells will be moved to the exact position on the scroll bar
that the user right-clicks on. The other commands are self explanatory - Top/Bottom of table
column, Page Up/Down to the next block of data, Scroll Up/Down by one cell).
The following operations are available:
140
• Function: lets users change the value in any single cell, or range of cells in a column, with a
shift and multiplier [x' = ax + b]. This might be used for shifting gauge pressures to a different
datum, re-calibrating gauge pressure, converting spinner (rps) to flowrate, shifting times to a
common reference, etc.
When users select Function the dialog box in Figure 6.2.2 - 4, “Function Data dialog box,”
on page 141 is generated.
Figure : 6.2.2 - 4 Function Data dialog box

Select the column that is to be modified, then specify the row or range of rows to alter, and
enter a multiplier and a shift.
• Goto: allows users to move to any row in the file. The selected row becomes the top row in
the window.
• Clear: lets users clear the values from any cell or range of cells in any of the columns.
• Insert: lets users insert one or more rows before or after any point in the file.
• Copy: allows users to copy all the columns of data contained in the table to the clipboard.
These columns of data can be subsequently pasted into a spreadsheet (e.g. Excel).
• Paste: allows users to import columns of data from an external source via the ClipBoard. The
source data must consist of tab-separated columns. Users may bring data into any or all of the
columns displayed in the dialog box provided they are adjacent. If users are displaying time,
pressure and temperature as in See Section 6.2.2 - 3 “Edit Gauge Data dialog box”, on page
140, they may paste in all three columns, time and pressure, pressure and temperature, but not
time and temperature. Users may also paste in single columns.
The time may have any of the accepted formats (hours, hh:mm:ss, etc.) except minutes or
seconds. Time must be cumulative (i.e. it must not reset to zero at the start of each new day
unless it is in dd:hh:mm:ss format).
To bring in data this way, Edit Copy (or Ctrl+C) the tab-separated columns from the editor
being used (e.g. NotePad, Excel, etc.). Switch to PanSystem, place the cursor at the insertion
point corresponding to the top left of the block of data to be pasted in and click the Paste
button (do not use Ctrl+V). The Paste option will automatically translate the incoming time
format into the one chosen for display, if different.
Data will be pasted in from this point downwards and will overwrite existing data for as many
lines as are involved. If users do not wish to overwrite data, use the Insert option first, to
6. 2. 2. Edit
open up the appropriate number of empty lines, then use Paste.

• Delete: lets users delete one or more rows in the file.
• Time: lets users change the format of the time data (e.g. from hrs. to DD:HH:MM:SS). For
Time formats: See Section 6. 2. 1 “Import”, on page 129.
141
• Names: lets users assign new names to any of the columns.
• TPR Header: when importing gauge data, users may import the header of the file as well as
the measured data (see “File Header”, on page 131). The header (if any) associated with the
dataset being edited will be displayed here for reference.
Figure : 6.2.2 - 5 TPR Header information

Users may wish to edit the header, or copy it (block select, then Ctrl+C) and paste it (Ctrl+V)
into the Remarks section of the Report Cover Page (See Section 4. 4 “Report Cover Page”, on
page 87).
When users have finished editing the file, select OK. (Press Cancel to quit without saving the
changes that were made.) PanSystem returns to the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog
box (Figure 6.2.1 - 12, “Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog box after file import,” on page
138).
6. 2. 3. Rate Changes
Description:
These are events where the surface flowrate changes. This includes rate history (prior to a test,
perhaps before the gauge started recording), and rate variations during a test or sequence of tests.
When a particular test period is being analysed, PanSystem refers to the Rate Changes table to
compute superposition up to the start of that test period. Any rate variations during the test period
are read from the Master Rate Column. Generally, the gauge record will not include
simultaneously recorded rates (unless a flowmeter was run), so users will not have a Rate
Column as such. In this case, PanSystem will create a temporary rate column for users
automatically when they go into the Analysis section, by digitizing the manually-entered Rate
Change data.
Use the Rate Changes facility to enter, view or edit the table of rate changes for the selected well
and master data file (Figure 6. 1. 1, “Definitions of Data Types,” on page 125). Users will not be
able to analyze data if the associated Rate Change table has not been set-up with a least one
single flowing period.
Once entered, the rates are plotted as a step profile on the Data Edit plot (Figure 6.1.2 - 2, “Data
Edit Plot,” on page 128). The events are marked by arrows in the ruler bar and dashed vertical
lines on the plot.
142
If users have imported more than one gauge data file for a well, they should define a rate change
table for each file to be analyzed. To do this, select the file and its associated data columns as the
“masters” (See Section 6. 3 “Selecting Master Data For Analysis”, on page 155) and proceed as
explained below.
If users have more than one well defined, they should define rate changes separately for each
data file imported for each of the wells.
What to do
on page 138:
1. Select the well that rate changes are to be entered for, in the Well to edit box.
2. Select the Rate Changes button. The dialog box Figure 6.2.3 - 1, “Edit Rate Changes dialog
box,” on page 143 appears (shown here for a file whose rate changes have already been
entered).
3. Enter/edit the rate changes data. Users can edit any individual cell by highlighting it and
entering a new value. The editing buttons situated down the right-hand side of the dialog box
can also be used.
Users can scroll through a lengthy table using the scroll bar which will appear at the side of
the window if there are more than 16 lines in the table.
The buttons and table scrolling functions are discussed under point #12 in the previous
section. (See Section 6. 2. 2 “Edit”, on page 139.) The Transfer button is described at the end
of the current section.
Figure : 6.2.3 - 1 Edit Rate Changes dialog box
143
Note:
• The first entry (line 1) should be the start of the first flowing period in the recorded test, or the
start of its rate history if there was flow before the test was recorded. It should therefore have
a flowrate of zero. If it is the start of the test record, users should enter a pressure in the first
line. If it is the start of the flow history, with no recorded data, there is no need to enter an
initial pressure - PanSystem will estimate this for users during analysis. In the previous
figure, the actual welltest started at 5.8525 hrs clock time. The preceding lines represent
production and shut-in periods over approximately 26 days before the test.
• In each line, enter the flowrate leading up to the specified time. In the previous figure, the
first flowrate in the history was 30.915 MMscf/day from -620 to -616 hrs. The first flowrate
in the DST was 10.6481 MMscf/day from 5.8525 to 29.93667 hrs. The pressure at the start of
this flow period was 4518.296 psia.
• The pressure entered for the start of a flow period will be used in analysis as P0 ("pressure at
start of test"). This affects any diagnostic plot with ∆p on the y-axis, and any skin factor
computations which use P0.
Users should ensure that the correct pressure has been entered at the start of any flow
period they intend to analyse.
• For other periods, such as the history before the test, the pressure is unimportant and can be
left at zero.
• In a DST, users will not often know the initial pressure (line 1) at the start of the test - leave it
at zero or put in an estimate (it may be one of the things that users wish to obtain from the
analysis).
• The last line should correspond to the end of the last flow period. In the figure, the test ends
with a long shut-in period from 294.2717 to 813.21918 hrs. If users do not define the end of
the last period, its associated data will not be recognized in analysis.
• Enter negative rates for injection/fall off tests.
• For multi-phase flow (i.e. oil/water/gas), enter the oil flowrates. The rates of the other phases
will be computed from the water/oil and gas/oil ratios.
Transfer
The Transfer button provides a means of:
- importing rate change data from an external source. This is useful if the test has an
extensive history, and users already have the time and rate data in ASCII file format (e.g.
exported from a spreadsheet). This can also be achieved using the Copy and Paste buttons,
as described earlier on page 141.
- transferring a Rate Change Table that users have already entered for one dataset (e.g. an
upper gauge) into the Rate Changes Table they wish to set up for a second dataset (e.g.
lower gauge).
To import rate change data from an external source:
1. First load the time and rate record using the gauge data file Import option on the Pressure
and Rate Data Preparation dialog box (Figure 6.2.1 - 12, “Pressure and Rate Data
Preparation dialog box after file import,” on page 138). Follow the standard gauge data file
import procedure (See Section 6. 2. 1 “Import”, on page 129), specifying the appropriate
Time format, and Oil or Gas Flowrate with the appropriate column number. For example:
144
Figure : 6.2.3 - 2 : Importing a File of Allocated Rates

In Figure 6.2.3 - 2, “: Importing a File of Allocated Rates,” on page 145, the File Import
dialog box has been set-up to import the rate history for a gas welltest from a file RATES.TPR.
This has time in column 1 in days:hrs:mins:secs format, and the allocated rates for the well
over a period of several months prior to the test are in column 5. The rate column is to be
called “Allocated Rates” within PanSystem. No other data are needed, although other
channels could be read in from the file for reference in the same way as for any other file
import.
2. The rate history times should next be synchronized with the gauge clock times (or vice-
versa), using the Function shift facility in gauge data Edit (Figure 6.2.2 - 4, “Function Data
dialog box,” on page 141).
3. Now go to the Edit Rate Changes dialog box (Figure 6.2.3 - 1, “Edit Rate Changes dialog
box,” on page 143), and select the Transfer button.
Figure : 6.2.3 - 3 Rate Data Transfer dialog box

4. The Select rate column to use area will list the names of all files containing rate data. Select
the one that is required. In Figure 6.2.3 - 3, the file RATES.TPR has been selected, containing
the rate channel called Allocated rates.

5. Specify the time-rate format. The default option corresponds to PanSystem's internal format
where Time entries correspond to the Ends of Rate Periods. The illustration on the right-
hand side of the dialog (i.e. in the Example area), will change according to the option that
users select.
6. Enter a time for the start of the first flow period or the end of the last flow period, depending
on the format selected in 5). In Figure 6.2.3 - 3, the allocation history started at −2406 hrs.
gauge clock time.
145
The time entered here will be included as an extra line in the table, with an associated zero
rate. If the time format at Ends of Rate Periods is being used for the incoming data, this is
required to anchor the start of the rate history, because this will probably be missing from the
data being transferred. If the time format at Starts of Rate Periods is being used, it is required
to anchor the end of the rate history, for the same reason.
7. Now select OK to import the rate change data. They will be inserted before the beginning of
any existing rate changes in the table. If there are any time conflicts, users will receive a
warning message during transfer. Time conflicts can be rectified in the editor afterwards.
Figure : 6.2.3 - 4 Rate Change Table with Transferred Rate History

8. Check over the table and make any adjustments.
Note: Users can also use the Copy and Paste options described on page 141. The source data
should be three tab-separated columns: time-pressure-rate. If there are no pressure entries, set the
relevant data fields to zero, then Edit Copy or Ctrl-C the data to the Clipboard from a word-
processor (e.g. Notepad, etc.), then paste them into the Rate Changes Table.
To transfer an existing Rate Changes Table for one gauge into a new table
for another gauge:
1. Select the new gauge in the Master data file/columns area on the Pressure and Rate Data
Preparation dialog box.
2. Go to the Edit Rate Changes dialog box and select the Transfer button. Select the Rate
Changes set from the Select rate column to use list box. The data will be transferred into the
new Rate Changes Table.
6. 2. 4. Delete
Description:
Use this option to delete one or more columns of data from memory. It does not have any effect
on files stored on disk.
What to do:
on page 138:
1. Select the well associated with the data to be deleted (i.e. if more than one well has been
configured).
6. 2. 4. Delete
2. Select the Delete option. The dialog box in Figure 6.2.4 - 1, “Select Data to Delete dialog
box,” on page 147 is generated.
3. Select the data file that contains the columns to be deleted from the Data File to Delete box.
PanSystem then lists the columns of data in this file in the Columns to Delete box.
146
4. Select the columns to be deleted, or check the Delete all columns box if all the columns are
to be deleted. The selected columns are highlighted.
5. Select OK. The selected/highlighted columns are then deleted from memory.
Figure : 6.2.4 - 1 Select Data to Delete dialog box

If users select the data columns to be deleted before selecting the Delete button, the columns will
already be highlighted when users go to the Delete dialog box. This is illustrated above for two
columns in Figure 6.2.4 - 1.
6. 2. 5. Export
Description:
This option can be used at any time to export selected columns of data to a new gauge data file
(ASCII). It can be applied when gauge data has been edited and users want to save it as a separate
file. It can also be used to save selected columns of data from a multi-column file to a smaller
file.
Only the sampled (or re-sampled) gauge data are saved. To save any supporting fluid and
reservoir parameters with gauge data, users should save to the system file using the File Save or
Save as... commands.
What to do:
on page 138:
1. Select the well whose data is to be exported.

2. Select the Export option. The dialog box in Figure 6.2.5 - 1, “Export Data File dialog box,”
on page 148 is generated.
6. 2. 5. Export
147
Figure : 6.2.5 - 1 Export Data File dialog box

3. Use the Data File to Export box to select the data file containing the data to be exported.
4. Use the Time Format to Export box to select the time format to be used in the file to be
created.
5. Select the de-limiter for the columns of data to be exported (i.e space, comma or tab).
6. Under Column Numbers to Write To, specify the data that is to be written to column 1 of
the new file using the first drop-down list box. See Figure 6.2.5 - 2, “Setting Column
Contents of Export File,” on page 148. This would normally be Time.
Figure : 6.2.5 - 2 Setting Column Contents of Export File

7. Repeat step #6 for each column to be exported. By default, all the columns present in the
source file will be listed, but there is no need to export them all, or respect the same column
numbering or ordering. If users do not wish to export a particular data column, use the drop-
down list box and select Not Used.
8. Select all the columns required for editing, then select OK.
9. This will generate a Save As... type of dialog box. Enter a name and a path if different from
the default.
6. 2. 5. Export
148
This function is provided for setting up test design runs for use with the Advanced Simulation
option found on the Simulate menu. It will be grayed-out (i.e. disabled) if users do not have a
licence for the Advanced Simulation option (the Version 2.x equivalent of PanSim).
For test design, users specify a surface rate schedule and computation time-steps for the well, or
for each well, if more than one well is required, see Section 7. 5 “Well Control”, on page 189.
Advanced Simulation (See Section 14 “Advanced Simulation”, on page 470) will later compute
the response of the reservoir model (which must be defined fully, in terms of permeability, skin,
etc.) to these surface rates. The result is a prediction of flowing pressures and downhole
flowrates at each time-step.
What to do
Go to the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog box (Figure 6.2.1 - 12, “Pressure and
Rate Data Preparation dialog box after file import,” on page 138). If there is more than one well,
select the one which is to be the “Principal” well in the Well to edit list box. (This is usually Well
1 - See Section 7. 6. 4 “Active / Inactive”, on page 197)
Figure : 6.2.6 - 1 Select the "Principal" Well for Test Design Preparation
Test Design for Principal Well
Click Test Design on the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog box (Figure 6.2.1 - 12,
“Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog box after file import,” on page 138)
and the Edit Test Design dialog box (Figure 6.2.6 - 2, “Edit Test Design dialog box,” on page
150) appears.
149
Figure : 6.2.6 - 2 Edit Test Design dialog box

On the Edit Test Design dialog box, users have all the button functionality of the Edit Gauge
Data dialog box (See Section 6. 2. 2 “Edit”, on page 139 for more details of these buttons),
except Names, which is either grayed-out, or replaced by a Transfer button described at the end
of the current section.
1. In the first two columns, enter the time (cumulative) of each rate change, and the rate prior to
the change. Enter a negative rate for injection.
2. The first flow period is assumed to start at time = zero, so the first entry (line 1) must have a
time value > 0. If users want the test to begin at a later time, define the first line as a shut-in
(flowrate = 0) up to this time.
3. In Column 3, enter the number of time-steps required in each flow period.
4. In Column 4, enter the spacing format of the time-steps. This is done according to the
following convention:
1= Linear (divide flow period into equally spaced steps)

2=Logarithmic, first step 0.001 hours
In the example illustrated in Figure 6.2.6 - 2, “Edit Test Design dialog box,” on page 150, there
is a 10-hr drawdown at 200 STB/day , in 50 logarithmically-spaced steps with the first step at
0.001 hours. The 20-hr buildup has 50 logarithmically steps with the first at 10 + 0.001 hrs.
150
Linear time-stepping is recommended (but not mandatory) if users are looking particularly at
wellbore storage, or the pseudo-steady-state part of an extended drawdown in a closed reservoir,
with both of these flow regimes being essentially linear with time. If users want to apply the
option to incorporate “real gauge characteristics” (resolution, noise and/or drift) in the simulated
pressure (Section “5. 4 Gauge Details”, on page 117), EPS recommend using a large number of
linearly spaced time-steps to get the best effect. Otherwise, use logarithmic spacing.
It is possible to mix logarithmic and linear spacings, and a flow period can be sub-divided into
different step formats.
Exit the screen and the Test Design Names dialog box is generated as shown in Figure 6.2.6 - 3,
“Test Design Names dialog box,” on page 151).
Figure : 6.2.6 - 3 Test Design Names dialog box

Enter a name for the internal Data File that will be created (default name TEST DESIGN), and
for the Rate Column (default name Test Rate).
The Initial Wellbore Pressure is defaulted to the pressure of Layer 1, but can be changed if
desired. This is a wellbore pressure - if this is different from the layer pressure(s), Advanced
Simulation will compute production (if underbalanced) or injection (if overbalanced) during the
early time-steps.
On selecting OK, a data column is created with times and surface rates entered according to the
test design schedule that has been specified.
Figure : 6.2.6 - 4 Surface flowrate column created for Well 1

This will be used to drive the Advanced Simulation.
The time-steps can be viewed or edited via the Edit button, in the same way as any other data
columns:
151
Figure : 6.2.6 - 5 Well 1 time-steps for Test Design

Transfer:
If users already have a gauge data file loaded, and have set-up a Rate Change table for analysis,
the greyed-out Names button will be replaced by a Transfer button.
Figure : 6.2.6 - 6 Transfer Button in Test Design Edit

The Transfer option allows users to copy the rate change times and flowrates directly from the
Rate Changes table. Users should then type in the number of time-steps per flow period and the
stepping format as described earlier in this section.
This facility is useful when Adv Sim is to be applied for history matching against gauge data, but
instead of using the gauge clock times for response generation, users want to specify the time-
steps themselves. This might be preferable if the gauge clock times are irregularly spaced (using
Test Design provides a regular spacing), or there may be too many points (users can control the
number of steps in Test Design).
152
Test Design for Interfering Wells
If users have multiple wells, they can either enter new times and flowrates for each well
independently, or use the time-steps created for the “Principal” well and just enter the different
flowrates. Proceed as follows:
Select an interfering well (i.e. one that is not the “Principal”) in the Well to edit box. (See Section
7. 5 “Well Control”, on page 189.)
Figure : 6.2.6 - 7 Select an interfering well

Select the Test Design button
and the following dialog box will be generated:
• No: If users answer No (the default - and recommended - choice), a dialog box will prompt
for data names:
Figure : 6.2.6 - 8 Test Design Names dialog box for Well 2

In Figure 6.2.6 - 8, the surface Rate Column name has been entered as Well 2 Qsurf. The Data
File name has defaulted to TEST DESIGN, but can be changed if desired.
The Initial Wellbore Pressure has defaulted to the pressure of Layer 1, but can also be changed
if desired.
153
An edit screen will then appear:
Figure : 6.2.6 - 9 Entering the Surface Rates for Well 2

Type in the surface rate schedule for the well (assumed to start at time = zero). In this example,
the well will be producing at 7.5 MMscf/day for 50 hrs. (the duration of the period to be
simulated at Well 1). Now select OK.
• Yes: If users answer Yes (only recommended if a rate is to be entered at every time-step) a
dialog box will prompt for data names and initial wellbore pressure in the same way as for
No.
The edit screen that appears next is the same as for No, but will list all the time-steps of the
principal well. Type in the interfering well rates (where non-zero) at each time (the Function
option can be used for block entries of the same rate value):
Figure : 6.2.6 - 10 Entering Well 2 surface rates against the time-steps

This is obviously the more tedious approach, and would not normally be used. Both approaches
will result in the creation of a surface rate column for the well:
Figure : 6.2.6 - 11 Surface flowrate column created for Well 2

The surface rate data for Well 2 has the name "Well 2 Qsurf" in this example, and it is part of the
Well 2 data group called TEST DESIGN.
Regardless of which entry mode is used (Yes or No), the surface rate schedule for interfering
wells will be sampled only at the time-steps of the principal well for simulation purposes. The No
option is the quickest way of entering data and can be used in most situations.
If users have already set-up the well, layer, fluid and boundary parameters, they are now ready to
proceed to the Advanced Simulation option under the Simulate menu option (See Section 14
“Advanced Simulation”, on page 470).
154
6.3. Selecting Master Data For Analysis
Description:
The selection of the "Master" data file/columns has two main purposes:
1. They are the data on which analysis will be performed. If users have more than one gauge
record to analyse, select each in turn as "Master".
2. They are the "target" file/columns for some data preparation functions (e.g. the Copy and
Paste functions work by pasting into the nominated master file/columns, as appropriate).
Users may need to temporarily re-define a file as the "Master" file during data preparation in
order to paste data into it.
What to do:
• Select the well to analyse in the Well to Edit panel if data for several wells has been loaded
(refer to Figure 6.2.1 - 12, “Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog box after file import,”
on page 138).
• Select the "Master" Data File in the Master data file/columns area (Figure 6.3.0 - 1,
“Selection of Master data file and columns,” on page 155). This is the file to be analyzed.
Figure : 6.3.0 - 1 Selection of Master data file and columns

If the well has only one gauge data file assigned to it, there will be no choice of files.
Otherwise, all the data files assigned to the well will be listed in the combo box.
6. 3. Selecting Master Data For Analysis

The Rate Changes table associated with the selected master data set will be invoked
automatically, provided the table(s) have already been set-up (See Section 6. 2. 3 “Rate
Changes”, on page 142).
• Select the Master Pressure and Master Rate columns in the selected file. The available
pressure and rate columns are listed (if several are present) in the combo boxes. If the master
rate column is set to Rate changes, the rate data will be taken from the Rate Changes table
(See Section 6. 2. 3 “Rate Changes”, on page 142).
Note: if more than one gauge data record is available under the selected master data file name,
and users select a different master pressure or rate column, the Rate Changes table will be
updated automatically by re-sampling the gauge record at the rate change times specified in the
table. The message box displayed below will be generated. (This situation is only likely to arise
if users have generated a simulated response using Adv Sim to match measured data - in this case
the simulated data will appear under the same master file name and will share the same rate
change times (but not necessarily the same pressures)).
155
Figure : 6.3.0 - 2 Automatic Rate Change Table adjustment
6.4. Selecting the Data For Plotting

Before the functions on the tool bar can be used, the data needs to be plotted on screen. This is
controlled by the two list boxes in the centre of the dialog box (see Figure 6.2.1 - 12, “Pressure
and Rate Data Preparation dialog box after file import,” on page 138).
What to do:
1. Select the well whose data is to be plotted from the Well to edit box.
2. Select the columns to be plotted by selecting them in the Data File/Column List box.
3. Select the Add to list button. The selected files are now listed in the List to plot box.
4. Select the Plot button. The data are plotted in the Data Edit plot (see Figure 6.1.2 - 2, “Data
Edit Plot,” on page 128).
To change which data are plotted in the Data Edit plot, add data by selecting in the Data File/
Column List box, then selecting the Add to list button, or remove data by selecting in the List
to plot box , then selecting Remove From List.
6.5. Data Edit Plot and Tool Bar

6. 5. 1. General Use of Data Edit Plot and Toolbar
In addition to editing gauge data using the options in the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation
dialog box, users can edit data graphically in the Data Edit plot. This plot has the following
Toolbar of functions.
6. 4. Selecting the Data For Plotting

Below the Toolbar is the Ruler Bar:
The tools are arranged as follows, from left to right:

• 2 zoom tools
• 6 data reduction tools: delete, reduce, initialise, undo, confirm and number of points
• 3 data patching tools: copy & paste block, copy & paste column, copy & create new column
• 2 gauge quality tools: shift and difference
• 4 Rate Change tools: exact cursor point, nearest data point, intersect lines, auto flow periods
• 3 flowrate tools: generate flowrate column, group flow periods, ungroup flow periods
• 3 tidal filter tools: mode, lag and apply (see “Tidal Filter”, on page 302).
156
The Ruler Bar is used to select Rate Changes or Test Periods for editing. It also displays Flow
Periods. See Section 6. 6 “The Ruler Bar”, on page 181.
Most of the tools operate by selecting points or ranges of data and then selecting the relevant tool
button. Users select:
• ...individual points on the plot by pointing at them and clicking the mouse button. A selected
point becomes a solid square Figure 6.5.1 - 1, “Selected Points and Drag Box,” on page 157,
left).
• ...ranges of data by holding down the left mouse button and dragging a box round the points
to be selected (Figure 6.5.1 - 1, “Selected Points and Drag Box,” on page 157, right).
• ...Rate Changes by clicking the arrow once in the lower half of the ruler bar. Move them by
dragging. If users hold down the Ctrl key and click a Rate Change arrow, the Rate Change
dialog box will be generated. This is described under Figure 6.5.15 - 1, “Rate Change dialog
box,” on page 171.
• ...Test Periods by clicking the upper half of the ruler bar above the plot. To select several
contiguous test periods, hold down the Shift key, and slide the mouse pointer over the test
periods required.
Figure : 6.5.1 - 1 Selected Points and Drag Box
6. 5. 2. Zoom in
Use Zoom In to expand the selected part of the plot (within the box) for easier editing.
Acts on:
The drag box. Draw the box with the mouse pointer, holding down the left mouse button, then
click the Zoom in icon.
6. 5. 3. Zoom Normal
Use Zoom Normal to return a zoomed plot to normal size - that is, to the scaling that it had
when it was first plotted.
6. 5. 2. Zoom in
Acts on:
The whole plot.
157
6. 5. 4. Delete
Use Delete to delete a selected point or a selected area of the plot.
- Select a point or points with the mouse. Selected points become squares,
or/
- draw a box with the mouse pointer, holding down the left mouse button.
The Delete function erases all measured data associated with a deleted point. For instance, if
users delete a pressure point, the flowrate, temperature and any other gauge reading at the same
clock time will also be deleted.
Acts on:
The dragged box and any selected points.
6. 5. 5. Data Reduction and Smoothing

Use Data Reduction and smoothing to reduce the number of points in the file or in a
selected portion of the file, and to smooth out noise. Oscillations induced by ocean tides can
often be more effectively removed using this facility than by using the tidal filter.
Acts on:
Three possibilities:
- draw a box with the mouse pointer, holding down the left mouse button, and then reduce/
smooth the data in the box,
- select a single test period (if any have been defined), by clicking the upper half of the ruler
bar above the plot, or several contiguous test periods by holding down the Shift key and
sliding the mouse pointer over the test periods required, and then reduce/smooth their data,
- do not select or draw anything, and then reduce/smooth the entire data set.
When users select this option the Enter Reduction/Smoothing Details dialog box appears.
Users may elect to reduce the data, smooth the data, or both (in which case it will smooth first,
then reduce).
6. 5. 4. Delete
158
Reduction
Firstly, an explanation of the data reduction area on the left-hand side of the dialog:
Figure : 6.5.5 - 1 Enter Reduction Details dialog box

Check the reduction option to be used and complete the fields in the bottom panel as necessary.
• Keep every nth point - In the bottom panel, users will need to specify a value for n (e.g. keep
every 5th point).
• Delete every nth point - In the bottom panel, users will need to specify a value for n (e.g.

delete every 5th point).
• Re-sample by delta signal - this requires a signal column to be selected from the list box in
the lower area (Figure 6.5.5 - 2, “Data reduction by Delta-Signal (Pressure in this case),” on
page 160). Enter the delta-signal value (e.g. if a value of 0.1 psi is entered for a pressure
column then, starting from the first data point in the selected portion of the plot (if any), the
re-sampling filter will only retain points at a spacing of 0.1 psi (or the next nearest to that if
there is no point at the exact spacing)). The first and last points in the reduction interval are
always retained.
• Re-sample by delta time - in the lower area, enter the delta-time to re-sample at (e.g. for
0.01 hrs., starting from the first data point in the plot (or a selected portion of the plot), the re-
sampling filter will only retain points at a spacing of 0.01 hrs (or the next nearest to that if
there is no point at the exact time)). The first and last points in the reduction interval are
always retained.
159
• Re-sample to n points per log cycle - in the lower area, enter the number of points per log
cycle of time that are to be kept. This will produce logarithmically-spaced data. If users have
defined several flow periods and they do not select any particular one, the logarithmic filter
will sweep through the entire test, but will re-start the spacing logic at each rate change,
thereby giving a useful logarithmic spacing in each period. Alternatively, users may select
individual periods for reduction. The first and last points in the reduction interval are always
retained.
Figure : 6.5.5 - 2 Data reduction by Delta-Signal (Pressure in this case)

• Dual logarithmic and nth point reduction - this will apply Re-sample to n points per log
cycle reduction and Keep every nth point reduction in parallel, and combine the points
remaining from each. The first and last points in the reduction interval are always retained. In
the lower area, enter values for the nth point to keep and Points per log cycle.
Reduced Output File: a new reduced data set will be created, leaving the original data set intact

in case users wish to return to it. A default prefix RD1 will be added to the file name. When users
return to the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog, they will see the new file containing the
reduced data columns:
Users may quickly restore the points deleted by the very last reduction operation by selecting the
Undo icon (“Undo”, on page 164). To restore the points deleted by all the reduction operations
performed on the selected file, click the Initialise icon (“Initialize”, on page 164).
160
Smoothing
The purpose of the smoothing option is to improve the signal-to-noise ratio of one or several
selected time series (pressure, rate, temperature, etc.).
Figure : 6.5.5 - 3 Enter Smoothing Details dialog box

Columns to smooth - Choose one or more columns from the list of available data. PanSystem
will assign default prefixes to the smoothed output columns (e.g. if the input column is called
Pressure, the default smoothed output will be SM1 Pressure. A second smoothing operation on
Pressure will create a default output column SM2 Pressure, and so on. (A second smoothing
operation on SM1 Pressure will create a default output column SM1 SM1 Pressure)). Users may

alter the output names via the Names… button if desired.
Creating a new data column for the smoothed data means that the unsmoothed data still exists
and can be recovered if necessary. The Initialise and Undo icons mentioned at the end of the
previous section on data reduction do NOT remove the effects of smoothing.
161
Figure : 6.5.5 - 4 Smoothed Column Names dialog box

The smoothing algorithm is a local linear estimator based on nearest neighbours, i.e. a smoothed
estimate of the data is constructed by local linear regression about each point in the time series.
Window Span determines the degree of smoothing, and represents the fraction of the data points
(in the entire test, selected test period, or box if drawn) that are to be used in the local least-
squares fit. For example, suppose there are N = 50 points and the window span Sp = 0.1. The
number of nearest neighbour points to be used in the filter will be calculated as Mspan = 50 x 0.1
= 5.
Suppose the smoothing filter is at data point (tn, pn). First the Mspan nearest neighbours to the
current data point are found. Next, a least-squares line is fitted to the set consisting of the current
data point and its nearest neighbours. If the equation of this straight line is:
p = at + c
then the value of the smoothed data point at tn is calculated as:

p˜n = at n + c

This process is carried out for all data points, resulting in a new series of smoothed points ( tn, p̃ n ) .
The figure below shows this situation at a data point (tn, pn):
Current data point (tn, pn)
Best fit to current

data point and its 5
nearest neighbours
Pressure
Smoothed data point
Time
The nature of the local line-fitting is governed by the Weight Basis and Weighting Shape in the
Smoothing Type area.
162
Weight Basis:
• Linear time will select the Mspan points which are nearest to tn in real time (ti−tn).
• Log time selects the Mspan points which are nearest to tn in logarithmic time (logti−logtn).
With high density data acquisition, users will probably not see much difference between the two
methods. The Log time option is recommended for a logarithmically (or delta-p) sampled gauge,
where the raw data will appear fairly evenly spaced in log time.
Weighting Shape:
Each point in the group of Mspan is multiplied by a weight, w, for the local least-squares estimate.
Points further from the current data point are assigned less weight than points nearer to it. The
functions used for calculating the weights are:
• Peaked - this discriminates strongly against points (ti) not immediately adjacent to the current
point (tn):
10
  t −t 
2

w (ti − t n , δ max ) =  1 −  i n  
  δ max  
 
where δ m a x is the distance from the current data point to the farthest data point in the Mspan group.
• Distributed - the weighting is more evenly distributed over the Mspan group, with a less
severe discrimination against the remoter points. The “tri-cube kernel” weighting function is:
3
  t −t 
3

w (ti − t n , δ max ) =  1 −  i n  
  δ 
  max  
δ m ax is defined above.
Minimise End Effect attempts to reduce any artificial end-effects that result from smoothing.
These are most easily seen on the Log-Log plot as kicks at the end of the derivative. The end

effect minimization gradually reduces the number of nearest neighbours from Mspan to 1 as the
end of the data set is approached. This is done in reverse at the start of the data set, where the
number of nearest neighbours is increased from 1 initially to Mspan .
163
.
Figure : 6.5.5 - 5 Smoothing Example - Real Data
6. 5. 6. Initialize
Use Initialize to cancel the effect of all data deletions and reductions. If users have
performed the Confirm function (see Section 6. 5. 8 “Confirm”, on page 164), Initialize will
only return the data to the status it had when last confirmed, restoring all changes made since
then. PanSystem writes the reduced data set to a new file, so the original data does in fact remain
intact in a separate file (see Section 6. 5. 5 “Data Reduction and Smoothing”, on page 158),
should users need to return to it.
Acts on:
All plotted files.
6. 5. 7. Undo
Use Undo to undo the last single data reduction or deletion that was performed. To recover
data removed in earlier data reductions use the Initialize option (described above). Users can
only recover data in this way as far back as the last time they selected the Confirm tool
(described below).
Acts on:
All plotted files.
6. 5. 8. Confirm
The Data Reduction and Deletion functions actually only tag the selected data internally for
6. 5. 6. Initialize
possible erasure - the points are still retrievable by the Undo and Initialize tools. The Confirm
tool is used to confirm that the data is definitely going to be compressed and erase the points
permanently.
In particular, use Confirm before saving a PAN file following reduction of a large dataset, or the
points tagged for deletion will still be present (though invisible).
164
Deleted data will be removed by the Confirm operation. Neither the Initialize nor Undo
functions will be able to restore data to its previous state once a Confirm operation has been
made. However, PanSystem writes the reduced data set to a new file, so the original data does in
fact remain intact in a separate file (see Section 6. 5. 5 “Data Reduction and Smoothing”, on page
158) and can be recovered easily should users need to return to it.
If users are working with more than 160,000 points, and have re-sampled to less than this,
PanSystem will automatically try to transfer the reduced data set to memory on Confirm. If users
do not have sufficient memory, Windows will page from disk as necessary.
Subsequent editing operations become considerably faster once the data are in memory.
Acts on:
All plotted files.
6. 5. 9. Number
Use Number to display the number of non-deleted data points in a selected test period or
periods, or in the entire plot if no test periods have been selected. See Section 6. 5. 8 “Confirm”,
on page 164 for information on the performance implications of the number of points.
Acts on:
The selected test period or the whole data if no flow period selected.
6. 5. 10. Copy and Paste a Section of Data (including Time) from

Another File
Use Copy and Paste from a Section of Data (incl. Time) to patch a section of one file into
another file. All data columns, including times, will be copied over, obliterating any data already
present in the corresponding section of the target file. This tool can also be used to copy and paste
onto the beginning or end of the target file.
If the source file has fewer columns of data than the target file, the missing data will be pasted in
as zeroes. If it has more columns than the target, the extra columns will not be copied over.
Acts on:
An area defined by the drag-box (all data in the time interval spanned by of the box). The
operation is only enabled when two files are plotted. The target file for the patch is the file that
has been selected as "Master" data file. The source file for the data is the other plotted file. All
columns of the target file will be patched (i.e. will have data pasted in, or zeroes if there is no
corresponding data in the source file).
The source data is left intact in the source file - it is copied, not cut.
What to do:
1. Select the target data file to receive the patch as the “master” data file (See Section 6. 3
6. 5. 9. Number
“Selecting Master Data For Analysis”, on page 155).

2. Plot the master data file and the file to be used as the source for the patch (it is enough just to
plot their pressures, no need to plot everything - any other data will be copied over anyway).
3. Select the time range to copy and paste by dragging a box around it. If users do not draw a
box, the entire plotted time interval will be used.
165
4. Select the Copy and Paste tool. A dialog box similar to Figure 6.5.10 - 1, “Copy and Paste
dialog box,” on page 166 is generated.
Figure : 6.5.10 - 1 Copy and Paste dialog box

5. The columns of the master file are listed on the right (the target). The columns of the source
file are listed by corresponding type on the left (e.g. pressure alongside pressure, rate
6. 5. 11. Copy, Re-sample and Paste a Single Column from Another File
alongside rate, etc.).
Where there is a choice of source data columns of a particular type, select one from the drop-
down menu. Figure 6.5.10 - 1, shows that in the source file TEST DESIGN there are three
possible columns of rate data that could be patched into the Rate #1 column of the target file
NEW TPR. Select one of them. If users do not want to transfer data, select ZERO OUT, and
zeroes will be patched in.
Where there is no corresponding type in the source file, only ZERO OUT will be available. In
Figure 6.5.10 - 1, source file TEST DESIGN has no temperature data.
Time is always pasted across, replacing the times in the corresponding interval of the target
file.
6. Select OK. The selected data are copied and pasted to the destination file.
6. 5. 11. Copy, Re-sample and Paste a Single Column from
Another File
This function copies a single column of data from one file into the corresponding column in
another file. If the times of the two sets of data are not identical, then the incoming data are re-
sampled (by linear interpolation) at the times in the receiving file.
Acts on:
An area defined by the drag-box (all data in the time interval spanned by of the box). The
operation is only enabled when two files are plotted. The target file for the paste is the file that
has been selected as "Master" data file. The source file for the data is a second plotted file.
Data in the selected column in the target file are replaced by the incoming data, which will be re-
sampled to match the target file times. Other data in the target file are not affected.
The source data is left intact in the source file - it is copied, not cut.
What to do:
1. Select the target data file to receive the paste as the “Master” data file (See Section 6. 3
166
2. Plot the two data columns to be used in the operation (the target data column is in the
“Master” file, and the source data column is in the other file).
3. Select the time range to copy and paste by drawing a box around it. If users do not draw a
box, the entire plotted time interval will be used.
4. Select the Copy, Re-sample and Paste tool. A dialog box similar to Figure 6.5.11 - 1,
“Column Copy, Resample & Paste dialog box,” on page 167 is generated.
Figure : 6.5.11 - 1 Column Copy, Resample & Paste dialog box

5. The plotted columns of the master data file are listed on the right, under Paste into... Select
the target data column, if more than one has been plotted. The source column(s) of the
corresponding type are in the list box on the left, under Copy from... Select the source data
column, if more than one has been plotted.
In the Figure, the Test Rate data in file TEST DESIGN will be pasted into the Rate#1 data
column of file NEW TPR, with re-sampling at the times in NEW TPR as necessary.
6. 5. 12. Copy, Re-sample a Column to Create a New Column

6. Select OK.
6. 5. 12. Copy, Re-sample a Column to Create a New Column
This function copies values of a single column from one file into a new column in another
file. If the times of the two files are not the same, then the incoming data are re-sampled (by
linear interpolation) at the times in the receiving file.
Acts on:
The whole time-span of the master data file. The target file for paste is the "Master" data file. The
operation is only enabled when data from the target and source files are plotted.
Other data in the target file are not affected. The source data is left intact in the source file - it is
copied, not cut.
What to do:
1. Select the target data file to receive the paste as the “master” data file (See Section 6. 3
2. Plot the source data column, and any column from the master (target) file, so that both files
are on-screen. (Since the target column does not yet exist, users must plot something else
from the target file.)
3. There is no need to draw a box; the entire target file time interval will be used.
167
4. Select the Copy, Re-sample and Create tool. A dialog box similar to Figure 6.5.12 - 1,
“Copy, Re-sample and Create Column dialog box,” on page 168 is generated.
Figure : 6.5.12 - 1 Copy, Re-sample and Create Column dialog box

5. The plotted column(s) of the source data file are listed on the left, under Copy from... Select
the source data column, if more than one has been plotted. Type a name for the new data
column to be created in the target file, under Create new column...
In the Figure, the Test Rate data in file TEST DESIGN will be copied into file EX2 to create a
new data column called New Rate Column, with re-sampling at the times in EX2 as
necessary.
6. Select OK.
6. 5. 13. Shift
Use Shift to shift selected data. The data can be shifted in three ways - by time, by signal
value or by both. Users can shift an entire dataset or a portion of it. The shift can be made
graphically by dragging the data, or users can type in exact shift values.
Acts on:
Any plotted column can be selected for shifting. The whole of a selected data column can be
shifted, or a drag box can be used to mark and shift a portion of the data). If a time shift is made,
then all columns in the file are shifted by the same amount (so they remain synchronized).
1. Generate the Data Edit Plot, and include the column to be shifted.
2. If users only want to shift a portion of the data, draw a box round it, otherwise the whole data
set will be shifted.
If a large number of points are plotted and users want to shift them all, the process can be
speeded-up by drawing a box around a small portion of the data (e.g. some correlatable
event). Users can manoeuvre this box to the correct position quite rapidly (with reduced re-
draw time), then apply the shift to the rest of the data.
3. Click the Shift tool. The dialog box in Figure 6.5.13 - 1, “Shift Data dialog box,” on page 168
is generated and prompts users to select how they would like to shift the data.
6. 5. 13. Shift
Figure : 6.5.13 - 1 Shift Data dialog box
168
If users have drawn a box round a portion of the data, they can elect to shift just this portion by
checking the Shift Only Data Within Box checkbox option. Otherwise, the shift will be applied to
the whole dataset.
4. Select the option for shifting:
• Time only - the data values stay the same, but users can move them with respect to time.
• Signal only - the time stays the same but users can shift the signal vertically.
• Both time and signal - move the data in any direction.
5. Select the Column to shift. Remember that time-shifts will be applied to all columns in the
same file.
6. If users want to shift the data graphically by dragging it, proceed to the next step now. To shift
by a precisely specified amount, check the Type in value(s) checkbox and enter the Time
and/or Signal shift.
7. Select OK.
8. If users have typed in the shift parameters, the plot will be re-drawn with the shift(s) in place.
If users are doing a graphical shift, left-click and drag the data until it is in the required
position. Note the following:
•The cursor changes to a double- or four-headed arrow to indicate the permitted directions
of shifting.
• The cumulative shift(s) relative to the starting position are shown in the status bar below
the plot during the current shift session.

• The Esc key cancels the current shift and exits shift mode, so nothing is changed.
• The Shift button stays depressed and no other command or button can be used until the
button is released at the end of the shift.

8. When the data has been shifted, click the Shift button again to disable the shift option.
6. 5. 14. Difference
Use Difference to create a third column of data by taking the difference between two
existing columns of data.
Acts on:
The two columns of data must be plotted. They may be in the same file or in different files, but
must be of the same type (e.g. both pressures). If users take the difference between pressure PA
in file A and PB in file B:
Difference = PA− PB
6. 5. 14. Difference
the Difference data column will be created in file A.
What to do:
1. Plot the two columns to be differenced. Other data may be plotted as well.
2. Click the Difference tool. The dialog box in Figure 6.5.14 - 1, “Generate Difference dialog
box,” on page 170 is generated.
169
Figure : 6.5.14 - 1 Generate Difference dialog box

3. Use the drop-down list boxes to choose the columns to be differenced. The difference column
will be written in the file selected in the left-hand list box. Enter a name for the new
difference column.
4. Select OK. The difference column will be plotted on the screen. The difference column will
also appear in the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog box and the Dataprep
functions discussed earlier in this chapter can be used to edit it, just like any other data.
6. 5. 15. Exact Point for Flow Period Definition
Use Exact Point for Flow Period Definition to define the Rate Changes at the start and
end of the different flow periods (See Section 6. 2. 3 “Rate Changes”, on page 142). This
function marks a Rate Change at the exact cursor position, whether it coincides with a data point
or not. (To pick an exact data point, use the Nearest Point tool described in the next section.)
PanSystem stores the co-ordinates in the Rate Changes table for use in analysis.
lines on the plot.
6. 5. 15. Exact Point for Flow Period Definition

Acts on:
This tool only acts on the selected “Master” File for the well (Figure 6. 3, “Selecting Master Data
For Analysis,” on page 155). This tool can only be used with a single data file plotted, and this
must be the “Master” file.
What to do
1. With the appropriate master data plotted, select the tool. It will normally be de-activated after
a rate change event has been picked. To mark several rate changes, hold down the Ctrl key
when the tool is selected with the left mouse button, or simply click it with the right button.
This will lock the tool on. Click the tool again to de-activate it.
2. Users can read the co-ordinates of the cursor position in the status bar.
3. When users click at a position on the plot, a dialog box is generated, showing the co-ordinates
of that position (Figure 6.5.15 - 1, “Rate Change dialog box,” on page 171). Users can edit
these values if desired. A flowrate will probably need to be typed in, but if users have a rate
column in the “Master” data file, the nearest value to the time that has been picked will
appear in the dialog box.
170
Figure : 6.5.15 - 1 Rate Change dialog box

4. Select OK to confirm, and the rate change co-ordinates will be transferred to the Rate
Change table. The event is now marked by an arrow on the ruler bar above the plot.
Press Delete to abort the pick (not Cancel!).
Users can access the Rate Change dialog box at any time for editing by holding down the Ctrl
key and clicking the left mouse button on the arrow in the Ruler Bar - See Section 6. 6 “The
Ruler Bar”, on page 181.
Users can also define and edit flow periods by tabular entry using the Rate Changes Table
facility (See Section 6. 2. 3 “Rate Changes”, on page 142).
6. 5. 16. Nearest Point for Flow Period Definition

Use Nearest Point for Flow Period Definition to define the Rate Changes at the start
and end of the different flow periods (See Section 6. 2. 3 “Rate Changes”, on page 142). This
function marks a Rate Change at the pressure data point nearest to the cursor position.
PanSystem stores the co-ordinates in the Rate Changes table for use in analysis.
6. 5. 16. Nearest Point for Flow Period Definition

lines on the plot.
This tool is otherwise the same as the Exact Point for Flow Period Definition tool (See Section
6. 5. 15 “Exact Point for Flow Period Definition”, on page 170 for details).
Acts on:
This tool only acts on the selected Master File for the well (See Section 6. 3 “Selecting Master
Data For Analysis”, on page 155). This tool can only be used with a single data file plotted, and
this must be the “Master” file.
Users can access the Rate Change dialog box at any time for editing by holding down the Ctrl
key and clicking the left mouse button on the arrow in the Ruler Bar - See Section 6. 6 “The
Ruler Bar”, on page 181.
Users can also define and edit flow periods by tabular entry using the Rate Changes Table facility
(See Section 6. 2. 3 “Rate Changes”, on page 142).
171
6. 5. 17. Define Point from Intersection
Use Define point from intersection to define the Rate Changes at the start and end of the
different flow periods (See Section 6. 2. 3 “Rate Changes”, on page 142). This function marks a
Rate Change at the intersection of two lines which are fitted through four points, two on either
side of the rate change.
Acts on:
This tool only acts on the selected Master File for the well (See Section 6. 3 “Selecting Master
Data For Analysis”, on page 155). This tool can only be used with a single data file plotted, and
this must be the “Master” file.
What to do
1. Plot the appropriate master data on the Data Edit plot.
2. Select four points, two on either side of where the rate change occurs.
3. Click the Define point from intersection tool. Two lines will be fitted automatically through
the points, and their intersection will be calculated.
The Rate Changes dialog (Figure 6.5.15 - 1, “Rate Change dialog box,” on page 171) is
generated. Enter a value for the Rate and select OK.
Figure : 6.5.17 - 1 Defining a Rate Change Event from the Intersection

of Two Lines on the Pressure Data
Users may right-click on the lines and move them if they wish to revise the position of the
rate change. Select the Define point from intersection button again, then select OK to
confirm the new position. Select Delete to erase the event.
6. 5. 17. Define Point from Intersection

The lines will disappear when users left-click anywhere in the plot area.
4. The event is now marked by an arrow on the ruler bar above the plot, and the rate change co-
ordinates will be transferred to the Rate Change table.
If users choose four points which straddle an existing rate change, then a new rate change is not
introduced - instead the existing one is shifted to the new intersection.
Users can access the Rate Change dialog box (Figure 6.5.15 - 1, “Rate Change dialog box,” on
page 171) to edit the co-ordinates of the event at any time by holding down the Ctrl key and
clicking the left mouse button on the arrow in the Ruler Bar - See Section 6. 6 “The Ruler Bar”,
on page 181.
Users can also define and edit flow periods by tabular entry using the Rate Changes Table
facility (See Section 6. 2. 3 “Rate Changes”, on page 142).
172
6. 5. 18. Automatically Generate Flow Periods
Use Auto Flow Period to invoke an automatic pick of the Rate Change Times from the
pressure change events. Where a "Master" Rate Channel is available, the measured rate values
will be picked up at the event times too. Any existing Rate Changes will be deleted unless a
zoom box has been drawn first, in which case the automatic pick facility will only operate within
the box, leaving any existing Rate Changes lying outside the box untouched.
Acts on:
The Rate Changes can be picked from:
• The entire test (any existing rate change markers will be cleared).
• A portion in the zoom box (any existing rate changes outside the zoom box will be retained,
any inside the zoom box will be deleted).
• Within an existing flow period or test period, if highlighted in the ruler bar. This takes
priority over a zoom box, if both are present.
What to do:
When the button is selected, an dialog is generated (Figure 6.5.18 - 1, “Automatic Flow Period
Generation dialog box,” on page 173), in which the user can select two criteria:

Figure : 6.5.18 - 1 Automatic Flow Period Generation dialog box
Pressure Gradient Threshold: This represents the minimum ratio of slopes required to
qualify as a potential Rate Change Event. Referring to the diagram below, at data point (j),
the forward difference slope to point (j+1) is compared with the backward difference slope to
point (j-1).
If the absolute of the ratio (or of the inverse ratio), exceeds the specified value, then point (j)
qualifies as a potential “event”, subject to the noise check described below. A default value
of 5 is a good starting point, but the best value will depend on the data. The slope ratio has
the advantage of being, to some extent, normalized for any test, and is also independent of
units.
173
Noise Threshold: If point (j) has been identified as a potential event from the slope ratio
criterion described above, it is necessary to check the difference between pressures (Pj) and
(Pj+2), to see if a “significant” pressure change ensues. This distinguishes between a minor
wobble or noise (i.e. small pressure change) and a real Rate Change (i.e. large pressure
change). If |(Pj - Pj+2)| exceeds the noise threshold, point (j) is marked as a Rate Change.
Note: The Noise Threshold criterion works best when there is a large change in pressure
between the Rate Change point and the next Data Point, as is often the case. It works less
well when there is a high sampling rate and the pressure changes slowly.
In addition to handling genuine gauge and background noise, the Noise Threshold can be
used to discriminate against minor wobbles in the pressure record caused by wellbore effects,
surface activities, etc. The user should inspect the test data to get a feel for what is, or is not
considered to be a significant pressure change.
Once a Rate Change has been identified, the automatic pick facility is disabled until the slope
ratio falls below the specified value again. This is necessary to prevent spurious picks from
occurring, though it may occasionally cause genuine changes to be skipped.
It is unlikely with real data, that the auto-pick algorithm will correctly identify every genuine
Rate Change and ignore every occurence of noise. The sort of Rate Change where a relatively
shallow slope (i.e. late drawdown or build-up) suddenly steepens is easily picked out by the slope
ratio test as illustrated below:

In this second example below, the red colored point passes the slope test; providing the pressure
change two points ahead of it exceeds the specified threshold, it will be picked as a Rate Change.
Some of the earlier noisy points pass the slope test, but fail the noise test:
Increasing the noise threshold will eventually prevent the red point from being selected, and
closely sampled data (i.e. where ∆P is small), with a lot of noise, will not produce good results.
174
In this final example, if a drawdown is shut-in early while it is still steep, this will result in a Rate
Change with a large negative slope (i.e. drawdown), suddenly becoming a large positive slope
(i.e. build-up).
This produces an absolute slope ratio close to 1, which will probably fail the slope test, so an
obvious event is missed. Any Rate Changes that are missed can either be picked manually, or the
relevant portion of the test data can be boxed-off and the slope ratio reduced until the Rate
Change is recognized.
6. 5. 19. Calculate Rate

Use Calculate Rate to create a rate column from the defined Rate Changes (see earlier in
this section). This is not mandatory. PanSystem requires a rate column for use in analysis and
Advanced Simulation, but if users have not imported one, and do not create one, it will use a
temporary one derived automatically from the Rate Changes table when users enter the Analysis
section.
Acts on:
The Rate Changes associated with the Master File for the well (See Section 6. 3 “Selecting
Master Data For Analysis”, on page 155). This tool can only be used when the “Master” data file
is plotted and rate changes have been identified (See Section 6. 5. 15 “Exact Point for Flow
Period Definition”, on page 170 and subsequent two sections).
A new rate column is created in the “Master” data file, with flowrates computed using one of
three methods. A rate value is computed at each clock time.
What to do:
1. With the appropriate “Master” data plotted, select the ‘Q’ tool. The dialog box in Figure
6.5.19 - 1, “Create Rate Column dialog box,” on page 176 is generated.
2. Select which of the three methods will be used. See Figure 6.5.19 - 4, “Step-Wise and Piece-
Wise Flowrate Formats Compared,” on page 177 for a comparison of the results obtained.
− Step-Rate - creates a rate column which follows the step profile defined by the Rate
Change table, using the specified time and flowrate at each change,
− Piece-Wise Linear - creates a ramp or chord between the rate change marks (instead of a
step), using the specified time and flowrate at each change (a quick way to “fill in” a slowly
changing rate),
− dP/dT - calculates flowrate from dp/dt and the wellbore storage coefficient Cs. This will
replicate the theoretical downhole or sandface rate at standard conditions.
24C s dp
For oil: Sandface rate qo (t ) = Qo (t ) + STB/day
Bo dt
where Qo(t) is the surface oil rate from the Rate Changes table at time t.
175
The same equation is used for water fluid type, with the appropriate parameters for water.
For gas or condensate, the pseudo-pressure m(p) is used instead of pressure:
( 2 . 2384 E − 03 ) C s µ gi c gi dm ( p )
Sandface rate q g ( t ) = Q g ( t ) +
T’ dt
where Qg(t) (MMscf/day) is the surface gas rate from the Rate Changes table at time t.
Cs (bbls/psi) is the “initial” wellbore storage coefficient defined as Cs = Vcgi, V being the
wellbore volume (bbls) and cgi being the gas compressibility (psi-1) at reservoir pressure
and temperature T’ (°R).
t is real time or (optionally) pseudo-time.
Users must set-up their Fluid Parameters and pseudo-pressure data before using this facility
for a gas or condensate welltest.
3. Give the new rate column a name and select OK.
Figure : 6.5.19 - 1 Create Rate Column dialog box

For the step-rate and piece-wise options, the computed rate will appear immediately on the
plot.
4. For the dP/dT option with oil or water as fluid type, a parameters dialog will appear. Enter
Wellbore storage coefficient (Cs) and Volume factor (Bo or Bw) and select OK. The
computed rate will appear immediately on the plot.
Figure : 6.5.19 - 2 dP/dT Parameters dialog box for Oil or Water

176
5. For the dP/dT option with a gas or condensate fluid type, enter the Initial wellbore storage
coefficient (Cs) or the Wellbore volume (V). These fields are linked by the relationship Cs =
Vcgi as described earlier.
Figure : 6.5.19 - 3 dP/dT Parameters dialog box for gas or condensate

There is an additional option to Use pseudo-time (instead of real time) in dm(p)/dt for
drawdowns and/or build-ups, to cater for the various schools of thought on the use of pseudo-
time. (Agarwal’s original reference (41) recommended pseudo-time for build-ups only.) At
this point, PanSystem will respect the choices of the user as it runs through the test sequence.
Any test period with a non-zero rate will be considered as a drawdown, and any with zero rate
as a build-up.
Figure : 6.5.19 - 4 Step-Wise and Piece-Wise Flowrate Formats Compared

177
Figure : 6.5.19 - 5 Sandface Flowrate Calculated from dP/dT for a Build-Up

In all three cases, a flowrate value is assigned at each clock time (i.e. every pressure reading will
now have a flowrate associated with it).
In the following two Figures, a slowly varying surface rate during a flowing test has been
replicated using step-rate and piece-wise approximations. The step-rate approximation in this
case requires many more intermediate rate change event entries (8) than the piecewise (1 in the
middle) to describe the same thing.
Figure : 6.5.19 - 6 Step Approximation to a Slowly Varying Rate

178
Figure : 6.5.19 - 7 Piece-wise approximation to a slowly varying rate
6. 5. 20. Group Flow Periods into Test Period

Initially, each flow period (i.e. the interval between rate changes) is a test period in its own
right. Use Group Flow Periods to create a single test period from a series of contiguous flow
periods, so that they can be analyzed as a whole, rather than separately. Typically, it would be
applied when users want to analyze a variable-rate drawdown test as a single test, when they
have used a number of rate changes to define the varying rate.
Acts on:
The selected Flow Periods (see See Section 6. 5. 15 “Exact Point for Flow Period Definition”, on
page 170 and subsequent two sections to define flow periods).
What to do:
6. 5. 20. Group Flow Periods into Test Period

Select the flow periods to be grouped by holding down the Shift key and dragging the cursor,
with the left mouse button depressed, along the upper half of the ruler bar, through the periods to
be grouped. They will become highlighted. If one is missed, repeat the operation more carefully!
Then select the Group Flow Periods tool.
A single test period spanning the selected flow periods will now be defined in the top half of the
ruler bar.
An example is shown in Figure 6.5.20 - 1, “Grouping Flow Periods into a Single Test,” on page
180. A declining rate during a flowing test has been defined as a series of fairly coarse rate
changes. These have been grouped as a single test period for analysis.
179
Figure : 6.5.20 - 1 Grouping Flow Periods into a Single Test

The Rate Change marker arrows in the lower half of the ruler bar define the flow periods, the
lines in the upper half of the ruler bar define the test period.
6. 5. 21. Ungroup Flow Periods in Test Period

Use Ungroup Flow Periods to reverse the grouping of contiguous flow periods made by the
Group tool (See Section 6. 5. 20 “Group Flow Periods into Test Period”, on page 179).
Acts on:
The selected Test Period.
What to do
6. 5. 21. Ungroup Flow Periods in Test Period

Select the test period by clicking it on the Ruler Bar (see Figure 6.6.0 - 1, “Ruler Bar Definitions
- Dataprep,” on page 181). Then click the tool. The flow periods that were grouped together will
now each be reinstated as individual test periods.
180
6.6. The Ruler Bar
The ruler bar is used to select Rate Changes and Test Periods, and to edit Rate Changes. The
following data are displayed (Figure 6.6.0 - 1, “Ruler Bar Definitions - Dataprep,” on page 181):
• Rate Changes - where a flow rate change occurs (Figure 6. 5. 15, “Exact Point for Flow
Period Definition,” on page 170 and subsequent two sections to define Rate Changes)
• Flow Periods - the periods between rate changes
• Test Periods - the periods which will be analyzed. They have one-to-one correspondence
with the flow periods, unless any flow periods have been grouped together.
Figure : 6.6.0 - 1 Ruler Bar Definitions - Dataprep

Users can perform the following actions on the Ruler Bar (above):
• Select a Rate Change for editing, by pressing the right mouse button or holding down the Ctrl
key whilst clicking the Rate Change marker arrow with the left mouse button. This brings up
the Rate Change dialog box (Figure 6.5.15 - 1, “Rate Change dialog box,” on page 171).
Users can then edit the co-ordinates of the Rate Change, or delete it.
• Move a Rate Change time by clicking on the marker arrow and dragging it along the ruler
bar.
• Change the pressure associated with a Rate Change by clicking the marker arrow and whilst
keeping the left mouse button depressed, dragging the cursor down the vertical dashed line to
the desired (pressure) position. Users can also change the time by moving sideways.
• Select a Test Period for data reduction or number count. Click in the top half of the bar to
highlight it.
• Select one or more Test Periods for data reduction or grouping. The periods must be
contiguous. Hold down Shift whilst dragging the cursor across the periods to be grouped, in
the upper half of the ruler bar.
• Define a test type (only necessary for slug tests and interference tests). Double-click in the
Test Period. A dialog box is brought up which allows the test period to be classified (Figure
6. 6. The Ruler Bar
6.6.0 - 2, “Test Period Classification dialog box,” on page 182).
181
Figure : 6.6.0 - 2 Test Period Classification dialog box

The three classifications are: Normal, Slug and Interference.
- Normal Test: (the default) is simply one which is not an interference or slug test. It
includes conventional drawdowns, build-ups, injection and fall-off tests involving flow at
surface.
- Slug Test: this category includes wellbore fill-up and leak-off tests with no flow at
surface, with the well open at surface. Users will not be able to access the Ramey slug test
type-curves if this test type is not checked.
- Interference Test: applies to the pressure response in a shut-in well some distance from a
well producing at a constant surface rate. Users will not be able to access the interference
test (exponential integral) type-curve if this test type is not checked.
For slug tests, input the Initial wellbore (cushion) pressure. This determines the initial
underbalance or overbalance Player - Pcushion. It is required to compute the y-axis pressure function
for slug test type-curve analysis.
For an interference test users should also initialize the Inter-well distance in the Well
Parameters dialog box under Dataprep Well and Reservoir Description (See Section “Inter-
well distance”, on page 190).
6. 6. The Ruler Bar
182
Well and Reservoir Description
Chapter 7- Well and Reservoir Description

(Analytical)
This option can be used to enter, view or edit the well and reservoir rock and fluid parameters.
There are four main parts to this section:
• Well control
• Layer control
• Fluid Type
• Principal Well Orientation.
What users see:

When the Well and Reservoir Description option is selected, the dialog box in Figure 7.0.0 - 1,
“Reservoir Description dialog box,” on page 183 is generated.
Chapter 7 - Well and Reservoir Description
Figure : 7.0.0 - 1 Reservoir Description dialog box
183
7.1. Fluid Type
Fluid Type is used to describe the main fluid contents in a layer. There are four choices. The
chosen fluid type will apply to all layers. Users cannot have different fluid types in each layer,
but they can vary the fluid properties between layers.
The basic fluid types are: oil, water, gas, and condensate, in single-phase flow, (the calculations
will ignore the presence of a second or third phase).
For oil there is an optional simplified multi-phase approach Multi-Phase Perrine method, to
handle oil produced with water and/or gas in the reservoir.
For oil, gas and condensate, the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure method provides a more
rigorous treatment of multi-phase flow which includes relative permeability effects. Up to and
including the PanSystem V-2.4 release, this required the importation of a multi-phase pseudo-
pressure file from an external source. From V-2.5 onwards, the multi-phase pseudo-pressure can
be generated from within PanSystem.
7. 1. 1. Oil
Oil (as a single phase) is used when the mobile reservoir fluid is oil, and there is no water or free
gas movement in the reservoir (or users choose to ignore it). PanSystem Analysis calculates all
results using oil flow rates and properties. Data for any other phases are ignored. See Section 7.
2 “Fluid Type Multi-Phase Options”, on page 185 for the description of oil multi-phase flow
analysis.
7. 1. 2. Water
Water (as a single-phase) is used when the mobile reservoir fluid is water. PanSystem Analysis
calculates all results using water flow rates and properties. Data for any other phases are ignored.
7. 1. 3. Gas
Gas (as a single-phase) is used when the mobile reservoir fluid is dry gas. Although a water/gas
ratio can be specified, the water phase will be ignored, and PanSystem calculates all reservoir
parameters using dry gas flow rates and properties.
See Section 7. 2 “Fluid Type Multi-Phase Options”, on page 185 for the description of gas multi-
phase flow analysis.
7. 1. 4. Condensate
Condensate is used when the reservoir fluid is a retrograde condensate or wet gas system. In the
conventional analysis approach, the specified surface separator gas and liquid condensate
properties are recombined to obtain in-situ rich gas single-phase properties. The mobile phase is
therefore assumed to be a gas phase in the reservoir and the effects of liquid drop-out on relative
7. 1. Fluid Type
permeability are not considered.

PanSystem Analysis calculates all results using these rich gas flow rates and properties, derived
from the specified separator gas rates and properties. Although a water/gas ratio can be specified,
it is ignored in the calculations.
See Section 7. 2 “Fluid Type Multi-Phase Options”, on page 185 for a rigorous treatment of the
multi-phase flow of the gas fraction in the presence of liquid condensate and/or water.
184
7. 2. Fluid Type Multi-Phase Options
The Multi-Phase options can be used to invoke special treatments of multi-phase flow. The
choice will apply to all layers. Users cannot have different fluid types in each layer, but they can
vary the fluid properties.
If there is multi-phase flow in the reservoir, but users do not select a multi-phase option, analysis
will be performed assuming a single-phase flow.
7. 2. 1. Multi-Phase Perrine Method (oil)

This option is only available for oil fluid type. It should be used when the mobile reservoir fluid
is made up of oil + water, oil + gas or oil + water + gas. When this option is selected, the relevant
phase properties must be specified in the Fluid Parameters dialog box. Water-Cut must be
greater than zero for water to be included in the analysis. Produced Gas-Oil Ratio must be
greater than Solution Gas-Oil Ratio for gas to be included in the analysis.
In Analysis, the effective permeability to each phase will be calculated and reported. Single-
phase oil mobility ko/µo is replaced by the total mobility (k/µ)t calculated using the flowrates
and properties of all mobile phases, according to the Perrine method (refs 2, 18, 39).
7. 2. 2. Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method

This option can be used when the mobile reservoir fluid is made up of several mobile phases, and
it provides a more rigorous treatment of relative permeability effects and fluid property
variations with pressure. The relevant phase properties must be specified in the Fluid
Parameters dialog box. Users should also check the Relative Permeability data (See Section 7.
6 “Layer Control”, on page 196).
It can be applied to the simultaneous flow of:
- oil, water and/or gas
- gas with water
- condensate systems with liquid dropout and/or water
- volatile oil systems with gas liberation and/or water
(use condensate fluid type for a volatile oil).
For oil and condensate systems, it will account for the effects of any near wellbore gas evolution
7. 2. Fluid Type Multi-Phase Options

or liquid drop-out.
When this option is activated the Pseudo-Pressures... button is enabled allowing the editing,
importation or creation of a multi-phase pseudo-pressure table (m’(p)) for gas and condensate or
Normalized pseudo-pressure for oil.
185
7. 3. Pseudo-Pressures
This button is only enabled when the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure method (See Section 7. 2.
2 “Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method”, on page 185) has been selected. It will generate the
Pseudo Table Editing dialog for the selected layer.
Figure : 7.3.0 - 1 Pseudo Table Editing dialog box for Gas or Condensate
Figure : 7.3.0 - 2 Pseudo Table Editing dialog box for Oil

7. 3. 1. Edit Table
On selecting the Edit Table button users will be able to view or edit the Multi-Phase Pseudo-
Pressure data (Figure 7.3.1 - 1, “Edit m’(p) Table dialog box,” on page 186), assuming that such
data is already present.
7. 3. Pseudo-Pressures
Figure : 7.3.1 - 1 Edit m’(p) Table dialog box
186
The buttons actions on this dialog box share the same functions as the gauge data dialogs. See
Section 6. 2. 2 “Edit”, on page 139.
7. 3. 2. Calculate Table
When this option is selected, PanSystem will calculate a table of Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures,
from atmospheric pressure to layer pressure.
The Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure data review dialog is displayed.
Figure : 7.3.2 - 1 Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Data Review dialog box

The New Value column provides a summary of some of the parameters that have been used as
input, or that have just been calculated. The individual phase saturations and corresponding
relative permeabilities at reservoir pressure are included (See Section 7. 6. 5 “Layer Parameters”,
on page 197).
The Current Value column lists the values that are currently in the program, for comparison.
These will be overwritten by the new values when users select OK. Users will not normally need
to uncheck any of the Transfer Value? checkboxes.
Should users wish to accept the values by selecting the OK button, they will be presented with an
Information dialog, providing information on the calculation status of the data:
7. 3. 2. Calculate Table
Figure : 7.3.2 - 2 Pseudo Pressures Calculated Information dialog box
187
7. 3. 3. Import
PanSystem will accept externally-generated pseudo-pressure tables. These are loaded as a file
(default extension .PSP) in ASCII format generated by the WellFlo program of FloSystem. See
Section 16 “File Structures”, on page 565 for a file description, if users wish to use some other
source.
Should users wish to import multi-phase pseudo-pressure data from an external file then they
may use the Import button, which will generate the following dialog:
where users may select a .PSP file for importation. The same dialogs then appear as for the
Calculate option.
7. 3. 4. Plot
Users can view their pseudo-pressure data graphically by clicking on the Plot button on the
Pseudo Table Editing dialog (Figure 7.6.9 - 14, “Pseudo Table Editing dialog box,” on page
238).
This option presents users with a plot of the multi-phase pseudo-pressure against pressure.
7. 3. 3. Import
188
The File menu allows users to open the Bitmap Editor (See Section 2. 7 “Graphics Export”, on
page 58), Print the plot, control the Page and Print Setups and Exit the plot. The Edit menu
shares the plot control options described for the general Edit menu (See Section 3 “Edit Menu
Options”, on page 66).
Users may also use the Toolbar options to Zoom in to a selected area, and Zoom out to the normal
view.
7.4. Principal Well Orientation
This area sets the orientation category of the wells. They can either be all horizontal or all
vertical. The choice of this orientation is reflected in the reservoir flow models available (via the
Flow model section of the Layer Parameters dialog box). For more details on these: Figure 7.
6. 5, “Layer Parameters,” on page 197.
7. 4. 1. Vertical
This option sets the orientation of the well(s) to “vertical” (suitable for 0° ∼ 75° inclination). A
wide range of reservoir flow models will be offered. If an infinite-conductivity vertical fracture
model is being used, for the purposes of defining boundary geometries the fracture is considered
to be parallel to the x-axis (i.e.: “east-west”). Refer to the “infinite-conductivity vertical fracture
model“ on page 214 for more details.
7. 4. 2. Horizontal
This option sets the orientation of the well(s) to “horizontal” (i.e. parallel to the layer upper and
lower Boundaries). A limited set of reservoir flow models will be offered. For the purposes of
defining boundary geometries, the well is considered to be parallel to the x-axis (i.e.: “east-
west”). Refer to the “horizontal well model, radial-homogeneous reservoir“ on page 214, for
more details. 7. 4. Principal Well Orientation
7.5. Well Control

The Well Control area is used to describe the wells within a reservoir. Well control enables users
to do the following:
• Add wells
• Re-name wells
• Delete wells
• State whether a well is "active" or "inactive"
• Enter or edit the well parameter data
• Copy well data from another well
• Set the "Principal" well (for Advanced Simulation)
189
In PanSystem, a reservoir can have up to five wells. If more than one well exists, each well can
either be "active" or "inactive".
One well is nominated the "Principal" well, whereupon it will have a P beside it in the list. The
principal well status is only of significance in Advanced Simulation and Test Design, where, in
the case of a multi-well model, it is necessary to define one subject well, the others being remote
sources of interference.
Start by describing the Well Parameters.

7. 5. 1. Well Parameters
Description
Use this option to View, enter or edit the parameters of a selected well.
What users see:

Referring to Figure 7.0.0 - 1, “Reservoir Description dialog box,” on page 183, select a well in
the list box and click the Well parameters button. The dialog box in Figure 7.5.1 - 1, “Well
Parameters dialog box,” on page 190 is generated.
Figure : 7.5.1 - 1 Well Parameters dialog box

The following section describes these parameters in more detail. Mandatory items appear in red
in the dialog box. Use the Tab key or mouse to move between the input boxes.
Well Radius
Well Radius defines the radius of the open hole wellbore (not the casing). This is a compulsory
input.
Inter-well distance
Inter-well distance defines the distance between the tested well and an interfering well. This
parameter is used only for interference type-curve analysis and can be left at zero if the gauge
data are not for an interference test.
If users are simulating an interference test with Advanced Simulation, there is no need to enter a
value here - the inter-well distance for simulation is determined by the well co-ordinates.
190
Well Co-ordinates
These parameters are required only for Test Design and Advanced Simulation when more than
one well is involved. These co-ordinates describe the (x, y) position of the well. The Principal
well should always be located at co-ordinate position (0, 0).
Wellbore Storage Model

Four wellbore storage models are available in the combo box:
Figure : 7.5.1 - 2 Wellbore storage models

1.Select the model here. Users will be able to change it later in the Analysis section if they
wish.
2.With the exception of the slug test, there is no need to enter values for the storage
parameters if users are going to perform a conventional welltest analysis - the values will be
determined from diagnostic plots. Users must define the parameters if they are going to use
Advanced Simulation for test design.
• Classic wellbore storage: The Classic model assumes a constant storage coefficient Cs.
Figure : 7.5.1 - 3 Classic Wellbore Storage model parameters

- If users are going to analyze a test, there is no need to enter a value here - they will
derive it from the analysis.
- Enter a non-zero value here if a slug test type-curve analysis is to be performed (i.e.
fill-up and leak-off tests that do not flow to surface). This should be based on the
wellbore fluid pressure gradient:
(TXDWLRQ,(TXDWLRQ,
Cs = 0.00224 D2 /ρ Cos α
in bbls/psi, where D is the pipe ID (inches), ρ is the fluid density (g/cm3), and α is the
average angle of pipe deviation over the fill-up/leak-off section.
191
- Enter a value here (zero is valid) if Advanced Simulation is to be performed. For slug
test simulation, use the equation above. For conventional welltest design with
production at surface, Cs should be based on the compressibility of the wellbore
fluids:
(TXDWLRQ,,
Cs = VCwb
where V is the wellbore volume in bbls, etc., and Cwb is the average compressibility
of the wellbore fluids in psi-1, etc.
Allow different skins and storage per flow period

The “Classic” wellbore storage model assumes a constant storage coefficient Cs for the whole
test. An option is available to assign a different value of Cs to each flow period in the test by
ticking the Allow different skins and storage per flow period box. The edit field for a single
storage coefficient value (Figure 7.5.1 - 4) is replaced by the word <TABLE> in red colored text:
Figure : 7.5.1 - 4 Classic Wellbore Storage model, tabular option

Clicking once on <TABLE> will open up the Edit Skin & Storage Table dialog box for the well
and layer in question. The table is made up of the same flow periods as the Rate Changes Table
(see Section 6. 2. 3 “Rate Changes”, on page 142). Each flow period can be assigned its own skin
factor S, wellbore storage coefficient Cs and, for gas and condensate, its own rate-dependent skin
coefficient D. This table can be populated either by direct entry of values, or by values derived
from analysis of each flow period. This is described in “Allowing different skins and storage per
flow period”, on page 205.
An estimate of the wellbore storage coefficient, and of the expected time to end of wellbore
storage, can be obtained by entering the PanWizard at Test Design. Select Test Schedule, click
the Test Design button, then take the Wizard’s Testing Time Advisor. On the next dialog users
will see the estimated time to end of wellbore storage for any specified storage coefficient. If
users also want the Wizard to calculate the storage coefficient, select the WBS Advisor button.
The equations for this can be found in the sections on the Testing Time Advisor on page 534 and
page 563.
• Fair’s model: (ref.49) this option models a gradual change of storage coefficient. It includes
the effects of wellbore phase redistribution, and assumes that these decay exponentially with
time.
Figure : 7.5.1 - 5 Fair Wellbore Storage model parameters
192
Users only need to enter values here if they are going to perform Advanced Simulation.
The Wellbore Storage coefficient (Cs) is the final value when phase re-distribution effects have
dissipated (not the initial value).
The Storage Amplitude is the maximum phase re-distribution pressure change (Cf in ref.49). It
can be positive (= increasing wellbore storage - e.g. "humping" caused by rising gas in an oil
well when it is shut-in) or negative (decreasing wellbore storage - e.g. compression of wellbore
fluids).
The Storage Time Constant τ (α in ref.49) is the time required for 63% of the total change to
occur.
These parameters would normally be derived from the Log-Log plot analysis, (but not easily!
Users will probably find it easier to use Quick Match by trial and error.)
The storage coefficient Cα at early time (which users can get from the Log-Log unit slope) is
defined by the three parameters Cs, Cφ and τThe storage coefficient Cα at early time (which users
can get from the Log-Log unit slope) is defined by the three parameters Cs, Cφ and τ::
−
 &φ 
&α =  + 
 &V Tτ 
(TXDWLRQ,,,(TXDWLRQ,,,
where q is the total downhole flowrate (res bbls/day).
The Allow different skins and storage per flow period option (described above for the Classic
Wellbore Storage model) is available for Cs, but not for the other parameters.
• Hegeman’s model: this is similar in principle to Fair's model, except that the exponential
decay is now a function of [t/τ]2 and is therefore stronger.
Only enter values if Advanced Simulation is going to be performed.
The Allow different skins and storage per flow period option (described above for the Classic
wellbore storage model) is available for Cs, but not for the other parameters.
• Time-Stepped Wellbore Storage: this option models an abrupt change of storage coefficient
at a specified elapsed time. 7. 5. 1. Well Parameters
Figure : 7.5.1 - 6 Time-stepped Wellbore Storage model parameters

Only enter values if Advanced Simulation is going to be performed.
The example above represents an injection well fall-off test going on vacuum.
193
7. 5. 2. Add Well
Description:
Use the Add well option to add wells to a reservoir, up to a maximum of five.
What users see:

When this option is selected, the dialog box in Figure 7.5.2 - 1, “Add Well dialog box,” on page
195 appears. Enter the well name and select OK. The name appears in the Well Control list box.
Figure : 7.5.2 - 1 Add Well dialog box

Users can edit the name of a well at any time by highlighting it, changing the name in the edit
box, then selecting the highlighted bar again.
7. 5. 3. Delete Well
Description:
Use the Delete well option to delete the highlighted well. Deleting will erase the associated well
parameters. To remove a well temporarily without losing the well parameters, make it "inactive",
as described in one of the following sections. If there is only one well, it cannot be deleted.
7. 5. 4. Copy Well
When users have added a new well, they can copy the well description (radius, storage model,
etc.) over from an existing well.
Figure : 7.5.4 - 1 Copy Well dialog box
7. 5. 5. Active, Inactive and Principal

Description:
These options are used only for Advanced Simulation and Test Design. Any wells designated as
"inactive" will be excluded from the simulation. However, the associated data are retained ready
for use if the well is made "active" again at a later stage.
7. 5. 2. Add Well
If a well is made the "Principal" well, (indicated by having a P along side it), it is considered to
be at co-ordinate position (0,0) in image well calculations and complex simulations, where well
positions have to be considered. It is treated as the main test well, the others being interfering
wells.
The Principal well cannot be made inactive. It can only be deleted if more than one well exists,
in which case the well immediately above it in the list box becomes the Principal well.
194
What users see:
When users select the Active, Inactive or Principal button options, the highlighted well inherits
the attribute that has been selected. The well status is indicated beside the well name.
7.6. Layer Control

The Layer Control area is used to describe the layer configuration of a reservoir. Layer control
enables users to do the following:
For the Reservoir:
• Add layers
• Re-name layers
• Delete layers
• Combine selected layers into an equivalent single composite layer.
• Combine selected layers into an commingled layer.
For Each Layer:
• Activate or deactivate the layer
• View, enter or edit Layer Parameters
• View, enter or edit Boundary Parameters
• View, enter or edit Fluid Parameters in each layer (but not fluid type).
• Copy the complete description of one layer to another.
These control options will each be described in the following sections.
7. 6. 1. Add Layer
Description:
Use this option to add a layer to the reservoir. A reservoir can have up to five layers. Each layer
is assumed to be present in all the wells specified in Well Control.
Multiple layers only play a part in Advanced Simulation and Test Design, where their combined
effects can be modelled.
For Analysis, users will be prompted to select one of the layers on entering that section. If the
effects of several layers are to be considered, users can group them into a single composite
equivalent, or commingled layer in Layer Control (See Section 7. 6. 7 “Create Composite”, on
page 220, and Section 7. 6. 8 “Create Commingled”, on page 221).
What users see:

When this option is selected, the dialog box in Figure 7.6.1 - 1, “Add Layer dialog box,” on page
7. 6. Layer Control
196 appears. Enter the name of the layer and select OK. The name appears in the Layer Control
list box.
Figure : 7.6.1 - 1 Add Layer dialog box
195
Users can edit the name of a layer at any time by highlighting it, changing the name in the edit
box, then selecting the highlighted bar again.
7. 6. 2. Delete Layer
Description:
Use the Delete Layer option to delete the highlighted layer. Deleting will erase the associated
layer parameters. To remove a layer temporarily without losing the layer parameters, make it
"inactive", as described in one of the following sections. If there is only one layer, it cannot be
deleted.
7. 6. 3. Copy Layer
This option will copy the complete description of an existing layer (layer and fluid parameters,
boundary parameters, etc.) into another layer, if required.
Figure : 7.6.3 - 1 Copy Layer dialog box
7. 6. 4. Active / Inactive
Description:
These options are used for Advanced Simulation and Test Design. Any layer designated as
"inactive" will be excluded from the simulation. However, the associated data are retained ready
for use if the layer is made "active" again at a later stage.
This option can also be used to exclude selected layers from the Create Composite facility. The
layers that are not to be included in the composite should be made "inactive".
7. 6. 5. Layer Parameters
Description:
Use the Layer Parameters button to view, enter or edit the parameters of the layer highlighted
in the list box.
What users see:

7. 6. 2. Delete Layer
Referring to Figure 7.0.0 - 1, “Reservoir Description dialog box,” on page 183, when users select
the Layer parameters button the dialog box in Figure 7.6.5 - 1, “Layer Parameters dialog box,”
on page 198 appears. Mandatory inputs appear in red. Use the Tab key or mouse to move
between the input boxes.
196
Figure : 7.6.5 - 1 Layer Parameters dialog box

Layer Parameters
The layer parameters are defined as follows:
• Formation thickness h represents the effective (net) dip-normal thickness of the layer, and is
compulsory for all analysis and simulation. For the dual-permeability model, and the dual-
porosity model where it is being used to represent two strata, h is the thickness of the
producing layer, not the total thickness of both layers. For an oil-bearing interval, h should
not include the gas cap or aquifer unless a thickness-averaged permeability is required.
• Porosity φ describes the connected porosity of a layer, and is compulsory for all analysis and
simulation. It is also required to calculate rock compressibility. For the radial composite
model it refers to the inner region. For the dual-porosity model used for natural fractures, it
refers to the total system (bulk-averaged) porosity. For the dual-permeability model it refers
to the producing layer.
• Layer Pressure describes the initial pore pressure of the fluid in a layer (at the start of the
rate history). This is mandatory for analysis of gas and condensate Fluid Types, and for all
Fluid Types for Advanced Simulation. Layer fluid properties should be evaluated at layer
pressure. They will be assumed to remain constant unless a closed system boundary model is
used and the material balance correction is switched on, in which case the effect of
decreasing layer pressure on fluid properties with time will be taken into account.
• Layer Temperature is a mandatory input for gas and condensate Fluid Types, and for all
Fluid Types if the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method has been enabled.
• Water Saturation Sw is the fraction of water in the pore-space of a layer. It is used in the
calculation of the total compressibility.
• Gas Saturation Sg is the fraction of gas in the pore space of a layer. It is used in the
calculation of the total compressibility.
• Rock Compressibility Cf is the pore volume compressibility of the rock in a layer.
The rock compressibility is calculated (from porosity) in the Fluid Parameters dialog box.
When a value is updated in one box, PanSystem automatically writes it into the other.
197
• Total Compressibility Ct describes the total compressibility of the fluids and rock in a layer.
(Refer to the comments about porosity for what to use in the various models.)
Total compressibility can be calculated in the Fluid Parameters dialog box, and it is
displayed here with the layer parameters for information only.
Relative Permeabilities
The Relative Permeabilities button only appears on the Layer Parameters dialog box if users
have selected the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure option (See Section 7. 2. 2 “Multi-Phase
Pseudo-Pressure Method”, on page 185).
The relative permeabilities of individual phases in multi-phase flow have an obvious impact on
fluid movement.
The multi-phase pseudo-pressure model makes rigorous use of relative permeabilities and the
variation of fluid properties with pressure. This is particularly important in condensate systems
where liquid dropout occurs below dew point, and in oil systems where gas evolution occurs
below bubble point. Good relative permeability data are therefore necessary to make effective
use of this facility.
Relative Permeability Data
On choosing the Relative Permeabilities button on an Entry Model dialog box such as Figure
7.6.5 - 1, “Layer Parameters dialog box,” on page 198, users are presented with a choice of
relative permeability data set-up options (Figure 7.6.5 - 2, “Relative Permeability Data
Selection,” on page 199):
Figure : 7.6.5 - 2 Relative Permeability Data Selection

The Edit Data.. button directs users to the chosen data input screen where, in both cases, three
sets of relative permeability data can be set up - Oil/Water, Oil/Gas and Gas/Water.
Note: that the data for both format options are retained by PanSystem, so comparisons and cross-
checks can be made between them.
Parametric Relative Permeability Data

This option can be used if Corey coefficients (Ref. 58) are available. End point relative
permeabilities and saturations are specified together with the curve exponents so that actual
relative permeabilities can be calculated at any saturation.
198
A Corey coefficient of 1.0 gives a straight line; real curves are concave, with m and n > 1.
Figure : 7.6.5 - 3 Parametric Format Relative Permeability Dialog Box

Gas/Water
Krg the gas end point relative permeability at irreducible water saturation Swi. (For a gas
reservoir, this would conventionally be 1.0)
Krw the water end point relative permeability at residual gas saturation Sgr
Swi the irreducible water saturation
Sgr the residual gas saturation
m the gas relative permeability curve Corey exponent (typical value 3.5)
n the water relative permeability curve Corey exponent (typical value 2.0)
Gas/Oil
Kro the oil end point relative permeability at critical gas saturation Sgc (and irreducible water
saturation Swi as specified in the oil/water area)
Krg the gas end point relative permeability at residual oil saturation Sorg (and irreducible
water saturation Swi as specified in the oil/water area)
Sgc the critical gas saturation (fraction of total pore volume)
Sorg the residual oil saturation (fraction of total pore volume)
m the oil relative permeability curve Corey exponent (typical value 1.7)
n the gas relative permeability curve Corey exponent (typical value 2.4)
Note: that [Sgc + Sorg + Swi] must be < 1.0

199
Oil/Water
Kro the oil end point relative permeability at irreducible water saturation Swi. (For an oil
reservoir, this would be conventionally 1.0).
Krw the water end point relative permeability at residual oil saturation Sor
Swi the irreducible water saturation
Sor the residual oil saturation
m the oil relative permeability curve Corey exponent (typical value 3.5)
n the water relative permeability curve Corey exponent (typical value 2.0).
The “typical” values quoted for the exponents are averages based on the work of Tjolsen, Scheie
and Damsleth (1991) for oil/water, and Honarpour, Koederitz and Harvey (1986) for gas/oil.
Figure : 7.6.5 - 4 Plot (from Excel) of Relative Permeability Curves

Defined by Corey Coefficients
The previous figure shows the oil/water curves for the end-points of Figure 7.6.5 - 3, “Parametric
Format Relative Permeability Dialog Box,” on page 200, using typical values for the Corey
coefficients. The straight lines are the corresponding curves for m = n = 1.
Tabular Relative Permeability Data

This option allows entry of measured relative permeability data. At least two points
(corresponding to the parametric end-point relative permeabilities and saturations) must be
entered. Figure 7.6.5 - 5, “Tabular Format Relative Permeability dialog box (Gas/Oil),” on page
202 shows a Gas/Oil table with six points entered.
200
Figure : 7.6.5 - 5 Tabular Format Relative Permeability dialog box (Gas/

Oil)
Saturation data must be entered in ascending order.
The Next Table button provides access to the other tables.
An error message will appear when users exit from a table if the in-situ fractional flow computed
from the surface production data (water cut, GLR, CGR, etc.) could not be realized with the
relative permeability data that has been entered. (The in-situ rate of each phase is proportional to
the phase kr/µ)
• Gas Saturation: Enter Sg values between Sgc (critical gas saturation, where Krg=0) and (1-
Sorg-Swi) (where Kro=0) inclusive for an oil/gas table (Figure 7.6.5 - 5, “Tabular Format
Relative Permeability dialog box (Gas/Oil),” on page 202). All saturations are fractions of
total pore volume.
• Water Saturation: Enter Sw values between Swi (irreducible water saturation, where
Krw=0) and (1-Sor) (where Kro=0) inclusive for an Oil/Water table, or (1-Sgr) (where
Krg=0) inclusive for a Gas/Water table.
• Water Rel. Perm: Enter Krw values corresponding to the water or gas saturations entered.
• Oil Rel. Perm: Enter Kro values corresponding to the water or gas saturations entered.
• Gas Rel. Perm: Enter Krg values corresponding to the water or gas saturations entered.
The relative permeability data sets are used as follows, according to which phases are flowing:
3-phase flow
• Black oil system below the bubble point with a non-zero water cut and GOR, or/
• Condensate system below the dew point with non-zero WGR and CGR:
⇒ Relative permeabilities (kro, krg, krw) derived from Oil/Gas and Oil/Water tables at Sw,
Sg (by Stone's method).
201
2-phase flow
• Black oil system above the bubble point with a non-zero water cut:
⇒ Relative permeabilities (kro, krw) calculated from the Oil/Water table at Sw.
• Black oil system below the bubble point with zero water cut:
⇒ Relative permeabilities (kro, krg) calculated from the Oil/Gas table at Sg.
• Condensate above the dew point with non-zero WGR:
⇒ Relative permeabilities (krg, krw) calculated from the Gas/Water table at Sw.
• Condensate below the dew point with a zero WGR:
⇒ Relative permeabilities (kro, krg) calculated from the Oil/Gas table at Sg.
• Dry Gas with a non-zero WGR:
⇒ Relative permeabilities (krg, krw) calculated from the Gas/Water table at Sw.
Single-phase flow
• Black oil above the bubble point with zero water cut:
⇒ End point relative permeability kro (normally set to 1.0) taken from the Oil/Water table at
Swi.
• Gas with zero WGR or/
• Condensate above the dew point with zero WGR:
⇒ End point relative permeability krg (normally set to 1.0) from the Gas/Water table at Swi.
Flow Models and Model Parameters

The Flow model (vertical well) or (horizontal well) area allows users to specify the reservoir
flow model that PanSystem uses in analysis, simulation or test design. PanSystem provides a
number of models depending on the Principal Well Orientation - "horizontal" or "vertical" -
selected in the Reservoir Description dialog box. The flow models are defined in the next
section.
All model types, except the Free model, are defined by a set of Model Parameters making up
the reservoir description. These are described in the section after next.
- For Analysis and Simulate Quick Match, users do not need to specify the model
parameters now, as these can be derived from the analysis itself.
- The flow model and model parameters must be initialized if users are going to perform
Advanced Simulation.
Users can update any data subsequent to entering it in the Model Parameters section of
Dataprep, by means of Analysis Model, or by confirming the results of an analysis on a
diagnostic plot, or in Quick Match.
Remember to select the Principal Well Orientation before selecting the well flow model.
What users see:

The lower half of the Layer Parameters dialog box (Figure 7.6.5 - 1, “Layer Parameters dialog
box,” on page 198) is used to select the flow model. The actual list of models available depends
on whether the Principal well orientation is set to “horizontal” or “vertical”.
202
Figure : 7.6.5 - 6 Flow Model area of Layer Parameters dialog box

Models followed by a * are supplied as external code linked by the Customer DLL facility (See
Section 7. 7 “Customer-Defined Flow Models”, on page 253). All other models are internal to
PanSystem. Select the flow model from the list. Users must select a flow model if they are going
to perform Advanced Simulation. For analysis users can select a model at this stage or later in
the Analysis section when they have plotted the data.
Allow different skins and storage per flow period: A constant storage coefficient and skin
factor (mechanical and turbulent) will normally be assumed for the entire test. If users suspect
that some or all of these parameters are varying from one flow period to the next, the Allow
different skins and storage per flow period checkbox allows users to define a table of different
values for each period. If this checkbox is checked, a table can be opened into which the “Darcy
skin S, storage coefficient Cs (and for gas and condensate welltests, the Rate-dependent skin
coefficient D), can be entered for each flow period.
If users wish to initialize the model parameters, select the Model Parameters button and a
dialog box similar to Figure 7.6.5 - 7, “Model Parameter dialog boxes for Oil,” on page 204 will
be generated.
The actual parameters users need to specify depend on the model selected - Figure 7.6.5 - 7,
applies to the Radial Homogeneous model. In the image on the left, a constant skin factor applies
over the entire test sequence. The image on the right corresponds to having the Allow different
skins and storage per flow period checkbox switched-on.
Figure : 7.6.5 - 7 Model Parameter dialog boxes for Oil

203
Allowing different skins and storage per flow period
As illustrated in the previous figure, selecting the Allow different skins and storage per flow
period option replaces the single skin factor value by <TABLE> in red colored text. Clicking
once in this field will open up the Edit Skin & Storage Table dialog box for the well and layer
in question.
Figure : 7.6.5 - 8 Edit Skin & Storage Table dialog box for a Six Flow
Period Gas Reservoir
The table is made up of the same flow periods as the Rate Changes Table (See Section 6. 2. 3
“Rate Changes”, on page 142). Each flow period can be assigned its own skin factor S, wellbore
storage coefficient Cs (and, for gas and condensate, its own rate-dependent skin coefficient D). If
a fractured well model has been chosen, S is replaced by Sf, the fracture face skin. Values can be
edited in each field, and the function buttons on the right-hand side of the dialog can also be used
(refer to page 140 for more details).
Please refer to the section on “Vertical Well Flow Model Input Parameters”, on page 209 and the
equivalent for “Horizontal Well Flow Model Input Parameters”, on page 213, for definitions of
S, Sf and D, and to “Wellbore Storage Model”, on page 191, for a definition of Cs.
In addition to editing in Dataprep, the table can be populated or modified in the following ways:
• Analysis - diagnostic plots: as users analyze each test period, the Cs, S, (and D) results,
when confirmed (See Section “Cnf: Confirm Plot Results to Reservoir Description”, on page
336), will be entered automatically in the appropriate place in the table. If users have grouped
several flow periods (See Section 6. 2. 3 “Rate Changes”, on page 142) into one test period,
the results will be put in the table against all the flow periods in that test period.
• On the Analysis menu, the Model option will allow access to the same Layer Parameters
section as Dataprep.
• Quick Match: the table will be accessible from the Quick Match input dialog.
204
For simulation purposes, it is not possible for a build-up and its preceding flow period to have
different skin factors, since the skin factor only affects the flowing pressures.
Therefore, on the Test Overview Plot, Quick Match and Advanced Simulation will ignore the S
(and D) values corresponding to any build-up and use the values from the drawdown that
preceded it.
205
Flow Models
In the following sections, each model and its parameters are described for both horizontal and
vertical well orientations.
Vertical Well Flow Models

The following table shows the reservoir description parameters listed for each of the vertical well
flow models (R = required for Advanced Simulation). External models using the DLL facility are
not included.
Model k S Sf D Xf Fcd λ K R M ω kz htop hp hf Zwdf
Free model
Radial R R R
Homogeneous
Vertical Fracture - R R R R
infinite conductivity
Vertical Fracture - R R R R
uniform flux
Vertical Fracture - R R R R R
finite conductivity
Vertical Fracture - R R R R R R R
limited height
Dual-Porosity - R R R R R
pseudo steady state
Dual-Porosity - R R R R R
transient
Dual-Permeability R R R R R R
Radial Composite R R R R R R
Partial Penetration R R R R R R
and Gas Cap/Aquifer
The models and their parameters are described in greater detail in the following sections.
Free Model: In this model users choose not to stipulate any flow model (yet). This would
probably be because the data has not yet been examined, nor a model identified.
As a consequence, no results will be calculated from the diagnostic plots (other than a tentative k
and S for assumed radial flow), and no parameters can be entered for Advanced Simulation and
Test Design.
Radial Homogeneous: In this model the flow in the homogeneous reservoir is horizontal radial.
The associated parameters are:

Permeability k Skin factor S (“true” or “mechanical”).
(True) Rate-dependent skin coefficient D (gas)
Vertical Fracture - Infinite Conductivity: The vertical fracture - infinite conductivity model
has a single symmetrical vertical fracture intercepting the well. There is no resistance to flow
along the fracture and flow is concentrated at the tips. The fracture is assumed to have the same
height as the layer, and to intercept the well over its full height. The associated parameters are:
Permeability k Fracture face skin Sf Fracture half-length Xf.
206
Vertical Fracture - Uniform Flux: The vertical fracture - uniform flux model has a single
symmetrical vertical fracture intercepting the well. The flow enters the fracture at the same rate
per unit area over the entire surface. The fracture is assumed to have the same height as the layer,
and to intercept the well over its full height. The associated parameters are:

Vertical Fracture - Finite Conductivity: The vertical fracture - finite conductivity model has a
single symmetrical vertical fracture intercepting the well. The fracture has a finite permeability,
and flow tends to be concentrated more towards the wellbore end. The fracture is assumed to
have the same height as the layer, and to intercept the well over its full height. The associated
parameters are

Dimensionless fracture conductivity FCD.
Vertical Fracture - Limited Height: The vertical fracture - limited height model has a single
symmetrical vertical fracture which does not extend to the full height of the layer. The fracture
has a finite permeability. The associated parameters are
Permeability k Vertical permeability kz Fracture face skin Sf

Fracture offset Zwdf Fracture height hf Fracture half-length Xf
Dual-Porosity (Pseudo-Steady-State): The dual-porosity (pseudo steady state) model has a

dual-porosity configuration (natural fissure system with matrix blocks or slabs) with pseudo-
steady state interporosity flow. The associated parameters are:
Skin factor S (“true” or “mechanical”) Permeability k

Interporosity flow coefficient λ Storativity ratio ω
Dual-Porosity (Transient): The dual-porosity (transient) model has a dual-porosity

configuration (natural fissure system with matrix blocks or slabs) with transient interporosity
flow. The associated parameters are:
Skin factor S (“true” or “mechanical”) Permeability k

Interporosity flow coefficient λ Storativity ratio ω
Dual-Permeability: The dual-permeability model has two distinct layers, with horizontal radial
flow in both layers. Only one layer is open to the wellbore and the second layer crossflows
vertically into the producing layer. There may or may not be a thin semi-permeable stratum at the
interface. The secondary, supporting layer is implicit in the model and does not require a second
layer to be configured if Advanced Simulation is being used. The associated parameters are:
Permeability k Skin factor S (“true” or “mechanical”).

Interporosity flow coefficient λ Flow capacity ratio κ.
(True) Rate-dependent skin coefficient D (gas) Storativity ratio ω
207
Radial Composite: The radial composite model consists of an inner cylindrical homogeneous
region surrounded by an outer region of different properties. The flow in the both regions is
radial and horizontal. The associated parameters are:
Permeability k (inner region) Flow mobility ratio M

Skin factor S (“true” or “mechanical”) Storativity ratio ω
Radial distance to discontinuity Lrad.
Note: that any boundaries are assumed to be in the outer region.

Partial Penetration: The partial penetration model has a homogeneous reservoir with horizontal
radial flow. Only part of the interval is open to flow at the wellbore, so there is flow convergence.
Radial permeability k(True) Skin factor S Vertical permeability kz

Perforated interval hp Distance from top of layer to top of perfs htop
Radial permeability at perforations kp
Gas Cap/Aquifer: Parameters are the same as for the Partial Penetration model, except that the
Gas Cap/Aquifer model adds a constant pressure upper or lower boundary.
htop is now the distance from the top of the perforations to the base of the gas cap, or from the
bottom of the perforations to the top of the aquifer.
Note: layer thickness h should not include the gas cap or aquifer unless a thickness-averaged
permeability is required.
Vertical Well Flow Model Input Parameters

k: Radial Permeability: The effective horizontal permeability of the reservoir rock to the
mobile phase at the current saturation.
kz: Vertical Permeability: Permeability to the mobile phase in the vertical direction.
S: Skin: The "true" or "mechanical" Darcy skin factor (i.e. the non-turbulent skin factor at the
wellbore, attributed to damage, improvement and completion).
Users should not confuse this with the pseudo-radial skin Spr, which is an apparent skin factor
computed when pseudo-radial flow develops in some flow models (e.g. a partially penetrated
reservoir with a true damage skin (S) of +2.0 may have a pseudo-radial skin (Spr) of +20 or
more).
The skin factor S requested for input to Quick Match and Advanced Simulation is always
the true (“damage”) skin, not the pseudo-radial skin. Spr will appear as a computed result on
some diagnostic plots. Spr is required in the Deliverability IPR section because PanSystem uses
the (pseudo-)radial inflow equation to compute the productivity indices.
D: Rate-dependent skin coefficient: The “true” turbulent skin coefficient at the wellbore (gas
and condensate wells). Turbulent skin is D x flowrate. The comments under skin S (see above)
about pseudo-radial flow also apply to D.
Xf: Fracture Half-Length: Length of one fracture wing from the wellbore axis to the tip.
Sf: Fracture Skin: The Darcy fracture face skin factor, representing an additional pressure drop
across the fracture face.
208
FCD: Dimensionless Fracture Conductivity: Defined as:
(TXDWLRQ,
kf w
FCD =
kx f
where kf is the fracture proppant permeability and w is the mean fracture width).
ω: Storativity Ratio: The definition of this parameter depends on what flow model is being
used:
Model Definition
Dual-Porosity ω = (φCt)f / [(φCt)f +(φCt)m]
Dual-Permeability ω = (φhCt)1 / [(φhCt)1 + (φhCt)2]
Radial Composite ω = (φCt)outer / (φCt)inner
λ: Interporosity Flow coefficient:
- for the matrix and the fracture system in a dual-porosity reservoir:
(TXDWLRQ,,
αrw2km
λ=
kf
where α is a geometrical coefficient (see table after Equation 15.1.2 - XLVI on page 504) for the
matrix block type, km is the matrix permeability, kf is the fracture system permeability;
- for a dual-permeability reservoir with flow between layer 2 and layer 1 (across a semi-
permeable interface)
(TXDWLRQ,,,
Teff rw2
λ=
(k h
1 1 + k 2 h2 )
where the subscript "1" refers to the producing layer, and "2" to the second (non-perforated)
layer. Teff is the effective vertical conductivity:
(TXDWLRQ,9
−1
 1 1
Teff =  + 
 Tv T2 
which includes the conductivity Tv = kv/hv of a thin semi-permeable layer (if present) at the
interface, and conductivity T2 = 3kz2/h2 of layer 2.
κ: Flow Capacity Ratio: The ratio of permeability-thickness in a dual-permeability system:
209
(TXDWLRQ9
k1h1
κ=
(k h + k h )
1 1 2 2
where "1" denotes the perforated layer.
Lrad: Discontinuity Radial Distance: The distance from the wellbore to the interface between
the inner and outer regions of a radial composite reservoir.
M: Mobility Ratio: Ratio of the outer region mobility to the inner region mobility in a radial
composite reservoir:
(TXDWLRQ9,
k k
M =   
 µ  outer  µ  inner
hp: Perforation Height: The length (TVD) of the open interval (i.e. the sandface interval that is
actually producing: htop+ hp ≤h ).
htop: Perforation Top Dist: The distance (TVD) from the top of the open interval to the top of
the layer in the partial penetration model. The distance (TVD) from the top of the open interval
to the base of the gas cap, or from the bottom of the open interval to the top of the aquifer, in the
Gas Cap/Aquifer model. htop+ hp ≤ h.
hf: Fracture Height: The height of the fracture in a limited height vertically fractured well (hf <
h).
Zwdf: Fracture Offset: A decimal fraction giving the position of the mid-point of the fractured
interval relative to the top and bottom of the layer. 0.5 means the fracture is in the middle.
Note: that hf cannot be greater than 2h.Zwdf.
210
Horizontal Well Flow Models
The following table shows the reservoir description parameters listed for each horizontal well
flow model (R = required for Advanced Simulation). External models using the DLL facility are
not included.
Model k kz S D Zwd Lw ω λ
Free Model
Two no-flow Boundaries - R R R R R R
homogeneous
Two no-flow Boundaries - R R R R R R R R
dual-porosity
No-flow / constant pressure R R R R R R
boundary - homogeneous
No-flow / constant pressure R R R R R R R R
boundary - dual-porosity
The models and parameters will be described in greater detail in the following section.
Free Model: In this model users choose not to stipulate any flow model (yet). This would
probably be because the data has not yet been examined, nor a model identified.
As a consequence, no results will be calculated from the diagnostic plots (other than a tentative k
and S for assumed radial flow), and no parameters can be entered for Advanced Simulation and
Test Design.
Two No-Flow Boundaries - Homogeneous: The Two no-flow Boundaries - Homogeneous

model consists of an infinite-acting homogeneous layer with impermeable upper and lower
boundaries. The associated parameters are:
Radial permeability k Vertical permeability kz
Skin factor S (“True” or “mechanical”)
Rate-dependent skin coefficient D (gas) (“true”)
Well Offset (from upper or lower boundary) ZWD
(Effective) Well Length Lw
Two No-Flow Boundaries - Dual-Porosity: This is a dual-porosity system with impermeable

upper and lower Boundaries. Interporosity flow is pseudo-steady state. The associated
parameters are:

Well Offset (from upper or lower boundary) ZWD
(Effective) Well Length Lw Storativity ratio ω
Inter porosity flow coefficient λ
211
No-Flow / Constant Pressure Boundary - Homogeneous: This is a homogeneous layer, with
one impermeable boundary and one constant pressure boundary (upper or lower). The associated
parameters are:
Well Offset (from the no-flow boundary) ZWD (Effective) Well Length Lw
No-Flow / Constant Pressure Boundary - Dual-Porosity: This is a dual-porosity system with

one impermeable and one constant pressure boundary. Interporosity flow is pseudo-steady-state.
Well Offset (from the no-flow boundary) ZWD (Effective) Well Length Lw
Storativity ratio ω Inter porosity flow coefficient λ
Horizontal Well Flow Model Input Parameters

k: Radial Permeability: The effective horizontal permeability of the reservoir rock to the
mobile phase at current saturation.
kz: Vertical Permeability: Permeability to the mobile phase in the vertical direction.
S: Skin: The "true" or "mechanical" Darcy skin factor (i.e. the non-turbulent skin factor at the
wellbore, attributed to damage, improvement and completion).
Users should not confuse this with the pseudo-radial skin Spr, which is an apparent skin factor
computed when pseudo-radial flow develops in some flow models (e.g. a long horizontal well
with a damage skin (S) of +5.0 may have a pseudo-radial skin (Spr) of −6.0. Spr includes the
beneficial effects of the long drain-hole).
The skin factor S requested for input to Quick Match and Advanced Simulation is always the true
("damage") skin, not the pseudo-radial skin. Spr will appear as a computed result on some
diagnostic plots. Spr is required in the Deliverability IPR section because PanSystem uses the
(pseudo-)radial inflow equation to compute the productivity indices.
D: Rate-dependent skin coefficient: The “true” turbulent skin coefficient at the wellbore (gas
and condensate wells). Turbulent skin is D x flowrate. The comments under skin S (see above)
about pseudo-radial flow also apply to D.
Well Offset ZWD: The average dimensionless vertical distance (zw/h) of the well axis from the
upper or lower boundary (no-flow/no-flow models), or from the no-flow boundary (no-flow/
constant pressure models). 0 < ZWD< 1.0.
Lw: Well Length: The effective length of the well (i.e. the length actually open to flow. Lw ≤
Design length).
ω, λ:Storativity Ratio and Interporosity Flow Coefficient respectively; defined as for vertical
wells (refer to page 210).
212
7. 6. 6. Layer Boundaries
Description:
The Layer Boundaries option enables users to do the following for each layer in a reservoir:
• Define the boundary model of each layer
• Calculate image wells (max. 16,000 per layer)
• Edit the image well table.
For Analysis and Simulate Quick Match, users will not need image wells, but will have to
decide on a boundary geometry. This may be done here, or later during analysis (when the data
has been examined) via the Analysis Model option.
Users must initialize the image wells if Advanced Simulation is going to be performed.
Note:
- Boundaries in Advanced Simulation: for reservoir models other than radial homogeneous,
the computation of boundary effects in Advanced Simulation is strictly valid only if the
boundaries are far enough from the well for pseudo-radial flow to have developed by the time the
first boundary is encountered. This is because the signals from the image wells are modelled as
radial homogeneous (exponential integral function).
For example, when modelling boundaries with one of the vertical fracture models, the response
should have reached pseudo-radial flow (i.e. it should be out of linear flow) before the effect of
any boundary appears. This requires that the nearest boundary be at least roughly two fracture
half-lengths (∼ 2Xf) away from the well. If the boundary is in too close, so that its effect appears
during linear fracture flow, the computed boundary response will not be valid.
This applies equally to horizontal well models. Roughly speaking, any boundaries should be at
least one well length (∼ Lw) away from any point in the wellbore.
- Boundaries in Quick Match: Quick Match uses the image well principle in most cases but,
unlike Advanced Simulation, applies it through look-up tables rather than requiring image wells
to be computed. The above observations about boundary distance apply to boundary modelling
in Quick Match, but with three important exceptions, which use Green’s functions (ref. 73),
instead of tables:
- radial homogeneous model: all the orthogonal boundary geometries (parallel, U-shaped,
etc.) are modelled using Green’s functions instead of image well look-ups. This offers
more flexibility (variable distances) and accuracy.
- infinite conductivity vertical fracture model: the rectangular closed system boundary
geometry is modelled using Green’s functions, and permits boundaries to be placed at any
desired distance from the well. There is no minimum distance, as long as no boundary
crosses the fracture. Fracture orientation relative to the boundaries can therefore be taken
into account. The fracture is assumed to be oriented along the x-axis (screen east-west).
The flexibility of Green’s functions is only available for the closed system rectangular
boundary geometry with the infinite conductivity fracture model.
- horizontal well model, radial homogeneous reservoir: the rectangular closed system
boundary geometry is modelled using Green’s functions, and permits boundaries to be
placed at any desired distance from the well. There is no minimum distance, as long as no
boundary crosses the wellbore. Well orientation relative to the boundaries can therefore be
taken into account. The well is assumed to be oriented along the x-axis (screen east-west).
The flexibility of Green’s functions is only available for the closed system rectangular
geometry with the horizontal well model.
213
What users see:
the Layer Boundaries button (having selected a particular layer if there are more than one), the
dialog box shown in Figure 7.6.6 - 1, “Boundary Parameters dialog box,” on page 215 appears.
Figure : 7.6.6 - 1 Boundary Parameters dialog box

The two areas - Boundary model and Image wells - are dealt with in turn in the following
sections.
Boundary Model Area

Description:
Use this area to set the boundary geometry for each layer.
Users must initialize the boundary model if Advanced Simulation is going to be performed. For
Analysis and Simulate Quick Match, this can be done here, or later during analysis (when users
have examined the data) via the Analysis Model option.
For Advanced Simulation only, once users have selected the geometry they require to specify
the distances from the Principal well to each boundary, and whether the boundary condition is
"no-flow" or "constant-pressure". This applies to all models except, of course, infinitely acting.
For Advanced Simulation, boundaries are modelled using image wells. These can be calculated,
or typed in. The image well co-ordinates are written to the PAN system file, by performing a File
Save or Save As...
What users see:
When users click on the list box in the Boundary Model area in Figure 7.6.6 - 1, “Boundary
Parameters dialog box,” on page 215, the boundary model list appears.
Select a boundary model. For all choices except infinitely acting, a dialog box similar to Figure
7.6.6 - 2, “Boundary Model Parameter dialog box,” on page 216 appears, showing a schematic of
the boundary geometry; this dialog box applies to the parallel fault model.
214
Figure : 7.6.6 - 2 Boundary Model Parameter dialog box

Some models will offer a choice of boundary types: no-flow (impermeable) or constant pressure
(uniform flowrate on either side). Check the appropriate checkbox.
The distance to the nearest boundary is referred to variously as the "characteristic length" or
"configuration length", L, elsewhere in the User Guide and program.
In the following section each model is described.
The Boundary Models
- Infinitely acting: the infinitely acting model has no boundaries.
- Single fault: a single, vertical, linear boundary of infinite extent. Length L1 is the
perpendicular distance to the fault. The image well co-ordinates assume the fault is “south”
of the well.
- Parallel faults: two parallel, vertical, linear boundaries of infinite extent (e.g. a channel
sand). Lengths L1 and L3 are the perpendicular distances to each fault. The faults are
modelled as being to the “south” (L1) and the “north” (L3) of the well.
- Intersecting faults (30), (45), (60), (90), (120): two vertical boundaries intersecting at an
angle given by the value in brackets. Lengths L1 (south) and L2 (east/northeast trending)
are the perpendicular distances to each fault respectively.
- U-Shaped faults: parallel vertical boundaries closed at one end by a perpendicular
boundary (e.g. a channel closed at one end). Lengths L1 (south), L2 (east) and L3 (north)
are the perpendicular distances to each fault respectively.
- Closed system: four vertical linear boundaries forming a closed rectangle.
215
Figure : 7.6.6 - 3 Closed System Boundary Model

Enter the boundary distances from the well and select no-flow or constant pressure for
each. The Calculate button will compute the Drainage Area and Dietz Shape Factor (ref.
42). Selecting the OK button will also calculate and update these values.
- 2-cell Compartmentalized: The selected reservoir flow model is in a closed system
connected via a partially communicating ("leaky") boundary to a second cell which
provides semi-steady-state pressure support. The leaky boundary L4 must be the farthest
one from the well.
Figure : 7.6.6 - 4 2-Cell Compartmentalised Boundary Model
216
Enter values for the boundary distances of the closed system. L4 should be the largest
dimension if they are unequal. The pressure support is assumed to come across the
boundary at distance L4. The Calculate button will compute the volume V1 of the main
cell (from these dimensions, and h and φ from the Layer Parameters), the Drainage Area
and Dietz Shape Factor.
Enter the volume V2 of the supporting cell (this determines how much support will be
provided), and the effective transmissibility Teff across the boundary (this determines how
rapidly the support is provided).
- Hexagonal: (see Figure 7.6.6 - 5, “Hexagonal Boundary model,” on page 218) this model
may be used to replicate circular boundary models by representing the circular geometry by
that of a hexagon. The well is assumed to be at the centre of the hexagon.
Enter the Radius of the “circle”. The equivalent hexagon dimension L will appear
automatically when users exit the Radius field. Alternatively, enter L and the Radius will be
updated. The distance L, is measured from the centre to one of the vertices of the hexagon.
The equivalence between R and L is based on area. At present only the No-flow boundary
option is available.
Figure : 7.6.6 - 5 Hexagonal Boundary model

Calculate Image Wells
Description:
Image wells (ref. 75) are only needed for Advanced Simulation calculations. Quick Match uses a
library of response tables and does not require image wells.
Before PanSystem can calculate the image wells users will need to select a boundary model and
enter the required information (described in the preceding sections). This option will then
calculate the co-ordinates of the image wells relative to the "Principal" well, which, by
definition, is at co-ordinate position (0,0). If additional “active” wells are being modelled, a set
of image wells will be generated for each well. These can also be viewed and/or edited.
Note: For all models, the computation of boundary effects in Advanced Simulation is
strictly only valid if the Boundaries are far enough from the well for pseudo-radial flow to
have developed by the time the first boundary is encountered.
217
What users see
Referring to Figure 7.6.6 - 1, “Boundary Parameters dialog box,” on page 215, when users select
Calculate image wells, the dialog box in Figure 7.6.6 - 6, “Test Duration dialog box,” on page
219 appears. Enter the approximate total duration of the test (i.e. covering all the test periods to
be simulated, including the history); this is needed to ensure that enough image wells are
generated. For some geometries, the longer the test duration the greater the number of image
wells to be calculated. If users end up with a huge number of images, these can be reduced by
entering a smaller value for the test duration - but at the risk of introducing simulation errors at
late time.
Figure : 7.6.6 - 6 Test Duration dialog box

When users select OK, the image well co-ordinates are calculated. The total number per active
well is displayed on the screen. To View the co-ordinates, use Edit Image Wells.
Note: Users should remember to re-calculate the image wells if they alter a boundary geometry,
or extend (or reduce) the duration of the test, or change the reservoir or fluid description of the
well(s). Note also that if a well is added after image wells have been generated, the image wells
must be calculated again to generate the set required for the new well.
Edit Image Wells
Description:
Use this option to view or edit an existing image well co-ordinate table, or to type in a user-
defined list of co-ordinates (in order of increasing distance from the Principal well).
What users see:

Referring to Figure 7.6.6 - 1, “Boundary Parameters dialog box,” on page 215, when users select
this option, what they see depends on what has been entered previously.
- If no image well table exists already, the dialog box in Figure 7.6.6 - 7, “New Image Wells
dialog box,” on page 219 appears, prompting users to enter the number of images to be
defined. Type a suitable number here.
Figure : 7.6.6 - 7 New Image Wells dialog box

When users select OK, an empty table appears as in Figure 7.6.6 - 8, “Edit Image Wells dialog
box,” on page 220, with the requested number of rows.
218
Figure : 7.6.6 - 8 Edit Image Wells dialog box

Type in the image well co-ordinates in the order of increasing distance from the active well.
- If an image well table exists already, a table similar to that in Figure 7.6.6 - 8, “Edit Image
Wells dialog box,” on page 220 is generated, listing the calculated image well co-
ordinates, which can be edited.
For the function keys on the right: See Section 6. 2. 2 “Edit”, on page 139
7. 6. 7. Create Composite
Description:
Use this option to create a composite layer from two or more specified layers. In order to create
a composite, at least two "active" layer names must be present in the Layer Control list box. The
program combines the layers to create a single layer with averaged properties.
The composite layer now has the status of any other layer, it can be edited, and is available for
selection on entry to Analysis. It will not, however, be included in an Advanced Sim run.
Advanced Sim will only use the active constituent layers.
The following composite layer properties are computed automatically as thickness-averaged
values:
kcomp = Σ kihi / hcomp
φcomp = Σ φihi / hcomp
7. 6. 7. Create Composite
Scomp = Σ kihiSi / Σ kihi

where hcomp = Σ hi
All other layer and fluid parameters take their values from Layer 1.
Edit the composite layer parameters if different values are to be used.

What users see:
Referring to Figure 7.0.0 - 1, “Reservoir Description dialog box,” on page 183, Layer Control
area, any layers that users wish to exclude from the composite must be made “inactive”. Select
Create composite and the dialog box in Figure 7.6.7 - 1, “Composite Layer dialog box,” on page
221 appears. It is shown here for a reservoir that has been configured with four layers, but Layer
3 has been made “inactive”.
219
Figure : 7.6.7 - 1 Composite Layer dialog box

The Select layer for pseudo-tables area is only of significance in gas and condensate wells.
Only one set of pseudo-tables can be used in Analysis and Simulate, and users must select the
appropriate set here.
Click Combine to create the composite layer.
Upon return to the Reservoir Description dialog box, users will find the composite layer listed
in the Layer Control area.
Figure : 7.6.7 - 2 Layer Control Area with Composite Layer
7. 6. 8. Create Commingled
Description:
Use this option to create a commingled system from any two layers in the reservoir description.
The “commingled layers” option allows users to model a two-layered system in Quick Match
and Automatch keeping the permeability and skin of the two layers explicit. This is an
alternative to combining them into a single “composite layer” using thickness-averaged values
(see “Create Composite”, on page 220). The advantage of this configuration is that, in addition to
keeping k and S separate for each layer, the effects of crossflow between layers can be included.
In particular, when a closed system boundary model is used, the simulation will respect
differential pressure depletion between the layers, leading to crossflow and re-charging during
build-up.
Commingled systems can only be constructed from layers whose flow models are radial
homogeneous. Only two layers can be commingled at any one time. Both layers must have the
same boundary model, and are assumed to have the same initial pressures at the start of the rate
history. This initial pressure is nominally the pressure in the first line of the Rate Changes table.
As for the single-layered models, Quick Match will provide users with an estimate of the correct
initial pressure (Pi), should the specified one incorrect.
220
Users do not need to create a commingled layer if they are going to use Advanced Simulation.
Advanced Sim offers the flexibility of different boundary models and initial pressures in each
layer, plus the ability to commingle up to 5 layers. If users do set-up a commingled layer for use
with Quick Match, it will not be included in any Advanced Sim run - Advanced Sim will ignore
commingled (and composite) layers and only use the active constituent layers.
What users see:
Referring to Figure 7.0.0 - 1, “Reservoir Description dialog box,” on page 183, Layer Control.
Select Create commingled and the dialog box in Figure 7.6.8 - 1, “Commingled Layer Selection
dialog box,” on page 222 is generated. It is shown here for a reservoir that has been configured
with four layers, but Layer 3 has been made “inactive” and so does not appear in the list.
Figure : 7.6.8 - 1 Commingled Layer Selection dialog box

The Select layer for pseudo-tables and fluid parameters will assign the fluid properties of the
chosen layer to the commingled system. (In particular, for a gas or condensate well, only one set
of pseudo-tables can be used in Analysis and Quick Match, and users must select the appropriate
set here.) The boundary model (if any) associated with the selected layer will be applied to both
layers.
Select Combine to create the commingled layer.
Upon return to the Reservoir Description dialog box, users will find the commingled layer
listed in the Layer Control area.
Figure : 7.6.8 - 2 Layer Control area with commingled layer

If users alter the properties or any of the constituent layers in Dataprep, they should delete and re-
create the commingled layer.
When modelling a commingled system with a closed boundary configuration in Quick Match,
users should switch on the Material Balance correction (see Section 10. 2. 7 “Pressure
Transformation”, on page 327) to correctly model the effects of depletion in each layer.
221
7. 6. 9. Fluid Parameters
Description:
Use this option to view, enter or edit the Fluid Parameters of a selected layer. Before setting the
fluid parameters, users must select the Fluid Type: Oil (Single-Phase), Water (Single-Phase),
Oil (Multi-Phase), Gas (Single-Phase) or Condensate. For detail: See Section 7. 1 “Fluid
Type”, on page 184.
The selected fluid type applies to all layers, but the fluid properties themselves can be different in
each layer.
A Fluid Parameters dialog box can be brought up for any layer by highlighting it in the Layer
Control list. Not all parameters displayed in the dialog box actually need to be specified for
welltest analysis purposes. The mandatory parameters appear in red.
Fluid properties can be typed in, or calculated from production or laboratory data.
Oil, Water and Oil (Multi-Phase Perrine)
Description:
The same Fluid Parameters dialog box is used for Oil (Single-Phase and Multi-Phase
Perrine) and Water (Single Phase) modes. Differences exist only in the minimum datasets
required for analysis and on-screen fluid property calculations for each mode.
What users see:
Fluid Parameters with Fluid Type set to one of the above, the dialog box in Figure 7.6.9 - 1,
“Fluid Parameters for Oil dialog box,” on page 224 appears. The data pertain to the layer that was
highlighted in the list of layers.
The following table summarizes the fluid parameters users will need to specify for welltest
analysis, or for on-screen fluid property calculation.
Purpose Oil (Single) Water (Single) Oil (Multi-Phase)
Analysis Bo, Uo, Ct Bw, Uw, Ct Bo, Uo, (Bw, Uw),
(Bg, Ug), Ct
On-screen P(layer), T(layer), P(layer), T(layer), P(layer), T(layer),
Calculation Oil gravity, Gas Salinity Oil gravity, Gas
specific gravity, specific gravity,
GOR (prod) GOR (prod),
Salinity
Users can either type in the red parameters, or they can be calculated with the Calculate button.
In order to Calculate, users must enter the parameters shown in the On-screen Calculation row
in the table.
When users Calculate the fluid parameters, the individual rock and fluid compressibilities are
normally computed from correlations and combined in the total compressibility, Ct. If users wish
to enter their own values for any of these compressibilities, type in the preferred value and then
switch-off the checkbox next to the parameter. Calculate will then include the user-defined Ct
calculation.
Note: the Calculate button will only overwrite data whose associated checkbox is checked on.
Not all parameters displayed actually need to be quantified for welltest analysis purposes. The
mandatory parameters for analysis appear in red colored text/numerals.
222
Figure : 7.6.9 - 1 Fluid Parameters for Oil dialog box

Use Correlations
Correlations - Bo, Pb, Rs - Oil viscosity - Gas viscosity.
To enable the Calculate button, check the Use Correlations checkbox. Choose the correlations
for Bo, Pb, Rs; Oil viscosity and Gas viscosity from the list boxes provided. The fluid properties
are computed at the specified Check Pressure and Check Temperature (nominally set equal to
the layer conditions).
Different correlations can be used to calculate the hydrocarbon fluid properties. With the
exception of Vazquez-Beggs, these correlations assume a single-stage flash to standard
conditions. (The published Vazquez-Beggs correlation assumed the first stage separator to be at
a “typical” 100 psig and 600F, and provided for a pressure (and temperature) correction to gas
gravity if different. To simplify the data input, PanSystem assumes 100 psig and 600F and applies
no correction).
223
If users are comparing with multi-stage flash experimental data, be sure to total up the GOR’s
from all stages, and to enter a gas gravity which is the GOR-weighted sum of the gravities from
each stage. The screen is not suited to comparison with differential liberation data.
- For Bo, Pb, Rs, (and Co), the following correlations are available:
Glasø, Lasater, Standing, Vazquez & Beggs (refs. 22, 35).
- For Oil Viscosity Uo, the following correlations are available:
Beggs et al, Beal et al (refs. 22, 35).
- For Gas Viscosity Ug, the following correlations are available:
Lee et al, Carr et al (refs. 21, 22, 35).
Other properties are computed with fixed correlations:
For water: Bw is calculated from ref. 13b, Uw from Van Wingen's correlation (ref. 13c), and Cw
from Meehan's correlation (ref. 13a).
For gas: Tc, Pc are calculated internally from Standing's correlation (ref. 22); z-factor from
Dranchuk et al (1974); and Cg from Mattar et al (1975) (both in App.A of ref. 21).
For the rock: Cf is from Hall's correlation (refs 2, 16).
The following parameters can be calculated using the selected correlations and the input
parameters. Alternatively, they can be entered directly. Only those marked as mandatory (red
colored text/numerals) are required for analysis and simulation.
• Calculated properties
These parameters are conventionally computed at layer pressure and temperature for welltest
analysis.
- Bo: Bo is the volume factor of the oil. It is a mandatory parameter for analysis in Oil
(Single-Phase) and Oil (Multi-Phase Perrine) modes.
- Bw: Bw is the volume factor of the water. It is only a mandatory parameter for analysis in
Oil (Multi-Phase Perrine) mode if WOR > 0, and in Water (Single-Phase) mode.
- Bg: Bg is the volume factor of the gas. It is only a mandatory parameter for analysis in Oil
(Multi-Phase Perrine) mode if the Produced GOR > Solution GOR (i.e. there is free gas in
the reservoir).
- Uo: µo is the viscosity of the oil. It is a mandatory parameter for analysis in Oil (Single-
Phase) and Oil (Multi-Phase Perrine) modes.
- Uw: µw is the viscosity of the water. It is only a mandatory parameter for analysis in Oil
(Multi-Phase Perrine) mode if WOR > 0, and in Water (Single-Phase) mode.
- Ug: µg is the viscosity of the gas. It is only a mandatory parameter for analysis in Oil
(Multi-Phase Perrine) mode if the Produced GOR > Solution GOR (i.e. there is free gas in
the reservoir).
- Co: the isothermal compressibility of the oil.
- Cw: the isothermal compressibility of the water.
- Cg: is the isothermal compressibility of the gas.
- Cf: the rock pore-volume compressibility.
- Ct: the total compressibility of the layer, calculated as:
Ct = SwCw + SoCo + SgCg + Cf
224
It is mandatory for analysis.
The value entered in the Ct box is automatically written to the Layer Parameters dialog
box, where it is displayed for information only.
- Rho: The oil density ρo at check pressure and temperature. Not used in calculations.
- Rho w: The water density ρw at check pressure and temperature. Not used in calculations.
- Rho g: The gas density ρg at check pressure and temperature. Not used in calculations.
- Bubble Point (Pb): The bubble point pressure of the oil at the check temperature,
computed using the specified Produced GOR. If the produced GOR is high because of
the liberation of free gas (e.g. from a gas cap), the bubble point will not correspond to the
true value for the oil. This will not affect the oil properties used in analysis (they are
computed at the check pressure, not the bubble point pressure).
- Solution GOR (Rs) describes gas dissolved in the reservoir oil at the specified Check
Pressure and Check Temperature.
If it is less than the produced GOR, there is free gas in the reservoir. In this case, a Perrine
multi-phase analysis can be performed if the Oil (Multi-Phase Perrine) fluid type is
selected.
• Input parameters for fluid property calculation
The following parameters are required to calculate the fluid parameters (above) using the
correlations. (Use Correlations must be switched on.)
They are not needed if users intend to type in the mandatory (red colored text/numerals) fluid
parameters directly, unless they want to perform a multi-phase flow analysis, in which case
refer to the notes below for Produced GOR and Water cut.
- Produced GOR: Produced GOR (Rsp) is the Gas/Oil Ratio produced from the layer. This
is the Total gas/oil ratio (i.e. solution gas plus any free gas). If the Oil (Multi-Phase
Perrine) fluid type has been selected, the Perrine-Martin multi-phase flow analysis
method will be invoked for the gas phase if Produced Rsp > Solution Rs.
- Water-Cut: Water-Cut is the (decimal) fraction of water in the fluid produced from the
layer. If the Oil (Multi-Phase Perrine) fluid type has been selected, the Perrine-Martin
multi-phase flow analysis method will be invoked for the water phase if Water-cut > 0.
- Check pressure: This parameter is required to calculate fluid properties. Use this entry to
check fluid properties at different pressures (e.g. to compare with lab data), but remember
to compute them at the correct pressure (conventionally the layer pressure) before
proceeding to Analysis or Simulate.
- Check temperature: This parameter is required to calculate fluid properties. Use this entry
to check fluid properties at different temperatures (e.g. to compare with lab data), but
remember to compute them at the correct temperature (conventionally the layer

temperature) before proceeding to Analysis or Simulate.
- Oil specific gravity: Oil specific gravity is the stock tank gravity of the oil produced from
the layer. This parameter is required to calculate fluid parameters for Oil (single-phase
and multi-phase Perrine) systems.
- Gas specific gravity: Gas specific gravity (relative to air) is the gravity of the separator
gas, at standard conditions, produced from the layer. This is required to calculate
properties for Oil (single-phase and multi-phase) systems. In a multi-stage separation, it
should represent the gas yield from all stages, suitable weighted. For the Vazquez &
Beggs correlation, the first stage separator is assumed to be at 100 psig.
225
- Water salinity: Water salinity describes the total amount of dissolved solids in the
produced water.
Oil (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method)
Description:
If the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method is selected with oil as fluid type (Figure 7.0.0 - 1,
“Reservoir Description dialog box,” on page 183), the Oil Fluid Parameters dialog box will
allow users to enter the produced fluid data and to select correlations (see Figure 7.6.9 - 2, “Oil
Fluid Parameters dialog box for Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure,” on page 227). The methodology
is similar to that described under Oil (Single-Phase) in the preceding pages - only the screen
layouts differ. For the calculation or import of the multi-phase pseudo-pressure tables: See
Section 7. 3 “Pseudo-Pressures”, on page 186.
Figure : 7.6.9 - 2 Oil Fluid Parameters dialog box for Multi-Phase

Pseudo-Pressure
Checking Oil Properties
This section can be used to look at the results of the selected correlations.
Selecting the Check button in the Oil fluid parameters dialog box takes users to the Oil
properties check dialog box.
Figure : 7.6.9 - 3 Oil properties check dialog box

• Enter the values of Pressure, Temperature and Produced GOR at which the fluid properties
are to be checked. Set the pressure and temperature to reservoir conditions before leaving this
section.
• If users select the Calculate button, the selected correlations will be used at these conditions
to give (top to bottom): volume factor, viscosity, and density of (left to right) oil, gas and
water. The Bubble point pressure and Solution GOR are also calculated.
226
For details of the various parameters: See Section “Use Correlations”, on page 224.
It is possible to tune the oil properties to match measured data. The multi-phase pseudo-pressure
incorporates fluid properties over a wide pressure range, so tuning is advisable where PVT data
are available.
Matching Correlations To Measured Data

Selecting the Match option from the Oil fluid parameters dialog box takes users to the Match
oil properties dialog box (Figure 7.6.9 - 4, “Match Oil Properties dialog box,” ). This is to allow
users to tune any of the black oil correlations against measured data using a minimization
routine.
Note: that data from PVT reports should correspond to constant mass/constant composition
experiments (CME/CCE), not constant volume depletion (CVD).
Once a parameter has been tuned, all subsequent calculations of that parameter, and any others
that depend on it, will include the effects of the tuning, in any part of the program.
Figure : 7.6.9 - 4 Match Oil Properties dialog box

There are 5 main sections in the dialog. These are described as follows:
• The control area, top left. Under Match property users can select the PVT property they
wish to tune via a drop-down menu.
Figure : 7.6.9 - 5 Match Property Options
227
using correlation - the correlation used has already been chosen in the Oil fluid
parameters dialog box, and is simply displayed for information on the tuning screen. (This
avoids possible inconsistencies in parameter tuning, such as using one correlation for
tuning bubble-point, and another for solution GOR.). An asterisk (*) by the name of the
correlation indicates that a fluid parameter has already been tuned using this correlation:
at produced GOR allows users to enter the measured GOR at which all the tuning will
take place.
Zero values -> clears any Observed Values that may have been typed in (see next
section).
Reset tuning sets the selected correlation back to its untuned condition (multiplier = 1,
shift = 0).
• The Observed Values area, top right. This is where users enter the measured PVT data to
which they wish to match.
• The Tuning parameters area, bottom left. This shows the tuning shift and multiplier, and
Match quality.
Anchored and Free Tuning options are only available for Bubble Pt Pressure and Solution
GOR selection options from the Match Property section.
• The Calculated Values area, bottom right. Values in this section of the table matrix are
displayed after the Calculate or Best-Fit buttons have been selected - they are non-editable.
Calculated values will appear in the corresponding cells of the pressure/temperature matrix
providing that non-zero numbers have been entered into the Observed Values section of the
table matrix.
• The four operational buttons situated along the bottom of the dialog (i.e. Calculate, Best-Fit,
Copy and Plot).
- Calculate: Select this button to see the effect of the current tuning coefficients on the user
input observed values. Numbers will be generated in the Calculated Values pressure/
temperature matrix where non-zero numbers have been entered in the corresponding cells
within the Observed Values matrix.
- Best-Fit: Select this button to perform a best-fit calculation on the entered Observed
Values.
- Copy: This button will select all the Observed Values, together with their pressures,
temperatures and Calculated Values, and transfer them to the Windows Clipboard. This
information can subsequently be pasted into another clipboard-enabled application such as
Notepad, WordPad, Word or Excel.
- Plot: Select this button to plot the Observed Values and Calculated Values of the current
Match Property, provided there is at least one line in the table matrix with multiple values.
228
If there is only one line of multiple values in the matrix, further use of Plot is allowed, to
compare the results of successive calculations. For example, these might be performed
with/without Best-Fit, or with the Best-Fit Anchored/Free (when permitted), or with
different property correlations (i.e. selected by returning to the Oil Fluid Parameters
(Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressures) sub-dialog).
If there are several lines of multiple values in the matrix, the Plot button presents a PVT
Match Plot Selection dialog box from which to select the vertical or horizontal line of values
to be plotted. This multiple choice of values excludes the option, described above, to plot the
results of multiple calculations for a single line of values.
What to do:
The first step is to enter the Observed Values:
• Select the required Match parameter. In Figure 7.6.9 - 4, “Match Oil Properties dialog box,”
on page 228, this is Bo, with the Glasø correlation (selected previously).
• Enter the pressure column and temperature row values (e.g. for the example illustrated in
Figure 7.6.9 - 6, “Observed and Untuned Calculated Values of Formation Volume Factor,” on
page 230, data for 1000, 2000, 3000 and 4000 psia at 2300F has been entered).
• Select Calculate to see the results at the specified points. These would normally be the
untuned values, but this button includes the effect of any previous tuning. (This can be
cancelled by selecting the Reset tuning button first.)
• For each value in the Observed values fields, corresponding Calculated values will be
displayed in the lower panel. Nothing in the Calculated Values area can be edited.
This is also a useful way of generating a table of PVT results at different pressures and
temperatures. Enter dummy values (e.g. 1.0) in the Observed values fields, and select
Calculate to get an array of computed values. (Do not try to Best-Fit in this case!)
Figure : 7.6.9 - 6 Observed and Untuned Calculated Values of Formation

Volume Factor
229
When the Observed values have been entered, select Best-Fit. This starts the matching routine,
which displays the best fit Calculated values, and the resultant Tuning parameters. The Match
field, at the bottom left, is a quality-of-fit indicator with 1.000 being a perfect match.
Figure : 7.6.9 - 7 Best-Fit for Formation Volume Factor

The tuning performed here will be used throughout the data set unless users reset the tuning
parameters.
Note: If the bubble point is tuned, users will not be able to tune the solution GOR. This is
necessary for consistency.
Simultaneous tuning of solution GOR and bubble point
However, users may specify a measured bubble point, and use this to weight the tuning of the
GOR. Proceed as follows:
- Select Bubble Point and enter the desired observed value at the appropriate temperature
and GOR. Do not tune (and cancel any prior tuning).
- Select Solution GOR, enter observed value(s) at the appropriate pressure(s) and
temperature in the normal way.
- Select the Best-fit button, then answer Yes at the first prompt .... 7. 6. 9. Fluid Parameters
230
.... then enter a bubble point weighting factor between 0.01 and 1000. A factor of 0.01 means
almost no weighting at all (i.e. the GOR will be tuned without paying much attention to the
specified bubble point). 1000 will force the GOR algorithm to respect the specified bubble point
as closely as possible. The weighting has a roughly logarithmic dependence on the value entered,
and a factor of 10 is a midway "compromise" weighting.
If tuning Solution GOR with multiple Observed value entries, but without bubble point
weighting (if users answered No at the prompt), do not enter any values at pressures higher than
the bubble point, as this will unfairly bias the matching process. Users may enter any number of
values of Rs < Rsb at P < Pb, but do not enter anything higher than Rs = Rsb at P = Pb.
Anchored and Free tuning
For the Bubble Point and Solution GOR, the Tuning parameters area contains a choice of
Anchored and Free tuning.
With the Anchored option switched on for GOR tuning, Rs is forced to equal 0 at standard
pressure and temperature. For the bubble point tuning, Pb is forced to equal standard pressure at
standard temperature.
With the Free option switched on, no such constraint is applied: this results in a better match for
oils whose GORs are higher than those predicted by the untuned correlation below bubble point.
In the following figures, for instance, the observed GOR at 1000 psia is 180. With the anchoring
constraint on, the best fit value is 135.337. With no anchoring, the best fit is 192.866.
Figure : 7.6.9 - 8 Calculated Values for Anchored Solution GOR
231
Figure : 7.6.9 - 9 Calculated Values for Free Solution GOR

Once a satisfactory match has been obtained, the Observed values and Calculated values of the
current Match Property can be plotted (provided there is at least one line in the table matrix with
multiple values). Select the Plot button to produce a plot similar to Figure 7.6.9 - 10, “Plot of
Observed and Calculated Solution GOR for Best-Fit on Free Solution GOR,” on page 233. This
plot can also be edited and re-formatted within the Plotting utility, using the Edit menu options,
before printing or exporting using the File menu options.
Figure : 7.6.9 - 10 Plot of Observed and Calculated Solution GOR for

Best-Fit on Free Solution GOR
232
Gas
Description:
If Gas (as a Single-Phase) is selected as Fluid Type (Figure 7.0.0 - 1, “Reservoir Description
dialog box,” on page 183), the Gas Fluid Parameters dialog box allows users to calculate gas
properties at specified pressure and temperature using correlations (from a specified gas gravity)
or an Equation of State (from a specified gas composition). Alternatively, parameters can be
typed in directly.
In addition, tables of µg, z, and µg, Ct can be computed (or edited) for the pseudo-pressure and
pseudo-time integrals.
A facility is also available to import an externally-generated table of viscosity and z-factor values
against pressure.
There is a conventional real gas pseudo-pressure generation facility, and it is also possible to
generate or import a multi-phase pseudo-pressure table.
What users see:

Fluid Parameters with Fluid Type set to Gas (single-phase) the dialog box in Figure 7.6.9 - 11,
“Gas Fluid Parameters dialog box,” on page 234 is generated. The data pertain to the layer that
was highlighted in the list of layers.
Figure : 7.6.9 - 11 Gas Fluid Parameters dialog box

It is not necessary to quantify all of the displayed parameters for welltest analysis purposes. The
mandatory parameters appear in red colored numerals/text.
233
The following table summarizes the fluid parameters that are required for welltest analysis and
simulation, or for on-screen fluid property calculation.
Purpose Use Correlations Use EoS
Analysis T(layer), Bg, Ug, T(layer), Bg, Ug,
Ct, z, Cg Ct, z, Cg
On-Screen P(layer), T(layer), Gas Specific
Calculation Gas Specific Gravity
Gravity Gas Composition
Users can either type in the parameters which are mandatory for analysis, or they can calculate
them with the Calculate button. In order to Calculate, users must enter the parameters shown in
the On-screen Calculation row in the table.
To enable the Calculate button, check the Use Correlations box or the Use EoS box. For the
EoS option, the full gas composition from C1 - C7+ will be required.
normally computed from correlations and combined in the total compressibility Ct. If users wish
to enter their own values for any of these compressibilities, enter the preferred value and uncheck
the checkbox next to the parameter. Calculate will then include this value in the Ct calculation.
Note: the Calculate button will only overwrite data whose associated checkbox is checked.
mandatory parameters for analysis appear in red colored text/numerals. However, users have the
option to de-select the values for, Cg, Cw, Cf and/or Ct, if they specifically require to do so. To
do this, click on the associated checkboxes to uncheck them, then only the remaining checkboxes
(i.e. the enabled ones) will be updated by Calculate.
Use Correlations
Type in the Gas specific gravity and the Check Pressure and Check Temperature (normally
the same as the layer P and T).
Choose the correlation for Gas viscosity from the list box (the Lee et al and Carr et al (refs. 21,
22, 35) correlations are available).
Tc, Pc are computed internally from Standing’s correlation (ref. 22) and not displayed.
The z-factor is from Dranchuk et al (1974) (ref. 21, App.A).
Cg, the isothermal gas compressibility, is from Mattar et al (1975) (App.A of ref. 21).
For water and rock properties, the correlations are detailed in the preceding section for oil.
The following parameters can be calculated using the selected correlations or equation of state
and the input parameters. Alternatively, they can be entered directly. Only those marked as
mandatory (i.e. red colored text/numerals) are required for analysis and simulation.
234
• Calculated properties
These parameters are conventionally computed at layer pressure and temperature for welltest
analysis.
- Bg: Bg is the volume factor of the gas. It is mandatory for welltest analysis.
- Ug: Ug is the viscosity of the gas. It is mandatory for welltest analysis.
- Ct: Ct is the total compressibility of the layer, calculated as:
Ct = SwCw + SoCo + SgCg + Cf
It is mandatory for analysis.
The value entered in the Ct box is automatically written to the Layer Parameters dialog
box, where it is displayed for information only.
- Z: Z is the gas deviation factor. It is mandatory for analysis.
- Cg: Cg is the isothermal compressibility of the gas. It is mandatory (for wellbore storage
analysis).
Please refer to the preceding section for oil/water fluid types for details on calculated water and
rock properties.
• Input parameters for fluid property calculation
- Check temperature: This parameter is required to calculate fluid properties. Use this entry
to check fluid properties at different temperatures (e.g. to compare with lab data), but
remember to compute them at the correct temperature (i.e. conventionally the layer
temperature) before proceeding to Analysis or Simulate. It is also a mandatory entry for
welltest analysis (it appears in the inflow equation).
- Check pressure: This parameter is required to calculate fluid properties. Use this entry to
check fluid properties at different pressures (e.g. to compare with lab data), but remember
to compute them at the correct pressure (i.e. conventionally the layer pressure) before
proceeding to Analysis or Simulate.
- Gas specific gravity: this is the specific gravity (relative to air) of the separator gas, at
standard conditions. It is required to compute the gas properties using correlations.
- Water salinity: Water salinity describes the total amount of dissolved solids in the
produced water.
- Water/Gas ratio: The water/gas ratio is the ratio of produced water to produced gas. This
is not used in analysis, and is for information only
• Inorganics correction for correlations
When using correlations to calculate gas properties, users can input mole-percentages of non-
hydrocarbon "Inorganics" (N2, CO2, H2S) in the Gas Composition section. Corrections will then
be applied to z and µg, using the equations of Wichert & Aziz (App.A in ref. 21).
235
Select the Gas Composition button (see Figure 7.6.9 - 11, “Gas Fluid Parameters dialog box,”
on page 234) and input the Mole-percentages of the three Inorganics in the dialog box: in Figure
7.6.9 - 12, “Mole Fractions of Non-Hydrocarbon "Inorganics",” on page 237. There is no need to
specify the hydrocarbon composition of the gas, since the equation of state is not being used.
Figure : 7.6.9 - 12 Mole Fractions of Non-Hydrocarbon "Inorganics"

Do not Calculate or Normalize here, but OK back to the Gas Fluid Properties dialog box and
select Calculate.
Use EoS - Equation of State calculations

Description:
With this option, users must enter the various component mole-fractions (C1 - C7+ and N2, H2S
and CO2) that make up the gas in the layer. From this data the gas gravity and critical temperature
and pressure can be calculated, and the Schmidt-Wenzel Equation of State (refs 36, 37) computes
the z-factor.
The other gas properties are then derived from these using the correlations described previously.
What users see:
With Use EoS enabled, select the Gas composition button (see Figure 7.6.9 - 11, “Gas Fluid
Parameters dialog box,” on page 234), and the dialog box in Figure 7.6.9 - 13, “Gas Composition
dialog box,” on page 237 will be generated.
Figure : 7.6.9 - 13 Gas Composition dialog box

Enter the Component mole-fractions (%) and the molecular weight of the C7+ fraction, and
Calculate the gas gravity.
The mole-fractions should total 100.0% ± a small tolerance. If not, users will be prompted to
either correct a possible error or to re-normalize all the components again until they do total
100.0%. In the latter case, use the Normalize button, and Calculate again.
Select OK to return to the Fluid Parameters screen (Figure 7.6.9 - 11, “Gas Fluid Parameters
dialog box,” on page 234). Users can then Calculate the fluid properties using the EoS.
Select Cancel to ignore any changes made to the gas composition.
236
Pseudo Tables
Description:
PanSystem can handle gas behaviour by using one of the three pressure transforms: Pressure (i.e.
no transform), Pressure-squared, and Pseudo-pressure with or without Pseudo-time.
Pseudo-pressure is the theoretically rigorous approach (refs. 1, 21): pseudo-pressure removes the
non-linear behaviour caused by the variation of gas volume and viscosity with pressure. Pseudo-
time t’ (ref. 41) is an empirical correction for the variation of viscosity and compressibility Cg
with pressure.
The other two transforms are approximations which are more or less valid depending on test
conditions (pressure-squared for pressures below about 3000 psia, pressure for pressures above
about 3000 psia or tests where the drawdown is small). During analysis, users can select which
pressure and time transform to use via the Analysis menu commands.
Pseudo-pressure (m(p)) and pseudo-time (t’) are computed from tables that users prepare here in
Dataprep. See Section Chapter 15 B - “Equations” (gas), on page 536.
What users see:
When users select the Pseudo tables option (Figure 7.6.9 - 11, “Gas Fluid Parameters dialog
box,” on page 234), the dialog box in Figure 7.6.9 - 14, “Pseudo Table Editing dialog box,” on
page 238 is generated.
Figure : 7.6.9 - 14 Pseudo Table Editing dialog box

The pseudo-tables can be generated from fluid properties tables (closely spaced values of p-µ-z
for m(p), and p-µ-Ct for t'), typed in by hand, or imported from an external source.
The fluid properties tables themselves can be generated internally using the correlations EoS, (as
selected in the Gas Fluid Parameters dialog box), typed in by hand or pasted in from an
external source. For the Gas Fluid Type there is also an option to import p-µ-z data from a file.
The tables will be stored as part of the .PAN system file with the File Save or Save As....
commands.
They can also be listed in the Report section.
237
Table entry options
• Option 1(a) - Fully Automatic calculations
Select the Calculate All button, to calculate all the available tables. Users will be prompted to
specify the Start and End Pressures and Number of Points for the table:
Figure : 7.6.9 - 15 Pseudo Table Data Set-Up dialog box

The default settings should be adequate, but change them if required. The End Pressure should
be higher than the layer pressure. The Start pressure is best left at zero (although the welltest
pressures may not be low, remember that, in Deliverability, the AOF is computed at atmospheric
pressure). The program will extrapolate beyond the end pressures in the table in Analysis and
Deliverability if necessary.
Select the Plot button (if required), or select OK to accept the settings and return to the Fluid
Parameters dialog box (Figure 7.6.9 - 11, “Gas Fluid Parameters dialog box,” on page 234) or
select Cancel to ignore any calculations just made.
• Option 1(b) - Manual fluid property entry with automatic m(p) integration
Users can manually type or paste externally generated data into the P/Viscosity/Z tables and then
have PanSystem calculate the m(p) integral. Similarly, users can type or paste the P/Viscosity/Ct
tables for the pseudo-time. Use the Paste button on the table editing dialog to enter blocks of data
(Figure 7.6.9 - 16 “Pseudo-Pressure Table Edit dialog box”, on page 240).
Select the table required in the Pseudo Table Editing dialog box. Select Edit Table to enter new
data manually (or view an existing table). If the table is empty, users will be prompted with the
table set-up dialog box (see Figure 7.6.9 - 15, “Pseudo Table Data Set-Up dialog box,” on page
239). A standard PanSystem edit dialog box will be generated for data entry/edit (Figure 7.6.9 -
16, “Pseudo-Pressure Table Edit dialog box,” on page 240). For a description of the function
keys on the right-hand side of this dialog, See Section 6. 2. 2 “Edit”, on page 139. Users can edit
the pressure values if they do not have evenly-spaced data.
Now select m(p) Table, then select Calculate Table to perform the m(p) integral. It will use the
same pressure steps.
• Option 2 - Manual Entry of m(p)

The m(p) table can be entered or edited manually by pasting in values from an external source or
by directly typing in values (by-passing the intermediate fluid property tables), then selecting
OK to accept settings or the Plot button to view data (if required).
Select m(p) table in the Pseudo Table Editing dialog box, then select Edit Table to enter new
data manually (or view an existing table).
238
Figure : 7.6.9 - 16 Pseudo-Pressure Table Edit dialog box

For an explanation of the function keys on the right-hand side of the dialog, See Section 6. 2. 2
“Edit”, on page 139.
If users also want to use pseudo-time, they must supply a p-µ-Ct table, either by direct entry or
calculation. Select Viscosity/Ct Table in the Pseudo Table Editing dialog box and use the Edit
or Calculate buttons.
• Option 3 - Import of external P/Viscosity/Z table
Users can import Pressure/Viscosity/Z-factor tables. These are loaded as a file (default extension
.PIC) in ASCII format. For information on the file format: See Section 16. 4 “.PIC pressure/z-
factor/viscosity file”, on page 572, in case some other source is used (maximum of 200 entries
allowed).
Note: that the file format, which was implemented to meet a customer’s specifications, is
actually P/Z/Viscosity.
The option for importing P/Viscosity/Z tables is under the Pseudo Tables button on the Gas
Fluid Parameters dialog box (Figure 7.6.9 - 11, “Gas Fluid Parameters dialog box,” on page
234). Select the P/Viscosity/Z Table from the table selection list field, then the Import button.
The incoming Z-factor data and gas gravity are used to compute Bg, Cg and ρg at layer pressure
and temperature on the main Gas Fluid Parameters dialog, to ensure consistency. The p/
viscosity/Ct table is also updated, or created, automatically. The m(p) table is also created.
There should therefore be no need to calculate any Fluid Parameters after import.
What to do
• On the Gas Fluid Parameters screen:
- Set the Check Pressure and Temperature to reservoir conditions. (The temperature should
be the same as the one in the PIC file.)
- Enter the gas gravity.
- Enter the water salinity.
- Check the Use Correlations checkbox and select the Calculate button. This will
initialise Cw and Cf. Alternatively, users can enter their own values.
- Uncheck the Use Correlations checkbox.
239
• Select the Pseudo tables button.
• Select the P/Viscosity/Z Table in the Pseudo Table Editing dialog box (Figure 7.6.9 - 14,
“Pseudo Table Editing dialog box,” on page 238). Select the Import button and a File Open
dialog box will be generated:
Figure : 7.6.9 - 17 Selection of External P/Viscosity/Z file

Select a .PIC file (assuming one is available!).
• Select OK and PanSystem will confirm the import of the data:
Figure : 7.6.9 - 18 Values Calculated and Imported information box

• Do not Calculate the Viscosity/Ct or m(p) table, they have already been calculated during
the .PIC file import.
• The Gas fluid parameters screen will have been updated by the incoming data - do not
Calculate again.
Gas (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure method)
Description:
If Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method is selected with Gas Fluid Type (Figure 7.0.0 - 1,
“Reservoir Description dialog box,” on page 183), the Gas Fluid Parameters dialog box will
allow users to enter the produced fluid data and to select correlations (see Figure 7.6.9 - 19,
“Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Gas Fluid Parameters dialog box,” on page 241). The
methodology is similar to that described under Gas (single-phase) (see Section “Gas”, on page
234) - only the screen layouts differ, and the EoS option is not available. For the calculation or
import of multi-phase pseudo-pressure tables: See Section 7. 3 “Pseudo-Pressures”, on page 186.
Figure : 7.6.9 - 19 Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Gas Fluid Parameters

dialog box
240
Checking Gas Properties
Selecting the Check button on the Gas fluid parameters screen takes users to the Gas
properties check dialog (see Figure 7.6.9 - 20, “Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Gas Properties
Check dialog box,” on page 242).
Figure : 7.6.9 - 20 Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Gas Properties Check

dialog box
This screen allows users to calculate the properties of the gas and water (even if a WGR of zero
has been specified) at any specified Temperature and Pressure. Set the pressure and
temperature as required and click Calculate. For details of the various parameters: See Bullet
Point • “Calculated properties”, on page 236. Set the pressure and temperature to reservoir
conditions before leaving this section.
Inorganics
Users may add mole fractions of inorganic gas impurities to their dry gas model by selecting the
Inorganics button on the Gas fluid parameters dialog. This will generate the Inorganics in
Dry Gas dialog.
Figure : 7.6.9 - 21 Inorganics in Dry Gas dialog box

The three fields in this dialog box allow users to enter Mole fractions of the major inorganic
components found in dry gas; H 2 S, CO 2 and N 2 . These values will then be available for
subsequent calculations.
Matching Correlations to Measured Data
This operates similarly to the matching facility for oil with the exception that only Gas Viscosity
and Z-factor may be tuned. See Section “Matching Correlations To Measured Data”, on page
228. Note that data from PVT reports should correspond to constant mass/constant composition
Gas Condensate
The condensate system is treated as a single-phase “rich gas” or “wet stream” at reservoir
conditions (i.e. it is assumed to be above its dew-point).
If users select Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method on the main Reservoir Description screen
(Figure 7.0.0 - 1, “Reservoir Description dialog box,” on page 183), they may generate or import
and edit a multi-phase pseudo-pressure table (i.e. m’(p) Table), which will allow a more rigorous
treatment of the fluid properties (i.e. liquid drop-out, etc.) and relative permeability effects. This
is described in “Condensate (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method)”, on page 246.
241
Description:
If Condensate (as a single-phase) is selected as Fluid Type (Figure 7.0.0 - 1, “Reservoir
Description dialog box,” on page 183), the dialog box is similar to that for gas, but several new
parameters must be quantified. These new parameters will described in the following sections.
Please refer to the preceding Gas (single-phase) section for the other gas-related properties.
As well as the conventional pseudo-pressure/time generation facility described for gas, it is also
possible to generate or import a multi-phase pseudo-pressure table.
What users see:
Fluid Parameters with Fluid Type set to Condensate, the dialog box in Figure 7.6.9 - 22,
“Condensate Fluid Parameters dialog box,” on page 243 is generated.
Figure : 7.6.9 - 22 Condensate Fluid Parameters dialog box

It is not necessary to quantify all of the displayed parameters for welltest analysis purposes. The
mandatory parameters appear in red colored text/numerals.
The following table summarizes the fluid parameters users will need to specify for welltest
analysis, or for on-screen fluid property calculation.
Purpose Correlation Correlation EOS
Separator Fluid Reservoir Fluid Reservoir Fluid
Analysis T(layer), Bg, Ug, Ct, z, T(layer), Bg, Ug, Ct, z, T(layer), Bg, Ug, Ct, z,
Vvap Vvap Vvap
Calculation P(layer), T(layer), P(layer), T(layer), P(layer), T(layer),
Separator Gas Reservoir Gas Reservoir Fluid
Specific Gravity, Specific Gravity, Specific Gravity and
Composition, API,
API, CGR, API, CGR, CGR,
Psep, Tsep, Psep, Tsep, Psep, Tsep,
Users can either type in the parameters which are mandatory for analysis, or they can calculate
them with the Calculate button. In order to Calculate, users must enter the parameters shown in
the On-screen Calculation row in the table.
242
To enable the Calculate button, check the Use Correlations checkbox or the Use EoS checkbox.
For the EoS option users will need the full gas composition from C1 - C7+.
normally computed from correlations and combined in the total compressibility Ct. If users wish
to enter their own values for any of these compressibilities, they should uncheck the checkbox
next to the parameter, then enter their preferred value. Calculate will then include this value in
the Ct calculation. Alternatively enter the preferred value for Ct and uncheck the related
checkbox.
The Calculate button will only overwrite any data whose checkbox is checked.
mandatory parameters for analysis appear in red colored text/numerals. However, users have the
option to de-select the values for, Cg, Cw, Cf and/or Ct, if required. To do this, select the
associated checkboxes to clear them, then only the remaining checkboxes that are checked will
be included in the calculations.
What Calculations are Performed?
There are two classes of calculations associated with condensate fluid properties. All
calculations are made at the specified Check Pressure and Temperature.
- Calculate reservoir fluid properties: achieved via correlations (Use correlations) or by

equation of state (Use EoS) in the same way as for Gas (single-phase) fluid type. The
separator gas gravity is corrected to the re-combined wet stream gas gravity for these
calculations.
- Calculate the volumetric correction from separator gas rates to re-combined wet stream gas
rates, allowing for the vaporization of the surface condensate fraction at reservoir
conditions. The reservoir fluid is then assumed to be single-phase rich gas. This is made
via a selected correlation for the Vaporizing Volume Ratio Vvap:
Qres fluid = Qsep gas [1 + CGR Vvap 1E-06] (oilfield units).
Two correlations are available: one using the chart from Leshikar (App.A in ref.21), the other
from Gold, McKain and Jennings (ref.17).
Separator or reservoir fluids

There are two ways to describe the produced fluids for the calculation of fluid properties:
Separator Fluids option:

- For Use correlations, the gas gravity is assumed to correspond to the high pressure
separator gas. Using the CGR and condensate gravity, it is converted to the equivalent
reservoir rich gas gravity, and this is used as input to the correlations to compute the
fluid properties.
- For Use EOS, this option is not allowed.
Reservoir Fluids option:
- For Use correlations, this means that gas gravity is taken as the single-phase rich gas
gravity in the reservoir (measured at standard conditions). This gravity is used directly
by the correlations without correction.
- For Use EOS, the Gas composition must be supplied and is taken as the rich gas
composition in the reservoir.
243
In all cases, the calculated volumetric correction is applied to all gas flowrate data used in
Analysis, this being normally specified as separator gas rate. If users have a direct value of
downhole flowrates at standard conditions, they can disable the correction simply by setting Vvap
to zero.
Condensate properties
• Option 1 - Manual entry of mandatory parameters
In this case, users enter the parameters appearing in red in the dialog box, (and listed in the
"Analysis" line of the table presented on page 243 ): Tlayer, Bg, µg, z, Ct and Vvap.
• Option 2 - Calculation of parameters

Enter the properties listed in the "On-screen Calculation" line of the table. The three options are
explained above. These are:
- Reservoir fluid with Use EOS: Enter the Gas composition as described earlier in Gas
(single-phase): See Section “Gas”, on page 234.
- Reservoir fluid with Use correlations: Enter rich gas gravity. Users can enter gas
Inorganics in the Gas Composition dialog box (described in the Gas (single-phase):
See Section “Gas”, on page 234). Enter CGR, Condensate gravity and Psep, Tsep for
the Vvap calculation.
- Separator fluid with Use correlations: Enter high pressure separator gas gravity,
condensate gravity, CGR, Psep and Tsep for the fluid property and Vvap calculations.
Users can enter Gas Inorganics in the Gas Composition dialog box (described in the
Gas (single-phase): See Section “Gas”, on page 234).
Condensate input parameters
- Gas Gravity: For Separator Fluids mode, this is the specific gravity of the high
pressure separator gas, converted to standard conditions.
For Reservoir Fluid mode, it is the gravity of the rich reservoir gas, at standard
conditions. In both cases, it is measured relative to air (= 1).
It is entered directly for Use correlations mode, or computed from the compositional
data for Use EoS mode.
- Condensate / gas ratio: The CGR is the ratio of the produced condensate liquid to the
produced gas at standard conditions.
- Condensate gravity: This is the gravity of the produced liquid condensate at stock
tank conditions.
- Separator pressure: This refers to the high pressure separator.
- Separator temperature: This refers to the high pressure separator.
- Condensate Vaporizing Volume Ratio: Vvap is the volume of vapour (measured at

standard conditions) that a unit stock tank volume of condensate liquid becomes in the
reservoir, assuming the reservoir to be above the dew-point.
244
Pseudo-Table Editing
Enter the pseudo-table sub-dialog by selecting the Pseudo Tables button. A fluid properties table
can be:
- Generated internally with the Use Correlations or Use EoS options from the
Condensate Fluid Parameters dialog described above.
- Typed in by hand or pasted into the table from an external source using the Paste facility.
In each case, these tables may also be edited.
Note: The pseudo-table Import facility for the P/Viscosity/Z Table is not available for Gas
Condensate - only for Gas.
Condensate (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method)

See Section “Gas (Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure method)”, starting on page 241, for a fuller
description of the use of multi-phase pseudo-pressure. As with the gas option, the Pseudo-
Pressure button is enabled in the Reservoir Description dialog box and selection of this button
allows users to calculate or import and edit an m’(p) Table. For a condensate welltest, the multi-
phase pseudo-pressure function rigorously models flow above and below the dew-point (liquid
drop-out), with or without water production (refs. 63, 64, 74).
This approach accounts not only for the variation of fluid properties with pressure, but also the
variations in relative permeability as fluid properties and saturations change with pressure. It is
therefore particularly useful for tests where the flowing pressure falls below the dew-point.
If the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method is selected with Condensate as Fluid Type (See
Section 7.0.0 - 1 “Reservoir Description dialog box”, on page 183), the Condensate Fluid
Parameters dialog box will allow users to enter the produced fluid data. For the calculation or
import of multi-phase pseudo-pressure tables: See Section 7. 3 “Pseudo-Pressures”, on page 186.
Figure : 7.6.9 - 23 Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Condensate Fluid

Parameters dialog box
Checking Condensate Properties
No general correlations are available to model the PVT behaviour of gas condensates or volatile
oils, which are referred to collectively as “near-critical fluids”. Traditionally, an EoS is used to
model such fluids, and this requires a detailed compositional analysis to be performed by a
laboratory on samples of live fluid. Invariably, the equivalent EoS model then has to be tuned to
measured property variations on the fluid samples before being used in predictive mode.
245
In PanSystem’s condensate multi-phase pseudo-pressure option, the gas and oil gravities and the
layer CGR are used as constraints in the determination of the fluid composition for each layer in
terms of four pseudo-components. The four-component model is a balance between accuracy of
fluid property prediction - ideally performed using a full and detailed compositional analysis -
and speed of calculation and ease of use - achieved by reducing the number of components (ref.
59).
The use of four “pseudo-components”, with the additional capability of tuning the computed
results, has been found to be highly effective in modelling a wide range of condensate fluid
systems. The reduced user input requirement of two stock tank gravities and a CGR also makes
problem initialization very easy.
Selecting the Check option takes users to the Condensate properties check dialog box. This
allows users to view the phase properties and phase split at any specified pressure, temperature
and CGR.
Figure : 7.6.9 - 24 Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Condensate Properties

Check dialog box
On first entry to this dialog, the Condensate/gas ratio will be set to the CGR of the layer
selected in the Condensate fluid parameters dialog.
Enter the desired check point Pressure and Temperature, and the Condensate/gas ratio
(CGR), if different from the displayed value. Jones and Raghaven (Ref.63) recommend the use
of the producing CGR rather than the reservoir CGR when using multi-phase pseudo-pressure.
Select Calculate to compute the various fluid properties at these test conditions. Users will
probably need to tune the EoS (refer to the next section of this manual) in order to match
measured data. Set the pressure and temperature to reservoir conditions before proceeding to
analysis.
The Relative volume is defined as the total volume (at check pressure) divided by the volume at
dew point. It therefore equals 1.0 at pressure = dew-point.
Vo and Vg are the volumetric fractions of each phase at the check pressure. Vo = 0.0 at the dew-
point. The retrograde liquid drop-out (not displayed on this screen) is simply Vo x Relative
volume.
Note: At pressures above dew point, viscosity and density displayed for oil are set equal to those
for gas for convenience.
Dew-point/Bubble-point systems: Depending on the gas and oil gravities specified, increasing
the CGR will tend to take the fluid type from gas condensate towards volatile oil. Eventually, the
saturation pressure will change from a dew-point to a bubble-point as it passes through the
critical pressure. Since this fluid model is primarily designed for gas condensate systems, a
warning message will be issued if a bubble-point system is detected.
246
Figure : 7.6.9 - 25 Check Input Parameters information dialog

However, users can continue to work with the condensate system that they have defined.
It is possible to tune the condensate properties to match measured data. The multi-phase pseudo-
pressure incorporates fluid properties, including liquid drop-out, over a wide range of pressures,
so tuning is advisable where PVT data are available.
Matching Correlations to Measured Data

Selecting the Match button on the Condensate fluid properties dialog box takes users to the
Match condensate properties dialog box.
Note: Each calculation assumes constant composition (constant mass) expansion. Do not tune to
constant volume depletion measurements.
Figure : 7.6.9 - 26 Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Match Condensate

Properties dialog box
247
Choose the desired match property by clicking on the arrow in the Match property area and
selecting from the pull-down menu as shown in Figure 7.6.9 - 27, “Selection of Match Properties
- sub-menu option details,” on page 249. Users can tune any or all of the listed parameters. At the
very least, users should tune the dew-point and liquid drop-out if possible, as they strongly affect
the relative permeability around the wellbore. (It is equally important to have good relative
permeability data (See Section “Relative Permeabilities”, on page 199).)
Figure : 7.6.9 - 27 Selection of Match Properties - sub-menu option details

Enter the appropriate temperature and measured data in the Observed values data area.
For all Match properties apart from dew point pressure, a grid of observed values can be
entered. Each row corresponds to a CGR (entered down the side of the grid), and each column to
a Pressure (entered across the top of the grid). The initial default CGR(s) correspond to those
specified for the layer(s) in the Fluid Parameters dialog box - change or delete as required.
To tune a parameter, enter at least one pressure/CGR pair with its observed value.
Note: Since each row in the table is for a constant CGR, it is only suited to CCE (constant
composition expansion) experiments. The EoS does not handle CVD (constant volume
depletion) experiments, where the CGR changes at each step, as liquid is removed (the API
gravity of the condensate liquid will also change). For instance, when matching to liquid drop-
out data at a spread of pressures from a PVT report, use CCE data when available. If the available
data is CVD, only the first pressure below dew-point can be used for tuning at the original CGR..
If dew-point pressure is selected, the Pressure fields across the top of the grid are irrelevant and
are grayed-out, and only one observed value can be entered per specified CGR.
Untuned calculations
Select the Calculate button, and any Pressure/CGR cell containing a non-zero value will cause a
corresponding field in the lower Calculated values area to be computed. (The pressure and CGR
values in this area are updated automatically for reference, and nothing in the calculated data area
can be edited.) Provided no tuning has yet been performed, all calculated values will correspond
to the untuned EoS.
248
Figure : 7.6.9 - 28 Untuned Calculated Dew-Point

Selecting the Zero values button causes any parameters entered in the Observed values area to
be cleared.
Tuned calculations
With suitable Observed values specified for a particular match property, select the Best fit
button to start the non-linear minimization. Up to three internal EoS coefficients will be adjusted,
depending on the match property selected and the number of Observed values specified. The
deviation of these coefficients from their initial values will be indicated by the values displayed
in the Tuning area.
The quality of the fit is presented in the Match area. It should be larger after tuning than before,
with a maximum value of 1.0.
Figure : 7.6.9 - 29 Tuned Dew-Point

Once a parameter has been tuned, all subsequent calculations of that parameter, and any others
that depend on it, will include the effects of the tuning.
249
The initial untuned status of the selected match property can be restored at any stage by
activating the Reset tuning button in this area.
Principle of Tuning
The EoS tuning takes particular EoS intrinsic parameters such as critical temperatures, critical
volumes or volume shift coefficients (depending on the required property) and adjusts them
according to a non-linear least squares minimization to obtain a best fit.
The appropriate intrinsic parameters will be selected automatically, depending on the property
to be matched and number of Observed values entered.
The properties available for tuning on the pull-down menu in the Match property area are
treated in categories, according to a hierarchical approach which requires a three-stage
adjustment:
1. Dew-point and liquid drop-out

2. Volumetrics
3. Viscosities, Surface tension of oil (relative to air)
The advantage of this method is that the tuning used at stage 3 has no effect on the properties
evaluated at stage 2 and stage 1, etc.
1 Dew-point (or bubble-point) and liquid drop-out are generally most sensitive to the
proportions and characteristics of the heaviest components, in particular, their critical
temperatures.
2 Volumetric properties such as Relative Volume and Z-Factor (of vapour phase) both
depend on the gas Z-Factor. The Peneloux volume correction used in the three-parameter
Peng-Robinson EoS (PR3), is calculated after dew-point pressure and liquid drop-out have
been evaluated. Therefore, the volume correction coefficients can safely be adjusted to
match these volumetric quantities without changing the phase determination.
3 Viscosities are calculated from the two reference component Corresponding States
method presented by Aasberg-Petersen and Stenby (Inc. Eng. Chem. Res. 30 (1991) pp
248-254).
Surface tension (oil) uses the Macleod-Sugden correlation.
The need for tuning
As mentioned above, an EoS using 20 or more components (corresponding to very detailed
compositional analysis) rarely predicts measured fluid properties such as dew-point pressure and
liquid drop-out accurately without some degree of tuning. With a four-component "reduced"
model, it is therefore to be expected that tuning will be essential, particularly where the dew-
point and liquid drop-out are concerned.

Dew-point
The dew-point is the lowest pressure at which a drop of retrograde liquid can exist. The
calculated dew-point pressure is most sensitive to the heaviest pseudo-component, its mole
fractions and properties. Invariably, the four-component EoS will calculate a dew point
pressure which is too low and therefore tuning is strongly recommended. (Figure 7.6.9 - 28
and Figure 7.6.9 - 29.)
250
Liquid Drop-out
Liquid drop-out, defined as the volume of retrograde liquid at a specified pressure + the
volume of vapour at dew-point, is probably the most difficult quantity to calculate (and to
measure!) being a phase discriminant (i.e. liquid/vapour) fraction. Tuning is almost always
required for liquid drop-out, after tuning the dew-point pressure which is used as an anchor
point. (Figure 7.6.9 - 30.)
Figure : 7.6.9 - 30 Tuned liquid dropout properties

Note: the Plot facility is not available for a Condensate system.
7. 6. 10. Datum correction

Description:
This facility corrects all pressures computed from diagnostic plot analysis (p*, etc.) to a
reference datum depth, by adding or subtracting the appropriate hydrostatic pressure difference.
No correction is applied to the input data itself, only to computed pressures.
The hydrostatic correction can include one or two fluid contacts. It should be used with caution
if there happen to be different contacts in the wellbore and reservoir - a sketch of the situation is
recommended before entering data in this case.
What users see:

Select the Datum Input button in the Fluid Parameters dialog box, and the “Datum Correction
7. 6. 10. Datum correction
dialog box”, on page 253 is generated:
251
Figure : 7.6.10 - 1 Datum Correction dialog box

Enter the vertical depths of the pressure gauge and the reference datum (relative, of course, to the
same zero - e.g. MSL), and the fluid contact(s) if present. Enter the hydrostatic gradient(s) of the
fluid(s).
Check the Apply correction... checkbox. The datum correction will now be enabled as
illustrated below. The correction can be disabled by unchecking the checkbox.
Figure : 7.6.10 - 2 Horner Plot with p* Corrected to Datum
7. 7. Customer-Defined Flow Models

7.7. Customer-Defined Flow Models
It is possible for users to define and code their own reservoir flow models and to implement them
in PanSystem via the Dynamic Link Library (DLL) facility, without the need to modify
PanSystem itself.
Any customer models will be listed (marked with an *) with the other supplied models in the
Flow models list, and can be selected for use in Analysis (line-fitting and flow regimes, but not
type-curve matching) and Simulation (Quick Match, Auto Match and Advanced Sim).
Several external models linked by DLL are supplied with the current release.
For more information about the correct format to use to link customer models into PanSystem,
please contact the nearest local EPS representative or the Edinburgh, UK head office.
252
7. 7. 1. External Models Supplied with PanSystem
Slanted Well Model
This is for a partially penetrating, inclined well in an anisotropic radial homogeneous reservoir.
Upper and lower boundaries may be both no-flow, both constant pressure, or mixed.
Figure : 7.7.1 - 1 Quick Match Input Dialog Box for the Slanted Well
Model
In addition to wellbore storage coefficient Cs, radial permeability k and true (mechanical) skin
factor S, and rate-dependent skin coefficient D, this model uses the following parameters:
ANG: deviation angle from vertical, averaged across the interval (or deviation angle relative to
the dip-normal direction if the layer is dipping). In Dataprep Model Parameters this is called:

Slanted well angle.
ZWDT: distance from top of pay to top of perfs
layer thickness
using measured length for both or TVD for both. In Dataprep Model Parameters this is called:
Pay top to perforation top.
ZWDB: distance from top of pay to bottom of perfs

layer thickness
using measured length for both or TVD for both. In Dataprep Model Parameters this is called:
Pay top to perforation bottom.
RKZR: v e r tic a l p e r m e a b ility
h o r iz o n ta l p e r m e a b ility
In Dataprep Model Parameters this is called: Permeability ratio.

IBDY:Upper/lower boundary types. In Dataprep Model Parameters this is called: Boundary
condition.
1 = top: no-flow; bottom: no-flow
2 = top: no-flow; bottom: constant pressure
3 = top: constant pressure; bottom: constant pressure.
253
Multiple Radial Composite Systems
Two-, three- and four-zone radial composite models are available. The well is vertical and fully
completed. Boundaries are not currently allowed with these models.
In addition to wellbore storage coefficient Cs, inner region (zone 1) radial permeability k, true
(mechanical) skin factor S and rate-dependent skin coefficient D, these models use the following
parameters:
Second region (zone 2)
K2: radial permeability of zone 2. In Dataprep Model Parameters this is called: Perm of zone 2.
RCP2: storativity ratio (φCt)zone 2 / (φCt)zone 1. In Dataprep Model Parameters this is called:
(POR*CT)2/(POR*CT)1.)
RI2: Inner radius of zone 2.
Third region (zone 3)
K3: radial permeability of zone 3. In Dataprep Model Parameters this is called: Perm of zone 3.
(POR*CT)3/(POR*CT)1.)
Fourth region (zone 4)
K4: radial permeability of the zone 4. In Dataprep Model Parameters this is called: Perm of zone
4.
(POR*CT)4/(POR*CT)1.
Partially Sealing Fault Model

(Based on: Effect of a Partially Communicating Fault on Transient Pressure Behaviour; Yaxley
L.M.; SPE 14311 and SPE FE pp590 - 598 (1987).)
This is a fully completed vertical well in a homogeneous reservoir which is cut by a vertical
partially sealing fault of infinite extent. The model is infinite-acting in both regions.
Transmissibility across the fault is described by a “fault conductivity”, defined below. The layer
has the same rock and fluid properties on either side of the fault, but can have a different
thickness h2 on the far side. No additional boundaries are allowed with this model.
Figure : 7.7.1 - 2 Partially sealing fault model - plan view
254
Figure : 7.7.1 - 3 Partially Sealing Fault Model - side view

h2: thickness of layer on far side of fault. In Dataprep Model Parameters this is called: Secondary
thickness.
Note: that layer thickness h specified in Layer Parameters is the thickness of the layer on the well
side of the fault.
L1: distance from well to fault. In Dataprep Model Parameters this is called: Distance to fault.
Fc: conductivity of partially sealing fault:
Fc = (permeability of fault zone) / (width of fault zone).
Pinch-Out model

(From “Effects of External Boundaries on the Recognition of Reservoir Pinch-Out Boundaries
by Pressure Transient Analysis”; Matthew, G. and Horne, R.N., SPE 11141 and SPEJ (June
1985), p. 427-.)
This is a fully completed vertical well in a homogeneous reservoir with a wedge-shaped cross-
section. The reservoir has parallel no-flow boundaries on two sides and is closed by the pinch-out
on the third side. No additional boundaries can be added to this model.
Figure : 7.7.1 - 4 Pinch-Out Model - plan view
255
Figure : 7.7.1 - 5 Pinch-Out Model - side view

Lp: distance from well to pinch-out. In Dataprep Model Parameters this is called: Distance to
pinch-out.
L1: distance to boundary 1 (see plan view).
L3: distance to boundary 3 (see plan view).
Note: that layer thickness h specified in Layer Parameters is the layer thickness at the well.
Three-Layer Homogeneous Reservoir with Internal Cross-Flow

(From Analysis of Pressure and Rate Transient Data from Wells in Multi-Layered Reservoirs:
Theory and Application; Bidaux, P., Whittle, T.M, Coveney, P.J., and Gringarten, A.C., SPE

24679 and 67th SPE ATCE (1992), pp187-196.)
This is a vertical well, fully completed in a reservoir consisting of three homogeneous layers.
The layers can have different rock and fluid properties, and vertical communication is allowed
between the layers within the reservoir. (This is the 3-layer equivalent of the dual permeability
model, except that all layers are open to flow.)
Note: boundaries are not allowed with this model.
Figure : 7.7.1 - 6 Three-layered reservoir - side view
256
The properties of each layer are defined as a fraction of the total system properties via the ratio
terms kappa, omega and lambda. The properties (k, S) of Layer 1 are specified in the usual way
via the Layer Parameters dialog. These, combined with the ratios, are sufficient to define the
properties of the other two layers. Only their skin factors are specified explicitly.
Note: all rock and fluid properties described below for the Layer Parameters dialog refer to
Layer 1; these are suffixed with a 1 in Figure 7.7.1-6.
k: Permeability of Layer 1 (i.e. k1 in Figure 7.7.1-6).

h: Layer thickness of Layer 1 (i.e. h1 in Figure 7.7.1-6).
S, S2, S3: Skin factors of Layers 1, 2 and 3. (Note that S is represented by S1 in Figure 7.7.1-6). A
layer can be closed off from the wellbore by specifying a large skin factor.
κ1 (Layer 1 Kappa), κ2 (Layer 2 Kappa): The permeability-thickness of each layer as a fraction

of the total:
κ3 is not available as an input since it is dependent on κ1 and κ2. k1 and h1 correspond to the
permeability and thickness specified in the Layer Parameters for Layer 1. (kh) t otal is
(k1h1+k2h2+k3h3).
ω1 (Layer 1 omega), ω2 (Layer 2 omega): the storativity of each layer as a fraction of the total
storativity:
ω3 is not available as an input since it is dependent on ω1 and ω2.

φ1, ct1 and h1 are the properties specified in Layer Parameters for Layer 1.
λ1,2 (Layer 1-2 lambda), λ2,3 (Layer 2-3 lambda): inter-layer flow coefficient (lambda) for
internal crossflow between layers 1-2 and between layers 2-3:
where the crossflow coefficients χ (chi) are defined as:
kv1, kv2 and kv3 being the vertical permeability in each layer.
To prevent internal crossflow between layers, enter a very small value for lambda.
D: rate-dependent skin coefficient. The effect of turbulence in individual layers has not been
incorporated into this model. The same value of D is applied to all layers.
257
General Intersecting Fault Model
(From Pressure Transient Analysis in the Presence Of Two Intersecting Boundaries; Prasad, R K;
SPE 4560 and JPT pp89 -96, 1975.)
This is a vertical well fully completed in a homogeneous reservoir which is cut by two vertical
faults intersecting at an angle F ang. The well is a distance Lint from the intersection, and
subtends an angle W ang with one of the faults, expressed as a fraction of F ang.
Note: No other boundaries can be added to this model.
Figure : 7.7.1 - 7 General intersecting fault model - plan view

Lint: distance from the well to the intersection of the faults
Fang: angle between the faults (degrees).
Wang: well location angle, expressed as a fraction of Fang - the fractional angle ( 0 < Wang ≤ 1.0 )
subtended by fault BDY1 with the line between the well and the fault intersection.
IBDY1, IBDY2: boundary type flags for the two faults BDY1 and BDY2:
1 = no-flow
0 = constant pressure
There are some restrictions on the angles which can be modelled:
1. Both boundaries no-flow:

Any intersection angle Fang. Any well location angle Wang.
2. One boundary no-flow, other boundary constant pressure:

, N = any integer. Any well location angle Wang.
3. Both boundaries constant pressure:

, N = any integer. Any well location angle Wang.
258
Chapter 8- Well and Reservoir Description

(Numerical)
Overview of PanMesh workflow

PanMesh is a single-well, multi-layer, 3-D numerical welltest simulator; it is the Numerical
Simulation module within PanSystem. Before running a PanMesh simulation via the Simulate
menu command, the reservoir data has to be initialized within PanSystem. .
Data for the reservoir model are input in the Well and Reservoir Description (Numerical) section
on the Data Preparation menu described in this section.
For the flowrate data users have two options:
• Use the Test Design facility in the Gauge Data section of the Data Preparation menu. Here
users can specify a flowrate sequence - anything from a single flowing period to a sequence
of flowing and shut-in periods. The objective might be to investigate the nature of the
transient response to a certain reservoir geometry, or to design a welltest. Test Design is
described in Section 6. 2. 6 on page 149.
• Use the flowrates associated with an existing welltest. For this, users need to import the
welltest data in the usual way, do any necessary editing, and pick the rate change events, as if
for an analysis. If users intend to perform analysis on the data first (e.g. to establish an
approximate model and to estimate some of the parameters), they should input the necessary
rock and fluid properties in the Well and Reservoir Properties (Analytical) section of the Data
Preparation menu.

When users are ready to run a PanMesh session, the available rock and fluid parameters will be
transferred automatically into this Well and Reservoir Properties (Numerical) section of Data
Preparation. It then remains to specify the reservoir structure, anisotropy, heterogeneity, etc.,
through each of the tabbed sub-dialogs.
The geological model is passed through to PanMesh, which generates the 3D mesh. The
simulation then produces a dimensionless constant rate drawdown response. When users exit
PanMesh, it writes a table of Pd vs Td to a file with extension TCX. This is the reference
response for the geological model.
The dimensionless response is then taken up by PanSystem, convolved with wellbore storage
and the rate schedule, then presented in terms of real time and pressure. The simulated pressure
response can be inspected using the diagnostic plots, just like any other welltest data. It can be
overlain with gauge data if users are attempting to match a real welltest.
Note:
1) PanMesh itself does not deal with multi-rate superposition or wellbore storage. This is
handled by PanSystem when it picks up PanMesh's reference constant rate drawdown response.
This is done (invisibly most of the time) using PanSystem's existing Advanced Simulation
facility, which accesses the dimensionless TCX response file that has been written by PanMesh.
259
2) The Darcy skin factor is built into the reservoir model in the form of a damaged region.
Because PanMesh computes a constant rate response, non-Darcy, or turbulent, skin in gas wells
is handled by PanSystem during the rate and storage convolution.
3) The analytical and numerical modelling facilities have two distinct input sections. It is quite
possible, and often useful, to employ analytical diagnostics and simulation, as well as numerical
simulation, to solve a welltest problem, and the two approaches can be configured and run in the
same PanSystem file.
However, since the two methods use very different approaches for configuring multi-layered
reservoirs, if users wish to define multiple layers for analytical simulation, EPS recommend that
users set up one PanSystem file for analytical simulation and a separate file for numerical
simulation to avoid possible confusion.
The term “sub-layer” is used when referring to layering or stratification in PanMesh models. The
term “layer” is used in the analytical simulation context of PanSystem. Layers in PanSystem
cannot communicate except in the wellbore, sub-layers in PanMesh can communicate in the
wellbore and the reservoir. Otherwise, a sub-layer and a layer are the same geologically. There is,
of course, far more flexibility in the definition of a PanMesh sub-layer's shape, anisotropy, and
heterogeneity than there is for a PanSystem layer.
Description:
The PanMesh finite element simulator can be used in history matching mode to generate welltest
responses to match against measured welltest data, or in predictive mode to design a welltest or
investigate the response to a specified reservoir configuration.
If users are intending to history match a welltest, import and prepare their gauge data in the usual
way (see Section 6 “Gauge Data Preparation”, on page 125).
If users are going to design a test or investigate a response, they should set-up the intended rate
schedule using the Test Design facility (see Section 6. 2. 6 “Test Design”, on page 149).
In either case, well and reservoir data are entered through the Well and Reservoir Description
(Numerical) option on the main Dataprep menu.
Figure : 8.0.0 - 1 Dataprep Menu Options

This will take users into PanMesh Data Preparation, for the entry of well, fluid and rock
parameters, and description of the geometrical and geological aspects of the reservoir.
On entering this section for the first time, PanSystem will transfer across any well, layer and
fluid parameters that users may already have set-up in the analytical section. For example, users
may have been working on a welltest using the diagnostic plot and analytical simulation
facilities. This saves users from typing in the same data all over again. Any subsequent changes
made in the analytical section will not be transferred into the numerical section. There is no data
transfer from numerical to analytical.
260
The PanMesh Data Preparation dialog consists of four tabbed sections: Reservoir Geometry,
Well Configuration, Material Properties and Run Mode (optional). The Reservoir Geometry
screen appears first, but users may enter data on any of the screens, in any order. However, the
first three screens must be correctly initialized before users can OK from the dialog.
8. 1. Reservoir Geometry
Figure : 8.1.0 - 1 Reservoir Geometry tab with the Drawing Area
8. 1. 1. Drawing the Reservoir Outline

Figure 8.1.0 - 1 shows the blank Drawing Area which is displayed on first entering the
Reservoir Geometry dialog. This is in plan view, centred on the origin, with red x- and y-axes.
The positive x-direction is to the right (East), the positive y-direction is towards the top of the
screen (North). z is downwards into the screen.
First, users must draw the outline of the reservoir (the projection of the top of the reservoir onto
the horizontal plane). There are several ways to do this:
8. 1. Reservoir Geometry
• draw an outline with the mouse - see page 263,

• paste in one of the supplied polygonal shapes (and modify if desired) - see page 264,
• import a reservoir map and draw the outline over it - see page 265,
• import a ready-made template (and modify if desired) - see page 284.
Once an initial outline has been drawn, the positions of the corner points (nodes) can be adjusted
by dragging with the mouse, or by editing the co-ordinates. Other features can then be added to
the plan view, such as internal boundaries and heterogeneities.
261
EPS have tried to keep the drawing facility relatively simple to use, while allowing for fairly
complex reservoirs to be constructed. The template option has been provided as a means of
configuring complex shapes which would either be difficult to draw, or are beyond the
capabilities of the drawing facility. The template contains all the necessary 3-D geometrical
information. EPS aim to build up a library of geologically significant templates, and custom
templates for customer geometries can be provided on request.
If users have a bitmap of the reservoir available, it can be imported, then the reservoir outline can
be drawn over it. This will be described in “Importing a Reservoir Map”, on page 265. If users do
not have a convenient map, they can just sketch the reservoir shape in the blank Drawing Area.
The next section describes how to do this. Only an approximate representation of the reservoir
needs to be created, and the (x, y, z) co-ordinates can be fine-tuned by editing the nodes
afterwards.
The reservoir outline is defined by a number of corner Nodes connected by Boundaries. Each
node will be assigned (x, y, z) co-ordinates which define the upper surface of the reservoir. All
angles of the reservoir outline must be greater than 180° (referred to as “convex”) as seen from
outside the reservoir, but ways of achieving “concave” shapes containing angles less than 180°
will be described later.
The sides of the reservoir are vertical. Layers will be defined later by assigning their vertical
thicknesses at each node (Section 8. 1. 14 “Dip, Layering and Node Editing”, on page 287).
Drawing an Outline with the Mouse

Users may change the scale of the drawing area using the Graph Scales Manual option of the
User Menu (see “Graph Scales”, on page 282), or by double-clicking on the end value of either
axis.
The (red) x- or y-axis can be moved by grabbing the required axis with a right-click and dragging
to a new location.
Once axis scales have been assigned users are ready to start creating the plan view of the
reservoir.
Press and hold the left mouse button at the point where the first corner node is to be placed, then

drag the pointer to where the second node is to be located. As the pointer is moved, users will
drag a boundary line with it. Release the mouse button to create the next node point. To define
other nodes, left-click and hold the mouse button anywhere in the drawing area and drag the
mouse to the location of the next required node point.
Figure : 8.1.1 - 1 Drawing Node Points and Boundary Lines
262
To create the final boundary and close the reservoir shape, either drag the pointer back onto node
#1, or right-click anywhere in the drawing area for automatic closure. The maximum number of
nodes is currently 20. If users create 20 nodes, the reservoir outline will automatically close by
drawing a boundary between node #20 and #1.
Use the {Backspace} key to delete nodes (in the reverse order).
Once users have closed the reservoir shape, they may drag nodes to new positions, but users
cannot add any new nodes. To add extra nodes (up to the maximum of 20), use the {Backspace}
key to re-open the shape, then draw in the additional lines.
The (x, y) coordinates of the nodes are listed in the table beneath the Drawing Area.

Figure : 8.1.1 - 2 Completed reservoir outline
Double right-click in the drawing area outside the reservoir to delete the entire outline and start
again.
If, while drawing the outline, users attempt to create an external angle less than 180° (concave),
they will receive a warning message and will not be able to plant the offending node. For the time
being, just go on and plant the next corner node, and so on until the outline is completed, then
refer to Section 8. 1. 6 “External Angles Less Than 180° (“Concave”)”, on page 271.
If the outline requires more than 20 nodes, draw an approximate outline using the 20 available,
then refer to Section 8. 1. 7 “Creating More Than 20 Nodes for the Outline”, on page 273.
Pasting in One of the Supplied Polygonal Shapes

This option cannot be used if there is already something in the drawing area.
263
Along the top of the drawing area there are five shape-related buttons which allow users to select
a regular polygonal shape: Triangle, Rectangle, Pentagon, Hexagon or Octagon. Select a
shape, and then left-click in the drawing area to paste it in. Users can now grab and move nodes
to re-shape the outline, but extra nodes cannot be added.
Figure : 8.1.1 - 3 Reservoir Created from the Octagonal Shape

Importing a Reservoir Map
If users have a reservoir map in graphic file format, they can import the map and draw an outline
over it. The map image must not be tilted on the page, as no correction for rotation can be made.
Select the Import Map button to enter the File Open dialog, which is filtered to accept JPG, GIF,
BMP, and TIF files. (Please refer to the note about the map file location, under Important at the
end of the current section.) Select the map file, and the graphic will be opened into a large or full-
screen map window:
Figure : 8.1.1 - 4 Reservoir map in Map Window
264
First, users are prompted by the PanWizard to define the map scaling, by providing the co-
ordinates of two arbitrary reference points. Double-click on the first reference point and enter its
co-ordinates (UTM or whatever system is required). The units can be changed via the Units
option on the main Config menu.
Figure : 8.1.1 - 5 Defining a Reference Point for Map Scaling

OK from the dialog, double-click on a second reference point and enter its co-ordinates. This is
enough for PanSystem to compute the relationship between map pixels and distance in the x- and
y-directions and to scale the map. If users want to repeat this operation to correct a mistake, both
reference points must be re-defined, not just one of them.
If the reference points happen to lie in an exact east-west or north-south line, PanSystem will
only be able to scale in that one direction. It will assume the same pixel/distance scaling in the
other direction (i.e. that the map grid is square).
Now draw the reservoir outline as described in “Drawing an Outline with the Mouse”, on page
263. Once the reservoir shape has been closed, users may drag nodes to new positions, but they
cannot add new nodes. To add extra nodes (up to the maximum of 20), use the {Backspace} key
to re-open the shape and then draw in the additional lines.
Figure : 8.1.1 - 6 Reservoir Map with Outline Drawn On
265
On closing the map window, the map and reservoir outline will be displayed in the drawing area.
The co-ordinates of the nodes are listed underneath.
Figure : 8.1.1 - 7 Drawing area showing reservoir map and outline

In the example, a more faithful outline could be achieved by introducing some extra nodes and
some “concave” angles. This will be explained in Section 8. 1. 6 “External Angles Less Than
180° (“Concave”)”, on page 271 and Section 8. 1. 7 “Creating More Than 20 Nodes for the
Outline”, on page 273.
Important: the path to the map file will be written in the .PAN file next time that users save it.
Make sure the map file is in a suitable folder (such as the Data folder) before it is imported. If
users change the location of the map file subsequently, PanSystem will not be able to find it
unless users edit the path in the .PAN file.
8. 1. 2. Deleting the Reservoir Design

To edit the path, open the .PAN file in an editor such as Notepad, search for the map name (it will
be located in the [panmesh] section of the file) and change it.
8. 1. 2. Deleting the Reservoir Design

To delete the reservoir, double right-click in the Drawing Area, anywhere outside the reservoir.
This will permanently delete all the nodes, boundary lines, etc. that have been created. Any
parameters defined under the other tabs within the PanMesh Data Preparation dialog box will
be wiped, but will be retained in memory and can be retrieved if the appropriate parts of the
reservoir geometry are recreated.
8. 1. 3. Moving Nodes, Moving the Reservoir Outline

Once the reservoir outline has been closed, users may want to adjust the positions of nodes, or to
shift the whole shape relative to the origin.
266
To move a node: To do this graphically, point the cursor at the node - the word “NODE” will
appear when the cursor is positioned correctly over it. Click and hold the left mouse button on the
node, drag it to the desired location, and release the mouse button.
Figure : 8.1.3 - 1 Moving a node

If users want to specify the exact co-ordinates for nodes, open the Node Parameters dialog box
by double-clicking on the node itself, or on the node number in the list beneath the Drawing
Area. Users will then be able to type in exact values (see “Dip, Layering and Node Editing”, on
page 287).
To move the whole shape: To shift the entire reservoir in the Drawing Area without altering its
shape, point the cursor at any of the outer boundaries - the word “EDGE” will appear when the
cursor is positioned correctly over it. Click and hold the left mouse button on the edge, drag the
reservoir to the desired location, and release the mouse button.
Figure : 8.1.3 - 2 Moving the whole reservoir outline

Users cannot move any part of the reservoir out of the Drawing Area. Increase the axis scales if 8. 1. 4. Moving the x- and y-axes
more room is required (see “Graph Scales”, on page 282).
8. 1. 4. Moving the x- and y-axes

Users can move the x-axis up or down, or the y-axis left or right, by right-clicking on the axis and
dragging it. If a reservoir outline has already been drawn, it will move with the axes (i.e. there
will be no change in its node co-ordinates).
267
8. 1. 5. Internal Boundaries
Users can add up to 99 “internal boundaries”. These are straight-line interfaces crossing the
reservoir, which can be used to:
• Define regions with different material (rock and fluid) properties (Section 8. 1. 8 “Regions
and Areal Heterogeneity”, on page 273):
- regions of large areal extent with different petrophysical characteristics, or containing a
different fluid (see Fig. 8.1.5 - 2).
- thin regions representing altered or fault zones of low transmissibility, or fissures of high
transmissibility (see Fig. 8.1.8 - 2).
• Define no-flow boundaries within the reservoir (Section 8. 1. 10).

• Define “concave” angles in the reservoir outline (i.e. external angles less than 180°) (Section
8. 1. 6).
• Add up to 198 more external nodes (every line creates two new nodes where it cuts the outer
boundary) to get a better-shaped outline (Section 8. 1. 7).
Internal boundaries are vertical, and extend through the full thickness of the reservoir. In a multi-
layered reservoir, they cut through all the layers. They are “transparent” and do not influence the
welltest response unless users choose to make them no-flow (Section 8. 1. 10).
An internal boundary plane must not traverse the trajectory of a deviated “vertical” well - users
will receive a warning if this happens. No such restriction applies to a horizontal well.
Starting from outside the reservoir, click the left mouse button and draw a line across the
reservoir shape to beyond the other side.
Figure : 8.1.5 - 1 Draw a line across the reservoir
268
On releasing the mouse button, two new nodes will appear where the line has crossed the
reservoir outline, and the line itself will define two regions, which appear in different colours.
Figure : 8.1.5 - 2 Internal Boundary Creates Two New End-Nodes and

Two Regions
The nodes can be dragged to new positions if any adjustment is required.
Users may draw up to 99 lines and regions can also be bisected to create smaller regions; internal
nodes will be created at any internal boundary crossing points. Up to 20 Nodes are allowed per
polygon, with a maximum of 1000 Nodes allowed per PanMesh session.
To further sub-divide a two region model (e.g. to create four Regions), it is necessary to break the
line drawing process down into two stages:
Figure : 8.1.5 - 3 Further Sub-Division of Regions and Creating Boundary

Intersections - Stage 1
In the first stage, left-click and drag a line across the upper region to create two new regions and
two new nodes, then left-click on the lowest of these new nodes (i.e. number 8 in the right-hand
diagram above) whilst selecting the Shift key (ensure that the node flag appears before left-
clicking or the node will not be selected).
269
Figure : 8.1.5 - 4 Further Sub-Division of Regions and Creating

Boundary Intersections - Stage 2
Keeping the Shift key depressed, drag a new line across the lower region from the selected node
to an area outside the model. This will create another internal boundary, contiguous with the
upper vertical internal boundary and four internal regions.
Sections 8. 1. 6 to 8. 1. 10 describe applications of the internal boundary facility.
To delete an internal boundary, users have to delete one of the regions touching it, as explained in
“Deleting a Region or Internal Boundary”, on page 274.
8. 1. 6. External Angles Less Than 180° (“Concave”)

If users wish their reservoir outline to contain an angle of less than 180° (as viewed from the
outside), do not attempt to create the angle when drawing the initial outline (Section 8. 1. 1
“Drawing the Reservoir Outline”, on page 262) - it will not be allowed. Continue and plant the
next corner node, and subsequent nodes until the outline is closed.
Now draw an internal boundary across the reservoir (see Section 8. 1. 5 “Internal Boundaries”,
on page 269) where the concave angle is to be placed.
Figure : 8.1.6 - 1 Draw a Line Across the Reservoir
270
This will create two new nodes, one of which can be dragged inwards to define the concave angle
(or both, if two concave angles are required).
Figure : 8.1.6 - 2 Grab the New Node

Figure : 8.1.6 - 3 Pull the Node in to Create the Concave Angle
The node created at the other end of the boundary can be left as it is, or moved if it helps to
improve the outline.
Figure : 8.1.6 - 4 Move the Second New Node if Required

Two polygons have effectively been created, both of which contain only “convex” angles,
thereby respecting the rules of the drawing window.
271
The material and fluid properties of the two regions thus defined can be made identical, in which
case the boundary does not exist as far as welltesting is concerned, or they can be made different
if users want to model areal heterogeneity (Section 8. 1. 8).
By judicious placing of internal boundaries (up to 99), users can create many concave angles in
the outline.
8. 1. 7. Creating More Than 20 Nodes for the Outline

The initial reservoir outline is currently limited to a maximum of a 20-sided polygon (20 nodes).
However, the internal boundary option can be used to create up to 198 extra nodes (99 lines, two
nodes per line), making a total of 218 nodes available to define the outline. If there is no areal
heterogeneity, simply give all the regions the same material properties.
Figure : 8.1.7 - 1 Complex Reservoir Outline Using 16 Nodes
8. 1. 7. Creating More Than 20 Nodes for the Outline

8. 1. 8. Regions and Areal Heterogeneity
By defining internal boundaries (Section 8. 1. 5 “Internal Boundaries”, on page 269), the
reservoir is divided into regions. With a maximum of 99 boundaries, users can create up to 100
regions. Each region can be assigned its own set of material properties (rock and fluid).
A legend box will appear relating colours to region numbers. The region number will also appear
at the mouse pointer as it is moved across the reservoir area:
Figure : 8.1.8 - 1 Region Number is Displayed at the Cursor
272
To edit the material properties for a region, double-click on that region in the reservoir sketch.
This will open the Material Properties dialog for that region. Alternatively, click on the Material
Properties tab at the top of the screen and select the region number in the Material Properties
dialog. Please refer to Section 8. 3 “Material Properties”, on page 294.
This facility can also be used to model a thin altered region or fault zone (i.e. region 2 in Figure
8.1.8 - 2) separating two compartments (regions 1 and 3).
Figure : 8.1.8 - 2 Thin Altered Region Separating Two Reservoir

Compartments
8. 1. 9. Deleting a Region or Internal Boundary

To delete a region, double right-click on one of the internal lines bounding the region to open the
Delete Areal Region sub-dialog (Figure 8.1.9 - 1). The cursor should display Line (not region)
before the mouse button is clicked. Alternatively, the same sub-dialog can be generated by
8. 1. 9. Deleting a Region or Internal Boundary

selecting the Remove Regions option from the User Menu. Scroll the region/line toggles until
the required region/line for deletion is displayed.
Figure : 8.1.9 - 1 Delete Areal Region dialog box

When a region/line is deleted, an adjacent region must expand to replace it. If there is a region on
either side of the target region, choose which of the two regional properties to use from the Use
Regional Properties drop-down selection field (Figure 8.1.9 - 2). If the region/line removal is
going to create a non-convex region an error message will be displayed and a new selection will
be required.
273
:
Figure : 8.1.9 - 2 Choose Which Neighbouring Region to Extend

When users OK from the dialog (and providing that a convex region is not going to be created),
the selected boundary and region will disappear.
8. 1. 10. Control Points and Internal No-Flow Boundaries

Users can create no-flow boundaries of limited finite extent within the reservoir. To do this, users
must first draw an internal boundary line as explained in Section 8. 1. 5 “Internal Boundaries”,
on page 269. Users will be able to divide the internal boundary into two or more sections
(maximum 10), and make one or more of the sections no-flow. Thus a fault or faults of finite
extent can be modelled, either touching an outer edge of the reservoir, or isolated internally.
Select the Internal No-Flow Boundaries option on the User Menu to generate the Define
internal no-flow boundaries dialog box. Alternatively, double-click on the internal boundary in
the Drawing Area. (A box with “Internal Line” will appear next to the mouse pointer when users
are exactly over the boundary.)

Figure : 8.1.10 - 1 Mouse Pointer Over an Internal Line
274
Figure : 8.1.10 - 2 Define Internal No-Flow Boundaries dialog box

The Line number identifies the internal boundary, with the pair of nodes that it connects (#2 to
#6 in Fig. 8.1.10 - 2). If there is more than one internal boundary, users can step the counter to
access the others.

Grab the slider in the dialog box and pull it to the right. As users do this, they will see a white
square marker - a “Control Point” - move along the internal boundary on the reservoir graphic
(Fig.8.1.10 - 3).
Figure : 8.1.10 - 3 Positioning a Control Point (white square) on the

Internal Boundary Using the Slider
275
Position the control point (by eye on the diagram, or use the distance or percentage counters in
the dialog) and click the Add control point button. This locks the control point into place,
dividing the internal boundary into two segments.
Figure : 8.1.10 - 4 Control Point Created, Dividing the Internal Boundary

into Two Segments
The (x, y) co-ordinates of both ends of the two segments are now displayed in a two-row

table (Fig. 8.1.10 - 4). In Figure 8.1.10 - 4, the first segment runs from node #2 at (-161.78,
154.06) to the control point at (-106.47, 59.91). The second segment runs from the control point
to node #6 at (46.28, -200.09). From the Current slider position read-out this is 109.196 ft away
from node #2, or 26.6% of the distance between nodes 2 and 6.
Users can make either segment a no-flow boundary, but not both, by clicking in the Flow Control
column. If users OK from the dialog, the no-flow segment will appear as a thick black line (see
Figure 8.1.10 - 5).
Figure : 8.1.10 - 5 A No-Flow Boundary of Finite Extent

To move a control point once it has been added, users must return to the Define internal no-flow
boundaries dialog, delete it with the Delete last control point button, and recreate it using the
slider as described earlier.
276
After adding the first control point on the internal boundary, users can define a second one (and
more) with the slider, as long as the new slider position is further to the right each time. Click the
Add Control Point button to lock a new control point into place.
Figure : 8.1.10 - 6 Move the Slider to Position a Second Control Point
Figure : 8.1.10 - 7 Defining a Second Control Point Divides the Internal

Boundary into Three Segments (Two Have Been Designated No-Flow).
277
In Figure 8.1.10 - 7, the second control point has been positioned at (-24.76, -79.16), which is
270.5 ft from node #2. The first and third segments have been assigned no-flow status. On OK
from the dialog, the following model has been defined:
Figure : 8.1.10 - 8 Two Sealing Faults of Finite Extent, with a Permeable

Section Lying Between
If only the middle segment had been made no-flow, the fault configuration would have appeared
as a short no-flow boundary in the middle of the reservoir:
Figure : 8.1.10 - 9 Sealing Fault of Finite Extent with Permeable

Reservoir at Each End
To move a control point once it has been added, users must return to the Define internal no-flow
boundaries dialog and work back through the tabulated entries with the Delete last control
point button, then recreate using the slider as described earlier.
8. 1. 11. The User Menu and Short-Cuts

The User Menu button is available on the full-screen Map Window and on the right of the
Drawing Area. Options on this menu let users alter the visual representation and add features to
the reservoir model. Some of the menu options have keyboard / mouse-click short-cuts.
Figure : 8.1.11 - 1 User Menu
278
Sketch Display
>> Short-cut: double left-click in the area outside the reservoir.
Figure : 8.1.11 - 2 Sketch Display Options

View the reservoir in Plan view, or in one of the two Elevation view options.
• Solid Elevation: the reservoir structure is displayed as a solid lump, with any regions in the
same colours as the plan view.
- Transparent: region colours are respected, internal lines (boundaries) and the well are
visible. If the well cannot be seen clearly, use the Zoom well option described below.
- Opaque: only the outer surface of the model is displayed, no internals.
• Wire Elevation: the reservoir structure is displayed as a wire frame.
- Hidden lines removed: only the outer surface edges are displayed - no internal lines (region
boundaries) are visible.
- Hidden lines shown: internal lines (region boundaries) and the well are displayed.
Map Display
Figure : 8.1.11 - 3 Map Display Options

If users have imported a reservoir map graphic (see “Importing a Reservoir Map”, on page 265)
and drawn the reservoir outline over it, they have the choice of:

• Show: display the map in the Drawing Area (Figure 8.1.1 - 7),
• No Show: do not display the map in the Drawing Area (but show the outline),
• Full Window: switch to the full-screen display of map and outline. (Figure 8.1.1 - 4).
Region Colors
Figure : 8.1.11 - 4 Region Colors Options
279
This will switch the region coloration on (default) or off. It is useful if a reservoir map is
currently being displayed, because the region colors may partially obscure the map, as illustrated
in the next two figures.
Figure : 8.1.11 - 5 Map With Outline and Region Colors Switched On

In the figure above, the initial reservoir outline shown in Figure 8.1.1 - 7 has been refined by
adding extra nodes using the internal boundary facility described in Section 8. 1. 5.

Figure : 8.1.11 - 6 Map With Outline and Region Colors Switched Off
Drawing Mode
Figure : 8.1.11 - 7 Drawing Mode Options

This affects the appearance of the reservoir outline when there is a map in the background.
• Blend: (Default) The map is still visible behind the outline and regions. The outline and
regions colors are blended as they cross different background colors. (Figure 8.1.11 - 5 is in
blend mode.)
• Overwrite: the outline is drawn in the selected pen color (see next item), and the region
colors obliterate the map. (Figure 8.1.11 - 8 is in overwrite mode - compare with Figure
8.1.11 - 5.)
280
Figure : 8.1.11 - 8 Region Colors and Red Outline in Overwrite Mode

Pen Color
Figure : 8.1.11 - 9 Pen Color Options

Users have the choice of Red or White (default) for the reservoir outline.
Graph Scales
This option is available for re-scaling the Drawing Area.
>> Short-cut: For a minor scale shift, right-click on the x- or y-axis and drag.
>> Short-cut: For full re-scaling, double-click on the end value of either axis scale.

Figure : 8.1.11 - 10 Graph Scales Options
• Manual: opens the Graph Window Scales dialog.
Define the minimum and maximum values for the X and Y axes.
• Auto: re-adjusts the scaling to fit the reservoir within the Drawing Area (in case the re-
scaling operation is not performed correctly!).
281
• UnZoom: only enabled if users have zoomed-in on a portion of the reservoir image. UnZoom
will return the image to the scaling it had prior to the zoom or series of zooms.
>> Short-cut: Press {Ctrl} and right mouse-click in the Drawing Area.
(Users can Zoom-in by pressing the {Ctrl} key and drawing a box around the area of interest
using the left mouse button.)
Key Window
>> Short-cut: double left-click on any of the region colours in the Key to hide it.
The menu option allows users to hide or display the region colour Key.
Close Reservoir
>> Short-cut: right mouse-click anywhere in the Drawing Area.
When drawing the reservoir outline, this option will create a reservoir boundary from the last
node created to the first node, thereby closing the reservoir outline (see “Drawing an Outline
with the Mouse”, on page 263).
Clear Reservoir
>> Short-cut: double right-click in the Drawing Area outside the reservoir.
This option will clear all the reservoir details, including the map, from the Drawing Area. Any
parameters defined under the other tabs within the PanMesh Data Preparation dialog box will
also be cleared but will be retained in memory and can be retrieved if the appropriate parts of the
reservoir geometry are recreated.
Node Dialog
>> Short-cuts: double-click on the node in the Drawing Area (make sure the cursor
shows the word “Node” before clicking), or double-click on the node number in
the list beneath the Drawing Area.

This opens the Node Parameters dialog box for entering or editing node co-ordinates (see “Dip,
Layering and Node Editing”, on page 287). If users enter via the menu, select the required node
number within the generated dialog. If entering the dialog via a short-cut, the node clicked-on
with the cursor will already be selected.
Boundary Dialog
>> Short-cut: double-click on the boundary (ensure the cursor shows the word
“Edge” before clicking).
This opens the Boundary Parameters dialog box for specifying the no-flow (default) or
constant pressure condition at each outer boundary (see “Upper, Lower and Outer Boundary
Conditions”, on page 287).
Remove Regions
>> Short-cut: double right-click on an internal line adjacent to the region (ensure
the cursor shows the word “Internal Line” before clicking).
282
This opens the Delete areal regions dialog box to allow the removal of an internal line/region.
By deleting an internal boundary, users also delete a region (see “Deleting a Region or Internal
Boundary”, on page 274).
Internal No-Flow Boundaries

>> Short-cut: double left-click on the internal boundary (make sure the cursor
shows the words “Internal Line” before clicking)).
This option will open the Define internal no-flow boundaries dialog box which allows users to
edit internal boundaries - in particular, the conversion of a portion of the internal boundary into a
no-flow boundary of finite extent (see “Control Points and Internal No-Flow Boundaries”, on
page 275).
Cancel
This option closes the menu.
8. 1. 12. Importing a Template

The drawing area has its limitations as far as the complexity of the reservoir structure users can
achieve. If the reservoir is too complex to build using the drawing facilities, or if users have built
it, but find that PanMesh is unable to construct a mesh for it, two options remain:
• Import a template. The template library offers a selection of useful and geologically
significant generic structures which can be imported into the drawing area and modified to
suit user-requirements. The initial selection is small, but will be augmented over time.
• Contact EPS. EPS will advise users and if necessary, can build a custom reservoir template
specifically tailored to user-requirements.
The templates supplied with the installation contain the basic geometrical data for a generic
shape. A template can be imported, its shape adjusted as required, and material properties, etc.
added. Custom templates can supplied for special shapes, with, optionally, material properties
included.
Make sure the drawing area is clear, and select the Import Template button. The list of
templates (extension .PTL, in the PanSystem data directory) will appear in a standard File Open
dialog.
Click once on a template to see a preview of the shape in the lower part of the dialog: 8. 1. 12. Importing a Template
283
Figure : 8.1.12 - 1 Preview of the Enclosed Region Template

A small initial set of templates is provided:
• 3-Region: three rectangular regions enclosed within a rectangular reservoir.

• Enclosed Region: a rectangular region fully enclosed within a rectangular reservoir
comprised of five regions in total.
• Figure-8: two polygonal units separated by a third square region in a figure of eight
geometry.
• Lateral Vertical Channel: two adjacent channels with a slight vertical offset.
• L-Shape: two adjacent units of different sizes in an L-shaped geometry.
• owc: four interlocking triangular regions enclosed within a trapezoidal reservoir.
Once a template has been imported into the Drawing Area, users can manipulate the nodes, add
layers, edit the reservoir thickness, well configuration and material properties, etc. as described
in the previous sections.
Figure : 8.1.12 - 2 Enclosed Region Model After Importing the Template
284
In the Drawing Area, the reservoir outer boundary is defined by nodes 1 to 8 (numbered anti-
clockwise from top left). The corners of the red enclosed region are Control Points on the lines
joining nodes 3-8 and 4-7. Although Control Points were introduced in Section 8. 1. 10 on
page 275 as a means of inserting finite no-flow boundaries, in this example they are being used
to define the corners of the enclosed region.
The nodes can be moved to alter the overall shape of the reservoir. In Figure 8.1.12 - 3, the red
enclosed region has been modified to represent a fault zone of finite length and width by moving
nodes 3, 4, 7 and 8. The fault zone conductivity is controlled by the permeability assigned to it in
the Material Properties for that region
Figure : 8.1.12 - 3 Enclosed Region Template Modified to Model a

Conductive Fault Zone (red region) of Finite Length
To adjust the positions of the control points, proceed as described in Section 8. 1. 10. On each
line, users must first delete both control points, then re-position them with the slider. (Do not exit
from the Control Point dialog between deleting and recreating them!). In this case, there is no
need to make any of the line segments no-flow.
285
8. 1. 13. Upper, Lower and Outer Boundary Conditions
The upper and lower surfaces of the reservoir structure, and each of the outer boundary surfaces,
can be made no-flow (default) or constant pressure.
Double-click on an external boundary in the Drawing Area (ensure the word “EDGE” appears
next to the cursor first) to open up the Boundary Conditions dialog box.
Figure : 8.1.13 - 1 Boundary Conditions dialog box

The boundary condition can be set at the Reservoir Top and Bottom, and at the boundary
between each Node->Node pair. Scroll through the node pairs to find the required boundary.
8. 1. 14. Dip, Layering and Node Editing
8. 1. 13. Upper, Lower and Outer Boundary Conditions

Up to this point, the shape of the reservoir has been defined in terms of a plan view.
The dip of the upper surface of the reservoir can now be specified by means of the z- coordinates
of the nodes. Reservoir layering is introduced by specifying the vertical thickness of each sub-
layer at the nodes.
The spatial properties of the nodes are listed in the Node Information Table beneath the
Drawing Area. This information includes the x-, y-, and z- co-ordinates of the nodes at the upper
surface of the reservoir, the vertical thickness of the reservoir or its sub-layers at each node, and
the type of outer boundary condition between a node and the next node in the list.
All of the node parameters in this table can be edited.
Figure : 8.1.14 - 1 Node Information Table and sub-layer counter

Column widths can be altered by clicking and dragging the column separator in the table header.
286
Number of sub-layers: If users are in the process of building the reservoir model, select the
number of sub-layers to be configured by scrolling the Number of sub-layers counter (default =
1, maximum 15). Extra columns for sub-layer thicknesses will be opened in the table as this
operation is performed.
Node details: To edit the details of a node, open up the Node Parameters dialog box by double-
clicking on the node in the Drawing Area, or on the node number in the table. (Users can also
access this dialog via the Node Dialog option on the User Menu.)
Figure : 8.1.14 - 2 Node Parameters dialog box

Scroll between nodes by stepping the Node ID counter at the top of the Node Parameters dialog.
The X co-ordinate and Y co-ordinate define the position of each node in the plan view. The Z
co-ordinate (positive downwards) defines the position and slope of the plane representing the
top surface of the reservoir, in terms of vertical depth below an arbitrary datum. To model a
dipping surface users only need to enter z co-ordinates at three nodes (default nodes 1, 2 and 3)
and check the Used in calculation of planes checkbox for each selected node.
Any 3 nodes can be used for this purpose. (Since only three points are needed to define a plane,
8. 1. 14. Dip, Layering and Node Editing

if users enable more than three only the first three will be used, and the other z co-ordinates will
be ignored.) Users may enter z values at the other nodes if required, but being redundant, they
will not be used in the geometrical calculations.
A maximum dip of 45° from horizontal is currently allowed.
Enter the vertical Thickness of sub-layer 1 (equal to the reservoir thickness if it is to be a single-
layered model). If the sub-layer is of constant thickness, just enter a value at one node and OK
from the dialog - the thicknesses at the other nodes will be filled automatically. If the sub-layer is
not of constant thickness, users only need to enter thickness values at the three nodes flagged for
calculation of planes, in the same way as for the z co-ordinate. This defines the plane of the
bottom surface of the sub-layer.
If the reservoir consists of several sub-layers, enter their vertical thicknesses one at a time by
stepping the sub-layer counter. Do this at the three nodes checked for the calculation of planes, to
define the plane surfaces representing the bottoms of the sub-layers.
Users may enter thickness values at other nodes if required, but being redundant, they will be
ignored in the geometrical calculations.
287
When users OK from the dialog, they will see a green tick mark displayed next to the node
number in the table if it is to be used in defining the plane of the upper surface of the reservoir
(and the sub-layers), while a red cross signifies that the node is not to be used for this.
8. 1. 15. Defining a Radial Region Around the Wellbore

Users can model a circular region around the wellbore which has different fluid or rock
properties, representing, for example, the swept region around a water injector. Select the Radial
Regions button on the main Reservoir Geometry tab (Figure 8.1.0 - 1), and enter the radius of
the region. The rock and fluid properties of this region are entered in the Material Properties
dialog (Section 8. 3).
Figure : 8.1.15 - 1 Radial Regions dialog box
Figure : 8.1.15 - 2 Radial Region Around the Wellbore 8. 1. 15. Defining a Radial Region Around the Wellbore
The region will be numbered Region 1 (as illustrated in Fig. 8.1.15 - 2), and extends over the
entire length of the wellbore. Different material properties can be assigned to the region in each
sub-layer (Section 8. 3 “Material Properties”, on page 294), but the radius is held constant.
The skin factor will also be modelled as a circular region around the wellbore with a finite radius
and a permeability which, for a positive skin, is less than the reservoir permeability, and for a
negative skin, is greater. The skin, or “damage region”, is configured separately in the Material
Properties dialog and is described in the Section “Wellbore Damage”, on page 298.
Provided the radial region has a larger radius than the damaged region, the model can contain
both.
288
8. 1. 16. 3-D View
To generate a 3-D view of the reservoir, double-click the mouse in the Drawing Area outside the
reservoir shape. This will only work if users have already specified reservoir or sub-layer
thicknesses. Double-click again to return to the plan view.
Figure : 8.1.16 - 1 3-D View (solid) of a Dipping Multi-Layered Reservoir

Use the Sketch Display option on the User Menu, described in Section 8. 1. 11 on page 280, to
switch between solid and wire-frame representations of the reservoir.
Figure : 8.1.16 - 2 3-D View (wire) of the Same Reservoir, Showing Slant
Well
To rotate the image, left-click in the Drawing Area and drag the mouse.
There is a keypad to the side of the screen to manipulate the image. Most buttons are self-
explanatory. The Zoom Res button functions are also available on the Up and Down arrow keys.
Zoom Well simply enlarges the well image to make it more clearly visible - it may be difficult to
find in a large reservoir. (Open intervals are red - best seen in Wire Elevation view, Figure 8.1.16
8. 1. 16. 3-D View
- 2). If a damaged zone is present, this will be enlarged too (but only in the graphic).
RotateX rotates the image about a horizontal axis running left-right. RotateY rotates the image
about a horizontal axis running top-bottom. The keyboard keys {F5} and {F6} also perform the
same rotation function as RotateX.
289
8. 2. Well Configuration
The Well Configuration tab of the PanMesh Data Preparation dialog allows users to define the
geometry of the wellbore using the Horizontal or Vertical Well categories, and to assign open
intervals. Figure 8.2.0 - 1 shows the various input options for a vertical well, and Figure 8.2.0 - 2
for a horizontal well.
Figure : 8.2.0 - 1 Well Configuration dialog tab for a Vertical Well
8. 2. Well Configuration
290
Figure : 8.2.0 - 2 Well Configuration dialog tab for a Horizontal Well
8. 2. 1. Well Geometry and Open Intervals

First, select whether the well is Vertical (this includes slant wells) or Horizontal, in the
Orientation area. Then define the position, deviation, azimuth, radius and completion of the
wellbore in the Well Geometry and Open Intervals areas:
• Vertical: this category includes slanted wells, up to a maximum of 87o from the vertical.

However, the line of the well trajectory must cut both the top and bottom surfaces of the
reservoir.
The X co-ordinate and Y co-ordinate refer to where the well cuts the top surface of the
reservoir (Figure 8.2.1 - 1).
For a slanted well, enter the Deviation from Vertical and the Azimuth of the well trajectory
(relative to “North” on the view area).
Enter the Measured Depth to Top of Reservoir, and the measured depths of the Open
interval(s). Increase the Completions counter if more than one open interval is to be
included (current maximum 6).
The datum reference for measured depths is completely arbitrary. The Measured Depth to
Top of Reservoir can be relative to original kelly bushing, mean sea-level, etc., or can be
left at zero. However, the open interval depths must be consistent with the reference system
that is used.
291
Figure : 8.2.1 - 1 Vertical Well Geometry (side view)

• Horizontal: this category is for a well at 90° from the vertical. The line of the well trajectory
must not cut the top or bottom surfaces of the reservoir, but must pass through the sides of the
structure. In addition. the well trajectory must not cut an interface between sub-layers if a
multi-layered reservoir is being modelled (i.e. the well trajectory must lie in the same sub-
layer across the full width of the reservoir). The relative dip of the formation containing the
well is therefore limited by these conditions. The Dip from Horizontal edit field, to allow a
dipping well, has not yet been implemented.
The X, Y and Z co-ordinates define the position of the heel of the well. Z is positive
downwards. Make sure the Z value is consistent with the Z value used to define the
reservoir top.
Enter the measured depth to the heel of the well, and the measured depths of the Open
Interval(s). Increase the Completions counter if more than one open interval is required
(current maximum 6).
As with the vertical well category, the datum reference for measured depths is completely
arbitrary. The Measured Depth to Top of Reservoir can be relative to original kelly
bushing, mean sea-level, etc., or can be left at zero. However, the open interval depths must
be consistent with the reference system that is used.
Figure : 8.2.1 - 2 Horizontal Well Geometry (side view)
292
Ensure the well is positioned within the boundaries of the reservoir! If users wish to visually
inspect the positioning of the well, return to the Reservoir Geometry tab. A red dot will be
visible in plan view (Figure 8.1.15 - 2) where the well’s trajectory cuts the top of the reservoir
(vertical well type), or at the location of the heel (horizontal well type). In side view, the wellbore
will appear as a red line labelled with a “zero” node flag, with the open interval(s) in white
(Figure 8.1.16 - 2). If it is a slant or horizontal well, the projection of the wellbore will also
appear on the plan view.
Figure : 8.2.1 - 3 Horizontal Wellbore (red) with Two Open Intervals

(white) in Plan View
If users inadvertently specify open intervals that extend outside the reservoir, a warning message
will be issued, but PanSystem will clip the offending intervals to fit, so there is no need to take
corrective action.
For both well types, enter a Wellbore Radius.
8. 2. 2. Wellbore Storage
Select the Wellbore Storage button to access the Well Parameters dialog. This is the same
dialog as is used in the Well and Reservoir Description (Analytical), with only the lower portion
enabled (7. 5. 1 “Well Parameters”, on page 190). Select a wellbore storage model and enter the
parameters.
8.3. Material Properties

The rock and fluid properties of sub-layers and regions are defined on the Material Properties
tab. When users enter the PanMesh Data Preparation dialog for the first time, PanSystem will
transfer any parameters that may already have been set-up in the analytical section into all
regions (e.g. users may have been working on a welltest using the diagnostic plot and analytical
simulation facilities). These can be edited where changes may be required.
8. 2. 2. Wellbore Storage
293
Figure : 8.3.0 - 1 Material Properties dialog tab
8. 3. 1. Fluid Type
The fluid type - Oil, Gas or Condensate - refers to the principal produced fluid, and will apply
to all sub-layers in the reservoir. Gas and condensate fluid types require that users generate a real
gas pseudo-pressure m(p) table via the PVT Calculator.
Regardless of the selected produced fluid type, the material properties dialogs provide the
flexibility to apply gas, oil or water properties to any region (e.g. to model an aquifer or gas cap).
These different fluids are simply variations in material properties that affect the propagation of
the transient pressure disturbance. PanMesh does not model movement of these fluids so,
although users might model an edge or underlying aquifer, there will be no water encroachment,
coning or fingering. (Likewise, there is no gas cap expansion). All region boundaries are strictly
static.
8. 3. 2. The Sub-Layer and Region Area

Each region in each sub-layer can be assigned individual rock and fluid properties. When users
change the sub-layer or region counter (assuming that multiple layers or regions have been
8. 3. 1. Fluid Type
configured in the Reservoir Geometry section), a new page of edit fields will be generated.
294
Figure : 8.3.2 - 1 Material Properties for Sub-Layer 1, Region 1of an Oil

Reservoir
If users have a number of regions with the same properties, enter them for one of the regions,
Copy them, select another region, and Paste them into it, or use the Paste to all regions option
to paste the properties into all the regions in the selected sub-layer. Copy does not, however,
make the properties available on the Windows ClipBoard for export outside PanSystem.
Enter the rock and fluid properties per region. The PVT Calculator (described next) can be used
to estimate fluid properties from production data.
• Formation volume factor of the mobile fluid.

• Viscosity of the mobile fluid.
• Total Compressibility of the rock and fluids.
• Temperature of the region.
• Pressure of the region. Only the pressure of the region containing the well in sub-layer 1 is
currently considered. All regions and sub-layers are assumed to have the same initial
pressure.
• Porosity - connected porosity of the region.

• Permeability: the effective permeability of the mobile fluid. Directional components can be
assigned along three principal axes as kx, ky and kz, allowing for areal as well as vertical
anisotropy. The kx- and ky-axes are in the plane of the lower surface of the sub-layer, and the
kz-axis is perpendicular to it.
• Principal X-Axis defines the orientation, clockwise from “North”, of the kx-component of
the horizontal permeability. The default angle is 90o from North - i.e. in the West-East plane
of the x-axis of the reservoir geometry. All regions in a sub-layer should be assigned the same
value. Different sub-layers may have different values.
Region is active: checkbox should be unchecked if users want to exclude a region from the
model. In PanMesh, regions not flagged as active will be excluded from the mesh.
Vertical Mesh Refinement in Adjacent Layers: checkbox is used where there is a high
horizontal permeability contrast between adjacent layers (e.g. greater than 10:1). A localized grid
refinement (LGR), is applied to lower permeability layers lying each side of the selected (i.e.
higher permeability) layer. Localized grid refinement is applied to each adjacent low-
permeability layer in a vertical direction, using logarithmic spacing (i.e. fine to coarse) away
from each interface (see 8.3.2 - 2 “Vertical Mesh Refinement in Adjacent Layers - Plan View”,
on page 297).
295
Figure : 8.3.2 - 2 Vertical Mesh Refinement in Adjacent Layers - Plan View

Note: Due to the increased number of mesh elements involved, this feature will slow down the
solution time for any Numerical Simulation performed in PanMesh, but will produce a better
response.
PVT Calculator
The Fluid Parameters dialogs are identical to those used in the analytical data preparation
section. Full details of the calculation of PVT properties for oil, gas and condensate fluid types
can be found in Section 7. 6. 9 “Fluid Parameters”, on page 223. Different sub-dialogs are
generated for each fluid type depending on whether the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method
checkbox has been checked or left unchecked in the underlying section.
For single-phase fluid parameter data, real gas pseudo-pressure m(p), is available for gas and
condensate fluids. Multi-phase pseudo-pressure m'(p), is available for all three fluid types.
Figure : 8.3.2 - 3 Fluid Parameters dialog box for Oil Principal Fluid Type
Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure method
This option is available for multi-phase flow if users wish to account for important variations in
fluid properties with pressure such as gas break-out below bubble-point or liquid drop-out below
dew-point and the consequent reduction in the relative permeability to the producing fluid.
296
Computed saturations have radial symmetry around the wellbore and have no vertical gradient -
therefore, users cannot model water or gas coning.
The dialogs for the calculation of PVT properties and multi-phase pseudo-pressures for oil, gas
and condensate fluid types are identical to those used in the analytical data preparation section.
Details can be found in Section 7. 6. 9 “Fluid Parameters”, on page 223.
Relative Permeabilities button: This button option is only available if the Multi-Phase Pseudo-
Pressure Method checkbox has been checked in the underlying section. It generates an IPR -
Relative Permeability - Data Selection sub-dialog for the selection, entry and editing of relative
permeability data. For information on relative permeabilities, please refer to the start of Section
7. 6. 5 “Layer Parameters”, on page 197.
Pseudo-Pressures button: Again, this button option is only available if the Multi-Phase
Pseudo-Pressure Method checkbox has been checked in the underlying section. It generates a
Pseudo Table Editing sub-dialog specific to the selected fluid type.
8. 3. 3. Wellbore Damage
The Darcy skin factor is modelled in PanMesh as a circular region of finite radius with altered
permeability around the wellbore - the so-called “damaged zone”. The skin factor and damaged
zone radius can be different in each sub-layer that the well penetrates.
For a horizontal well, only one damaged region permeability can be used, owing to the current
restriction that a horizontal well must stay within one sub-layer.
Figure : 8.3.3 - 1 Wellbore damage area for the definition of skin factors
Scroll the counter to the sub-layer required.
Mechanical Skin (S): Enter the “mechanical” skin factor - i.e. the Darcy or non-turbulent skin
factor at the wellbore, attributed to the completion, and damage or improvement of the near-
wellbore region).
Damage Zone radius (Rd): For positive values of S, enter the radius of the damaged zone
8. 3. 3. Wellbore Damage
around the wellbore (default 2 ft, or 0.6096 m). The Damage Zone permeability (Kd) is
calculated automatically from Hawkins’ formula (Refs. 1 and 20), using the specified Rd and S
values and the undamaged region permeability. The damage zone permeability term Kd, is then
used as a near-wellbore material property in the numerical model.
• For vertical and slanted wells, where a different S and Rd can be specified for each sub-layer,
the undamaged region permeability in each sub-layer is used in Hawkins’ formula.
• For horizontal wells, which in PanMesh can only lie in one sub-layer, the undamaged
permeability of the region containing the heel of the well is used in Hawkins’ formula, and
the computed Kd is applied over the length of the well. If the well traverses regions of
different permeability, the simulated response will therefore not model the skin factor
precisely.
297
In the case of anisotropic reservoirs, well deviation and azimuth relative to the dip and strike of
the sub-layer are taken into account when computing the appropriate undamaged permeability to
use in the Hawkins formula.
For negative S, a high damaged zone permeability is imposed and the corresponding radius Rd is
calculated. Users have no control over this radius.
Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient (D): The turbulent skin coefficient is available for gas and
condensate fluid types. The rate-dependent pressure response attributed to turbulent flow is
added analytically to the simulated pressure in PanSystem after the PanMesh run and does not
require representation as a finite region in the finite element model.
Unlike the Darcy skin factor S, only one value can be specified for the D-coefficient. Therefore:
• For vertical and slanted wells in a multi-layered model, D should be considered as an average
or composite value for the layered reservoir.
• For horizontal wells, which in PanMesh can only lie in one sub-layer, D should be considered
as an average or composite value for the traverse of the well.
8.4. Run Mode

This tabbed dialog allows users to set-up a single-run or a batch run of PanMesh for a number of
different PanMesh numerical models (i.e. once they have been initialized within PanSystem).
Once the run mode has been selected, the PanMesh numerical simulation process can be initiated
and it will run through each model in single-run (default) or batch mode, without further user
intervention. An example dialog is presented below (Figure 8.4.0 - 1).
8. 4. Run Mode
Figure : 8.4.0 - 1 Run Mode tabbed dialog box
298
8. 4. 1. Mode Area
Two modes are available from this section of the dialog:
• Single Run mode: This is the default setting. If users wish to proceed with a Single Run, no
further input is required. On selecting OK from this Data Preparation tabbed dialog,
PanSystem writes a standard DATA.SET file to the paging directory, containing all the
necessary information. This file will be read, then deleted by PanMesh once it has processed
all the information.
• Batch Run mode: When this option is checked, the Start New Batch Set-Up button is
activated in the Batch Control Section and users can proceed with the batch set-up. In Batch
Run mode PanSystem writes a .SET file named DATAj.SET (where j = 1 - n), for each model
in the paging directory. If users check before starting PanMesh they will also find a
DATA.SET file, which is identical to the last DATAj.SET (i.e. j = n) file written. When
PanMesh is started, PanSystem re-writes this DATA.SET file and inserts a BATCH flag (so
PanMesh knows what to expect), the names of the .SET files, etc.
8. 4. 2. Batch Control Section

Input is only required in this section if a Batch Run is being prepared. This section is used to set-
up and assign a name to a Batch Run and add numerical reservoir models to a Batch Run. The
operational procedure is described as follows:
Start New Batch Set-Up: This button is activated once Batch Run mode has been selected in the
Mode area described above. When selected, other areas of the dialog are activated for initiating
the Batch Run and two new buttons are generated:
• The Batch Name field is activated (changes to white background).
• The End Batch Set-Up button is activated.
• A new button, Save As Pan File is generated at the lower left corner of the dialog.
• A new button, Add to Batch is generated at the lower right of the dialog, replacing the OK
button.
Note: both of these new buttons are available on all four of the tabbed dialogs while they are
active. Users do not have to return to the Run Mode tabbed dialog to operate the Save As Pan
File and/or Add to Batch buttons.
Batch Name: Enter a name for the current batch in this field (up to 20 alphanumeric characters
are allowed).
Number of Runs in Batch: This field provides information on the number of runs included in
the current batch (up to 20 runs are allowed in a batch).
Extend Existing Batch Set-Up: Once models have been added to a Batch Run and the End
Batch Set-Up button has been selected, this button is activated to allow additional models to be
added at a later stage (if required). Select this button to reinstate the Add to Batch and Save As
8. 4. 1. Mode Area
Pan File buttons to the dialog.

End Batch Set-Up: Select this button once all the necessary numerical models have been added
to the current Batch Run. The Add to Batch button will then be replaced by the OK button and
the Save As Pan File button disappears from the lower left corner of the dialog.
Add to Batch: Select this button to add the current numerical model to a Batch Run.
299
Save As Pan File: This button allows users to save each model in turn as a .PAN file for future
recall. As discussed earlier in the Mode section, all of the .SET files are deleted once PanMesh
has finished using them, so users will never be able to see any of the modified DATA.SET files
to view any changes that were applied during separate runs.
Note: if users wish to keep a running log of changes applied to numerical models during various
runs, they should save this data using the Save As Pan File button. Another useful logging
feature can be found in the Report menu. Select the Report Coverpage option from this menu,
then select the Edit Remarks button to open the Edit Remarks sub-dialog. Use this sub-dialog to
keep a record of any changes made to models during each run (e.g. changes to permeability, skin,
fluid properties, etc.).
8. 4. 3. Setting-Up a Batch Run
To set-up a batch run:

1) Select the Batch button in the Mode area.
2) Select the New Batch Set-Up button in the Batch Control section.
3) Enter a Batch Name (i.e. up to 20 alphanumeric characters maximum), in the Batch
Control section.
4) Set-up the first model using the other three tabbed dialogs (i.e. if not already done).
5) Select the Add to Batch button in any of the tabbed dialogs.
6) Optionally, use the Save as Pan File button in any of the tabbed dialogs, to save as a .PAN
file.
7) Set-up the next model in accordance with steps 4 to 6.
8) Continue until all the desired models have been added (i.e. up to 20 models maximum),
then select the End Batch Set-Up button in the Batch Control section.
9) Select the OK button to exit the PanSystem - PanMesh Data Preparation tabbed dialog.
10)Proceed to PanMesh and run the simulation (i.e. open PanMesh using the Simulate menu
and Numerical Simulation/PanMesh: New run... option). It should continue through all the
batched models without further user intervention.
11)Additional models can be added via the Extend Existing Batch Set-Up button, which
will open up the current batch for new models to be added.
8. 4. 3. Setting-Up a Batch Run
300
Tidal Filter
Chapter 9- Tidal Filter

The Tidal Filter facility in PanSystem corrects for the effects of ocean tides on extended welltest
data (Ref. 65). An example of such a test is shown below..
Figure : 9.0.0 - 1 Example of Gauge Data Affected by Sea Tides During

a Long Build-Up Test
The filter works as follows: the local sea tidal waveform (tide height or pressure versus time) is
first synchronized with the welltest record so as to correlate with the tide-induced features in the
gauge data. This waveform is then subtracted from the gauge data. A suitable scaling factor is
found by trial and error, such that the tidal disturbances are reduced to a minimum.
Before attempting to remove tidal effects in this manner, EPS recommend trying the data
smoothing facility available on the Data Edit Plot toolbar under the Data reduction and
smoothing icon (see Section 6. 5. 5 “Data Reduction and Smoothing”, on page 158). This may
well prove adequate in reducing small amplitude tidal interference to an acceptable level.
The Tidal Filter tools are to be found on the Data Edit Plot toolbar in Dataprep Gauge Data, and
are described later in this section.
First, the Tide Data... option on the Dataprep menu is used to prepare tables of local tide data for
the Tidal Filter.
Chapter 9 - Tidal Filter
There are two options for the source of the tide data:
· Maritime tide table: this approach constructs a tidal signal from published maritime tide
tables (high and low tide heights vs time) covering the period of the welltest (see Figure
9.2.0 - 1, “Edit Tidal Pressure Gauge,” on page 306).
· Sub-sea pressure gauge: this approach uses data from a sub-sea pressure gauge directly
for the tidal signal. (see Figure 9.3.3 - 6, “Build-Up Test with Raw Sub-Sea Gauge for
Tidal Signal,” on page 312).
302
Tidal Filter
9.1. Maritime Tide Table
Select the Maritime tide table... option on the Tide Data sub menu of the Dataprep menu to
access the Edit Tide Table dialog box.
The objectives here are to:
- enter the high and low tide heights and times for the period spanning the welltest
(maximum of 100 lines). Users may type the data in, load it from an existing file, or paste
it in from an external editor. The table is saved as part of the .PAN file.
- enter local time information to enable approximate synchronization between the tidal
waveform and the gauge clock.
Figure : 9.1.0 - 1 Edit Tide Table dialog box

Open is a standard file open option, to import a tide table (extension .SEA). The ASCII format
of the .SEA file (introduced in V-2.6) is described in Section 16. 5 “.SEA Maritime Tide Table
File”, on page 573. Earlier binary format files from as far back as PanSystem V-2.3 (16-bit and
32-bit) can also be imported.
Save As... is a standard file save option, to export an ASCII tide table, with default extension
.SEA (see Section 16. 5 “.SEA Maritime Tide Table File”, on page 573). The tide table and other
9. 1. Maritime Tide Table
information are saved as part of the .PAN file, so saving a separate .SEA tide table file (for use
with other welltests, for example) is optional.
Clear will clear the dialog box of all entries in selected columns over a specified range of rows.
Users can Insert rows, up to a maximum of 100, and Delete selected rows in the table.
Copy allows users to copy all the columns of data contained in the table to the clipboard. These
columns of data can be subsequently pasted into a spreadsheet (e.g. Excel).
303
Tidal Filter
The Paste button allows users to paste in two columns of data from an external source via the
ClipBoard. The source data must consist of two tab-separated columns. The time may have any
of the accepted formats (hours, hh:mm:ss, etc) except minutes or seconds. Time must be
cumulative (i.e. it must not reset to zero at the start of each new day unless it is in dd:hh:mm:ss
format).
To bring in data this way, Edit Copy (or Ctrl+C) the columns from the editor being used
(NotePad, Excel, etc), switch to PanSystem, place the cursor at the insertion point in the time
column and select the Paste button (do not use Ctrl+V). The Paste option will automatically
translate the incoming time format into the one chosen for display, if different.
lines as are involved. If users do not wish to overwrite data, use the Insert option first to open up
the appropriate number of empty lines, then Paste.
The Time button allows users to select the time format for the tide table view (default Hours).
Successive entries in the tide table should represent high and low tide times and heights - over a
period slightly longer than the duration of the test. Do not enter any intermediate times and
heights.
The Parameters button takes users to the following dialog box:
Figure : 9.1.0 - 2 Edit Tide Table Parameters dialog box

• Local time at 12.00 am Standard Time: This entry synchronizes local time with the
Standard Time (such as GMT, EST) used for the tide tables. An entry of 12.0 means local
time is the same as Standard Time. If the tide tables are already in local time, enter 12.0.
9. 1. Maritime Tide Table
• Test starts at (gauge clock time): enter the time that the test started (or the time of some
major event) according to the gauge clock.
• Test starts at (actual local time): enter the time that the test started (or the time of the same
major event) according to local clock time.
By synchronizing local time with Standard Time, and the gauge clock with local time, the tide
tables can be aligned with the welltest.
• The Time button allows users to select the time format for the time entries (default Hours).
(See time formats in section 6. 2. 1 “Import”, on page 129).
304
Tidal Filter
• Mean tide height: usually quoted in the published tables as a distance above LAT (lowest
astronomical tide) or some arbitrary datum. The tide-heights in the table must be measured
relative to the same datum. This will be subtracted from the maritime tide height signal at the
filtering stage so it is reduced to amplitude fluctuations about a mean of zero.
• The Calculate mean button will determine a mean tide height from the data in the table (by
taking an average). However, it is better to use the published value if available.
Function allows users to modify the time or height data by shifting and/or scaling. This button
opens up a standard Function Data dialog box:
Figure : 9.1.0 - 3 Function Data dialog box

Select the Column to function, specify the Start and End rows that the function is to be applied
to, and the Multiplier and Shift to be applied.
Note: that the shift is applied after multiplication. Users will be able to re-scale and shift the tidal
signal during the filtering operation, so functioning at this stage is not essential.
The OK button returns users to the main dialog and retains the tide data changes. Cancel ignores
any changes to the tide data.
9.2. Sub-Sea Pressure Gauge

An alternative to using published tide tables is to place a pressure gauge on the sea-bed (or
anywhere below the sea surface) and record the tidal fluctuations as a change in hydrostatic
pressure. 9. 2. Sub-Sea Pressure Gauge
To use this option users must first bring their sub-sea gauge data into PanSystem using the
Import option in Dataprep Gauge Data (See Section 6. 2. 1 “Import”, on page 129), then on the
Dataprep Tide Data menu, select the Sub-sea pressure gauge... option to access the Select
tidal pressure gauge dialog box.
If users have not yet imported the gauge data into PanSystem it will not appear in this list - in this
case, Cancel out of the dialog and import the data.
305
Tidal Filter
Once the pressure gauge has been selected and the OK button selected, users will be presented
with the Edit Tidal Pressure Gauge dialog box:
Figure : 9.2.0 - 1 Edit Tidal Pressure Gauge

Function allows users to correct the time or pressure data by shifting and/or scaling. This button
opens up the Function Data dialog box described under Figure 9.1.0 - 2, “Edit Tide Table
Parameters dialog box,” on page 304. Users will be able to re-scale and shift the tidal signal
during the filtering operation, so functioning at this stage is not essential.
Goto lets users go to a specified line of data.
Clear will clear the dialog box of all entries in selected columns over a specified range of rows.
Users can Insert rows, and Delete selected rows in the table.
Copy allows users to copy all the columns of data contained in the table to the clipboard. These
columns of data can be subsequently pasted into a spreadsheet (e.g. Excel).
The Paste button allows users to paste in two columns of data from an external source via the 9. 2. Sub-Sea Pressure Gauge
ClipBoard. The source data must consist of two tab-separated columns. The time may have any
of the accepted formats (hours, hh:mm:ss, etc) except minutes or seconds. Time must be
cumulative (i.e. it must not reset to zero at the start of each new day unless it is in dd:hh:mm:ss
format).
To bring in data this way, Edit Copy (or Ctrl+C) the columns from the editor being used
(NotePad, Excel, etc), switch to PanSystem, place the cursor at the insertion point in the time
column and select the Paste button (do not use Ctrl+V). The Paste option will automatically
translate the incoming time format into the one chosen for display, if different.
lines as are involved. If users do not wish to overwrite data, use the Insert option first to open up
the appropriate number of empty lines, then Paste.
306
Tidal Filter
The Time button allows users to select the time format for the tide table view (default Hours)
(see Time formats in section 6. 2. 1 “Import”, on page 129).
The Parameters button takes users to the following dialog box:
• Mean tide pressure: This will be subtracted from the sub-sea gauge signal at the filtering
stage so it is reduced to amplitude fluctuations about a mean of zero. The Calculate button
will determine an average pressure from the data in the table.
The OK button returns users to the main dialog and retains any tide data changes. Cancel ignores
any changes to the tide data.
9.3. Tidal Filter

9. 3. 1. Tidal filter mode
Before entering tidal filter mode, users must enter tide data using the Dataprep Tide Data option
described at the start of this chapter.
Select the Tidal filter mode button on the Data Edit plot to enter tidal filter mode. If there is
more than one pressure record plotted on the screen, a dialog box will prompt users to select
which column the tidal filter is to act on.
The pressure and tidal data will now be displayed. In the following figure, the tide signal is
derived from maritime tide tables:
Figure : 9.3.1 - 1 Gauge and (Maritime) Tide Data During a Build-Up Test
9. 3. Tidal Filter
307
Tidal Filter
Normally users will need a finer scale in order to be able to synchronize the two data sets. De-
select the Tidal filter mode button. On the Data Edit plot, click and drag to draw a zoom area
with two opposite corners positioned on the data, such as in the following figure.
Figure : 9.3.1 - 2 Positioning of Zoom Area for Tidal Filter

Do not select the Zoom In button - select the Tidal filter mode button .
A zoomed display will appear, but the diagonal trend across the zoom box will have been backed
out. If users have drawn the zoom box carefully, the test data will be rotated more or less to the
horizontal, making it easier to compare with the tide waveform:
9. 3. 2. Calculate Tidal Lag
Figure : 9.3.1 - 3 Zoomed Region with Build-Up Trend Reduced
9. 3. 2. Calculate Tidal Lag

The next step is to estimate the time lag between the two curves using the Calculate Tidal
Lag button (the peaks on the gauge data will be a fraction of an hour later than the tide table
peaks).
Select a correlatable point on a tide table peak (or trough), and the corresponding peak (trough)
on the test data.
308
Tidal Filter
Select the Calculate Tidal Lag button . The time lag will be reported in a dialog box:
The tide waveform is redrawn shifted by this amount. It should now be synchronized with the
features in the test data.
Users can repeat this exercise until a satisfactory match is obtained. The cumulative time-lag will
be reported each time.
9. 3. 3. Apply Tidal Filter

Now select the Apply Tidal Filter button. The dialog box shown in Figure 9.3.3 - 1, “Apply
Tidal Filter dialog box,” on page 309 will report the Time lag (see previous section), and the
Gain. The gain is a first approximation for the scaling factor needed to match the raw tide
heights or pressures against the tidal oscillations they have caused in the test data.
Both these fields can be edited. The gain should be adjusted by trial and error for best results.
Figure : 9.3.3 - 1 Apply Tidal Filter dialog box

The Replot Without Filtering button is optional - it redraws the plot with the tidal waveform
shifted by the Time Lag amount, and re-scaled by the Gain, but without filtering the data. This
enables users to compare the two curves and decide if any further lag or gain adjustments are
required:
309
Tidal Filter
Figure : 9.3.3 - 2 Overlay with Shifted and Re-Scaled Tide Waveform,

Exhibiting a Good (but far from perfect) Correlation
Return to the dialog box by selecting the Apply Tidal Filter button again. Alter the Time lag
and Gain values if required.
Note: that these are both cumulative values. If users try the filter with a gain of 0.5, then once
more with 0.4, the overall effect is that of the 0.4 setting, not 0.5 x 0.4.
Select the Apply Filter to Data button to perform the filtering operation, and check the results
on the plot:
Figure : 9.3.3 - 3 Filtered Pressure Data in Zoomed Region

In this example, a comparison with the previous plot shows an improvement, but it is far from
perfect.
Select the Apply Tidal Filter button , adjust the gain, and try again.
Recover original data will remove all filtering effects.
310
Tidal Filter
When the zoomed region looks satisfactory, select the (darkened) Tidal Filter Mode button
again. The filtered pressure will be saved as a new data column with the default name
FILTERED PRESSURE. The generated dialog box will allow users to change this name if
required. Select OK to plot the raw and filtered data for the entire test (Figure 9.3.3 - 4), Cancel
will nullify the filtering and just re-plot the original data.
Figure : 9.3.3 - 4 Raw (red) and Filtered (blue) Data

It is obvious from Figure 9.3.3 - 2 on page 310, that some of the tide movements are absent from
the pressure data and correlation is not perfect. It would be impossible to filter such data fully
without altering the original tide tables. It would be worth trying the data smoothing facility
available on the Data Edit Plot toolbar under the Data reduction and smoothing icon (see Section
6. 5. 5 “Data Reduction and Smoothing”, on page 158), to remove residual tidal interference. The
result of smoothing the example dataset from (Figure 9.3.3 - 4) is shown below (Figure 9.3.3 - 5).
Note: although the two plots look similar, the blue line is much smoother on close inspection:
Figure : 9.3.3 - 5 Raw (red) and Smoothed (blue) Data

The filtering procedure using a sub-sea gauge as the source of the tidal pressure signal is the
same. If the tidal signal is noisy (Figure 9.3.3 - 6), users should exit the tidal filter, plot the subsea
gauge data on the Data Edit Plot and use the Data reduction and smoothing tool (see Section 6.
5. 5 “Data Reduction and Smoothing”, on page 158) to improve the signal quality. The plot
illustrated in Figure 9.3.3 - 7 shows the smoothed version of the tidal signal in Figure 9.3.3 - 6.
311
Tidal Filter
Figure : 9.3.3 - 6 Build-Up Test with Raw Sub-Sea Gauge for Tidal Signal
Figure : 9.3.3 - 7 Tidal Signal from Smoothed Sub-Sea Gauge Data
312
Analysis Section
Analysis Section
313
Analysis Flow Chart
Analysis Section
314
Analysis
Chapter 10- Analysis
In this chapter users will find information about the Analysis Menu and the Analysis Toolbar
options.
10.1. Functional Overview

Analysis is used in PanSystem to analyse the gauge data prepared in Dataprep. The maximum
data capacity of Analysis is unlimited.
There are two principal methods of analysis: line fitting to specialised diagnostic plots, and curve
matching using type-curves supplied with the program or curves users generate on-screen by
manual or automatic parameter selection. From these two methods, flow regimes can be
identified and the various well and reservoir parameters derived.
During analysis, results from any particular plot can be transferred to the main reservoir
description parameter set using the Confirm toolbar option, if desired. In this way, the reservoir
description can be built-up and continually updated as the analysis proceeds.
The latest status of every plot invoked (lines fitted, results, flow regimes, axis scales, etc.) is
written to the .PAN file by the File Save or Save As... options. Subsequent recall of the file will
reinstate all plots so that the analysis can be resumed from the point where it was left during a
previous work session.
If users have more than one pressure and/or flowrate channel to choose from (e.g. two pressure
gauges were run), the selection can be changed at any time by returning to Dataprep Gauge data
and selecting a different column name in the Master file/columns area.
This chapter has been split into two principal topics:

• Analysis menu options
• Analysis toolbar options
Chapter 10 - Analysis
315
Analysis
10.2. Analysis Menu Options
When users select the Analysis menu Plot option, PanSystem will perform a number of checks
on the data before it is plotted. These include:
- ensuring that all necessary well and reservoir input parameters are initialized
- ensuring that gauge data is present (and fewer than 8192 readings)
- ensuring that at least one test period has been defined.
If users receive a message that there is no test period available for analysis, it is worth checking
that the 1st entry in the rate change table has a zero rate, so that Tp can be calculated.
10.2.1. Plot
Description:
Use this option to display the Test Overview plot showing the complete pressure and flowrate
records selected for analysis. Choose the test period or periods to be analyzed before proceeding
to the diagnostic plots and type-curves.
Rate Changes can also be displayed as a step profile, based on the Rate Changes Table (i.e. as on
the Data Edit Plot). The Rate Changes display can be switched on/off via the Plot Rate Changes
option on the Edit menu.
What Users See:

If users have configured a single well and layer in Dataprep, they will first enter the Test
Overview plot.
If there is a choice of wells and/or layers, the Analysis Selection dialog box will be generated
(i.e. shown here for a two-well, three-layer configuration). Users should ensure that they check
the appropriate well and layer checkboxes relating to the data channels nominated for analysis in
Dataprep Gauge Data within the Master data file/columns area - the choice of well and layer
determines which set of well and layer parameters are to be used to analyze the “Master” data.
PanSystem cannot check for consistency.
10. 2. Analysis Menu Options
316
Analysis
The following plot shows the Test Overview of the supplied EXAMPLE.PAN system file:
Along the top of the Test Overview plot users will see the test period markers that they defined in
Dataprep:
In order to proceed with any form of plot analysis, users must select one or more test periods. To
select more than one, hold down the Ctrl key when clicking, or click with the right mouse button.
To de-select a period, simply click it again. Two build-up tests have been selected in the
illustration above.
Once test periods have been selected, the various analysis plots can be accessed: Cartesian,
Semi-Log, Square-Root Time, Fourth-Root Time, 1/Square-Root Time, Log-Log and Type-
Curves.
When a plot button is activated, PanSystem makes certain validity checks on the Rate Changes
table and Gauge Data for the selected test period(s) before proceeding. Most importantly it
checks that :
- if the selected test period is a shut-in period (Q = 0), it is not preceded by a zero flowrate
10. 2. 1. Plot
in the table,
- if the selected test period is a shut-in period (Q = 0) following a flowing period (Q > 0),
the last recorded gauge pressure in the test period (build up) > start pressure in the Rate
Changes table for that build-up. For injectors, where the shut-in follows an injection
period (Q < 0), the last recorded gauge pressure > start pressure in the table.
317
Analysis
The second check is the commonest cause of this error message:
or this one:
and is usually caused by the end-of-test time corresponding to a noisy gauge data point which
reads less than (producer) or greater than (injector) the pressure at the start of the test. It can be
cured by either deleting the offending data point, or re-defining the end of the test to avoid the
noise.
These various diagnostic plots are described in more detail later in the chapter.
10.2.2. Model
Description:
The Model option allows users to change the wellbore storage, reservoir flow model and outer
boundary model, and some of the basic reservoir parameters, without having to go back to
Dataprep. If users have not already chosen a model in Dataprep, the default settings “Free
model” and “Infinite acting” will be active until they are changed by users.
Models must be selected in order to do an interpretation of a welltest. The choice would normally
be based on preliminary inspection of the diagnostic plots, geological evidence, inspired
guesswork, etc. A user’s selection determines several important aspects of the analysis:
-what results will be obtained from line-fits on the diagnostic plots

-which flow regimes can be assigned to different portions of the data (optional)
-which of the supplied type-curves will be made available
-the reservoir description to be used for simulated response generation (Simulate Quick
Match and Simulate Advanced).
For example:
-for the Free Model option, no results will be displayed on any plot that lines are fitted to
-for the Radial Homogeneous reservoir model with the infinite acting boundary model,
results will be computed on the radial flow (semilog) plot, but none will appear when a
line is fitted to the linear flow (square-root time) plot, since there can be no linear flow
with this model. Results will only appear on a square-root time plot if a Vertical fracture
10. 2. 2. Model
flow model, or a Parallel faults boundary model has been selected, where the linear flow
regime is valid.
318
Analysis
What users see:
When this option is chosen, the Select Analysis Model dialog box appears (i.e. illustrated here for
multiple interepretations, with a radial homogeneous flow model, infinite acting boundary model
and classic (i.e. constant) wellbore storage selected for Interpretation 1).
If a multiple interpretation is involved, the dialog will appear with a series of tabs, each
representing a separate interpretation of the same data:
• Multiple Interpretations of the Same Data area: This facility allows users to perform up to
six different analyses (i.e. sensitivities) with the same set of data. Different model parameters
can be applied to each interpretation.
New: Select this button to generate an Interpretation Name sub-dialog. After entering a
name (or accepting the default name), then selecting OK, a new tab will be added to the
Select Analysis Model dialog for users to set-up a new interpretation model.
Edit Name: Select this button to generate the Interpretation Name sub-dialog for the
currently selected tab of the Select Analysis Model dialog. The current name of the
interpretation can be changed if required.
Delete: Select this button to delete the currently selected tab of the Select Analysis Model
dialog. A confirmation prompt is issued, to ensure that the correct tab is being deleted.
If users click on the downward arrows next to the data selection fields, drop-down lists appear,
allowing users to select a different wellbore storage, reservoir flow or boundary model.
10. 2. 2. Model
• Wellbore Storage Model list: Four models are available. See Section “Wellbore Storage
Model”, on page 191.
319
Analysis
Choose a model for the analysis. Users do not need to initialize the storage parameters unless
they are going to use Advanced Simulation and have not already initialized them in Dataprep.
• Wellbore Storage Parameters...: Users can access the current set of “confirmed” wellbore
storage parameters (i.e. the last set of results confirmed with the Cnf tool). During analysis,
users would not normally edit these because they are results rather than input.
They are required as input for the Simulate Advanced Simulation facility and must be
initialized before a response can be generated (please refer to the next chapter, Simulate).
Select the Wellbore Storage Parameters button to generate one of the following types of
dialog box (i.e. shown here for Fair's model):
Figure : 10.2.2 - 1 Storage Parameters dialog for Constant Storage (top)

and Different Storage per Flow Period (bottom)
The upper dialog box applies constant parameter values to the entire test. The lower dialog
applies different values of the Wellbore Storage coefficient to each flow period, by means of
a table. This facility is enabled by checking the Allow different skins and storage per flow
period checkbox in the Layer Parameters section (see Section “Flow Models and Model
Parameters”, on page 202). Click on <TABLE> in the Wellbore Storage field of the dialog box
to generate the Edit Skin & Storage Table dialog box for the well. (See Section “Allowing
different skins and storage per flow period”, on page 204).
10. 2. 2. Model
320
Analysis
• Vertical/Horizontal Well Flow Model list: For the reservoir flow models and associated
parameters for vertical and horizontal wells: See Section 7. 6. 5 “Layer Parameters”, on page
196.
Choose a model for the analysis. Users do not need to initialize the model parameters unless
they are going to use Advanced Simulation and have not already initialized them in Dataprep.
• Input/Model Parameters: For any reservoir flow model, it is possible to edit certain key
layer and fluid parameters during analysis, without returning to Dataprep.
Users can also access the current set of “confirmed” reservoir parameters (i.e. the last set of
results confirmed with the Cnf tool). Users would not normally edit these during analysis,
because they are results rather than input, and will be updated as the analysis progresses.
Select the Input/Model Parameters button and the following type of dialog box is generated
(i.e. shown here for the radial homogeneous model):
The Layer Parameters and Fluid Parameters areas contain some of the input data from the
Dataprep section. They can be changed during analysis via this option - for instance, to see the
effect of revising layer thickness.
The Model Parameters area contains the current set of results from analysis (i.e. the last set of
results confirmed with the Cnf tool), constituting the current reservoir description. They are
initially zero. In the normal course of events, they are updated, when desired, by using the Cnf
tool following a line-fit or curve match. There is therefore no need to initialize the Model
10. 2. 2. Model
Parameters before analysis.
They are required as input for the Simulate: Advanced Simulation facility and must be
initialized before a response can be generated (please refer to the next chapter, Simulate).
321
Analysis
• Dual-Porosity Block Type: If the selected reservoir flow model is Dual-porosity (pseudo-
steady-state or transient inter-porosity flow), the Dual-Porosity Block Type button is
enabled. If users select this button, the following dialog box is generated:
Select the matrix block geometry. This choice affects the relationship between the
interporosity flow coefficient λ and the matrix permeability/block height ratio (km / hb2)
derived from the Semi-Log diagnostic plot. (Please refer to the table after Equation 15.1.2 -
XLVI, on page 504 ).
• Boundary Model list: For the boundary models and associated parameters,see Section 7. 6. 6
“Layer Boundaries”, on page 213.
Choose a model for the analysis. Users do not need to initialize the boundary parameters
unless they are going to use Advanced Simulation and have not already initialized them in
Dataprep.
For the 2-cell Compartmentalized boundary model, users need to make an additional
selection via the Two Compartment Analysis Type... button, which is only enabled for this
model.
The following dialog box is generated:

10. 2. 2. Model
322
Analysis
Normally, users should select Drawdown Analysis for flowing periods (production or injection),
and Build-Up Analysis for shut-in periods (build-up/fall-off), but as the Note in the dialog says,
“If the Slider pressure extrapolation correction is applied to a build-up/fall-off test (see Section
10. 2. 4 “Autofit Lines”, on page 323), users should select Drawdown Analysis, because they
have removed the superposition effect of the preceding semi-steady-state flow history and have
made it into an equivalent drawdown/injection”.
The choice made here determines the results that will be obtained from the Cartesian plot, and
the nature of the type-curves that will be available in type-curve analysis.
• Boundary Parameters: This area contains the current set of results from analysis (i.e. the
last set of results confirmed with the Cnf tool), constituting the current boundary description.
They are initially zero. In the normal course of events, they are updated, when desired, by the
Cnf tool following a line-fit or curve match. There is therefore no need to initialize the Model
Parameters before analysis.
They are required as input for the Simulate: Advanced Simulation facility and must be
initialized before a response can be generated (please refer to the following chapter, Simulate
and see Section 7. 6. 6 “Layer Boundaries”, on page 213).
10.2.3. Suggest Model
Description:
This option provides users with the same selection procedures that are available in the
PanWizard for identifying Reservoir Flow and Boundary Models from a Log-Log plot: “Suggest
Models... button:”, on page 50
10.2.4. Autofit Lines

Description:
Autofit lines will automatically fit the most suitable line to the data within a Flow Regime
10. 2. 3. Suggest Model
marked on a plot. To apply the flow regime markers: See Section “FR: Flow Regime Definition”,
on page 335.
What users see:

Once a Flow Regime is defined, a line will be fitted automatically through the data within the
flow regime, and relevant results calculated.
On the Log-Log plot, for example, a zero-slope line will appear in the radial flow regime (k and
S calculated), a unit slope line in the wellbore storage regime (Cs and Cd calculated), a half-slope
line in the fracture linear flow regime (Xf calculated), a half-slope line in the reservoir linear
flow regime (W calculated), and so on.
323
Analysis
Appropriate line-fits will appear when users switch to any other diagnostic plots (radial flow line
on Semi-Log plot, linear flow line on square-root plot, etc.) provided the relevant flow regime
has been identified.
Figure : 10.2.4 - 1 Result of applying Autofit Lines

If users do not want lines to be fitted automatically, switch the option off in the Analysis menu.
10. 2. 4. Autofit Lines
324
Analysis
10.2.5. Pressure Extrapolation
Description:
Use the Pressure Extrapolation to back-out a pressure trend from the welltest data. For example:
- when a global pressure trend induced by interference from injection or producing wells
needs to be removed from the gauge data so that a transient analysis can be performed;
- when it is necessary to correct the gauge pressure for the effects of the flowing history of
the well rather than to use superposition theory to function the time (this is the principle of
the Slider “de-superposition” method (ref. 19)).
What users see:

When this option is selected, the Pressure Extrapolation dialog box is generated (Figure 10.2.5
- 1, “Pressure Extrapolation dialog box,” on page 326).
Type: Select the Type of extrapolation trend to be applied. Users are then required to enter the
Parameter values describing the rate of change of pressure, and in all cases but one, the duration
of the flowing history.
Rate of pressure change: Note that a positive value entered for the rate of pressure change
indicates a trend of pressure decreasing with time.
Users can estimate the trend from a plot (with appropriate time axis) of the data at the tail end of 10. 2. 5. Pressure Extrapolation
the preceding test period if this is available. To obtain this for a gas well test, switch the pressure
transformation option to pressure, (See Section 10. 2. 7 “Pressure Transformation”, on page 327)
otherwise the trend will be measured in m(p)/day, not pressure/day.
325
Analysis
Figure : 10.2.5 - 1 Pressure Extrapolation dialog box
Elapsed time to start of test: The logarithmic, square-root and fourth-root pressure trend
options require this additional input:
The preceding trend is attributed to an assumed single constant rate period - use the “effective
Tp” for a build-up.
Unlike the linear extrapolation, the size of the correction applied to the test data depends on how
long these trends existed before the test period under analysis.
Use: Now specify the purpose of the extrapolation in the Use area - to represent interference
effects from other wells, or rate history effects for the same well.
Examples:
Interference effects: For the example of semi-steady-state interference from injection wells (i.e.
global increase in pressure at a steady rate), use the semi-steady-state (linear extrapolation)
option - pressure proportional to time - and enter a negative parameter value, representing the 10. 2. 5. Pressure Extrapolation
background pressure increase with time. Select the second of the two Use options. The pressure
trend will be subtracted from the welltest data when it is plotted, and the transient test data can be
analyzed in the normal way.
Semi-steady-state production history: For the case of a shut-in test in a well that was producing
in semi-steady-state, the “Slider method” (ref. 19) recommends correcting the build-up data for
the pressure depletion trend, and analyzing the test with an MDH plot of pressure versus log
(elapsed time). In Figure 10.2.5 - 1, “Pressure Extrapolation dialog box,” on page 326, the dialog
box has been set up to analyze a shut-in test for which the flowing pressure had been declining at
2.5 psi/day.
326
Analysis
An extrapolated pressure correction will be added to the welltest data when it is plotted. The
time-function (Tf icon: See Section “Tf: Time Function”, on page 333) should now be set to
No history, to obtain the MDH plot. (Users have accounted for the history by using the Slider
extrapolation.)
If users subsequently analyze a different test period, remember to switch the extrapolation
correction off or change the parameter(s) as appropriate.
10.2.6. Time Transformation
Description:
The Time Transformation option can be used when the layer fluid type is gas or condensate.
Provided a valid table of µ and ct data versus pressure is available (Dataprep: See Section 7. 6. 9
“Fluid Parameters”, on page 222), pseudo-time (refs. 41, 66) can be used instead of real time in
the analysis plots. Pseudo-time should be used in conjunction with pseudo-pressure (see
Pressure Transformation, next item).
What users see:

For gas or condensate fluid types, when users select this option the following dialog box is
generated:
Pseudo-time is defined at the start of Chapter 15B on page 536. “Normal” time refers to real
time.
10.2.7. Pressure Transformation

Description:
The Pressure Transformation option can be used when the layer fluid type is gas or condensate,
or oil (multi-phase).
For closed system boundary models, there is also the option to use the material balance
correction. This provides improved modelling of extended production periods in Quick Match, 10. 2. 6. Time Transformation
Advanced Simulation and Production Forecasting by re-evaluating fluid properties as the
reservoir pressure declines. It is available for oil, gas and condensate Fluid Types.
For gas and condensate, three options are available: pressure, pressure-squared and (provided a
valid table of pseudo-pressure data is available), pseudo-pressure (ref. 1).
For oil (multi-phase), the choice is between pressure and pseudo-pressure.
The pseudo-pressure tables can be generated in Dataprep or imported from an external source
(Dataprep: See Section 7. 6. 9 “Fluid Parameters”, on page 222).
327
Analysis
What users see:
For gas or condensate fluid types, when users select this option the following dialog box is
generated.
Note: for oil (multi-phase) fluid type, there is no pressure-squared option.

Users may switch on the Material Balance Correction for gas, condensate or oil wells in closed
systems, correcting the fluid properties for declining reservoir pressure. If this option is not used,
the initial fluid properties will be used (“constant compressibility).
10.2.8. Non-Darcy Skin Analysis

Description:
The non-Darcy skin analysis facility enables users to estimate the rate-dependent skin
coefficient for turbulent, or non-Darcy, flow by a special analysis technique applicable to multi-
rate oil, gas or condensate welltests.
Three requirements must be fulfilled in order for this option to be enabled:
- the reservoir model must be radial homogeneous (vertical well), or any of the horizontal
well models (See Section 10. 2. 2 “Model”, on page 318).
- the plot on the screen must be a radial flow (Semi-Log) plot.
- more than one test period must have been selected for analysis on the Test Overview plot
(See Section 10. 2. 1 “Plot”, on page 316).
If any of the requirements is not the satisfied, a warning message is issued.
With the option invoked, plot all the flowing periods together on the Semi-Log plot. Fit parallel
lines through the flow periods. Each line will provide a total skin factor (S + DQj) for each of the
flowing periods (Qj). These test periods can be all flowing or all shut-in. The analysis must be
10. 2. 8. Non-Darcy Skin Analysis
performed on the radial flow portion of the data for a vertical well, or on the vertical radial flow
portion for a horizontal well, or the results will be invalid.
Users may, if they prefer, fit independent lines through the flow periods first, then determine their
average slope with the Av tool. Users should then re-fit parallel lines with this slope through each
the data set.
Alternatively, include a good build-up with the selected flow periods, fit a line through the build-
up data to establish a reliable slope, then place this line over one of the flow periods. Then
proceed with parallel lines through the other flow periods. Using the build-up as a reference in
this way is helpful if the flowing period data is of poor quality.
328
Analysis
The following plot (Figure : 10.2.8 - 1), shows a four-rate flow-after-flow test with parallel lines
through the flow periods. Users must fit parallel lines (only one permeability can apply to all
flow periods) in order to be able to proceed to the S versus Q plot. For consistency users should
confirm the permeability (using the Cnf tool) before leaving the radial flow plot.
Figure : 10.2.8 - 1 Non-Darcy Skin Analysis for Several Flowrates on the

Radial Flow Plot
On completion, this leads to a plot of total skin versus flowrate (See Section “Skin versus
Flowrate Plot”, on page 347), from which the Darcy skin factor (S), rate-dependent skin
coefficient (D) and corresponding non-Darcy flow coefficient (F) will be derived.
In addition, a facility to correct the semilog plot for non-Darcy effects will become available (See
Section 10. 2. 9 “Correct for Rate Dependency”, on page 329).
The analysis technique is described in Example 3 in the Examples section of this manual.
10.2.9. Correct for Rate Dependency
10. 2. 9. Correct for Rate Dependency

This option is only enabled if the Non-Darcy Skin Analysis option has been enabled (See Section
10. 2. 8 “Non-Darcy Skin Analysis”, on page 328), and is only available for gas and condensate
welltests.
When a welltest has a non-zero rate-dependent skin coefficient, if the flowing periods are a non-
Darcy skin analysis has been performed (i.e. radial flow plot and S versus Q plot analysis), the
data sets on the Semi-Log plot (typically several test periods from a flow-after-flow or isochronal
test) can be corrected for the effects of non-Darcy turbulent flow, using a specified non-Darcy
flow coefficient (F). This is the principle of the Essis-Thomas plot.
What users see:

When this option is selected, the following dialog box is generated:
329
Analysis
The non-Darcy flow coefficient will default to the current confirmed value (normally derived
from the S versus Q plot). Enter a value if required. Check the Apply rate dependency
correction box, and the data on the Semi-Log plot will be corrected accordingly (Example: See
Section 19. 5 “Flow-After-Flow Transient Analysis”, on page 616).
If the correct F factor has been used, the data for the different flow periods should overlay
(compare the following Figure : 10.2.9 - 1 to Figure : 10.2.8 - 1 in the previous section).
Figure : 10.2.9 - 1 Radial Flow Plot After Correction for Non-Darcy Skin
10.2.10. Export TC
Description:
This option is only enabled on the Log-Log plot.
Use Export TC to save data in dimensionless type-curve format. This would normally only be of
interest if users have generated the data using Simulate Advanced (see Chapter 14, “Advanced
Simulation”, on page 470) and want to store the results in dimensionless form for future type-
curve matching against real data (See Section 14. 4. 2 “Creating Type-Curves”, on page 487).
The User selected type-curve option on the Select Type-Curve dialog box allows users to load
their own type-curves (See Section “Match: type-curve match”, on page 367).
The facility could also be used as a means of comparing one data set (saved in dimensionless
form) with others.
The form of type-curve that can be saved depends on the reservoir flow model selected (see
Section 10. 2. 2 “Model”, on page 318). Different reservoir flow models require different
definitions of the Td function, and the files are given different file extensions to distinguish them.
(See Section 16 “File Structures”, on page 565).
10. 2. 10. Export TC
What users see:

When users select this option, the following type of dialog box is generated (illustrated here for
the radial homogeneous reservoir flow model):
330
Analysis
A selection of file name extensions will be displayed, depending on the reservoir flow model.
Each extension corresponds to a different dimensionless time-axis formulation: See Section 16.
1 “Type-Curve File”, on page 565. In the current example, the .TCH extension corresponds to
the “wellbore storage analysis” format: Pd versus Td/Cd; and .TCB to the “bounded reservoir
analysis” format: Pd versus Td/Ld2.
The .TCB format is available for all models, any others are model-specific.
TCX is the special Pd versus Td format used by Advanced Simulation. It is only available for the
radial homogeneous flow model. This enables users to generate their own Pd versus Td functions
and use them for response simulation (See Section 14. 4. 2 “Creating Type-Curves”, on page
487).
In Chapter 16 on File Structures users will also find a description of the file format for user-
supplied type-curves from outside PanSystem.
When users select the appropriate curve type, then select OK a File Save As... dialog box is
generated:
Depending on the curve type, users may be prompted to enter a parameter value needed in the
computation of the dimensionless times. For the bounded reservoir .TCB type-curve, this will be
the distance to the nearest boundary (L) needed for Td/Ld2:
Users may also be prompted for a curve label (to identify the type-curve during matching). Enter
10. 2. 10. Export TC
up to 15 alpha-numeric characters (or leave blank):
331
Analysis
10.3. Toolbar Options
The Analysis toolbar is modified to reflect the plot that is being worked on; the tool icons can be
split into 8 main groups:
• Standard tools
• Plot tools
• Line-fitting tools
• Curve-fitting tools
• General tool for all diagnostic plots except the type-curve plot
• General tool for the Log-Log plot
• General tool for all diagnostic plots except Log-Log plot and type-curve
• Tools available only for gas or condensate welltest data.
10.3.1. Standard Tools
Description:
The standard tools are those that always appear in the toolbar regardless of which diagnostic plot
is being considered. They are shown in the following diagram. When the Test Overview plot is
displayed the last four options do not appear (i.e. Tf to LR buttons).
The options are described in detail in the following section.
Zoom In
Description:
Use the Zoom in option to magnify a particular section of a plot so that it fills the whole display
area.
Select one corner of the area to be magnified by clicking on left button. Keep the mouse button
depressed and drag the cursor to define the zoom area (solid rectangle). Then click the Zoom In
button. This operation can be repeated to further magnify a part of the zoomed area.
If no area is defined, the Zoom in icon has no effect.
Zoom Normal
Description:
10. 3. Toolbar Options
Use the Zoom Normal option to restore the plot to its original size after one or several Zoom Ins.
(Multiple Zoom Ins are cancelled by a single click on this button.)
Bin: Delete
Description:
Use this option to delete a line fitted to a plot or to delete point markers. Users cannot delete data
points in Analysis.
Deleting lines: Select the line by holding down the Ctrl key or the right mouse button and
clicking on the line. Then click the Delete button.
332
Analysis
Deleting a point marker: Select the marked point with the mouse (it will become highlighted),
then click on the Delete button.
To delete a data point users must go to Dataprep Gauge Data and delete the point on the Data
Edit plot (as explained in the Dataprep section).
Tf: Time Function

Description:
The Tf icon is enabled on the diagnostic and type-curve plots for constant rate tests that have a
flowrate history (i.e. everything but the first (constant rate) drawdown in a test sequence), or
varying rate tests set up with a column of varying flowrate data. The option is disabled on the
Test Overview plot.
Use this option to invoke the various time functions that can be applied to a plot. These functions
take into account the effects of the flowrate history of the welltest and any rate variations during
the test.
What users see:
When users select this button, the following type of dialog box is generated (shown here for a
build-up test with a multiple rate history):
Figure : 10.3.1 - 1 Time Function Menu for a Build-Up or Fall-Off Test

• No history - ignore history altogether, plot using elapsed time.
• Use constant rate history - an approximation in the case of multiple rate history. In the case
of a build-up or fall-off test, the last rate before shut-in is used with an “effective” producing
time:
Tp(eff) = Total volume produced ÷ last rate before shut-in.
• Use full history - theoretically rigorous generalized superposition function for any multiple
rate history.
• Use Horner - for build-up tests, the options using history can be formulated as “Horner” or
not. Although the true Horner time function applies to build-ups or fall-offs following a
10. 3. 1. Standard Tools
single constant rate flow or injection period, the term is used here more generally to denote a
particular formulation of the superposition function for multi-rate tests (See Section 15
“Equations”, on page 492). The “not-Horner” mode corresponds to the Agarwal formulation
of an equivalent drawdown time.
In the simple case of a radial flow plot for a build-up or fall-off test preceded by a single constant
rate period, the “No history” option produces a conventional MDH plot (refs. 2, 3), the “Use
history” option produces a plot of pressure versus equivalent time (as defined by Agarwal, ref.
4), and the “Use history + Horner” option produces a Horner plot (refs. 2, 3). Corresponding,
but more complex, superposition functions are computed for build-up tests with multiple-rate
histories (See Section 15 “Equations”, on page 492).
333
Analysis
• Use varying rate during test - This option is available when the flowrate varies during the
test period itself, and the gauge data includes a column of varying flowrate data which users
have selected as the “Master” flowrate column in Dataprep (See Section 6. 3 “Selecting
Master Data For Analysis”, on page 155).
For the first drawdown period, where there is no history, this simplified dialog box will
be generated:
Figure : 10.3.1 - 2 Time Function Menu for the First Flowing Period (with
varying rate)
For subsequent drawdowns, it is implicit in the Use full history option.
The option modifies the superposition function to include the effect of any rate variations during
the test. Un-checking it (i.e. off) will cause the superposition function to ignore rate variations
during the test and assume a constant surface rate read from the Rate Changes table (or, if the test
period consists of several rate changes, it will use the last rate value entered in the table for that
test period).
To illustrate, in the case of a build-up or drawdown test with a constant surface rate, but with
downhole flowmeter data available and selected as the “Master rate column”, leaving the option
checked (i.e. on), would tend to correct out the wellbore storage (after-flow) effects by using the
flowmeter data. Un-checking it (i.e. off), would leave the storage effects in because the nominal
constant surface rate would be used.
• Reference back to initial pressure - This further option is available for flowing periods
other than the very first one:
Figure : 10.3.1 - 3 Time Function Menu for Flowing Periods Other Than
the Very First One
This is only enabled when Use full history has been selected, and is Un-checked (i.e. off) by
default.
Normally, the default “full history” generalized superposition function, and the y-axis plot
values, are computed relative to the T0, P0, Q0 values in the Rate Changes table at the start of the
test period being analyzed (refer to the following Figure : 10.3.1 - 4, and see Section 15. 1. 2
“Semi-Log Plot”, on page 493 for equations). The Reference back... option will reference the
superposition function and y-axis values back to the very start of the rate history - the T0, P0, Q0
at the first entry in the Rate Changes table (where P0 = pi, Q0 = 0). It requires that pi be known
accurately, as this affects the y-axis plot values.
334
Analysis
The next Figure shows the Dataprep Rate Change Table for the example file TESTC.PAN. The
default and “reference back to Pi” T0, P0, Q0 positions are indicated for an analysis of the last
flowing period. The Initial Pressure “pi” has also been highlighted.
Figure : 10.3.1 - 4 Rate Change Table for a Multi-Rate Test Showing the
Default and “Referenced Back to Pi” Values of T0, P0, Q0 for the Last
Flowing Period.
This replicates the more familiar form of variable rate superposition function (described in
Chapter 4 of ref. 6, Earlougher), and is the same as the “VRD” superposition that was used in
PanSystem V-1.8.
The disadvantage of the Reference back to initial pressure approach is that pi is often not known
accurately (the start of a DST is often messy). The attraction of not referencing back... is that the
superposition plots use the pressure(s) at the start of the selected test period(s), not pi. These are
more likely to be known accurately.
The results from the two approaches should be the close (provided pi is good) since both are
derived from theory - the plots just look different.
This option is particularly useful for multi-rate gas welltest analysis, where the use of the default
generalized superposition in previous versions caused some confusion regarding Non-Darcy skin
analysis and the S versus Q plot.
FR: Flow Regime Definition

Description:
The FR tool is an optional facility which allows users to identify and mark flow regimes on a
diagnostic plot, based on an inspection of the data. This would normally be done using the Log-
Log plot derivatives, but the facility is available on all of the diagnostic plots. The types of flow
regimes available vary with the reservoir flow and boundary models chosen (See Section 10. 2. 2
“Model”, on page 318).
Once assigned, the markers are carried through from plot to plot to facilitate line fitting to the
correct portions of data.
The flow regime limits are not attached to data points, but are defined in terms of time axis
values. The algorithm for transforming the marker times from one time axis function to another
(e.g. if users switch from a logarithmic to a square-root superposition plot), has been
significantly improved from V-2.3 onwards, and re-adjustment of the marker positions between
different plots should no longer be required.
335
Analysis
What users see:
When users select this button, a vertical dashed line appears on the screen. Drag this line to the
start of an identifiable flow regime and click the mouse - this line is then fixed. A second dashed
line now appears. Position this line at the end of the flow regime and click the mouse.
A dialog box similar to the following one is generated (shown here for the radial homogeneous
model, infinite acting, where there can be only two valid regimes).
Select the appropriate flow regime, then select OK. A colored bar now appears in the ruler bar
between the dotted lines. The color depends on the flow regime selected (e.g. red for wellbore
storage, green for radial flow). Users will now find the same dashed lines and colored bars in the
appropriate positions on all of the other diagnostic plots.
To move: Users can shift the limits of a flow regime at any time by clicking in either of the small
arrows at each end of the colored bar and dragging.
To delete: If users double-click in the colored bar itself, a dialog box similar to the following one
is generated. This displays the flow regime’s identification. If desired, users can Delete the flow
regime marker.
To fit a line: If users click once in the colored bar, then click the line fit button, a line will be
least-squares fitted through the data points within that flow regime.
Cnf: Confirm Plot Results to Reservoir Description

Description:
The Cnf icon allows the reservoir description to be built-up and continually revised as the
analysis proceeds.
When users “confirm” the results derived by fitting lines or matching curves to the data on a plot,
these values are written to a permanent record in the reservoir description - permanent, that is,
until users choose to update them with a subsequent confirmation (Cnf).
The confirmed parameter set can be accessed at any time via the Analysis menu Model option
(See Section 10. 2. 2 “Model”, on page 318), or in Dataprep Layer Parameters (See Section 7.
6. 5 “Layer Parameters”, on page 196).
336
Analysis
TØ: Change TO or PO (Start of Test)
Description:
Use the TØ button to change the start time and/or start pressure of the test period selected for
analysis. This would normally only be used if it was felt necessary to fine-tune the start values
declared in the Rate Changes table of Dataprep Gauge data (see Dataprep section), so as to
produce, for instance, a better unit slope on the Log-Log plot.
If users alter T0 or P0, the original start values in the Rate Changes table (Dataprep) will be
overwritten by the new values.
What users see:

When this button is selected, the following dialog box is generated, with the current T0, P0
values. Enter new values if required.
LR: Display Details of Selected Line
Description:
The LR option displays details of the position of a selected line on a plot. Hold down the Ctrl key
or right mouse button and click on the line to select it, then click LR.
In addition to slope, intercept at x = 0, and line-fit details, other parameters may be displayed
depending on the plot and flow model (such as the y-axis value at ∆t = 1 hr). No interpretation
results are displayed - these all appear in the Model Results box on the plot.
If the “free model” option is used when a line is fitted, the LR screen will include some reference
results (k, S, etc.) computed as if for the infinite-acting radial homogeneous flow model.
What users see:

When this option is selected, a dialog box similar to the following is generated - shown first for
a line fitted through the radial flow portion of the data on a Semi-Log plot (line position details
only)....
337
Analysis
Figure : 10.3.1 - 5 Line Results for a Radial Flow Line on the Radial Flow
Plot.
.... then for a line fitted through the same portion of the data but as a “free model” line (line
position details plus reference interpretation):
Figure : 10.3.1 - 6 Line Results for a “Free Model” Line on the Radial
Flow Plot.
10.3.2. Plot Tools

The Plot tools consist of the Test Overview plot button , which displays the entire test or
sequence of tests in the file,
the tile button , the Auto Match Point Selection button , and various diagnostic plot
buttons:
10. 3. 2. Plot Tools
When a diagnostic plot has been selected, a new set of buttons - the line fitting tools - appear.
These tools are the same for all sub-plots, except the Log-Log plot and type-curve plot. The Log-
Log and type-curve plots each have their own set of curve fitting tools. These tools are described
in the Line Fitting and Curve fitting sections presented later in this chapter.
Before selecting a diagnostic plot button, users must select the test period they wish to analyze,
in the ruler bar of the Test Overview plot. Several test periods can be selected at once.
338
Analysis
Validity checks are performed on the selected test period(s) before users can enter a diagnostic
plot. Refer to Section 10. 2. 1 “Plot”, on page 316 if the following type of error message is
encountered:
The plot options are described in detail in the following sections.
Test Overview Plot

This option plots the entire record of pressure and flowrate against time so users can select
the test or tests they wish to analyze. It is equivalent to the Plot option on the main Analysis
menu.
Test period selection:
Before selecting a diagnostic plot button, users must select the test period they wish to analyze by
clicking (once) in the ruler bar above the Test Overview plot. Click it again to de-select.
Users can select more than one test period for simultaneous analysis by holding down the Ctrl
key and clicking on test periods in the ruler bar (or click with the right mouse button). Thus
multiple flowing and/or shut-in periods can be analysed together.
If, during or after analysis of a selected test or tests, users want to work on other test periods, they
should return to the Test Overview to make a new selection.
Marking events: Users may also wish to take the opportunity to affix numbered and annotated
event markers to selected data points while operating in this plot (See Section 3 “Edit Menu
Options”, on page 66).
Note: that users cannot edit data or test periods on this plot - they must return to Dataprep Gauge
data to do this.
No analysis can be performed on the Test Overview plot. However, the Simulate menu options
Quick Match and Auto Match can be used to history match the whole test (See Section 11
“Simulate”, on page 375). The Test Overview is the only plot that allows for regression on the
initial pressure Pi.
339
Analysis
Cartesian Plot
This option produces a plot of pressure versus elapsed time for the test period or periods
users have selected from the Test Overview plot.
Results derived from line fitting:

Model Line position Calculated results
all models early storage-dominated - wellbore storage coefficient Cs
data (unit slope on log- - dimensionless storage coefficient Cd
log plot) - wellbore volume V (gas wells)
boundary model = late data in semi-steady- - drainage area A
state flow regime - reserves volume Voil or Vgas
closed system (flowing period only) - Dietz shape factor Ca
(flowing period only)
boundary model = late data in semi-steady- - drainage area A (inner compartment)
state flow regime for first - Dietz shape factor Ca
2-compartment compartment (flowing - connected pore volume* V1= φhA
period, or build-up with (inner compartment)
Slider extrapolation)
late data in semi-steady - connected pore volume* V2 (outer
state flow regime for compartment)
second compartment - total connected pore volume* V1+V2
(flowing period, or build- - effective transmissibility Teff (from
up with Slider intersection)
extrapolation)
late data in semi-steady - connected pore volume* V2 (outer
state flow regime for first compartment)
compartment (build-up - total connected pore volume* V1+V2
test only, without Slider
extrapolation)
*Note that the volumes V1 and V2 are total connected pore volumes at reservoir conditions, not hydrocarbon
volumes.
Semi-Log: Radial Flow Plot

This option displays the selected test period(s) as a plot of pressure against the log10 of time.
Rate-normalised pressure and a logarithmic superposition function may also be used, depending
on the nature of the test and the time function users have selected with the Tf button (See Section
“Tf: Time Function”, on page 333).
340
Analysis
Results derived from line fitting to the radial flow portion(s):
For vertical wells:
radial homogeneous radial flow portion - radial permeability k (vertical well)
- true Darcy skin factor S
- initial pressure Pi (extrapolated P* or
calculated Pcalc)
boundary model = radial flow portion - avg reservoir pressure (MBH)
(assumes semi-steady-state drawdown)
closed system
boundary model = - radial permeability k
single or intersecting - true Darcy skin factor S
single fault or two fault radial flow - distance to boundary (from
intersecting at 900 intersection)
- initial pressure Pi (extrapolated or
calculated)
vertical fracture late pseudo-radial flow - radial permeability k
- pseudo-radial skin factor Spr
calculated)
dual-porosity early fracture system - no calculation
radial flow
total system radial - radial permeability k (for fracture
flow system)
calculated)
transition period - storativity ratio ω (from separation
from early fracture system line)
- interporosity flow coefficient λ (from
intersection with total system line)
dual-permeability early radial flow (first - radial permeability k (layer 1)
layer) - true Darcy skin factor S
calculated)
total system radial - interporosity flow coefficient λ (from
flow (both layers) intersection with early radial flow line)
- permeability-thickness ratio κ (from ratio of
slopes)
radial composite inner region radial - radial permeability k (inner region)
flow - true Darcy skin factor S
continued on next page
341
Analysis
outer region radial - radial permeability k (outer region)
flow - pseudo-radial skin factor Spr (outer
region)
- outer/inner mobility ratio M (from
ratio of slopes))
calculated)
- radial distance to discontinuity (Lrad) (from
intersection of the two lines)
partial penetration radial flow at - radial permeability k (from h(perf))
perforations - true Darcy skin factor S
(incl. gas
cap/aquifer)
full thickness radial - radial permeability k (from h)
flow - pseudo-radial skin Spr (includes
convergence)
calculated)
For horizontal wells:
radial homogeneous early vertical radial - avg vertical radial permeability
flow k(bar)
or dual-porosity - true Darcy skin factor S
hemi-radial flow - k(bar)
late horizontal radial - radial permeability k
flow - pseudo-radial skin factor Spr
(includes convergence, etc.)
- vertical permeability kz (from k(bar))
boundary model = single or intersecting - radial permeability k
fault radial flow - pseudo-radial skin factor Spr
single fault or two - distance to boundary (from
intersecting at 900 intersection with late radial flow line)
- initial pressure P* (extrapolated) or
Pi (calculated)
The radial flow line is also used to estimate the initial layer pressure Pi at the start of the rate
history, assuming an infinite reservoir. With history and Use Horner switched on (See Section
“Tf: Time Function”, on page 333), the line will be extrapolated to P* (at superposition function
= 1.0). With Use Horner off, the initial pressure will be calculated by backwards superposition,
and is displayed as Pcalc.
For the special treatment of turbulent flow (non-Darcy skin) effects in oil, gas and condensate
wells: See Section “Skin versus Flowrate Plot”, on page 347 in this chapter, and Example 3: See
Section 19 “Gas Well DST and Deliverability Analysis”, on page 611.
342
Analysis
Square-Root: Linear Flow Plot
This option displays the selected test period(s) as a plot of pressure against the square-root
of time. Rate-normalized pressure and a square-root superposition function may also be used,
depending on the nature of the test and the time function users have selected with the Tf button
(See Section “Tf: Time Function”, on page 333).
Results derived from line fitting to the linear flow portion:

For vertical wells:
vertical fracture fracture linear flow - fracture half-length Xf
- initial pressure P* (extrapolated)
- fracture face skin Sf (infinite
conductivity and uniform flux
fractures)
or
- dimensionless fracture conductivity
Fcd (finite conductivity fracture)
boundary model = reservoir linear flow - channel width W
parallel faults - distance to nearest boundary L1
- convergence skin Sc
boundary model = hemi-linear flow - channel width W
U-shaped faults
all models linear flow through layer - effective well length Lw and
convergence skin Sconv (normal option)
or/
- horizontal permeability k and true skin
factor S #
- initial pressure P* (extrapolated) or Pi
(calc)
boundary model = reservoir linear flow - channel width W
parallel faults - distance to nearest boundary L1
- convergence skin Sc
boundary model = hemi-linear flow - channel width W
U-shaped faults
# For the true skin factor (S) calculation option, if (Lw) and (Kz) are known, users should change
the default setting in the Pansys30.ini folder by opening the Windows Registry Editor (i.e. via
Start/Run/Regedit commands in Windows), then selecting HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/

EPS/Pansys30.ini/Configuration and setting HLLC_K_L = 1
Fourth Root: Bi-Linear Flow Plot

This option displays the selected test period(s) as a plot of pressure against the fourth-root
of time. Rate-normalized pressure and a fourth-root superposition function may also be used,
343
Analysis
Results derived from line fitting to the bi-linear flow portion:
For vertical wells:
finite conductivity fracture bi-linear flow - fracture conductivity kfw and
vertical fracture dimensionless
fracture conductivity Fcd
- initial pressure P* (extrapolated)
time to end of bi-linear - fracture half-length Xf
flow on line - fracture conductivity kfw and
dimensionless
fracture conductivity Fcd
If not already established (e.g. from the square-root plot), the fracture half-length Xf can be
estimated by marking a data point at the end of the straight line through the bi-linear flow portion
(See Section “Time Mark”, on page 373).
Spherical Flow Plot
This option displays the selected test period(s) as a plot of pressure against 1/square-root of
time. Rate-normalized pressure and a 1/square-root superposition function may also be used,
Results derived from line fitting to the spherical flow portion:
For vertical wells:
partial penetration spherical flow - vertical permeability kz
(incl. gas cap/aquifer)
Log-Log Plot
This option displays the selected test period(s) as a plot of log10 delta-pressure and its
derivative against log10 of elapsed time. Rate-normalized delta-pressure and a logarithmic
superposition function may be used, depending on the time function users have selected with the
Tf button. (See Section “Tf: Time Function”, on page 333).
The Use Horner option available from the Tf tool has no effect on this plot.
Line fitting: On this plot it is possible to fit lines of specified slopes, corresponding to the
theoretical behaviour of the pressure derivative in different flow regimes. For the slope selection
buttons: See Section 10. 3. 3 “Line Fitting Tools: Log-Log Plot”, on page 362.
The main objective is to identify flow regimes from the derivative. However, in certain cases,
results are calculated from the position of a line.
344
Analysis
For vertical and horizontal wells:
(unit slope)
wellbore storage early storage-dominated - wellbore storage coefficient Cs
data - dimensionless storage coefficient Cd
- wellbore volume V (gas wells)
(zero slope)
radial homogeneous or early vertical radial flow - avg vertical radial permeability k(bar)
dual-porosity - true Darcy skin factor S
hemi-radial flow - avg vertical radial permeability k(bar)
late horizontal radial - radial permeability k
flow - pseudo-radial skin factor Spr
boundary model = single or intersecting - radial permeability k
single fault or two fault radial flow - pseudo-radial skin factor Spr
intersecting at 900
For vertical wells:
(zero slope)
radial homogeneous radial flow portion - radial permeability k
boundary model = single or intersecting fault - radial permeability k
single fault or two radial flow
intersecting at 900
vertical fracture late pseudo-radial flow - radial permeability k
dual porosity fracture system radial flow - no calculation
system radial flow - radial permeability k (of fracture
system)
- interporosity flow coefficient λ* (see
below)
transition to system radial - storativity ratio ω** (see below)
flow
dual permeability radial flow (first layer) - radial permeability k of first layer
total system radial flow - kh ratio (Κ), if radial flow line has been
(both layers) set
continued on next page
345
Analysis
radial composite inner region radial flow - radial permeability k (inner region)
outer region radial flow - outer/inner mobility ratio M if inner
region line has been set
partial penetration radial flow at perforations - radial permeability kp (from h(perf))
(incl. gas cap/aquifer)
full thickness radial flow - radial permeability k (from h)
*Inter-porosity flow coefficient, λ: Position a zero-slope line for system radial flow, and define
transition to system radial flow regime (FR button). λ is computed from the time at the end of the
flow regime.
**Storativity ratio, ω: Position a zero-slope line for system radial flow, and define transition to
system radial flow regime (FR button). A new zero-slope line will appear through the minimum
of the data within this flow regime. ω is calculated from the relative positions of the two lines.
Move the line if desired. Alternatively, do not fit the flow regime, but select the zero-slope line
for transition... and position it at the bottom of the derivative trough.
Types of derivative: In addition to the conventional log-based derivative (refs 30,34), users can
display derivatives based on other functions of time via the T’ button. This can be useful in
identifying reservoir flow regimes other than radial. The derivative types available are: linear
time-base for pseudo-steady state flow, square-root time-base for linear flow, fourth-root time-
base for bilinear flow. See Section “Derivative selection”, on page 372.
Derivative smoothing: The T’ button allows users to smooth each derivative (See Section
“Derivative selection”, on page 372).
Marking flow regimes: Having identified flow regimes, users may (optionally) mark them
using the FR button: See Section “FR: Flow Regime Definition”, on page 335. These markers
will be carried through from plot to plot to aid in line-fitting.
Type-Curve Plot
This option displays one selected test period as a plot of log10 delta-pressure and its
derivative against log10 of elapsed time. Rate-normalized delta-pressure and a logarithmic
superposition function may be used, depending on the nature of the test and the time function
users have selected with the Tf button (see Section “Tf: Time Function”, on page 333). 10. 3. 2. Plot Tools
346
Analysis
Sets of type-curves are supplied with PanSystem for all flow models and a number of boundary
configurations. For each model, there is a “default” set of curves, and for some models there are
additional curve sets which may be accessed via a User-selected type-curve option. The full list
of available type-curve files can be found in Section 16 “File Structures”, on page 565 .
Model Curve set Comments
Radial homogeneous RADHOMOG - Medium range Cde2S
RADHI - High range Cde2S
RADLO - Low range Cde2S
Radial composite TIGHTIN - M(inner) < M(outer) ω=1
TIGHTOUT - M(inner) > M(outer) ω=1
GASDRIVE - Inner region gas, outer
region liquid ω=0.01
Partial penetration MPARTPEN - Perfs in middle
TPARTPEN - Perfs at top (or bottom)
Gas cap/aquifer TGASCAP - Perfs at bottom (gas cap) or top
(aquifer)
MGASCAP - Perfs in middle
Slug test SLUG - Range of Cde2S
+ large selection - Individual curves
Boundaries FAULTS - Default set
+ large selection - variety of boundary
geometries
The table shows only those models which have a choice of supplied type-curves available
through the User-selected type-curve option. The default curve set name is in bold text. All other
models automatically pick up a default curve set.
Users may also use their own type-curves via the User- selected type-curve option. These can be
generated in PanSystem (see Section 10. 2. 10 “Export TC”, on page 330) or created externally,
provided they are correctly formatted (type-curve files: see Section 16 “File Structures”, on page
565).
For the tools for type-curve analysis: see Section 10. 3. 5 “Curve-Fitting Tools”, on page 367.
Skin versus Flowrate Plot

This button is enabled for oil, gas or condensate if the following conditions are respected:
- vertical well, radial homogeneous reservoir flow model or any horizontal well model
selected (See Section 10. 2. 2 “Model”, on page 318).
- Analysis menu option Non-Darcy Skin Analysis switched on (See Section 10. 2. 8 “Non-
Darcy Skin Analysis”, on page 328).
- a semi-log analysis of at least two test periods at different flowrates has been completed,
so that at least two total skins are available to plot. These test periods can be all flowing or
all shut-in. The analysis must have been performed on the radial flow portion of the data
for a vertical well, or on the vertical radial flow portion for a horizontal well.
347
Analysis
The plot is used to calculate the true Darcy skin factor (S) and true rate-dependent skin
coefficient (D) from estimates of the total skin factor (S + DQ) at two or more flowrates. The
Non-Darcy flow coefficient (F) (derived from D and the permeability k) will also be displayed in
the results box. See Section 19 “Gas Well DST and Deliverability Analysis”, on page 611 for a
worked example.
What users see:

When users select the SvQ button, a plot of Total Skin versus Flow Rate appears. Fit a line
through the points and select the Skin Analysis line definition when the Define Line box appears.
The S versus Q plot takes on two forms, depending on how users performed their radial flow plot
analysis. Both methods are worked through in Example 3: See Section 19 “Gas Well DST and
Deliverability Analysis”, on page 611.
• If users have enabled the Reference back to initial pressure option via the Tf tool (See
Section “Tf: Time Function”, on page 333), the plot axes will be:
x-axis: surface flowrate Qj
y-axis: total skin (S + DQj)
Figure : 10.3.2 - 1 Total Skin versus Flow Rate Plot

• If users did not enable the Reference back to initial pressure option, the plot axes are defined
differently, owing to the nature of the generalized superposition function for the Semi-Log
plot analysis:
x-axis: normalized flowrate: Qnorm
y-axis: normalized total skin: (S + DQnorm)
348
Analysis
The Normalized Flow Rate is defined as:
(TXDWLRQ,
Q 2j − Q 2j −1
Q norm
j =
Q j − Q j −1
where Qj is the flowrate during the flow period in question, and Qj-1 is the flowrate during the
preceding flow period.
Figure : 10.3.2 - 2 Normalized Total Skin versus Normalized Flowrate plot

For a producing well, Qnorm simplifies to:
Qj-1 if users are analyzing the build-up periods of an isochronal test (because Qj = 0)
Qj if users are analyzing the flowing periods of an isochronal test (because Qj-1 = 0)
(Qj + Qj-1) if users are analyzing the flowing periods of a flow-after-flow test (because Qj
and Qj-1 are both non-zero).
For build-ups and isochronal flowing periods, there are no surprises. However, for a flow-after-
flow test, the data will not plot at the expected flowrate value Qj , but at (Qj + Qj-1 ). The
corresponding “normalized” total skin will be equal to (S + D(Qj + Qj-1)) rather than (S + DQj).
These are simply two theoretically valid approaches to the same problem. The S and D derived
from the intercept and slope of the line will be correct by either method.
The disadvantage of the Reference back to initial pressure approach for the Semi-Log plot
analysis (to derive total skins) is that pi is often not known accurately (the start of a DST is often
messy). By not referencing back..., the Semi-Log plot only requires the pressure at the start of
each flow period, not pi. These are likely to be known accurately.
Note: that for condensate wells, the flowrates plotted are the in-situ “wet-stream” or rich gas
rates, not the separator gas rates. If the Multiphase pseudo-pressure method is being used, the
rates are “equivalent” rates. These contain a gas mass fraction correction which is required by the
theory of the method.
349
Analysis
LIT Plot
This option performs the “Laminar-Inertial-Turbulent” analysis of multi-rate test data (refs
1, 20, 32) to derive the Darcy (laminar) and Non-Darcy (turbulent) flow coefficients B and F
(referred to in some references as a and b) in the deliverability relationship:
(TXDWLRQ,,
∆m( p) = m( player ) − m( pwf ) = BQ + FQ 2
The pressure-squared or pressure approximations can be used instead of pseudo-pressure m(p)
(the equation is modified accordingly). See Section 10. 2. 7 “Pressure Transformation”, on page
327.
The LIT button is only enabled if:

- the fluid type is gas or condensate (see Dataprep)
- users have selected at least two flowing periods from the Test Overview plot (See Section
“Test Overview Plot”, on page 339). If users do not have a gauge data recording, but wish
to key in end-point flowing pressures, refer to the notes after the C-and-n Plot section
which follows this one.
Select the LIT button and a dialog box will ask if this is an Isochronal test or a Flow-after-Flow
test. The LIT facility treats the data differently for each of these options, so do not select the
wrong type. A flow-after-flow test is analyzed in Example 3: See Section 19 “Gas Well DST and
Deliverability Analysis”, on page 611.
• Flow-after-Flow test: A flow-after-flow test is a series of extended flowing periods, each of

which should be flowed to stabilization (i.e. to (semi-) steady-state).
This dialog box is generated:
Figure : 10.3.2 - 3 LIT data summary for a flow-after-flow test

The Layer Pressure is read from the reservoir description (Layer Parameters), but can be altered
here.
The Sandface pressures / Wellhead pressures check buttons determine the plot header and
have no influence on the calculations.
350
Analysis
The Duration, Start Pressure and Rate values are read in from the Rate Change table (see
Dataprep section, Rate Changes table). The End Pressures are the final flowing pressures read
from the “Master” Gauge Data pressure column initialized by users in Dataprep (Dataprep
section, Gauge Data option).
Any changes made on this screen will therefore be temporary and will be overwritten by the
original data which is read-in each time users return to the dialog.
Select OK and the LIT plot appears (with just the final flowing pressures plotted):
∆m( p)
x-axis: Q y-axis:
Q
Fit a line through the data points and select Extended Flow in the dialog box that appears:
Figure : 10.3.2 - 4 LIT Plot for a Flow-After-Flow (four-point) Test

The results box will display the Darcy and Non-Darcy flow coefficients B (from the intercept at
Q = 0) and F (from the slope), and the AOF (from “Equation 10.3.2 - II”, on page 350, with pwf
= 14.7 psia).
Note: that for LIT theory to be valid, the flowing periods of a flow-after-flow test should all have
been flowed to stabilization (i.e. steady-state or semi-steady-state).
351
Analysis
• Isochronal test: An isochronal test (ref. 1, 20, 53) consists of a series of transient flowing
periods of equal duration separated by build-ups, with an extended flowing period to
stabilisation, usually at the end. The shut-in periods should all have been allowed to
“stabilize” (isochronal test), or should all be of the same duration as the flowing periods
(modified isochronal test).
The following dialog box appears:
Figure : 10.3.2 - 5 LIT data summary for an isochronal test.

Much of this screen is the same as for the flow-after-flow test (see Figure 10.3.2 - 3, “LIT data
summary for a flow-after-flow test,” on page 350). The extra isochronal features are:
- The right-hand column identifies the selected periods as Drawdown, Build-Up or Extended
drawdown. Check that they have been correctly assigned, edit if necessary. The extended
flowing pressure is treated differently from the others. It is not mandatory for users to
include build-up periods in a test selection on the Test Overview plot.
- If the Extended drawdown available checkbox at top left is checked, the program will
search for the presence of an E flowing period. If the checkbox is unchecked it will not
search.
- The Time into Drawdown area can be left blank, or times can be entered. If blank, the LIT
plot will only use the End pressures. If users enter a time value it will also display the
flowing pressure read from the gauge data at that elapsed time in each drawdown. (Times
entered here should therefore lie between zero and the shortest of the Durations.) This
would ideally produce a series of roughly parallel trends on the plot, the idea being that the
radius of investigation is the same for all drawdowns at a particular time value.
Select OK and the LIT plot appears (shown in Figure : 10.3.2 - 6, with just the end pressures
plotted).
352
Analysis
∆m( p)
x-axis: Q y-axis:
Q
Figure : 10.3.2 - 6 LIT Plot for an Isochronal Test - Line Through

Transient Flowing Points.
∆m(p) for all transient flowing points is calculated relative to the preceding final shut-in pressure
(“start pressure”). ∆m(p) for the extended flow point is calculated relative to the “layer pressure”,
and should plot above the transient data.
Fit a line through the transient data points first, and select Free model line in the dialog box that
is generated. Now fit a parallel line through the extended drawdown point, this time choosing the
Extended Flow line definition. To fit a parallel line exactly through the extended point: See
Section “Fit Line Parallel to Existing Line”, on page 366.
The results box will display the Darcy and Non-Darcy flow coefficients B (from the intercept at
Q = 0) and F (from the slope), and the AOF (from “Equation 10.3.2 - II”, on page 350 with pwf =
14.7 psia).
Figure : 10.3.2 - 7 LIT Plot for an Isochronal Test - Line Through

Extended Flowing Point
353
Analysis
If users enter times in the Times into drawdown area, a set of transient data will be plotted for
each time value. Each set should be in a linear trend, all trends roughly parallel. Fit a line through
each dataset (all defined as Free model). Use the Average slope button to produce a single line
whose slope is the average of the lines that have been fitted. Position this line through the
extended flow point.
To fit the average line exactly through the extended point: See Section “Average Slope of
Several Lines”, on page 367.
Use the Deliverability icon to produce the deliverability and logarithmic AOF plots for the test.
C-and-n Plot
This option applies the simplified “C-and-n” method to the analysis of multiple rate test
data (refs 20, 21), to derive a C-coefficient and an n-exponent describing laminar and turbulent
flow through the empirical deliverability equation:
(TXDWLRQ,,,
Q = C(∆p 2 )
n
where:
(TXDWLRQ,9
∆p 2 = p 2 − pwf
2
The value of p should be the current (avg) layer pressure. There is no pseudo-pressure version of
this relationship - it is only formulated in terms of pressure-squared.
The C+n button is only enabled if:
- the fluid type is gas or condensate (see Dataprep)

- users have selected at least two flowing periods from the Test Overview plot, (See Section
“Test Overview Plot”, on page 339). If users do not have a gauge data recording, but wish
to enter end-point flowing pressures, refer to the notes after this section.
Select the C+n button and a dialog box will ask if this is an Isochronal test or a Flow-after-Flow
test. Like the LIT method, the data are treated differently for each of these options.
The data summary screens and the line-fitting procedures are similar to those for the LIT method,
so please read the preceding section for an explanation of the test types, screen characteristics
and methodology.
354
Analysis
• Flow-after-flow test
Figure : 10.3.2 - 8 C-and-n Method Summary Dialog for a Flow-After-Flow

(four-point) Test
Select OK to generate the plot. The C-and-n plot has:
x-axis: Q y-axis: ∆p2 on logarithmic scales.
Figure : 10.3.2 - 9 C-and-n Plot for a Flow-After-Flow Test

Fit an Extended Flow line through the points. The C-coefficient (from the intercept at Q = 1, n-
exponent (from the slope) and the AOF (from “Equation 10.3.2 - III”, on page 354 and
“Equation 10.3.2 - IV”, on page 354, at pwf = 14.7 psia) will appear in the results box.
If users want to impose a line corresponding to a pre-determined value of n, and make it pass
exactly through a selected point, click on the point, then select the Fit known slope button:
355
Analysis
Figure : 10.3.2 - 10 Imposition of a Pre-determined n-coefficient

This would be mandatory for a single-point test.
• Isochronal test: the data summary screen is similar to that for the LIT method, except that
there is no Times into Drawdown area:
Figure : 10.3.2 - 11 C-and-n method summary screen for an isochronal

test
∆p2 for all transient flowing points is calculated relative to the preceding final shut-in pressure
(“start pressure”).
∆p2for the extended flow point is calculated relative to the “layer pressure”, and should plot
above the transient data.
Fit a Free model line through the transient points, then a parallel Extended Flow line through the
extended flow point. To fit a parallel line exactly through a point: See Section “Fit Line Parallel
to Existing Line”, on page 366.
The C-coefficient (from the intercept at Q = 1), n-exponent (from the slope) and the AOF (from
“Equation 10.3.2 - III”, on page 354 and “Equation 10.3.2 - IV”, on page 354, at pwf = 14.7 psia)
will appear in the results box.
356
Analysis
Figure : 10.3.2 - 12 C-and-n Plot for an Isochronal Test

Use the Deliverability tool to produce the deliverability and logarithmic AOF plots for the test.
“Single-point” and “four-point” tests, etc.

The preceding descriptions for LIT and C+n analysis assume that users have loaded a complete
gauge recording of the entire test sequence. If users only possess the final flowing pressures,
proceed as follows:
1: In Dataprep Gauge Data, enter the end-point flowing pressures and flowrates via the Edit
option on the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog box. Include the initial pressure if
this is available.
Figure : 10.3.2 - 13 Initial Pressure and Final Flowing Pressures of a

Four-Point Test
2: Plot the data on the Data Edit Plot, and pick the rate change events using the “nearest point”
button . This creates the Rate Change table and is faster than manually entering data.
357
Analysis
Figure : 10.3.2 - 14 Rate Change Events for a Four-Point Test

3: Edit the Rate Changes table, and insert the time of the start of the first flowing period, and
initial pressure if not already entered as gauge data. Use the layer pressure if no initial gauge
pressure reading is available.
4: Initialize the necessary layer, well and fluid parameters, including the layer pressure. A
pseudo-pressure table may be required for LIT analysis, but not for C+n.
5: Perform the LIT or C+n analysis in the usual way.
Tile: plot tiling option

Use this option at any time for simultaneous display of the last four plots studied (or fewer
if users have not made four plots). The plots will include any fitted lines, but will not show the
results boxes. Alternatively, users can hold down the Ctrl key and click (or press the right mouse
button), on up to four plot icons from the tool-bar, then click Tile.
The tiled screen cannot be printed directly from PanSystem, but can be pasted to the Windows
Clipboard with the PrtScrn key for inclusion in a word processor or graphics program.
358
Analysis
To return to the screen displayed before tiling, press Esc or click the right mouse button
anywhere in the display.
Auto Match Point Selection

This tool allows users to select a number of points automatically from any of the Analysis
plot types, for use in Auto Match. (See Section 11. 2 “Auto Match”, on page 381.) If users draw
a box on a portion of the plot before selecting the button, they will be in Windowed Point
Selection mode. If users do not draw a box, they will be in Global Point Selection mode.
Users can select points by mixing both methods, and can always select additional points with the
mouse pointer. Generally speaking, the regression will be more effective the more points that are
used. It is particularly important to cover the storage-dominated portion in detail. However, more
points entails slower regression. 20-30 points are usually adequate.
Global Point Selection
This option selects points from the entire dataset. Select the Point Selection button without
drawing a box.
The dialog box (Figure : 10.3.2 - 15), informs users of the total Points on current plot. Type the
number of points required for use in the regression in the Maximum required number of points
field. Around 20 to 30 points are usually adequate for Auto Match, but the number cannot exceed
500. The Points available for selection can be up to 500 (or the number on the current plot if
smaller) minus one point for each entry in the Rate Changes Table prior to the test being analyzed
(this is because Auto Match must include the rate history). If users have a very detailed Rate
Changes Table, they may not be able to pick enough points for Auto Match - in this case users
should simplify their rate history.
Figure : 10.3.2 - 15 Global Point Selection dialog on a Log-Log Plot

Users may choose point spacing on a Logarithmic or Linear basis in the Selection Type area:
- Logarithmic: if the data spans M log cycles of time and users want to select n points, the
selection routine will pick (n/M) points per cycle, spaced logarithmically in time. This
gives a fairly even spacing of points on a Log-Log or Semi-Log plot (See Section 10.3.2 -
16 “Logarithmically Selected Points on a Log-Log Plot”, on page 360), and is the
recommended choice. The first and last points are always picked.
359
Analysis
- Linear: if users select n points, and there are N points in the dataset, the selection routine
will pick every (n/N)th point. The first and last points are always picked. The appearance of
the selected points will depend on how they were sampled during acquisition and
subsequent filtering.
Select the OK button to continue. The plot will then be generated with the selected points
highlighted (Figure 10.3.2 - 16, “Logarithmically Selected Points on a Log-Log Plot,” on page
360).
The points selected by this method are assigned medium weighting for the auto-regression. Users
can change the weighting of individual points or groups of points as explained under Windowed
Point Selection (in the following section).
Figure : 10.3.2 - 16 Logarithmically Selected Points on a Log-Log Plot

Users can de-select a highlighted point by clicking on it. Should users wish to de-select all the
highlighted points, click on the Esc key. The following message will be displayed:
Figure : 10.3.2 - 17 Points De-selection Warning

Note: that this does not delete the points, it merely de-selects them!
Windowed Point Selection
This option allows users to localize the point selection to an area of the plot by drawing a box
before selecting the Point Selection button. This option can be used to select or de-select points
in the box area, or change their weighting.
360
Analysis
Figure : 10.3.2 - 18 Windowed Point Selection dialog box
Select and weight allows users to select a number of points in the box and specify their
Weighting.
The Weighting determines the importance of the points in the auto regression. This is
described in more detail in Section 11. 2 “Auto Match”, on page 381.
Enter the Maximum number of selected points (up to 500), and select OK to proceed.
Figure : 10.3.2 - 19 Ten Points Selected with High Weighting

The points are selected using the linear method described above. They are marked differently
depending on their weight status:
High , Medium and Low .
Re-weight: If users have drawn the box around points which have already been selected (and
weighted), the weighting can be altered by selecting the Re-weight option and clicking on the
Weighting level to be applied.
Users can select and weight a single point, or alter the weighting of a selected point, by clicking
on it while pressing the up (= high) or down (= low) arrow key. For medium weighting, there is
no need to touch the arrow keys.
361
Analysis
10.3.3. Line Fitting Tools: Log-Log Plot
The Log-Log plot has a set of line-fitting tools which enable users to identify flow regimes from
the characteristic slopes of portions of the pressure derivative data. In some cases, a calculation
will be made from the position of the line, and a result displayed.
Figure 10.3.3 - 1, “Log-Log Plot: Fixed Slope Lines and their Significance for the Logarithmic
Time-Based Derivative,” on page 363, gives a general idea of the possibilities for the log-based
derivative. It shows the relationship between the pre-set slopes and the flow regimes and what, if
any, parameters can be derived. In the case of the zero-slope line, this is not a complete list of
models.
If users have already selected a reservoir flow model and/or boundary model (See Section 10. 2.
2 “Model”, on page 318), a Define Line dialog box similar to the following one appears when
users select a line tool button, if that particular line slope corresponds to a valid flow regime.
Otherwise the line is drawn immediately.
This figure shows what is generated for the zero-slope tool if the reservoir flow model were
radial homogeneous and the boundary model single fault. In this case, horizontal portions of the
log-based derivative may correspond to early infinite acting Radial flow, or late Single fault
radial flow. In both cases, k is calculated. No results would be displayed for the non-committal
Free model line.
Users can select an existing line at any time (press the Ctrl key and click on the line, or click with
the right mouse button) and:
10. 3. 3. Line Fitting Tools: Log-Log Plot

- delete it (see Section “Bin: Delete”, on page 332)
- re-position it (drag the grab-handle)
- change its type (see Section “Change Line Type”, on page 372)
Use the Derivative Type tool (see Section “Derivative selection”, on page 372) to display
derivatives other than the conventional log-based one, or to smooth the derivative data.
Use the FR button (see Section “FR: Flow Regime Definition”, on page 335) to mark flow
regimes for reference. Some calculated parameters require the definition of the flow regime
markers in addition to the placement of a line on the Log-Log plot.
362
Analysis
Slope Reservoir Model Boundary Model Line Definition Results

(flow regime) displayed
- Any - Any - Wellbore Storage Cs, Cd
Unit
- Closed system - Closed system PSS flow Area

- Fractured well or - Any - Fracture linear flow Xf
Half
any Horizontal well - Parallel faults - Reservoir linear flow W

- Any - Linear flow through layer Lw
Fractured well (finite - Any - Bilinear flow None
Quarter
conductivity)
Radial homogeneous - Any - Radial flow k, S

- Single fault - Single fault radial flow k, S
Dual porosity - Perp faults - Perp fault radial flow k
Zero
- Any (Early) Fracture radial flow None

(Late) System radial flow k, S, λ*
and others....... (Middle) Transition ω*
Partial penetration - Any Transition to full thickness None

Negative Half
Gas cap/aquifer
Figure : 10.3.3 - 1 Log-Log Plot: Fixed Slope Lines and their Significance
for the Logarithmic Time-Based Derivative
*See Section “Log-Log Plot”, on page 344 for an explanation of how to derive omega (ω) and
lambda (λ).
Horizontal Line
Use this option to fit a line of zero-slope to the derivative curve of the Log-Log plot to

identify flow regimes.
In the case of a logarithmic derivative, this would normally correspond to a radial flow regime.
Figure 10.3.3 - 1, “Log-Log Plot: Fixed Slope Lines and their Significance for the Logarithmic
Time-Based Derivative,” on page 363, shows that for certain flow and boundary models, the
permeability (k) and skin (S) can be calculated from the line position.
For any other derivative type (See Section “Derivative selection”, on page 372), the horizontal
portion of the data corresponds to the following flow regimes:
Derivative type Has zero-slope during.....
Linear time derivative Wellbore storage
Pseudo-steady-state flow
Log time derivative Radial flow
Square-root time derivative Linear flow
Fourth-root time derivative Bi-linear flow
1/(Square-root time derivative) Spherical flow
363
Analysis
See Section “Log-Log Plot”, on page 344 for more information on the Log-Log plot.
Unit Slope Line

Use this option to fit a unit-slope line to the derivative curve of the Log-Log plot to identify
flow regimes.
In the case of a logarithmic derivative, this would normally correspond to wellbore storage (early
data), or to pseudo-steady-state flow (late data, closed system boundary model).
Derivative type Has unit-slope during.....
Log time derivative - Wellbore storage
- Pseudo-steady-state flow
Users can move the line at any time by selecting it (press the Ctrl key and click on the line, or
click with the right mouse button) and dragging the centre grab-handle.
Half Slope Line

Use this option to fit a half-slope line to the derivative curve of the Log-Log plot to identify
flow regimes.
In the case of a logarithmic derivative, this would normally correspond to a linear flow regime in
a vertical fracture (earlyish data), parallel faults boundary model (late data), or linear flow
towards the wellbore (horizontal well).
Derivative type Has half-slope during.....

Log time derivative - Fracture linear flow
- Reservoir linear flow
- Linear flow through layer
(horizontal well)

Quarter Slope Line

Use this option to fit a quarter-slope line to the derivative curve of the Log-Log plot to
identify flow regimes.
In the case of a logarithmic derivative, this would normally correspond to a bi-linear flow regime
in a vertical fracture with finite conductivity.
Derivative type Has quarter-slope during.....

Log time derivative Fracture bi-linear flow
364
Analysis
Negative Half Slope Line
Use this option to fit a negative half-slope line to the derivative curve of the Log-Log plot
to identify flow regimes.
In the case of a logarithmic derivative, this would normally correspond to the spherical flow
regime in a partially penetrated reservoir model (transition from near-well radial flow at the
perforations to full-thickness radial flow with a penetration ratio < 0.1).
Derivative type Has negative half-slope during.....

Log time derivative (Hemi-) Spherical flow
Users can move the line at any time by selecting it (press the Ctrl key and click on the line) and
dragging the centre grab-handle.
Floating Line
Use this option to fit a line of unspecified slope to the derivative curve of the Log-Log plot
to identify flow regimes or trends. This line can assume any gradient and any position on the
plot.
The line is initially displayed with a gradient of 1.0. To alter the slope, grab the extreme left or
right handles with the cursor and drag up or down. To shift the line up or down grab the centre
handle. Users can move the line at any later time by selecting it (press the Ctrl key and click on
the line, or click with the right mouse button) and dragging the centre grab-handle.
No flow regime definition is associated with this line.
10.3.4. Line-Fitting Tools: other plots

When users select the line-fitting tools described in the following sections, a line is drawn on the
plot.
If the selected reservoir flow model and/or boundary model (See Section 10. 2. 2 “Model”, on
10. 3. 4. Line-Fitting Tools: other plots

page 318) are such that a result can be calculated from the line, a Define Line dialog box similar
to the following one appears. Otherwise the line is drawn immediately and no results are
displayed.
The Define Line dialog box illustrated above shows what would appear on a Radial Flow plot if
the reservoir flow model were radial homogeneous and the boundary model single fault.
Straight-line portions of data may correspond to early infinite acting radial flow, or late single
fault radial flow (of double slope).
Select the line type, and the results that can be derived from its slope and/or intercept will be
displayed in the results box. No results are displayed on the plot for the non-committal free
model line. However, users can see a reference set of results (assuming radial flow), by selecting
the LR button.
365
Analysis
Users can select an existing line at any time (press the Ctrl key and click on the line) then:
- delete it (See Section “Bin: Delete”, on page 332)
- move it (drag the grab-handle)
- change its type (See Section “Change Line Type”, on page 372)
- list the line-fit details, including slope and intercept, (See Section “LR: Display Details of
Selected Line”, on page 337).
Line-Fit Option (least squares)
This option will fit a line by least squares regression through a specified range of data. This
can be:
- all the data between two selected points. Pick two points then select the button. It is
important that only two points are selected. (Users can de-select an unwanted point by
clicking on it again.)
- all the data included between two flow regime markers (See Section “FR: Flow Regime
Definition”, on page 335). Select the colored flow regime segment in the ruler bar, then
select the line-fit button.
Define the line type when the Define Line dialog box is generated and the line will be drawn.
Users can move the line and alter its slope at any time by selecting it (press the Ctrl key and click
on the line, or click with the right mouse button) and dragging the grab-handles.
Fit Known Slope

Use this option to fit a line of specified slope to the plot.
When users select this button the following dialog boxis generated:
10. 3. 4. Line-Fitting Tools: other plots

The default line slope will be that of the last line fitted, or 1.0 if none has been fitted. Enter a
value as necessary. Select OK, then define the line type when the Define Line dialog box is
generated and the line will be drawn. It can be moved around using the centre grab-handle.
If users select a single data point before using this tool, the line will be drawn exactly through
that point.
The line can be moved at any time by selecting it (press the Ctrl key and click on the line, or click
with the right mouse button) and dragging the centre grab-handle.
Fit Line Parallel to Existing Line

Use this option to draw a line parallel to an existing line.
Users must first select the existing line by holding down the Ctrl key and clicking it, or clicking
with the right mouse button. The grab-handle(s) will appear. Now select the Parallel Line button.
Define the line type when the Define Line dialog box is generated and the line will be drawn.
Move it to the desired position by dragging the centre grab-handle.
366
Analysis
If users select a single point before using this tool, the line will be drawn exactly through that
point.
Average Slope of Several Lines

Use this option to display a line whose slope is the average of the existing lines drawn on
the plot.
After selecting this button, define the line type if prompted. The lines will disappear and a single
line of average slope will be drawn. Move it to the desired position by dragging the centre grab-
handle.
If users select a single point before using this tool, the line will be drawn exactly through that
point. This is useful for the LIT and C+n plot extended flowing points.
10.3.5. Curve-Fitting Tools

Match: type-curve match
Use this option to display dimensionless type-curves on the type-curve plot (See Section
“Type-Curve Plot”, on page 346). Type-curves are supplied for each reservoir flow model and a
number of boundary configurations. In addition, users can display type-curves they may have
generated within PanSystem, or from some external source (See Section 16 “File Structures”, on
page 565, for the file format).
What users see:

When this option is selected, the button stays “depressed” and the following type of dialog box is
generated:
10. 3. 5. Curve-Fitting Tools
Figure : 10.3.5 - 1 Select Type Curve dialog box

The Type Curve Method area usually contains only one option, although some reservoir models
offer alternative methods of analysis.
367
Analysis
For example, the homogeneous reservoir model - shown in the Figure above - can be analyzed by
the Td/Cd “wellbore storage” type-curve method (refs. 11, 34), or by the McKinley type-curves
(ref. 38).
The Type Curve Starting Stage area lists one or two stages for the main match - depending on
the reservoir model - and a boundary stage.
Each “stage” involves the use of a different set of curves:
- early/middle time analysis (storage, near reservoir). Users would normally start with this
stage, but it is not mandatory. In the “Select Type Curve dialog box”, on page 367, this
corresponds to “radial homogeneous with storage and skin”.
- middle/late time analysis (not present in the example).
- The Boundary stage is for (optional) late time boundary analysis. Users may start with
this stage if they wish.
Select a stage, then either........
......... select OK, in which case the default type-curve set supplied for the reservoir model
will be displayed, or.........
........ check the User-Selected Type-Curves checkbox for the recall of type-curves other
than the default set. Alternative curve sets (covering different ranges or geometries) supplied
for some flow models are listed: See Section “Type-Curve Plot”, on page 346. Users may
generate their own type-curves for inclusion here, either via the type-curve export option (See
Section 10. 2. 10 “Export TC”, on page 330), or from an external source (for the type-curve
file format: See Section 16 “File Structures”, on page 565).
If check this option, the select OK, the following dialog box is generated:
Figure : 10.3.5 - 2 User-Selected Type-Curve Facility

This is a standard File Open dialog box. The Files area lists all the type-curves with the
appropriate extension present in the specified type-curve directory. The file extension pertains to
the reservoir model and the chosen Type-Curve Method. See Section 16 “File Structures”, on
page 565.
In the figure, the extension “.tch” corresponds to the Td/Cd method for the radial homogeneous
model. Three type-curve files are supplied, covering a low, medium and high range of Cde2S
values. (The middle-range file radhomog.tch, is in fact the default set that would be recalled
automatically if the User-Selected... checkbox had not been checked).
368
Analysis
The selected or default type-curves are now displayed on the type-curve analysis plot. Zoom if
necessary. Grab the curves with a left-mouse click and drag them to where a good match is
achieved.
Figure : 10.3.5 - 3 Type-curve matching

If users already have a preferred value for the radial permeability k, they can fix the pressure (y-
axis) match using the Fpar tool (See Section “Fpar: Force a Type-Curve Parameter”, on page
371). In this case the curves can only be moved sideways (i.e. left-right).
When a reasonable match is achieved, select the button again, and the following dialog box
is generated:
PanSystem has attempted to identify the nearest curve to the user’s data, and the curve number is
displayed with its associated identifier. The identifiers are a number or text label: See Section 16
“File Structures”, on page 565. Depending on the data quality and the nature of the response, it
may or may not be the correct curve number.
Type in a better Nearest curve number if necessary - they are always numbered from bottom to
top. (Drag the box to one side by grabbing the title bar if it is in the way.) Users can update the
Curve value by pressing the Tab key (optional) if they want to check the new identifier.
When users select OK, the Match Results box will be displayed, containing the results for that
particular stage.
Having completed a matching stage, users can now proceed to the next stage by selecting
, or return to the start by selecting , or leave the type-curve section by selecting a plot
icon.
369
Analysis
Next Stage of TC Matching
This icon is enabled when users have completed a matching stage (See Section “Match:
type-curve match”, on page 367), if there is another stage to follow. The plot retains the nearest
curve from the previous stage, and brings on the default or user-selected type-curve set for the
next stage.
Grab the curves with the mouse and drag them to where a good match is achieved.
Now select the icon to lock the match. The Verify Selected Nearest Curve dialog box
described in the previous section will appear. Edit as required, select OK and the results obtained
from the stage will be added to the list in the results box.
Previous Stage of TC Matching

This icon is enabled when users have completed a matching stage. It returns users back to
the previous stage, removing all curves and results associated with the later stage.
If users are in the first stage of a match (first set of curves on-screen), they will be returned to the
initial type-curve screen, containing just the gauge pressure and derivative data, described: See
Section “Match: type-curve match”, on page 367. This will enable users to start the match
process again with, for instance, a different selection of type-curves.
Pd: Show or Hide Pd/Derivative Curves

Use this option to display/hide the dimensionless Pd curve or its derivative on the type-
curve plot. It is not possible to hide both curves simultaneously.
What users see:

When this option is selected, the following dialog box is generated. Check the relevant checkbox
on (checked) to display, off (unchecked) to hide.
L: Change Derivative Smoothing Constant

This option allows users to change the derivative smoothing constant (refs. 30, 34) in the
Type-curve match section (See Section “Match: type-curve match”, on page 367). It is only
enabled prior to loading the type-curves (i.e. when the gauge pressure and derivative data are
first displayed).
What users see:
370
Analysis
Enter a value for the smoothing constant. A smaller number = less smoothing. As a guide, 0 is no
smoothing, and, for most purposes, 0.01 is very light smoothing, 0.1 - 0.2 is moderate and 0.5 is
heavy.
For the logarithmic derivative, the default of L = 0.07 represents a smoothing window spanning
a time ∆tj.eL on either side of a data point at time ∆tj. This represents ∼ ±7%, so for a data point
at ∆t = 10 hrs., the window extends from approx. 9.3 hrs. to 10.7 hrs.
The option Plot against elapsed time is only active for build-up (or fall-off) tests. It allows users
to plot the pressure and derivative against log ∆t instead of log equivalent time. The derivative
will still be calculated using equivalent time, but will be plotted against elapsed time. This
display has the effect of eliminating the data compression that sometimes occurs at late time
when plotting with equivalent time, and restores detail.
Fpar: Force a Type-Curve Parameter
This option allows users to impose a fixed value on a parameter (usually the radial
permeability, k) during Stage 1 of a type-curve match. The position of the type-curves will then
be fixed in the vertical direction at the appropriate pressure-match position, allowing movement
in the horizontal x-direction only.
What users see:

When users select this option the following dialog box is generated:
The default value will be the current confirmed value in the reservoir description (See Section
10. 2. 2 “Model”, on page 318), or zero if not yet initialized.
To release the force parameter option;
lock in the current match and go back to the start .
Pext: change extrapolated pressure

This icon is used to enter a new extrapolated pressure p* in the McKinley type-curve match
(one of the choices available for the Radial homogeneous model). The value influences the
computation of the flow efficiency. 10. 3. 5. Curve-Fitting Tools
What users see
The default value will be the current confirmed value of p* (usually obtained from a Horner
buildup plot), or zero if not yet initialized.
371
Analysis
10.3.6. General Tools
Change Line Type
Use this option to change the flow regime definition of an existing line. This may alter the
results belonging to that line (if any).
Select the line by pressing the Ctrl key and clicking on the line, or clicking with the right mouse
button. Then select the Typ button.
A dialog box similar to the following one is generated (illustrated here for a unit slope line on a
Log-Log plot, where the flow model has been set to radial homogenous with a closed system
boundary model).
Select a new line definition.
Derivative selection
Use this option to:
- select/de-select derivative types for display on the Log-Log plot.

- alter the degree of smoothing of a derivative.
What users see:
10. 3. 6. General Tools
Check the derivatives required to be displayed (click again to uncheck).
Enter the Smoothing Constants (refs. 30, 34) for each derivative selected (i.e. smaller number =
less smoothing).
372
Analysis
For the Radial derivative, 0 means no smoothing and, in most cases, 0.01 is very light smoothing,
0.1 is moderate and 0.5 is heavy (refer to “L: Change Derivative Smoothing Constant”, on page
370 for more details). The different derivatives are computed as listed below.
Derivative type Formulation Has zero-slope during.....

SSS (semi-steady-state) dp/d(∆t) - Wellbore storage
“Primary derivative” - Semi-steady-state flow
Radial dp/d(log ∆t) - Radial flow
Linear dp/d (√∆t) - Linear flow
Bi-linear dp/d (4√∆t) - Bi-linear flow
Spherical dp/d (1/√∆t) - Spherical flow
In the case of multi-rate tests, the elapsed time ∆t is replaced by the appropriate equivalent time
superposition function (refer to “Tf: Time Function”, on page 333).
See Section “Horizontal Line”, on page 363, for information on the behaviour of the different
derivative types.
The Plot against elapsed time option is only active for build-up (or fall-off) tests (single or
multiple). It allows users to plot the pressure and derivative against log∆t instead of
log(equivalent time). The derivative is still calculated using equivalent time, but will be plotted
against elapsed time. This display has the effect of eliminating the data compression that
sometimes occurs at late time when plotting with equivalent time (short flowing time/long shut-
in time), and restores detail.
The Remove end-effect option terminates the smoothing when the leading edge of the
smoothing window reaches the end of the data. This truncates the derivative and need only be
enabled if the end of the derivative appears noisy. The larger the smoothing constant L, the more
the derivative will be truncated.
Time Mark
This option is only enabled if the reservoir model is Vertical fracture: finite conductivity and
the bi-linear flow plot is displayed (See Section “Fourth Root: Bi-Linear Flow Plot”, on page
343).
Use this option to mark the point at which the data leaves the straight line (bi-linear flow) trend.
An estimate of the fracture half-length xf will be computed, and the fracture conductivity kfw
(and Fcd) re-computed accordingly.
What users see:
When this option is selected, the cursor changes to a cross-hair. If users then click on a point
within the plot, the following dialog box is generated:
If users select OK, the data-point nearest the cross-hairs is marked with an asterisk and it is
flagged by a T marker directly above it in the ruler bar. A second dialog box is generated:
373
Analysis
xf and Fcd are re-computed differently for each range. Try each one and look for an Fcd
consistent with the range selected (e.g. if Fcd computes as 9.2 for the range 1.6−3.0, it should be
rejected and another range tried).
Only one time mark is allowed. It can be deleted by double-clicking on the T in the ruler bar, then
selecting the Delete button in the dialog box:
374
Simulate
Chapter 11- Simulate
In this and the next chapter users will find information on the options available in the Simulate
menu. The Simulate menu options are available on all diagnostic plots, and the Test Overview
plot. A response generated on any diagnostic plot can be viewed on any other plot without
regenerating it, simply by switching plots.
This Chapter deals with the analytical simulation options:
• Quick Match: on-screen single well/single layer analytical response generation to validate
the model and parameters derived from analysis.
• Auto Match: parameter optimization by non-linear regression to obtain the parameter set that
best matches the plotted test data.
• Advanced Simulation: analytical pressure response generation from flowrates, with more
advanced features than are available in Quick Match (multiple wells, multiple layers, etc.).
The simulated response can be written to file.
• PanFlow Rate Simulation: calculates sandface flowrates from a selected analytical pressure
response. It has the same multi-layer capabilities as Advanced Simulation, but is a single well
model. The simulated layer flowrates can be written to file.
Chapter 12 deals with the numerical simulation option:
• Numerical Simulation: this option opens the PanMesh 3D welltest simulator, if licensed.
11.1. Quick Match
Description:
Use the Simulate Quick Match option to test the correctness of the current reservoir and
boundary models and the derived parameters, by generating the theoretical single well/single
layer pressure response for comparison with the plotted data. The generated data are for display
only, and cannot be written to file.
Users would normally start by using the results from the current plot analysis, but the input
parameters can be modified by trial and error to refine the match. Reservoir and boundary
models can also be changed via the Analysis Model option.
Chapter 11 - Simulate
What users see:

If users have selected any boundary model (see Section 7. 6. 6 “Layer Boundaries”, on page 213
and Section 10. 2. 2 “Model”, on page 318) other than Infinitely acting they will first be
presented with options relating to the boundary geometry.
375
Simulate
Figure : 11.1.0 - 1 U-Shaped Faults Boundary Model Options dialog box

• For the radial homogeneous model, all the orthogonal geometries (i.e. parallel, U-shaped,
closed system and 2-cell compartmentalised) offer the choice of variable well position and
the special case of central well position (i.e. equidistant). These are modelled using Green’s
functions. The Boundary Parameters button opens the appropriate Boundary Model
Parameters dialog box (see Section 7. 6. 6 “Layer Boundaries”, on page 213), where users
can select the no-flow and constant boundary types and specify the boundary distances. Once
the boundary types have been selected, there is no need to re-enter this dialog (unless users
want to change them), because the boundary distances can be entered in the Quick Match
input box which follows.
• The Vertical fracture (infinite conductivity) and Horizontal well models offer a similar
variable well position option, with a choice of boundary types, for the closed system model
only. The closed system boundary model is theoretically rigorous for any distance from the
well.
Note: that the fracture or horizontal wellbore is considered to be oriented parallel to the x-
axis (east-west) for specification of distances L1, L2, L3, L4.
• All other reservoir and boundary models offer a limited selection of geometries based on
look-up tables derived from image wells.
11. 1. Quick Match
For this group of models note that all boundaries are of the no-flow type unless otherwise stated,
regardless of any selection that may have been made in the Boundary Model Parameters dialog
box. The boundary responses computed with these tables are valid only when the welltest has
reached pseudo-radial flow, which means the boundaries should not be positioned “too close” to
the well. Errors may be introduced if the onset of a boundary effect occurs before pseudo-radial
flow is attained. For fractured well models, “too close” means less than about 4xf from the well,
and for a horizontal well it means less than about 2Lw from the mid-point of the well, but the best
option is to check the derivative on the Log-Log plot.
376
Simulate
When users select OK, or if the well is Infinitely acting, the following type of dialog box
appears (shown here for the classic wellbore storage, infinite acting, radial homogeneous
reservoir model for oil, where Cs, k, S and Player are the only relevant parameters):
Figure : 11.1.0 - 2 Quick Match dialog for Uniform Skins and Storage
(left) and Different Skins and Storage for the Respective Time Periods on
a Test Overview Plot (right)
The values in the input area are initially read from the current reservoir description. These will
correspond to the Model Results from the current plot if users selected the Cnf (Confirm results)
icon after fitting the line (see Section “Cnf: Confirm Plot Results to Reservoir Description”, on
page 336).
Users can change the value of any parameter by either typing a new value in the box or by
scrolling the up and down arrow keys to select new options (i.e. where applicable).
For the Test Overview plot, when Allow different skins and storage per test period has been set
in the Layer Parameters section (See Section “Flow Models and Model Parameters”, on page
202), users have the additional option of identifying individual skins and storage coefficients for
the different test periods selected. To edit these click on <TABLE> in the Skin or Wellbore Storage
fields of the dialog box. This will open up the Edit Skin & Storage Table dialog box for the well
and layer in question (“Edit Skin & Storage Table dialog box for a Six Flow Period Gas
Reservoir”, on page 204).
Start and End: these are the start and end (or left and right) values on the plot x-axis (rather than
actual times). They default to the plot scaling but can be altered.
Useful tip: Some models require a lot of computing time. The test period can be covered
more rapidly if users enter a very large value for End, (or Start in the case of Horner-type
superposition) and stop the calculation approximately at the half-way stage.
Replace Previous: To retain the last Quick Match trace, uncheck the Replace Previous
checkbox before running the next one. By performing Quick Match in this manner, up to 5 traces
11. 1. Quick Match
can be accumulated. If the last trace is not to be kept, check the Replace Previous checkbox.
Calculate: To generate the response, select the Calculate button. The following status box is
displayed while the response is being calculated:
377
Simulate
If the calculation is stopped in mid-stream, the part-response will be displayed.
The response is then drawn on the plot, and the plot results box will be updated with the Quick
Match Results. Up to five calculations can be performed, with five plots displayed
simultaneously.
Note: The parameter values can be edited and the response regenerated until a satisfactory match
is achieved. Click and drag the Quick Match input data box (by the title bar) to a different
location if it is in the way. If users attempt to perform more than five calculations and display
plots simultaneously, a warning will be issued to "Delete a History Plot Before Saving Another".
Figure : 11.1.0 - 3 Log-log plot showing gauge data and response

generated by Simulate: Quick Match
After users have exited from the dialog box via OK/Confirm they will be able to remove the
Quick Match traces from the plot by double-clicking on the results box to generate an Edit
Results dialog box, then unchecking the relevant Quick Match trace(s) (see Section 3. 4
“Results”, on page 69). If there are any lines fitted to the plot these results can then be displayed,
rather than the Quick Match results
OK/Confirm: The OK/Confirm button exits the Quick Match facility and writes the parameter
values to the reservoir description (analogous to the Cnf icon for plot analysis).
Cancel: The Cancel button exits the Quick Match facility and clears all traces of the response
11. 1. Quick Match
generation.
If users decide they need to change the reservoir or boundary model, select Cancel, then select
the Analysis Model option from the Plot menu.
378
Simulate
If the rate data being used is a "varying rate", corresponding to a downhole sandface rate
measurement, remember to set the wellbore storage coefficient to zero in the Quick Match input
box. The downhole rate already accounts for Wellbore Storage effects, so it will be applied twice
if a non-zero value for Cs is used. (See also Varying Rate in the Dataprep section of the User
Guide).
In addition to the values corresponding to the Model Results from the current plot (e.g. values for
Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs), Permeability (k), Skin (S), etc.), the Quick Match Results Box
also includes the following:
Initial pressure: Initial pressure Pi (the theoretical pressure at the start of the rate history for the
current model) is calculated by backwards superposition from the start of the selected test period
when Quick Match is run on any of the diagnostic plots. This provides the estimate of initial
layer pressure (users may not have had a gauge in place when the rate history started, or the
initial gauge reading may not be reliable).
Note: this Pi respects the model rigorously, and includes the effect of any boundaries.
When using Quick Match on the Test Overview plot, if users select a test period in the ruler bar
first, Quick Match will simulate the entire test sequence, but the generated pressure record will
be shifted as necessary to pass through the measured pressure at the start of the selected period,
rather than at the start of the history. An estimate of the corresponding Pi will appear in the
results box.
Alternatively, if no test period is selected in the ruler bar, the entire test sequence will be
simulated, starting from the initial pressure entered in the Rate Change Table, or from whatever
has been entered in the Quick Match dialog (i.e. if the values are different). The Pi should be
adjusted until a good overall match is obtained.
Average layer pressure Pavg: For the closed system boundary model, an estimate of the
average layer pressure, Pavg, will appear in the results box. This estimate is preferable to the
MBH calculation, PMBH, from the line fit on the Semi-Log plot because it is valid for:
- Any reservoir flow model.

- Any closed boundary model and well position, including constant pressure boundaries.
- Any deviation of production period.
It is computed by projecting the buildup response forward in time far enough to reach a stable
pressure. 11. 1. Quick Match
379
Simulate
Review Multiple Quick Match Traces
Quick Match allows users to review up to 5 traces on a plot. With multiple traces, the results box
exhibits a tabbed appearance and the active tab is identified with a blue highlight (illustrated
below for the maximum five traces). The original trace (i.e. left-most) tab has no number
assigned and subsequent traces are numbered from 1 up to 4. To activate the editing facility
either double-click on the Quick Match Results box after performing Calculate and selecting
OK/Confirm for each Quick Match:
or alternatively, select Edit Results from the menu bar.
This will generate the Edit Results dialog box:
Figure : 11.1.0 - 4 Edit Results dialog box

Color: controls the color of the results box. Use the drop-down menu to select another color
if required.
Show match: switches the Quick Match Results box and traces on/off. If users performed a
line-fit before Quick Match, the Model Results box (which gets hidden by the Quick Match
Results) will reappear.
Show Results: switches all results (i.e. Model Results, Quick Match Results and traces), on/
off.
11. 1. Quick Match
If the results box has been switched-off (i.e. by unchecking the Show... options described above),
the Results option from the Edit menu can be used to generate the Edit Results dialog box and
reinstate the results box, by re-checking these options.
Delete Quick Match Traces: this area allows users to display or delete Quick Match simulations
on the current plot.
380
Simulate
If users do not want to keep a trace or traces, check the appropriate Delete checkbox(es).
If users try to go beyond 5 traces, they will be prompted with the following message, requesting
that a previously saved plot trace be deleted.
The multiple trace option retains the traces from the current plot and if users switch to another
diagnostic plot (i.e. with the exception of Test Overview), the multiple Quick Match traces will
still be displayed. Multiple traces can also be saved to file using the Save... or Save As...
commands from the File menu. When the file is re-opened, the multiple traces will be displayed
for each diagnostic plot (i.e. with the exception of Test Overview).
If a plot is made via File Print, and Quick Match Results are enabled in Page Setup (see Section
2. 10 “Page Setup”, on page 62), a table summarizing each of the cases will appear beneath the
plot.
If a report is made (See Section 4 “Report Menu Options”, on page 78) and a plot with multiple
traces is included, the results associated with each trace will appear in the report.
11.2. Auto Match

Description:
This option is available on the diagnostic plots on condition that a single test period has been
selected for analysis. Only the Test Overview plot allows an entire sequence of tests to be
matched.
Use Simulate Auto Match for parameter optimization by non-linear regression to obtain the
parameter set that best matches the plotted test data, or a set of points selected from within the
test data. This is the automated equivalent of the manual adjustment of Quick Match input
parameters by trial and error (see Section 11. 1 “Quick Match”, on page 375).
The process is initiated at specified starting values (i.e. tentative analysis results, guesses), and
each parameter is allowed to vary between specified limits during the search for an optimum
solution. Any parameter can be held constant at a fixed value if users do not want it as a variable.
11. 2. Auto Match
The regression seeks to match the test data to within a specified tolerance or "Match Quality"
(based on a least-squares criterion), within a specified number of iterations.
The theoretical pressure response is then generated and displayed using the optimized parameters
for comparison with the plotted data.
381
Simulate
What to do:
Generally speaking, the regression will be more effective the more points that are used. It is
particularly important to cover the storage-dominated portion in detail. However, more points
will entail slower regression. Approximately 20-30 points are usually adequate.
Users may select a subset of points for the auto-regression before entering Auto Match, or after.
To select points beforehand, use the Point Selection icon described in “Auto Match Point
Selection”, on page 359, or select points one at a time using the mouse, as described below under
Manual Method.
Alternatively, select the Auto Match option without first having selected points. A dialog will be
generated that provides three methods for selecting points: Manual, Automatic and Advanced
method.
Figure : 11.2.0 - 1 Auto Match Entered Without Points Being Selected

Manual Method
Select Cancel on the Points Selection dialog. This effectively moves users out of Auto Match
mode, so points can be selected manually with the mouse cursor (i.e. to a maximum of 499). If
users are on the Log-Log plot, select derivative points. The Point Selection tool can also be used
11. 2. Auto Match
(described in the Section “Auto Match Point Selection”, on page 359.)
While picking a point users can assign a confidence weighting factor by clicking on it while
pressing the up (= high) or down (= low) arrow key. For medium weighting, do not use the arrow
keys. This can be based on the quality of the data in different portions of the test (e.g. a noisy
wellbore storage period gets low weighting), or whether users want a particular portion of the
data to be given a stronger influence on the results (high weighting). If there is nothing special
about the data, do not use the arrow keys
382
Simulate
.
Confidence level Arrow key

"High": ± 0.10 psia UP
"Medium": ± 1.0 psia None
"Low": ± 10 psia DOWN
The points will be highlighted with different symbols depending on their weighting:
Figure : 11.2.0 - 2 Low, Medium and High Weighting Symbols

After this weighting process has been completed, select Auto Match again - the Points Selection
dialog will be skipped and the regression can be started.
Press the Esc key if to cancel all point selections and weighting.
Automatic Method
Selecting the OK button on the Points Selection dialog (Figure 11.2.0 - 1, “Auto Match Entered
Without Points Being Selected,” on page 382) will use all the points in the test up to a maximum
of 50. If there are more than 50 points, the data points will be re-sampled logarithmically in time.
Advanced Method
Selecting the Advanced button on the Points Selection dialog (Figure 11.2.0 - 1, “Auto Match
Entered Without Points Being Selected,” on page 382) will generate a Global Point Selection
dialog box. This is the same as the one described in “Auto Match Point Selection”, on page 359
in the context of the Point Selection button.
11. 2. 1. Automatic Matching Process

Enter the Maximum required number of points, choose linear or logarithmic (recommended
for most purposes) selection, then select OK to proceed with the regression.
11.2.1. Automatic Matching Process

After point selection (described in the previous section), the following dialog box will appear:
383
Simulate
Figure : 11.2.1 - 1 Auto Match set-up dialog box

Only the parameters relevant to the reservoir and boundary model are listed (in this case a
horizontal well in a radial homogeneous reservoir, infinite acting).
Start values: The start values are read from the current confirmed reservoir description. These
will correspond to the Model Results from the current diagnostic plot if users selected the Cnf
(Confirm results) button after fitting a line. Edit if necessary.
Variable box: Check this if checkbox if the associated parameter is to be optimized. Uncheck if
it is to be held constant at the specified start value.
Lower and Upper limits: these are set to reasonable values if the default start values are non-
zero. Edit as necessary - do not impose too tight a constraint on any parameter as this may
impede the search process.
Maximum number of iterations: leave this at the default unless the number is to be restricted
or increased (up to a maximum of 999). If the full run of iterations fails to achieve a match within
the specified tolerance, the set of parameters giving the closest match will be accepted (not
necessarily the final iteration).
Match quality: These are qualitative definitions of the tightness of the match tolerance to be

met, Excellent being the closest match criterion. Auto Match stops when the current iteration
produces a match within the specified tolerance. If the full run of iterations fails to achieve this,
the set of parameters giving the closest match will be accepted (not necessarily the final
iteration).
Solution Method: Two methods are available for the Auto Match calculations; Adaptive (refs.
55, 56) and Levenberg-Marquardt (ref. 57).
- Adaptive should achieve the higher quality match of the two methods. However, the
accuracy of this method can be compromized by spurious data such as noise.
The Advanced button generates the following dialog:
384
Simulate
Users would not normally need to alter these settings, but the facility is included for
flexibility.
- Parameter transform uses the logarithm of each variable in the regression. This
generally produces better results and is on by default.
- Parameter rescaling normalises the variables with respect to their upper and lower
limits so they lie in the range 0 to 1.0. This, too, produces better results and is on by
default.
- Levenberg-Marquardt: If the Adaptive option gives a result which is not satisfactory
due to poor data quality, then the Levenberg-Marquardt method should be used as this
method has better noise handling characteristics.
• Edit the dialog box as necessary and click OK to proceed.
While PanSystem works through the iterations it displays the following status dialog to advise
users of progress:
A “ticker” (< >) in the Current Iteration area will appear (and move reassuringly) during slow
iterations. The first iteration may take longer, but subsequent iterations are faster.

The Goodness of match is the root mean square deviation of the pressure for the current
iteration. The regression will stop if this falls within the Match Quality tolerance.
• Select the Stop button to terminate the regression before it has finished normally. Otherwise,
let it run to completion. In either case, the set of parameters that gave the best match will be
displayed.
• The OK and Confidence buttons will then become enabled, and Stop will become Cancel:
Cancel will return users to the plot and clear all traces of the Auto Match.
385
Simulate
• Confidence... will bring up two windows in succession providing statistical information
about the match. First, users are prompted to confirm the pressure gauge resolution:
The confidence data dialogs are then generated:
Figure : 11.2.1 - 2 95% Confidence Intervals for Each Optimized

Parameter.
The true value of each parameter has a 95% probability of lying within the stated confidence
intervals.

Figure : 11.2.1 - 3 Correlation Between Parameters
A correlation coefficient above 0.95 indicates a strong degree of correlation between a pair of
parameters.
• Selecting OK will return users to the Matching Progress dialog box. From here, OK triggers
the response generation. The resulting plot is re-drawn with the test and simulated data
displayed, and a Quick Match input box (see Section 11. 1 “Quick Match”, on page 375).
This enables users to refine the match further - manually - if necessary (edit the parameters
and select Calculate).
386
Simulate
Figure : 11.2.1 - 4 Optimised Parameter Match on a Horner Build-Up Plot

• From here, either:
OK/Confirm to exit the Quick Match facility and write the parameter values to the reservoir
description, or......
Cancel to return to the plot and clear all traces of the response generation.
Initial pressure: When using Auto Match on the Test Overview plot, if users do not click on any
particular test period, the initial pressure will be included as a parameter to be optimized.
11.3. Advanced Simulation

Description:
Advanced Simulation computes wellbore pressure from surface flowrates. It performs the same
function as Quick Match as far as the validation of an interpretation is concerned (see Section 11.
1 “Quick Match”, on page 375), but there are two important differences:
- the model is not restricted to a single-well or single-layer, so multi-layer effects and

interference from other wells can be included
- the characteristics of the pressure gauge (resolution, noise and drift) can be included in the
simulated pressure response (see “Gauge Details”, on page 117).
- the simulated data are not temporary, but are written to new data columns and can be
11. 3. Advanced Simulation
saved to disk in real and dimensionless form for future use. Flowing pressure, total
downhole flowrate and individual layer downhole flowrates are computed for each well
specified.
To introduce the basic mechanics of Advanced Simulation, this section will deal with the same
single-well, single-layer case that was used to explain the Quick Match and Auto Match
facilities.
The full capabilities of the advanced facility are covered in detail in the main Advanced
Simulation section. (See Section 14 “Advanced Simulation”, on page 470.)
The reservoir flow model, and boundary model if to be included, must be fully initialized.
387
Simulate
These can be built up in three ways:
- during the data preparation stage (see Section 7. 6. 5 “Layer Parameters”, on page 196 in
the Dataprep section),
- during analysis of diagnostic plots (see Section “Cnf: Confirm Plot Results to Reservoir
Description”, on page 336),
- during analysis by direct edit of the model parameters (see Section 10. 2. 2 “Model”, on
page 318).
What users see:
When Advanced Simulation is selected, the following dialog box is generated:
Figure : 11.3.0 - 1 Advanced Simulation set-up dialog box

Upper area: In the upper area, users select the name of the input rate data to be used in driving
the response generation, and assign names to the computed pressure and flowrate data to be
output.
All enabled (active) wells are listed. There is only one well in the example.
- Select the name of the Rate Column to be used for the simulation (normally there would
be no choice, but users may have have access to additional data, such as the nominal
surface rates ("Test Rate") and a measured downhole (spinner) rate for a particular
welltest). Repeat this process for each enabled well.
- The Output Datafile Name is picked up automatically when the Rate Column is selected.
The simulated data will be written to this file. 11. 3. Advanced Simulation
- Output Column Names: Advanced Simulation will generate the wellbore pressure with a
default name Sim P. It will also generate the sandface rate from each layer (in or out), and
the total rate (the sum of the sandface rates from all layers). The default names will be Sim
Q Total, Sim Q#1, Sim Q#2, etc. If users want to change them, select the Names button and
enter new names.
Sim Q Total will be identical to the surface rate except during the wellbore storage
dominated period. For a one-layered model, Sim Q Total will be identical to Sim Q#1.
388
Simulate
:
Speed option area: This determines the speed and precision of the computation. With the
performance of modern computers, these options are becoming redundant, and “1” can be used
in all cases. Speed is traded off against the detail with which rate variations are treated (economy
of superposition). “1” is slowest but most accurate, “4” is fastest but may introduce errors
immediately after a rate change, particularly during the storage-dominated period. Higher speeds
are recommended for trial runs, and may in fact prove quite adequate. Gas wells with storage and
Non-Darcy skin often need the slowest speed (“1”) for good results.
Solution Model area: Ignore this area unless an alternative response function is to be assigned
to one or more layers. The response functions available for the reservoir flow model assigned to
each layer are listed here and can be reassigned if a choice exists. This is described in more detail
in the chapter on “Advanced Simulation”, on page 470.
Additional information area:
- m(p) and B Layer: Ignore this if only one layer is involved, or if the fluid type is water or
oil (single-phase or multi-phase (Perrine method)).
For gas and condensate fluid types, or Oil (Multi-phase pseudo-pressure), if there are
several layers with different fluid properties, users must select which layer’s pseudo-
pressure table (and other fluid properties) to use in the simulation, since no mixing of
pseudo-pressures is possible.
- Gauge Details: if required, the effects of pressure gauge characteristics can be included
(i.e. resolution, noise and/or drift), in the simulated response. This facility, which is also
accessible from the Config menu, is described in Section 5. 4“Gauge Details”, on page
117. If Test Design is being used (Section “Test Design for Principal Well”, on page 149),
EPS recommend using a large number of linearly spaced time-steps to create the
appearance of real gauge data in the simulation.
Start Pressures: The initial condition of the system (at time zero) influences the computations at
subsequent time-steps. The Layer Pressure of each layer (see Section 7. 6. 5 “Layer Parameters”,
on page 196 in the Dataprep section) and the initial wellbore pressure in each well are therefore
important.
The Start Pressures button allows users to alter these start pressures without leaving Simulation
mode. It is described in more detail in the chapter on “Advanced Simulation”, on page 470.
These pressures are assumed to be referenced to a common datum (i.e there is no hydrostatic
difference between layers).
389
Simulate
Figure : 11.3.0 - 2 Start Pressures dialog

Observation points: an observation point is a remote point (x, y) defined in the reservoir, at
which pressure is also calculated. Where there are several layers, the pressure is calculated in
each layer. In order for pseudo-radial flow to occur the observation points must be far enough
away from the active well(s). Observation Points are described in more detail in the chapter on
“Advanced Simulation”, on page 470.
When users have initialized the Advanced Simulation dialog, select OK to start the simulation.
Let the simulation run to the end, then select OK. To terminate the simulation before the end,
click Stop - the response generated to the point of termination will be retained and the remaining
time-steps will be assigned zero pressures.
Users will be returned to the plot. To display the simulated pressure, select the Edit Overlay
Pressure option (described behind the Basics tab):
390
Simulate
Figure : 11.3.0 - 3 Overlay Pressure dialog box (Diagnostic Plot Version on

Left, Test Overview Plot Version on Right)
In the Overlay Pressure dialog box, select the Pressure Column name to display. Check the
Show... checkbox and select OK. (also refer to Section 3. 10“Overlay Pressure...”, on page 75.)
The simulated data will appear on the plot (shown below for the Test Overview):
Figure : 11.3.0 - 4 Test Overview plot with measured and simulated data
overlay.
Users can overlay data on any of the diagnostic plots.
391
Simulate
11.4. PanFlow Rate Simulation
Description:
PanFlow determines the sandface flowrate from the wellbore pressure for a specified reservoir
and boundary model. Wellbore pressure is therefore an input, sandface rate is the output.
Simulation of flowrate from flowing pressure can be used to:
- generate missing production rates where pressure data are available.

- corroborate or enhance flowrate data provided for the rate history of a build-up. This will
allow an improved re-analysis of the buildup data, and a consistent analysis of the flowing
periods. (ref. 68).
- estimate flowrate from or into layers as part of the analysis of a multi-layered test (MLT)
using pressure gauge and spinner flowmeter (ref. 67).
PanFlow is effectively the inverse of Advanced Simulation, which derives the wellbore pressure
from the surface production rate. PanFlow has the same multiple layer, mixed reservoir model
and boundary model capabilities as Advanced Simulation, but for a single well only.
Note: that PanFlow computes the sandface rates (i.e. converted to standard conditions), which
will differ from surface rates during the storage-dominated period.
An overview of PanFlow is provided below. Most of the input features of the two simulation
options are the same and users should refer to the Section on “Advanced Simulation”, on page
470 for detailed descriptions.
What users see:

When users select PanFlow Rate Simulation, the following dialog box appears:
11. 4. PanFlow Rate Simulation
Figure : 11.4.0 - 1 PanFlow Rate Simulation dialog box for a Multi-

Layered Reservoir
This dialog box is arranged in four sections:
Upper area: In the upper area users select the name of the input pressure data to be used to drive
the response generation. Output names can also be assigned to the computed flowrate data if
users do not want to accept the default settings.
392
Simulate
- If there is more than one pressure column available, select the Input Datafile:Column
Name to be used for the simulation.
- Output Datafile Name: is the same as the one for the input pressure. The simulated rate
data will be written to this file.
- Output Column Names: PanFlow will generate the sandface rate from each layer (in or
out), and the total rate (the sum of sandface rates from all layers). The default names will
be PanFlow Q Total, PanFlow Q#1, etc. If users want to change them, select the Names
button to generate the Simulated Column Names dialog box:
Figure : 11.4.0 - 2 Simulated Column Names dialog box

PanFlow Q Total will be identical to the surface rate except during the wellbore storage
dominated period. For a one-layered model, PanFlow Q Total will be identical to PanFlow Q#1.
Speed option area: This determines the speed and precision of the computation. With the
performance of modern computers, these options are becoming redundant, and “1” can be used
in all cases. Speed is traded off against the detail with which rate variations are treated (economy
of superposition). “1” is slowest but most accurate, “4” is fastest but may introduce errors
immediately after a rate change. Gas wells with Non-Darcy skin often need the slowest speed
(“1”) for good results.
Solution Model area: Users should ignore this area unless they wish to assign an alternative
response function to one or more layers. The response functions available are listed here and can
be reassigned if a choice exists. This is described in more detail in the chapter on “Advanced
Simulation”, on page 470.
Additional information area: 11. 4. PanFlow Rate Simulation

- m(p) and B Layer: Ignore this if only one layer is present, or if the fluid type is water or
oil (single-phase or multi-phase (Perrine method)).
For gas and condensate fluid types, or Oil (Multi-phase pseudo-pressure), if there are
several layers with different fluid properties, users must select which layer’s pseudo-
pressure table (and other fluid properties) to use in the simulation, since no mixing of
pseudo-pressures is possible.
Start Pressures
The initial condition of the system (at time zero) influences the computations at subsequent time-
steps. This dialog allows users to specify each Layer Pressure (see Section 7. 6. 5 “Layer
Parameters”, on page 196 in the Dataprep section). Since PanFlow is driven by the wellbore
pressure column, there is no option to specify initial wellbore pressure.
393
Simulate
Figure : 11.4.0 - 3 Start Pressures dialog (with three active layers)

These pressures are assumed to be referenced to a common datum - i.e there is no hydrostatic
difference between layers.
This is described in more detail in the chapter on “Advanced Simulation”, on page 470.
When users have initialised the PanFlow screen, select OK to start the simulation.
Let the simulation run to the end, then select OK. To terminate the simulation before the end,
select Stop - the response generated so far will be retained and the remaining time-steps will be
assigned zero rates.
Users will be returned to the plot. Since flowrates cannot be plotted in the Analysis section, to
view the calculated rate(s) go to Dataprep Gauge Data and plot them. 11. 4. PanFlow Rate Simulation
394
Numerical Simulation
Chapter 12- Numerical Simulation

Numerical Simulation on the main Simulate menu offers three options:
Figure : 12.0.0 - 1 The Numerical Simulation options

PanMesh: New run: will invoke PanMesh to run a new simulation based on the geological
model configured in Dataprep Well and Reservoir Description (Numerical) (refer to Chapter 8).
PanMesh generates a dimensionless pressure response for a constant rate drawdown. This is
written to a file with extension .TCX and passed back to PanSystem, where it is convolved with
wellbore storage and the actual test rate schedule to produce the real-time and pressure response
for a welltest. This is described in Section 12. 1 below.
PanMesh Replay: will invoke PanMesh and load the results of a simulation users have already
run, if the option to store it as a .HST history file has been used. Users will be able to review the
dimensionless pressure response, replay the pressure visualization, and generate the pressure
response versus time at any point (x, y, z) in the reservoir for interference testing (See Section 12.
2 “PanMesh Replay”, on page 424).
From existing TCX file: This option lets users load any existing dimensionless constant rate
drawdown response generated by PanMesh (i.e. stored in the form of a file with extension TCX),
and convolve it with wellbore storage and the flowrate schedule to produce the real time and
pressure response for a welltest. This is performed automatically as the final stage of PanMesh:
New run, but there may be occasions where users will want to regenerate the welltest response
for a model without re-running the numerical simulation in PanMesh (e.g. users can produce
pressure responses for different rate schedules, and for different wellbore storage, using the same
base TCX response file as a starting point. This process is described in Section 12. 3“From
Existing TCX File”, on page 426).
Chapter 12 - Numerical Simulation
395
12.1. PanMesh: New Run
Section 12. 1. 1 presents a quick overview of PanMesh simulation from start to finish, without
dwelling on the details. The finer points are then described in Section 12. 1. 2“The Reservoir
View Window”, on page 400 onwards.
12.1.1. The Main Steps

Duration of simulation
Figure : 12.1.1 - 1 Numerical Simulation Control dialog box

A prompt will request the duration of the simulation. This will default to the total duration of the
welltest to be simulated, including all rate history. (Thus, a 24-hour build-up which follows a
240-hour flowing period will require a simulation spanning 264 hours). Users may increase the
default time if required, although there is not normally required. If it is reduced, users risk
generating a dimensionless response that does not cover enough time.
Selecting OK will then take users into the PanMesh 3-D numerical simulator.
The reservoir image and mesh

A few seconds will elapse while PanMesh constructs the finite element mesh for the current
reservoir model. A 3-D display of the reservoir will then appear in the Reservoir View window,
with the reservoir initially in plan view. To view the mesh, switch off the Solid View button
on the toolbar and switch on the Wire Frame View button .
12. 1. PanMesh: New Run
Figure : 12.1.1 - 2 Plan view of the reservoir, showing the mesh structure
396
For details of how to manipulate the 3-D image, refer to Section 12. 1. 2“The Reservoir View
Window”, on page 400.
For details on altering the mesh, refer to Section 12. 1. 3“The Mesh Edit pop-up menu”, on page
405.
Starting the simulation

To start the simulation, click the Go button on the toolbar. This starts the simulation and
opens the Graph Window (described in Section 12. 1. 4“The Graph Window”, on page 406).
The Graph Window will show the dimensionless Pd versus Td response with derivative at the
sandface, computed for a constant rate drawdown. The response includes the Darcy skin factor
(if any). (Wellbore storage, turbulent skin factor, and the true flowrate schedule, will be
convolved into the response when users return to PanSystem). There will be a period of several
seconds (or tens of seconds for a complex mesh), before any data will appear on the graph.
Figure : 12.1.1 - 3 The Graph Window during a simulation

The traces will jump forward over successive time segments as the calculations progress. Simple
models will take a few tens of seconds to compute, complex models (or models where users have
applied mesh refinement) will take minutes or hours, depending on their complexity and the
configuration of the user’s computer.
12. 1. 1. The Main Steps
For details on modifying the Graph Window, refer to Section 12. 1. 5“Graph pop-up menu”, on
page 408.
During a simulation users can switch the focus between the Graph Window and the Reservoir
View Window and use any of the facilities which are enabled.
The 3-D pressure visualization facility can be switched-on during the simulation to show the
progress of the pressure disturbance through the reservoir. Select the Color Contour button
on the toolbar.
397
Figure : 12.1.1 - 4 Color Contour Facility Shows Advance of Pressure

Disturbance
See Section 12. 1. 6 “Pressure Visualization”, on page 409, which explains how to get the best
results from this feature.
After the simulation

When the simulation has finished, users can do one of several things:
• Close PanMesh and return to PanSystem to generate the real time/pressure welltest response -
this is the normal course of action (Section 12. 1. 11“The Real-Time and Pressure Response”,
on page 415);
• Save a “history file” - a step-by-step record of the simulation, including pressures at all nodes
in the reservoir, for future replay of the dimensionless wellbore response, the color pressure
visualization, and generation of interference test responses, without having to re-compute the
simulation (Section 12. 1. 10“Saving Simulation Data”, on page 414);
• Compute the pressure at any point in the reservoir, display it in dimensionless form and,
optionally, save it to file (Section 12. 1. 7“Pressure at a Point”, on page 411);
• Close the graph window, leaving just the Reservoir View window. From here users could edit
the mesh (Section 12. 1. 3“The Mesh Edit pop-up menu”, on page 405) and re-launch the
simulation;
• Right-click in the graph window to access the graph pop-up menu (Section 12. 1. 5“Graph
pop-up menu”, on page 408). From this menu, users can change the graph and derivative
presentations, or save their dimensionless well response to file, extension .TCX (Section 12.
1. 10“Saving Simulation Data”, on page 414);
• Invoke the pressure visualization (Section 12. 1. 6“Pressure Visualization”, on page 409) and
replay the propagation of the pressure disturbance out into the reservoir.
Generating the Real Pressure versus Time Response
If users do not want to use any of the options mentioned above in “After the simulation”, select
the Close button at top right of the PanMesh window. This will shut-down PanMesh and after a
prompt, will return users to PanSystem.
398
There will be a prompt to save the simulation as a history file, extension .HST, in the data file
directory (see Section 12. 1. 10“Saving Simulation Data”, on page 414). This is optional, but
worthwhile if the simulation took a long time, as it will provide subsequent access to certain
replay facilities without having to re-run the simulation. The .HST files are large and should be
routinely zipped or cleared-out if they start to accumulate.
Users will now be returned to PanSystem. The constant rate response from PanMesh is
convolved with wellbore storage and rate history to produce the welltest response (see Section
12. 1. 11“The Real-Time and Pressure Response”, on page 415).
If users were in the Analysis section with a diagnostic plot on the screen when they invoked
PanMesh: New Run, they will be returned back to the same plot, with the PanMesh-generated
response overlaid on the welltest data.
Figure : 12.1.1 - 5 Simulated data from PanMesh overlaid on welltest

data
The simulated curve will be present on any diagnostic plot that is selected. To remove it, choose
Overlay pressure on the Edit menu and switch off Show overlaid pressure (or select an
alternative overlay if there is a choice).
If users were not in the Analysis section (e.g. designing a test), they will be taken to the Test
Overview plot, with the simulated test displayed. If users do have a master pressure column (e.g.
an existing welltest), this will also be plotted.
The following sections provide more detail on the various aspects of the PanMesh interface -
Reservoir View and Graph windows, toolbar, menus, short-cuts, etc.
399
12.1.2. The Reservoir View Window
The reservoir image.
Figure : 12.1.2 - 1 The Reservoir View Window with 3-D image

The image is initially in plan view when users enter PanMesh. Users can switch to one of the
elevation views by clicking the Front View button (view from the south) or Side View (viewed
from the east).
12. 1. 2. The Reservoir View Window

Figure : 12.1.2 - 2 View Buttons
To rotate the image, left-click anywhere in the reservoir structure - the cursor will change to a
globe shape - then move the mouse in the desired direction. To return the image to its original
position, click on the Top View button (or one of the other two).
Incremental rotation can be achieved using the Rotate button described next.
400
The View Control Panel
This is on the right-hand side of the screen.
Figure : 12.1.2 - 3 Control buttons for Zoom, Pan and Rotate

Users can Zoom, Pan or Rotate the reservoir image. The direction for whichever function is
selected is controlled by the Cursor Control Pad - click on an arrow to move the image
incrementally in the arrow direction. This can also be performed with the keyboard arrow keys.
Figure : 12.1.2 - 4 The Cursor Control Pad

The size of the increments for zoom, pan or rotate is controlled by the slider:
Figure : 12.1.2 - 5 The Step-Size Slider

which can be adjusted with the mouse.
Zoom allows users to re-size the 3-D image. The Reset button, to its right, will return the image
to the default size.
Pan moves the user’s viewpoint across the window (effectively shifting the image across the

window, with some apparent rotation). Reset restores the image to its original setting.
Rotate turns the image about an axis, without any shift. (Users can also do this by grabbing the
image with the left mouse button and dragging it). Reset restores the image to its original setting.
Toolbar Options
The Toolbar contains the most commonly used functions of PanMesh:
Figure : 12.1.2 - 6 The Initial PanMesh Toolbar
401
Wire Frame view: This option shows the reservoir mesh as a wire frame. Switch-off the
Solid Model button on its right to see the mesh clearly.
Figure : 12.1.2 - 7 Wire Frame View

Solid Model view: The reservoir and its constituent regions are shown in solid color.
Regions with different material properties will be assigned different colors.
Figure : 12.1.2 - 8 Solid Model View 12. 1. 2. The Reservoir View Window
Although the Wire Frame and Solid Model buttons can be enabled at the same time, the Wire
Frame view may be difficult to distinguish unless Solid Model is disabled.
402
Figure : 12.1.2 - 9 Solid Model View and Wire Frame View Combined
Vertical Cut: A vertical cut is made across the reservoir, in the plane of the well. For a slant
or horizontal well, the cut is oriented along the azimuth of the well trajectory. For a truly vertical
well, the cut is made north-south.
Figure : 12.1.2 - 10 Vertical Cut Viewed From Side (slant well)

This cut is useful if users want to inspect the meshing in the plane of a vertical or slant well. If the
color visualization facility is used (Section 12. 1. 6“Pressure Visualization”, on page 409), it also
permits users to see the early part of the propagation of the pressure disturbance out from the well

during the simulation, by removing the portion of the reservoir between users and the well.
Horizontal Cut: This is useful for horizontal wells. A horizontal cut is made through the
reservoir in the plane of the well. (For a vertical well it simply cuts across the bottom layer of
mesh elements, which is not usually of much use).
This cut is useful if users want to inspect the meshing in the plane of a horizontal well. If the
color visualization facility is used (Section 12. 1. 6“Pressure Visualization”, on page 409), it also
permits users to see the early part of the propagation of the pressure disturbance out from the well
during the simulation, by removing that part of the reservoir which overlies the well.
403
Figure : 12.1.2 - 11 Horizontal Cut Through a Horizontal Well

View Damage Zone: This option shows only the near-wellbore mesh, without the reservoir.
(Switch-off the Solid Model and switch on the Wire Frame to see the near wellbore mesh). This
is useful to identify the location of the wellbore in the 3-D image.
If there is no damaged region, the mesh is displayed out to about ten wellbore radii. If there is a
damaged region, it will extend out to the radius of the region, or to the radius of the largest region
if there are several different damaged radii involved.
Figure : 12.1.2 - 12 Damage Zone Wire Frame Viewed From Side

View Wellbore Only: Only the meshing immediately adjacent to the wellbore is displayed,
and only at the open sections. This is useful to identify the location of the open intervals in the 3-
D image.
404
Figure : 12.1.2 - 13 Wellbore Wire Frame View From Side
12.1.3. The Mesh Edit pop-up menu

If users right-click anywhere in the Reservoir View window, a pop-up menu will provide access
to the Edit Mesh dialog. This allows users to alter the density of the mesh used for the
simulation. (Alternatively, select Edit Mesh on the Simulation menu).
Figure : 12.1.3 - 1 The Mesh Edit pop-up menu
12. 1. 3. The Mesh Edit pop-up menu
Figure : 12.1.3 - 2 Edit Mesh dialog box

As would be expected, the progression from Coarse, through Medium and Fine, to
Superfine, increases the number of elements in the mesh.
- Wellbore: This increases the number of elements along the wellbore, but only if the well
is partially completed. The mesh refinement occurs over the non-open sections, with
fining as the open sections are approached. The degree of refinement is a maximum close
to the well, and decreases with radial distance away from the well. This improves the
modelling of flow convergence and produces a better early-time response.
405
- Radial: This boosts the number of elements in the radial direction in the region containing
the well by increasing the density of the rings. This might improve the response to a
boundary or internal fault close to the well.
- Polygons: This panel only appears for a model with more than one region. It boosts the
number of elements in the regions (polygons) not containing the well. A region closer to
the well will be given a more refinement than a region farther from the well. This might
improve the mid- or late-time response in a heterogeneous reservoir.
- Anisotropy: for a vertical well, this extends some of the wellbore vertical refinement
(described above) out through the reservoir instead of dissipating it away from the well.
This may improve early-time response in a partially completed well in an anisotropic
reservoir. The switch has no effect with horizontal wells.
The default settings are suitable for most purposes. If users suspect that a response could be
improved by mesh refinement, try increasing the appropriate default by one step. A finer mesh
will incur an increased computation time, and may or may not produce a more accurate response.
If the response is significantly different, it would suggest that an improvement has been
achieved. Users might then explore going one step further in refinement, but this should not
normally be necessary.
Mesh details: The Mesh details option on the pop-up menu shows the number of nodes and
elements in the mesh:
Figure : 12.1.3 - 3 Mesh details
12.1.4. The Graph Window

The Go button on the toolbar (or the Go option from the Simulation menu) starts the
simulation and launches the Graph Window.
The Graph Window will show the dimensionless Pd versus Td response with derivative at the 12. 1. 4. The Graph Window
sandface, computed for a constant-rate drawdown. The response includes the Darcy skin factor
(if any). This will be convolved with wellbore storage and the actual test rate schedule when
users return to PanSystem, to produce the real time and pressure response for the current welltest
under consideration.
There will be a period of several seconds (or tens of seconds for a complex mesh) before any data
will appear on the graph.
406
Figure : 12.1.4 - 1 The Graph Window During a Simulation

The traces will jump forward over successive time segments as the calculations progress. Simple
models will take a few tens of seconds to compute, complex models (or models where users have
applied mesh refinement) will take minutes or hours, depending on their complexity and the
configuration of the user’s computer.
The computing time is displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the screen at the end of the
simulation. As a benchmark, the supplied example PM_EX1.PAN takes 16 secs on a Pentium-3
550 MHz with 256Mb of memory. Memory only becomes an issue for large meshes. If memory
is insufficient, PanMesh will start paging to hard disk, so disk space then also becomes an issue.
During a simulation users can switch the focus between the Graph Window and the Reservoir
View Window and use any of the facilities which are enabled on each.
Once simulation is started, six new buttons appear on the toolbar. Only two of these - Pause and
Stop - are enabled initially. The color contour (pressure visualization) button is enabled shortly
after the start:
Figure : 12.1.4 - 2 The Toolbar Just After Simulation Has Been Started
Pause: With this button the simulation can be paused. Click on the button again to restart the 12. 1. 4. The Graph Window
simulation.
Stop: This terminates the simulation. Users may have to wait a few seconds (or more!) for
the current set of calculations to stop. If required, users will be able to return to PanSystem
and use the simulation (as far as it got). Alternatively, the graph window can be closed and the
simulation restarted from the beginning.
Alternative ways of stopping the simulation are:

- Maximize PanSystem from the icon contained in the Windows Taskbar and, on the
Simulate menu, go to Numerical Simulation. Users will find a Terminate option on the
sub-menu.
407
Figure : 12.1.4 - 3 Terminate Simulation Option in PanSystem

If users stop PanMesh from here, they will not be given the option to save a history file or
to use the dimensionless response in PanSystem - all numerical computations from that
run will be lost.
- Another way to abort a simulation is, of course, {Ctrl}{Alt}{Del} from within PanMesh.
All numerical computations from the aborted run will be lost.
12.1.5. Graph pop-up menu
A right mouse click anywhere in the PanMesh Graph Window will call up the Graph Pop-Up
menu.
Figure : 12.1.5 - 1 The Graph Pop-Up Menu and Properties Sub-Menu

Stop and Pause
These are also accessible on the Toolbar and the Simulation menu, and are described on
page 407.
Properties
Control of the presentation is provided by 4 items:
12. 1. 5. Graph pop-up menu
• Graph area will open up the Change graph area dialog box for axis scaling:
Figure : 12.1.5 - 2 Change Graph Area dialog box
408
The short-cut to this dialog is a double-click on the graph axis.
• Show Pd is on by default.
• Show spline dPd/dlogtd is the default presentation for the (smoothed) derivative.
• Show dPd/dlogtd will plot the raw derivative.
The raw Pd/Td data are spaced according to PanMesh’s internal time-stepping regime, which is
not optimal for use in PanSystem. The Output spline option, on by default, optimizes the
spacing of the output data when it is saved to a .TCX file (see Section 12. 1. 10 “Saving
Simulation Data”, on page 414).
Timer
This shows the time elapsed since the start of the simulation, or the total calculation time after the
simulation has ended. This information is also displayed in the status bar at the bottom of the
screen after the simulation has ended.
Save as a TCX file

When users close the Graph Window, the dimensionless PanMesh response is automatically
written to a file called PANMESH.TCX in the type-curve folder. This will be used by PanSystem
to generate the real-time and pressure welltest response on exiting PanMesh. This
PANMESH.TCX file will be overwritten by the next PanMesh simulation that is performed. The
Save as a TCX file option on the pop-up menu can be used to make a copy of the file under a
different name, for future use. (The same facility is available in PanSystem on the File menu at
Save PanMesh calculations or alternatively, the My Computer or Explorer utilities can be used
to copy and re-name the file).
12.1.6. Pressure Visualization

To observe the progression of the pressure disturbance out from the well in three dimensions,
select the Color Contour icon on the toolbar (or select the Pressure / Show color contours
option on the Review menu).
Users will also be able to use this visualization facility when the simulation has finished.
12. 1. 6. Pressure Visualization
409
Figure : 12.1.6 - 1 3-D Pressure Visualization Live During the Simulation

The Graph Window now includes a Color Scale Key on the right, and upper and lower Scale
Marker Bars (blue and red lines) which define the span of the color contouring for Pd (Figure
12.1.6 - 1). To adjust the color scale grab the appropriate bar with the mouse, drag and release.
(Users can also use the up/down arrow keys for the blue bar, but make sure the Graph Window
has the focus).
• The edge of the red area in the reservoir image is the outer limit of the pressure disturbance.
The value of Pd at the edge is determined by the position of the red marker bar on the graph.
If users set the red bar at Pd = 0.1, the edge corresponds to the classical “radius of
investigation” for a homogeneous reservoir.
12. 1. 6. Pressure Visualization
• The blue marker bar affects the coloration closer to the well, where the dimensionless
pressure drop is bigger.
Users should experiment with the color scaling to achieve the best results. Users can also
manipulate the orientation and size of the reservoir image in the ways described in Section 12. 1.
2“The Reservoir View Window”, on page 400.
Remember that the first half-dozen log cycles of Td correspond to a very small depth of
investigation, and users will not see any coloration unless they zoom-in on the wellbore region.
A good way to do this is to switch-on Auto Zoom wellbore in the View / Options menu
(page 422), then click the View damage zone button on and off - this will provide a good
zoom-in on the near-wellbore region. Select the Reset button on the right of the screen to
unzoom.
410
As soon as the simulation finishes, a third Marker Bar - vertical and green - appears over on the
right of the graph area. If users drag this bar (or use the left/right arrow keys), they can replay the
pressure propagation versus dimensionless time. The real time corresponding to the time bar
position is shown on the top of the graph (Figure 12.1.6 - 2).
Figure : 12.1.6 - 2 3-D Pressure Visualisation Replay After the Simulation
12.1.7. Pressure at a Point

Select a Point: This toolbar button is enabled at the end of a simulation. The simulation has
created a pressure versus time record for every mesh node in the model. The response at the well
is displayed on the graph (Figure 12.1.6 - 2). With the Select a Point option users can define the
co-ordinates of any other point in the reservoir (not necessarily at a mesh node) and generate a Pd
12. 1. 7. Pressure at a Point
versus Td response for it. This can subsequently be converted into a real pressure versus time
record for an interference test in PanSystem.
411
On selecting this option from the toolbar, the Enter the co-ordinates dialog box is displayed:
Figure : 12.1.7 - 1 Enter The Coordinates dialog box

Select the appropriate units, enter the x-, y- and z-co-ordinates of the point of interest, and click
OK. (Remember that z is positive downwards). PanMesh will prompt users if the point does not
lie in the reservoir. The exact well position is not recognized as a valid point.
Note: It is possible that users cannot remember the co-ordinate system they defined in the Well
and Reservoir Description section (Chapter 8). Users cannot open the Dataprep menu in
PanSystem to review the co-ordinates unless they shut down PanMesh. To by-pass this situation,
start a second PanSystem session, open the same .PAN file and view it there. Remember to shut
-down this second session of PanSystem before continuing.
A new graph window will be generated, showing the dimensionless constant rate drawdown
pressure response and derivative at the specified point:
12. 1. 7. Pressure at a Point
Figure : 12.1.7 - 2 Dimensionless Pressure Response at a Point in the

Reservoir
Select the Close button in the top right corner of the graph:
412
If users want to convert this into a real pressure versus time response in PanSystem, they should
answer Yes at the prompt, so that the dimensionless response can be saved to a TCX file. Enter a
name for the file in the File Save dialog that is generated next. This will be directed to the type-
curve folder by default. Users will then be returned to the main graph window containing the
response at the well.
Refer to Section 12. 3 “From Existing TCX File”, on page 426 for instructions on what to do
next.
12.1.8. Flow Vectors

Flow Arrows: this button is only available after numerical simulation and allows users to
view the flow vectors. Currently only the vectors in those elements immediately around the
wellbore are displayed. Switch-on the Wire Frame View option (i.e. with the Solid Model View
option switched off), to see the flow arrows. By also selecting the View Wellbore Only option this
will simplify the picture (refer to page 418 for more details about this facility).
Note: this facility can also be accessed via the Review menu:
Flow: there are three sub-menu options available under this Review menu item that allow flow
vectors to be superimposed on the 3-D reservoir image. Currently the flow vectors are only
shown for those elements in the immediate vicinity of the wellbore.
• Show Flow Field: This provides an optional method of activating the Flow Arrows button
option from the PanMesh Toolbar and previously described in Toolbar Button Options.
• Show Flow Direction Only: This is an additional feature that displays only the direction of
flow and ignores amplitude when this option is checked.
• Change Flow Range: This is an additional feature that generates a Visible Flow Vector
Range dialog, that allows users to re-define the distance from the wellbore axis over which
the vectors are to be displayed by means of a sliding scale adjuster.
12.1.9. Print
Print: this button is only available after numerical simulation and allows users to print the
graph of dimensionless pressure (Pd) versus dimensionless time (td), currently displayed in the
Graphing Window. The button generates a standard Windows Print dialog box.
The Print facility is available for both the Sandface Plot of Pd versus Td and the Selected Co-
ordinates Plot of Pd versus Td, which is generated with the Select a Point button. Ensure the
correct window is selected before printing.
12. 1. 8. Flow Vectors
413
12.1.10. Saving Simulation Data
When the simulation has finished, users can do one of several things:
• Close PanMesh and return to PanSystem to generate the real time/pressure welltest response -
this is the normal course of action.
• Right-click in the graph window to access the graph pop-up menu (Section 12. 1. 5). From
this menu, users can change the graph and derivative presentations, or save the dimensionless
well response to file, extension .TCX.
• Invoke the pressure visualization (Section 12. 1. 6) and replay the propagation of the pressure
disturbance out into the reservoir.
• Compute the pressure at any point in the reservoir, display it in dimensionless form and,
optionally, save it to file (Section 12. 1. 7).
• View the flow vectors in the vicinity of the wellbore (Section 12. 1. 8 and Section 12. 1. 12).
• Print the plot of Pd versus Td currently displayed in the Graphing Window (Section 12. 1. 9).
• Close the graph window, leaving just the Reservoir View window. From here, users could edit
the mesh (Section 12. 1. 3) and re-launch the simulation.
History file
On exiting PanMesh (or on closing the graph window) users will be asked if they want to store
the simulation as a history file. This is optional.
Figure : 12.1.10 - 1 History file prompt

The history file, extension HST, contains a step-by-step record of the simulation, including
pressures at all nodes in the reservoir. This can be used for future replay of the dimensionless
12. 1. 10. Saving Simulation Data

wellbore response, the colour pressure visualization, and generation of interference test
responses, without having to re-compute the simulation itself. The files are large (several to
many megabytes), and should only be saved if they will be needed later (e.g. for the final, best
match to a welltest). A regular clear-out, compression or transfer to CD of HST files is advisable
if they are being saved frequently.
No will close PanMesh and return users to PanSystem.
Yes will open a File Save As dialog box for the history file, extension .HST. The default directory
is the PanSystem data folder. After saving, PanMesh will close and users will be returned to
PanSystem.
Section 12. 2. 2 “Replay Mode”, on page 425 deals with subsequent use of the history file in
PanMesh Replay mode.
414
12.1.11. The Real-Time and Pressure Response
When users close PanMesh, the dimensionless response is automatically written to a file called
PANMESH.TCX in the type-curve folder. This will be used by PanSystem to generate the real
time and pressure welltest response.
TCX file: This PANMESH.TCX file will be overwritten by the next PanMesh simulation
that is performed. There is an option to make a back-up of the file in PanSystem on the
File menu at Save PanMesh calculations, or the My Computer or Windows Explorer
utilities can be used to copy and rename the file. Before closing PanMesh, the Save as a
TCX file option on the Graph pop-up menu (Section 12. 1. 5, page 408) can be used to
make a copy of the file under a different name.
The TCX file can also be re-used to generate a real-time/pressure response for a specific
case without going back into PanMesh. This is described in Section 12. 3 “From Existing
TCX File”, on page 426.
PanSystem will now convolve the dimensionless response from PanMesh with the wellbore
storage model, rate schedule (and for gas or condensate models, the Non-Darcy skin factor D). It
does this using Advanced Simulation, which applies analytically derived dimensionless
response functions.
If users are confronted by a warning message about duplicate names, please refer to the notes
following “Duplicate Column Names Warning”, on page 417, then return to this point.
Otherwise, PanSystem will quickly work through the rate schedule time-steps to produce the full
welltest response:
12. 1. 11. The Real-Time and Pressure Response

Figure : 12.1.11 - 1 Time-step counter
If users were working in the Analysis section with a diagnostic plot on the screen when
PanMesh: New Run was invoked, they will be returned to the same plot, with the PanMesh-
generated response overlaid on the welltest data.
415
Figure : 12.1.11 - 2 Simulated Data from PanMesh Overlaid on Welltest

Data
The simulated curve will be present on any diagnostic plot that users select. To remove it,
choose Overlay pressure on the Edit menu and switch-off Show overlaid pressure (or
select an alternative overlay if there is a choice).
If users were not in the Analysis section (e.g. designing a test), they will be taken to the
Test Overview plot, with the simulated test displayed. If users have a master pressure
column (e.g. an existing welltest), this will also be plotted.
The simulated pressure channel will be called FEM P. Two sandface flowrate columns - FEM Q
total and FEM Q#1 - will also be created.

If users want to make more PanMesh runs (e.g. to refine a history match), and do not want to
overwrite the current FEM P data, either:
- Re-name FEM P via the Gauge Data Edit facility on the Dataprep menu before re-running
PanMesh, or
- Give the new data a different name at the Duplicate Column Names prompt after running
PanMesh (see just below).
Unless users are particularly interested in the sandface rates FEM Q total and FEM Q#1, they can
either delete them with the Gauge Data Delete facility on the Dataprep menu, or just let them be
overwritten each time.
Duplicate Column Names

If users already have a column called FEM P (or flowrate columns with the default names) in the
file from a previous PanMesh simulation, a warning message asks users if these are to be
overwritten before the PanSystem calculations begin:
416
Figure : 12.1.11 - 3 Duplicate Column Names Warning

Select OK to go ahead with the calculations and overwrite the column or columns.
Select Cancel if the names are to be changed. This will take users to the Simulated Column
Names dialog box, where alternative names can be specified:
Figure : 12.1.11 - 4 Simulated Column Names dialog box

Select OK after changing the name(s), then OK again on the Advanced Simulation Control

dialog box (there is no need to change anything here):.
Figure : 12.1.11 - 5 Advanced Simulation Control dialog box

The calculations will now take place, and pressure and sandface rate columns with the new
names will be created (Figures 12.1.11 - 1 and 12.1.11 - 2).
417
12.1.12. PanMesh Toolbar
The six icons on the left of the toolbar, used to manipulate the 3-D image in the Reservoir View
window, were described in Section 12. 1. 2 on page 400.
The Go icon starts the simulation and launches the Graph Window (Section 12. 1. 4). Once
users start the simulation, six new buttons appear on the toolbar. Only two of these - Pause and
Stop - are enabled initially. The Color Contour button (described below), is enabled shortly
after the start of simulation.:
Figure : 12.1.12 - 1 The Toolbar Just After Simulation Has Been Started
Pause: This will put the simulation on hold. Click on the button again to re-start it.
Stop: This terminates the simulation. Users may have to wait a few seconds (or more!) for
the current set of calculations to stop. The simulation can only be re-started (from the beginning)
after closing the graph window and answering No to the prompts which follow. (A more drastic
way to abort a very slow simulation is to use the {Ctrl}{Alt}{Del} keys).
Color Contour: This button is enabled shortly after starting the simulation. Select this to
watch the propagation of the pressure disturbance through the reservoir by means of a color
contour display superimposed on the reservoir image. This is described in Section 12. 1. 6 on
page 409.
When the simulation has ended (or has been stopped), the other three new toolbar icons will be
enabled:
Figure : 12.1.12 - 2 Toolbar Buttons Enabled After the Simulation Has Finished
Flow Arrows: The Flow Arrows button is only enabled when the simulation has finished.
It allows users to view the flow vectors, but currently only the vectors close to the wellbore are
displayed. This facility will be developed further in later releases.
Users should switch off Solid Model and switch on the Wire Frame option to see the
12. 1. 12. PanMesh Toolbar
flow arrows more clearly.
418
Figure : 12.1.12 - 3 Flow Arrows Shown in Wire Frame View of Reservoir

Selecting View wellbore only (Figure 12.1.12 - 4) or View damage zone (Figure
12.1.12 - 5) may simplify the picture. In Figure 12.1.12 - 5, the color pressure visualization has
also been switched-on.
Figure : 12.1.12 - 4 Flow Arrows Shown in Wire Frame View of Wellbore Only
12. 1. 12. PanMesh Toolbar
419
Figure : 12.1.12 - 5 Flow Arrow Views with Color Contours Switched-On

An alternate way to access this facility is via Flow / Show flow field on the Review menu. There
are also two additional sub-menu options:
• Show flow direction only: if this facility is switched-off, the arrows show the direction and
magnitude of the flow. If it is switched-on, they all have the same length and only the
direction is shown. The green segment of each vector is the leading edge.
• Change flow range: this determines the distance, measured from a plane containing the well,
out to which flow vectors are displayed.
Select a Point: this is used to capture the pressure record at any point in the reservoir. It is
described in detail in Section 12. 1. 7 on page 411.
Print: this button is only available after numerical simulation and allows users to print the
graph of dimensionless pressure (Pd) versus dimensionless time (td), currently displayed in the 12. 1. 12. PanMesh Toolbar
Graphing Window. The button generates a standard Windows Print dialog box.
The Print facility is available for both the Sandface Plot of Pd versus Td and the Selected Co-
ordinates Plot of Pd versus Td, which is generated with the Select a Point button. Ensure the
correct window is selected before printing.
Help: The About sub-menu item provides version and copyright information on PanMesh.
On-line help for PanMesh is available by selecting the PanMesh Graphical Interface menu item.
• For help on data input to the numerical simulation facility, highlight the Well and Reservoir
Description (Numerical) option on the Dataprep menu in PanSystem and press {F1}.
• For help on the simulation control, highlight the Numerical Simulation option on the
Simulate menu in PanSystem and press {F1}.
420
12.1.13. The Menu Bar
The Menu Bar provides access to all of the toolbar functions described above, and some others.
View Menu
Figure : 12.1.13 - 1 The View menu

The View Menu provides the options described in “The View Control Panel”, on page 401,
relating to the display in the Reservoir View Window. (If the graph window is present after a
simulation, make sure the Reservoir View window has the focus (i.e. is currently selected), to
enable all the options.)
• Perspective contains the control panel View and Rotate options:.
Figure : 12.1.13 - 2 The Perspective sub-menu

• Scale contains the Zoom options:
Figure : 12.1.13 - 3 The Scale sub-menu

• Shift contains the Pan options:
Figure : 12.1.13 - 4 The Shift sub-menu

• Reservoir provides the first five viewing options found on the toolbar and described in the
12. 1. 13. The Menu Bar
Section 12. 1. 2“The Reservoir View Window”, on page 400:
Figure : 12.1.13 - 5 The Reservoir sub-menu
421
• Options sub-menu:
Figure : 12.1.13 - 6 The Options sub-menu

- Toggle Background Colour allows users to switch the background of the view window
from white to black and vice-versa. A right-click in the view window is a short-cut to this
option.
- Auto Zoom wellbore, if switched-on, this re-scales the view window when users click the
View wellbore or View damage region toolbar buttons, so that the mesh can be seen
clearly. If Auto Zoom is not switched-on, the wellbore and damaged regions are difficult
to see unless users zoom-in manually.
Simulation Menu
Figure : 12.1.13 - 7 The Simulation menu (before and during a simulation

run)
The Simulation Menu provides the simulation control options for PanMesh:
• Edit Mesh allows users to alter the density of the mesh used for the simulation. Selecting this
option opens the Edit Mesh dialog box. (Short-cut: right-click anywhere in the Reservoir
View window.)
Figure : 12.1.13 - 8 Edit Mesh dialog box

This has been described in detail in Section 12. 1. 3, starting on page 405.
• Go, Stop and Pause, also available on the Toolbar, are described on page 407.
422
Review Menu
Figure : 12.1.13 - 9 The Review Pressure menu

The Review options are not available until the simulation has finished. There are two sub-menus:
• Pressure:
- Show color contours is for the display of pressure contours on the 3-D image in the
Reservoir View Window. This is equivalent to the Color Contour button in the toolbar
and is described in detail in Section 12. 1. 6 “Pressure Visualization”, on page 409.
- Select a point allows users to define the co-ordinates of any point in the reservoir and see
the dimensionless pressure response at that point, which can be converted into a real-time/
pressure record in PanSystem.
This is equivalent to the Select a point button in the toolbar, described in Section 12.
1. 7 “Pressure at a Point”, on page 411.
Figure : 12.1.13 - 10 The Review Flow menu

• Flow: users can superimpose the flow vectors on the reservoir image. Currently the flow
vectors are only shown for those elements in the immediate vicinity of the wellbore. This is
described in “PanMesh Toolbar”, on page 418.
- Show flow field allows users to view the flow arrows for the simulated reservoir pressure
dynamics in the 3-D Reservoir View Window.
- Show flow direction only displays only the direction of flow and ignores amplitude.
- Change flow range - users can adjust the slider to define the distance from the wellbore
axis over which the vectors are to be displayed.
Tools Menu
Figure : 12.1.13 - 11 The Tools Menu

The options on this menu allow users to select the whether the Toolbar (Section 12. 1. 12) and
Status Bar (Section 12. 1. 14) are displayed or not.
423
Help Menu
The Help menu provides the version number and copyright details from the About sub-menu
item. On-line help is available by selecting the PanMesh Graphical Interface sub-menu item.
Help about PanMesh can also be accessed within PanSystem:
• For help on data input to the numerical simulation facility, highlight the Well and Reservoir
Description (Numerical) option on the Dataprep menu in PanSystem and press {F1}.
• For help on the simulation control, highlight the Numerical Simulation option on the
Simulate menu in PanSystem and press {F1}.
12.1.14. Status Bar
The Status Bar, at the bottom of the window, provides users with information relating to the
toolbar icons and the simulation time.
12.2. PanMesh Replay
The replay option will invoke PanMesh and pick up the results of a simulation that has already
run and stored as a history file (.HST). Saving a history file after a simulation run is described
under “History file”, on page 414.
Users should have the appropriate PAN file open in PanSystem before selecting PanMesh
Replay.
In replay mode users can:
- Re-display the dimensionless pressure response at the well

- Save the dimensionless pressure response at the well as a TCX file (users may have lost or
overwritten the one from the original simulation)
- Replay the pressure visualization
- Generate the dimensionless pressure response versus time at any point (x, y, z) in the
reservoir for interference testing.
- Generate the real-time/pressure welltest response for the well and/or points in the reservoir
12. 1. 14. Status Bar
on returning to PanSystem.
12.2.1. Open the History File
Users should have the appropriate PAN file open in PanSystem before selecting PanMesh
Replay.
Select PanMesh Replay and select the history file in the File Open dialog that appears. The
dialog defaults to the PanSystem data directory.
424
If users have forgotten to open the associated PAN file in PanSystem, a warning will be
generated to inform users that no rate data is available:
Figure : 12.2.1 - 1 Users did not Open the PAN File first!
12.2.2. Replay Mode

Once the history file has been loaded, users will find themselves in PanMesh, with the Reservoir
View and Graph windows open. The Pd versus Td response at the well will be displayed.
PanMesh is now in the same status as if a simulation had just been run, and all the options
described in Sections 12. 1. 2 to 12. 1. 10 are available. (However, in Replay mode users cannot
re-launch the numerical simulation. For this, the PanMesh: New Run option from the PanSystem
Simulate menu must be used).
• To save the dimensionless pressure response at the well as a TCX file with a user-defined
name:
On closing PanMesh, users will be prompted to make a named save. To do this without
closing PanMesh, right-click on the graph to generate the graph pop-up menu, and refer to
Section 12. 1. 5.
• To replay the pressure visualization:
Select the Color Contour button and refer to Section 12. 1. 6.
• To generate and save the dimensionless pressure response versus time at any point (x, y, z) in
the reservoir:
Select the Pressure at a Point button and refer to Section 12. 1. 7.

• To generate the real-time/pressure response for the well:
Select the Close button at top right to return to PanSystem, and refer to Section 12. 1. 11.
• To generate the real-time/pressure response for a point or points in the reservoir on
returning to PanSystem:
Generate and save the dimensionless response at the point as described in Section 12. 1. 7,
close PanMesh, and refer to Section 12. 3 “From Existing TCX File”.
12. 2. 2. Replay Mode
When users close PanMesh, they will be returned to PanSystem where the real-time/pressure at
the well will be generated (Section 12. 1. 11).
If users have created dimensionless pressure responses at points in the reservoir and saved them
as TCX files, they can generate the real responses by following the explanation in Section 12. 3.
425
12.3. From Existing TCX File
PanMesh generates the dimensionless pressure response for a constant rate drawdown. When
users exit PanMesh, the wellbore response is automatically written to a file - PANMESH .TCX -
in the type-curve directory. This is immediately convolved with wellbore storage and the actual
test rate schedule by PanSystem to produce the real-time and pressure response for the welltest.
For gas and condensate fluid types, the rate-dependent skin is included at this stage.
Options are also available in PanMesh to save the wellbore response as a TCX file with a user-
defined name, and to save the response at any point in the reservoir.
These TCX files can be used to generate the real-time/pressure responses at the wellbore and at
an observation point, using the From existing TCX file option on the Simulate menu:
• Users may want to regenerate the wellbore response (e.g. the FEM P data created when the
original PanMesh simulation was run, has been accidentally deleted).
• Users want to regenerate the wellbore response using a different wellbore storage model, a
different rate schedule or a different rate-dependent skin coefficient. The original TCX file is
still valid, provided the layer or fluid parameters are not altered.
• Users have saved TCX files representing pressures at points in the reservoir for an
interference test.
12.3.1. Layer, Well and Fluid Parameters
Ensure that the appropriate PAN file is open - the material properties specified in the numerical
data input section will be used to convert the dimensionless times and pressures into real values,
and these should be the same ones that were used when PanMesh was originally run to generate
this TCX file.
12.3.2. Generating the Welltest Response at the Well

12. 3. From Existing TCX File
The generation of a pressure response from dimensionless TCX files uses the existing Advanced
Simulation facility (see Section 14.3). When users select From existing TCX file, they will go
to what is essentially the Advanced Simulation Control dialog:
426
Figure : 12.3.2 - 1 From Existing TCX File Option - Simulation Control

dialog
Normally, all users need to do here is select the TCX file and (optionally) specify a name for
theoutput pressure channel.
In Figure 12.3.2 - 1, the rate schedule which will be used (Input datafile: Column name) is for
a test design. The default dimensionless Solution Model is the file PANMESH.TCX, which is
12. 3. 3. Generating the Welltest Response at a Remote Point

saved whenever users exit PanMesh. This may or may not pertain to the model in the current
PAN file, depending on whether any different simulations have been run since it was simulated.
So, only use PANMESH.TCX if it is for the current model.
In Figure 12.3.2 - 1, at the time of running the simulation the wellbore response was saved as A-
128 WELLBORE.TCX so that a permanent record could be kept. This can be used to regenerate
the welltest response. The files POINT 1.TCX and POINT 2.TCX represent pressures at different
points in the reservoir, and these will be covered in Section 12. 3. 3.
Note: If users do not have a back-up TCX file of the dimensionless wellbore response, and
the PANMESH.TCX is not for the current reservoir model, the dimensionless response
will have to be regenerated using PanMesh: New run (Section 12. 1), or PanMesh:
Replay (Section 12. 2) if users were wise enough to save a history file.
Select the TCX file to use, and select OK. The pressure response will be created as a channel
called Sim P, along with two rate channels Sim Q total and Sim Q#1. The Names button in the
Simulation Control dialog can be used to change the names if desired, or users can change them
later using the Edit facility under Gauge Data on the Dataprep menu.
12.3.3. Generating the Welltest Response at a Remote Point

This can only be done if the pressure-at-a-point facility has been used in PanMesh (Section 12. 1.
7) and users have saved the dimensionless response as a TCX file.
Follow exactly the same procedure as in Section 12. 3. 2, but select the TCX file for pressure at
a point. The Names button should be used to give the pressure channel a useful name such as P
Point#1, to avoid confusion later. The pressure can be viewed (and compared with other
pressures) on the Data Edit Plot, or overlaid on a diagnostic plot of the wellbore response.
427
Figure : 12.3.3 - 1 Overlay of Pressure at a Point (solid) on Semi-Log

Plot of Wellbore Pressure
12.4. Examples
Data files to accompany the following tutorials are supplied as part of the installation, and can be
located in the PanSystem data directory.
12.4.1. Example 1
Well Near a Pinch-Out (File: PM_ex1 pinchout.PAN)
The following example describes the setting up of a reservoir with a wedge-shaped cross section,
with the well close to the pinch-out. PanMesh requires that all sub-layers have a finite thickness
at each node, so the pinch-out is not modelled as a “knife-edge”, but as a thin vertical boundary
5 ft thick. The top surface of the reservoir in this example is horizontal, and the bottom surface is
dipping at about 6°. (In general, the dip of the planes defining the upper and lower surfaces of the
sub-layer must not exceed 45° from horizontal - this means that the maximum pinch-out angle
that could be modelled would be 90° with the reservoir top and bottom at maximum dip.
The aim is to simulate a long constant-rate drawdown followed by a shut-in period, using the
Test Design facility. (Users may enter any flowing/shut-in sequence they desire, using Test
Design).
12. 4. Examples
Example Set-Up
This example explains how to set-up the reservoir model from scratch, and how to generate the
simulated pressure response. Users will find a completed set-up, including the simulated data, in
the file PM_ex1 pinchout.PAN, which is included in the installation.
428
Rather than do all the work, users may prefer to look through the supplied file, check the items
described below, then open PanMesh to generate a numerical response for comparison with the
P#1 pressure in the file (which should be identical, provided users do not change anything!)
The first step when modelling any reservoir is to set-up the PanSystem file in the normal way, or
to load an existing file. In this case, the welltest response will be investigated for a long
production period followed by a shut-in, using the Test Design facility. Select the Test Design
button and enter a 1000 hr drawdown at 200 STB/day, 50 steps, format 2, and a 100 hr shut-in,
100 steps, format 2. For information about Test Design, please refer to “Test Design”, on page
149.
PanMesh Data Preparation

Now enter the Well and Reservoir Description (Numerical) option from the Dataprep menu.
Note: that the permeability is assumed to be isotropic. Users may introduce anisotropy (Kx, Ky,
Kz) if they wish. The mechanical skin factor is modelled with a Damaged Zone of 2 ft radius by
default. Users may change this if they wish.
On the Reservoir Geometry tab, drag the origin of the red axis bars to the top left corner of the
reservoir view area with the right mouse button, then scale the area to 10000 ft in the x-axis
(East) direction and 15000 ft in the y-axis (South) direction. For this example, a rectangular
geometry will be used, so select the Rectangle button along the top of the scale window. When
the cursor is moved back to the view area users will see that the cursor has changed to a cross.
Click on the screen and the default rectangle will be positioned centrally.
Below is a table of the x and y co-ordinates that will be used for each node:
Table 2: Node Co-ordinates
Node 1 x=5000ft y=500ft

To move each node to the exact positions required, the nodes could be left-clicked and dragged
on this view using the coordinate read-out beneath the drawing area for guidance. However,
since the exact locations are noted, it is quicker to type the co-ordinates into the Node Parameters
dialog box.
Double-click on any one of the nodes in the view area, and the Node Parameters dialog will be
seen as shown in Figure 12.4.1 - 1, “Node Parameters dialog box”.
12. 4. 1. Example 1
429
Figure : 12.4.1 - 1 Node Parameters dialog box

This dialog can also be accessed from the tabular summary below the Reservoir View area, by
double-clicking on the node number to be edited.
Users can now type in the relevant co-ordinates for the node selected. Use the scroll arrows
beside the Node ID box to move to each of the other nodes.
So far, the reservoir has just been defined in plan view. Now, the layer cross-section can be
defined. In this example, only one sub-layer is being used - this is the default setting, but check
that the entry for Number of Sub-Layers is 1. Still operating within the Node Parameters dialog,
enter a Thickness of 500 ft for Node 1.
When users enter a value for the first node PanSystem will assign this value to all the nodes. This
saves additional typing if the sub-layer is of uniform thickness. However, in this case, the
thickness of Node 2 can be left at 500 ft, but the thickness of Nodes 3 and 4 must be edited to 5
ft. This defines a rectangular reservoir with a wedge-shaped cross-section. The reservoir top is
horizontal, the bottom is dipping at almost 6 degrees to the east.
Users will notice in the table under the drawing area that nodes 1, 2 and 3 have green ticks. This
indicates they are the three nodes being used to define the upper and lower surfaces, and the
thickness at node 4 is not being used. Users can nominate any 3 nodes for this purpose.
12. 4. 1. Example 1
430
Figure : 12.4.1 - 2 Plan view of the Reservoir, with Node Co-ordinates

Entered
Double left-click on the View Area anywhere outside the reservoir to see the structure as a 3-D
image.
12. 4. 1. Example 1
Figure : 12.4.1 - 3 3-D View of the Reservoir

Users can rotate the image with the {F5} and {F6} keys. Double left-clicking again will return
users back to the plan view.
431
Now select the Well Configuration tab. Set the Wellbore Radius to 0.276 ft. A vertical, fully
completed well is being defined, so the only entries required are the X and Y co-ordinates of the
well and the Open interval. Enter the well co-ordinates as (440, -5000). Suppose the MD to Top
of Reservoir at the well is 8000 ft RKB. For a fully perforated interval, the Open Interval (MD)
will be from 8000 ft to 8029 ft (approx.). The exact reservoir bottom is at 8029.8 ft, and if users
enter 8030 ft, then select OK, a warning will be issued:
Figure : 12.4.1 - 4 Open interval error

If users enter too large a value for the bottom of an open interval (or too small a value for the
top), PanSystem will simply correct them internally (i.e. it will clip the open interval to conform
to the reservoir top and/or bottom).
In the Wellbore Storage dialog, select the Classical model, and enter a coefficient of 0.001 bbls/
psi.
Return to the Reservoir Geometry tab and view the structure in 3-D. Users will now see that the
well has been added (node #0) with a white line showing the open interval (Figure 12.4.1 - 3).
Now for the Material Properties. This is an oil producer, with a reservoir pressure of 5000 psia
and temperature 200°F. Enter volume factor Bo = 1.2 rb/STB, viscosity = 0.5 cP, total
compressibility Ct = 8.2E-6 psi-1, porosity = 0.36, and all components of the permeability = 91
mD. (Users may experiment with areal and vertical anisotropy if they wish). The principal axis
of the Kx permeability component is by default 90° from north - which is in the direction of the
easterly dipping lower surface in this case. This is only significant if users are modelling areal
anisotropy. The Kz component is perpendicular to the base of the sub-layer. This is only
significant if users are modelling vertical anisotropy.
Enter a skin factor S = 2.3. Skin is modelled as a finite damaged region around the well. The
default radius is 2 ft, and the corresponding permeability is 42.1 mD. This will change if the
radius is altered.
Running PanMesh
Select OK from the PanMesh Data Preparation section, then select the Numerical Simulation
option - PanMesh: New Run from the Simulate Menu. After the prompt indicating the number
of hours that the numerical simulation will be run for (1100 hrs in this case), there will be a pause
of several seconds while PanMesh starts up and creates the mesh for reservoir.
12. 4. 1. Example 1
Users will then see the reservoir in solid plan view. To view the mesh, click the Wire Frame
button and switch-off the Solid View button (Figure 12.4.1 - 5).
432
Figure : 12.4.1 - 5 Wire Frame View of the Mesh for the Pinch-Out Model
Users can rotate the image by left-clicking on the structure and holding the mouse button down
while moving the pointer. Users can also zoom-in, move and rotate the structure using the cursor
keys or the key pad to the right of the screen.
The simulation is ready to be run, so either select the Go button or select Go from the
Simulation menu.
Once the simulation has finished (it should only take about 16 secs on a Pentium 550), the
pressure distribution can be investigated before exiting from PanMesh. Either click the Color
Contour button or select Show color contours from the Review / Pressure menu.
12. 4. 1. Example 1
433
Figure : 12.4.1 - 6 Colour Visualization of the Pressure Propagation

By moving the vertical (green) time line on the Pd/Td graph users can track the propagation of
the pressure on the 3-D image during the test.
PanMesh generates a dimensionless response for a constant-rate drawdown. The slope on the
derivative at the very beginning is a half-slope attributed to early finite wellbore radius behaviour
(it is not wellbore storage, which is not modelled in PanMesh!). Following initial periods of
radial flow through the damaged zone and the reservoir, the derivative rises as the pinch-out
boundary to the west is felt. However, the increasing thickness of the reservoir to the east causes
the derivative to drop down again and tend towards a negative half slope. The effects of the outer
boundaries are then felt and a closed system response (unit slope) is observed at the end of the
test.
On closing PanMesh and returning to PanSystem, a pressure column called FEM P. will be
created. This uses the dimensionless response from PanMesh, and convolves it with the wellbore
storage and the welltest rate schedule (drawdown + build-up) to produce the real-time and
pressure response.
If users have run PanMesh starting from the supplied PM_ex1 pinchout.PAN file, they can
compare the ready-made response (P#1) with the simulated data (FEM P) on, for example, the
Log-Log plot, using the Edit / Overlay pressure facility. They should be identical unless users
have changed something.
12. 4. 1. Example 1
434
Figure : 12.4.1 - 7 Log-Log Plot of the Extended Drawdown Data for the
Pinch-Out Model, Showing the Negative Half-Slope Preceding the Semi-
Steady-State Unit Slope
The buildup derivative is very similar:
12. 4. 1. Example 1
Figure : 12.4.1 - 8 Log-Log Plot of the Build-Up, with the Analytical Quick
Match Simulation (solid curve) Overlaid.
An analytical pinch-out model is available from the Analysis Model list for comparison. The
agreement is good, provided the distance to the pinch-out is entered as 288 ft - which is the
distance to the theoretical point of convergence of the reservoir top and bottom surfaces - rather
than the 240 ft to the actual boundary.
435
The analytical model does not allow a closed system, so the late time responses will start to
diverge.
Users can experiment with alternative configurations of the pinch-out, say by having the top and
bottom surfaces dipping rather than just the bottom, or perhaps using two layers and having the
common boundary horizontal, but the top and bottom surfaces both angled.
Duplicate Names
Once users have made the first PanMesh run, they will have a pressure column called FEM P.
Unless this is re-named, the next time users exit from PanMesh they will receive a prompt,
warning about duplicate column names.
Figure : 12.4.1 - 9 Duplicate (pressure) Column Name Warning

Users have the option to OK and overwrite the existing FEM P with the new one, or Cancel, in
which case they can specify an alternative name (e.g. FEM P2).
Figure : 12.4.1 - 10 New Name for the New Simulated Pressure

This would let users compare the new simulated data with the previous run. The rate columns are
not usually of interest. If users did not delete the rate columns - FEM Q total and FEM Q#1 from
the previous run, the duplicate name warning will apply to these as well. Unless users want to
compare sandface rates, just let the new ones overwrite the old.
12. 4. 1. Example 1
Select OK on this dialog, and OK again on the next one, which does not need to be altered.
Users will then be returned to the Log-Log plot (or whatever plot was being used when PanMesh
was invoked) with the new simulated data overlain.
436
Try these inputs for alternative node sand layer thicknesses:
Table 3: Suggested Node Properties #1 (reservoir top and bottom dipping)
Node 1 x=5000ft y=500ft z =0ft layer 1=500ft layer 2=0

Node 2 x=5000ft y=10000ft z = 0ft layer 1=500ft layer 2=0
Node 3 x=200ft y=10000ft z =250ft layer 1=5ft layer 2=0
Node 4 x=200ft y=500ft z =250ft layer1= 5ft layer 2=0
Table 4: Suggested Node Properties #2 (two sub layers)
Node 1 x=5000ft y=500ft z =0ft layer 1=250ft layer 2=250ft

Node 2 x=5000ft y=10000ft z = 0ft layer 1=250ft layer 2=250ft
Node 3 x=200ft y=10000ft z =250ft layer 1=25ft layer 2=25ft
Node 4 x=200ft y=500ft z =250ft layer1= 25ft layer 2=25ft
12.4.2. Example 2
A Two-Layered Reservoir, One Layer Perforated (File: PM_ex2 dual
perm.PAN)
This example is a two-layered rectangular reservoir containing a vertical well completed in the
upper layer (sub-layer 1), permeability 91 md. The unperforated layer (sub-layer 2) has a lower
permeability and porosity, and an anisotropy factor of 0.05.
Check the numerical input data screens and note:
• How the two layers have been configured

• The well completion
• The different material properties assigned.
The skin factor of 3 in sub-layer 1 has been modelled as a damaged zone of 1 ft radius and
permeability 27.3 md. The small damaged zone radius was chosen so that the early radial flow in
sub-layer 1 would not be obscured by radial flow in the damaged zone.
The simulation models the development of horizontal radial flow in the producing layer, through
a transition period of crossflow between layers within the reservoir (from the uncompleted layer
into the completed layer), to horizontal radial flow in both layers. This is analogous to the
12. 4. 2. Example 2
classical “dual-permeability” response. The system finally goes into semi-steady-state as the
outer boundaries are reached.
While running PanMesh, note that on the Pd versus Td graph, what at first glance looks like a
unit slope and wellbore storage effect at early time is in fact a half-slope corresponding to the
classical finite wellbore radius response at small Td (where the analytical logarithmic
approximation is not valid), followed by radial flow in the damaged zone. This portion occurs so
early that it will not usually be visible in the real pressure/time presentation in PanSystem. This
simulation took 3m 47s on a Pentium 550.
437
Switch-on the Color Contour option during or after simulation. For best results, select Side
View and click the Vertical Cut button on the toolbar. Now Zoom-In until the reservoir cross-
section fills about half the height of the View window. On the Graph, set the red line at about
Pd=1.0 and the blue line at Pd=100 and drag the green time-line to the left. Now, as users move
it to the right (drag it or step with the right arrow key), they will see the pressure disturbance
propagate out initially in the producing layer, then move downwards into the tight layer:
Figure : 12.4.2 - 1 Color Visualization, Showing Early Radial Flow in the

Upper Layer
On exiting from PanMesh, save a history file so the Replay mode can be used later. On returning
to PanSystem, the real-time/pressure response will be computed, and will exist as a channel
called FEM P. Users can delete the sandface rate columns.
12. 4. 2. Example 2
438
Figure : 12.4.2 - 2 PanSystem Log-Log Plot of the Numerical Simulation

Radial flow in the perforated layer occurs up to about 0.005 hrs elapsed time, after which the
transition response starts to develop. The permeability and skin derived from this early portion
are close to the input values. After total system (full thickness) radial flow, the unit slope on the
derivative at late time is caused by the reservoir closure (semi-steady-state).
This particular response can be compared to the analytical “dual-permeability” model using the
following parameters (computed from the relevant equations for Vertical Well Flow Models in
“Layer Parameters”, on page 196):
Theoretical inter-porosity flow coefficient (lambda) = 4.4E-7 using Layer 2 effective vertical
conductivity Teff = 3kv2/h2 (Equations 7.6.5 - II and - III on page 209).
Storativity ratio (omega) = 0.56 (table after Equation 7.6.5 - I on page 209).
Flow capacity ratio (kappa) = 0.614 (Equation 7.6.5 - V on page 210).
If users wish to experiment with this configuration, try:
- increasing/decreasing the vertical permeability in the unperforated layer

- increasing/decreasing the porosity (or total compressibility) in the unperforated layer
12. 4. 2. Example 2
- changing kh in the unperforated layer

- increasing the radius of the damaged region (keep the same value for S)
- perforating the second layer
439
12.4.3. Example 3
Horizontal Well in a Single-Layered Reservoir (File: PM_ex3 horizontal
well.PAN)
This example models a horizontal well with a 1000 ft open interval in a single-layer. Data from a
drawdown test (P: Gauge #1) are available. Conventional analysis of this data has resulted in a
set of parameters for the simulation, which have already been set-up in the file.
Inspect the input section to see how the well and reservoir have been configured. This is not a
particularly challenging example, and it can in fact be modelled analytically, but it is useful to
demonstrate the basic principles and to produce a familiar response.
Display the gauge data on, say, the Log-Log plot, and invoke Simulate / Numerical Simulation /
PanMesh: New run. View the mesh by switching-off the Solid Model button, and switching-on
the Wire Frame button. Experiment with Zoom and the horizontal and vertical cuts and try to
locate the well!
PanMesh will generate the dimensionless response. Users will see all the expected flow regimes
(vertical radial, linear (half-slope), the onset of horizontal radial. The simulation time is too short
to see semi-steady-state flow. Users can extend the default simulation time on entering PanMesh
from PanSystem (Figure 12.1.1 - 1).
For color visualization, try Front View, and select the Vertical Cut button. This will cut the
reservoir vertically along the wellbore. Users should Zoom-In until they can see the thickness of
the reservoir on a reasonable scale. Click on the graph, and set the red line at about Pd=0.01 and
the blue line at about Pd=1, then pull the green time-line over to the left. Now step the time-line
to the right. Users will see radial flow develop at the wellbore as the marker moves along the flat
portion of the derivative. As the red coloration reaches full reservoir thickness, linear flow starts
to develop.
12. 4. 3. Example 3
Figure : 12.4.3 - 1 Cross-section with Color Visualization, Showing

Vertical Radial Flow Around the Wellbore
440
Now switch to Top View, and switch-off the Vertical Cut. Users can now track the linear flow
regime developing into horizontal radial flow.
Figure : 12.4.3 - 2 Radial Flow Regime Develops and Propagates Out

into the Reservoir.
Since this simulation requires a fair bit of time to run (19 mins on a Pentium 550), it would be a
good idea to save a history file before leaving PanMesh, in case users want to replay the
visualization. Users will be prompted for this when they close the Graph window or PanMesh
itself. Users will then be returned to the Log-Log plot with the simulated data overlain on the
gauge data. Wellbore storage has been convolved with the constant rate drawdown simulation.
12. 4. 3. Example 3
441
Figure : 12.4.3 - 3 PanSystem Log-Log Plot with Numerical Simulation

(solid lines)
This simple model can also be simulated analytically - check the analytical input parameters and
run Quick Match to compare the analytical and numerical solutions.
12.4.4. Example 4
Partially-Completed Well (File: PM_ex4 partial completion.PAN)
The supplied file has been set up to model a single layer 100 ft thick, with a vertical well
perforated over a 40 ft section. The top of the perforations is 30 ft below reservoir top. Users
should look in the Well and Reservoir Description (Numerical) section to see how this has been
achieved.
The file was configured to model a sequence of flowing periods and shut-ins using rates
specified in Test Design. It already contains a simulated response (P1) generated with PanMesh,
which can be used as a reference for user’s efforts. This data can be inspected within Analysis in
the usual way and a good match can be obtained by using the analytical Quick Match model.
If users re-run the numerical simulation in PanMesh, they will see that the dimensionless
derivative shows the early period of radial flow at the perforations, followed by a period of
spherical flow (negative slope not well-developed because the penetration ratio is fairly large),
12. 4. 4. Example 4
then full thickness radial flow and, finally, semi-steady-state flow as the outer boundaries are
reached. The run takes 2m 30s on a Pentium 550.
442
Figure : 12.4.4 - 1 PanMesh Pd versus Td Graph for a Partially- Completed Well

In this example, the skin factor has been left at zero so that the early “radial flow at perforations”
portion can be seen clearly. If users add a skin factor, the radial flow in the damaged region
partially masks this portion.
Return to PanSystem Dataprep / Gauge data and select the newly simulated pressure FEM P as
the Master Pressure column. View the real pressure response on the Data Edit plot - users will see
that the constant rate drawdown response generated by PanMesh has been convolved with the
multiple rate sequence specified in Test Design.
In Analysis, select the first flowing period and go to the Log-Log plot. The derivative shows that
it just reaches the onset of semi-steady-state before the well is shut-in for the first time.
If users analyze this data, they will find that the early portion (radial flow at perforations) tends
to slightly overestimate the permeability derived from the line-fit based on the analytical model.
12. 4. 4. Example 4
443
Figure : 12.4.4 - 2 PanSystem Log-Log Plot of Numerical Simulation

The agreement with the Quick Match analytical response can be improved by increasing the
perforated interval from 40 ft to 41 ft. The boundaries of the drainage area cannot be modelled
exactly with Quick Match, but a reasonable match to the overall depletion during the test can be
obtained by using an equivalent square with L = 4028 ft.
Some scenarios to experiment with are:
- add wellbore storage

- reduce the vertical permeability
- reduce the size of the open interval
- position the open interval at the top of the layer.
- give the well some deviation from vertical
Remember that each new run of PanMesh will, by default, result in a real pressure channel called
FEM P in PanSystem. If users want to compare successive runs, avoid overwriting the previous
pressures by taking the option to re-name the pressure channel when returning from PanMesh to
PanSystem. In this way, users can accumulate a set of simulated pressure columns FEM P, FEM
P1, FEM P2, etc. On the Log-Log (or any other) plot, users can compare two pressures by using
the Edit / Overlay pressure option.
12. 4. 4. Example 4
444
Deliverability
Chapter 13- Deliverability
In this chapter users will find information on how to use the Deliverability function.
PanSystem provides the following two methods for calculating the deliverability (or injectivity)
of a reservoir:
• Fitting to Measured Test Point Data:
- for oil and water fluid types, the program fits the Vogel IPR relation (ref. 2) to up to 3
measured flowing pressures and rates,
- for gas and condensate fluid types, the deliverability curve is computed either:
a) using the Darcy (B) and non-Darcy (F) flow coefficients estimated by an LIT analysis
(Ref. 1, 20, 21, 32) of measured flowing pressures and rates (see LIT icon in the
Analysis section),
or alternatively...
b) using the C-coefficient and n-exponent obtained from a simplified C-and-n analysis
(refs 20, 21) of measured data (see C+n icon in the Analysis section).
• Semi-theoretical Derivation:
- for oil and water fluid types, the productivity index J is calculated from the semi-steady-
state inflow equation, and the Vogel IPR relation is applied,
- for gas and condensate fluid types:
a) LIT method: the Darcy flow coefficient (B) is calculated from the semi-steady-state
inflow equation, the non-Darcy (F) flow coefficient is derived from a rate versus. skin
analysis of transient welltest data (Section “Skin versus Flowrate Plot”, on page 347).
The deliverability curve is then calculated
or alternatively...
b) C-and-n method: the “stabilized deliverability” is estimated from a theoretical
stabilized flowrate.
13.1. Deliverability: Oil/Water systems
Description:
When the fluid type is oil or water, the IPR option either leads to the Transient and Welltest
Deliverability Results dialog box Figure 13.1.1 - 1, “Calculation dialog for the IPR of an Oil/
Chapter 13 - Deliverability
Water System (Production),” on page 446 or Figure 13.1.1 - 2, “Calculation dialog for the IPR of
an Oil/Water System (Injection),” on page 446. This is where the necessary data are assembled
and the calculations made. The deliverability or injectivity can be calculated from the results of
transient welltest and extended drawdown analysis, or from production test data. Where both
sets of data are available, this allows users to check for consistency of the reservoir parameters.
13.1.1. Deliverability Calculations

What users see:
The Transient and Welltest Deliverability Results dialog box appears.
445
Deliverability
Figure : 13.1.1 - 1 Calculation dialog for the IPR of an Oil/Water System

(Production)
13. 1. 1. Deliverability Calculations

Figure : 13.1.1 - 2 Calculation dialog for the IPR of an Oil/Water System (Injection)
PanSystem allows for the overlaying of up to 5 IPR’s on the one Plot. This is of benefit when
users wish to compare possible scenarios (e.g. different skin factors).
At the bottom right of the dialog users will notice a checkbox with a number and two green
arrows, this provides a navigation facility between the various IPR sets users wish to define and
apply. The default dialog page is designated number 0, with the additional IPR dialog pages
numbered 1 to 4.
If users wish to include a page of calculated data in the IPR plot, select the page number and
check the checkbox.
446
Deliverability
Figure : 13.1.1 - 3 IPR Plot (3 layer pressures)
The generic dialog for production or injection wells is described as follows:

Injection Well checkbox: This should only be checked if an injection well is under
consideration.
Note: that if the Injection Well checkbox is checked in any of the IPR dialogs, Production
Forecasting is disallowed (i.e. the Production Forecasting option is disabled in the Deliverability
menu). This selection also enables textual and computational changes within some of the
sections described below:
Layer Parameters area: This information is derived from the reservoir description, which will
contain any diagnostic plot results confirmed with the Cnf button during analysis (see Section
“Cnf: Confirm Plot Results to Reservoir Description”, on page 336). The Dietz shape factor
(CA) and Drainage area (A) may have been confirmed from the Cartesian plot analysis of an
extended drawdown (see Section “Cartesian Plot”, on page 340). Edit data as required. If a
checkbox is checked, the associated parameter will always be (re)set to the current confirmed
value whenever users re-enter the IPR dialog box or select the Calculate button. If users wish to
preserve a different value during calculations then uncheck the check box to prevent it being re-
set.
13. 1. 1. Deliverability Calculations

Note: For an injection well, the Bubble Point (Pb) data input field should be disabled/grayed-out
(i.e. oil will be treated with a straight-line IPR).
• Transient Test Data area: This requires the horizontal permeability and the skin factor S.
The inflow equation used for the IPR assumes semi-steady state radial flow (Equation 15.1.4
- I, on page 507 ). For some reservoir models (radial homogeneous and dual-porosity), the
skin factor and permeability can be transferred directly from the confirmed values in the
Model Parameters (derived from diagnostic plot analysis, etc.) since they already correspond
to radial flow.
For other models (partial-penetration, horizontal well, etc.) the equivalent pseudo-radial skin
factor Spr must be calculated from the mechanical skin S stored in Model Parameters, using
other relevant parameters such as penetration ratio, well length, etc., as appropriate for the
current model. Additionally, for the dual-permeability and radial composite models, the
permeability is converted to full thickness or outer region permeability respectively. To this
end, a Model Parameters button is available at the bottom of the IPR dialog to facilitate
quick access for viewing, or editing, the layer parameters involved in these conversions.
447
Deliverability
Figure : 13.1.1 - 4 Model Parameters dialog generated from the IPR

dialog (for fractured well)
Select Calculate to (re)compute the pseudo-radial skin and the semi-steady-state Productivity/
Injectivity Index (J), and the AOF from the Vogel relationship.
• Production/Injection Test Data area: (optional) Enter up to three Test Points (i.e. either
measured flowing pressure/rate pairs for production or measured injection pressure/rate pairs
for injection). Select Calculate and a Vogel curve will be fitted through the point(s). The
Productivity/Injectivity Index (J) and AOF (i.e. for Deliverability only) will be computed.
- If only one Test Point is entered, the IPR curve will be fitted through that point and the
Layer Pressure.
- If two or three Test Points are specified, a best-fit will be made through them. The specified
Layer Pressure is not included in this fit. On the contrary, an extrapolation is made to zero
rate and an Estimated Shut-in Pressure is calculated. This value can be used to revise the
Layer Pressure (if appropriate).
As each dialog page produces an independent set of data, Calculate must be clicked for each
page once users are satisfied with their entered data. Always (re)Calculate if any data is
changed.
Note: The AOF (Absolute Openhole Flow) calculation is carried out at Pwf = 14.7 psia. For
reservoirs below bubble-point, (J) is the slope of the IPR at lim|Q → 0|. The AOF calculation
facility is not enabled if the Injection Well checkbox is checked and an Injectivity Index (J), is
computed instead of a Productivity Index (J).
Select OK to exit the calculation window and proceed to the IPR plots.
13. 1. 2. Toolbar Options
13.1.2. Toolbar Options

IPR
Use IPR to return to the Transient and Welltest Deliverability Results dialog box.
IPR plot: transient data

Use TR LIN to display the IPR plot created using the Transient Test Data method.
448
Deliverability
IPR plot: test data
Use WT LIN to display the IPR plot created using the Production Test Data. The test points
will also be plotted, on a linear axis.
IPR plot: transient and test data
Use T/W LIN to display both IPR curves simultaneously, as in the following figure (on a
linear axis):
Figure : 13.1.2 - 1 IPR Plot Comparing Results from Transient and Test
Point Data.
13.2. Deliverability: Gas and Condensate systems

Description:
When the fluid type is gas or condensate, the IPR option either leads to the dialog box Transient
13. 2. Deliverability: Gas and Condensate systems

and Welltest & LIT results Figure 13.2.1 - 1, “Calculation dialog for the Deliverability of a Gas
or Condensate Well (Production),” on page 450 or Figure 13.2.1 - 2, “Calculation dialog for the
Deliverability of a Gas or Condensate Well (Injection),” on page 450. This is where the necessary
data are assembled and the calculations made. The deliverability or injectivity can be calculated
from the results of transient and extended drawdown analysis, or from production test data,
using the LIT (refs 1, 20, 21, 32) or simplified C-and-n (refs 20, 21) methods.
For retrograde condensate fluid type, all surface production figures refer to separator gas. The
fluid will however be modelled as a single-phase “rich” or “wet” gas in the reservoir (see Section
“Gas Condensate”, on page 241), unless the multi-phase pseudo-pressure option has been
selected (see Section 7. 2. 2 “Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method”, on page 185).
The multi-phase pseudo-pressure method will model liquid dropout below dew-point and the
associated multi-phase relative permeability effects.
13.2.1. Calculations: Transient and LIT Data

If users have not performed a C-and-n analysis, one of the following two dialog boxes will be
generated. If users have not performed an LIT analysis the bottom section of the screen will be
disabled/grayed-out. Where both sets of data are available, users will be able to check for
consistency of the reservoir parameters by comparing the deliverability/injectivity estimates.
449
Deliverability
Figure : 13.2.1 - 1 Calculation dialog for the Deliverability of a Gas or

Condensate Well (Production)
13. 2. 1. Calculations: Transient and LIT Data
Figure : 13.2.1 - 2 Calculation dialog for the Deliverability of a Gas or

Condensate Well (Injection)
PanSystem allows for the overlaying of up to 5 IPR’s on a single plot. This is of benefit when
users wish to compare possible scenarios (e.g. different skin factors).
numbered 1 to 4.
450
Deliverability
If users wish to include a page of calculated data in the IPR plot, select the page number and
check the checkbox.

• Injection Well checkbox: This should only be checked if an injection well is under
consideration.
• Layer Parameters area: This information is derived from the reservoir description, which
will contain any diagnostic plot results confirmed with the Cnf button during analysis (see
Section “Cnf: Confirm Plot Results to Reservoir Description”, on page 336). The Dietz
shape factor (CA) and Drainage area (A) may have been confirmed from the Cartesian plot
analysis of an extended drawdown (see Section “Cartesian Plot”, on page 340). Edit data as
required. If a check box is checked, the associated parameter will always be (re)set to the
current confirmed value whenever users re-enter the IPR dialog box or select the Calculate
button. If users wish to enter and save a different value, uncheck the checkbox to prevent it
being re-set.
• Transient Test Data area: This requires the horizontal permeability, the skin factor S and
the rate-dependent skin coefficient D.
The inflow equation used for the IPR assumes semi-steady-state radial flow (Equation 15.8.5
- XVI, on page 551 ). For some reservoir models (radial homogeneous, dual-porosity), the
required skin terms can be transferred directly from the confirmed values in the Model
Parameters (derived from diagnostic plot analysis, etc.) since they already correspond to
radial flow.
For other models (e.g. partial-penetration, horizontal well, etc.), the equivalent pseudo-radial
13. 2. 1. Calculations: Transient and LIT Data

skin terms Spr and Dpr must be calculated from the mechanical skin S and coefficient D
stored in Model Parameters, using other relevant parameters such as penetration ratio, well
length, etc., as appropriate for the current model. For the dual-permeability and radial
composite models, the permeability also has to be converted to full thickness or outer region
permeability respectively. To this end, a Model Parameters button is available at the bottom
of the IPR dialog to facilitate quick access for viewing, or editing, the layer parameters
involved in these conversions.
451
Deliverability
Figure : 13.2.1 - 3 Model Parameters dialog on the Gas Well IPR screen
(horizontal well)
To preserve a different value during sensitivity calculations, uncheck the checkboxes in the
Transient Welltest Data area to prevent the values being re-set.
Select Calculate to (re)compute the Darcy flow coefficient (B or Bpr); the Rate-dependent
skin coefficient (D or Dpr); and the AOF.
• LIT Analysis Data area: The Darcy and Non-Darcy flow coefficients (B and F) will be
confirmed values from the LIT analysis of a multi-rate test if users have analyzed one (see
Section “LIT Plot”, on page 350). Edit values if required.
If users have not done an LIT analysis in PanSystem, but have values for the B and F
coefficients, check the Include LIT Analysis Data checkbox and type in the values.
Note: that the pseudo-radial nomenclatures “Bpr” and “Fpr” replace B and F for consistency
with the transient section for those models where this is relevant.
Selecting Calculate will compute the AOF from F and B, and the Rate-dependent skin
coefficient (D) from F and k. As each dialog page produces an independent set of data,
Calculate must be selected for each page once users are satisfied with the entered data. Always
(re)Calculate if any data has been changed.
Note: The AOF (Absolute Openhole Flow) calculation is carried out at Pwf = 14.7 psia. The
AOF calculation facility is not enabled if the Injection Well checkbox is checked.
13. 2. 2. Toolbar options
Select OK to exit the calculation window.
13.2.2. Toolbar options

IPR
Use IPR to return to the Transient Welltest & LIT Results dialog box.
Deliverability plot: transient data

Use TR LIN to display the deliverability plot created using the Transient Test Data method,
on linear axes.
452
Deliverability
AOF plot: transient data
Use TR LOG to display the deliverability ("AOF") plot created using the Transient Test Data
method, on log-log axes.
Deliverability plot: LIT data

Use LIT LIN to display the deliverability plot created using the LIT Analysis Data method,
on linear axes. The extended flow point(s) will also be plotted, as shown below for a four-point
flow-after-flow test:
Figure : 13.2.2 - 1 Deliverability Plot Derived from LIT Analysis of a Four-

Point Flow-After-Flow Test
AOF plot: from LIT data
Use LIT LOG to display the AOF plot created using the LIT Analysis Data method, on log-
log axes. The extended flow point(s) will also be plotted.
Deliverability plot: transient and LIT data

Use T/L LIN to display the deliverability plot created using the Transient and LIT Analysis
Data methods simultaneously, on linear axes. The extended flowing pressure(s) will be plotted.
AOF plot: transient and LIT data

Use T/L LOG to display the AOF plots, created using the Transient and LIT Analysis Data
methods, simultaneously on log-log axes, as shown in the following plot. The extended flow
13. 2. 2. Toolbar options
points will also be plotted. A solid red line indicates layer pressure and AOF (LIT).
453
Deliverability
Figure : 13.2.2 - 2 Log-Log AOF Plot Derived from LIT (solid line) and
Transient Test Data
13.2.3. Calculations: C-and-n Method

If users have performed a C-and-n analysis (C+n icon in the Analysis section), the C&n Results
dialog box is generated (Figure 13.2.3 - 1, “Calculation dialogs for Deliverability of a Gas or
Condensate Well by the Simplified C-and-n Method (Production on left - Injection on right),” on
page 454).
13. 2. 3. Calculations: C-and-n Method
Figure : 13.2.3 - 1 Calculation dialogs for Deliverability of a Gas or Condensate

Well by the Simplified C-and-n Method (Production on left - Injection on right)
PanSystem allows for the overlaying of up to 5 IPR’s on the one Plot. This is of benefit when
users wish to compare possible scenarios (e.g. different n values).
numbered 1 to 4.
454
Deliverability
If users wish to include a page of calculated data in the comparison plot, select the page number
and check the checkbox.
• Injection Well checkbox: This should only be checked if an injection well is under
consideration.
• Layer Parameters area: This information is derived from the reservoir description, which
will contain any diagnostic plot results confirmed with the Cnf icon during analysis (e.g. of a
build-up test) (see Section “Cnf: Confirm Plot Results to Reservoir Description”, on page
336). The Dietz shape factor (CA) and Drainage area (A) may have been confirmed from
the Cartesian plot analysis of an extended drawdown (see Section “Cartesian Plot”, on page
340). They will default to 31.62 and 640 acres (= 259 ha or 1 section spacing) if not
initialized. Edit data as required. If a checkbox is checked, the associated parameter will
always be (re)set to the current confirmed value whenever users re-enter the IPR dialog box
or select the Calculate button. If users wish to enter and preserve a different value, uncheck
the checkbox to prevent it being re-set.
• Extended Data area: the C- and n-coefficients are derived from the C-and-n plot analysis (if
confirmed with the Cnf icon). Edit data as required.
Select Calculate to compute the AOF (using “Equation 10.3.2 - IV”, on page 354, also: see
Section “C-and-n Plot”, on page 354).
• Stabilized Data area: The Stabilized Flowing Pressure is the pressure recorded at the end
of the extended flow period (or the last extended flow period in the case of a flow-after-flow
test). Edit if required.
Selecting Calculate will compute the theoretical Stabilized Flowrate corresponding to this
flowing pressure, from the pseudo-steady-state inflow equation using k, S, A and CA. The
13. 2. 3. Calculations: C-and-n Method

Stabilized C-coefficient is then calculated from this flowrate using the n-coefficient, and
then the Stabilized AOF. Equations are provided: see Section 15. 8. 5 “Deliverability
Analysis - Gas Wells”, on page 548.
As each dialog page produces an independent set of data, Calculate must be selected for each
page once users are satisfied with their entered data. Always (re)Calculate if any data has
been changed.
Select OK to exit the calculation window.
455
Deliverability
The More Results... button leads to a supplementary results dialog:
Figure : 13.2.3 - 2 Additional Results from the C-and-n Method.

Each overlying Calculation dialog has a corresponding individual additional results screen.
The Radius of Investigation is computed for the extended flowing point. The Time to
Stabilisation is the theoretical time at which the Stabilized Flow Rate will be attained.
The Calculate button will re-calculate all items in response to a change in the entries for k and S.
Users would not normally edit this screen as it should remain consistent with the previous one.
OK returns users to the main dialog box and retains any changes, Cancel ignores the changes.
13.2.4. Toolbar Options
IPR
Use IPR to return to the C-and-n Results dialog box.
Deliverability plot: extended data
Use EXT LIN to display the deliverability plot created using the Extended Flow data, on
linear axes. The measured extended flowing point(s) will be included.
AOF plot: extended data
Use EXT LOG to display the deliverability ("AOF") plot created using the Extended Flow
data, on log-log axes. The measured extended flowing point(s) will be included.
Deliverability plot: stabilized data
Use STB LIN to display the deliverability plot created using the Stabilized Flow data, on
linear axes. The calculated stabilized flowing point will be included.
AOF plot: stabilized data
Use STB LOG to display the deliverability AOF plot created using the Stabilized Flow data,
on log-log axes. The calculated stabilized flowing point will be included.
456
Deliverability
Deliverability plot: extended and stabilized data
Use E/S LIN to display the deliverability plot created using the Extended and Stabilised
Data simultaneously, on linear axes as shown in the following plot. The measured extended
flowing pressure(s) (diamonds) and computed stabilized point (square) will be plotted.
Figure : 13.2.4 - 1 Deliverability Plot Showing the Extended and

Stabilized Curves and Flow Points from a Four-Point Flow-After-Flow
Test.
AOF plot: extended and stabilized data

Use E/S LOG to display the AOF plots created using the Extended and Stabilized Data
simultaneously, on log-log axes, as shown in the following plot. The extended flowing point(s)
(diamonds) and stabilized point (square) will also be plotted. A solid red line indicates layer
pressure and stabilized AOF.
Figure : 13.2.4 - 2 AOF Plot Showing Extended and Stabilized Data.
457
Deliverability
13.3. Production Forecasting
Description:
This facility provides a prediction of well production rate against time once the deliverability
characteristics of the well have been determined. In infinite or partially-bounded reservoirs or
drainage areas, the forecast shows the effect of transient reservoir flow regimes and the response
to boundaries. For closed systems, pressure depletion and changing gas compressibility are
modelled for long-term forecasting, through transient, transitional and semi-steady or steady-
state flow regimes. An option is also provided to perform the forecast with constant fluid
compressibility if desired.
The forecasting facility is available for oil, gas and condensate systems, but not for injection
wells.
Note: If the Injection Well checkbox is checked in any of the IPR dialogs, Production
menu).
For retrograde condensate fluid type, all gas surface production figures refer to separator gas.
The fluid will however be modelled as a single-phase “rich” or “wet” gas in the reservoir (see
Section “Gas Condensate”, on page 241), unless the multi-phase pseudo-pressure option has
been selected (see Section 7. 2. 2 “Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method”, on page 185). The
multi-phase pseudo-pressure will model liquid dropout below dew-point and the associated
multi-phase relative permeability effects.
All reservoir and boundary models (see Section 7 “Well and Reservoir Description”, on page
183) which may be defined in PanSystem are available in the forecasting model, with the
exception of commingled layers and the two-cell compartmentalized boundary model.
13.3.1. Forecasting Data

What users see:
On selecting the Forecasting option a dialog similar to Figure 13.3.1 - 1, “Production
Forecasting dialog box (gas well),” on page 459 is generated.
The first section of this dialog box allows the time period of the forecast to be defined. In the
Time Units area users may select hours, days, months or years. A “month” is taken to be 30.437
days (i.e. 365.25 days/12 months).
There are two time-stepping regimes. Linear stepping uses equally spaced time-steps.
Logarithmic stepping uses logarithmically spaced steps starting from a specified Start time
(actually the time of the first step). The default Logarithmic stepping regime is usually better, 13. 3. Production Forecasting
owing to the high and rapidly changing production rates at the beginning.
458
Deliverability
Figure : 13.3.1 - 1 Production Forecasting dialog box (gas well)

Select the time units and stepping regime, and enter the desired End time and No. of steps. For
logarithmic stepping, enter a Start time for the first time step. Since flowrates are high initially,
this should be a small value (of the order of a few hours) to avoid material balance errors in
closed systems.
The calculations will be more accurate the more time-steps that are used.
Figure : 13.3.1 - 2 Selecting Time Units for Forecast

The accuracy of the forecast is decided by the No. of steps in the calculation. PanSystem defaults
to a value of 50 steps. For closed boundary configurations, greater precision will be obtained in
the material balance calculation if a larger number of steps is used. EPS recommend 50-100 for
trial runs, then 200-500 or more for final runs (maximum 1050).
13. 3. 1. Forecasting Data
The second section of the dialog box (Figure 13.3.1 - 3, “Defining Rates and Pressures for
Forecast,” on page 459) deals with the production rates and pressures.
Figure : 13.3.1 - 3 Defining Rates and Pressures for Forecast
459
Deliverability
The Contract Rate is the contracted maximum production rate. If the rate is ‘0’ then the
forecasting calculations ignore this field
For Minimum Production Rate allows users to define the rate at which the production should
terminate.
Users may simulate a constant rate production by setting the contact rate and the minimum rate
to the same value.
There are two options available for entering flowing Pressure. The first option is to directly
enter a Constant Bottom Hole Pressure in the corresponding box. The second option -
Constant Top Hole Pressure - is for tubing controlled production. This is achieved by the
import of a VFP format flowing pressure file, and selecting one of the Top Hole Pressure values
from this source.
- WellFlo creates VFP tables in its VFP file for Eclipse option from the Analysis - Export to
Simulator menu options. Forecasting will respect single well tables created in this way, or
Eclipse VFP tables, provided that the selected sensitivities for creating the VFP table are
restricted to the values for 1) flow rates, 2) water fractions and 3) surface pressures
(tubing-head or separator).
To select a VFP table, first select the Constant Top Hole Pressure option, then select the VFP
File Import button. This will open a File Open dialog box where a valid .VFP file can be
selected.
After the table has been imported, users may then select a Top Hole Pressure on which to base
the forecast, (i.e. if more than one Top Hole Pressure measurement is present in the file).
Note: The first time users import a VFP table, PanSystem will try to determine the nature of the
units (SI or oilfield Units). This information is then provided on the Current File line:
PanSystem assumes that this will then be the default VFP units setting. Users may change the
default setting in the Pansys30.ini folder by opening the Windows Registry Editor (i.e. via Start/
Run/Regedit commands in Windows), then selecting HKEY_CURRENT_USER/Software/EPS/
Pansys30.ini/Configuration and editing the line, units-system = ?. Where ? = 0 for Oilfield Units
or ? = 1 for SI Units, (for more details on editing the Pansys30.ini folder, see Section 1. 1. 3
“PANSYS30.INI and the Registry”, on page 24.
460
Deliverability
Users may specify the source of the deliverability data. There are three options for gas and
condensate systems, and one for oil:
Figure : 13.3.1 - 4 Deliverability Options for Forecast (gas)

The Full Analysis option uses the theoretical radial inflow equation to compute the inflow
characteristics of the well and drainage area. All phases of transient flow, through semi-infinite
acting (if boundaries are present) to semi-steady or steady-state (if closed system), are modelled
analytically. For gas and condensate wells this will require a valid p versus m(p) table and p-µ-Ct
table (see Section 7. 6. 9 “Fluid Parameters”, on page 222).
CAUTION
Please ensure that the mandatory parameters on the Fluid Parameters screen - in par-
ticular (Ct) - are consistent with the tables.
The LIT option (gas and condensate only) uses the B and F coefficients derived from LIT
analysis. This again requires valid p versus m(p) and p-µ-Ct tables. Since B describes semi-
steady-state flow, no transient behaviour is modelled with this option.
The C-and-n option (gas and condensate only) uses the coefficients of the “simplified” method.
Again, no transient behaviour is modelled with this option. Although the C-and-n method does
not require an m(p) table it does require a p-µ-Ct table to model the change in compressibility
with pressure.
Finally, users may apply an adjustment to the material balance of the field by selecting the Field
Wide Trend button.
Figure : 13.3.1 - 5 Field Wide Trend button

This will generate the Fieldwide Trend dialog box:
Figure : 13.3.1 - 6 Fieldwide Trend dialog box

Enter a positive number to superpose a declining field-wide pressure trend (depletion), or a
negative value for an increasing trend (pressure maintenance). This correction is only activated
for the closed-system boundary models.
Users may then select the OK button to apply the adjustment and return to the main Production
Forecasting dialog.
461
Deliverability
Full Analysis
Description:
This method will use the analytical form of the deliverability equation, and will require the entry
of a valid set of model parameters (k, S, etc.). (Please refer to Equation 15.1.4 - I, on page 507 for
oil, and Equation 15.8.5 - XVI, on page 551 for gas and condensate). The parameters will depend
on the boundary models chosen. This is the only option available for oil wells. For gas and
condensate wells, users must have a valid p versus m(p) table and p-µ-Ct tables (see Section
“Pseudo Tables”, on page 237). Also ensure that the parameters on the main Fluid Parameters
screen (particularly Ct) are consistent.
What users see:
If users have any boundary model (see Section 7. 6. 6 “Layer Boundaries”, on page 213) other
than Infinitely acting they will be presented with options relating to the selected boundary
model.
Figure : 13.3.1 - 7 Closed System Boundary Model Options dialog box

See Section 11. 1 “Quick Match”, on page 375 for a description of these boundary models. All
options allow no-flow boundaries. Some geometries can include constant pressure boundaries
(where specifically stated, or where a Boundary Parameters button appears as part of the dialog
box).
On selecting OK, or if the well is Infinitely acting, the dialog box similar to Figure 13.3.1 - 8,
“Full Analysis Forecasting dialog box for a Radial Homogeneous Reservoir With No
Boundaries,” on page 462 is generated.
Figure : 13.3.1 - 8 Full Analysis Forecasting dialog box for a Radial

Homogeneous Reservoir With No Boundaries
The values for Permeability (k), Darcy Skin (S) and Rate-Dependent Skin coefficient (D), will
default to the currently confirmed values. However users may edit these values if desired.
462
Deliverability
Note: as in Quick Match, the skin terms S and D relate to the true or mechanical skin factors at
the wellbore.
The Start and End times are provided for information only and cannot be edited on this screen.
Selecting the Calculate button will generate the forecast and preview it behind the dialog box.
Once this is done users may then select the OK/Confirm button to accept the forecast, or select
on the Cancel button to ignore the forecast preview, or modify the model parameters and select
Calculate again.
Figure : 13.3.1 - 9 Forecast Flowrate versus Time Plot
Production Forecasting Toolbar
Zoom Controls
These controls allow users to Zoom-In and Zoom-Out of the plot to view the data in
more or less detail.
PF
This button returns users to the Production forecasting dialog box, as shown in Figure 13.3.1
- 1, “Production Forecasting dialog box (gas well),” on page 459.
Four plots are available for the forecast.

QvT
This plot shows the Production Forecast plotted as Gas Flow Rate against Time, as shown in
Figure 13.3.1 - 9, “Forecast Flowrate versus Time Plot,” on page 463.
Q&V v Time
This plots the Gas Flow Rate and the Cumulative Gas Production against Time. See Figure
13.3.1 - 10, “Forecast Q&V versus Time Plot,” on page 464
463
Deliverability
Figure : 13.3.1 - 10 Forecast Q&V versus Time Plot

P&V v Time
This plots the Average Reservoir Pressure and Cumulative Gas Production against time. As
shown in Figure 13.3.1 - 11, “Forecast P&V versus Time Plot,” on page 464.
Note: that the reservoir pressure will only decline if a closed system boundary model, with no
constant pressure boundaries is being used. It will remain constant for any other boundary
configuration.
Figure : 13.3.1 - 11 Forecast P&V versus Time Plot

P&P v T
This plot shows the values for Average Reservoir Pressure and Bottom Hole Flowing
Pressure plotted against Time. This is shown in Figure 13.3.1 - 12, “Forecast P&P versusTime
Plot,” on page 465.
464
Deliverability
Figure : 13.3.1 - 12 Forecast P&P versusTime Plot

Export
This option allows users to export and save their forecast results as a .TPR file. The data will
be written in columns:
7LPH)ORZLQJ%RWWRPKROH3UHVVXUH3URGXFWLRQ5DWH$YHUDJH5HVHUYRLU3UHVVXUH&XPXODWLYH3URGXFWLRQ
Users may then import any, or all, of the production forecast results into Dataprep for further
plotting or analysis.
Selecting the Export button will open the Save As dialog box where users may apply a filename
to their file:
Figure : 13.3.1 - 13 Saving a .TPR file dialog box

LIT data (SSS)

Description:
The LIT option is applicable to gas and condensate wells which have attained semi-steady or
steady-state flow. The forecast uses the following deliverability equation:
(TXDWLRQ,
∆m(p) = BQ + FQ2
where B is the Darcy flow coefficient and F is the non-Darcy or turbulent flow coefficient.
465
Deliverability
Because the B and F coefficients relate to (semi-) steady-state flow, transient behaviour is not
modelled in the production forecast. Flow is assumed to be (semi-) steady-state from the
beginning.
For gas and condensate wells, users must have valid p versus m(p) and p-µ-Ct tables (see Section
“Pseudo Tables”, on page 237). Also ensure that the parameters on the main Fluid Parameters
screen (particularly Ct) are consistent.
What users see:
The dialog box displayed in Figure 13.3.1 - 14, “LIT Analysis Forecasting dialog box,” on page
466 is displayed.
Figure : 13.3.1 - 14 LIT Analysis Forecasting dialog box

The values for Layer Pressure (P_lay), Darcy Flow coefficient (B), Non-Darcy Flow coefficient
(F), are all defaulted to values which exist if a previous LIT analysis has been performed. Users
may edit these values if desired.
For LIT analysis: see Section “LIT Plot”, on page 350 and “Calculations: Transient and LIT
Data”, on page 449
The Start and End times are displayed for information only.
the Cancel button to ignore the forecast preview, or modify the model parameters and select
Calculate again. Forecasting then displays the same plot and data export options as for a Full
Analysis: see Section “Full Analysis”, on page 462.
C-and-n data (SSS) 13. 3. 1. Forecasting Data

Description:
The C-and-n option is applicable to gas and condensate wells which have attained semi-steady,
or steady-state flow. To perform this task the forecast uses the following deliverability equation:
(TXDWLRQ,,
Q = C(∆p2)n
where C and n are the coefficient and exponent derived from a C-and-n analysis. Users must
have a valid p-µ-Ct table (see Section “Pseudo Tables”, on page 237). Also ensure that the
parameters on the main Fluid Parameters screen (particularly Ct) are consistent.
466
Deliverability
What users see:
The dialog box displayed in Figure 13.3.1 - 15, “C-and-n Analysis Forecasting dialog box,” on
page 467 is displayed.
Figure : 13.3.1 - 15 C-and-n Analysis Forecasting dialog box

The values for Layer Pressure (P_lay), C coefficient (C), n Exponent (n), are all defaulted to
values which exist if a previous C-and-n analysis has been performed. Users may edit these
values if desired.
For C-and-n analysis, see Section “C-and-n Plot”, on page 354 and “Calculations: C-and-n
Method”, on page 454.
The Start and End data is provided for information only.
the Cancel button to ignore the forecast preview, or modify the model parameters and select
Calculate again. Forecasting then displays the same plot and data export options as for a Full
Analysis: see Section “Full Analysis”, on page 462.
467
Advanced Simulation
Advanced Simulation
468
Advanced Simulation/Test Design Flow Chart
Advanced Simulation
469
Advanced Simulation
Chapter 14- Advanced Simulation
This chapter describes the use of the Advanced Simulation option for history matching field data,
designing welltests, and generating type-curves.
14.1. Advanced Simulation - Overview

Advanced Simulation is used to generate the wellbore pressure response to a specified surface
flowrate schedule, for a specified reservoir and boundary description. Like Quick Match,
Advanced Simulation produces a pressure response that can be displayed on screen and
compared with gauge data, but it is more flexible and offers a number of additional features. If
the features described below are not required, use Quick Match.
The reservoir model is not restricted to a single well or single layer, so multi-layer effects (up to
5 layers) and interference from other wells (up to 5 wells) can be included. Different boundary
geometries can be modelled in each layer (using up to 16,000 image wells per layer).
The characteristics of the pressure gauge (resolution, noise and drift) can be included in the
simulated pressure response (see Section 5. 4 “Gauge Details”, on page 117).
Unlike the Quick Match option, where the simulated data are for display only, Advanced
Simulation data are written to new data channels and can be saved to disk for future use, just like
any other gauge data. They can also be converted to dimensionless form as type-curves.
Advanced Simulation can be used for:
• HISTORY MATCHING: the simulated data to the gauge data in an existing .PAN file. The
flowrate would be the same as the rate sequence used for the welltest being analyzed. The
Chapter 14 - Advanced Simulation

objective would be to verify that the current reservoir model is capable of replicating the
measured gauge response.
• WELLTEST DESIGN: the flowrate would be an intended or tentative rate sequence for a welltest
that has not yet been performed. The objective would be to examine the computed response
with a view to optimizing the test design (i.e. flowrates, duration of flow periods, sensitivity
to different variables, etc.).
Advanced Simulation output includes:
- flowing pressure in each well

- total downhole flowrate in each well
- downhole flowrates from each layer in each well
- layer pressures at selected "observation points" in the reservoir.
470
Advanced Simulation
This chapter will describe the full use of Advanced Simulation in multi-well, multi-layer
situations for history matching, test design and type-curve generation. Users are advised to read
the short description of Advanced Simulation in Section 11. 3 “Advanced Simulation”, on page
387 to gain a quick appreciation of the basics.
14.2. Preparation of Input Data

To run Advanced Simulation, the following input data are required:
- well parameters, per well

- layer parameters, including the reservoir flow model and associated model parameters (k,
S, etc.), per layer
- image wells for any boundaries, per layer
- fluid parameters, per layer
- surface flowrate schedule to drive the simulation, per well
- initial wellbore and layer pressures, per well and layer.
These are all normally entered in the Dataprep section (see Section 7 “Well and Reservoir
Description”, on page 183), but some are accessible outside of Dataprep by direct edit of the
model parameters (see Section 10. 2. 2 “Model”, on page 318).
Also required are:
- simulation control parameters

- (optional) positions of observation points.
These are specified in the Advanced Simulation Control dialog box.
14.2.1. Well data

For initialization of the well data, see Section 7. 5 “Well Control”, on page 189. If more than one
well is to be configured, they must be all vertical (including slant) or all horizontal (see Section
7. 4 “Principal Well Orientation”, on page 189).
The "Principal" well is the "well of main interest" - normally the well in which the test has been, 14. 2. Preparation of Input Data
or will be, run. The “Principal” well co-ordinates are (0, 0). All other wells are considered to be
"interfering" wells, and their co-ordinate locations are referenced to (0, 0). The time-steps used
for response computation are defined for the “Principal” well, and the rate schedules for any
other wells are sampled against these time-steps.
14.2.2. Layer Data

For initialization of the layer data, see Section 7. 6 “Layer Control”, on page 195. If more than
one layer is to be configured, each layer can have its own characteristics.
A flow model must be selected for each layer (Free model is not allowed), and the relevant model
parameters entered.
471
Advanced Simulation
The current set of flow models assumes no vertical communication within the reservoir between
the defined layers. However, crossflow in the wellbore will be faithfully reproduced by
Advanced Simulation where it occurs.
Vertical communication between layers is implicit within the dual-porosity ("two-layer" block
model) and dual-permeability models. (See Section 10. 2. 2 “Model”, on page 318). In both
cases, a second layer is implicit in the model parameters λ, ω and κ and does not have to be
defined as a separate layer. Thus, if Layer 3 in Dataprep is assigned the dual-permeability flow
model, it will behave as if it were two layers with internal crossflow.
Note: for horizontal well models and others that develop pseudo-radial flow at late time, the skin
factor that is entered should be the “true” (i.e. mechanical) skin, not the pseudo-radial skin. The
S parameter always refers to the “true” skin at the wellbore.
14.2.3. Layer Boundaries
For initialization of the layer data, see Section 7. 6. 6 “Layer Boundaries”, on page 213. If more
than one layer has been configured, each layer can have its own boundaries (or be infinite
acting).
The Estimated test duration (see Section 7. 6. 6 “Layer Boundaries”, on page 213), should
include the entire test sequence (e.g. users should not exclude the flowing period just because
they are primarily interested in the build-up - a 24 hour shut-in following a 1000 hour drawdown
counts as a 1024 hour test duration). The test duration controls the number of image wells
generated. If users underestimate, the late-time simulated response will be wrong.
Note: do not forget to re-calculate the image wells if a boundary geometry is altered, the duration
of the test is extended (or reduced), the reservoir properties are altered, or an active well is added.
14.2.4. Fluid Parameters

For initialization of the fluid parameters see Section 7. 6. 9 “Fluid Parameters”, on page 222.
Only one type of fluid (see Section 7. 1 “Fluid Type”, on page 184), is allowed for all layers
configured in the reservoir. However, within the selected fluid type, each layer can have different
fluid parameters.
The only restriction here is in the use of pseudo-pressure tables; only one table can be used for all
layers in the simulation. If users have computed an m(p) table for each layer, they will be able to
select which one is to be used, in the Advanced Simulation Control dialog box.
14.2.5. Flowrates
The simulation is driven by the surface flowrate schedule of the principal well. This may consist
of a single flowing period or a sequence of flowrates including shut-ins.
The rate sequence is divided into a number of time-steps, and a computation is performed at each
step. More time-steps will produce a more detailed pressure response, but will entail a longer
total computation time.
If interfering wells are configured (i.e. users have more than one well), they may each be
assigned their own independent surface rate schedule. These rate sequences will be "digitized" at
the “Principal” well time-steps, so that all computations can be performed at these times.
472
Advanced Simulation
All simulated well pressure responses will therefore be output at a common set of times.
The “Principal” well surface rate data and time-steps can be input in two ways:
• For Test Design, users type in the desired rate sequence and specify the computation time
steps (see Section “Flowrates for Test Design”, on page 473).
• For History Matching, where users have already loaded and set-up welltest data for analysis,
they can use the surface rate schedule that has already been specified in the Rate Changes
table (see Section “Flowrates for History Matching”, on page 475). There is no need to enter
any more data.
In this case, the time-steps for computation will correspond to the gauge clock times. No
computations are made during flow periods that do not have gauge data readings (e.g. any
rate history prior to positioning the gauge), but superposition effects from these periods will
be correctly modelled provided they have been specified in the Rate Change table.
If the gauge data readings are erratically spaced (e.g. gaps, too many points, etc.), users may
prefer to generate a “cleaner” response with regular spacings by using the Test Design
facility. The rate schedule can still be transferred from the Rate Change table, but users will
be able to specify their own time-steps with regular logarithmic or linear spacing instead of
using the gauge clock times.
Flowrates for Test Design
For welltest design, users specify the rate sequence to be used for each well in the Dataprep
Gauge Data section via the Test Design button.
Firstly, on the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog box, select a well (if there is more
than one) in the Well to edit box.
The subsequent procedure depends on whether the selected well is the “Principal” well or not.
• “Principal” well:
Select the well to be "Principal” well (in this case, Well 1)
Then:
14. 2. 5. Flowrates
For flowrate entry for the principal well, see Section “Test Design for Principal Well”, on page
149.
This will create a surface rate channel with rate values at each of the selected time-steps (e.g. 50
logarithmically spaced). This is what will drive the Advanced Simulation.
473
Advanced Simulation
Figure : 14.2.5 - 1 Surface "Test Rate" Column Created for the “Principal”
Well via the Test Design Option.
The surface rate data for Well 1 has the name "Test Rate" in this example, and it is part of the data
group called TEST DESIGN (both are default names). If users plot this, they will see the time-steps.
• Other wells:
Select an interfering well (i.e. one that is not the “Principal”) in the Well to edit box.
Figure : 14.2.5 - 2 Select an Interfering Well

Then:
Flowrate entry for a non-principal well is described in Section “Test Design for Interfering
Wells”, on page 153.
This will create a surface rate channel with the user-specified values. During simulation, it will
be sampled at the time-steps specified for the “Principal” well.
Figure : 14.2.5 - 3 Surface "Well 2 Qsurf" Column Created for Well 2 via
the Test Design Option.
The surface rate data for Well 2 has been given the name "Well 2 Qsurf" in this example, and it is
part of the Well 2 data group that has been called TEST DESIGN2.
If users have already set-up the well, layer, fluid and boundary parameters, they are now ready to
14. 2. 5. Flowrates
proceed to the Advanced Simulation option under the Simulate menu option.
474
Advanced Simulation
Flowrates for History Matching
For history matching to an existing welltest data set, the Test Design option could be used
(described in the previous section), but since the surface rate sequence has already been specified
in the Rate Change table, users can let Advanced Simulation pick-up this data and use the gauge
clock times for the computation time-steps. (This assumes users have already set-up the gauge
data file for analysis - if not, refer to the Dataprep section first - see Section 6 “Gauge Data
Preparation”, on page 125).
In this case, no pressure computations can be made during flow periods that do not have gauge
data points (e.g. any rate history prior to positioning the gauge), but superposition effects from
these periods will be correctly modelled provided they have been specified in the Rate Change
table.
“Principal” well: The well that was tested is, by definition, the "Principal" well. The surface rate
data for this well appears in the Rate Changes table (i.e. initialized when users defined the test
periods prior to performing data analysis). There are three ways to approach the question of
flowrates for the “Principal” well, but the #1 option is the most likely.
1: If the Test Design button is not going to be used to create the surface rate column to drive
Advanced Simulation, no further action is required for the “Principal” well. A temporary rate
column to drive Advanced Simulation will be created automatically from the Rate Changes
table. This happens (invisibly) when users enter Analysis, and this temporary rate is used by
Advanced Simulation subsequently. (This means users should always go into Analysis first
when they leave Dataprep, and then move into Advanced Simulation.)
2: Alternatively, a rate column could be created via the Q (calculate rate) icon (see Section 6. 5.
19 “Calculate Rate”, on page 175) and used to drive Advanced Simulation, but this is not
generally necessary. Use the step-rate option if this method is employed.
3: If the Test Design option is used, the Transfer button (see Section “Test Design for Principal
Well”, on page 149), can be used to copy over the Rate Change table times and rates, then all
users have to do is specify the time-stepping.
This facility is useful if Advanced Simulation is to be used for history matching against
gauge data, but instead of letting the program use the gauge clock times for response
generation, users want to manually specify the time-steps. This might be preferred if the
gauge clock times are irregularly spaced (using Test Design will provide a regular spacing),
or there may be too many points (users can control the number of steps using Test Design).
However, the pressure column generated via Test Design is assigned to a different file name
and cannot be overlaid directly with the gauge data on any of the diagnostic plots. Users can
compare data on the Data Edit Plot, but to perform a comparison on a diagnostic plot, users
must first copy and re-sample the simulated pressures into the gauge data file. (See Section 6.
5. 12 “Copy, Re-sample a Column to Create a New Column”, on page 167).
Other wells (if any): If users wish to include the interfering effects of other wells, initialize these
14. 2. 5. Flowrates
wells and their parameters - if this has not already been done (see Section 14. 2. 1 “Well data”, on
page 471).
In Dataprep Gauge Data, on the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog box, select an
interfering well (if there is more than one) in the Well to edit box.
475
Advanced Simulation
Figure : 14.2.5 - 4 Select an interfering well

Enter the well surface rates as described under Other wells, see Section “Flowrates for Test
Design”, on page 473. It is faster to accept the No option at the prompt and type in the rate
schedule without using the “Principal” well times.
14.3. Advanced Simulation Control

To access the Advanced Simulation Control dialog box, select Simulate from the plot menu,
then Advanced Simulation.
If users have not correctly initialized all necessary data, some errors or omissions will be trapped
at this stage, others will be detected when users try to start the calculations.
If users have more than one well, the following type of error message indicates that the surface
rate data has not been entered for one of these wells:
or:
• If Test Design is being used, ensure that surface rates have been set-up for all of the wells as 14. 3. Advanced Simulation Control
described earlier in this chapter. If not, users should return to Dataprep Gauge Data and
select the Test Design option to enter the rate(s) (see Section “Flowrates for Test Design”, on
page 473).
• If users are history matching and have a gauge data file loaded:
- ensure that either a surface flowrate column has been created for the “Principal” well
using the Q (calculate rate) icon, or Advanced Simulation has been accessed via
Analysis, and not directly from Dataprep. (PanSystem creates a temporary rate column
on entry to Analysis, which is used to drive Advanced Simulation). In the latter case,
simply select Analysis Plot first, then go to Simulate Advanced Simulation as before.
- ensure that surface rates have been set-up for all the interfering wells as described
earlier in this chapter. Users should return to Dataprep Gauge Data and select the Test
Design option to enter the rate(s) (see Section “Flowrates for History Matching”, on
page 475).
476
Advanced Simulation
What users see:
The Advanced Simulation Control dialog box as it would appear for a single-well/single-layer
history match and two-well/three-layer reservoir test design are shown below:
Figure : 14.3.0 - 1 Control Dialog for a Single-Well, Single-Layer Model,

for History Matching an Existing Welltest
Figure : 14.3.0 - 2 Control Dialog for a Two-Well, Three-Layer Model, for

a Test Design
14. 3. Advanced Simulation Control

• Upper area:
Input Datafile: Column Name: The pressure response in each well is computed according to
the surface rates specified by the user. The surface rate column names are displayed here for each
well in the reservoir. In the above examples:
- history match (Figure 14.3.0 - 1): the flowrate column is the temporary one automatically
created from the Rate Change table on entry into Analysis (see Section “Flowrates for
History Matching”, on page 475).
- test design (Figure14.3.0 - 2): the surface rate for Well-1 is "Test Rate", and for Well-2
"Well 2 Qsurf" set-up using the Test Design option (see Section “Flowrates for Test
Design”, on page 473).
If there is a choice of rate data names available for any well, users can select the appropriate one
from the drop-down menu. Normally there would be no choice.
477
Advanced Simulation
Output Datafile Name: The names indicate the data file names under which the simulated data
columns will be grouped for each well. For example, in the lower Figure, the simulated response
for Well 1 will appear as extra columns under the TEST DESIGN file name. This one cannot be
edited. The simulated response for Well 2 will appear as columns of data under the new file name
SIMULATED, that will be created for Well 2. This name can be edited.
Output Column Names: Select this button and enter names (maximum 15 characters) for the
simulated flowing pressure, total downhole flowrate and individual layer flowrate(s), or leave the
default names.
Figure : 14.3.0 - 3 Default Names for Simulated Data

If a previously allocated name is entered, users will be warned when they start the computation.
• Solution Model area: users can ignore this area unless they wish to supply an alternative
response function to one or more layers.
The response functions (available for the particular reservoir flow model assigned to each layer),
can be listed via the drop-down menu, and can be re-assigned if a choice exists. If users want to
change the flow model itself, they should return to Dataprep, or in the case of history matching
to gauge data, to the Model option on the Analysis menu.
In the multi-layer example above, the reservoir consists of a naturally-fractured layer between
two radial homogeneous layers. The supplied dimensionless response functions for these flow
models are displayed: FINWBR is the finite wellbore radius solution for radial flow in a
homogeneous medium, DPHITRAN is the solution for dual-porosity behaviour with transient
inter-porosity flow.

These response functions are dimensionless tables supplied with PanSystem, with the extension
.TCX. They have the same format as the type-curve files (see Section 16 “File Structures”, on
page 565) and are stored in the type-curve directory. This enables alternative user-supplied
solutions to be used in Advanced Simulation (see Section 14. 4. 2 “Creating Type-Curves”, on
page 487).
• Speed option area: The speed option determines the speed of the computation. Speed is
traded-off against the detail with which rate variations are treated by superposition.
At setting 1, all data points are used in the superposition calculation. At faster settings,
superposition is computed using fewer points (e.g. speed "4" uses every fourth point). Speed
"1" is therefore slowest, but most accurate, speed "4" is fastest, but may introduce errors
following a the rate change (i.e. after a step-change, or during the storage-dominated period).
Gas wells with storage and Non-Darcy skin often need the slowest speed (i.e. "1") for good
results. With the performance of modern computers, these options are becoming redundant,
and “1” can normally be used in all cases.
478
Advanced Simulation
• Additional information area:
- m(p) Layer: users can ignore this if they only have one layer and/or an oil or water
fluid type. For gas and condensate fluid types, if there are several layers with different
fluid properties, users must select which pseudo-pressure table to apply in the
simulation (i.e. no mixing of pseudo-properties is possible). Users can make their
selection from the drop-down menu.
- Gauge Details: if desired, users may include the effects of pressure gauge
characteristics (i.e. resolution, noise and/or drift), in the simulated response. This
facility, which is also accessible from the Config menu, is described in Section 5. 4
“Gauge Details”, on page 117. (If Test Design is being used (Section “Test Design for
Principal Well”, on page 149), EPS recommend using a large number of linearly-
spaced time-steps to create the appearance of real gauge data in the simulation).
• Observation points: An observation point is a remote point defined in the reservoir at co-
ordinates (x, y), at which pressure will be calculated. Up to five points can be specified.
Where there are several layers, a pressure is calculated at each point in each layer. In order for
pseudo-radial flow to occur the observation points must be far enough away from the active
well(s).
It is physically equivalent to a newly-drilled well lined with mud-cake, or an un-perforated
cased well. The pressures can be compared with formation tester measurements.
An "observation point" differs from a "well" in the following ways:
- a well can be assigned surface flowrates, a storage coefficient and skin factor; an
observation point is passive.
- even with no surface production, a well allows crossflow between layers via the wellbore
when pressure differences occur. No crossflow can occur at an observation point.
Therefore, users may see differences between the pressures computed at a shut-in well, and at
an observation point with the same co-ordinates.
What users see:
The following dialog box is generated:
Computed observation point pressure data will be named automatically according to the point
number and layer, in a data file group called "Observation" (e.g. "Obs 1 Layer 2").
479
Advanced Simulation
The example presented above shows the data file/column list in Dataprep after an Advanced
Simulation run to match gauge data from a test that is being modelled as a two-layered reservoir:
Pressure #1 is measured gauge data, Sim P is simulated well pressure, Sim Q Total is the
simulated total sandface flowrate, and Sim Q#1 and Sim Q#2 are the simulated sandface
flowrates for each of two layers. The Observation group consists of the computed layer
pressures at two remote observation points.
• Start Pressures
The initial condition of the system (at time zero) influences the computations at subsequent time-
steps.
The Layer Pressure of each layer (see Section 14. 2. 2 “Layer Data”, on page 471) and the initial
wellbore pressure in each well (see Section “Flowrates for Test Design”, on page 473) are
therefore important.
This option allows users to alter these start pressures without leaving Simulation mode.
What users see:

The Start Pressures dialog box summarizes the initial Wellbore and Layer pressures that have
been entered:
Figure : 14.3.0 - 4 Start Pressures dialog box for a Two-Well, Three-Layer Model
These pressures are assumed to be referenced to a common datum (i.e there is no hydrostatic
difference between layers). Users may make alterations if desired. The Initial Wellbore
Pressure(s) and Layer Pressure(s) will be updated elsewhere in the program, in accordance with
any changes made here.
Note: if users set a wellbore pressure lower than a layer pressure, the computations will kick-off
underbalanced, and there will be an initial wellbore fill-up period.
480
Advanced Simulation
14.4. Simulated Response
When users have initialized the Advanced Simulation Control dialog (see Section 14. 3
“Advanced Simulation Control”, on page 476), select OK to start the simulation.
Error message
If users are issued with the following message:
it means that data columns already exist with the names that have been selected. This will most
likely arise when users make a second Advanced Simulation run using the default output names
- these will conflict with the columns generated on the first run.
If users want to keep the first run output, select Cancel and specify new names for the data to be
computed in the dialog box that appears.
If users do not wish to keep the output from the previous run, select OK and it will be
overwritten by computed data from the subsequent run.
The calculations will now proceed.
For gas and condensate fluid types with a turbulent skin (rate-dependent skin coefficient D > 0),
users will receive the following prompt:
The iteration option improves the response calculation during periods of varying rate (i.e.
particularly wellbore storage, or immediately following a step-rate change). The computations
will take slightly longer.
Once users initiate the calculations, a status box/counter is generated to provide progress
information: 14. 4. Simulated Response
When the computations have terminated, select the OK button to proceed to the next stage. Users
can abort the calculations at any time by selecting the Stop button and they will be terminated at
the end of the current time-step. The simulated data will be given zero values for any steps that
were not computed.
481
Advanced Simulation
14.4.1. Simulated Pressures and Flowrates
After the calculation run, the simulated pressures and flowrates exist as data channels which are
accessible for edit, analysis, etc., just like any real gauge data.
The following data columns will have been created, using the names specified in Section 14. 3
“Advanced Simulation Control”, on page 476):
- wellbore pressure and total downhole rate (at standard conditions) in each well
- sandface flowrate (at standard conditions) for each layer in each well
- layer pressure in each layer at each observation point (if any)
The next two sections describe the simplest (and fastest) application of the simulated data - the
pressure overlay for history matching, and the more detailed data manipulation involved in
welltest design applications. The comments on the manipulation of data under Test Design apply
equally to data generated for history matching, if users wish to go further than the pressure
overlay.
History Matching: Pressure Overlay

Once the pressure response has been generated, the most straightforward use to which it can be
put is to overlay it with available gauge data for comparison. This is the history matching aspect
of Advanced Simulation, and assumes, of course, that users already have welltest data set-up for
analysis.
Since the simulated pressure exists as a data column in its own right, users could plot it along
with field data in Dataprep.
However, to avoid leaving the Analysis/Simulate environment, it is preferable to select Plot on
the Analysis menu. Select a test period and go to a suitable diagnostic plot, or stay on the Test
Overview.
14. 4. 1. Simulated Pressures and Flowrates

Now select Edit on the menu bar and the Overlay Pressure... option:
The Edit Overlay pressure... option is described in Section 3. 10 “Overlay Pressure...”, on page
75, but will be repeated here for completeness.
The Overlay Pressure dialog box appears. It will list any other pressure data column(s) present
in the “Master” file. After an Advanced Simulation run, the newly generated pressure column
name will appear here (default name "Sim P"). If users have made other runs during previous
sessions using different names, they will also be listed.
Select the pressure to be overlaid and check the Show checkbox.
482
Advanced Simulation
If users do not have any other pressure data in the current master data file selected for analysis,
no pressure column names are listed. If users are expecting a pressure column name to appear
and it does not, refer to the Dataprep section.
Figure : 14.4.1 - 1 Overlay Pressure dialog box

The P0 for overlaid pressure (i.e. the pressure at the start of the test period being examined) is
important for any plot which has ∆p, ∆p2 or ∆m(p) on its y-axis (e.g. the Log-Log plot), because
this affects the y-axis values (∆p = p−p0). The default P0 is that of the pressure data selected for
overlay (the pressure value corresponding to T0 will be read automatically; if there is not a value
exactly at T0 the program will select the next earlier data point if there is one). Change the value
in the edit box if desired. To re-set the value to the default setting, select the pressure name in the
list box. It will then be re-set to the default value each time the dialog is entered.
To remove the overlays, select the Edit Overlay Pressure option again and uncheck the Show
checkbox.
Figure : 14.4.1 - 2 Welltest Data and Simulated Pressure Overlay

To overlay a different pressure (if available), select Edit Overlay pressure... again and select the
new pressure name.
Users can overlay pressure data on any other diagnostic plot type.
If users wish to do anything more ambitious with the simulated data, some of the information in
the next section on Test Design will be relevant. Also see Section 14. 4. 2 “Creating Type-
Curves”, on page 487.
483
Advanced Simulation
Test Design
Please read the short introduction to Simulated Response, see Section 14. 4 “Simulated
Response”, on page 481, to put the following description in context.
Go to Dataprep Gauge Data. Users will see the newly-generated data columns listed.
• “Principal” well
Continuing with the two-well, three-layer example, for Well 1 (which will usually be the
“Principal” well):
Figure : 14.4.1 - 3 Simulated Data for Well 1 in a Two-Well, Three-Layer Reservoir

In this example, "Test Rate" is the name given to the input surface rate schedule that drove the
simulation (see Section “Flowrates for Test Design”, on page 473).

"Sim P" is the simulated flowing pressure response, default name. "Sim Q Total" is the
simulated total downhole flowrate for the well (i.e. which would be observed above the top
perforations). "Sim Q#1", etc. are the sandface flowrates from each layer. All flowrates are at
standard conditions.
The well pressure and associated flowrate columns are all grouped under the file name TEST
DESIGN.
"Obs 1 Layer 1", etc. are the pressures calculated in each layer at the co-ordinates of the
observation point #1 (see Section 14. 3 “Advanced Simulation Control”, on page 476). They are
grouped under the name OBSERVATION.
484
Advanced Simulation
• Other wells
Now select Well 2 in the Well to edit box:
Figure : 14.4.1 - 4 Simulated data for Well 2 in a 2-well, 3-layer reservoir

In the example, "Well 2 Qsurf" is the name that was given to the input surface rate schedule at
Well 2 (see Section “Flowrates for Test Design”, on page 473).
"Sim P" is the simulated flowing pressure response in Well 2. "Sim Q Total" is the simulated
total downhole flowrate for the well (i.e. which would be observed above the top perforations).
"Sim Q#1", etc. are the sandface flowrates from each layer. All flowrates are at standard
conditions.
The well pressure and associated flowrate columns are all grouped under the file name
SIMULATED.

Different names could have been assigned to the simulated data columns, and a different group
name, but the defaults were used in this case. However, note that the "Sim P", etc. data for Well
2 are distinct from the "Sim P", etc. data for Well 1.
• Inspection of the simulated data
Once the simulated data channels have been created in Advanced Simulation, they have the same
status as real gauge data and can be treated in the same way. All aspects of “Gauge Data
Preparation”, on page 125 (and “Dataprep - Gauge Data”, on page 575) are applicable.
If users just want to look at the overall test response versus time, select the appropriate well,
highlight the data to be plotted (e.g. Well 1, Sim P) and select the Plot button (see Section 6. 4
“Selecting the Data For Plotting”, on page 156).
Users can inspect and edit the data using the toolbar options as described in “Data Edit Plot and
Tool Bar”, on page 156.
485
Advanced Simulation
• Analysis of the simulated data
Users can also look at the data on the diagnostic plots.
Single-well, single-layer: If users have generated new data using Test Design, the Rate Changes
table will be set-up automatically and users can proceed directly with Analysis - just select the
Analysis option on the main menu, then Plot, and proceed as usual. This greatly speeds-up the
process of generation and inspection.
Multi-well, multi-layer: In more complex situations with several wells and/or layers, some
selections may have to be made before proceeding into Analysis:
1: If users have more than one well, they must first select the one required for analysis. On the
Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog box, select the well for analysis (Well to edit
box):
2: Select the data file (group name) and pressure and rate column to be analyzed (there will be a
choice if users have saved more than one run of simulated data):
In this example users could have chosen the total downhole rate "Sim Q Total" instead of the
surface rate "Test Rate". The use of downhole rate enables users to correct for wellbore storage
effects and other sources of rate variation.

If users wish to analyze the pressure data for a particular layer in a multi-layer reservoir, rather
than for the whole system, select the corresponding downhole rate column name here (e.g. "Sim
Q#2" for Layer 2).
If users wish to analyze the response of a multi-layered system as a single composite unit, they
should go to Dataprep Well and Reservoir Description... and create a composite layer with
average properties in (see Section 7. 6. 7 “Create Composite”, on page 219). Now select the
surface rate "Test Rate", or total downhole rate "Sim Q Total", for use in the analysis of "Sim P".
3: Now select OK, then select Analysis on the main menu.

In a multi-well or multi-layer configuration, the following type of dialog box is generated:
486
Advanced Simulation
Figure : 14.4.1 - 5 Well and Layer Selection for Analysis

Ensure the appropriate well and layer are selected for analysis. They should be consistent with
the response data that has been selected (e.g. the pressures and rates for layer 3, as described
previously in step #2). If users select the wrong well/layer here, the wrong set of layer and fluid
parameters will be used in the analysis of the selected pressure data.
Remember that if one layer is being analyzed, the flowrate for that layer should be used, not the
total well rate (as described previously in step #2).
4: Refer to “Analysis Menu Options”, on page 316 to proceed.
14.4.2. Creating Type-Curves

The data displayed on a Log-Log plot can be exported in dimensionless type-curve format. This
is described in “Export TC”, on page 330.
If users generate a pressure response with Advanced Simulation, they can save it in
dimensionless form by first preparing it for analysis (see Analysis of the simulated data in “Test
Design”, on page 484), then displaying it on the Log-Log plot.
The Analysis Export TC option: 14. 4. 2. Creating Type-Curves
leads to a dialog box of the following type:
487
Advanced Simulation
listing the available type-curve extensions for the flow model concerned (“File Structures”, on
page 565).
Creating type-curves
With this facility users can create their own type-curves from Advanced Simulation (e.g. for
bounded or multi-layered reservoirs). Once created, they are available in the type-curve directory
for use in type-curve analysis via the User-Selected Type-Curve option described in “Match:
type-curve match”, on page 367.
Creating a solution model
The .TCX export format is only available for the radial homogeneous flow model. It is a table of
Td and Pd values in type-curve format (see Section 16 “File Structures”, on page 565), that can
be picked up from the type-curve directory by Advanced Simulation and used as an alternative
flow model (Solution Model Area: see Section 14. 3 “Advanced Simulation Control”, on page
476). The TCX files are all constant-rate drawdown responses: build-ups, etc. are handled by
superposition.
Suppose users generate a constant-rate drawdown, bounded reservoir response with Advanced
Simulation (e.g. a closed reservoir needing a large number of image wells), and save it as a .TCX
file called BOUND1:
14. 4. 2. Creating Type-Curves
Figure : 14.4.2 - 1 Saving a Bounded Reservoir Response as a .TCX File

Type in a curve label (maximum 15 characters) at the prompt - this can be letters and/or numbers:
488
Advanced Simulation
The response function will now be saved to the type-curve directory. For any subsequent runs,
users can eliminate the image wells and use this alternative model by selecting the new .TCX file
name on the Advanced Simulation Control screen:
Figure : 14.4.2 - 2 Advanced Simulation Control Dialog Now Lists the

New Solution Model for Subsequent Runs
The image wells are no longer required because the boundaries are now implicit in the flow
model, so do not forget to cancel them in Dataprep (i.e. set the boundary model to infinite
acting). Computation time is therefore dramatically reduced.
In this particular example, the substitution will be valid provided the permeability is not changed,
since this would alter the dimensionless time at which the boundary response would be observed.
Hints on generating TCX files
If users wish to generate their own response function with Advanced Simulation, some
guidelines are offered below to help obtain the best results:
- using Test Design (see Section “Flowrates for Test Design”, on page 473), set-up Advanced
Simulation for a constant rate drawdown.
1: the duration of this drawdown period should greatly exceed the total duration of the test
that is to be simulated (e.g. 106 hours). Around 50 logarithmically spaced steps are usually 14. 4. 2. Creating Type-Curves
adequate. Flowrate is irrelevant because the pressure response will be saved in
dimensionless form - use a "typical" value.
2: use the correct permeability, porosity, etc. It is advisable to set the wellbore storage
coefficient and skin factor to zero, so that the TCX file represents the "clean" base
response. Any desired Cs and S (and D) can be imposed during the subsequent simulation
runs with the TCX file.
3: the TCX export facility is currently only available for the radial homogeneous flow model.
To save a TCX file from a different flow model, generate the response using the desired
model, then switch to radial homogeneous before selecting the Export option.
489
Advanced Simulation
4: when using the TCX response file for subsequent Advanced Simulation runs, remember
that the image wells are no longer required for the boundaries, so switch to infinite acting.
5: although the TCX file has been generated for a constant rate drawdown, it can be used for
any subsequent flow sequence and superposition will be correctly modelled.
6: if boundaries have been included in the TCX response, do not change k, φ, µ or Cs, when it
is used, as this will invalidate the characteristic length (L), of the boundary geometry.
7: since the TCX file has to be saved as a radial homogeneous model (see step #3 described
previously), the layer must be configured as radial homogeneous, in order to be able to
pick-up the file in Advanced Simulation Control.
8: users can generate a TCX file for each layer in a multi-layered reservoir by making a base
run of Advanced Simulation for each layer separately (i.e. one at a time). The multi-
layered system can then be modelled by configuring all layers and specifying the
appropriate .TCX file for each one in the Advanced Simulation Control dialog box
(Solution Model area: see Section 14. 3 “Advanced Simulation Control”, on page 476).
14. 4. 2. Creating Type-Curves
490
Other Useful Information
Other Useful Information
491
Equations
Chapter 15 A - Equations
Oil Analysis
All equations are written in oilfield units.
Variable rate equations assume a step-rate approximation.
For injection/fall-off tests, enter negative values for flowrate qs.
15.1. Radial Flow Analysis

15.1.1. Log-Log Plot
Storage Constant C :
s
Equation : 15.1.1 - I :
qB
Cs = s o
24 ∆P int
where ∆Pint is the value of ∆P at 1 hour on the unit slope line.
q s = flowrate at surface (or last rate before shut-in).

CD , the dimensionless wellbore storage constant, is computed as:
Equation : 15.1.1 - II :
0.8936Cs
CD =
φCt hrw2
Log-Log Plot Radial permeability, k, is determined from a zero-slope line by:

Equation : 15.1.1 - III :
. q s Bo µo  05
1412 . 
k=  
h  ∆p 
where ∆p is the y-axis position of the line.

Chapter 15 A - Equations
For plots with rate-normalised pressure on the y-axis, set qs = 1.0.

Skin factor S is determined from the zero-slope line using the general form of the skin factor
equations defined in the next section on the Semi-Log Plot - “general” meaning before setting the
time, or time function, to 1.0 to define an intercept.
For a constant rate drawdown, for example (compare Equation 15.1.2 - II, on page 494 ):
492
Equations
Equation : 15.1.1 - IV :
~p wf − pi  k∆~ t  
S = 1.1513 − log10  2 
+ 3.2275
 m  φµ o Ct rw  
The average delta-pressure ∆~p wf = ~

p wf − pi in the radial flow regime portion of the data (defined
by the flow regime markers) is used with the corresponding average time ∆~ t . The term m is
derived from the y-axis position ∆p ’int of the zero-slope line: m=1.1513 ∆p ’int /0.5.
Other Calculations from the Log-Log Plot

• Dual-porosity model
Storativity ratio ω from the positions of the System radial flow and Transition to system radial
flow zero-slope lines. This is derived from a curve-fit relating the value of ω to the depth of the
derivative trough (value of derivative at bottom of trough y value of derivative in system radial
flow).
Inter-porosity flow coefficient λ from the time ∆tx at the end of the Transition to system radial
flow regime:
 4 
- For semi-steady-state interporosity flow: λ = 1.0  for all matrix geometries,
 TDx 
0.000264k∆t x
where TDx =
φµCt rw2
and k is the permeability determined from the System radial flow zero-slope line.
 4 
- For transient inter-porosity flow: λ = C  
 TDx 
where:
C=1.67 for cubic/spherical matrix geometry,

C=2.0 for cylindrical geometry,
C=3.0 for slab geometry,
C=12.0 for two strata.
15. 1. 2. Semi-Log Plot
15.1.2. Semi-Log Plot

Permeability and skin
• Semi-Log Drawdown Plot ("Constant Rate" "No history")
This is a constant rate drawdown plot.
x-axis:log ∆t
493
Equations
Radial permeability k
Equation : 15.1.2 - I :
162.2q s Bo µ o
k =−
mh
Skin factor S
 pint − pi  k  
S = 11513
.  − log10  2  + 32275
. 
 m  φµoCt rw  
where pint = intercept of line at t = 1 hr.
m = slope of line (negative for a producer) per log10 cycle.
• MDH Plot (Build-up test, "Constant Rate" "No history")

This is a constant rate build-up plot without any superposition.
x-axis: log ∆t
162.6qs Bo µ o
k=
mh
 pint − p(∆t = 0)  t p + 1
S = 11513
.  + log10  
 m  tp 
 k  
− log10  2  + 3.2275
 φµCt rw  
where pint = intercept of line at = 1 hr.
m = slope of line (positive for a producer) per log10 cycle.
• Horner Plot (Build-up test, "Constant rate history" + "Horner")

This is a constant rate build-up plot with Horner time function.
494
Equations
x-axis: Horner function log[(tp+∆t)/∆t].
Equation : 15.1.2 - V :
162.6q s Bo µ o
k=−
mh
Equation : 15.1.2 - VI :
S = 11513
. 
(
 p
(∆t = 0 ) − p * )  kt p  
− log 10  φµ C r 2  + 3.2275
 m  o t w 
 
where p* = intercept of line at = ∆t = ∞.
m = slope of line (negative for a producer) per log10 cycle.
If the rate history consists of several flowing/shut-in periods, an effective tp is used:

Equation : 15.1.2 - VII :
n
∑ Q ∆T
j =1
sj j
t p ( eff ) =
Qn
where Q is the flowrate during the j-th flow period, duration ∆Tj, and Qn is the last rate before
shut-in. sj
• Semi-Log Plot (Build-up test, "Constant rate history" not "Horner")

This is a constant rate buildup plot with the Agarwal equivalent time function.
x-axis: Log (equivalent time, ∆t ): log[t ∆t/(t +∆t)] (ref.4).

e p p
Equation : 15.1.2 - VIII :

162.6q s Bo µ o
k=−
mh
Equation : 15.1.2 - IX :
S = 11513
.
(
 p −p
 int (∆t =0) )  kt p 
− log10  φµ C r 2  + 32275
.


 m  o t w 
 
where pint is the intercept at ∆te = 1.0 hrs.
If the rate history consists of several flowing/shut-in periods, an effective tp is used (Equation
15.1.2 - X, on page 496 ).
• Semi-Log Plot (Build-up test, "Full history" + "Horner")

This is for a build-up with a multi-rate history, using a full superposition function.
495
Equations
x-axis: superposition function:
Equation : 15.1.2 - X :
N qj  t N − t j −1 + ∆t 
hr = ∑ log10  
j =1 qN  t N − t j + ∆t 
where tj, qj [j = 1 to N] pertain to the rate change history prior to shut-in (Rate Change table).
qN = last rate before shut-in (at ∆t = 0) (Rate Change table).

Equation : 15.1.2 - XI :
162.6q N Bo µ o
k=−
mh
Equation : 15.1.2 - XII :
 p(∆t = 0) − p *
S = 11513
.  − f r ( ∆t = 0 )
 m
 k  
− log   + 3.2275 
 φµ o Ct rw 
2

where m = slope of line (negative for a producer) per log cycle,
p* = intercept of line at infinite time,
fr(∆t=0) = drawdown superposition time function value at: ∆t = 0

Equation : 15.1.2 - XIII :
N
 q j − q j −1 
f r ( ∆t = 0) = ∑  log ( t N − t j −1 )
j =1  qN 
• Generalised Superposition Plot ("Full history" not "Horner")

This is for a build-up or drawdown test with a multi-rate history, using an equivalent time
function based on Agarwal’s ref. 4.
The test period to be analysed starts at [TJ, p(TJ), q(TJ)].

What is plotted:
y-axis: rate-normalized pressure:

Equation : 15.1.2 - XIV :
∆p  p(TJ ) − p(t ) 
 = 
∆q  q (t ) − q (TJ 
)
496
Equations
x-axis: log (Equivalent time, ∆te):
Equation : 15.1.2 - XV :
gr (t) − gr (TJ )
log∆te =
q(t) − q(TJ )
where:
Equation : 15.1.2 - XVI :
M
 t − Ti −1 
gr (t ) = ∑ qi log   + q (t )log{t − TM }
i =1  t − Ti 
T (i = 1, 2, .... M) are the times of the rate changes prior to the data point at t. (TM, qM) is the last
i change before the data point at t. These are read from the Rate Change table up to the start of
rate
the test at TJ, then from the rate column.
Equation : 15.1.2 - XVII :
J −1
T − T 
gr (TJ ) = ∑ qi log J i −1  + q(TJ )log{TJ − TJ −1}
i =1  TJ − Ti 
is a constant - the value of log (∆te) up to start of the test at t = T .

J
Equation : 15.1.2 - XVIII :

162.6Bo µ o
k=
mh
Equation : 15.1.2 - XIX :
 int  k  
S = 11513
.  − log10  2  + 3.2275
m  φµ o Ct rw  
m = slope of line (positive for producers) per log cycle.

int = intercept of line at ∆te = 1.0 hr (log function = 0).
Reference back to initial pressure: For a variable rate drawdown test starting at the beginning
of the Rate Change table (e.g. a group of flowing periods which includes the very first one), or
for any flowing period with a rate history where the Reference back to initial pressure option has
been switched on (Tf icon), the equivalent time function simplifies with:
TJ = Ti, p(TJ) = pi, q(TJ) = 0), where pi is the initial pressure at Ti, the start of the rate history (first
entry in the Rate Changes table).
497
Equations
Other Calculations from the Semi-Log Plot
Permeability and skin factor from a single fault radial flow line:
Equation : 15.1.2 - XX :
162.6Qs Bo µ o
k=
0.5m’h
Equation : 15.1.2 - XXI :
p −p  k  rw 
S = 2.303  int i − log10  2
+ 3.23 − log 
φµoCt rw 
10
 m’ 2L 
where m’ is the slope of the line and L is the distance to the boundary.
Calculated Initial Pressure p
calc
pcalc appearing in the results box after a Semi-Log line-fit is the theoretical initial pressure at the
very start of the rate history, assuming an infinite-acting reservoir.
For the Semi-Log build-up plot using the Horner time function, it is replaced by an extrapolated
pressure p*, which has the same significance.
For the MDH build-up plot ("No history"):

Equation : 15.1.2 - XXII :
(
p calc = p1 hr + mlog t p + 1 )
For the build-up plot using (Agarwal) equivalent time ("Constant rate history" with "Horner"
off):
Equation : 15.1.2 - XXIII :
162 . 6 q s B o µ o
p calc = p ∆ t = 0 +
kh
[
log 10 (t p )
 k  
+ log 10   − 3 . 2275 + 0 . 87 S 
 φµ oC t rw 
2

For "full history" superposition plots using equivalent time ("Horner" off for a build-up
(Equation 15.1.2 - XV, on page 497 ):
Equation : 15.1.2 - XXIV :

pcalc = p(TJ ) +
162.6Bo µo   k 
 g r (TJ ,TJ −1 )+ q(TJ )log − 3.2275+ 0.87S 
 φµoCt rw
2
kh  
498
Equations
Skin Pressure Drop
Equation : 15.1.2 - XXV : Constant rate history:
141.2q s Bo µ o S
∆pskin =
kh (psi)
Equation : 15.1.2 - XXVI : Variable rate:
141.2 Bo µ o S
∆pskin =
kh (psi/STB/day)
Radius of Investigation
- Classical equation: based in distance from the well at which Pd=0.1 (ref.2):
Equation : 15.1.2 - XXVII : Drawdowns:
k∆T
Rinv = 0.029
φµ o Ct
where ∆T is the duration of the flowing period (for Rinv in the results box), or the position of
the mouse pointer (for Rinv displayed in the status bar beneath the plot).
Equation : 15.1.2 - XXVIII : Build-Ups:
k∆t s
Rinv = 0.029
φµ o Ct
where ∆ts is the duration of the build-up period (for Rinv in the results box), or the position of
the mouse pointer (for Rinv displayed in the status bar beneath the plot). The actual duration
of the build-up period is used (even if longer than the flowing period) unless Maximum
Rinv in build-ups to be limited by Tp is switched on in Config Gauge Details (see Section
5. 4 “Gauge Details”, on page 117), in which case Rinv is not allowed to exceed Rinv(∆ts=Tp).
- Equation incorporating gauge resolution and noise:
To be able to say with confidence on a Semi-Log plot that an anomaly exists at a certain
distance from the well, users would need to see a change of slope that is sufficiently well
developed to convince us that it is real. In other words, the pressure would have to deviate
from the radial flow line by a certain amount before the test ended. If the gauge resolution
is δpg, users might like to see a deviation of at least 2 times δpg to be sure that there really is
a new trend starting in the data. This is a subjective criterion, so EPS provide the option in
Config Gauge Details (see Section 5. 4 “Gauge Details”, on page 117) to specify how
many multiples of δpg users want (default n=2).
The radius of investigation is estimated by solving the equation:
Equation : 15.1.2 - XXIX :
 (2 RD )2 
0.5 Ei   = nδPgD
 4TD 
where:
TD is the dimensionless time (defined in Equation 15.6.3 - I, on page 523 ) at which Rinv is to
be calculated,
499
Equations
RD is the dimensionless radius of investigation (Rinv/Rw),
δpgD is the dimensionless gauge resolution (Equation 15.6.2 - II, on page 522 with (pi−pwf)
replaced by δpg. If users specify a value for gauge noise as well as resolution in the Gauge
Details dialog, δpg becomes the sum of these two amplitudes).
n is the multiple of δpg required to ensure there is a change of trend.
Flow Efficiency
Equation : 15.1.2 - XXX :
pi − pwf − ∆pskin
FE =
pi − pwf
For a drawdown, pi is the initial pressure and pwf is the last flowing pressure.
For a build-up, pi is the calculated initial pressure, or the extrapolated initial pressure p*, and pwf
,
= pws(∆t=0) the last flowing pressure before shut-in.
Average Reservoir Pressure (radial flow plot, build-ups only)

For the calculation of average reservoir pressure from p* by the MBH method, the flow period is
assumed to have reached semi-steady-state before shut-in. Use Quick Match for a more generally
valid calculation.
MBH Method:
Equation : 15.1.2 - XXXI :
. qs Bo µ o
PDMBH 1412
Pav = p * − *
2 kh
where p* is the extrapolated or calculated initial pressure from the build-up plot.
qs is the flow-rate at surface before shut-in and:
Equation : 15.1.2 - XXXII :
PDMBH = ln C A + ln t pDA
assuming tpDA > (tDA)sss (i.e. the straight line portion of the MBH curves).
(tDA)sss, the dimensionless time to semi-steady-state production, can be obtained from most books
on well test analysis (refs.1, 2, 22 etc.).
tpDA, the dimensionless producing time, is defined as:

Equation : 15.1.2 - XXXIII :
0.0002637 kt p
t pDA =
43560φµ o Ct A
where CA= Dietz shape factor
and A = drainage area (acres).

k
The multi-phase flow correction, replacing the term by the total
µo
k
mobility   is applied in the multi-phase Oil Fluid Type options.
 µt
500
Equations
Multi-Phase Flow
Note: In case of the Multi-Phase Oil Fluid Type options, all specified flowrates (gauge data, rate
changes) refer to the OIL phase. Other phase flowrates are computed from the oil flowrate using
water cut and GORs.
• Perrine method (ref. 39):
When the two or three-phase flow logic is invoked, by switching on the

k k
Perrine method, the term is replaced by the total mobility   in the
µo  µt
equations for S, p*, Rinv, etc. containing the diffusivity term.
Equation : 15.1.2 - XXXIV :
 k  162.6  q gsc Bg 
  =  qosc Bo + qwsc Bw + 
 µ t mh  5.615 
where m is the slope of the line on the semi-log plot and
qosc= flow rate of oil at surface (STB),

qwsc= flow rate of water at surface (= qosc* WOR) (STB),
( [
qgsc= flow rate of free gas at surface = qosc Rsp − Rs ]) (scf)
(i.e. that part of the produced gas which was free gas in the reservoir).
The effective permeability to each phase is computed from the slope m of the radial flow line
using the appropriate phase flowrate and fluid properties.
Effective permeability to oil

Equation : 15.1.2 - XXXV :
162.6qoscBo µo
keffo =
mh
Effective permeability to water
Equation : 15.1.2 - XXXVI :
162.6qwsc Bw µw
keffw =
mh
Effective permeability to gas

Equation : 15.1.2 - XXXVII :
162.6qgsc Bg µ g
keffg =
mh
501
Equations
Wellbore Storage Coefficient
In Equation 15.1.1 - I, on page 492 for Cs from the Log-Log plot unit slope, the in-situ oil
flowrate term qsB0 is replaced by the total in-situ flowrate:
Equation : 15.1.2 - XXXVIII :
 q B 
 q osc Bo + q wsc B w + gsc g .
 5 .615 
• Multi-phase pseudo-pressures: (Ref. 18).

When the multi-phase pseudo-pressure is switched on, multi-phase pseudo-pressure tables can
be generated in PanSystem for rigorous modelling of multi-phase effects and fluid property
behaviour.
Tables can also be imported as a file from an external source. The .PSP file structure is described
in “PSP Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure File”, on page 570. The multi-phase pseudo-pressure is
defined in Equation 16.3.2 - I, on page 571 . The imported tables are converted for compatibility
with the analysis logic existing in PanSystem.
Internally, PanSystem computes the end-point permeability to oil (k’=keffo(Swi)) from the slope m
of the radial flow line. The effective permeabilities keffo, keffw and keffg at the current saturation Sw
are computed from this using the relative permeabilities:
keffo = k’.kro = keffo(Swi) x kro(Sw), etc.
k
The total mobility   is computed from the sum of the phase mobilities
 µ t
keffo keffw  keffg  k 

  +  +   in all
 µ   µ   µg  and replaces the oil mobility term
 o   w    µo 
equations (skin factor, Rinv, etc.) containing the diffusivity term.
Distance to a linear discontinuity

For Horner and buildup superposition plots, PanSystem calculates:
Equation : 15.1.2 - XXXIX :
 t p + Tint 
PD = 0.5 ln  
 Tint 
tp
T =
where int
(10 x − 1) ,
x being the Horner or superposition time at the intersection.
502
Equations
It then finds tp / Rp2, the root of pp from the Ei-function, and calculates:
Equation : 15.1.2 - XL :
0.0002637 kt p
L=
[
4φµ o Ct t D / RD 2 ]
For all other plots (time and equivalent time):
Equation : 15.1.2 - XLI :
k Tint
L = 0.01217
φµ o Ct
where Tint, the intersection time, = 10x where x is the value of the logarithmic time-axis function
at intersection.
For the radial composite model, the outer region properties are used to compute the distance.
 
The multi-phase flow correction, replacing  k  by  k 
 µo   µ t
(defined by Equation 15.1.2 - XXXIV, on page 501 ), is applied in the multi-phase Oil Fluid Type
options.
Distance to a radial discontinuity (Lrad)

(Refs 53, 54) For the radial composite model, the distance Lrad to the interface between the inner
and outer regions is:
Equation : 15.1.2 - XLII :
 0.0002637k inner Tint  1  M  1/ ( 1− M )
Lrad =    
 ( φµCt )inner  0.4453  ω 
where Tint is the time (or equivalent time) at the intersection of the radial flow lines for the inner
and outer regions.
 k 
 
µ
M is the outer/inner mobility ratio   outer ,
 k 
 
 µ  inner
(φCt )outer
and ω is the outer/inner storativity ratio .
(φCt )inner
Dual-Porosity Calculations
(φ C t )fracs
Storativity ratio: ω =
(φ C t )total
503
Equations
Equation : 15.1.2 - XLIII :

 − 2∆Ykh 
ω = exp 
141.2qs Bo µ o 
where ∆Y is the vertical separation between the early/late parallel lines. (For superposition plots
with ∆p/∆q on the y-axis, qs= 1 in this equation).
Inter-porosity Flow Coefficient: ( λ = αrw2 k m k fracs )
For pseudo-steady-state matrix flow:

Equation : 15.1.2 - XLIV :
0.5615µ o rw2 (φ Ct )t
λ=
0.0002637 kTint
where Tint = middle/late line intersection time.
For transient matrix flow:

Equation : 15.1.2 - XLV :
0.5615µ o rw2 (φCt )t  αhb 2 
λ=  2
0.0002637kTint  AFD 
 k  k
The multi-phase flow correction replacing   by   is applied in the multi-phase Oil Fluid
Type options.  µo   µ t
Matrix Block Permeability/Height2

For both models:
Equation : 15.1.2 - XLVI :
km λk
2 =
hb αhb 2 rw 2
where km and hb are the matrix permeability and block (full) height, respectively.
The terms αhb and AFD2 have the following values:

2
αhb
2 2
Block Model AFD
Cubes/Spheres 60 36
Rectangular Prisms/Cylinders 32 16
Slabs 12 4
2 Layers (Vertical Crossflow) 12 1
504
Equations
Pressure Extrapolation Option
All recorded pressures are corrected as follows before plotting. If the Extrapolation to model rate
history option is switched on in the Pressure Extrapolation dialog box, the correction will also
be applied to the response generated by Quick Match. If Extrapolation to model interference
trend is enabled, no correction is applied to the response generated by Quick Match.
Linear Extrapolation:
Equation : 15.1.2 - XLVII :
(m *)∆t
pcorr = p +
24
where ∆t is the elapsed time since the start of the test (hrs.). m* is the pressure trend (psi/day) to
be included (positive = declining).
Logarithmic Extrapolation:
Equation : 15.1.2 - XLVIII :
 T + ∆t 
pcorr = p + (m **) log10 
 T 
where ∆t is the elapsed time since the start of the test,

m** is the logarithmic pressure trend (psi/log cycle) (positive = declining pressure trend),
T is the duration of the pressure trend prior to the start of the test (hrs.).
Square-Root Extrapolation
Equation : 15.1.2 - XLIX :
[
pcorr = p + (mrt ) (T + ∆t ) − ∆t 0.5
0.5
]
mrt is the square root pressure trend (psi/hr1/2) to be included (positive = declining trend),
T is the duration of the square root trend prior to the start of the test (hrs.).
Fourth-Root Extrapolation
Equation : 15.1.2 - L :
[
pcorr = p + (m4rt ) (T + ∆t )
0.25
− ∆t 0.25 ]
m4rt is the square root pressure trend (psi/hr1/4) to be included (positive = declining trend),
15. 1. 3. Cartesian Plot
T is the duration of the fourth root trend prior to the start of the test (hrs.).
15.1.3. Cartesian Plot
Wellbore Storage Coefficient (Cs):
Equation : 15.1.3 - I :
qs Bo
Cs =
24m’
where m’ is the slope of the line fitted to the early data (psi/hr).
505
Equations
Dimensionless wellbore storage coefficient Cd: is computed using Equation 15.1.1 - II, on
page 492 .
Closed system boundary model

Drainage Area (A) (of total connected pore volume):
0.23395q s Bo
A=−
43560φ Ct hm * (acres)
where m* is the slope of the line (negative for producers).
In the multiphase Oil Fluid Type options, qsBo is replaced by the total downhole rate (q B +
q B + q B ). osc o
wsc w gsc g
Radius of Drainage (R):
A *43560
rA =
π
Dietz Shape Factor (CA):

 97827 A   2.303( pi − int*)
CA =  2  exp2S + 
 rw   m 
162.6q s Bo µ o
where m = − = slope of Semi-Log plot line.
kh
int* = intercept of Cartesian plot line at t = 0.
Volume of oil reserves

Equation : 15.1.3 - V :
V oil = −
(
φ hA 1 − S w − S g )
Bo
The volume is reported at standard conditions.

2-cell compartmentalized boundary model
Drawdown Analysis option for flowing tests, and build-up tests plotted using the Slider pressure
extrapolation correction:
Drainage area (A) (first cell): same as for closed system model above.
Dietz Shape Factor (CA): same as for closed system model above.
First cell volume (V1) (total connected pore volume):

V1 = 43560 Ahφ
506
Equations
Total volume (Vtot) (total connected pore volume of the two cells):
0.23395q s Bo
Vtot = −
Ct m2 *
where m2* is the slope of the second (total system) line.
Inter-cell transmissibility (Teff):

24C tV1
Teff =
 V + V2 
t int  1 
 V2 
where tint is the time (or equivalent time) of the intersection of the first cell and total system lines,
and V2 is the volume of the second cell = Vtot− V1.
Build-up Analysis option, for buildup tests plotted without the Slider pressure extrapolation
correction:
Second cell volume (V2) (connected pore volume):

V12
V2 =
V ’ − V1
where V’ is computed from the slope of the line m* using the same equations as Equation 15.1.3
- II, on page 506 and Equation 15.1.3 - III, on page 506 . V’ is an intermediate term, and does not
correspond to any physical volume. V1 is a user input unless derived from drawdown analysis.
15. 1. 4. Deliverability Analysis - Oil Wells

15.1.4. Deliverability Analysis - Oil Wells
Calculation of J from Transient Test Data
The following IPR calculations are in terms of OIL production rate.
Productivity Index J (semi-steady-state radial flow)

Equation : 15.1.4 - I :
kh
J=
   4 A * 43560  
141.2 Bo µ o 0.5 ln 
2 
+ S pr 
   1.782C A rw  
with the drainage area A in acres.
Spr is the pseudo-radial skin factor.
507
Equations
The radial flow equation (Equation 15.1.4 - I, on page 507 ) requires a pseudo-radial skin factor
Spr for those models which do not exhibit radial flow at early time. This is calculated from the
true or mechanical skin factor S that has been derived from welltest analysis, and is displayed on
the IPR input screen. The following conversions are used:
• Radial homogeneous: Spr = S

• Dual porosity: Spr = S
• Vertical fracture:
 r 
S pr = ln  w  +Sf
r 
 weff 
where:
: X
rweff = f (infinite conductivity)
2
Xf
rweff = (uniform flux)
e
rweff = function of Xf and FCD, (finite conductivity) (Fig. 18 of ref. 60).
• Dual-permeability:
S
S pr = + Sb
κ
where Sb is a flow convergence skin due to the vertical permeability defined in ref. 48.
κ is defined in “Equation 7.6.5 - V”, on page 210.

For this model the “full thickness” permeability is computed as:
k
k pr =
κ
and this is used in Equation 15.1.4 - I, on page 507 , instead of the k of the open layer, since this
is what is seen at late time.
• Partial Penetration:
Equation : 15.1.4 - V :
S
S pr = + S conv
b
hp
where b =
h
is the penetration ratio and Sconv is the convergence or limited entry skin defined in ref. 61.
508
Equations
• Radial composite:
L 
S pr = ( M − 1) ln rad  + MS
 rw 
where M is the outer/inner region mobility ratio defined in Equation , on page 210 .
For this model, the outer region permeability is computed as kpr = Mk, where k is the inner region
permeability. The kpr term is used instead of k for the productivity index (Equation 15.1.4 - I, on
page 507 ).
• Horizontal well models:
The radial flow deliverability equation can be used for horizontal wells if the appropriate pseudo-
radial skin factor is used:
 r  Sh
S pr = ln 4.4817 w  + t 0.5
 Lw  Lw A
where:
The first term on the right in Equation 15.1.4 - VII accounts for the horizontal drainhole of length
Lw (ref. 62, Eq.8, for a single open interval).
k
A is the anisotropy coefficient Z . The permeability k is the horizontal permeability pertaining
k
to late pseudo-radial flow.
St contains the mechanical skin factor S and a term for convergence towards the wellbore from
full thickness flow, and anisotropy (refs.62, 72).

The term r’w is defined as:
and
The summation Σ is defined in the references. It can be ignored if hD < 5.

Maximum Flow Potential [pres ≥ pb]
Jpb   14.7  
2
 14.7 
qmax = qb + 1 − 0.2 .
 − 08  
. 
18  pb   pb  
where pb is the bubble-point pressure (from Fluid Parameters),
509
Equations
qb = J[pres - pb] = flowrate at pwf = pb and
pres = current layer pressure.
Maximum Flow Potential [pres < pb]

Jp   14.7   14.7  
2
q max = res 1 − 0.2  − 0.8  

18
.   pres   pres  
Calculation of J from Production Test Point Data

(a) Single Test Point [q1, p1] with pres > pb
If p1>pb
Equation : 15.1.4 - X :
q1
J=
[p res − p1 ]
If p < p
1 b
q1
J=
 pb   p1   p 1   
2
 p res − p b + 1 − 0.2   − 0 .8   

 1.8   pb   p b   

Maximum Flow Potential - see Equation 15.1.4 - IX, on page 510 .
(b) Single Test Point [q1, p1] with pres ≤ pb

q1
J=
 p   p1   p1   
2

res
1 − 0.2  − 0.8  
 1.8   p res   p res   

Maximum Flow Potential - see Equation 15.1.4 - VIII, on page 509 .
(c) 2 or 3 Test Points with pres > pb

PanSystem performs a least-squares fit, taking into account the Vögel curvature of the IPR below
bubble-point (Equation 15.1.4 - X, on page 510 and Equation 15.1.4 - XI, on page 510 ) for
points 1, 2 and 3. Then:
−1
J=
[slope of line at p > p ] b
Estimated Shut-In Pressure = intercept of line at q = 0.

s
510
Equations
Maximum Flow Potential is calculated with Equation 15.1.4 - VIII, on page 509 , using the
estimated shut-in pressure instead of p .
res
(d) 2 or 3 Test Points, pres ≤ pb
PanSystem calculates the best-fit value of J, keeping p fixed, using the Vögel equation
(Equation 15.1.4 - XII, on page 510 ) for points 1,2 and 3. res
Maximum Flow Potential - see Equation 15.1.4 - IX, on page 510 .
Calculation of IPR Curve

Flowrates are calculated for values of pwf between 14.7 psia and pres, using the Vögel relationship.
Note pres is replaced by the estimated shut-in pressure for case (c) in the previous section.
(a) p > pb
res
If Pwf ≥ Pb:
[
q = J pres − pwf ]
If pwf < pb:
  pwf   pwf  
2
[ ]
q = qb + q max − qb 1 − 0.2
 pb 
 − 0.8  
 pb  

[ ]
where qb = J pres − qb = flowrate at bubbl-point pb
and qmax is defined in Equation 15.1.4 - VIII, on page 509 .
(b) pres < pb

  pwf   pwf  
2
q = qmax 1 − 0.2  − 0.8  

  pres   pres  
where qmax is defined in Equation 15.1.4 - IX, on page 510 .

15. 1. 5. Production Forecasting
15.1.5. Production Forecasting

The flowrate is determined at each time-step tj by an inflow/outflow analysis. The inflow curve
is computed at time t j using the Pd (Td) function appropriate for the selected reservoir and
boundary models. The outflow curve is either the specified constant bhfp, or the bhfp versus
flowrate curve read from the VFP flowing pressure file. The actual flowrate and flowing pressure
at time tj are determined by the intersection of the two curves. This is repeated for each time-step,
resulting in a declining production profile.
511
Equations
For closed systems with no-flow boundaries, the layer pressure p (t j ) is re-computed at each time-
step tj from the cumulative volume of oil Np(tj) produced up to that point. (No layer pressure
computation is made for non-closed systems, nor for closed systems with constant pressure
boundaries, since there is no depletion).
To do this, the material balance equation (Ref.1), for a solution gas drive reservoir with no water
influx and no gas cap, is solved for p (t j ) by iteration:
Equation : 15.1.5 - I :
[ ]
N p (t j ) B o + ( R sp − R s ) B g =
 ( B o − B oi ) + ( R si − R s ) B g  c w S w + c f  
N i B oi  +   ∆ p (t j ) 
 B oi  1 − Sw  
where:
∆p(t j ) = p i − p(t j ) is the total depletion at time tj,

Np(tj) is the cumulative volume of oil produced up to time tj (at standard conditions),
φhA(1 − S w )
Ni =
Boi is the initial volume of oil in place (at standard conditions),
Rsi is the initial solution gas/oil ratio,

Rs is the solution gas/oil ratio at current layer pressure
Rsp is the cumulative produced gas/oil ratio (=constant producing gas/oil ratio in PanSystem)
Boi is the initial oil volume factor at initial pressure pi and layer temperature Ti.
Bo and Bg are the oil and gas volume factors at current later pressure p (t j ) .
Fluid properties are re-evaluated at this new average layer pressure p (t j ) and used in the inflow
calculation for the next time-step tj+1. This yields the new production rate at time tj+1. The new
cumulative production Np(t j+1) is then estimated, and the new average layer pressure p(t j +1 )
recomputed. And so on …..
512
Equations
15.2. Linear Flow Analysis
15.2.1. Fracture Linear Flow
Square-Root Time Plot
Fracture half-length:
Equation : 15.2.1 - I :
Xf =
(4.064q B )s o µo
mh kφCt
where m = slope of line.
 k  k
The multi-phase flow correction replacing   by  
 µo   µ t
is applied in the multi-phase Oil Fluid Type options. qs Bo is replaced by the total downhole rate.
Fracture Face Skin Factor Sf:

- Constant rate drawdown
∆pint kh
Sf =
. qs Bo µ o
1412
where ∆pint = [pi - pint(∆t=0)] and pint(∆t=0) is the intercept of the linear flow line at ∆t=0.
- Equivalent Square Root Time plots:

Sf =
[pint ]
− p(∆t = 0) kh
. qs Bo µ o
1412
where pint is the intercept of the line at equivalent time = 0. Where the y-axis is plotted as ∆p
rather than p, the square bracket in the equation becomes just ∆pint. In addition, where the y-axis
is plotted as ∆p/∆q, the qs term is set to 1.0.
15. 2. Linear Flow Analysis
- Tandem Square-Root plot:

0 .5
 0 .0002637 π kt p 
Sf = S −
’ 
 φµ C X 2
f 
 0 t f 
where S’f is calculated from Equation 15.2.1 - III, on page 513 with pint =p*, the intercept of the
line at ∆t = ∞ .
513
Equations
Computed Initial Pressure pcalc
- Constant rate build-up, Square Root Time Plot:
Equation : 15.2.1 - V :
p calc = p int + m t p
where m is the slope of the line, and
pint is the intercept of the line at ∆t = 0.
Finite Conductivity Fracture Model:

The dimensionless intercept is calculated:
∆pint kh
int D =
141.2qs Bo µ o
intD must be > 0.
This is the same equation as for Sf (see Equation 15.2.1 - II, on page 513 ), and the same
definitions of ∆pint exist for the different plots.
A look-up table (ref. 24) is then used to find Fcd and m1D for this particular value of intD (m1D is
the theoretical slope for the linear flow).
Fracture half-length is then re-computed from:

m1 D 2.293q s Bo µ o
Xf =
m h kφµ o Ct
and
k f w = FCD kX f
where m is the slope from the square-root plot. 15. 2. 1. Fracture Linear Flow
   
The multi-phase flow correction replacing  k  by  k  .
µ  µ
 o  t
is applied in the multi-phase Oil Fluid Type options. qsBo is replaced by the total downhole rate.
Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor Spr is calculated using Equation 15.1.4 - II, on page 508 .
514
Equations
15.2.2. Reservoir Linear Flow
Square-Root Time Plot
Reservoir width:
Equation : 15.2.2 - I :
8128
. qs Bo µo
W=
mh kφCt
where m = slope of the line on the linear flow plot.
   
µ  µ
 o  t
Flow convergence skin factor Sconv:

S conv = S t − S
where S is the true (mechanical) skin, and the total skin S is calculated from the line fitted to the
square-root plot using either Equation 15.2.1 - II, on page t513 , Equation 15.2.1 - III, on page 513
or Equation 15.2.1 - IV, on page 513 , depending on the test type.
W
In these equations, Sf is replaced by St, and Xf by .
2
Distance to nearest boundary, L (ref. 42):
L 1  W 
= sin −1  S conv 
W π  2πrw e 
where Sconv is the flow convergence skin (Equation 15.2.2 - II).
L 15. 2. 2. Reservoir Linear Flow
L = W 
W 
W L
If 0 ≤ ≤ 1 is not met, is set to zero.
2πr e S conv
W
Computed initial pressure pcalc

Constant rate build-up, Square-Root Time Plot:
Equation : 15.2.2 - V :
p calc = p int + m t p
where pint is the intercept at ∆t = 0, m is the slope of the line.
515
Equations
15.3. Bi-Linear Flow Analysis
Fourth-Root Time Plot
Fracture Conductivity kfw:

Equation : 15.3.0 - I :
 44.1q s Bo µ o 
2
1
kf w =  
 mh φµ o Ct k
where m = slope of the line.

   
µ  µ
 o  t
Dimensionless fracture conductivity FCD:

kf w
FCD =
kX f
Pseudo-radial skin factor:

r 
Spr = ln w  + S f
rweff 
rweff
where rweff is obtained from a curve-fit of FCD vs (ref. 23, Fig 14 or ref. 60, Fig 18).
Xf
Xf from Time-to-end-of-Bi-Linear-Flow (tebf):
- For Fcd >3

Equation : 15.3.0 - IV : 15. 3. Bi-Linear Flow Analysis
 0.002637tebf 
Xf =4   k w
 φµ 0 Ct k  f
- For Fcd <1.6

Equation : 15.3.0 - V :
2
 
 
 2.5 k f w 
Xf =  
 4.55 k − k f w 
 4 at 
 ebf 
516
Equations
0.0002637 k
where a =
φµ o Ct
- For 1.6 < Fcd<3, the equation

−0.6536
 TDebf 
FCD =  + 15
.
 0.0205 
is solved by iteration on Xf as both
kfw
FCD =
kX f
and
0.0002637 ktebf
TDebf =
φµ o Ct X f 2
are functions of Xf
   
The multi-phase flow correction replacing  k  by  k  is applied in the multi-phase Oil
  µ
Fluid Type options.  µo   t
15.4. Spherical Flow Analysis

1/Square-Root Time Plot
- Partial penetration model

Assuming spherical flow (perforations in the middle of the layer):
Vertical permeability kz:
Equation : 15.4.0 - I : 15. 4. Spherical Flow Analysis
kz =
(2453B µ q ) φµC
o o s
2
t
2 2
mk
where k is the horizontal radial permeability and m is the slope of the line.
- Gas cap/Aquifer model
We assume hemi-spherical flow (perforations at the top or bottom of the layer (e.g. at the bottom
for a gas cap). In this case, kz is computed from the above equation with the 2453 coefficient
replaced by (4x2453).
517
Equations
15.5. Horizontal Wells
(Refs.47, 52.)
15.5.1. Semi-Log plot:

The average vertical radial permeability kbar, ( k ), is calculated from the line slope m:
Equation : 15.5.1 - I :
162.6qs Bo µ o
k = kkZ = −
mLw
where m is the slope of the early vertical radial flow line, and L is the effective well length.
w
For the hemi-radial flow line, the 162.6 coefficient is doubled in the above equation.
The skin factor S is calculated using the equation from ”Permeability and skin” (See Section 15.
1. 2 “Semi-Log Plot”, on page 493) appropriate to the test type, replacing k by k . This
corresponds to the true (mechanical) skin.
The horizontal radial permeability, k, is calculated as:

162.6q s Bo µ o
k=−
mh
where m is the slope of the late (pseudo-) radial flow line.
If there is areal anisotropy, then assume k = k x k y .
The pseudo-radial skin factor Spr is calculated from the late (pseudo-) radial flow line using
the equation from ”Permeability and skin” (See Section 15. 1. 2 “Semi-Log Plot”, on page 493),
appropriate to the test type.
15.5.2. Log-Log plot:

Wellbore storage constants CS and CD are calculated by Equation 15.1.1 - I, on page 492 and
Equation 15.1.1 - II, on page 492 for the unit slope line.
15. 5. Horizontal Wells
518
Equations
The average vertical radial permeability kbar, ( k ), is calculated from the zero-slope line
(early data) by:
Equation : 15.5.2 - I :
141.2qs Bo µo  0.5 
k = kkZ =  
Lw  ∆px 
where ∆px is the y-position of the line, and Lw is the effective well length. For the hemi-radial
case, the 0.5 on the right is replaced by 1.0.
Skin factor S is determined from the zero slope line using the skin factor equations defined in
the Semi-Log Plot section (See Section 15. 1. 2 “Semi-Log Plot”, on page 493) with k replaced
by k . In these equations, the “intercept” term is read from the delta-pressure at the start of the
vertical radial flow regime as defined by the flow regime marker. The “slope” term m is derived
from the vertical radial permeability k using, for instance, Equation 15.1.2 - I, on page 494 .
Horizontal radial permeability, k, is calculated from the zero-slope line (late pseudo-radial) by:
. qs Bo µ o  0.5 
1412
k=  
h  ∆px 
∆p is the y-position of the line. For the radial flow at single fault case, the 0.5 on the right is
x
replaced by 1.0.
The pseudo-radial skin factor Spr is determined from the zero slope line (late pseudo-radial
data) using the skin factor equations defined in the Semi-Log Plot section (See Section 15. 1. 2
“Semi-Log Plot”, on page 493). In these equations, the “intercept” term is read from the delta-
pressure at the start of the late radial flow regime as defined by the flow regime marker. The
“slope” term is derived from the radial permeability k using, for instance, Equation 15.1.2 - I, on
page 494 .
15.5.3. Square-Root plot

This plot may be used in either of two ways.
a) Estimation of effective well length and convergence skin.
This is the default computation, invoked if the command line HLLC_K_L=0 has been added to
the Configuration sub-folder of the Pansys30.ini folder (See Section 1. 1. 3 “PANSYS30.INI and
15. 5. 3. Square-Root plot
the Registry”, on page 24), or if the command line is absent (default).
The effective well length, Lw, is given by:

Equation : 15.5.3 - I :
. q s Bo  µ o
 8128
Lw =  
 mh  kφCt
where m is the slope of the line through the linear flow portion of the data.
519
Equations
The convergence skin Sconv is calculated from:
S conv = A 0 .5 S t − S
where S is the mechanical skin
k
and A= z is the anisotropy coefficient.
k
St is obtained from the intercept of the line:
∆pint kLw
St =
141.2q s Bo µ o
where ∆pint = [pi-pint(∆t=0)] for a drawdown with no history,

or ∆pint = [pint(∆te=0)−p(∆t=0)] for an equivalent time plot.
For a build-up using the tandem square-root function:
0.5
 0.0002637πkt p 
S t = S − 2
’

φµ
t 2
 C
0 t h 
where S’t is calculated using Equation 15.5.3 - II, on page 520 with ∆pint = [p*−p(∆t=0)].
b) Estimation of radial permeability and mechanical skin factor
If the command HLLC_K_L=1 has been added to the Configuration sub-folder of the
Pansys30.ini folder (See Section 1. 1. 3 “PANSYS30.INI and the Registry”, on page 24), the
slope m and intercept pint are used to calculate the radial permeability k and mechanical skin S,
assuming a knowledge of Lw, kz and zwd. This option is useful when the early vertical radial flow
portion of the data is obscured or is of poor quality.
2
 8 . 128 q s B o  µo
k =  
 mhL w  φC t
A total skin St is calculated from the intercept p int in the same way as in option a) above
(Equation 15.5.3 - II). Mechanical skin S is derived from this by:
S = A 0 . 5 S t − S conv
15. 5. 3. Square-Root plot
where:
Equation : 15.5.3 - V :
 
 
= ln  
h
S conv
  Zw 
 2π rw A sin π  
0 .25
  h 
is a skin factor accounting for flow convergence and anisotropy (ref. 62).
520
Equations
kz
A= is the anisotropy coefficient .
k
15.6. Type-Curve Analysis
15.6.1. Plot Axes for Data
The type-curve plots are scaled in real terms, not dimensionless:
x-axis
Constant rate drawdown and all tests with "no history" option on.
Equation : 15.6.1 - I : x-axis: log ∆t
Build-up tests ("Constant rate" option on).

[
Equation : 15.6.1 - II : x-axis: log ∆p / ∆q ]
All tests, ("Full history" option on).
x-axis: Equivalent time, defined in Equation 15.1.2 - X, on page 496 .
y-axis
Constant rate drawdown and all tests with "no history" option on.
Equation : 15.6.1 - III : y-axis: log ∆p
All tests with "Full history" option on.

[
Equation : 15.6.1 - IV : y-axis: og ∆p / ∆q ]
See Section 15. 6. 5 “Slug Test Type-Curves”, on page 525 for the wellbore fill-up or leak-off
test, which has a special y-axis definition.
For pressure extrapolation options, the pressure data are modified, as described in “Pressure
Extrapolation Option”, on page 505, before any y-axis functioning is performed.
Derivative
Equation : 15.6.1 - V : y-axis: log p’
15. 6. Type-Curve Analysis
The pressure derivative p’ is calculated according to the time function as follows:
dp
Equation : 15.6.1 - VI : "No history": p’=
d [ln∆t ]
521
Equations
"Constant rate history":
dp dp
p’= =
d ln ∆te  t p + ∆t 
d ln 
 t p ∆t 
"Full history":
 ∆p 
d 
p’=  ∆q 
[
d ln(equivalent time) ]
Equivalent time is defined in Equation 15.1.2 - X, on page 496 .
Corresponding derivatives can be selected for linear time, square-root time and fourth-root time
dependence.
15.6.2. Homogeneous Reservoir Calculations

Permeability
For data plotted as ∆p on the y-axis:
Equation : 15.6.2 - I :
. q s Bo µ o PDmatch
1412
k=
h∆pmatch
15. 6. 2. Homogeneous Reservoir Calculations

where
( pi − p wf ) kh
PD =
141 .2 q s B0 µ 0
 ∆p 
For data plotted as   on the y-axis:
 ∆q 
. Bo µ o PDmatch
1412
k=
 ∆p 
h 
 ∆q  match
522
Equations
15.6.3. Wellbore Storage Type-curves
[TD/CD] on x-axis (refs. 5, 34),
where
Equation : 15.6.3 - I :
0.0002637 k∆t
TD =
φµ 0 C t rw 2
and
0.8936Cs
CD =
φCt hrw 2
Storage Coefficient
 
 
 0.000295kh   ∆tmatch 
Cs =   
 µo    TD 
  
  CD  match 
  k 
The multi-phase flow correction replacing  k  by   is applied in the Oil (Multi-phase)
 
Fluid Type options.  µo   µ t
15. 6. 3. Wellbore Storage Type-curves

Each curve corresponds to a different value of CDe2S:
 (CD e 2 S ) 
S = 0.5 ln  match

 CD 
Varying wellbore storage models

Fair’s model (ref. 49):
Equation : 15.6.3 - V :
dp w ( q sf − q s ) B o C φ − α
t
= − e
dt 24 C s α
where Cφ is the Storage Amplitude (phase redistribution parameter) in psi, and α is the Storage
Time Constant (hrs.). q is the surface flowrate, qsf is the instantaneous sandface flowrate (at
standard conditions). s
523
Equations
The storage coefficient Capp observed at early time (unit slope line) is equivalent to:
−1
 1 24 C φ 
C app = + 
 C s q s B oα 
Hegeman et al’s model (ref. 50):

2
 
dp w ( q sf − q s ) B o C φ −  α 
t
= − e
dt 24 C s α
Skin Pressure Drop

For constant rate tests:
. q s Bo µ o S
1412
∆pskin =
kh (psi)
For varying rate tests:
. Bo µ o S
1412
∆pskin =
kh (psi/STB/day)
Equation : 15.6.3 - X :
k∆T
Rinv = 0.029
φµ o Ct
where ∆T is the shut-in time (build-up analysis), or the duration of the flowing period (drawdown
analysis).
15. 6. 3. Wellbore Storage Type-curves

 k  k 
The multi-phase flow correction replacing   by   is applied in the multi-phase Oil
524
Equations
15.6.4. Bounded System Type-Curves
 TD 
 2  on x-axis,
 LD 
L
where LD = and TD is defined in Equation 15.6.3 - I, on page 523 .
rw
k is calculated as in Equation 15.6.2 - I, on page 522 or Equation 15.6.3 - III, on page 523 .
Characteristic length L is calculated from the time match:
Equation : 15.6.4 - I :
0.0002637 k∆tmatch
L=
T 
φµ o Ct  D2 
 LD  match
L is the basic dimension that describes the geometrical configuration of the boundaries (such as
in L:2L for parallel faults). It is the distance to the nearest boundary.
 k  k 
The multi-phase flow correction replacing   by   is applied in the Oil (Multi-phase)
15.6.5. Slug Test Type-Curves
[TD/CD] on x-axis, for wells open to atmospheric pressure on surface (ref. 40). TD is defined in
Equation 15.6.3 - I, on page 523 , and CD in Equation 15.6.3 - II, on page 523 .
y-axis:
Equation : 15.6.5 - I :
[ p − p]
i
15. 6. 4. Bounded System Type-Curves

[ pi − po ]
where pi is the layer pressure, and po is the initial wellbore (cushion) pressure.
Permeability k is calculated from the time match:

T 
3389.8µ o Cs  D 
 CD  match
k=
h∆t match
Each type-curve corresponds to a different value of CDe2S.
525
Equations
S is calculated from the matched curve CDe2S parameter, (see Equation 15.6.3 - IV, on page 523
), using CD as in Equation 15.6.2 - I, on page 522 . The storage constant CS must be specified in
the Well Model Parameters as an input. For fill-up or leak-off with the well open to the
atmosphere:
CS = 0.00224d 2 / ρCosα
where d = pipe ID (inches), ρ = wellbore fluid density (g/cm3) and α= average well deviation
(degrees) over the fill-up/leak-off interval.
15.6.6. Fractured Well Type-Curves

[TDxf] on x-axis (refs. 23, 24, 25),
where
Equation : 15.6.6 - I :
0 . 0002637 kt
T Dxf =
φµ C t x f 2
Infinite Conductivity and Uniform Flux

Fracture Half-Length (Xf):
0.0002637 k∆Tmatch
Xf =
[T ]
Dxf
match
µ o φCt
 k  k 
The multi-phase flow correction replacing   by   is applied in the multi-phase Oil Fluid
Type options.  µo   µ t
Wellbore Storage coefficient:
15. 6. 6. Fractured Well Type-Curves

Each curve represents a different value of CDxf:
0 . 8936 C s
C Dxf =
φ C t hX f 2
CD is derived from the match-curve value:

Xf2
CD =
rw 2
[C ]
Dxf
match
and:
Equation : 15.6.6 - V :
CS = 1119
. CD φCt hrw2
526
Equations
Pseudo-Radial Skin Factor (Spr):
 r 
S pr = ln  w 
 rweff 
where
Xf
rweff =
2
for an infinite conductivity fracture, or:
Xf
rweff =
e
for a uniform flux fracture.
Finite Conductivity - Cinco-Ley [Tdxf] type-curves

(Ref. 23)
Permeability k is calculated as in Equation 15.6.2 - I, on page 522 or Equation 15.6.2 - III, on
page 522 . Xf is calculated as in Equation 15.6.6 - II, on page 526 .
Fracture Conductivity (kfw)
Each type-curve corresponds to a different value of FCD.
[ ]
k f w = FCD match
kX f
where [FCD]match is the value of the match curve.
15. 6. 6. Fractured Well Type-Curves

Pseudo radial skin factor (Spr):
Spr is calculated as in Equation 15.6.6 - VI, on page 527 ,
rweff
with rweff from a curve-fit of the relationship between and FCD presented in ref. 23.
rw
Finite Conductivity - Wong, Harrington and Cinco-Ley type curves
Please see ref. 44 for a description of the wellbore storage and fracture analysis.
527
Equations
15.6.7. Dual-Porosity Type Curves
Pressure Match Method
[TD/CD] on x-axis (refs. 28, 29) where TD is defined in Equation 15.6.3 - I, on page 523 , and CD
in Equation 15.6.3 - II, on page 523
k, CD, CS and S are calculated as for the homogeneous model, using the value of CDe2s on the late
time (total system) match curve (Equation 15.6.2 - I, on page 522 to Equation 15.6.3 - IV, on
page 523 ).
Storativity ratio ω:
Equation : 15.6.7 - I :
ω=
[C e ]
D
2S
late match curve
[C e ]
D
2S
early match curve
Inter-porosity flow coefficient λ:

In the transition period type-curve set each curve represents a different value of λe2S.
[λe ] 2S
λ= match
e2 S
Derivative Match Method
 λ  on x-axis, where TD is defined in Equation 15.6.3 - I, on page 523 .

TD 4 
Wellbore storage coefficient and fracture system permeability are determined from the match
using the standard wellbore storage and skin (T /C ) type-curve set (Equation 15.6.2 - I, on page
522 to Equation 15.6.3 - IV, on page 523 ). D D
15. 6. 7. Dual-Porosity Type Curves

Inter-porosity flow coefficient
α rw2
λ=
k fracs
 λ
is calculated from the dual-porosity derivative type-curve  TD  time-axis match:
 4
15169φµ o Ct rw2 ∆t match
λ=
 λ
k TD 
 4  match
 k  k 
528
Equations
Storativity ratio, ω, is the value on the match curve.
15.6.8. Ei Type-Curve
R
[TD/RD2] on x-axis where RD = , and TD is defined in Equation 15.6.3 - I, on page 523 .
rw
R is the inter-well distance
For a constant rate drawdown qs at the pulsing well.
Permeability k is calculated from the pressure axis match:

Equation : 15.6.8 - I :
141.2q s Bo µ o PDmatch
k=
h∆pmatch
where PD is defined in Equation 15.6.2 - II, on page 522 .
Porosity-compressibility product comes from the time-axis match:

0.0002637 k∆tmatch
φCt =
 TD 
 R2  µo R2
 D  match
where R = inter-well distance (ft).
15.6.9. Dual-Permeability Type-Curves

Refs. 46, 48.
Only layer 1 is assumed to be producing.
Wellbore storage coefficient and layer 1 (producing) permeability and skin are calculated from
the match using the standard wellbore storage and skin (TD/CD) type-curve set (Equation 15.6.2
- I, on page 522 to Equation 15.6.3 - IV, on page 523 ). This assumes that layer 1 properties (h1,
etc.) have been specified in the Layer Parameters.
 k  k 
The multi-phase flow correction replacing   by   is applied in the multi-phase Oil
15. 6. 8. Ei Type-Curve

Derivative type-curves
 λ  on x-axis where TD is defined in Equation 15.6.3 - I, on page 523 .

TD 4 
k v rw2
Inter-layer flow coefficient λ =
hv ( k1h1 + k 2 h2 )
529
Equations
is calculated from the
 λ
dual-permeability derivative type-curve TD  time-match:
 4
Equation : 15.6.9 - I :
15169φµ 0 Ct rw2 ∆tmatch
λ=
 λ
k TD 
 4  match
kv
In the definition of λ, the term represents the vertical conductivity
hv
(See Section “Vertical Well Flow Model Input Parameters”, on page 208).
Each curve represents a different value of the

k1h1
flow capacity ratio κ =
( k1h1 + k 2 h2 )
The value is read from the late-time (total system) match curve.
(φCt h)1
The storativity ratio ω =
(φCt h)1 + ( φCt h) 2
must be obtained by iteration using the Simulate Quick Match or Auto Match options.
15.6.10. Radial Composite Type-Curves

(Refs. 53, 54)
The Wellbore storage coefficient and inner region permeability and skin are calculated from
the match using the standard wellbore storage and skin (TD/CD) type-curve set (Equation 15.6.2
- I, on page 522 to Equation 15.6.3 - IV, on page 523 ).
15. 6. 10. Radial Composite Type-Curves

 k  k 
Lrad
[TD/RD2] on x-axis where RD = , and TD is defined in Equation 15.6.3 - I, on page 523 .
rw
Three type-curve sets are available:
- Lower mobility in inner region (default): TIGHTIN.TCD
- Lower mobility in outer region: TIGHTOUT.TCD
- Gas drive (gas in outer region): GASDRIVE.TCD
530
Equations
Distance to radial discontinuity Lrad is determined from the Radial Composite derivative type-
2
curve [TD/RD ] time-match:
Equation : 15.6.10 - I :
0.0002637 k∆t match
Lrad =
T 
φµ 0 Ct  D2 
 RD  match
 k  k 
Each curve corresponds to a different value of M.

Ratio of outer to inner mobilities  M =
(k / µ)outer  .

 (k / µ)inner 
M is read from the late time (outer region radial flow) match-curve.
(φCt ) outer
Outer/inner storativity ratio ω =
15. 6. 11. Partial-Penetration and Gas Cap/Aquifer Type-Curves

(φCt ) inner
must be obtained by iteration using the Simulate Quick Match or Auto Match options.
15.6.11. Partial-Penetration and Gas Cap/Aquifer Type-Curves

Wellbore storage coefficient, inner region permeability (kp) and true skin (S) are calculated
from the match using the standard wellbore storage and skin (TD/CD) type-curve set (Equation
15.6.2 - I, on page 522 to Equation 15.6.3 - IV, on page 523 ), with a user-supplied value for the
perforated interval height hp.
 k  k 
TDZ on the x-axis, where
Equation : 15.6.11 - I :
0.0002637 k z t
TDZ =
φµ 0 Ct h 2
where h is the full layer thickness, and kz is the vertical permeability.
Two sets of Partial Penetration type-curves are available:
- Perforations in middle (default set): MPARTPEN.TCD

- Perforations at top/bottom: TPARTPEN.TCD
531
Equations
Two sets of Gas Cap/Aquifer type-curves are available:
- Perforations at top (aquifer), or perforations at bottom (gas cap) (default set):

TGASCAP.TCG
- Perforations in middle: MGASCAP.TCG
These two models are identical as far as match calculations are concerned.
The match for late time data uses a set of derivative type-curves with T on the time-axis.
DZ
Vertical permeability, kZ, is determined from the time-match (Equation 15.6.11 - I, on page 531
). Full thickness radial permeability, k, is calculated from the y-axis match (Equation 15.6.2 - I
or Equation 15.6.2 - III, on page 522 ) using the full layer thickness h.
hp
Each type-curve corresponds to a different value of the penetration ratio .
h
The penetration ratio is obtained from the match curve, and the effective perforated length hp is
computed from this.
The inner region permeability, kp, is then re-calculated using this new hp (Equation 15.6.2 - I, on
page 522 or Equation 15.6.2 - III, on page 522 ).
15.6.12. 2-Cell Compartmentalised Type-Curves

Drawdown Method for flowing periods, and build-ups using the Slider pressure extrapolation:
Effective transmissibility Teff is calculated from the y-axis match:

Equation : 15.6.12 - I :
Teff = qo Bo [Y ]match
15. 6. 12. 2-Cell Compartmentalised Type-Curves

First cell connected pore volume V1 comes from this and the x-axis match:
Teff
V1 =
24Ct [ X ]match
Second cell connected pore volume V2 is then derived from the match-curve value:
V1
V2 =
[ Curve]match
Build-up Analysis method for build-ups not using the Slider pressure extrapolation:
Effective transmissibility Teff is calculated from the x-axis match:

Teff = 24V1Ct [ X ]match
532
Equations
First cell connected pore volume V1 comes from the y-axis match:
Equation : 15.6.12 - V :
qo Bo [Y ]match
1 =
24Ct
V1
V2 =
[ Curve]match
15.6.13. Horizontal Well Type-Curves

(Refs. 47, 52)
The horizontal well Stage 1 type-curves are defined in terms of a dimensionless pressure (and its
derivative):
Equation : 15.6.13 - I :
pDL =
[p o ] (kk )
− pwf Lw z
141.2qs Bo µ o
where LW is the effective length of the well, k is the horizontal radial permeability and kz is the
vertical permeability;
and a dimensionless time:

0.0002637k z ∆t
TDh =
φµ o Ct h 2
15. 6. 13. Horizontal Well Type-Curves

This differs slightly from the term TD(L/2) commonly used in published references (refs 47, 48):
0.00105 k∆t
TD ( L / 2) =
φµ o C t L2w
The dimensionless well length LWD is defined as:

0.5
 L  k 
LWD =  W  z 
 h  k 
and the dimensionless well position as:
Equation : 15.6.13 - V :
Z
ZWD =
h
533
Equations
where Z is the vertical distance from the well to the upper or lower boundary in a no-flow/no-flow
system, or to the no-flow boundary in a no-flow/constant pressure system.
Vertical permeability, kZ, is calculated from the time-match:

[ ]
φµ o Ct h 2 TDh match
kz =
0.000264 [∆t ]match
Radial permeability, k, can then be obtained from the y-axis match:

1 141.2qs Bo µo ( pDL )match 

2
k=  
kZ  Lw ∆pmatch 
In the "Known well length" option, the effective well length, Lw, is specified by the user, so the
kr equation can be solved directly. Well position, Z, is computed from the match-curve value
(ZwD).
In the "Unknown well length" option, ZwD is specified by the user, and the match-curve value of
LwD has to be solved simultaneously with the kr equation to determine kr and Lw:
0.5
 k 
LW =   h(LWD )match .
 kZ 
For the dual-porosity model, the parameters ω and λ are determined by iteration using Simulate
Quick Match or Auto Match.
In Stage 2, the wellbore storage coefficient Cs and true skin factor S are calculated from the
match by using the standard wellbore storage and skin (TD/CD) type-curve set (Equation 15.6.2 -
I, on page 522 to Equation 15.6.3 - IV, on page 523 ).
15.7. PanWizard Equations

15. 7. PanWizard Equations
15.7.1. Testing Time Advisor
Several useful calculations are made for oil welltests in the PanWizard for Test Design, in the
Testing Time Advisor section:
Wellbore storage coefficient:
- Fluid compression/expansion: C s = Vwb cwbf bbls/psi
where Vwb is the wellbore volume (bbls), and cwbf is the average compressibility of the fluid in
the wellbore (psi-1).
534
Equations
25.648Awb
- Moving liquid column: Cs = bbls/psi
ρwbf Cosα
where Awb is the cross-sectional area of the wellbore (ft2), ρwbf is the density of the moving
wellbore fluid, and α is the average angle of deviation of the well over the interval covered
by the fluid movement.
Time to end of wellbore storage:

Equation : 15.7.1 - I :
 3385 C s [60 + 3 .5 S t ]
t ewbs = 2 
 ( kh / µ ) 
This is twice the value in the classical equation (ref.2), and is more consistent with the behaviour
of the pressure derivative. It gives a time which is about 60% longer than the “1% afterflow”
criterion. Cs is the wellbore storage coefficient, and, for a gas or condensate well, St is the total
skin (S+DQ). The equation tends to underestimate the time when D > 0.
Time to detect closest boundary:
This is the minimum test duration required in order to be able to discern with some confidence a
change of slope on the Semi-Log plot, indicative of a heterogeneity at a distance R from the well.
This is simply the time required to be sure that there is a change of slope - it does not allow time
for the new trend to develop fully. In terms of the Log-Log plot, the derivative will just start to
leave the zero-slope radial flow line. In order to characterize the heterogeneity (single fault,
change of kh, etc), at least another log cycle of test time will be required.
The same equations as for radius of investigation are used (Equation 15.1.2 - XXVII, on page
499 to Equation 15.1.2 - XXIX, on page 499 ), but the input is distance, and the output is time.
Time to reach semi-steady-state:
This is the time required to detect the boundary farthest from the well in a closed system. The
same equations are used as for the time to detect closest boundary (see above).
15. 7. 1. Testing Time Advisor
535
Equations
Chapter 15 B- Equations
Gas Analysis
All equations are written in oilfield units.
Gas welltest analysis equations are very similar to those used for2 oil, with pressure optionally
replaced by pseudo-pressure (m(p)) or pressure-squared (p ) (refs.20 and 21), and time
optionally replaced by pseudo-time, (t’) (ref.41). There is the following correspondence
between plot axes terms:
Oil Gas
p p
m (p)*1E-06
or p2* 1E-06
∆p ∆p
∆m(p)* 1E-06
or ∆p2 * 1E-06
t t or t’
∆t ∆t or ∆t’
Note: The pseudo-pressure and pressure-squared axes units are divided by 1E06 for display
purposes (e.g. psi2/cP (*1E-06)). The slopes and intercepts reported on these plots will also
contain this factor, and therefore take the numerical values as they appear on the plot.
The pseudo-time t’ is the normalised form of the pseudo-time ta(p) defined in Agarwal’s paper
(Reference 41):
[
t ’= ta ( p) * µ gi Cti ]
where the constants µgi and Cti are at reservoir conditions (Fluid Parameters screen: Check
Pressure = Player, Check Temperature = T layer). This gives it the units of hours rather than
Chapter 15 B - Equations
(psi.hrs/cp).
Agarwal defined the un-normalised pseudo-time at pressure point ta(pn) as:

(t − t ) I ( p ) − I ( p )
( p − p ){ }
n
t a ( pn ) = ∑
j j −1
j j −1
j =1
j j −1
536
Equations
where:
pj
dp
I( pj ) = ∫
pstart
µCt
In PanSystem 2, the integral and summation are performed at plotting time, from a table of
pressure vs µg(p) and Ct(p) prepared in the Fluid Parameters section of Dataprep.
Only equations for the m(p) option will be cited in most instances in this section.
m(p) is defined by the integral (ref.1):

Equation : 15.7.1 - V :
pj
pdp
m( p j ) = 2 ∫
pstart
µz
[ ]
• For the p2 approximation, replace the surface gas flowrate qsg by µ gi zi q sg and m(p) by p2 in
all equations, unless otherwise stated.
µ gi zi
qsg
• For the p approximation, replace the surface gas flowrate qsg by 2 pi and m(p) by p in all
equations, unless otherwise stated.
Condensate fluid type

For the analysis of condensate welltests with the multi-phase pseudo-pressure option switched
OFF, the condensate is modelled in the reservoir as a single phase “wet gas”, representing a
recombination of the separator gas and associated liquid condensate, assumed to be above the
dew point.
To this end, all input separator gas flowrates are converted to wet gas rates internally by
multiplying by (1 + CGR x Vvap x 1E-6). The term qsg in the following equations refers to this wet
stream rate for condensate welltests.
15.8. Radial Flow Analysis 15. 8. Radial Flow Analysis
15.8.1. Log-Log Plot

Apparent Wellbore Volume V:
Equation : 15.8.1 - I :
qsgT ′[1E + 03]
=
2.2384µ giCgi ∆m(p)int
where ∆m(p)ιντ is the value of ∆m(p) at 1 hour (psi2/cP), qsg = gas flowrate at surface (MMscf/
day), T' = reservoir temperature (0R).
537
Equations
Dimensionless Storage Coefficient CD
0.8936VT ′
=
D
φ hrw 2 Twb′
where T’wb is the average wellbore temperature, and is assumed to be equal to the reservoir
temperature T' (0R), so the two temperatures cancel.
Storage Coefficient Cs
Cs = Vcgi
where Cgi is the isothermal gas compressibility at reservoir conditions (Fluid Parameters screen).
Log-Log Plot Radial permeability, k, is determined from a zero-slope line by (for the m(p)
option):
1422 q sg [1 E = 03 ]T ’  0 . 5 
k =  
h  ∆ m ( p) 
where ∆m(p) is the y-axis position of the line, T' is the reservoir temperature (0R), and the surface
flowrate qsg is in MMscf/day. For plots with rate-normalised pseudo-pressure on the y-axis, set
qsg = 1.0 in the equation.
Skin factor S is determined from the zero-slope line using the general form of the skin factor
equations defined in the next section on the Semi-Log Plot - “general” meaning before setting the
time, or time function, to 1.0 to define an intercept. Please refer to Equation 15.1.1 - IV, on page
493 for an example.
Other Calculations from the Log-Log Plot
• Dual-porosity model
Storativity ratio ω from the positions of the System radial flow and Transition to system radial
flow zero-slope lines. This is derived from a curve-fit relating the value of ω to the depth of the
derivative trough (value of derivative at bottom of trough y value of derivative in system radial
flow).
Interporosity flow coefficient λ from the time ∆tx at the end of the Transition to system radial
flow regime: this is described in Section “Other Calculations from the Log-Log Plot”, on page
15. 8. 2. Semi-Log Plots
493 for oil fluid type.
15.8.2. Semi-Log Plots

Permeability and skin
Please refer to “Semi-Log Plot”, on page 493 for the calculations made for the Semi-Log (Radial
Flow) plots. The following differences should be noted:
538
Equations
Permeability k for the m(p) option:
Equation : 15.8.2 - I :
1637qsg [1E + 03]T ′
k=
mh
where m is the slope of the line (per log10 cycle), T’ is the reservoir temperature (0R), and the
surface flowrate qsg is in MMscf/day. For superposition plots where the y-axis is normalised with
respect to flowrate, qsg is omitted from the equation.
Permeability k for the p2 approximation option:

1637µ gi zi q sg [1E + 03]T ′
k=
mh
For superposition plots where the y-axis is normalised with respect to flowrate, qsg is omitted
from the equation.
Permeability k for the pressure approximation option:

1637µ gi zi q sg [1E + 03]T ′
=
2 pi mh
For superposition plots where the y-axis is normalised with respect to flowrate, qsg is omitted
from the equation.
Skin Factor S
In the equations for S (See Section 15. 1. 2 “Semi-Log Plot”, on page 493) replace the pressure
terms (p) by pseudo-pressure (m(p)) or pressure-squared, µo by µgi and Ct by Cti.
For example, in the case of a generalized superposition ("full history"):

 int  k  
St = 11513
.  − log10  2 + 3.23
 m  φµ gi Cti rw  
where int is the intercept of the line of slope m at fr = 0 (equivalent time = 1.0 hrs.), and m is the
slope.
539
Equations
Other calculations from the Semi-Log plot
Permeability and skin factor from single fault radial flow line:
Equation : 15.8.2 - V :
1637qsg [1E + 03]T ′
k=
0.5m’h
 int  k  rw 
S t = 2.303 − log10   + 3.23 − log 
φµ gi Cti rw 
2 10
 m’ 2L 
where m’ is the slope of the line and L is the distance to the boundary.
Radius of Investigation Rinv
See Section 15. 1. 2 “Semi-Log Plot”, on page 493.
Calculated Initial Pressure pcalc

- For the MDH buildup plot ("No history"):
m( pcalc ) = m( p )1hr + m log10 t p + 1 [ ]
The corresponding pressure pcalc is read from the pseudo-pressure table.
For the p2 approximation:

(pcalc )2 = (p 2 )1hr + m log10 [tp + 1]
and:
p calc = ( p calc )2
- For the buildup plot using (Agarwal) equivalent time ("Constant rate history", not "Horner"):
Equation : 15.8.2 - X :
1637 q sg [1E + 03]T ’
m ( p calc ) = m ( p (∆t = 0 ) ) +
kh
[log 10 (t p )
 k  
+ log 10  2  − 3 .2275 + 0 .87 S 
φµ
 gi t w  C r 
540
Equations
- For superposition plots using equivalent time (Equation 15.1.2 - X, on page 496 ) ("Full
history", not "Horner"):
1637T ’
m( pcalc ) = m( p(TJ )) + [g r (TJ , TJ −1 )+
kh
 k 
+ q(TJ )log − 3.2275 + 0.87S 
 φµ o Ct rw
2

The corresponding pressure pcalc is then read from the pseudo-pressure table.
Skin Pressure Drop

First compute:
1422qsg [1E + 03]T ′
∆m( p) skin = S
kh
and
m( p) corr = m( po ) + ∆m( p) skin
where p0 is the last flowing pressure (for a drawdown) or pressure at the instant of shut-in (for a
build-up), so that m(p)corr is the flowing pseudo-pressure corrected for skin (i.e. the value if skin
were zero).
pcorr, the zero-skin flowing pressure, is obtained from m(p)corr via the look-up table. The skin
pressure drop is then:
[
∆pskin = pcorr − po ]
A similar logic is applied in the p2 option, where:
[∆p ]2
=
[ ]
1422 µ gi zi q sg [1E + 03]T ′
S
skin kh
and
[p ]2
corr
= po 2 + [∆p 2 ]skin
pcorr is then [p ]
2
corr
541
Equations
and
[
∆pskin = pcorr − po ]
A check is made that m(p)corr or (p2)corr are not negative.
Flow Efficiency FE:

FE =
( )
m( p *) − m pwf − ∆m( p)skin
( )
m( p *) − m pwf
where pwf is the flowing pressure at the end of the flowing period, and ∆m(p)skin is calculated in
Equation 15.8.2 - XII, on page 541 .
A similar definition applies to the p2 option (see note (c) in the introduction to Chapter 14B -
Equations - Gas).
Average Reservoir Pressure PMBH

For buildup tests, when the boundary configuration is closed system, an average reservoir
pressure is calculated by the MBH method described in “Semi-Log Plot”, on page 493, with
appropriate modifications for gas.
This is only valid if the preceding drawdown has reached semi-steady state.
For example, the MBH equation for p for a gas well becomes:
p 1422q sg [1E + 03]T ′
m( p) = m( p*) − DMBH *
2 kh
where m(p*) is the extrapolated or calculated initial pseudo-pressure from the semi-log line.
p is defined in “Semi-Log Plot”, on page 493.
DMBH
p is then read from the p versus m(p) look-up table.
Multi-Phase Flow
Note: In case of the multi-phase Gas and Condensate Fluid Type options, all specified flowrates
(gauge data, rate changes) refer to the separator gas phase. Other phase flowrates are computed
from the gas flowrate using WGR and CGR.
542
Equations
• Multi-phase pseudo-pressures:
(Ref. 18)
Multi-phase pseudo-pressure tables can be generated in PanSystem for rigorous modelling of
multi-phase effects and fluid property behaviour.
Tables can also be imported as a file from an external source. The .PSP file structure is described
in Equation 16.3.2 - I, on page 571 . The multi-phase pseudo-pressure is defined in Equation
16.3.2 - I, on page 571 . On import, the pseudo-pressures are converted for compatibility with the
m(p) analysis logic existing in PanSystem.
Internally, PanSystem computes the end-point permeability to gas (k’=keffg(Swi)) from the slope m
of the radial flow line. The effective permeabilities keffg, keffw and keffo at the current saturation Sw
are computed from this using the relative permeabilities:
keffg = k’.krg = keffg(Swi) x krg(Sw), etc.
k
 
µ
The total mobility  t is computed from the sum of the phase mobilities:
 keffo   keffw  keffg   k 

       
µ  µ  µ  µ 
 o +  w +  g
and replaces the gas mobility term  gi  in all equations (skin factor, Rinv,
etc.) containing the diffusivity term.
Intersection Time Calculations

• Distance to Linear and Radial Discontinuities
See Section 15. 1. 2 “Semi-Log Plot”, on page 493, and as defined in Equation 15.1.2 - XXXIX,
on page 502 and Equation 15.1.2 - XLI, on page 503 .
• Dual-Porosity Calculations
Storativity
 − 2 ∆Ykh 
 
 1422q [ 1E + 03 ] T ′ 
ω=e sg
where ∆Y is the vertical separation (i.e. ∆m(p)) between early and late parallel lines.
Inter-porosity Flow Coefficient

See Section 15. 1. 2 “Semi-Log Plot”, on page 493, and as defined in Equation 15.1.2 - XLIII, on
page 504 and Equation 15.1.2 - XLIV, on page 504 .
2
Matrix Block Permeability/Height
See Section 15. 1. 2 “Semi-Log Plot”, on page 493, and as defined in Equation 15.1.2 - XLV, on
page 504 .
Pressure Extrapolation Option

Pressures are corrected2as explained: See Section 15. 1. 2 “Semi-Log Plot”, on page 493, before
converting to m(p) or p for the plots.
543
Equations
15.8.3. Cartesian Plot
Apparent Wellbore Volume V (bbls):
Equation : 15.8.3 - I :
q sg T ′[1E + 03 ]
V =
2 . 2384 µ gi C gi m ’
where m’ is the slope of the line fitted to the early data (psi2/cp/hr), qsg = gas flowrate at surface
(MMscf/day), T' = reservoir temperature (0R).
Dimensionless Wellbore Storage Coefficient Cd: is computed using Equation 15.8.1 - II, on
page 538 .
Wellbore storage coefficient Cs: is computed from Equation 15.8.1 - III, on page 538 .
Drainage Area A (acres):

− 2.355qsg [1E + 03]T ′
A=
43560hφm * µ gi Cti
where m* is the slope of the line (negative).
Radius of Drainage [rA]

See Equation 15.1.3 - III, on page 506 .
Dietz Shape Factor

 97827 A   2.303 (m ( pi ) − m ( p )int )
CA =  2  exp  2 S t + 
 rw   m 
where St = S + Dqsg [1E+03],
m(p)int = intercept of the line at t = 0, and:

1637qsg [1E + 03]T ′
m=−
kh
2-cell compartmentalized boundary model

Drawdown Analysis option for flowing tests, and build-up tests plotted using the Slider pressure
extrapolation correction:
Drainage area (A) (first cell)): Equation 15.8.3 - II above.
Dietz Shape Factor (CA): same as for closed system model above (Equation 15.8.3 - III).
544
Equations
Volume of gas reserves:
Equation : 15.8.3 - V :
φ hA (1 − S w )
V gas =
Bg
Bg is the gas volume factor at initial conditions, and the volume is reported at standard
conditions. For the condensate fluid type, Vgas is the dry gas volume, obtained by dividing the
above equation by:
(1 + CGR x Vvap x 1E-6)
First cell volume (V1) (total connected pore volume (ft3)):

V1 = 43560 Ahφ
Total volume (Vtot) (total connected pore volume of the two cells (ft3)):
2.355q g 103 T ’
Vtot = −
106 µ gi Cti m2 *
where m2* is the slope of the second (total system) line.
Inter-cell transmissibility (Teff):

24C tiV1
Teff =
 V + V2 
t int  1 
 V2 
where tint is the time (or equivalent time) of the intersection of the first cell and total system lines,
and V2 is the volume of the second cell = Vtot− V1.
Build-up Analysis option, for build-up tests plotted without the Slider pressure extrapolation
correction:
Second cell volume (V2) (connected pore volume (ft3)):

2
V
V2 = ’ 1
V − V1
where V’ is computed from the slope of the line m* using Equation 15.8.3 - II, on page 544 , and
Equation 15.8.3 - VI, on page 545 . V’ is an intermediate term, and does not correspond to any
physical volume. V1 is a user input unless derived from drawdown analysis.
545
Equations
15.8.4. Transient Analysis with Rate-Dependent Skin
Flow-After-Flow Tests
• Radial flow plot:
Equation : 15.8.4 - I : y-axis:
∆m( p)
∆qn
where ∆m(p) and ∆qn refer to the n-th data point. ∆qn = qn - q∆t=0 where qn is the flowrate at then-
th data point, and q∆t=0 is the flowrate at the start of the flow period.
x-axis: Superposition function ("full history") fr defined in “Semi-Log Plot”, on page 493.
For each line, the permeability is calculated from the slope (Equation 15.8.2 - I, on page 539
with qsg=1), and the total skin factor St from Equation 15.8.2 - IV, on page 539 .
• S versus Q plot:
x-axis: Normalized flow rate (MMscf/day):
q 2j − q 2j −1
Q norm
j =
q j − q j −1
norm
15. 8. 4. Transient Analysis with Rate-Dependent Skin

y-axis: Normalized Total Skin St = S + DQj
where q is the surface flowrate during flow period j, qj-1 is the flowrate during the preceding flow
period. j
norm
For the flowing periods of an isochronal test (where qj-1 = 0), Qj = qj .
norm
For the shut-in periods of an isochronal test (where qj = 0), Qj = qj-1.
For flow-after-flow production tests, where q is always positive (as opposed to injection tests),
norm
Q simplifies to:
Q norm
j = q j + q j −1
This functioning of q is necessary because of the nature of the superposition function used, and
the fact that the y-axis of the Semi-Log plot is normalized with respect to ∆q, not q.
The alternative presentation provided when the Reference back to Pi option is switched on under
the Tf icon, plots true total skin St = S + DQj vs true flowrate Qj in all cases. Both methods are
theoretically rigorous and should give the same answers for S and D (provided the correct initial
pressure Pi is used in the second method).
546
Equations
Rate-Dependent Skin Coefficient D
D = m(1E+03) in (Mscf/day)-1
where m is the slope of the line.
Darcy Skin Factor S

S = intercept of line at Q or Q = 0.
norm
Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient F

1442mT ′[1E + 03]
F=
kh
2 2
in psi /cp/(Mscf/day) . T’ is in 0R
• Radial flow plot corrected for rate-dependence:

The y-axis is now:
∆m( p)
− F ∆qn
∆q n
or:
∆p 2
∆qn
[ ]
− µ gi zi F ∆qn
2
for the p analysis option
15. 8. 4. Transient Analysis with Rate-Dependent Skin

∆p µ gi zi
or: − F ∆qn for the pressure analysis option.
∆qn 2 pi
If a new line is fitted, k and S are calculated as for the first radial flow plot. The F and D
coefficients are retained from the second plot. If users change F, the D term is re-computed from:
Equation : 15.8.4 - V :
Fkh
D=
1422T ′ in (Mscf/day)-1.
Other calculations
Please refer to “Semi-Log Plots”, on page 538 for calculation of skin pressure drop, etc.
Isochronal Tests
The drawdowns and build-ups are analysed in the same way, using the same theory as for the
flow-after-flow test described in the previous section.
Other calculations
Please refer to “Semi-Log Plots”, on page 538 for calculation of skin pressure drop, etc.
547
Equations
15.8.5. Deliverability Analysis - Gas Wells
If users do not select the Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure Method (See Section 7. 2 “Fluid Type
Multi-Phase Options”, on page 185), condensate well tests are analyzed assuming a single-phase
“wet stream” in the reservoir. Therefore, for condensate Fluid Type, all flowrates in the following
equations are wet stream rates, related to separator gas by:
qsg(wet) = qsg(sep)(1 + CGR x Vvap x (1E-6)) in MMcsf/day
(i.e. PanSystem is using wet stream rates internally. All computed flowrates (AOF, stabilised
rates, IPR) are declared as separator gas rates. No such corrections are necessary for dry gas
Fluid Type).
C-and-n Plot
[
y-axis: log10 ∆p 2 = log10 psi 2 − pwf 2 ]
x-axis: log10 qs
where psi is the shut-in pressure prior to each flowing period (isochronal test), or the initial shut-
in pressure (flow-after-flow test). For the final extended flow period, psi, is the layer pressure. It
is usually taken as p* from the final build-up, or some other estimate of reservoir pressure.
n-exponent
Equation : 15.8.5 - I :
1
n=
slope
C-coefficient
C = ((int) ⋅ 1E + 06 )
− n⋅
where int = value of ∆p2 at qs = 1.0 MMscf/day.
15. 8. 5. Deliverability Analysis - Gas Wells

Absolute Open Flow Potential
AOF = C( pres − 14.7 2 )
2 n
where pres is the layer pressure.
C-and-n Deliverability Calculations

The Extended Data C-coefficient, exponent n and AOF are carried through from the C-and-n
plot (extended flow point) described in the preceding section.
The Stabilized flowrate is the theoretical rate which would be attained if the well were to be
flowed to stabilization (semi-steady-state) at the stabilized flowing pressure pwf(stab) (taken to be
the last flowing pressure of the extended period):
qg (stab) =
(pres2 − pwf2 (stab) )kh
1422µ gi zi [1E + 03]T ′ * 12 ln{ε}
548
Equations
10 .06 (43560 A )
where: 1
2
ln {ε }= 12 ln   + S − 0 .75
 C A rw2 
A is the drainage area (acres)
Stabilized C-coefficient
Equation : 15.8.5 - V :
q g ( stab )
Cstab =
(p )
n
2
res − pwf
2
( stab )
where n is the extended exponent.
Stabilised AOF is obtained from Equation 15.8.5 - III, on page 548 , using Cstab.
Total skin factor St is the current value from a previous test analysis (normally the build-up
following the extended flowing period).
Skin Pressure Loss

Firstly, compute:
[∆p ]
2
skin
= 0.896mSt
1637q g ( ext ) [1E + 03]T ′µ gi zi

where m =
kh
corresponds to the slope (per log10 cycle) of the build-up Semi-Log plot following the extended
flowing period. k is carried through from the Deliverability dialog.

The theoretical flowing pressure at zero skin is then calculated:
p(2S = 0) = p 2wf ( ext ) + [∆p 2 ]skin
where pwf(ext) is the extended flowing pressure.

Then: p(S = 0 ) = p(2S = 0 )
and: ∆p skin = p(S =0 ) − p wf (ext )
Flow Efficiency
2
pres − p(2S = 0)
FE = 2
pres − pwf
2
( ext )
where p2(S=0) is defined in Equation 15.8.5 - VII, on page 549 .

Damage Ratio
DR = FE −1
549
Equations
Equation : 15.8.5 - X :
0.5
 k∆t ext 
rinv = 0.029  
 φµ gi Cti 
where ∆text is the duration of the extended flowing period.

Time to Stabilization
935φµ gi Cti 43560 A
t stab = *
k π
The default value for A is 640 acres (259 ha), the area of 1 section.
Stabilized Flow Rate is carried through from the deliverability screen (Equation 15.8.5 - I, on
page 548 ).
Deliverability Plots
Flow rates are calculated for values of flowing pressure between 14.7 psia and layer pressure pres:
( )
n
q j = C pres
2
− p 2j
using the current stabilized n-exponent, and the selected extended or stabilised C-coefficient.
LIT plot
∆m( p ) ∆p 2 ∆p
y-axis: , or depending on the analysis method chosen.
qsg qsg q sg

x-axis: qsg
where qsg is the gas flow rate for each flowing period,
and ∆m(p) = m(psi) - m(pwf), ∆p2 = p2si - p2wf, ∆p = psi - pwf.

psi is the shut-in pressure prior to each flowing period (isochronal test), or the initial shut-in
pressure (flow-after-flow test). For the final extended flow period, psi, is the layer pressure. It is
usually taken as p* from the final build-up, or some other estimate of reservoir pressure.
Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient F

F = slope of line
2
For the p option, the slope is divided by µgizi.
For the p option, the slope is divided by µgizi/2pi.
550
Equations
Darcy Flow Coefficient B
B = (1E + 03) * intercept at q sg = 0
2
in psi /cp/(Mscf/day).
2
For the p option, the intercept is first multiplied by 1/µgizi in the above equation.
For the p option, the intercept in the above equation is first multiplied by (2E−06)pi /µgizi
Absolute Open Flow Potential
The AOF is calculated as the root qsg of the deliverability equation:
( )
m( pi ) − m pwf = Bq sg + Fq sg2 s
at pwf = 14.7 psia, multiplied by (1E−03) for MMscf/day.
2 2 2
(
In p form: pi − pwf = µ gi zi Bq sg + Fq sg
2
)
µ gi z i
In p form: pi − pwf =
2 pi
(Bqsg + Fqsg2 )
LIT Deliverability Calculations
• From Transient Test Results (Radial Flow plot, etc.):
Darcy Flow Coefficient B
The semi-steady-state radial inflow equation is used:

2
in psi /cp/Mscf/day. A is the drainage area in acres. k, S pr, A and C A are read from the
Deliverability Screen.
Non-Darcy Flow Coefficient F, Rate-dependent Skin Coefficient D

D and F are related by Equation 15.8.4 - V, on page 547 .
AOF
The AOF is calculated from Equation 15.8.5 - XV at pwf = 14.7 psia.

The radial inflow Equation 15.8.5 - XVI requires a pseudo-radial skin factor Spr for those models
which do not exhibit radial flow at early time. This is calculated from the true or mechanical skin
factor S that has been derived from welltest analysis, and is displayed on the IPR screen.
The conversions between S and Spr are listed after Equation 15.1.4 - I, on page 507 in the Oil
Deliverability section. For the radial homogeneous model, Spr = S.
Similar conversions are necessary for the non-Darcy skin coefficients. Pseudo-radial Dpr is
calculated from the true D derived from the welltest analysis as follows. Dpr (and Fpr) are
displayed on the IPR screen. For the radial homogeneous model, Dpr = D.
551
Equations
For models where the late time radial flow corresponds to a permeability or permeability-
thickness which is different from the layer parameter k (radial-composite, dual-permeability), a
pseudo-radial kpr is also computed. For the radial-homogeneous model, kpr = k.
The following conversions are used for the non-Darcy skin:
• Radial-homogeneous: Dpr = D
• Dual-porosity: Dpr = D
• Vertical fracture: Dpr = D
• Dual-permeability:
D
Dpr =
κ
where the flow capacity ratio κ is defined by “Equation 7.6.5 - V”, on page 210.
k
For this model, the full thickness permeability is computed as k pr = , and this is used instead of
k in equation Equation 15.8.5 - XVI, on page 551 . κ
• Partial-Penetration:
D
Dpr =
b
h
where b = p
h
• Radial-composite:
Dpr = MD

where M is the outer/inner region mobility ratio defined in “Equation 7.6.5 - VI”, on page 210.
For this model, the outer region permeability is computed as kpr = Mk, where k is the inner region
permeability. kpr is used instead of k for the productivity index in Equation 15.8.5 - XVI, on page
551 .
• Horizontal well models:
Dh
Dpr =
Lw A0.5
k
where the anisotropy coefficient A is Z .
k
• From Test Data (LIT plot)
D is calculated from the value of F carried through from the LIT plot, using Equation 15.8.4 - V,
on page 547 (provided a value has been entered for k in the Transient Welltest Data area).
AOF is calculated from Equation 15.8.5 - XV, on page 551 at pwf = 14.7 psia.
552
Equations
Deliverability Plots
Flow rates are calculated for values of pwf between 14.7 psia and the layer pressure (as specified
at the top of the Deliverability Screen). This is done by solving for the root qj of the deliverability
Equation 15.8.5 - XV, on page 551 , for each flowing pressure pj.
These are then plotted as pwf versus qsg on linear scales,
{ ( ) }
or as log10 m( pres ) − m p wf − Fq sg2 vs log10 q sg . { }
15.8.6. Production Forecasting
Gas and condensate systems
The flowrate is determined at each time-step tj by an inflow/outflow analysis. The inflow curve
is computed at time t j using the Pd (Td) function appropriate for the selected reservoir and
boundary models. The outflow curve is either the specified constant bhfp, or the bhfp versus
flowrate curve read from the VFP flowing pressure file. The actual flowrate and flowing pressure
at time tj are determined by the intersection of the two curves. This is repeated for each time-step,
resulting in a declining production profile.
For closed systems with no-flow boundaries, the layer pressure p (t j ) is re-computed at each
time-step tj from the cumulative volume of produced fluid Gp (tj) up to that point. (No layer
pressure computation is made for non-closed systems, nor for closed systems with constant
pressure boundaries, since there is no depletion.)
To do this, the material balance equation (assuming no water influx) is solved for p (t j ) by
iteration.
Equation : 15.8.6 - I :
p(t j )  ∆p(t j )
1 − (C f + Cw S wc ) = p i 1 − G p (t j ) 
z (t j )  1 − S wc  zi  Gi 
where ∆p (t j ) = p i − p (t j ) is the total depletion at time tj,
Gp(tj) is the cumulative volume of gas produced up to the time tj (at standard conditions)
φhA(1 − S w )
Gi = is the initial volume of gas in place (at standard conditions),
Bgi
zi is the initial z-factor,
ziTi psc
and Bgi = is the initial gas volume factor, both at initial pressure pi and layer temperature
piTsc T. i
Gas properties are re-evaluated at this new average layer pressure p (t j ) and used in the inflow
calculation for the next time-step. This yields the production rate at time t j+1 . The new
cumulative production G p (t j+1 ) is then estimated, and the average layer pressure p(t j+1)
recomputed. And so on …..
For condensate systems, all calculations are performed with the wet stream flowrates referred to
in the opening paragraph of Section 15. 8. 5 “Deliverability Analysis - Gas Wells”, on page 548.
The displayed production rates and cumulative production figures are, however, for the separator
gas.
553
Equations
15.9. Linear Flow Analysis
15.9.1. Fracture Linear Flow
Square-root Time Plot
Fracture Half-length:
Equation : 15.9.1 - I :
 40 .93 q sg [1E + 03 ]T ’ 1
X f =  
 mh  kφµ gi C ti
2
with the usual modifications for p and p options.
m is the slope of the line on the square-root plot.
For superposition plots with a rate normalized y-axis, set qsg to 1.0 in the above equation.
Fracture Face Skin Factor

For all square-root plots except the Tandem Square Root plot:
(int ) kh
Sf =
1422 qsg 1E + 03 T ′
where (int) = intercept ∆m(p) ∆t=0) of the line on the square-root plot at zero value of the time
function. For plots with m(p) int(
on the y-axis instead of ∆m(p), (int) = [m(p)int(∆t=0) − m(p)∆t=0].
For superposition plots with a rate-normalized y-axis, set qsg to 1.0 in the above equation.
For the Tandem Square Root build-up plot, please refer to Equation 15.2.1 - IV, on page 513 .
Finite Conductivity Model (for Sf > 0)

For the finite conductivity fracture model, the line fitted to the square-root plot is treated in the
way described in “Fracture Linear Flow”, on page 513.
The dimensionless intercept (intD) is defined by the same equations as for Sf (Equation 15.2.1 -
VII, on page 514 and Equation 15.2.1 - VIII, on page 514 ). 15. 9. Linear Flow Analysis
FCD, Xf and kfw are then calculated in the same way as for oil (Equation 15.2.1 - VII, on page 514
and Equation 15.2.1 - VIII, on page 514 ).
15.9.2. Reservoir Linear Flow

Square-root Time Plot
Reservoir Width:
Equation : 15.9.2 - I :
 81 .86 q sg [1E + 03 ]T ’ 1
W =  
 mh  k φµ gi C ti
554
Equations
2
with the usual modifications for p and p options.
m is the slope of the line on the square-root plot.
For superposition plots with a rate normalized y-axis, set qsg to 1.0 in the above equation.
Flow convergence skin, distance to nearest boundary, and computed initial pressure are
calculated as in “Reservoir Linear Flow”, on page 515 (for oil).
15.10. Bi-Linear Flow Analysis

Fourth-root Time Plot
Fracture Conductivity
Equation : 15.10.0 - I :
 443.76 q sg [1E + 03]T ′ 
2
1
kf w =   *
 mh  φµ gi Cti k
where m = slope of the line on the fourth-root plot.
Calculations for FCD, S, and Xf from tebf are explained in “Bi-Linear Flow Analysis”, on page 516
(for oil).
15.11. Spherical Flow Analysis

1/Square-Root Time Plot
- Partial Penetration model
Assuming spherical flow (perforations in the middle of the layer):
Vertical permeability kz:

Equation : 15.11.0 - I :
(24.7q )
2
sg [1E + 03]T’ φµ gi Ct
kz =
m2k 2
where k is the horizontal radial permeability and m is the slope of the line.
- Gas cap/Aquifer model 15. 10. Bi-Linear Flow Analysis

Hemi-spherical flow is assumed (i.e. perforations at the top or bottom of the layer), and replace
the 24.7 by (24.7 x 4) in the above equation.
15.12. Horizontal Well Analysis

(Refs. 47, 52.)
2
For the p option, replace qsg by qsg µgizi.
For the p option, replace qsg by qsg µgizi / 2pi.
555
Equations
15.12.1. Semi-Log plot:
The average vertical radial permeability kbar, ( k ) is calculated from the line slope m:
Equation : 15.12.1 - I :
1637 q sg [1E + 03]T ′
k = kk z =
mL w
where m is the slope of the early radial flow line
and L is the effective well length.

w
For the hemiradial flow case, the 1637 coefficient is doubled in the above equation.
The skin factor S is calculated using the equation in Section 15. 1. 2 “Semi-Log Plot”, on page
493 appropriate to the test type, replacing k by k . This corresponds to the true (mechanical) skin.
The horizontal radial permeability, k, is calculated as:

1637 q sg [1E + 03] T ’
k=
mh
where m is the slope of the late (pseudo-) radial flow line and
h is the layer thickness, qsg is in MMscf/day.
If there is areal anisotropy, then k = k x k y .
The pseudo-radial skin factor Spr is calculated from the late pseudo-radial flow line using the
equation from “Permeability and skin”, on page 493 appropriate to the test type.
15.12.2. Log-Log plot:

Apparent wellbore volume V and Wellbore storage constants C and CD are calculated by
Equation 15.8.1 - I, on page 537 to Equation 15.8.1 - III, on page 538S for the unit slope line.
The average vertical radial permeability kbar, ( k ) is calculated from the zero-slope line (early
data) by:
15. 12. 1. Semi-Log plot:
Equation : 15.12.2 - I :
1422qsg [1E + 03]T ’ 0.5 
k = kkz =  
Lw  ∆px 
where ∆p is the y-position of the line, and L is the effective well length. For the hemi-radial
flow case,x the 0.5 is replaced by 1.0. w
556
Equations
Skin factor S is determined from the zero slope line using the skin factor equations defined in
Section 15. 8. 2 “Semi-Log Plots”, on page 538, with k replaced by k . In these equations, the
“intercept” term is read from the delta-pressure at the start of the vertical radial flow regime as
defined by the flow regime marker. The “slope” term m is derived from the vertical radial
permeability k using, for example, Equation 15.8.2 - I, on page 539 .
Horizontal radial permeability, k, is calculated from the zero-slope line (late pseudo-radial
data) by:
1422 q sg [1E + 03]T’  0.5 
k=  
h  ∆p x 
∆p is the y-position of the line. For the radial flow at single fault case, the 0.5 on the right is
x
replaced by 1.0.
The pseudo-radial skin factor Spr is determined from the zero slope line (late pseudo-radial
data) using the skin factor equations defined in the Semi-Log Plot section (in Section 15. 8. 2
“Semi-Log Plots”, on page 538). In these equations, the “intercept” term is read from the delta-
pressure at the start of the late radial flow regime as defined by the flow regime marker. The
“slope” term is derived from the radial permeability k using, for example, Equation 15.8.2 - I, on
page 539 .
15.12.3. Square-Root plot
This plot may be used in either of two ways.
a) Estimation of effective well length and convergence skin.
This is the default computation, invoked if the command line HLLC_K_L=0 has been added to
the Configuration sub-folder of the Pansys30.ini folder (See Section 1. 1. 3 “PANSYS30.INI and
the Registry”, on page 24), or if the command line is absent (default).
The effective well length, Lw, is given by:

Equation : 15.12.3 - I :
 81 .86 q sg [1E + 03 ]T ’ 1
L w =  
 mh  kφµ gi C ti 15. 12. 3. Square-Root plot
where m is the slope of the line through the linear flow portion of the data.
The convergence skin Sconv is calculated from:

S conv = A 0 . 5 S t − S
where S is the mechanical skin. St is obtained from the intercept of the line:
∆m( p) int kLw
St =
1422qsg [1E + 03]T ’
where ∆m(p)int = [m(pi)-m(p)int(∆t=0) ] for a drawdown with no history,
557
Equations
or ∆m(p)int = [m(p)int(∆te=0) − m(p)(∆t=0)] for an equivalent time plot.
For a build-up using the tandem square-root function:

0 .5
 0 . 0002637 π kt p 
S t = S ’t − 2  
 φµ 0 C t h 2 
where S’t is calculated using Equation 15.12.3 - II, on page 557 with:
∆m(p)int = [m(p*) − m(p)(∆t=0)].
b) Estimation of radial permeability and mechanical skin factor

If the command HLLC_K_L=1 has been added to the Configuration sub-folder of the
Pansys30.ini file (See Section 1. 1. 3 “PANSYS30.INI and the Registry”, on page 24), the slope
m and intercept ∆m(p)int are used to calculate the radial permeability k and mechanical skin S,
assuming a knowledge of Lw, kz and zwd. This option is useful when the early vertical radial flow
portion of the data is obscured or is of poor quality.
2
 81 . 86 q sg [1 E + 03 ]T ’  1
k =  
 mhL w  φµ gi C ti
A total skin St is calculated from the intercept m(p)int in the same way as in option “a)” above.
Mechanical skin S is derived from this by:
S = A 0 .5 S t − S conv
where:
Equation : 15.12.3 - V :
 
 
= ln  
h
S conv
  Zw 
 2π rw A sin π  
0 .25
  h 
is a skin factor accounting for flow convergence and anisotropy (ref. 62).
15. 13. Type-Curve Analysis
k
A= z is the anisotropy coefficient.
k
15.13. Type-Curve Analysis
15.13.1. Plot Axes for Data
Please2refer to “Plot Axes for Data”, on page 521. p and ∆p are replaced by m(p) or ∆m(p), or
their p equivalents, where appropriate.
558
Equations
15.13.2. Homogeneous Reservoir Calculations
Permeability
For constant rate drawdowns and build-ups:
Equation : 15.13.2 - I :
1422 q sg [1E + 03]T ′
k= ( PD ) match
h ∆m( p) match
where Equation : 15.13.2 - II :
PD =
[m ( p ) − m ( p )] kh
i wf
1422 q sg [1E + 03]T ’
qsg is the flow rate at surface (constant rate drawdown) or the last rate before shut-in (build-up) in
MMscf/day.
For variable rate superposition plots with a rate-normalized y-axis, set qsg = 1.0 in the above
equation, and for ∆m(p)match read {∆m(p)/∆q}match.
2
For the p option, replace qsg by qsg µgizi.
For the p option, replace qsg by qsg µgizi / 2pi.
15.13.3. Wellbore Storage Type-Curves

[TD/CD] on x-axis (Refs. 5, 34).
TD is defined in Equation 15.6.3 - I, on page 523 , and CD in Equation 15.6.3 - II, on page 523 .
15. 13. 2. Homogeneous Reservoir Calculations

Apparent Wellbore Volume
From the time-match (real, pseudo or equivalent superposition time):
Equation : 15.13.3 - I :
0. 000295 khT wb’ ∆ t match
=
µ gi C gi T ′ TD / C D match
where T’wb, the average wellbore temperature, is assumed equal to the reservoir temperature T’,
so the two temperatures cancel.
Storage Coefficients
CD: please refer to Equation 15.8.1 - II, on page 538 .
Cs: please refer to Equation 15.8.1 - III, on page 538 .
Skin Factor
S = 0.5ln 
[
 CD e 2 s ]
match


 CD 
559
Equations
Skin Pressure Drop
Please refer to the equations starting at Equation 15.8.2 - XII, on page 541 .
Refer to Section 15. 1. 2 “Semi-Log Plot”, on page 493.
15.13.4. Bounded System Type-Curves

L
[TD/LD ] on x-axis, where LD = and TD is defined in Equation 15.6.3 - I, on page 523 ,.
2
rw
Permeability is computed from Equation 15.13.2 - I, on page 559 .
Characteristic length L: Refer to “Bounded System Type-Curves”, on page 525.
15.13.5. Fractured Well Type-Curves

[TDxf] on x-axis. (Refs. 23, 24, 25). TDxf is defined in Equation 15.6.6 - I, on page 526 ,
Fracture half-length Xf: see Equation 15.6.6 - II, on page 526 .
Wellbore storage coefficient, pseudo-radial skin factor: see Equation 15.6.6 - III, on page 526
to Equation 15.6.6 - IX, on page 527.
Fracture conductivity k w and F : see Equation 15.6.6 - IX, on page 527 for the time-axis
f CD
match.
15.13.6. Dual-Porosity Type-Curves

[TD/CD] or [TDλ/4] on x-axis.
Please refer to “Dual-Porosity Type Curves”, on page 528 for the time-axis match.
15. 13. 4. Bounded System Type-Curves

15.13.7. Ei Type-Curve
2
[TD/RD ] on x-axis.
Please refer to “Ei Type-Curve”, on page 529 for the time-axis match.
15.13.8. Dual-Permeability Type-Curves

Wellbore storage coefficient, permeability and skin factor are calculated with the TD/CD type-
curves (Equation 15.13.2 - I, on page 559 , Equation 15.13.3 - I, on page 559 and Equation
15.13.3 - II, on page 559 ).
Inter-layer flow coefficient λ, Flow capacity ratio κ and Storativity ratio ω are calculated as
described in “Dual-Permeability Type-Curves”, on page 529.
560
Equations
15.13.9. Radial-Composite Type-Curves
Wellbore storage coefficient, inner region permeability and skin factor are calculated with the
TD/CD type-curves (Equation 15.13.2 - I, on page 559 , Equation 15.13.3 - I, on page 559 and
Equation 15.13.3 - II, on page 559 ).
For Distance to discontinuity, outer/inner region mobility and storativity ratios, please refer to
“Radial Composite Type-Curves”, on page 530.
15.13.10.Partial Penetration and Gas Cap/Aquifer Type Curves

Wellbore storage coefficient, near wellbore permeability and skin factor are calculated with
the TD/CD type-curves (Equation 15.13.2 - I, on page 559 , Equation 15.13.3 - I, on page 559 and
Equation 15.13.3 - II, on page 559 ).
For the Vertical permeability and Perforation length (penetration ratio) please refer to
“Partial-Penetration and Gas Cap/Aquifer Type-Curves”, on page 531.
15.13.11.2-Cell Compartmentalized Type-Curves

Drawdown Method for flowing periods, and build-ups using the Slider pressure extrapolation:
Effective transmissibility Teff is calculated from the y-axis match:

Equation : 15.13.11 - I :
Teff =
(1.0068 E + 04 )T ’[Y ]match
(1.0 E + 03)µ gi
First cell connected pore volume V1 comes from this and the x-axis match:
Equation : 15.13.11 - II :
15. 13. 9. Radial-Composite Type-Curves

Teff
1 =
24Cti [ X ]match
V1
2 =
[ Curve]match
Build-up Analysis method for build-ups not using the Slider pressure extrapolation:
Effective transmissibility Teff is calculated from the x-axis match:

Equation : 15.13.11 - IV :
Teff = 24V1Cti [ X ]match
561
Equations
First cell connected pore volume V1 comes from the y-axis match:
Equation : 15.13.11 - V :
2 . 3551 q sg T ’[Y ]match
V1 =
[1 . 0 E + 03 ]µ gi C ti
Equation : 15.13.11 - VI :
V1
2 =
[ Curve ]match
15.13.12.Horizontal Well Type Curves

Horizontal well type-curve analysis for gas wells is similar to that for oil wells, with a few
modifications:
The dimensionless y-axis pDL function is now defined as (for pseudo-pressure):

Equation : 15.13.12 - I :
∆ m ( p ) L w kk z
PDL =
1422 q sg (1 .0 E + 03 )T ’
with qsg in MMscf/day.
The dimensionless time function is, as for oil:

Equation : 15.13.12 - II :
0. 0002637 k z ∆t
TDh =
φµ gi Cti h 2
where ∆t represents real, pseudo or equivalent superposition time.
15. 13. 12. Horizontal Well Type Curves

The Vertical permeability kz is obtained from the time match:
φµ gi Ct h 2 ( TDh ) match
kz =
0. 0002637 ∆t match
Horizontal permeability k is calculated from the pressure match:

Equation : 15.13.12 - IV :
1  1422 q sg [1 E + 03 ] T ’( p DL )match 
k =  
kz  L w (∆ p )match 
2
For the p approximation option, replace qsg by qsg µgizi.
For the p approximation option, replace qsg by qsg µgizi / 2pi.
562
Equations
For other aspects of the matching, please refer to “Horizontal Well Type-Curves”, on page 533.
15.14. PanWizard Equations

Several useful calculations are made for gas and condensate welltests in the PanWizard for Test
Design, in the Testing Time Advisor and Flow Rate Advisor sections:
15.14.1. Testing Time Advisor
Wellbore storage coefficient:
- Fluid compression/expansion: C s = Vwb cwbf bbls/psi
where Vwb is the wellbore volume (bbls), and cwbf is the average compressibility of the fluid in
the wellbore (psi-1).
Time to end of wellbore storage:
Equation : 15.14.1 - I :
 3385 C s [60 + 3 .5 S t ]
t ewbs = 2 
 ( kh / µ ) 
This is twice the value in the classical equation (ref.2), and is more consistent with the behaviour
of the pressure derivative. It gives a time which is about 60% longer than the “1% afterflow”
criterion. The wellbore storage coefficient Cs and the gas viscosity µ are at initial conditions, and
St is the total skin (S+DQ). When the turbulent skin effect is strong, the computed time may be
an underestimate.
Time to detect closest boundary:
This is the minimum test duration required in order to be able to discern with some confidence a
change of slope on the Semi-Log plot, indicative of a heterogeneity at a distance R from the well.
This is simply the time required to be sure that there is a change of slope - it does not allow time
for the new trend to develop fully. In terms of the Log-Log plot, the derivative will just start to
leave the zero-slope radial flow line. In order to characterize the heterogeneity (e.g. single fault,
change of kh, etc), at least another log cycle of test time will be required.
The same equations as those used for radius of investigation are applied (Equation 15.1.2 -
XXVII, on page 499 to Equation 15.1.2 - XXIX, on page 499 ), but in this case, the input is
distance, and the output is time. 15. 14. PanWizard Equations
Time to reach semi-steady-state:
This is the time required to detect the boundary farthest from the well in a closed system. The
same equations as those used for the time to detect closest boundary are applied (see above).
15.14.2. Flow Rate Advisor
For gas and condensate welltest design, to assist in the appropriate choice of flowrate, estimates
can be obtained of the maximum safe production rate to avoid erosion of the tubing, and the
minimum production rate to prevent the well loading up with liquid (e.g. condensed water,
formation water, oil).
563
Equations
Maximum recommended flowrate (erosional limit):
πd 2 3600 x 24
Qmax = Ve MMscf/day
(4 x144 x1E 6) B g
Ce
Ve = ft/sec
where: ρ g0.5 is the threshold erosional velocity (ref.69), and:
d = ID of tubing (inches)
Bg = gas volume factor (ft3/scf) calculated at the pressure and temperature specified in the dialog
box,
Ce = erosional coefficient (default = 100),
ρg = gas or condensate density (lbs/ft3) at the pressure and temperature specified in the dialog
box.
Minimum recommended flowrate (liquid load-up limit):
πd 2 3600 x 24
Qmin = VTurner MMscf/day
(4 x144 x1E 6) B g
where:
σ 0.25 ( ρ L − ρ g ) 0.25 
VTurner = CTurner  
 ρ g 0.5 
is the Turner critical unloading velocity (ft/sec) (ref.70).
d = ID of tubing (inches)
Bg = gas volume factor (ft3/scf),
CTurner = Turner coefficient (default = 1.593 (ref.71)),
ρL = water density (lbs/ft3),
ρg = gas density (lbs/ft3),
σ = gas/liquid interfacial tension (dynes/cm).
All fluid properties are calculated at the pressure and temperature specified in the dialog box.
15. 14. 2. Flow Rate Advisor
564
File Structures
Chapter 16- File Structures

16.1. Type-Curve File
16.1.1. Filename Extensions and Associated Models
In the following list, the dimensionless time function is stated for each type-curve, along with the
curve identifier in []. For fuller definitions, please refer to the Equations chapter.
TCA - Dual-permeability (Stage 2): Tdλ/4 [κ].

TCB - Bounded system analysis: (all models, Boundary Stage):
Td/Ld2 [Text - Geometry type].
Default set: 4 different fault geometries: FAULTS.TCB
Many other configurations available.
TCC - Partial-penetration (Stage 1): Tdh [hp/h].
- Default set: Perforations in middle:
MPARTPEN.TCD
- Perforations at top/bottom: TPARTPEN.TCD
TCD - Radial composite (Stage 2): Td/Rd2 [outer/inner mobility ratio].
- Lower mobility outer region, ω=1: TIGHTOUT.TCD
- Default set: Lower mobility inner region, ω=1:
TIGHTIN.TCD
- Gas in inner region (higher mobility) and ω=0.01: GASDRIVE.TCD
TCE - Interference testing: Td/Rd2 [none]
TCF - Vertical fracture - finite conductivity (Cinco format)
(Stage 1): Tdxf [Fcd].
Chapter 16 - File Structures
TCG - Gas cap/Aquifer (Stage 1): Tdh [hp/h].

- Perforations in middle: MGASCAP.TCG
- Default set: Perforations at top (aquifer) or perforations at bottom (gas cap):
TGASCAP.TCG
TCH - Homogeneous radial: Td/Cd [Cde2S].
Default set: Medium range Cde2S: RADHOMOG.TCH
High range Cde2S:: RADHI.TCH
Low range Cde2S:: RADLO.TCH
565
File Structures
TCI - Single vertical fracture (infinite conductivity) (Stage 1): Tdxf [Cdxf].
T*J -Horizontal well (radial homogeneous with no-flow upper and lower boundaries
- Lw not known): Tdh [Lwd]. (* represents value of zwd - e.g. 5 for zwd = 0.5)
TCK - Horizontal well (radial homogeneous with no-flow upper and lower boundaries -
Lw known): Tdh [zwd].
TCL - Dual-porosity model - "pressure match" method (pseudo-steady state matrix
flow) (Stage 2):
2S
Td/Cd [λe ].
TCM - 2-cell compartmentalized boundary model - "Drawdown analysis" method:
[V1/V2].
TCN - Dual-porosity model - "derivative match" method: (pseudo-steady-state matrix
flow model) (Stage 2):
Tdλ/4 [ω].
TCO - Dual-porosity model - "derivative match" method: (transient matrix flow model)
(Stage 2): T λ/4 [ω].
d
T*P - Horizontal well (radial homogeneous with no-flow and constant pressure upper
and lower boundaries - L not known): T [L ]. (* represents value of zwd - e.g.
w dh wd
5 for zwd = 0.5).
TCQ - Horizontal well (radial homogeneous with no-flow and constant pressure upper
and lower boundaries - Lw known): Tdh [zwd].
16. 1. 1. Filename Extensions and Associated Models

TCR - Not used.
TCS - Wellbore fill-up (slug test), homogeneous radial flow: Td/Cd [Cde2S].
TCT - Not used.
TCU - Single vertical fracture (uniform flux) (Stage 1): Tdxf [Cdxf].
TCV - Single 2vertical fracture (finite conductivity) (Wong et al) (Stage-1): PdFcd vs
TdxfFcd [Fcd] (ref. 44).
TCW - Single vertical fracture: (finite conductivity) (Wong-et al) (Stage-2):
PdFcd2/3Cdxf1/3 vs TdxfFcd2/3Cdxf4/3 [Sd] (ref. 44).
TCX - Advanced Simulation Pd-Td look-up tables (Pd vs Td) [text label].
TCY - McKinley type-curves - homogeneous radial model: ∆t vs Pgrp [T].
TCZ - 2-cell compartmentalized boundary model - "Build-up analysis" method: [V1/
V2].
566
File Structures
16.1.2. File structure
imodel ncurv ntd jaxflag ideriv [integer flags]
td(1) [Td values]

.
.
td(ntd)
lab(1) [1st curve Pd values]
pd(1,1,1)
.
.
pd(ntd,1,1)
lab(2) [2nd curve Pd values]

pd(2,1,1)
.
.
pd(ntd,1,1)
.
.
labval(ncurv) [last curve Pd values]
pd(1,ncurv,1)
.
.
pd(ntd,ncurv,1)
lab(1) [1st curve derivatives]
dpd(1,1,2)
.
.
dpd(ntd,1,2)
lab(2) [2nd curve derivatives]
.
.
lab(ncurv) [last curve derivatives]
16. 1. 2. File structure
dpd(1,ncurv,2)
.
.
dpd(ntd,ncurv,2)
567
File Structures
Definitions of variables
imodel (model identifier):
1 homogeneous radial (TCH), 2-cell compartmentalized (TCM, TCZ)
2 single vertical fracture - infinite conductivity (TCI)
3 single vertical fracture - uniform flux (TCU)
4 not used
5 not used
6 interference testing (TCE)
7 single vertical fracture - finite conductivity (TCF, TCW)
8 dual-porosity - pseudo-steady-state matrix flow (TCL, TCN)
9 dual-porosity - transient matrix flow (TCO)
10 dual-permeability (TCA)
101 wellbore fill-up (slug test): radial homogeneous (TCS)
109 McKinley type-curves: radial homogeneous (TCY)
12 horizontal well, radial homog: no-flow/no-flow (TCJ)
13 horizontal well, radial homog: no-flow/no-flow (TCK)
14 horizontal well, radial homog: const p/no-flow (TCP)
15 horizontal well, radial homog: const p/no-flow (TCQ)
16 partially-penetrated radial homog (TCC)
17 radial composite (TCD)
18 gas cap/aquifer (TCG)
ncurv: number of curve sets in file
ntd: number of Td values in each curve set
jaxflag: x-axis T function and curve label indicator
d
0 Td/Cd [Cde2S value on curve] (TCH); Also general use (TCA, TCC, TCD, TCG, TCL,
TCM, TCY, TCZ)
1 not used
2 not used
3 not used
2
4 Td/Ld [user-defined curve label] (TCB)
16. 1. 2. File structure
5 Tdxf [Fcd value on curve for finite conductivity (TCF), Cdxf for infinite conductivity and
uniform flux (TCI, TCU)]
6 Tdλ/4 [ω on curve] (TCN, TCO)
9 TdxfFcdCdxf group [Sd on curve] (TCW)
10 Tdh [Lwd on curve] (T*J, T*P); [zwd on curve] (TCK, TCQ)
568
File Structures
ideriv: indicates presence/absence of derivatives
1 no derivatives
2 derivatives
lab(i): label to identify curve i. This is a number or text string, depending on the type-curve.
Note: Early type-curve files did not contain the jaxflag and ideriv indices. They are still
compatible.
16.2. . PAN File Structure

The PanSystem data file can be saved or imported as a .PAN file.
From V-2.4 onwards, all .PAN files are in ASCII format, and can be viewed using a text editor or
spreadsheet. They are interchangeable between different platforms (Windows 3.11 and Windows
95/98/2000/NT) within the limitations outlined in Section 1. 3 “PanSystem Files”, on page 31.
Prior to this version, .PAN files were in binary format, and an ASCII format was available with
the extension PAX. Details of the current PAN file structure can be obtained on request.
16. 2. . PAN File Structure
569
File Structures
16.3. PSP Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure File
For the multi-phase pseudo-pressure option (see Section 7. 3 “Pseudo-Pressures”, on page 186),
users may import an externally generated pseudo-pressure file as an alternative to using the
generation facility provided in the Fluid Parameters section. The default file extension is .PSP.
The multi-phase pseudo-pressure is defined in Section 16. 3. 2 “Definition of Multi-Phase

Pseudo-Pressure:”, on page 571.
16.3.1. .PSP File structure

Line 1:
NA NA NA fluid γosc γwsc γgsc

type
µoi µwi µgi ρoi ρwi ρgi P T
Line 2:
V Vwsc Vgsc zgi kro krw krg

osc
So Sw Sg Boi Bwi Bgi
Line 3 onwards (8 columns, max 201 lines):
p1 Ψ(p1) Qmo(p1) Qmw(p1) Qmg(p1) µmph(p1)

p2 Ψ(p2) Qmo(p2) Qmw(p2) Qmg(p2) µmph(p2)
16. 3. PSP Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure File

. . . . . .
pj Ψ(pj) Qmo(pj) Qmw(pj) Qmg(pj) µmph(pj)
Ch(p1) z(p1)
Ch(p2) z(p2)
. .
Ch(pj) z(pj)
where:
NA are real numbers (not used in PanSystem, but must be present in the first three fields),
Fluid type is the word Oil, Gas or Condensate,
γosc, γwsc, γgsc are the specific gravities of oil, water (water=1.0) and gas (air=1.0) at standard
conditions,
µoi, µwi, µgi are the viscosities of oil, water and gas (cp) at layer P and T,
ρoi, ρwi, ρgi are the densities of oil, water and gas (grms/cm3) at layer P and T,
P is the layer pressure (psia), T is the layer temperature (°F),
570
File Structures
Vosc, Vwsc, Vgsc are the fractional volumetric surface flowrates of oil, water and gas (vol/vol) at
standard conditions,
zgi is the gas deviation factor at layer P and T,
So, Sw, Sg are the saturations (decimal fractions) of oil, water and gas at layer P and T,
kro, krw, krg are the relative permeabilities to oil, water and gas (decimal fractions) at layer P and
T, at saturations So, Sw, Sg,
Boi, Bwi, Bgi are the volume factors of oil, water and gas at layer conditions (vol/vol),
p1, p2,....... pj ..... are the pressures (from 14.7 psia to P(layer)).
Ψ(p1), Ψ(p2),....... Ψ(pj) ..... are the corresponding multiphase pseudo-pressures (from 0.0 to
Ψ(p(layer) )).
Qmo(p1), etc. are the oil phase mass flowrates,
Qmw(p1), etc. are the water phase mass flowrates,
Q (p ), etc. are the gas phase mass flowrates,

mg 1
µ (p1), etc. are the multi-phase viscosities,

mph
Ch(p1), etc. are the hydrocarbon compressibilities,
z(p1), etc. are the gas deviation factors.
16. 3. 2. Definition of Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure:

16.3.2. Definition of Multi-Phase Pseudo-Pressure:
The multi-phase pseudo-pressure is defined as:
Equation : 16.3.2 - I :
 k rg ρ g k ro ρ o k rw ρ w 
P
1
ψ ( p) = ∫ 
Cref 14.7  µ g
+
µo
+
µ w 
dp
For single- and two-phase situations, the term(s) representing the absent phase(s) are excluded,
because the associated relative permeability tends to zero.
k ρ k ρ 
Cref =  ro oi + rw wi  for oil fluid type.
 µ oi µ wi 
 ρ gi 
and Cref =   for gas and condensate fluid types.
 µ gi 
Upon import into PanSystem, the appropriate conversions are applied to make the pseudo-
pressure compatible with the existing interpretation equations. For oil 2(multi-phase) fluid type, it
is converted to pressure units, for gas or condensate to m(p) units (psi /cp).
571
File Structures
16.4. .PIC pressure/z-factor/viscosity file
File structure
[n = No. of lines in table]
[Gas gravity][Standard temp][Standard pressure][Reservoir temp]
[optional blank line]
p1 z1 µ1
p2 z2 µ2
p3 z3 µ3
………
……….
pn zn µn
Items may be tab- or space-separated.

Example
50
0.7 519.6714.696200.0
1000.00.9012 0.0252
1200.00.9084 0.0254
1300.00.9107 0.0256
1400.00.9116 0.0258
1500.00.9124 0.0260
16. 4. .PIC pressure/z-factor/viscosity file

etc.
572
File Structures
16.5. .SEA Maritime Tide Table File
File structure
[18922 = code word]

[Local time at 12:00 ST] [Test start time (gauge)] [Test start time (local)]
[Mean tide height]
t1 h1
t2 h2
….
….
tn-1 hn-1
tn hn
0 0
tj = time in decimal hours, hj = tide height -at high and low tide points only.
All times are cumulative decimal hours (eg: 14:30:00 on the first day in the table is 14.500,
14:30:00 next day is 38.500, and so on).
The file may be space- or tab-delimited. The final row of zeroes defines the end of the file.
Maximum 100 lines.
Example
18922
12.000000 0.000000 9.500000 3.608920
50.266666 1.968500
56.566666 4.921260
62.700001 2.624670
16. 5. .SEA Maritime Tide Table File

68.683334 4.921260
75.300003 2.296590
81.699997 4.593180
87.933334 2.952760
….
….
193.833328 4.921260
199.833328 1.968504
206.250000 5.249344
212.433334 1.968504
0.000000 0.000000
573
Worked Examples
Worked Examples
574
Dataprep - Gauge Data
Chapter 17- Dataprep - Gauge Data

17.1. Overview of Dataprep Work Flow
This example takes users through all the stages in the preparation of gauge data from raw gauge
data files, typically imported from diskettes, to reduced, resampled, quality-assured data streams
with the flow and test periods defined, ready for use in PanSystem’s analysis section.
The whole example works through the preparation of gauge data sequentially, using real data in
a typical workflow.
The alternative input of gauge data manually, and the input of the other types of data required for
analysis, the Well and Reservoir Description data, is covered in Example 2: See Section 18
“Manual Data Entry”, on page 591.
In this example, users will learn how to:
• Import raw ASCII files

• Define the column and data formats within them
• Append files sequentially
• Plot gauge data & quality-control it by generating differences
• Shift and paste data graphically
• Edit data in spreadsheet style display
• Build a composite data file with multiple gauges stored in it
• Define the flowrates and flow periods graphically, and group flow periods into test periods
• Reduce data density
• Delete, export and save files.
Chapter 17 - Dataprep - Gauge Data

17.1.1. Files For This Example
This example uses three raw gauge data files, two of which have the default extension .TPR
(from "Time, Pressure, Rate") files. The three files are TEST1.DAT, TEST2.TPR, and
TEST3.TPR. These are in the PANSYS\DATA directory (or whatever name directory that users
may have installed PanSystem to). Assume that these are service company files containing gauge
data, that two gauges were run in the test, and that it is not known which file contains what data.
575
17.2. Importing Gauge Data Files
17.2.1. Selecting and Naming Files
First, select the File New command to zero out any existing data.
Now select the appropriate units system via Config Units. Users must select the same units as in
the data file (oilfield absolute in this case). If users subsequently want to work in different units,
they can change to a different system once the files have been imported.
Then, as this is a gas well test, select Gas as the fluid type in the DataPrep, Reservoir
Description dialog box.
All gauge data control is accessed through the Dataprep Gauge Data menu command. It is
handled through one dialog box, Pressure and Rate Data Preparation. The whole of this
example is based around use of this dialog box together with the Dataprep Toolbar.
Only the Edit, Import and Test Design buttons are active. In this example, click Import to
proceed to the File Open dialog box. For TEST1, users will have to change the extension to
*.DAT. The other two files have the default extension .TPR.
Figure : 17.2.1 - 1 Selecting TEST1.DAT for import

Starting with TEST1.DAT, double-click on the file name, or click once then click OK, and
proceed as follows.
17. 2. Importing Gauge Data Files
576
17.2.2. Defining The Data Columns
The next dialog box is where users specify what data is allocated to which column in the gauge
data file. As it was decided to import using spreadsheet style, (default choice in Figure 17.2.1 - 1,
“Selecting TEST1.DAT for import“), users will see the following dialog:
Figure : 17.2.2 - 1 Spreadsheet style import

With the spreadsheet option, users are presented with a view of the data file with PanSystem
making a first guess at what the columns are.
The column names and gauge type (pressure, rate etc.) displayed will depend on what was last
set-up when using this option.
In the case of TEST1, users can see the structure is:
• Time in column 1, format HHHH:MM:SS. If users page through the file they will see that the
17. 2. 2. Defining The Data Columns

24-hour update option is not needed, as the hours counter is not re-set to zero every 24 hrs.
• Temperature in column 2 (0F)
• Pressure in column 3 (psia)
• The data file was supplied with the comment lines in the header marked with a *. PanSystem
will automatically recognise lines marked in this way as header information and will already
section this part of the file off. In the example, the Number of lines in header box shows 2,
and the two header lines appear in blue. Users may change this number to include any number
of lines as header information. In files where the header has not been tagged with asterisks,
this number should be defined by the users.
• Comment lines not partitioned off as header will be read in as part of the gauge data. Alpha
characters are ignored. Numeric characters (well number, gauge number, etc) will be read in
as if they were data, but are easily identified as spurious points when the data is plotted, and
can be deleted graphically.
If users feel they need to do some pre-editing before import, use a text editor such as Notepad
(small files only), WordPad (good with large files), or another preferred editor.
577
Users will notice from Figure 17.2.2 - 1, that the initial settings correctly identify time in the first
column, but the format is in hours. Click in the first column (it will appear black), change the
time format by selecting hhhhh:mm:ss from the drop-down “Time” menu in the upper part of the
dialog. Notice that this enables the 24 hr update option, which are not required for this example.
Next, highlight the second column. From the “Gauge” drop-down menu choose Temperature, the
column name should now change to Temperature #1 automatically. Change this name if desired.
Highlight the third column. From the “Gauge” drop-down menu choose Pressure, the column
name should now change to Pressure #1. Users should now see the columns defined and named
as shown in Figure 17.2.2 - 2.
Figure : 17.2.2 - 2 Column definition for TEST1

Note: how the internal default name for this data set (they are still called "files" after being
17. 2. 2. Defining The Data Columns

imported into the program) is the same as the raw file name (TEST1 in this case). Users can
change it if desired, in the File Name field at top left.
Click the Import button and load TEST1.
Figure : 17.2.2 - 3 TEST1 imported!

Repeat the procedure for TEST2.TPR and TEST3.TPR. Note that they are both simple two-
column files, and that they have Time in column 1 (format hours), and Pressure in column 2.
578
17.3. Plotting TPR Data
Now, the three files are ready to be plotted, to see what the data looks like. Select all three File/
Column names in the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog box and click Plot (or, Add
To List, then Plot). See Figure 17.3.0 - 1, “Selecting the 3 Pressure Columns to Plot,” on page
579.
Figure : 17.3.0 - 1 Selecting the 3 Pressure Columns to Plot

Now the following plot appears in the plot area:
Figure : 17.3.0 - 2 Three Data Files Plotted

It can be seen that the two gauge records are present: TEST1, and one which has been split
between the two data files TEST2 and TEST3 (presumably a different gauge was used to record
the latter part of the test).
First, TEST3 needs to be appended to the end of TEST2 - this is done by re-importing TEST3,
but this time getting it merged with TEST2.
Firstly, clear-out the TEST3 data that has just been imported (there is no need to keep it as a
separate channel). Select TEST3 and click the Delete button:
17. 3. Plotting TPR Data
Figure : 17.3.0 - 3 Delete TEST3 data
579
Then click OK in the subsequent Delete dialog box.
Now click the Import button, select TEST3.TPR again and this time check the Append to File
box, selecting TEST2 as the file to append to. Users will notice that the spreadsheet style is not
available when data is being appended to an existing file. Users do not have to define column
names as they are already defined by TEST2, but they can still specify which columns the time
and pressure are in.
Figure : 17.3.0 - 4 Appending Data Files

The TEST3 data will now be appended to TEST2. Since it is now part of the TEST2 data set,
TEST3 will not appear as a separate name in the list:
Figure : 17.3.0 - 5 TEST3 has been appended to TEST2

The two gauge files for the whole test (i.e. TEST1 and TEST2), can now be examined. Plot the
two pressures.
17.4. Shifting Data

The first thing to note is that there is a big shift in clock times between the two channels. This
will be corrected using the Shift tool.
Select and, in the ensuing dialog box, select which column is to be shifted - TEST2 - and also
select Shift time only. Drag the data with the mouse until it looks about right. Users can zoom
17. 4. Shifting Data
the data at the start of a flow period in order to shift at higher resolution on a correlatable feature.
A useful method for matching times is by checking the pressure difference between one data
stream and the other. This is covered next.
Note that a precise shift value can be entered in the Shift dialog as an alternative to dragging the
data.
580
17.5. Data Quality - Generating Differences
First, PanSystem’s difference tool can be used to check the alignment in time of the two gauges.
Click and accept the default column name (Diff #1), then users should see the difference
(∆P) between the streams plotted as in Figure 17.5.0 - 1, “Use Difference Tool to Check Gauge
Time Alignment,” on page 581.
Figure : 17.5.0 - 1 Use Difference Tool to Check Gauge Time Alignment

Users can quickly tell if there is a time shift as each sudden change in pressure at a rate change
will create a spike in the difference curve, as seen here. The shift process can be repeated until
the best match is obtained, at which point the difference curve spikes should be minimal.
A constant time-shift is being assumed over the entire test. In particular, TEST3 has been
17. 5. Data Quality - Generating Differences

appended to the end of TEST2 and it should not be assumed that they are perfectly synchronized
(they are in this example!). Users could shift sections of the data by different amounts if required,
by drawing a box and shifting only the data in the box.
Next, examine the absolute pressure differences. Once users have the times matched, they will be
able to use the Diff tool to quality-control the gauges. Firstly, there is noise during the second
drawdown. This can be seen without using Diff, just on the raw data of TEST2. This will be dealt
with in a moment - first though, re-scale the right axis (Diff) by double-clicking it and expand the
scale to say −30 to +30 psi. Now users can see something like Figure 17.5.0 - 2, “Increased Diff
Scale to see Gauge Differences,” on page 582.
This plot provides the following information:
1. Time alignment is still not quite perfect.
2. There is a random scatter between gauges - this should not be greater than the quoted
resolution for the gauges.
3. There is a systematic pressure difference of about 15 psi - this will correspond to any
hydrostatic difference between the gauges (set a different depths), plus any absolute
reading error.
4. There is a drift or other time-dependant difference during the final build-up. This may be
gauge drift and/or fluid effects.
581
Figure : 17.5.0 - 2 Increased Diff Scale to see Gauge Differences

The time match can be refined further. Random noise at gauge resolution has to be tolerated.
The absolute difference needs careful examination. The hydrostatic difference should be
calculable from the expected pressure gradient of the wellbore fluid. In single-phase tests, it
should be relatively constant (unless the gauges are so far apart as to see friction pressure drops,
which depend on rate). In multi-phase tests, this hydrostatic difference may vary between
flowing and shut-in as the composition of the flow stream changes. In addition there may be fluid
segregation with moving fluid contacts.
Note: that in PanSystem users can import all types of data, such as temperature, fluid density,
and surface-measured data such as wellhead pressure and temperature, etc. If users have
unexplained gauge behaviour, and have such data available, now would be the time to import it
and try and diagnose the behaviour.
The residual difference after hydrostatic correction should not exceed the quoted accuracy of the
gauges. There is no point in shifting unexplained gauge differences - it is better to put both gauge
streams into the master data file (this is done later), and perform the analysis with first one gauge,
then the other, which is very easy in PanSystem 2. This will show the sensitivity of final results
to unexplained gauge effects.
Users can shift gauge data graphically, using Shift signal only. However, in practice, users might
prefer to introduce a known hydrostatic correction (down to datum, or to one of the two gauges’
depths) by numerical editing - see the next section.
17.6. Editing Data

17. 6. Editing Data
Text editing of gauge data is available through the Edit button on the Pressure and Rate Data
Preparation dialog box. Either select the data to edit in the list area first, then click the Edit
button; or click Edit first and select the data in the Select Data File to Edit dialog box. Then
click OK to get to the data edit spreadsheet.
Suppose it had been determined that TEST2 gauge needed a (-14.7) psi hydrostatic shift to match
the datum of the TEST1. Users can apply this via the Function button.
Whilst working here, use the Names button to change the column name to Gauge 2 (optional).
582
17.7. Copying Data From File To File
Having done all the shifting above, decide if data is to be copied from column to column between
the two files.
There are three tools which handle transfer of data from file to file in different ways. Users can
copy and paste a whole block of data including the time values; users can copy, re-sample and
paste a single column of data; or they can copy, re-sample and create a new column of data.
Obviously, to use a copy function for data, users should make sure that all data are calibrated (i.e.
all the shifting required to match data in both time and signal has been performed).
17.7.1. Copy and Paste a Block of Data, Including Time

Looking at the plot (Figure 17.5.0 - 2, “Increased Diff Scale to see Gauge Differences,” on page
582), it can be seen that there is some noise in Gauge 2 (pressure #1 if users did not rename)
during the second rate of the variable rate test. Suppose this was surface read-out data, and that
the tool telemetry had failed intermittently during this period (it happens!). Then, all columns of
data from this tool (probably pressure, temperature, and more if it was a production logging tool)
would be noisy.
In this case, the Copy and Paste Data Block Including Time:
would be used, to replace the whole block of noisy data with a block from a different file.
The "target" file for pasting into is always the Master Data File that users select in the Pressure
and Rate Data Preparation dialog box. In this case, it is necessary to set TEST2 to be the
master file.
Now, draw a box around the range of time to replace. Note that it is the time spanned by the box
which is important - all data in that time-span will be replaced, regardless of whether the box
actually encloses it. Select the "T" (for "Time-copy") button and users should see the same as
Figure 17.7.1 - 1, “Copy and Paste Block of Data Including Time,” on page 584. Select the
columns (here it is easy as there is a one-to-one correspondence), and the block of data (all
17. 7. Copying Data From File To File

channels) will be copied from TEST1 and pasted into TEST2, replacing any data originally
present in that time range.
583
Figure : 17.7.1 - 1 Copy and Paste Block of Data Including Time

That is why it is called a Block Paste; it has copied and pasted all columns present in the Master
Data File. Since TEST2 did not contain any temperature data, none will have been copied
17. 7. 2. Copy, Re-sample and Paste Single Column of Data

across.
17.7.2. Copy, Re-sample and Paste Single Column of Data

This function differs from the previous one in that:
- only one selected column is copied and pasted
- the times in the target column are retained. This requires that the incoming data be
resampled at the target gauge times. This is done by linear interpolation.
To see an example, zoom-in to the start of the third drawdown of the variable rate test. Users
see a single point in TEST1 which does not appear in TEST2. First, set TEST1 back as the
Master file. Then zoom the area and draw a box around the three points spanning the noise point
to be re-sampled. Click the "C" button (for "Column copy") and complete the operation.
584
Figure : 17.7.2 - 1 Copy, Resample and Paste a Section of a Column
17.8. Re-sampling Data - Creating Composite TPR

Stream
17. 8. Re-sampling Data - Creating Composite TPR Stream

This third option is the one required if users wish to be able to save and analyze both gauges in
one common file with the same time values. This also enables users to switch pressure columns
during the analysis.
TEST1 (the higher density sampling), will be kept as the Master File, then re-sample TEST2
pressure values into a new column in TEST1. File TEST1 will then contain both gauge records,
the second one having been resampled to gauge #1 times.
Figure : 17.8.0 - 1 Copy, Resample and Create a New Column
585
To re-cap, in this exercise users have:
- appended TEST3 record to the end of TEST2 to make up a complete test record
- shifted TEST2 times to match the TEST1 clock
- shifted TEST2 pressures to match the TEST1 gauge
- replaced some noisy data in TEST2 by clean data from the TEST1 gauge
- copied the modified TEST2 gauge record into TEST1, resampling it at TEST1 clock
times. TEST1 now contains both gauge records.
Save the data via File Save (main menu) to create a system .PAN file. Save data frequently whilst
working through the program (or use the Auto-save facility (in Config General)).
Users could also save the data in ASCII format as a TPR file, using the Export button on the
Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog box.
17.9. Defining Flow Periods

Now users can define the flow periods on the Master File, TEST1. There are three graphical
methods for this in PanSystem.
Only plot the primary gauge column (i.e. TEST1:Gauge #1).
17.9.1. Exact Coordinates

Users should choose the tool, zoom in to the first rate change (start of first flowing period)
and mark where they think the flow period began - not necessarily corresponding to a data point.
17. 9. Defining Flow Periods
Figure : 17.9.1 - 1 Exact Position For Flow Period Definition

The dialog box that appears will display the co-ordinates of the exact position that was marked.
As this is the start of the test, the rate for this rate change should be zero.
586
17.9.2. Nearest Point
Selecting this tool and clicking on the plot marks a flowrate change at the data point nearest
to the cursor position. Zoom-in on the end of the first flowing period and click the cursor near the
last flowing data point. Enter the flowrate in the dialog box - 12.25 MMscf/day in this case.
(Users can edit the rates later, if necessary.)
Figure : 17.9.2 - 1 Nearest Point for Flow Period Definition

This is the more efficient method if users have a high data density with pressure readings at the
ends of the test periods. If not, users will have to "eye-ball" the spot with the "exact" option tool
(described previously), or use the intersecting lines approach (described next).
To speed up defining the remaining points, hold down the CTRL key and click either of the two
preceding tools (or click them with the right mouse button), and the tool remains active until
users switch it off again.
17.9.3. Intersecting Lines

This is the third method - start by clicking two points before and two after the flowrate change.
Then select the tool . The intersection of the two lines is taken as the rate change.
17. 9. 2. Nearest Point
Figure : 17.9.3 - 1 Intersecting Lines for Flow Period Definition

Enter rates of 3, 6, 9 and 12 MMscf/day as rates for the flow-after-flow test.
587
17.9.4. Rate History Prior To Test
Users cannot enter rate changes graphically if there are no data points to click! In the situation of
a 10 hour flow period of 10 MMscf/day finishing 10 hours before the first drawdown in the
gauge record began. Proceed as follows.
Go to the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog box, and select the Rate Changes
button. Users see a spreadsheet version of the rate change data they have entered so far. Click
Insert and ask for two rows before row 1.
Enter the times (negative times are included here, as per the above information). See Figure
17.9.4 - 1, “Entering Rate Data Prior to Test Record,” on page 588.
Figure : 17.9.4 - 1 Entering Rate Data Prior to Test Record

When users plot, they should see something like Figure 17.9.4 - 2, “Final Pressure and Rate
History Plot,” on page 588, once users have expanded the time-axis scale to include the rate
history. Ensure that the Plot Rate Changes item is checked in the Edit menu so as to display the
step-rate schedule from the Rate Changes table.
17. 9. 4. Rate History Prior To Test
Figure : 17.9.4 - 2 Final Pressure and Rate History Plot
588
To edit a rate change point via the Rate Change dialog box, click on its marker in the ruler bar
with the right mouse button, or with the left button holding down the CTRL key. To drag the
marker and re-position it manually, just click on it with the left button and drag.
Save the data via File Save once again (the Rate Change data are not saved if the Export option
is used).
17.10. Creating Flowrate Column

(optional)
If users want rate history treated as a step function, like Figure 17.9.4 - 2, “Final Pressure and
Rate History Plot,” on page 588 shows, then users do not need to create a special flowrate
column. Users only need to do this (with the "Q" button) if they require a generated piece-wise
linear or wellbore storage-derived rate.
17.11. Reducing Data

Users could reduce data density at any time, but it is easier once flow periods have been defined,
since it is possible to reduce one period at a time - typically with logarithmic sampling.
17.11.1. Point Deletion

Just click the point(s) and then the trash can button . ESC cancels any points currently
selected. Try one or two!
17.11.2. Block Deletion

Draw a box around the points, and click the trash can button. Try a block!
17.11.3. Undoing Deletion

Click the U (Undo) button to undo the last delete/reduce action. Click the I (Initialize) button to
undo all the delete/reduce actions. Try both!
17. 10. Creating Flowrate Column

17.11.4. Data Reduction
Users can reduce points based on:
• All the points in a box (if a box has been drawn)

• All the points in a flow period (if a flow period is selected - to select one, click the upper ruler
bar between two rate change markers). This takes precedence over the box method. Multiple
flow periods can be selected for reduction.
• All the points on the screen (if no portion has been selected)
Once users have a range of points selected, hit the Reduce button and choose the preferred
method of reduction (described in the Dataprep section)
589
Try these methods on the different flow periods. Use the Number button to see how many points
there are in a selected flow period. Deleted or reduced data points are actually retained in
memory and can be retrieved via the Undo or Initialize buttons;
- until the moment the Confirm button is activated . This permanently erases all deleted
points from memory - no more Undo or Initialize after this point. This "clearing out" will speed
up plotting of large files.
If users have not selected the Cnf tool, retrieve the data with the I button. An alternative way of
retrieving the data (and the only way if the Cnf tool has been used!) is to load (File Open) the
.PAN file that should have been saved previously (or re-import the TPR file if users have
exported the edited data).
17.12. Grouping Flow Periods into Test Periods

Users will probably want to analyze the flow-after-flow test as one test, to get rate-dependent
skin and deliverability. To avoid having to click all the flow periods separately when selecting
this test for analysis, they can be grouped here. Hold down SHIFT whilst dragging the mouse over
the ruler bar flow periods for all four drawdown rates.
Then, click the Group button .
17.13. Saving Data to PanSystem Data File

The data set is now ready for well and reservoir parameter entry, then analysis. As this is the end
of this tutorial, the file can be saved at this stage.
Select File Save and give it a name and path. Default extension .PAN.
17. 12. Grouping Flow Periods into Test Periods

17.14. Exporting Gauge Data
If users would like to save TEST2 (which has already been worked on), in its present state, go to
the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog box and click Export, then select the file to
export, then the columns and format, then give it a name (e.g. TEST2MOD - default extension is
.TPR.
590
Manual Data Entry
Chapter 18- Manual Data Entry

18.1. Overview of Data Entry Work Flow
This example illustrates the procedures followed when manually entering data required by
PanSystem in order to perform an analysis. Manual entry of the required well and reservoir data
is always required. Manual entry of time-based pressure and rate data is only required when users
do not have gauge data in ASCII files.
In this example users will:
• Enter Well Data

• Enter Layer Data
• Enter Fluid Data
• Enter Pressure Gauge and Rate Data
For a Black Oil fluid type well, once the data are set-up, users will:
• Plot raw data

• Analyze the test with Log-Log, specialist and type-curve methods
• Simulate the test response to validate it.
It is assumed for the purposes of this example that the oilfield absolute (OILFABS) units set is
selected from the configuration menu.
18.2. Data Entry

From the opening screen select the Dataprep menu and then Well and Reservoir Description
to gain access to the data entry section for well, fluid and reservoir data.
The dialog box in Figure 18.2.0 - 1, “Reservoir Data Entry Screen,” on page 592, Reservoir
Description should now be displayed. When entering data it is useful to bear in mind that the
system has been set up to allow consistent data entry for all data types. This means that in the
Chapter 18 - Manual Data Entry
dialog boxes users will see throughout this example there are many fields which are not needed
if the user's objective is simply to analyze a simple pressure transient test or sequence of tests.
The mandatory parameters which must be entered are highlighted in red. These fields must be
completed to allow the system to compute the required results such as permeability, wellbore
storage etc. PanSystem always checks for missing data.
591
Manual Data Entry
Figure : 18.2.0 - 1 Reservoir Data Entry Screen

The Reservoir Description dialog box is split into four main sections. These will be reviewed in
turn.
18.3. Well Control

The Well Control area of the dialog box allows users to define the number the wells in the
system and to select which well they wish to edit. Data can then be entered/edited for that
particular well. This facility is designed for setting up multi-well models for use with the
Advanced Simulation options, and allows the superposition of the effects of up to five wells for
use in designing or analyzing pulse/interference tests.
For the purpose of analyzing welltest data from a single well, leaving the default selection as P -
Well 1; Active will be the appropriate entry.
The entry of the well-specific data is accessed via the Well Parameters button which will take
users to the following dialog box:
18. 3. Well Control
Figure : 18.3.0 - 1 Well Parameters Data Entry
592
Manual Data Entry
Only two items must be initialized for the analysis of a single well test:
- Well Radius: enter 0.29 in the well radius field
- Wellbore Storage Model: leave it at the default "Classic" model. Users will be able to
select a different model during analysis if the data suggests they should.
The other fields are used when required for Advanced Simulation, not covered in this example.
Click OK to close the dialog box.
18.4. Fluid Type

In the Fluid Type area of the Reservoir Description dialog box, ensure that the selection is set
to Oil (Single-Phase) (i.e. users will be dealing with a single-phase oil producer).
18.5. Principal Well Orientation

The Principal Well Orientation should be set to Vertical (= vertical or slant). This selection
will define subsequent options in Analysis, such as the type-curves which are presented in type-
curve matching.
18.6. Layer Control

The Layer Control area of the Reservoir Description dialog box allows access to the rest of the
data entry dialog boxes in this section. Users can define up to five layers, which can be applied in
Advanced Simulation to allow simulation of multi-layer systems. For this exercise the default
setting should be retained at Layer 1; Active.
Click on the Layer Parameters button to access the dialog box:
18. 4. Fluid Type
Figure : 18.6.0 - 1 Layer Parameters Data Entry Screen

Enter the values as indicated in the above dialog box for Formation Thickness (107) and
Porosity (0.25). These are highlighted in red because they are mandatory.
593
Manual Data Entry
The Layer Pressure field can be left at zero or an estimate entered - it is not used in Analysis,
and is in fact one of the derived parameters. The Water Saturation, Gas Saturation and Rock
Compressibility fields are used in the calculation of total compressibility Ct, and can be left at
zero if users intend to type in a value for Ct (see the following section on Fluid Parameters). The
Total Compressibility field is not editable on this dialog box and is presented for information
only. This will be accessed from the Fluid Parameters screen.
The bottom section of the Layer Parameters dialog box allows the selection of a reservoir Flow
Model for use in the subsequent analysis. This can be easily changed when analysing data and is
often not known at this stage of data entry. It should now default to using the Radial
Homogeneous model, a good one to start the analysis with.
Users are now ready to proceed. The Model Parameters button provides access to the
parameters characterizing the selected reservoir flow model - in the case of Radial Homogeneous
these are the Skin and Permeability. Since the object of the analysis is to derive these
parameters there is no need to initialize them at this stage.
Click on OK to return to the Reservoir Description dialog box.
18.7. Fluid Parameters

Click on the Fluid parameters button to access this part of the system. The Fluid Parameters
dialog box is presented below:
18. 7. Fluid Parameters
Figure : 18.7.0 - 1 Fluid Parameter Data Entry

Enter the values indicated in the above screen:
Bo (1.06), µο (2.5) and Ct (4.2E-6).
594
Manual Data Entry
Users have only entered the parameters mandatory (red) for the subsequent calculations in
PanSystem. It is possible to have PanSystem use correlations to calculate these values. To do this
the input data fields at the top of the Fluid Parameter dialog box need to be entered and the Use
Correlations option checked. Users can then select the correlation they want and click on
Calculate to have the required values computed. Water and Gas Saturation and Rock
Compressibility values must be entered in the Layer Parameters dialog box, if users require
them to be used in the computation of Total Compressibility.
Once the Fluid Parameters data have been entered, click OK to return to the Reservoir
Description dialog box. Click on OK again to return to the opening screen.
All the non time-based data have now been entered.
18.8. Pressure and Rate Data Entry

The next stage is to enter the gauge data - time, pressure (and rate if available). Manual entry is
going to be used. (Import from ASCII file was described in Example 1: See Section 17 “Dataprep
- Gauge Data”, on page 575).
Select Dataprep and Gauge Data to gain access to this part of the program. The Pressure and
Rate Data Preparation dialog box is now presented as shown in Figure 18.8.0 - 1, “Pressure
and Rate Data Preparation,” on page 595.
18. 8. Pressure and Rate Data Entry

Figure : 18.8.0 - 1 Pressure and Rate Data Preparation
Click Edit and then Yes when prompted 'No data files in this well - do you want to create
one?' The dialog box displayed, Figure 18.8.0 - 2, “Define New Data File dialog box,” on page
596, will now allow users to define the data columns they wish to have in the new data file.
595
Manual Data Entry
Figure : 18.8.0 - 2 Define New Data File dialog box

Column #1 is defaulted to time, and #2 to pressure. Users have no simultaneous flowrate data
for this test, so click on the arrow under Column Type for column #3, (Oil flow rate) and from
the pull down menu select ’Not Used’.
The Data Column Name may be edited. Leave this at default ’Pressure #1’, or change it if
desired.
The Data File Name field can also be edited to define a name for the new data set. Users can
leave this at the default NEW TPR, or enter something else. All data columns created in this file
will be prefixed with this file name for later identification.
If users know the number of lines of data they are going to enter, set the Number of rows if
desired. Otherwise, leave it at 100 (or increase it) - after entering data it will set itself
automatically.
The dialog box should now be as shown below.
Figure : 18.8.0 - 3 New data file format specified

Click OK on this and the next dialog box to begin entering the pressure and time data. This is
done on the Edit NEW TPR dialog box shown in Figure 18.8.0 - 4, “Edit New TPR Data,” on
page 597.
596
Manual Data Entry
Figure : 18.8.0 - 4 Edit New TPR Data

The data to be entered are listed in the following table.
Note that while entering the data, once line 16 is reached, the scroll bars to the right of the table
should be used to scroll down to new blank lines. This process is repeated until the entire data set
is entered.
Enter the following data:
Point Number Time Pressure Point Number Time Pressure

1 0.0125 3096.55 19 2.5 3763.43
2 0.025 3106.77 20 3.25 3794.06
3 0.0375 3116.48 21 4 3815.96
4 0.0583 3128.95 22 4.75 3823.69
5 0.0833 3147.63 23 5.5 3832.63

6 0.1208 3178.38 24 6.25 3838.93
7 0.1625 3205.95 25 7.75 3843.01
8 0.2125 3238.37 26 9.25 3847.51
9 0.2917 3287.2 27 10.75 3850.75
10 0.4167 3356.27 28 12.25 3853.51
11 0.5417 3413.89 29 13.75 3855.5
12 0.667 3466.26 30 16 3857.98
13 0.8125 3518.62 31 18.25 3859.98
14 1 3571.75 32 20.5 3861.48
15 1.1875 3617.4 33 23.25 3863.21
16 1.375 3652.85 34 26.25 3864.48
17 1.625 3692.27 35 30 3865.73
18 2 3732.22
597
Manual Data Entry
If users wish to avoid having to enter the above data manually, the dataset is supplied in file
EX2.TPR with the PanSystem installation and can be imported using the techniques described in
Example 1.
18.9. Plotting Raw Data

Once the data are entered click OK and, on return to the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation
dialog box, the new data column will be listed as shown in Figure 18.9.0 - 1, “Pressure Data
Column listed,” on page 598.
Figure : 18.9.0 - 1 Pressure Data Column listed

To plot the data just entered, select the Data Column by clicking on the text NEW TPR -
Pressure #1 and click on Plot (Figure 18.9.0 - 2, “Plot of Pressure Data,” on page 598).
In order to complete the data entry, the flowrate history must also be entered. This test is a shut-
in after a single constant rate flowing period. Several approaches are available to do this in
PanSystem, and in this example users will type the flowrate data directly into the Rate Changes
table.
18. 9. Plotting Raw Data
Figure : 18.9.0 - 2 Plot of Pressure Data

From the Data Edit plot menu select Dataprep, then Gauge Data, to return to the Pressure and
Rate Data Preparation dialog box. Now click on the Rate Changes button to access the table
for rate data entry. The dialog box in Figure 18.9.0 - 3, “Rate Data Entry,” on page 599 will be
displayed (with zero entries).
598
Manual Data Entry
Figure : 18.9.0 - 3 Rate Data Entry

The table should be completed as shown above:
Start of flowing period:

- the first time value is set at −15.33 hours. This is because there was a 15.33 hour flowing
period prior to the pressure build-up, and the build-up starts at clock time = 0.
- the rate at −15.33 hrs. was 0 (well was shut-in before flowing)
- the initial pressure at −15.33 hrs. is not required for the analysis since users do not have
any flowing pressure data to analyze, and it can be left at zero, or a value typed in if
known. (An estimate of initial pressure will be computed as part of the analysis.)
Start of shut-in:
- the rate at 0 hrs. was 174 STB/day (the end of the flowing period).
- the last flowing pressure (3086.33 psi), at 0 hrs., is important - it will be used in the build-
up analysis (∆p on Log-Log plot, computation of S, etc.).
End of shut-in:
- the third line has time set at 30 hours, marking the end of the build-up. The zero rate entry
here means the flowrate was zero from the preceding time (0 hrs.) up to this time (30 hrs.).
The final shut-in pressure is not essential to the table, since there is no ensuing test period
to analyze, but may be entered if desired.
18. 9. Plotting Raw Data
Click OK, then select the data column NEW TPR - Pressure #1 and Plot to display the data
again. The rate data that has been entered will now appear as a step profile on the plot as shown
in Figure 18.9.0 - 4, “Rate and Pressure Data display,” on page 600. (There is a Plot Rate
Changes option on the Edit menu which can be used to switch the data display on/off). Also, in
this figure, the x-axis has been expanded to see the rate changes prior to the start of the shut-in
data.
599
Manual Data Entry
Figure : 18.9.0 - 4 Rate and Pressure Data display

It is possible to proceed directly to Analysis from this screen.
18.10. Analysis
Now select the Analysis menu Plot option to access the Test Overview plot as shown in Figure
18.10.0 - 1, “Analysis - Test Overview,” on page 600.
Figure : 18.10.0 - 1 Analysis - Test Overview

This display is used to show the complete test sequence available for analysis (in this case, just a
single build-up). Above the plot title is the Ruler Bar on which markers are used to separate the
Test Periods. In order to analyze the build-up data, click the test period between the markers in
18. 10. Analysis
the ruler bar. The selected period should now be highlighted dark grey. Users can now plot any of
the diagnostic plots available in the tool-bar.
600
Manual Data Entry
Log-Log plot
Select the Log-Log plot by clicking its button and the plot in Figure 18.10.0 - 2, “Log-Log Plot,”
on page 601 will be displayed.
Figure : 18.10.0 - 2 Log-Log Plot

Note: that the toolbar has changed to include various tools for drawing lines and other analysis
functions.
A quick look at the derivative suggests that users are probably dealing with a simple radial
homogeneous reservoir, with wellbore storage and skin, so the current flow model selection
should be OK. Users will be able to change this at any time via the Model option on the Analysis
menu.
Click on the ’FR’ toolbar button to define any flow regimes identifiable on the plot. After users
click once on the button a vertical line will appear 'attached' to the pointer. To mark the wellbore
storage-dominated portion of the data, move the line to the beginning of the data set (start of unit
slope) and click again to lock the line position. A second vertical line will now appear attached to
the pointer, and this can be moved to the end of the storage-dominated period (where the
derivative starts to level out - most, if not all, of this test is dominated by storage). When users
click again PanSystem will display the dialog box seen in Figure 18.10.0 - 3, “Log-Log Plot with
wellbore storage,” on page 602.
18. 10. Analysis
601
Manual Data Entry
Figure : 18.10.0 - 3 Log-Log Plot with wellbore storage

The dialog box contains flow regime options defined by the currently selected well and reservoir
flow models and boundary conditions. Click wellbore storage and the area between the vertical
lines will be identified with a red section in the ruler bar. These colored flow regime markers will
be carried through to all other plots selected.
Repeat this exercise with the ’FR’ button and mark the data which is approaching radial flow at
the end of the derivative. Radial flow has not developed fully by the end of this test.
If users have Autofit Lines switched on (under the Analysis menu) fitting these two flow
regimes will also cause the appropriate lines to be fitted to the data. If this feature is switched off
select a derivative point in early time dominated by wellbore storage by clicking on it with the
pointer, and select the toolbar button for a unit slope line;
. Confirm that this is wellbore storage at the prompt, and a line of unit slope will be drawn
through the selected point with a results box giving values for the real and dimensionless storage
coefficients.
This can be repeated with a horizontal line for the data exhibiting radial flow (almost!) and
a calculation made of permeability (this will be an upper limit since the late data are not quite in
radial flow). The screen should now be as shown in Figure 18.10.0 - 4, “Log-Log Plot with
Analysis Results,” on page 603.
Note: that users can move a line after placing it, by clicking on it with the right mouse button, or
by holding down the CTRL key and clicking with the left button. Users can move the line by
holding down the mouse button over the grab handle.
18. 10. Analysis
602
Manual Data Entry
Figure : 18.10.0 - 4 Log-Log Plot with Analysis Results

Radial flow plot (Semi-Log)
Now select the toolbar button for a Semi-Log plot. Note that the flow regime markers have been
carried over from the Log-Log plot. Note again that if autofit lines is on, any relevant lines will
be plotted on the plot already, otherwise users will need to add the radial flow line manually. To
do this click on the green radial flow regime section of the ruler bar. The regime marker becomes
cross-hatched.
Select the Fit Line toolbar button and a line will be fitted by least-squares through all the
data points within that flow regime. Permeability and skin are calculated from the line. The
screen should now be as shown in Figure 18.10.0 - 5, “Radial Flow (Horner) Plot,” on page 603.
18. 10. Analysis
Figure : 18.10.0 - 5 Radial Flow (Horner) Plot

Confirm the model parameters generated on the above plot to the system by using the ’Cnf’
toolbar button;
603
Manual Data Entry
. This will allow users to store the calculated values of permeability, skin and extrapolated
pressure in the reservoir model parameters. When the Cnf button is selected the dialog box in
Figure 18.10.0 - 6, “Confirm Dialog Box,” on page 604 will be presented.
Figure : 18.10.0 - 6 Confirm Dialog Box

Users could also have "confirmed" the calculated wellbore storage coefficient on the Log-Log
plot. Return to the Log-Log plot and click the Cnf button. The dialog box should be as shown in
Figure 18.10.0 - 7, “Confirm Storage Coefficient (and Permeability),” on page 604.
Figure : 18.10.0 - 7 Confirm Storage Coefficient (and Permeability)

Users may prefer to keep the permeability they derived from the semi-log plot, in which case
uncheck the permeability checkbox, to prevent the reservoir parameters "store" from being
updated.
Alternative Log-Log display

There is an alternative way of displaying build-up data on the Log-Log plot which removes the
data compression that often occurs at the end of the test when the "equivalent time" superposition
function is used. This compression often makes the identification of boundaries on the derivative
difficult.
Click the button, then tick the Plot against elapsed time box in the Derivative Selection
18. 10. Analysis
dialog box that follows:
604
Manual Data Entry
Figure : 18.10.0 - 8 Plot against elapsed time option

The derivative values are still correctly computed using superposition (as before), but they are
plotted against elapsed time ∆t.
Note: how the late portion has been expanded. This is very useful when boundaries are present.
Figure : 18.10.0 - 9 Using superposition, but plotting against elapsed

time
18. 10. Analysis
605
Manual Data Entry
18.11. Simulation
To determine that this flow model and combination of model parameters adequately described
the well and reservoir, users should now generate a theoretical pressure build-up response and
compare it to the measured data. This is done by selecting the Simulate menu option Quick
Match. The Match dialog box will now be presented (Figure 18.11.0 - 1, “Quick Match Dialog
Box,” on page 606) with the model parameters that were confirmed from the diagnostic plots.
Figure : 18.11.0 - 1 Quick Match Dialog Box

These defaults should give a reasonable first estimate for the model parameters. Click Calculate
start the simulation. When finished it will be plotted as a continuous curve. The screen should
now be as shown in Figure 18.11.0 - 2, “Quick Match Simulation - First Estimate,” on page 606.
Figure : 18.11.0 - 2 Quick Match Simulation - First Estimate

18. 11. Simulation
The storage coefficient is good (unit slope portion) but the permeability seems to be too low (late
portion of the derivative is too high), a consequence of fitting a line through data that were not in
fully-developed radial flow.
In order to refine the match the model parameters may be adjusted and the simulation repeated
until a good match is achieved.
606
Manual Data Entry
A good match can be obtained with the values Cs=0.0093 bbl/psi, k=12.2 mD, S=9.2. Click the
OK/Confirm button. The screen should now be as shown in Figure 18.11.0 - 3, “Quick Match
Final Result,” on page 607, (after deleting the two lines that had been fitted).
Figure : 18.11.0 - 3 Quick Match Final Result

Now check the simulation on the other plots by clicking on the Cartesian and Radial Flow plot
buttons, etc. Note that the simulated data can be seen on any of the plots by selecting Simulate
and Quick Match. The Radial Flow plot will allow a more sensitive adjustment to the skin factor
(9.3 looks better).
Figure : 18.11.0 - 4 Turn off Show Match Data to flip between Match and
Model Results
Since Quick Match overwrites the original line-fit figures in the results box with the currently
used values, Figure 18.11.0 - 4, “Turn off Show Match Data to flip between Match and Model
Results“ shows a useful feature to flip between showing the generated and the original line fit
results. Click Quick Match on the Simulate menu again to bring on the Match dialog box, and
flip between the two results displays by checking and unchecking the Show Match Data option.
Users can also turn off the Quick Match results by double clicking on the results box. Here again
they will see the Show match data option which can be switched on/off as required, see Figure
18.11.0 - 5, “Switching Quick Match on or off“.
18. 11. Simulation
Figure : 18.11.0 - 5 Switching Quick Match on or off
607
Manual Data Entry
Automatic Matching
As an alternative to manually adjusting the Quick Match parameters by trial and error, users
should try the automatic matching facility available on the Simulate menu. Select one of the
diagnostic plots (Radial Flow plot, for example), and click Simulate Auto Match. A screen will
appear explaining that since no points have been selected, it will use all of them (users have the
option to pick a smaller number of points). OK to proceed to the Automatic Matching control
box.
Figure : 18.11.0 - 6 Automatic Matching Control

The Start values will be the most recently confirmed parameter set. The Lower and Upper
bounds are set by default. Change the lower bound of the storage coefficient Cs to zero to allow
more freedom for the regression. (users might like to alter the start values from what is already
close to the best answer, to make it more of a challenge.) Set the max number of iterations to 30
(usually plenty). Click OK to start the regression.
Watch the Goodness of fit indicator as the regression proceeds. Users can Stop the regression
before it terminates normally if they feel that it has got close enough. On OK, the Quick Match
routine will then generate a response based on the best set of parameters found during the
regression.
18. 11. Simulation
Figure : 18.11.0 - 7 Optimized match obtained with Auto Match
608
Manual Data Entry
The optimization gives a better overall match to the data, at the expense of a slightly poorer
match to the late portion, which is apparent on the Log-Log plot derivative. Users could
experiment by increasing the weighting of the nearly-radial flow points (refer to the Simulation
chapter) to improve the match.
Tiling plots
These plots can be "tiled" - to do this select the plots required for tiling by holding down the
CTRL key and clicking the toolbar buttons of the plots to be tiled (or by clicking with the right
mouse button). Select the Test Overview, Log-Log, Radial Flow and Cartesian plots in this way;
then click the Tile button . The whole screen will now be as shown in Figure 18.11.0 - 8,
“Tiled Plot of Results,” on page 609. This allows users to check at a glance that the simulation is
consistent on all plots.
Figure : 18.11.0 - 8 Tiled Plot of Results

Use any alphanumeric key or ESC or the right mouse button to return to the plots. PRINT SCREEN
copies this plot to the clipboard.
18.12. Type-Curve Matching
As an alternative (or a supplement) to diagnostic plot analysis with line-fitting, there is a type-
curve matching facility. Select the TC toolbar button. The data will be re-plotted as a Log-Log 18. 12. Type-Curve Matching
plot with the line drawing toolbar buttons replaced with the type-curve matching tools.
Select the M (for Match) toolbar button, keep the defaults on the Select Type Curve dialog box
(Td/Cd method, radial homogeneous with storage and skin default type-curve set) and click
OK. The plot will be presented with drawdown type curves displayed.
The curves can be moved over the data by dragging them with the mouse until a match is found.
When close to the match, the arrow keys can be used to move the curves if preferred - coarse
steps when pressed alone, fine steps when users hold down CTRL and press the arrow key.
Once the type-curves are matched, select M again to terminate matching mode. The nearest
matching curve number (counting bottom-up) will be displayed along with the corresponding
curve value (curve #10, Cde2S = 1E10, or thereabouts, in this case). Users can type in a different
number if they feel that PanSystem has not identified the correct curve, (press the TAB key to
update the identifier value), then OK. The model parameters are then computed from the match.
609
Manual Data Entry
The screen should now be as shown in Figure 18.12.0 - 1, “Type-Curve Match,” on page 610.
Figure : 18.12.0 - 1 Type-Curve Match

Users should not forget to confirm the results (Cnf button) if they want to store them as the latest
model parameters.
The right and left arrow buttons in the type-curve matching toolbar allow users to move to the
next stage of type-curve matching (or back to the previous stage), depending on the selected
model. Here, clicking on the right arrow would move to type-curves for boundary analysis (not
appropriate with this data); clicking the left arrow would return to the pre-match data plot.
18. 12. Type-Curve Matching
610
Gas Well DST and Deliverability Analysis
Chapter 19- Gas Well DST and Deliverability Anal-

ysis
19.1. Overview of Gas Test Analysis Work Flow
This example covers a complete gas well Drill Stem Test (DST), with an initial flow and shut-in,
a four-rate flow-after-flow test for Darcy and turbulent skin analysis, and a final shut-in.
The method to be followed is:
• Analyze initial build-up for initial reservoir pressure estimate.

• Analyze final build-up for reservoir parameter determination.
• Analyze flow-after-flow test for Darcy and non-Darcy skin factors.
• Verify and refine whole test sequence interpretation by history matching.
• Calculate deliverability from this transient analysis.
• Perform conventional LIT and simplified C-and-n analyses and deliverability calculations,
perhaps for regulatory purposes.
• Perform Production Forecasting
The data file is supplied on the PanSystem diskettes and is called TESTC.PAN. The original
Chapter 19 - Gas Well DST and Deliverability Analysis

gauge data have already been imported, edited, and the rate change events picked graphically (as
explained in Example 1; See Section 17 “Dataprep - Gauge Data”, on page 575). All well and
reservoir data have been entered and the file saved as a .PAN system file, ready for analysis. If
users would like to start from scratch, the raw gauge data can be imported from TESTC.TPR.
This example will review only the gas-specific part of the Well and Reservoir Parameter input.
The rest of this type of input is covered in Example 2 (for an oil well); See Section 18 “Manual
Data Entry”, on page 591.
The whole test sequence is as shown in Figure 19.1.0 - 1, “Data Edit Plot for Example 3,” on
page 612 (Dataprep, Gauge Data option, Plot button).
611
Figure : 19.1.0 - 1 Data Edit Plot for Example 3

The surface flowrate schedule for the test is listed in the Rate Change table (Dataprep, Gauge
Data option, Rate changes button).
Figure : 19.1.0 - 2 Rate allocation for the DST
19.2. Gas Fluid Properties

This section only covers the differences between oil well analysis and gas well analysis. Example
2; See Section 18 “Manual Data Entry”, on page 591, dealt with the entry of the reservoir
parameters which are common to both fluid types.
Select the Dataprep menu, Well and Reservoir Description option and this brings up the
19. 2. Gas Fluid Properties
Reservoir Description dialog box. Make sure the Fluid Type is checked as Gas (this example is
a dry gas producer).
Click the Layer Parameters button and note in the Model Parameters dialog box there is a
non-Darcy skin factor, D. All values are currently zero because no analysis has been performed.
An estimate of the layer pressure has been entered. Along with layer temperature, it is
mandatory for analysis of a gas welltest.
The major differences are in the Fluid Parameter section. The dialog box appears as shown in
Figure 19.2.0 - 1, “Gas Fluid Parameters Dialog Box,” on page 613.
612
Figure : 19.2.0 - 1 Gas Fluid Parameters Dialog Box

The reference gas properties have been computed at layer pressure and temperature. The Use
EoS button is checked, meaning that these properties have been computed by an equation of state
using gas compositional data. Users can compute at any P or T to compare with lab PVT
measurements, but must leave this dialog box with values at layer conditions for analysis of the
test data.
A table of pseudo-pressures (m(p)) is required for the pseudo pressure analysis option. (Users
will be able to try the pressure-squared or pressure approximations if desired, when operating
in the analysis section.) The pseudo tables have already been created in this file, but to see the
way in which they are calculated, try the following:
• Click the Gas Composition button. The mole-percentages of non-hydrocarbon "impurities"

have been specified. These will affect the calculations of gas properties to a small extent.
Change nitrogen % to zero. Click Normalise to readjust the mole percentages to total 100%.
Calculate then changes the gas gravity.
• Return to the Gas Fluid Parameters dialog box, make sure Use EoS is selected and click
Calculate. This recalculates the gas properties at layer conditions.
• Select Pseudo tables, and select the Calculate all button. This will calculate all three tables
in one step: Alternatively, select each table in turn and use the Calculate table button.
To ensure that the results will match the following analysis, recall TESTC.PAN again now (or re-
set the N2 mole-percentage to 1.17 and recalculate the gas properties and tables).
19. 2. Gas Fluid Properties
613
19.3. Initial Build-Up Analysis
The purpose of analyzing this build-up is to get an estimate for the initial reservoir pressure from
the Horner extrapolated P*. Estimates of reservoir parameters can also be obtained if the data are
good.
Users can perform their own analysis of the plots for this build-up. The EPS interpretation and
actions were as follows:
• Select Analysis menu option Plot. This displays the Test Overview. Click on the first build-
up in the ruler bar.
• Log-Log plot (Figure 19.3.0 - 1, “Log-Log plot of initial build-up,” on page 614): unit slope
and zero slope through the storage and radial flow regions, mark flow regimes (optional).
Cs = 0.032 bbls/psi. Radial flow has hardly had time to develop.
• Radial Flow plot (Horner) (Figure 19.3.0 - 2, “Radial Flow (Horner) plot of initial build-up,”
on page 615): fitting a line through the (almost) radial flow portion gives: P* = 7232 psia. k=
2.5,
S = −0.58.
Figure : 19.3.0 - 1 Log-Log plot of initial build-up
19. 3. Initial Build-Up Analysis
614
Figure : 19.3.0 - 2 Radial Flow (Horner) plot of initial build-up

• Type-Curve plot: the data do not match any of the radial homogeneous type-curves - the
storage is probably non- ideal.
The extrapolated P* is a fair bit higher than the value used to compute the fluid parameters (7149
psia estimated from the early gauge data). If this P* was felt to be more reliable, the fluid
properties should be re-computed with the new value. The original values have been kept for this
analysis.
19.4. Final Build-Up Analysis

The objective of this analysis is to estimate permeability and total skin factor, and to look for any
evidence of depletion from the extrapolated pressure compared to that in the initial build-up.
The following points are important:
• The Log-Log plot shows very little wellbore storage, and appears to show a long period of
radial flow (Figure 19.4.0 - 1, “Tiled Plots of Final build-up Analysis,” on page 615). The
radial flow regime has been marked.
• The Horner plot straight line gives the following results: k=3.30, S=−0.01, P*=6947 psia. k 19. 4. Final Build-Up Analysis
and S are rather different from the values from the initial build-up, but should be of better
quality. The lower P* might indicate depletion. Use the Cnf button to store these values in the
reservoir description.
Figure : 19.4.0 - 1 Tiled Plots of Final build-up Analysis
615
19.5. Flow-After-Flow Transient Analysis
This analysis is aimed at determining the Darcy and non-Darcy skin factors, S and D.
In the Test Overview plot, click the ruler bar with the right mouse button at the four sequential
flowing periods (or hold down CTRL whilst clicking with the left button). This way, users select
all four rates for a single analysis.
Figure : 19.5.0 - 1 Multi-rate Drawdown Log-Log Plot

On the Log-Log plot, above, reasonably clear radial flow is seen (bearing in mind that these are
all drawdowns). The zero slope (radial flow) line has been moved until its permeability agrees
with the final build-up value, for reference. The T’ button has been used to increase the
derivative smoothing to 0.25 here. Confirm the wellbore storage coefficient from this plot (=
0.0299 bbl/psi).
19. 5. Flow-After-Flow Transient Analysis

On the Radial Flow plot, users could fit lines to all four drawdowns then average them to give a
best overall estimate of permeability. However, in this case, users can impose the value from the
final build-up, as it is likely to be more reliable. Accordingly, put a line on the plot and adjust its
gradient (using the handles at the ends of the line) until it gives K=3.30 mD and fit it to one of the
flow periods. Then use the Parallel Line button to place three more lines at the same
permeability, one on each test period.
616
Figure : 19.5.0 - 2 Multi-rate Drawdown Semi-Log Plot, with Parallel

Lines
Now, the rate-dependent skin calculations can be made. Enable the Non-Darcy Skin Analysis
on the Analysis menu. PanSystem will highlight each line in turn and ask users to confirm which
flowing period it is associated with. (Users could have switched the Non-Darcy Skin Analysis
option on before fitting the lines, in which case they would have been prompted to identify the
lines each one was brought on.)
The program now knows the total skin factor associated with each flow rate, so a Skin vs.
Flowrate plot can be drawn. Click the SvQ button and fit a line through the points, line type
Skin Calculation. This shows:
S=−2.17, D=2.07E-4 (Mscf/day)-1, and F=4.1434 psi2/cp/(Mscf/day)2.

Confirm these results to the reservoir description with the Cnf button (users will overwrite the S
value previously confirmed from the Horner plot - this is appropriate since the Horner skin was a
total skin which includes both Darcy and non-Darcy terms.)
Figure : 19.5.0 - 3 Total Skin vs Normalized Flowrate plot
617
Owing to the nature of the "generalised" superposition function used for the Semi-Log plot in
Figure 19.5.0 - 2, “Multi-rate Drawdown Semi-Log Plot, with Parallel Lines,” on page 617, both
the total skin and the flowrate plotted here are "normalised" - i.e. they are not the actual values
but have been functioned. This is explained in “Skin versus Flowrate Plot”, on page 347 in the
Analysis section of this User Guide. The S and D derived from the plot are however, real values
and can be used without further correction. An alternative, "unnormalised", approach is
described after the next figure.
As a quality check, return to the Radial Flow plot and switch on Correct For Rate Dependency
in the Analysis menu. (If no F value appears in the next dialog box, users forgot to confirm the
results of the SvQ plot. Go back to that plot and use the Cnf button!) Switch the correction on. If
F is correct, the different flowing periods should all plot out on one trend (Figure 19.5.0 - 4,
“Rate-dependency correction - quality check,” on page 618), since the rate-dependency has now
been backed out (as per the y-axis label). Users could refine F manually by re-plotting with
different values to obtain the best results.
Figure : 19.5.0 - 4 Rate-dependency correction - quality check

Using generalised superposition theory in Figure 19.5.0 - 2, “Multi-rate Drawdown Semi-Log
Plot, with Parallel Lines,” on page 617, ∆m(p) for each flowing period is computed with
reference to the pressure at the start of that flowing period. This has certain practical advantages,
but the resulting S vs Q plot (Figure 19.5.0 - 3, “Total Skin vs Normalized Flowrate plot,” on
page 617) uses normalized values of total skin and flowrate which cannot be directly related to
the true values.
An alternative approach is to use the more conventional variable rate drawdown superposition
function where all flowing periods are referenced to the initial pressure Pi at the start of the DST
(“Skin versus Flowrate Plot”, on page 347). (This was the method used in PanSystem V-1.8 and
earlier.)
Click the Tf button and switch on Reference back to initial pressure.
618
Now repeat the Semi-Log and S vs Q analysis as described above. The Semi-Log plot will look
a little different because the ∆m(p) values for all four flowing periods are now computed relative
to the same Pi (the pressure entry (7149 psia) in the first line of the Rate Changes table), and the
time function is modified accordingly.
Figure : 19.5.0 - 5 Semi-Log plot for the four flowing periods using
alternative superposition function referenced to Pi
The Total Skin vs Flowrate plot now consists of points corresponding to the true flowrates (3.95,
6.6, 9.015 and 12.11 MMscf/day) rather than the normalized values, with the corresponding true

total skins.
Figure : 19.5.0 - 6 Total Skin vs Flowrate plot
619
Note: that the results are (almost) identical to those from the other method, with S = −2.306 and
D = 2.214E-4 (Mscf/day)-1.
The weakness of this more conventional approach is that the Semi-Log plot depends on the
choice of Pi, and this is often not known with certainty. The total skins taken through to the S vs
Q plot will differ slightly if a different Pi is used, resulting in different D and S estimates. Try
changing the initial pressure in the Rate Change table to the extrapolated P* from the initial
build-up (or any other value) to see this.
19.6. Full Test Sequence History Match &

Refinement
The permeability from the final build-up has been confirmed, in conjunction with the Darcy and
Non-Darcy skin factors and wellbore storage coefficient from the four- rate drawdown analysis.
A P* is available from both build-ups and they are different (and different from the initial
pressure read from the gauge record). It is necessary to look at the whole test sequence in order
to confirm the overall parameters and check what is happening to the pressure.
The "initial pressure" value is the value in the Rate Changes table at the start of the test. If users
have a good static initial pressure reading, this could be entered here (the file was set up using
7149 psia gauge pressure). P* from the initial build-up might be a better estimate: (7232 psia).
Plot the Test Overview and select the initial flowing period in the ruler bar. Now select Simulate
Quick Match. The current Pi of 7149 psia will be listed (if not, users have not selected the first
flowing period). Calculate with this, then try with Pi = 7232 and compare
19. 6. Full Test Sequence History Match & Refinement

Using 7232 gives generated pressures obviously too high at the end of the first build-up, while
the estimate of 7149 is better. The four-rate test is matched quite well, but the wellbore storage
coefficient appears to be too large. It looks like the flowrate estimate for the initial clean-up
period is low. Neither start pressure produces a match for the final shut-in.
Figure : 19.6.0 - 1 History match to complete DST using current analysis

and Pi = 7149 psia.
620
Estimating Pi: Users could repeat the simulation with different Pi values until the final shut-in
pressure of the first build-up (a good tie-in point), is matched. Instead, select the first of the flow-
after-flow test periods in the ruler bar (Figure 19.6.0 - 2, “History match with revised initial
pressure and zero wellbore storage,” on page 621). The next Quick Match will automatically
shift the simulated response to go through the first pressure of the selected period (6925.5 psia as
specified in the Rate Change table), and will compute Pi. Set Cs = 0 to speed up the computation.
The computed Pi is 7154 psia.
Figure : 19.6.0 - 2 History match with revised initial pressure and zero
wellbore storage

It would be better to run subsequent simulations with this flowing period highlighted so as to
anchor the response at a reliable pressure. As users will see, the estimate of Pi will change as the
model is modified, so starting it at an imposed Pi would prove cumbersome.
The match is now good except during the final build-up (if the initial clean-up data is ignored,
which have probably been assigned the wrong rate, or are affected by hydrostatic effects or a
changing skin factor). There appears to be some depletion, or at least a noticeable boundary
effect, at the final build-up. Wellbore storage does not appear to be significant (the build-up was
a downhole shut-in).
Clearly, it is not possible to obtain a unique boundary geometry as no obvious boundaries are
seen on the derivative of any of the individual test periods - if there is a boundary, it lies outside
the radius of investigation of the tests. Likely boundaries would have to be estimated, based on
geological and geophysical information.
To illustrate the principles involved, assume that the geologist says that a nearby fault is a
possibility. A few Quick Match runs on the Test Overview will establish that it would have to be
about 150 feet away from the well in order to bring the final build-up into line.
Note: that it has not been necessary to postulate a fully closed system in order to replicate the
apparent "depletion" observed in the pressure behaviour - this may keep users on good terms
with the geologist. A small reduction in D to 2.0E-4 (MMscf/day)-1 is necessary to restore the
match during the four-rate test. See Figure 19.6.0 - 3, “Final Match with a Boundary Introduced,”
on page 622.
621
Figure : 19.6.0 - 3 Final Match with a Boundary Introduced

With this modification to the model, the estimated Pi is now 7198 psia (Quick Match results
box). Although this gives a good match on linear time scales as above, closer inspection of the
final build-up on a Log-Log plot suggests that the model is not correct, because the simulated
derivative shows a boundary response before the end of the test - the fault is too close. A better
match to the slight curvature of the derivative can be obtained by putting the boundary at 300 ft.
But at this distance, the Test Overview match will suffer....

Users can obtain reasonable matches on the Test Overview with a variety of boundary
configurations (the simplest possible configuration has been used). Each scenario will
necessitate a small adjustment in D and perhaps S, and will produce a different Pi estimate.
Probably none will match both the Test Overview and the Log-Log final build-up, which
suggests that the reservoir model may be more complex, or that some other factor (such as
changing hydrostatic correction between drawdown and build-up because of liquid fall-back)
might be interfering.
Automatic parameter optimisation: Still with the first main flowing period highlighted on the
Test Overview, try Simulate Auto with the same model, selecting around 20 points over the test.
Yet another set of parameters - a slight variation on the same theme - is obtained, depending on
the points users picked. In Figure 19.6.0 - 4, “Parameter optimisation with Auto Match,” on page
623, wellbore storage has been allowed as a variable.
622
Figure : 19.6.0 - 4 Parameter optimisation with Auto Match
19.7. Deliverability From Transient Analysis

Having confirmed all the model parameters to the reservoir description, either from Quick
Match or Automatch, users can examine the deliverability predicted for this well.
On performing Deliverability, IPR, users have a chance to alter the reservoir parameters
relevant to the well deliverability. (See Figure 19.7.0 - 1, “Transient Welltest and LIT Results,”
on page 623).
19. 7. Deliverability From Transient Analysis
Figure : 19.7.0 - 1 Transient Welltest and LIT Results

Users can opt not to have these parameters updated from the Analysis section by unchecking the
checkboxes beside the individual parameters. Users can also have available up to five IPR
screens. When selected (bottom-right checkbox), these will overlay on the Deliverability plot.
In this way it is easy to compare different sensitivities.
623
It could probably be concluded from the attempts at history matching, that the layer pressure
should be higher. Enter a preferred value (in this case, the Pi estimate of 7198 psia from Figure
19.6.0 - 3, “Final Match with a Boundary Introduced,” on page 622, has been used). Select
Calculate. The estimated AOF - based on the theoretical semi-steady-state inflow equation (See
Section 15. 8. 5 “Deliverability Analysis - Gas Wells”, on page 548) using the parameters
derived from transient pressure test analysis - is 13.325 MMscf/day for a default drainage area of
640 acres.
Select OK to plot the deliverability curve. Users can change between linear and logarithmic
display, and re-edit the parameters if desired.
19.8. Flow-After-Flow LIT Analysis

Returning to Analysis, Plot, users can perform an LIT (Laminar-Inertial-Turbulent) analysis
using the four final flowing pressures. Select the four flowing periods (with the right button or
CTRL and left button) then click the LIT button. Choose Flow After Flow for the test type, then
the LIT Analysis dialog box will appear.
This gives users the chance to review the flowing pressures and rates from the test periods that
were defined in the data preparation phase. The revised layer pressure should be used (Figure
19.6.0 - 3, “Final Match with a Boundary Introduced,” on page 622). OK from this dialog
showing this data and users will see the LIT plot as shown below, but without a line fitted.
Figure : 19.8.0 - 1 LIT Analysis Plot 19. 8. Flow-After-Flow LIT Analysis

Place a line through the points (extended flow), and the laminar and turbulent flow coefficients B
and F will be calculated together with the AOF. This F compares well with that obtained from
the transient S vs Q analysis. Users need to confirm these results (Cnf button) to use them in
deliverability calculations (do not forget to do this!).
Proceed to Deliver IPR. This time, the dialog box contains both the transient and LIT data. The
results are similar, indicating that the two analyses are consistent.
There are various ways of displaying these results. Figure 19.8.0 - 2, “Deliverability from LIT
and Transient Results,” on page 625 compares the deliverability curves on linear axes. The four
final flowing pressures are also plotted.
624
Figure : 19.8.0 - 2 Deliverability from LIT and Transient Results

Figure 19.8.0 - 3, “AOF Plot from LIT and transient analyses - log-log presentation,” on page
625 is the alternative "AOF plot" on log-log axes.
Figure : 19.8.0 - 3 AOF Plot from LIT and transient analyses - log-log
19. 9. Flow-After-Flow C-and-n Analysis

presentation
19.9. Flow-After-Flow C-and-n Analysis

Returning to Analysis, Plot, users can perform a deliverability analysis by the empirical C-and-
n (or "simplified") method. Select the four flowing periods (with the right button or CTRL and left
button) then click the C+n button. Choose Flow After Flow for the test type, then the C&n
Analysis dialog box will appear.
Type in the revised layer pressure if necessary (7198 psia from Figure 19.6.0 - 3, “Final Match
with a Boundary Introduced,” on page 622).
625
Figure : 19.9.0 - 1 C-and-n or Simplified Method

Fit a line through the four flowing points on the plot. The AOF of about 13 MMscf/day is close
to what was derived from the theoretical LIT method. Confirm these results (Cnf button) to use
them in deliverability calculations (do not forget to do this!).
Proceed to Deliver, IPR. The dialog box contains both the "extended" analysis (from the C-and-
n plot of the four extended flowing periods) and a section for "stabilised" results. Click
Calculate to compute the stabilised flowrate at the last measured flowing pressure, the
stabilised C-coefficient and the stabilised AOF. Other relevant results are listed on a second
screen accessed via the More Results button.
The deliverability plot can be presented on linear scales (Figure 19.9.0 - 2, “Deliverability Plot
after C-and-n analysis,” on page 626) or logarithmic (Figure 19.9.0 - 3, “AOF Plot after C-and-n
analysis,” on page 627), with the four extended flowing points (diamonds #1 - 4) and the
stabilized point (square #5):
19. 9. Flow-After-Flow C-and-n Analysis
Figure : 19.9.0 - 2 Deliverability Plot after C-and-n analysis
626
Figure : 19.9.0 - 3 AOF Plot after C-and-n analysis
19.10. Production Forecasting

As well as doing deliverability calculations, users may also use the model parameters they have
determined from the analysis, to forecast production rates and average layer pressures in the
future.
For details of Production Forecasting options see Section 13. 3 “Production Forecasting”, on
page 458.
Under the Deliver menu select Forecasting, the following dialog will appear.
19. 10. Production Forecasting
Figure : 19.10.0 - 1 Production Forecasting dialog box

It is shown here after entering the 5 year period (over which the production profile will be
investigated). In this case, 100 logarithmically-spaced steps have been selected.
627
The contract rate is 8MMscf/day and a bottomhole pressure of 1000 psia is being maintained. (A
more realistic model could have been applied by importing a VHP table to model the tubing
performance of the well).
Selecting OK will show the Single Fault dialog normally associated with Quick Match
calculations. OK from this and users will see the Parameter Entry box (which should be
familiar from Quick Match). Click Calculate and the forecast will be computed and plotted.
The results are shown in Figure 19.10.0 - 2, “Production Forecast Rate Profile,” on page 628,
where users can see that the contract rate will only be met for the few months, before the rate will
decline.
Figure : 19.10.0 - 2 Production Forecast Rate Profile

Obviously, this example is some what simplistic. Normally users would be interested in the
decline with closed system geometries.
In such cases PanSystem will default to accounting for the change in constant compressibility
with declining average layer pressure. This can be switched on or off under the Pressure
transform option (Material Balance correction) on the main Analysis menu.
19. 10. Production Forecasting
628
Reporting
Chapter 20- Reporting

20.1. Overview of Reporting Work Flow
This example takes users through all the stages in the process of generating a PanSystem report
after having carried out an analysis.
The whole example works through the reporting process sequentially, using data in the order
users might typically follow. There are also some handy hints and tips for getting the best
possible quality report.
In this example, users will learn how to:
• Set-up and change the printer settings

• Alter the font used for the report
• Make adjustments to the data to be reported
• Change the information on the front page of the report
• Print a report to a printer
• Export to a Word document
• Load and save template settings
• Create a custom templates
• Print a report to a file
• Generate a text-only report
20.2. Files For This Example
This example uses the example file: EXAMPLE.PAN. This is found in the PANSYS\DATA
directory (or whatever directory PanSystem might have installed to). Assume that an analysis has
been carried out and that Log-Log, Semi-Log and Cartesian plots have been used for the
analysis.
20.3. Altering Printer Settings

20.3.1. Selecting a Printer
Chapter 20 - Reporting
First, select the File, Print Setup command which will bring up the Print Setup dialog box. This
contains a list of the printers available to Windows (the actual printers listed will vary depending
on which Windows printers users have installed via the Control Panel).
From the list box, select the printer which the report is to be printed on. If users click OK at this
point then this printer will be used for all printed output (including plots).
If users want to alter or just simply check the current settings for this printer then proceed as
follows.
629
Reporting
20.3.2. Changing Printer Setup
If users select Properties (or Options, depending on the driver) a second dialog box will appear,
the contents of which will depend on the printer selected (all printers have their own settings
which can be altered). Figure 20.3.2 - 1, “Changing Printer Settings,” on page 630 shows a
typical example for a Postscript printer.
Figure : 20.3.2 - 1 Changing Printer Settings

Once users are happy with the settings, click OK to store them and return to the Print Setup
dialog box. Click OK again on this screen to confirm the choice of printer.
20.4. Changing the Report Font

Once users have selected a printer, they may want to select the character font to be used for the 20. 3. 2. Changing Printer Setup
report, there being some variation in appearance between printers for a given font type,
especially if the printer does not have the selected font installed (in which case it will go for the
nearest matching font it can find).
To choose a new report font, select the Config, Fonts command which will bring up the Font
Definition dialog box. Click on Report Font.... This will display the Font dialog box shown in
Figure 20.4.0 - 1, “Selecting a Report Font,” on page 631.
630
Reporting
Figure : 20.4.0 - 1 Selecting a Report Font

The font name, style and size are shown in the three list boxes and a sample of the font is shown
in the box at the bottom. In the font name list box the small symbol on the left indicates the type
of font; a printer symbol indicates it is a supplied printer font, the symbol indicates that it
is a True Type font which Windows can download for the printer to use, and if there is no symbol
this signifies that this is a system font. The printer can usually only replicate its own printer fonts
exactly.
Users may find that they need to experiment with the font settings to get the best results from
their own printer - typically a 10-point font gives good results. Much bigger and large tables will
overflow the page; much smaller and users will get eye-strain trying to read the report!
20.5. Configuring a Report

20.5.1. Changing the Report Content
After selecting the printer, it is a good idea to check the content and size of the report to make
sure it does not contain unnecessary data and to check that it is not excessively large (50 page
reports can take a long time to print). To do this, select the Report, Configure Report option.
The Configure Report dialog box appears (Figure 20.5.1 - 1, “Configure Report Dialog Box,”
on page 632).
20. 5. Configuring a Report
631
Reporting
Figure : 20.5.1 - 1 Configure Report Dialog Box

Click on the Format button to calculate the size of the report (Section Sizes area). If users want
to change the content of any of the sections then click the Edit button beside the section to be
altered (Sections area). This will bring up a dialog box that allows users to omit or include topics
from within that section, as explained in Chapter 4.
For example, the Analysis section edit (Figure 20.5.1 - 2, “Selecting Analysis Data for
Reporting,” on page 632) allows users to change the items to include for each plot type, or to
omit plots altogether (very handy if a particular plot has no useful results). The dialog shows an
example of a Spherical Flow plot being omitted (it does not have the word Selected beside it).
For each plot, users can also change the Topics to Include in the report.
20. 5. 1. Changing the Report Content
Figure : 20.5.1 - 2 Selecting Analysis Data for Reporting

To alter the report header or footer click on Edit Layout in Figure 20.5.1 - 1, “Configure Report
Dialog Box,” on page 632. This will display the Edit Report Layout dialog box, where users
can change the report headings and select the items to be displayed in the header or footer, as
described in “Report Menu Options”, on page 78.
632
Reporting
By default, with Show logo switched on, the logo is displayed in the top left of the report is the
EPS logo. However, this information is stored as part of the file itself, so reading in
EXAMPLE.PAN will replace the defaults. The logo is taken from a file LOGO.BMP stored in
the PANSYS\REPORTS directory (or whatever directory PanSystem has been installed to).
Users can substitute their own logo by saving it in Windows bitmap (.BMP) format as
LOGO.BMP. Alternatively, keep the EPS logo on the left, and display a company logo on the
right by saving it as CLIENT.BMP in the same directory.
20.5.2. Changing the Cover Page

The front or cover page of the report contains textual information on the analysis. To edit this
information, click Edit Layout on the Configure Report dialog box (Figure 20.5.1 - 1,
“Configure Report Dialog Box,” on page 632), and, after switching on Include cover page,
select Edit cover page. (Users could also get here via the Report Cover Page option on the
main Report menu.)
Edit the fields on the Report Cover Page screen. The default field names on the left side
(Analyst Name, Company, etc.) are specified in the Description sub-folder located below the
Pansys30.ini folder in the Windows Registry. If users change any of these entries in the screen
dialog, they will be stored in the .PAN file next time it is saved, and will take precedence on
recall. To make a permanent change to the defaults, edit the relevant section of the Windows
Registry (See Section 1. 1. 3 “PANSYS30.INI and the Registry”, on page 24).
If users want to include any other information, click Edit Remarks to display a dialog box with
a large free format edit field where any other useful information can be entered. This will appear
as part of the front page of the report (and subsequent pages if needed).
Once users are happy with the information to be included, OK back to the Configure Report
dialog box and click Format again to check the size of the edited report. Users can save the
report settings as a template for future use, as described shortly.
20.6. Printing a Report

There are two ways to print a report:
- click on Print from the Configure Report dialog box
20. 5. 2. Changing the Cover Page

- select the Report, Report Output, Print Report option.
The former has the advantage of allowing users to see the size of the report before it has printed,
if the format option is used (it will perform an automatic format if users have not done so). The
latter will simply print the report immediately. Both options allow users to abort the printing by
clicking on Cancel.
20.7. Export to Word Document

To access this option:
- select the Report, Report Output, Export to Word Document option.
633
Reporting
This option generates a standard Windows Save As dialog that allows users to save the report to
a MS Word (*.DOC) file, with graphics embedded. After naming the document and saving it to
the required folder, users are supplied with a prompt to view the document. After accepting the
prompt, MS Word is opened and the report contents can be viewed.
After naming the document and saving it to the required folder with the Save button, users are
supplied with a prompt to view the document.
If users select Yes to the prompt, MS Word is opened and the Report contents can be viewed,
edited, printed, saved and re-formatted (i.e. plot re-sizing, page number insertion, application of
headers/footers, etc.).
This option writes the same items to file as are normally printed directly via the alternative Print
Report menu option (described in the previous section). To ensure that the generated Word
report will have the required content check the settings in the Configure Report dialog.
Typically, a report may contain:
• Table of contents (i.e. created by Word, not by PanSystem).

• Cover Page with remarks, header and footer options (i.e. text, date, page numbers).
• Input Data and plots, including:
• Dataprep Gauge Data (TPR).
• Well and Reservoir (Analytical).
• Well and Reservoir (Numerical).
• Analysis (Data and plots).
• Deliverability Data and plots.
If users select No to the prompt, the report file is saved automatically to the specified folder (i.e.
without opening MS Word or being viewed).
20.8. Using Report Templates

20.8.1. Loading and Saving Template Settings
PanSystem comes complete with a variety of predefined Report Templates. Templates are used
to define a report style, allowing different users to produce standard reports, which all have the 20. 8. Using Report Templates
same layout and include the same data, for example in a project.
By default, PanSystem will load a template called QUICK.TPL which will include a limited subset of
the available data in the report. The advantage of this is that it will print quickly while still
containing much of the data.
634
Reporting
Figure : 20.8.1 - 1 Selecting a Template

To load other templates or save changes to a template, click the Load Template button on the
Configure Report dialog box (Figure 20.5.1 - 1, “Configure Report Dialog Box,” on page 632).
This brings up a File Open dialog box (Figure 20.8.1 - 1, “Selecting a Template“) from which
users can select other templates. The supplied templates are described in “Overview”, on page
78.
To load a template, click on the template name in the list, then OK (or double-click on the
template name).
After loading a template, users may wish to make changes as described above, using the Edit and
Edit Layout buttons. To save the new template, click on the Save Template button on the
Configure Report dialog box, type in a new name, and click OK. If users have been editing an
EPS-supplied template and have not altered the name, they will be asked to confirm if the
existing template is to be overwritten.
Any new template name will now appear in the list.
20.9. Creating a Text-Only Report

When users select the Print Report option in the Report section, or Print on the Configure
Report dialog box, they will be offered the choice of printing directly to the specified printer, or
of saving the textual components of the report (i.e. minus the graphics) to an ASCII file.
20. 9. Creating a Text-Only Report

In this case, a file, extension .RPT, will be written to the current reports subdirectory. From here,
it can be incorporated into a report document in a word processor.
20.9.1. Printing a Report to a File

Users can also save the entire report, including graphics, to a file. This is helpful if users want to
be able to reprint reports at a later stage and do not want to have to go through the process of
loading the data file and report template to recreate the report.
By printing to a file users can save all the necessary printer information for printing later. Two
file types can be created:
- encapsulated postscript, using a postscript printer driver
- HPGL/2, using an HP plotter or compatible printer driver.
635
Reporting
(In general, the postscript option produces better results.)
In order to print to a file users must first install a Windows printer driver of the appropriate type,
connected to FILE.
• Switch to Windows Program Manager and select the Control Panel. Double-click on the
Printers button. This will display a dialog box with a list of Installed Printers - the printer
drivers that users have already connected.
• Click Add and select the driver to be used from the list of available drivers. This can be the
same as one of the printers users already have connected to a port, or different, but should be
suitable for the printer that will eventually be used to print the report.
• Once the printer is in the list of Installed Printers, click on Connect and select FILE: from
the Ports list. Click on OK and then Close to take users back to Control Panel, which can
then be closed. (This might be done during the installation of the driver under Windows 95/
NT).
• Go back to PanSystem and select the File, Print Setup option. Users will notice that a new
printer has been added to the list, labelled as being "on FILE".
Figure : 20.9.1 - 1 Postscript printer driver connected to FILE

Select this printer and click OK. In the Figure, an HP Laserjet 4/4M PS is connected for normal
20. 9. 1. Printing a Report to a File

printing use, and has also been connected to FILE. The FILE connection has been selected.
• When users next print a report they will be prompted for a file name for the report:
The report will be written to the current report directory, unless users include a different path
name. If a series of reports is being generated, be sure to give them different names or they will
be overwritten.
636
Reporting
The file extension is optional. RPT should be avoided, to prevent confusion with the text-only
files described in the next section. PS is recommended for postscript files and HP for HPGL/2
files.
These reports can then be printed by using the MS-DOS Copy, Type or Print commands. For
instance, to print a postscript file saved as MYREP.PS to a postscript printer connected to the
LPT3 port:
TYPE MYREP.PS > LPT3

or COPY MYREP.PS LPT3
or PRINT MYREP.PS
The Print command will spool the printing, allowing users to do something else while waiting
for the report(s) to be printed. Refer to the MS-DOS User Guide for more information on these
commands.
20. 9. 1. Printing a Report to a File
637
Test Design
Chapter 21- Test Design

In this example, users will learn how to set up PanSystem to design a welltest and interference
test.
In normal Analysis mode, users start with measured pressure and rate data, and some known
reservoir parameters (h, φ, etc.). Users analyze this data to obtain the unknown reservoir
parameters (k, S, etc.). In contrast, in Test Design mode using the Advanced Simulation facility,
users start with a complete set of reservoir parameters and, with a specified surface flowrate
sequence for the test, a pressure response is generated.
Users can then examine this generated response to determine if the test would succeed in meeting
its design objectives, using all the available analysis techniques.
At the end of this example, the use of Advanced Simulation will be demonstrated for another
purpose - history matching to measured test data. This is useful in multi-well and/or multi-layer
situations, which cannot be handled by the Quick Match facility.
21.0.1. Overview of Test Design Work Flow

To design a well test in PanSystem, users need to set up the following information:
1. The well(s) description, including storage

2. The layer and fluid descriptions
3. The flowrates for the test
4. The Advanced Simulation controls
Advanced Simulation is described in the main part of this manual in two places. “Test Design”,
on page 149 in Dataprep covers the input of the time and surface flowrate schedule, and
“Advanced Simulation”, on page 470 covers the operation of Advanced Simulation. (There is
also a brief overview of Advanced Simulation in “Advanced Simulation”, on page 387.)
Once all the necessary data has been set up, the pressure response of each well in the system, and
the downhole rates from each layer, in each well, are calculated and stored. Users can then
proceed quickly to inspect the simulated test data and ensure that the test procedure being
modelled is capable of providing the required results (assuming the reservoir description is
correct).
21.1. Setting up the Test Design Parameters

Chapter 21 - Test Design
This example is a hypothetical test in which the objectives are:
• To measure permeability and skin factor.

• To determine what the welltest would look like if a) there were communication to a nearby
well, or b) if a fault seen on seismic maps were to be sealing. If the former, then what will the
signal strength be at the other well after a reasonable period of time? If the latter, then how
long should the test be run to determine how far away the fault is?
It has been decided to perform a single long flow period, followed by a shut-in.
638
Test Design
The following description assumes that the File New command has been used to re-set all
parameters to zero.
21.1.1. Entering the Wells

Go to Dataprep Well and Reservoir Description.
First, name and define the wells. Use the Add well... button in the Reservoir Description dialog
box to create the second well. In this example, for clarity, Well-1 and Well-2 have been re-named
"Flowing Well" and "Observation Well" respectively. Refer to the figure below for the relevant
section of the dialog box.
Simply type over each well name in the combo box.
Next, enter the parameters for the two wells. The ""Principal"" well ("Flowing Well" in this
case) is always at co-ordinates (0,0).
• Radius: 0.3 ft.

• Wellbore storage: 0.01 bbl/psi (estimated from wellbore volume and average fluid
compressibility, or experience of previous welltests).
• For the Observation Well, which is 2500 ft. away, enter:
• Co-ordinates: x = 2500, y = 0 (or any equivalent pair of co-ordinates that put the well 2500 ft
away).
• Inter-well distance for interference test analysis:2500 ft (this is not required for response
generation, but will be needed for interference test type-curve analysis).
Well radius and storage coefficient can be the same as for "Flowing Well".
21.1.2. Entering layer and fluid descriptions 21. 1. 1. Entering the Wells
Enter the following parameters under the Layer Parameters button (i.e. based on existing
knowledge of the reservoir):
• Thickness: 25ft
• Porosity: 0.20
• Pressure: 4000 psia
• Temperature: 200 deg. F
Total Compressibility will be entered directly into the Fluid Parameters dialog box (below).
Set the Model to "Radial Homogeneous" and the Model Parameters to:
639
Test Design
• Permeability: 250 mD.
• Skin Factor: 5 in the flowing well, 0 in the observation well.
Note: how the dialog box has room for two skin factors, since two wells have been defined.
Next, go to the Fluid Parameters dialog box and enter the following data (obtained from PVT
measurements, etc.):
• Bo: 1.30 bbls/STB

• Viscosity: 2.50 cp.
• Total Compressibility: 1.0E-5 psi-1.
Naturally, users could calculate these parameters from production data if available.
This sets up the well and reservoir model for the simulation. The first scenario is an interference
test, and therefore, no boundaries have been specified yet.
21.1.3. Entering Flowrates for the Test

Now go to Dataprep Gauge Data. The “Principal” Well ("Flowing Well") is the one which
PanSystem will use for the computation time-step definition, so this well data must be entered
first. Make sure that "Flowing Well" is selected in the Well to edit field in the Pressure and Rate
Data Preparation dialog box.
21. 1. 3. Entering Flowrates for the Test

Click Test Design. Enter the flowing and shut-in periods as shown in the figure below:
The flowing period runs from 0 to 400 hrs., the shut-in from 400 to 800 hrs. There will be 50
steps per period, logarithmically spaced with first step 0.001 hours (format 2 - See Section 6. 2.
6 “Test Design”, on page 149) The default name, "Test Design", will be kept for this data file.
OK, then enter 4000 psia for the initial wellbore pressure, (i.e. there is to be no under- or over-
balance at the start of the test).
640
Test Design
When users return to the main dialog box, a rate column called "Test Rate" will be listed. This is
the rate channel that will drive the simulation.
Now users need to enter flowrates for the "Observation well". Select this well in the Well to edit
field in the Pressure and Rate Data Preparation dialog box. Click Test Design again.
This time, PanSystem asks if the times of the “Principal” well are to be used. Answer no (the
default, and recommended, option).
Enter a name for the file (in this case, it has been called OBS WELL), and the rate channel users
are about to create (e.g. Test Rate 2), or leave the defaults. The default initial wellbore pressure
of 4000 psia is valid for this well. Next, type in the times and rates of the flow schedule for this
well, in the same manner as for the other well (i.e. the values at the rate changes).
In this test, the well will be shut-in for the duration of the test. In fact, users could leave the time
and rate data blank, since nothing will be happening. More correctly, enter a time of 800 hrs. and
leave the rate at zero. Users have no choice over the number of steps or format because these are
imposed by the “Principal” well.
When users return to the main dialog box, a rate column called "Test Rate 2" in file OBS WELL
21. 1. 4. The Advanced Simulation controls

will be listed (or whatever names were selected).
21.1.4. The Advanced Simulation controls

All the well and reservoir data are now entered. Users can now go to Simulate Advanced
Simulation... to start the computation of the pressure responses at the two wells.
In this case, users can start the simulation by selecting OK as soon as they get to the Advanced
Simulation Control dialog box, because the default settings are correct (there are no choices).
Refer to “Advanced Simulation Control”, on page 476 for an explanation of the different parts of
the screen.
Click OK to run the simulation over the 100 time-steps.
641
Test Design
21.2. Analysis of the Simulated Responses
After the simulation has run, the data can be analyzed using the diagnostic plots, etc., just like
any other gauge data.
21.2.1. Analysing the Simulated Data - Principal Well

In Dataprep Gauge Data, decide which well is to be examined first (the "Flowing Well" will be
selected in this case).
Figure : 21.2.1 - 1 Setting the dialog box for the flowing well.
Note: how PanSystem has given default names to the output columns of simulated pressure, total
sandface rate and layer sandface rates. (Users could have specified different names on the
21. 2. Analysis of the Simulated Responses

Advanced Simulation Control dialog box.) Since there is only one layer in this example, the two
rate columns will contain identical data.
Plot the data from here to see what it looks like.
Figure : 21.2.1 - 2 Simulated data for the flowing well
642
Test Design
For real gauge data, users would have to identify the rate change events to initialize the Rate
Change table before they could analyze the test. With Advanced Simulation, the table is
initialized automatically, so there is nothing to do here.
Users can proceed directly to Analysis.
To verify the first test objective (i.e. measuring permeability and skin factor in the flowing well),
select Analysis, Plot and pick either test period. The build-up would probably be used for this.
Users can now apply all the standard PanSystem analysis techniques. It is easy to verify that the
input parameters are reproducible on analysis plots. In a real situation, users would be interested
in ensuring that they had run the test long enough to get useful data beyond the wellbore storage
period, to check that the pressure drawdown was not excessive, to see the radius of investigation,
etc.
Next, the observation well response will be analyzed, in order to see if the second test objective
can be met (i.e. ascertaining if reservoir continuity can be measured).
21.2.2. Preparing the Simulated Data for Analysis
21. 2. 2. Preparing the Simulated Data for Analysis - Observation Well

- Observation Well
The drawdown portion of the observation well response can be analyzed using the interference
test type-curve. The build-up portion cannot be analyzed. Before analysis, the start and end of
this drawdown portion need to be marked, the pulsing well flowrate specified, and the program
set-up to be analyzed as an interference test.
Return to Dataprep Gauge Data. Change well in the Well to edit field to "Observation Well".
Note: that the simulated responses (pressure and sandface flowrate) are listed as new channels
under the file name SIMULATED. (Users could have specified different names on the Advanced
Simulation Control dialog box.)
Delete the simulated flowrates (they are near-zero and of no use for this purpose), so users are
left with the following:
In the Master data file/columns area (bottom right), make sure SIMULATED is selected as the data
file name. Sim P will be selected as the pressure column automatically as it is the only one
currently available:
643
Test Design
Plot the observation well pressure:
Figure : 21.2.2 - 1 Simulated data for the observation well

The rate change table is not automatically initialized for this well.

Use the Nearest tool to mark the rate changes. If the button is grayed-out, users have
forgotten to select SIMULATED Sim P in the previous step!
This time, however, type the flowrates of "Flowing Well" into the dialog box:
• click on the start of the test and enter 0 for the time (the first simulated point is at the first
time-step, not zero!) and zero for the rate (it started from shut-in condition).
• click with the Nearest tool at the end of the flowing period - users can see where the spacing
of the data suddenly closes up as the shut-in period at the flowing well starts. Enter 1000
STB/day for the rate. This is purely because, when analysing an interference test, PanSystem
requires the pulsing well rate, not the actual observation well rate (which is essentially zero)
to be entered for the well.
Enter 400 hrs. for the time if the spot has not been hit exactly - this will define the end of the
drawdown portion of the interference data suitable for analysis by type-curve. (Strictly speaking,
the flowing period ends at 400 hrs., although the observed interference response continues to
decline for some time after this before starting to rise.)
644
Test Design
The pressure value is not important for the flowing period analysis, but should be 3966.44 psia if
users picked the exact end of the flowing period.
• The build-up portion cannot be analyzed with the supplied type-curve, so it can be ignored.
Mark the end of the test with the Nearest tool if desired.
If users have Plot Rate Changes enabled in the Edit menu, they will now see the surface rate (of
the pulsing well) displayed as in the following figure.

Figure : 21.2.2 - 2 Observation well data with rate changes
Finally, and most importantly, users need to tell the system that this is an interference test.
Double-click the flowing test period in the top half of the ruler bar of the Data Edit plot,
and select Interference Test as the test period type.
If users do not do this (i.e. it is left as a Normal test), they will not be able to access the
interference test type-curve.
645
Test Design
Before leaving Dataprep, check the Rate Changes table, which lists the events that were selected
on the plot:
21.2.3. Analyzing the Simulated Data - Observation Well

Proceed to Analysis and plot the data. There is limited interpretation that can be done on
drawdown interference test data. The Type-Curve facility provides a single Ei type-curve for
analysing the constant rate drawdown response.
Select the flowing period interference response by clicking in the ruler bar. Now click the TC
button, and then M (match).
Move the type curve around - zoom in and rematching more closely if necessary. A good match
should be obtained (there will be some distortion at the beginning owing to the non-zero
wellbore storage), which again confirms the input parameters. In the figure below, the match has
been made to the pressure data (the derivative is ignored, or can be hidden via Edit Datasets:
21. 2. 3. Analyzing the Simulated Data - Observation Well

Figure : 21.2.3 - 1 Interference type-curve match for the flowing period
From the point of view of a interference test design, users can see that a signal of about 1 psi
should be observed after 50 hrs. if communication is perfect.
At this point users should consider how high the gauge resolution needs to be, and whether the
signal strength is adequate.
Much of the character of the matched curve is at delta pressures less than 0.1 psi. Depending on
the gauge characteristics, this work will probably confirm that reservoir continuity could be
verified by a shorter test, although users might decide to increase the production rate in "Flowing
Well".
Save the file!
646
Test Design
21.3. Changing the Test Design Model
In the second part of this example, the reservoir model is changed for the test design, to cover the
use of some other features of the Advanced Simulation facility.
One of the test objectives was to be to determine whether or not there was a sealing fault between
the wells. The previous analysis investigated the response if there was no sealing fault. Now, add
a sealing fault to the model, generate the response, and compare the results.
Assume that the fault is situated between the two wells, so the observation well should be made
inactive. The well descriptive data is retained (not deleted), ready for use again later, but the well
itself will be ignored in the ensuing calculations.
Select "Observation well" in the Reservoir Description dialog box, and click the Inactive radio
button:
Next, enter a sealing fault (no-flow boundary) at 1250 ft from the active well: click the Layer
boundaries button on the Reservoir Description dialog box, select Single fault, then click the
Boundary parameters button and enter the distance. Keep the default No-flow setting.
21. 3. Changing the Test Design Model

For Advanced Simulation purposes, users need to generate image wells to model the boundary
effects. Click the Calculate Image Wells button on the Layer Boundaries dialog box.
Check the image well coordinates by clicking the Edit image wells button. The default position
for a specified distance of 1250 ft is (0, −2500), placing the boundary south of the test well at
(0, 0), if "south" is considered to be towards the bottom of the screen. If users re-activated the
observation well, (which has been placed arbitrarily at position (2500, 0)), its response would
include the effect of this fault to the south, by means of a second image well at (2500, −2500).
If users want to respect a specific geographical positioning, (e.g. putting the boundary to the west
rather than the south), they can edit the image well coordinates (to (−2500, 0) in that case), or
leave things as they are and rotate the N−S axes relative to PanSystem’s x-y geometry.
647
Test Design
Users are now ready to simulate different response corresponding to a sealing fault between the
wells. Choose Simulate, Advanced Simulation again. The observation well is now grayed-out
and says inactive.
When users click OK to start the simulation, they will receive a warning message that there is a
duplicate column name in the “Principal” well data file. This is because PanSystem's default
names Sim P, etc. have already been used on the first run.
Users have the option to keep the same names and overwrite the existing simulated data with the
new values, but in this case they should be kept, so enter different names in the Simulated
Column Names dialog box when it appears, as shown below:
Perform the calculations, and these new columns will be created for "Flowing Well".
Save the file!
21.4. Analysing Multiple Test Design Scenarios

In Dataprep Gauge Data, users have multiple columns of pressure and rate data, distinguished
21. 4. Analysing Multiple Test Design Scenarios

by the names that were applied:
648
Test Design
To evaluate the sensitivity of the test response to the introduced fault, plot the two pressure
curves for "Flowing well";
and generate a difference column with the difference tool . This shows the response to be
strong, with a maximum of 36 psi differential between fault and no-fault responses.
In the bottom right area of the dialog box, change the "Master" Pressure column to the
response for the single fault scenario Sim P/fault (see above). Users should not omit this
step or they will be analyzing the no-fault case again!
Answer Yes to the prompt, and the rate change data will be re-set automatically to reflect the new
pressures - the flowing pressure at 400 hrs. and the final shut-in pressure). Check the Rate
Change table to make sure.
Now proceed to Analysis.
The Log-Log plot of the build-up shows that permeability and skin could still be determined, but
the fault could not be defined fully, as the double slope (i.e. the higher radial flow derivative line)
is not well developed.
21. 5. Changing the Design Test Sequence

The derivative upturn could be matched by trial and error with Quick Match (or automatically
with Auto Match) and a reasonable estimate of the boundary distance obtained but, if feasible, a
longer build-up should be performed.
Alternatively when the actual test is run, based on the observations from simulation of the first
scenario, an absence of any signal at the observation well after, say, 50 hrs. of flow could be
taken to indicate no (or poor) communication.
Save the file!
21.5. Changing the Design Test Sequence

Finally, to alter the flowrate schedule, for example to do a longer flow and shut-in in this case,
click the Test Design button again. Give the new test design a new name (LONG TEST here), and
type in the new flow period durations as before. This creates a new time, pressure, rate file within
the system.
649
Test Design
Alternatively, call it TEST DESIGN again, and it will overwrite the previous data set, including all the
simulated data.
This time, if users have chosen a new name, when they perform Advanced Simulation, there will
be a choice of "Principal" well flowrates to drive the calculation. Select the required rate
schedule by changing the Input Datafile Column Name field to LONG TEST: Test rate.
Note: that since a new data file (LONG TEST) is being used, the default column names to be
generated (Sim P, etc.) will not conflict with the same names in the file called TEST DESIGN. Users
can choose more pertinent names if desired.
Enter Analysis and see if the second attempt has resulted in fully developed single fault radial
flow.
21. 5. Changing the Design Test Sequence
650
References
Chapter 22- References

1. Dake, L.P: "Fundamentals of Reservoir Engineering", Elsevier, 1981.
2. Earlougher, R.C: "Advances in Well Test Analysis", SPE monograph series, Vol. 5,
1977.
3. Matthews, C.S. and Russell, D.G: "Pressure Build-Up and Flow Tests in Wells", SPE
monograph series Vol. 1, 1967.
4. Agarwal, R.G: "A New Method to Account for Producing Time Effects when
Drawdown Type Curves are Used to Analyse Pressure Build-Up and Other Test Data",
paper SPE 9289, presented at the 55th Annual Fall Meeting of the SPE, Dallas, Texas,
Sept. 21-24 1980.
5. Gringarten, A.C, Bourdet, D.P, Landel, P.A, and Kniazeff, V.J: "A Comparison
Between Different Skin and Wellbore Storage Type-Curves for Early-Time Transient
Analysis", paper SPE 8205, presented at the 54th Annual Fall Meeting of the SPE, Las
Vegas, Nevada, Sept. 23-26, 1979.
6. Earlougher, R.C, Jr. and Kersch, K.M: "Analysis of Short-Time Transient Test Data by
Type-Curve Matching", J. Pet. Tech. (July 1974) 793-800; Trans., AIME 257.
7. Agarwal, R.G, Al-Hussainy and Ramey, H.J: "An Investigation of Wellbore Storage
and Skin Effect in Unsteady Liquid Flow: I Analytical Treatment", Soc. Pet. Eng. J
(Sept. 1970) 279-290; Trans., AIME 249.
8. Ramey, H.J. and Cobb, W.M: "A General Pressure Build-Up Theory for a Well in a
Closed Drainage Area", J. Pet. Tech. (Dec. 1971) 1493-1505; Trans., AIME 251.
9. Van Everdingen, A.F. and Hurst, W: "The Application of the Laplace Transformation
to Flow Problems in Reservoirs", Trans., AIME (1949) 186, 305-324.
10. Cobb, W.M. and Smith, J.T: "An Investigation of Pressure Build-Up Tests in Bounded
Reservoirs", paper SPE 5133, presented at the 49th Annual Fall Meeting of the
SPE-AIME, Houston, Texas, Oct. 6-9 1974 (an abridged version appears in J. Pet.
Tech., Aug. 1975, 991-996; Trans., AIME 259
11. Bourdet, D, Whittle, T.M, Douglas A.A. and Pirard, Y.M: "A New Set of Type Curves
Simplifies Well Test Analysis". World Oil, (May 1983).
12. Stehfest, H: "Algorithm 368, Numerical Inversion of Laplace Transforms",
(Communications of the ACM), Vol. 13, No.1 (Jan., 1970), 47-49.
Chapter 22 - References
13.a. Meehan: "A Correlation for Water Compressibility", Pet. Eng., Nov 1980.
13.b. Numbere, Brigham and Standing: "Correlations for Physical Properties of Petroleum
Reservoir Brines", Pet. Research Inst., Stanford Univ., Nov 1977.
13.c. "Secondary Oil Recovery in the U.S.", API (1950) p.127 - Van Wingen.
14. Ramey, H.J: "Practical Use of Modern Well Test Analysis", paper SPE 5878 presented
at the 46th Annual California Regional Meeting of the SPE-AIME, April 8-9, 1976.
15. Stewart, G, Wittman, M.J, and Meunier, D, "Afterflow Measurement and
Deconvolution in Well Test Analysis", paper SPE 12174, presented at the 58th Annual
Fall Meeting of the SPE-AIME, San Francisco, CA, Oct. 5-8 1983.
651
References
16. Hall, H.N: "Compressibility of Reservoir Rocks", Trans. AIME, 231.
17. Gold, D.K., McCain, W.D. Jr., and Jennings, J.W: "An Improved Method for the
Determination of the Reservoir-Gas Specific Gravity for Retrograde Gases",
J.Pet.Tech. (July, 1989), 747-752; and paper SPE 17310 Midland, Texas, (March
1988).
18. Raghavan, R: "Well Test Analysis for Multiphase Flow", paper SPE 14098, Beijing,
(March 1986).
19. Slider, H.C: "A Simplified Method of Pressure Build-Up Analysis for a Stabilised
Well", J. Pet. Tech. (Sept, 1971), 1155-1160; Trans. AIME 251.
20. Lee, J.W: "Welltesting", SPE of AIME publication, 1982.
21. "Theory and Practice of the Testing of Gas Wells", Third Edition 1975, or Fourth
Edition 1979. Energy Resources Conservation Board, Calgary, Alberta, Canada.
22. Standing, M.B: "Volumetric and Phase Behaviour of Oil Field Hydrocarbon Systems",
SPE 1977.
23. Cinco-Ley, H, and Samaniego, V.F: "Transient Pressure Analysis for Fractured Wells",
J.Pet.Tech. (Sept, 1981), 1749-1766. Also SPE 7490 (Houston 1978).
24. Lee, W.J, and Holditch, S.A: "Fracture Evaluation With Pressure Transient Testing in
Low-Permeability Gas Reservoirs", J. Pet. Tech. (Sept, 1981), 1776-1792. Also SPE
9975 or 7929/7930 (Denver 1979).
25. Gringarten, A.C, Ramey, H.J Jr, Raghaven, R.J.: "Unsteady State Pressure
Distributions Created by a Well With a Single Infinite-Conductivity Vertical Fracture",
J. Pet. Tech. (Aug, 1972), 347-360. Also Trans. AIME 257 and SPE 4051 (San
Antonio, 1972).
26. Sheng-Tai Lee and Brockenbrough, J: "A New Analytic Solution for Finite
Conductivity Vertical Fractures With Real Time and Laplace Space Parameter
Estimation", paper SPE 12013, presented at the 58th Annual Tech. Conf. and Exhib,
San Fransisco, CA, Oct. 5-8, 1983.
27. Warren, J.E, and Root, P.J, "The Behaviour of Naturally Fractured Reservoirs", SPE
Journal, Sept. 1963.
28. Bourdet, D. and Gringarten, A.C, "Determination of Fissure Volume and Block Size in
Fractured Reservoirs by Type-Curve Analysis". Paper SPE 9293 presented at SPE Fall
Meeting, Sept. 1980 (Dallas).
29. Bourdet, D. et al, "Interpreting Well Tests in Fractured Reservoirs", World Oil, October
1983.
30. Clark, D.G, and Van Golf-Racht, T.D, "Pressure-Derivative Approach to Transient Test
Analysis: A High-Permeability North Sea Reservoir Example", SPE Journal,
November 1985.
31. Wong, D.W, et al: "Pressure Transient Analysis in Finite Linear Reservoirs Using
Derivative and Conventional Techniques: Field Examples", paper SPE 15421 presented
at SPE Fall Meeting, 1986 (New Orleans).
652
References
32. Jones, L.G, Blount, E.M, and Glaze, C.E, "Use of Short Term Multiple Rate Flow Tests
to Predict Performance of Wells Having Turbulence", paper SPE 6133 presented at
SPE Fall Meeting, 1976.
33. Cinco-Ley, H. and Samaniego, V.F, "Pressure Transient Analysis for Naturally
Fractured Reservoirs", paper SPE 11026 presented at SPE Fall Meeting 1982 (New
Orleans).
34. Bourdet, D, Ayoub, J.A, and Pirard, Y.M, "Use of Pressure Derivative in Well Test
Interpretation", paper SPE 12777 presented at SPE California Regional Meeting, April
1984 (Long Beach).
35. Sutton, R.P, and Farshad, F.F, "Evaluation of Empirically Derived PVT Properties for
Gulf of Mexico Crude Oils", paper SPE 13172 presented at SPE Fall Meeting, Houston,
Sept. 1984.
36. Schmidt, G, and Wenzel, H, "A Modified Van Der Waal Type Equation of State",
Chem. Eng. Sci. Vol 35 (1980) pp1503 - 1512.
37. Firoozabadi, "Reservoir Fluid Phase Behaviour and Volumetric Predictions with
Equations of State", JPT, April 1988.
38. McKinley, R.M, "Wellbore Transmissibility from Afterflow-Dominated Pressure
Buildup Data", JPT, July 1971.
39. Perrine, R.L, "Analysis of Pressure Buildup Curves", Drill. and Prod. Prac, API (1956)
482-509. Also Ref.: 2, Section 2.11.
40. Ramey, Henry J, Jr, Agarwal, Ram G, and Martin, Ian, "Analysis of Slug Test or DST
Flow Period Data", J. Cdn. Pet. Tech. (July-Sept. 1975) 37-42.
41. Agarwal, R.G., "Real Gas Pseudo-Time - A New Function for Pressure Buildup
Analysis of MHF Gas Wells", paper SPE 8279 presented at Las Vegas, Sept. 1979.
42. Yaxley, L.M, "New Stabilized Inflow Equations for Rectangular and Wedge-Shaped
Drainage Systems including Horizontal Wells", paper SPE 17082.
43. Stewart, G, and Ascharsobbi, F, "Welltest Interpretation for Naturally Fractured
Reservoirs", SPE 18173 presented in Houston, Oct. 1988.
44. Wong, D.W, Harrington, A.G, and Cinco-Ley, H: "Application of the Pressure-
Derivative Function in the Pressure Transient Testing of Fractured Wells", SPEFE Oct
1986; paper SPE 13056 presented Houston, Sept 1984.
45. Meunier, D., Kabir, C.S., and Wittman, M.J., "Gas Well Test Analysis: The Use of
Normalised Pressure and Time Functions," paper SPE 13082 presented in Houston,
1984.
46. Ehlig-Economides, C., Ayoub, J.A., "Vertical Interference Testing Across a Low-
Permeability Zone", paper SPE 13251 presented in Houston, Sept 1984; also SPEFE
Oct 1986, pp 497-510.
47. Ozkan, E., Raghavan, R., and Joshi, S.D., "Horizontal Well Pressure Analysis", paper
SPE 16378 presented in Ventura, April 1987 (+ supplement SPE 20271); also SPEFE
Dec 1989, pp 567-575.
48. Bourdet, D., "Pressure Behaviour of Layered Reservoirs with Crossflow", paper SPE
13628 presented in Bakersfield, March 1985.
653
References
49. Fair, W.B., "Pressure Buildup Analysis With Wellbore Phase Redistribution", paper
SPE 8206 presented in Las Vegas, Sept 1979; also SPEJ April 1981, pp 259-269.
50. Hegeman, P.S., Halford, D.L. and Joseph, J.A., "Well Test Analysis With Changing
Wellbore Storage", paper SPE 21829 presented in Denver, April 1991.
51. Saleh, A.M. and Stewart, G.S., "Interpretation of Gas Condensate Well Tests With
Field Examples", paper SPE 24719 presented in Washington, Oct. 1992.
52. Kui-Fu Du and Stewart, G.S., "Transient Pressure Response of Horizontal Wells in
Layered and Naturally Fractured Reservoirs with Dual Porosity Behaviour", paper SPE
24682 presented in Washington, Oct. 1992.
53. Odeh, A.S., "Flow Test Analysis for a Well with Radial Discontinuity", JPT, Feb 1968.
54. Yeh and Agarwal, "Pressure Transient Analysis of Injection Wells in Reservoirs with
Multiple Fluid Banks", paper SPE 19775, San Antonio, Oct 1989.
55. Bunch, D. S., Gay, D. M. and Welsch R. E. 1993. Algorithm 717. “Subroutines for
maximum likelihood and quasi-likelihood estimation of parameters in non-linear
regression models”. ACM Trans. Math. Softw., 19(1), 109-130.
56. Dennis, J. E., Gay, D. M., and Welsch R. E. 1981b. ALGORITHM 573 NL2SOL. “An
adaptive non-linear least-squares algorithm [E4]”. ACM Trans. Math. Softw., 7(3), 369-
383.
57. Marquardt, D.W., 1963, J. Soc. Ind. Appl. Math., Vol 11, 431-441.
58. Corey, A.T. “The Interrelation Between Gas and Oil Relative Permeabilities”. Prod.
Mon. 19, 38, 1954.
59. Furnival, S.R. and Baillie, J.M “Successful Prediction of Condensate Wellbore
Behaviour Using an EoS Generated From Black Oil Data”. Offshore European
Conference, Aberdeen, Sept. 1993: Paper SPE 26683.
60. Cinco-Ley, H and Samaniego,V.F, “Transient Pressure Analysis: Finite Conductivity
Fracture Case Versus Damaged Fracture Case”, paper SPE 10179 presented at San
Antonio, October 1981.
61. Brons, F. and Marting, V.E., “The Effect of Restricted Fluid Entry on Well
Productivity”, JPT, Feb 1961 (172-174).
62. Goode, P.A. and Kuchuk, F.J., “Inflow Performance of Horizontal Wells”, paper SPE
18300, or SPERE, Aug 91.
63. Jones, J.R. and Raghavan R., “Interpretation of Flowing Well Responses in Gas-
Condensate Wells”, SPEFE, Sep 1988 (p578).

64. Raghavan, R., Wei Chun Chu and Jones, J.R., “Practical Considerations in the Analysis
of Gas-Condensate Well Tests”, SPERE, June 1999 (p288).
65. Hemala, M.L., “Tidal Effects in Petroleum Well Testing”, SPE 14607, presented
Singapore 1986.
66. Reynolds, A.C., Bratvold, R.B. and Ding, W, “Semilog Analysis of Gas Well
Drawdown and Buildup Data”, SPEFE, Dec 1987 (p657) and SPE 13664 (1985).
654
References
67. Rapach, J.M., Jefferies, R., Guedroudj, A.H., Westaway, P.J., “Practical Transient
Multilayer Test Design, Implementation and Analysis of Gas Wells in the North Sea
Southern Basin”, paper SPE 20534 (New Orleans Sept 1990).
68. Kabir, C.S., “Seeking Synergy Between Drawdown and Buildup Analyses”, SPEFE,
June 1997 (p125) and paper SPE 30551 (Dallas, Oct 1995).
69. Salana, M.M. and Venkatesh,V.S.,“Evaluation of API RP14E Erosional Velocity
Limitations for Offshore Gas Wells”, OTC4485 (Houston, May 1983).
70. Turner, R.G., “Analysis and Prediction of Minimum Flow Rate for the Continuous
Removal of Liquids from Gas Wells”, JPT, Nov. 1969.
71. Coleman, S.B., Clay, H.B., McCurdy, D.G. and Norris III, H.L., “A New Look at
Predicting Gas-Well Load-Up”, JPT, March 1991.
72. Kuchuk, F.J., Goode, P.A. and Wilkinson,D.J., “Pressure Transient Behavior of
Horizontal Wells With and Without Aquifer Support”, SPEFE March 1991, paper SPE
17413 (Long Beach, March 1988).
73. Gringarten, A.C. and Ramey, H.J., “The Use of Source and Green’s Functions in
Solving Unsteady-Flow Problems in Reservoirs”, SPEJ October 1973, paper SPE 3818.
74. Shaosong Xu and Lee, W.J., “Two-Phase Well Test Analysis of Gas Condensate
Reservoirs”, paper SPE 56483 (Houston, October 1999).
75. Larsen, L., “A Simple Approach to Pressure Distributions in Geometric Shapes By
Images”, paper SPE 10088 (San Antonio, October 1981).
655
Index
Alphabetic Index: Append
Data files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
A Auto Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 381
Confidence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Acknowledgements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Add Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196 Match goodness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
Match Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Add Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 Point Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Additional information Regression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Report statistical info . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Adv Sim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389, 479 Select points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
PanFlow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Start values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Advanced Simulation Variable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Additional information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389, 479 Auto-load, file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Column names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389 Automatic Flow Period Generation button . . . . 173
Control dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Auto-save, file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Creating type-curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 487
Data preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Average layer pressure
Flowrate input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 From Quick Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Flowrates for history matching . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 MBH method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Flowrates for test design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542
Fluid parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Functional overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470 AveragePressure&CumulativeProductionvTimebutton
History matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387, 473 464
Layer data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Average Reservoir Pressure & BHFP v Time button
Observation point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479
Observation points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 390, 394 464
Pressure overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 Axes, plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Principal Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
Simulated response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 B
Solution model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Speed option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389, 478 B
Test Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473 Darcy flow coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Test design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
Well data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 Bg (Gas FVF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225, 236
Agarwal plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Bilinear flow
Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555
Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Plot button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
2-cell compartmentalised model . . . . . . . . . . 322 recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Button guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Time to end of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Confirm, Cnf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36 Bin/delete button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Functional overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315 Block perm/height ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Menu options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316
Model option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318 Bo (oil FVF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Multiple Interpretations of Same Data . . . . . . 319 Boundary Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Non-Darcy skin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Results, report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Boundary models
Select test period(s) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Advanced Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Selecting the data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 In Adv Sim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472
Toolbar options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332 In Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Wellbore storage model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 in Dataprep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214, 216
Worked example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 600 in PanMesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275, 287
ANALYSIS, report template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Quick Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
br, report template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Index
AOF
Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453, 456, 457 Browser, for file import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
656
Index
Bubble Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 COMPLETE, report template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Bugs, reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 Completion data, PanMesh input . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Bw (Water FVF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Composite layer
Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
C Response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486
Calculate Composite reservoir
Multiphase pseudo-pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187 linear, two-zone with leaky fault . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 radial, multi-zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
radial, two-zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
C-and-n Computer Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Deliverability/Injectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Concave angles
Flowrate stabilization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 PanMesh input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Method Condensate
Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548
CGR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Extended flowing period . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Flow-after-flow test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355 Multiphase pseudo-pressure method . . . . . . . 246
Isochronal test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Worked example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 625 Single phase method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Production forecasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461, 466 Vaporising volume ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Simplified method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Conductivity
C-and-n method, equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 across a fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
fracture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208, 210
Cartesian plot button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 vertical, between layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Cf (Rock Compressibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Confidence intervals
Cg (Gas Compressibility) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225, 236 Regression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386
Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
Check pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226, 236
Confidence levels
Check temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226, 236 Auto Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Classic w/bore storage model . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191 Configure
Clear lines, data edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Graphs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Closed system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
Cnf button Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Confirm
Cnf button
Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Dataprep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Tool
Co (Oil Compressibility) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Colour contours, PanMesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 Dataprep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Column Contacts
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Names, simulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389, 393 Control point, PanMesh input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275
Numbers
File import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 Convolution, varying rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Commands Co-ordinates, view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Commingled layer
Create . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Index
depletion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222
Compartmentalised boundary model . . . . . . . . 217
657
Index
Copy Data
And Paste Block Data + Time . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 Correcting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
And Paste target file/columns . . . . . . . . . . . . 156 Import Non-spreadsheet style . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
And Resample Column of data . . . . . . . . . . . 166 Import Spreadsheet style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Plot, to Clipboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Initialise . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Resample and Create Column . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Logarithmic reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195 PAS format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Copy, data edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Reduction, Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589
Corey coefficients . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199 Resampling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Correcting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 Types, definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Correction for rate-dependency . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Data Edit
Correlations Clear lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Coefficients, regression . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 386 Data Edit Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Condensate properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244 In report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Gas properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Ruler bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
Oil Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Cover Page Data File
EUB report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 For analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Create Data Preparation
commingled layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35
composite layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220
Dataprep
Create Rate (Q) button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Button guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39
Ct (Total Compressibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225, 236 Confirm, Cnf . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Flow chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Curve Match Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Curve-fitting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Dataset
Customer-defined models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Cw (Water Compressibility) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Date formats, import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133, 134
Date, on time axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
D Datum correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
D Default fonts, save/restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122
Rate-dep’t skin coeff . . . . . . 204, 209, 348, 452
Rate-dependent skin coefficient . . . . . . . . . . 299 Define line dialog box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Damage zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Definitions
Damage zone, PanMesh reservoir image . . . . 404 Data types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
Delete
Damaged region, PanMesh input . . . . . . . . . . 298
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Data Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Gauge data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Line, data edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Tool (Dataprep) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Undo last . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Index
Delete Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195

DELIVER, report template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
658
Index
Deliverability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Dual-Permeability model
Button guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Equations, gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 548 Dual-Porosity
From production test data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 543
From transient data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445, 451 Model
J, Productivity index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452, 453
Toolbar options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448, 452, 456 Model block type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
Worked example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 623 No-flow / const pressure boundary . . . . . . . . . 213
Two no-flow boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212
Deliverability Results, report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Dual-Porosity Model
Deliverability/Injectivity Pseudo-Steady-State . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
C-and-n method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 454 Transient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
From production test data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Duplicate column names
From transient data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
Gas and condensate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Adv Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481, 648
LIT method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 PanMesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 416
Multi IPR’s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446
Oil/Water system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445 E
Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456, 457 E/S Lin button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
Derivative E/S Log button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457
elapsed time plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
end effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Edit
Selection button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372 Axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Show/hide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370, 372 Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346, 372 Datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Description box, on/off . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Delete marker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Description box, plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Gauge data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Deselection of points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Mark Points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Deviation factor, gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235 Marker text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Dietz shape factor Multiphase pseudo-pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186
Node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
From boundary geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Overlay pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
From the Cartesian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Plot rate changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Difference Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
show marker text . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
Different skins and storage Title . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67
Model Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . 192, 205, 320 View co-ordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Quick Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Test Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Edit Layout, report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86
Discontintinuity Radial Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Edit Menu Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Diskette data import Effective permeability
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 576 definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501, 502, 543
DLL link, Customer-defined models . . . . . . . . . 122 Effective producing time Tp(eff) . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Drainage area Elevation view, reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
From boundary geometry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
From the Cartesian . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
End effect
Drawing area, PanMesh input . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
derivative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Drift smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 Enhancements, requesting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Index
Dual-Permeability Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
659
Index
EPS F
Contacts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
F
Equation of state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237 Darcy flow coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Equations Non-Darcy flow coeff . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 536 F1 key
Log-log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 43
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Radial flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492 Fair’s w/bore storage model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Equivalent Fall-off test
Drawdown time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Rate data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349, 351, 352 Test design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Erosional limit, maximum flowrate . . . . . . . . . . 564 Fault
Transmissibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Error message
Duplicate column names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 Fault model
No rate column for well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 General intersecting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
No rate data for well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 476 Partially sealing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Test period not valid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Fc
Essis-Thomas plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329 Conductivity of partially sealing fault . . . . . . . . 256
Estimated test duration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 FCD, Dimensionless fracture conductivity . . . . 210
Exact Point Features in PanSystem . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Rate Change Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Field-wide trend
Examples, PanMesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Production forecasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
horizontal well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440 File
partial completion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 Exit Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
two-layered model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
well near a pinch-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Gauge data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Examples, PanSystem Graphics Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Gauge data preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 575 Import to memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Interference Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638 Import V1.80 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Manual data entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 Importing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Production Forecasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627 In PanSystem 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Report writing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629 Menu Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Test Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638 New . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Page Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Experience Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Print Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Export Requirements, Gauge data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Production forecasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 57
TC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Save As . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Export to Word Document Save As V2.2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Structures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Ext Lin button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Text only report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Ext Log button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Tide table data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Word Document Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Extended drawdown analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Fit to Page, plot size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Extended flowing period Fixed column width, import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
C-and-n method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356, 455
LIT method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Flow arrows
Extrapolated pressure Toolbar button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413, 418
Index
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Flow efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500, 549
660
Index
Flow Model Fracture
Create own . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Customer-defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
For horizontal wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
For vertical wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 Fractured well models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Horizontal wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
User supplied . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Free Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207, 212
Vertical wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321 Full analysis
Flow Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Production forecasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
Automatically generate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Full Page, plot size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Define nearest point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 128 Function data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
exact point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
from intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 G
Flow Rate & Cumulative Production v Time button Gas
463 Equations
Flow Rate Advisor Pseudo-pressure form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563 Multiphase pseudo-pressure method . . . . . . . 241
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Flow Rate v Time button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Worked example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 612
Flow regimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Define . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Single Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 234
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Specific gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 Gas Cap/Aquifer Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
To fit line through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
Flow-after-flow test Gas Cap/Aquifer model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546 GAS file (V1.80) import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Worked example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 611 Gas single phase
Flowmeter calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Import of P/Viscosity/Z tables . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Flowrate calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Gauge characteristics
Fluid for Adv Sim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
for Rinv . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
Contacts in reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 252
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Gauge Data
Parameters, worked example . . . . . . . . . . . . 594 Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Properties in PanMesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 295 Worked example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 595
Multiphase Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 File requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Fonts Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Preparation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125, 128
Default settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122 Quality control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169, 581
Footer, report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Shifting & correcting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168, 580
Force a Parameter button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371 Gauge Details
Forecast Export button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465 Advanced Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389, 479
Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Format, report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Gauge, import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135, 137
Formation General intersecting fault model . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Glossary
Four-point test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350, 355, 357
Flow models (vertical well) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Model parameters (horizontal well) . . . . . . . . 213
Fourth-root plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Model parameters (vertical well) . . . . . . . . . . 209
Index
FR button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Goodness of match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 385
661
Index
Graph wiindow, PanMesh Import
Pop-up menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 Append data files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Graph window, PanMesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406 Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Graphics Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Gas properties table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Gauge Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Graphics files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Multiphase pseudo-pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Graphs, Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 Non spreadsheet style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Non-spreadsheet style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
H P/Viscosity/Z tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
PAS file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 PIC file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240
Spreadsheet style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
Header, data file import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 To memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Header, report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Import V1.80 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Help Impurities, Gas Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
F1 key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 43 Infinitely acting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
From EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Initial pressure
On-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 498
PanWizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Quick match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Tool tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 44 Regression on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339, 387
User Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Wizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44 Initialise data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
History matching Injection wells
Adv Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387, 473 Rate data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
DST, worked example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 620 Test design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Flowrates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 Injectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 From transient data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 445
Quick Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 J, Injectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
To Pi, Worked example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
Inorganics
Homogeneous
Correction for correlations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
No-flow / const pressure boundary . . . . . . . . 213
Two no-flow boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Input Data
Horizontal cut, PanMesh reservoir image . . . . 403 Col Name, Adv Sim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 477
Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Horizontal well INPUT, report template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Equations
Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 555 Insert lines, data edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 518 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22, 23
Flow models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Hardware Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189, 214 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Horizontal well, PanMesh input . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Interference test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Horner plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Inter-well distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182, 190
Test type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
I using PanMesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411, 427
worked example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Image Wells Interfering wells, Test Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 Internal boundary, PanMesh input . . . . . . . . . . 269
delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Internet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Interporosity flow coefficient
Index
equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504, 528

log-log plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
662
Index
Intersecting faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216 Layer
Intersecting lines Average pressure Pavg . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
Rate Change Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Intersection time, calculations . . . . . 501, 542, 543 Active, inactive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22 Add . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 196
Change name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
IPR Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448, 452, 456 Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Oil, calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197
Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
IPR button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456 Worked example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 593
Isochronal test Pavg, average pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
J Layers, PanMesh input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
J, Productivity Index Leak-off test
from test point data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 510 storage coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
from transient test data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 Leaky fault boundary model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
J, Productivity/Injectivity Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
Legend, plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Jones-Blount-Glaze method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Limits, Auto Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
K Line
Average slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
k, Radial permeability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209, 213 Best fit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Kappa, flow capacity ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Define type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Keyboard Floating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 General tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
kz, Vertical permeability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209, 213 Half slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Known slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
L Log-log plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362, 366
L button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Negative half slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Other plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Lambda Parallel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
from log-log plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Quarter slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Lambda, interporosity flow coefficient Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
210 Slope and intercept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Straight, analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Landscape, plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 64 Thickness, plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Types button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Unit slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Zero slope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Linear composite reservoir model . . . . . . . . . . 255
Linear flow
Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 513, 554
Plot button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Linear Flow Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Liquid loadup, minimum flowrate . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Index
663
Index
LIT Master Data File
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350 Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Deliverability/Injectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Match
Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 550 Auto . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Production forecasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461, 465 Button, type-curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Worked example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 624 Quality, Auto Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
LIT Lin button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Quick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
LIT Log button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Material balance correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Lock scales, plot axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Material Properties, PanMesh input . . . . . . . . . 294
Logarithmic data reduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Fluid type and properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
sub-layers and regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Log-log Matrix block perm/height ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . 504
Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 492
Plot MBH, avg res pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341, 542
Derivative smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 McKinley type-curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368, 371
Derivatives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
MDH plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Floating line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Flow regimes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Mean tide height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Half slope line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Mechanical skin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Line fitting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Memory
Negative half slope line . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Importing file to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Quarter slope line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Unit slope line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 Menu Bar, PanMesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Zero slope line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Review . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Plot button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 422
Plot lines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423
Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 421
Custom, report header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Mesh Edit
EPS, report header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Anisotropy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
LR button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Polygons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Pop-up menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
M Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
refinement options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405, 422
Manual, on-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Wellbore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Map import for PanMesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Minimise end effect
Margins, plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Mobility Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
Maritime tide table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
File format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
Mark Points, plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76
Master
Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Columns . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 128
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75, 483
Pressure Column
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
Pressure Column definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Rate Column
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Index
Rate Column definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
664
Index
Model Node, reservoir outline
Customer creating more . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
General intersecting faults . . . . . . . . . . . 259 move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Partially sealing fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 tabular edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
Pinch-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Noise
Radial composite multiple regions . . . . . . 255 pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Slanted well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254 Non Spreadsheet Style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Three-layer homogeneous reservoir . . . . 257 Non-Darcy skin
Flow, customer-defined . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253 Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328, 347
Flow, horizontal wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212 Correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329
Flow, vertical wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 in PanMesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Option, Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203 Normal test type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Different skins and storage . . . 192, 205, 320 Normalised flowrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Selection, PanWizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Worked example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Modified isochronal test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352, 354 Number of Points Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Multi-layer response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 Numerical Input
Multiphase Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Equations Numerical Simulation
Gas & condensate flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . 542 Data input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Oil Flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 PanMesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Perrine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501 Numerical simulation, PanMesh . . . . . . . . . . . . 395
Flow rate data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 From existing TCX file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426
Fluid Type options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 New run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Perrine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
Method (oil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Pseudo-pressure O
Calculate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 571 Observation point
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186 Advanced Simulation . . . . . . . . . . 390, 394, 479
File structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 570 PanMesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411, 427
Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Office
in PanMesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 297 Americas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185 China . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Far East . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Method (Condensate) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Method (Gas) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 241 Mexico . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Method (Oil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Venezuala . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
Multiple radial composite model . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Oil
Multiphase Perrine fluid type . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
N Multiphase pseudo-pressure method . . . . . . . 227
Properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224
Names, change data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Single Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 223
Nearest Point Specific gravity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Rate Change Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 OIL file (V1.80) import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
New, File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 Omega
Next stage button, type-curves . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 from log-log plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Omega, storativity ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210
Node
Edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Open intervals, PanMesh input . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Index
Open, File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54
665
Index
Output PanWizard
Col Names, Adv Sim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 As help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
Data Name, Adv Sim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Equations - gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 563
Overlay Equations - oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 Model selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75
Parallel faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
P Parameters
P&P v T Boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215
Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
Production forecasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
P&V v Time Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Production forecasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464 Parametric
P* Rel perms format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
From radial flow line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342 Partial Penetration Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Page Partially sealing fault model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
header/footer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
margins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 PAS file
Numbers, report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 AOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 AOF example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
Paging directory, configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 hints on preparing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103, 110
TRG . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 91
PAN system file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 TRG example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
Pan, PanMesh reservoir image . . . . . . . . . . . . 401 Paste, data edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141
PanFlow, rate simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Patching Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165, 166, 167
Additional information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Pavg
Column names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 Average layer pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Speed option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Start pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393 PAX system file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
PanMesh Pb (Bubble Point) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
From existing TCX file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Pb/Rs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
New run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 396
Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414 PC Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
HST history file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 414, 424 Pcalc, from radial flow line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
observation point response . . . . . . . . . . 427
TCX response file . . . . . . . . . 409, 415, 426 Pd button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
wellbore response . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 426 Perforation
Replay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424 Height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Top Dist . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
PanMesh input Performance
batch control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Speeding up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
run mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Perrine method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
run mode, batch run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300 Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 501
run mode, single-run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 300
setting-up a batch run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 Pi
PanMesh, numerical simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 History matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Worked example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 621
PANSYS30.INI Quick Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Registry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24 Reference back to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
PanSystem Regression on . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339, 387
Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 PIC file
Index
Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 572
666
Index
Pick P0, pressure overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Pressure
Pinch-out model Extrapolation option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325, 505
Gas welltest analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
analytical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482
numerical simulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Transformation
PanMesh example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 428 Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Plot Pressure-squared . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Against elapsed time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Pseudo-pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
AOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453, 456, 457
As graphics file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 Pressure at a point, PanMesh . . . . . . . . . 411, 427
Bilinear flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Pressure contours, PanMesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Datasets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Deliverability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452, 453 Pressure visualisation, PanMesh . . . . . . . . . . . 409
Deliverability/Injectivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456, 457 Pressure-squared
Diagnostic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338
Edit rate changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 For gas welltest analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328
Excel Previous stage button, type-curves . . . . . . . . . 370
Relative permeability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Principal Well
Fourth-root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Adv Sim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471
IPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Line results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Linear flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Print
Line-fitting tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Log-log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Menu option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 To file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Overlay pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75 Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 64
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Radial flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Print PanMesh
Rate Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 Toolbar button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Raw data PRO file (V1.80) import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579
Production Forcasting button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
Semi-log . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Production forecasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
Speeding up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129 C-and-n method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461, 466
Spherical flow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344 Equations
Square root . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343 Gas & Condensate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 553
Test Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316 Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 511
Test overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 338 Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 465
Field-wide trend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Plot Annotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Full analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461
Plot View co-ordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 Full analysis method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 462
LIT method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 461, 465
Point Selection P&P v T . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Adjust Weighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361 P&V v Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 464
Auto Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 Q&V v Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 QvT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Delete All . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 Toolbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463
Global . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359 VFP table import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 460
Windowed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 360 worked example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 627
Point selection Pseudo-pressure
Auto Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 Gas welltest analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Porosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Multiphase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185, 571
Plot for gas and condensate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188
Portrait, plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61, 64 Real gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 537
Preface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 Pseudo-radial skin factor equation . . . . . . . . . . 509
Index
Preparing gauge data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125
667
Index
Pseudo-steady state flow Rate
Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Pseudo-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327, 536 Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 128
Q exact point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
from intersection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Q&V v Time Import rate history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Production forecasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 nearest point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Quick Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29, 375 Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Different skins and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377 Report listing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
Hide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
multiple traces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 380 Transfer a table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
Pi . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Show . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 Column
Varying rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
History, import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
QUICK, report template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Rate Change Times
QUICKANL, report template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Automatic Pick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
QUICKINP, report template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Rate-dependence, correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 547
QvT, Production forecasting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 Rate-dependent skin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299, 328
Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
R Reduction
Radial Composite data density . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
multiple zone model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 data recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Type Curve Equation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 Reference back to initial pressure . . . . . . . . . . 334
Radial Composite Model Worked example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 618
Two-zone Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 References . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 651
Radial distance to discontinuity . . . . . . . . . . . . 211 Region
Radial flow Material properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
Plot button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340 Regions, PanMesh input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273
Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 active and inactive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296
Radial Homogenous Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207 delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Vertical Mesh Refinement in Adjacent Layers . 296
Radius wellbore damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Damage zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Registry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Radius of Investigation HLLC_K_L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118 Units-System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Radius of investigation VertFract-FinCond . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Relative permeability
Data entry . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Data selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Parametric . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
Tabular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201
Remarks Page, report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Remove end effect, derivative . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Index
668
Index
Report Reservoir model, customer
Analysis Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 General intersecting faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Confidence intervals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Partially sealing fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Configure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81 Pinch-out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256
Cover Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Radial composite multiple regions . . . . . . . . . 255
Customise template . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Slanted well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Deliverability Results . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Three-layer homogeneous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Edit Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Reservoir models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Export as Word Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
File Reservoir View window, PanMesh . . . . . . . . . . 400
HPGL/2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 635 Resolution
Text only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34, 635 pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119, 386
Word Document . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Results
Footer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87
Gauge data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
Header . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 Text file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61
Input data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83 Re-weight points for Auto Match . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 78 Rho g (Gas Density) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Numerical Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 Rho o (Oil Density) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
PAS.AOF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
Print . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Rho w (Water Density) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Rate Change Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84 Rock Compressibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198
Template
load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Rotate, PanMesh reservoir image . . . . . . . . . . 401
save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87 Round scaling, plot axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
To graphics file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 Ruler Bar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
To printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
To text file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 Dataprep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
Report writing Run Mode, PanMesh input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299
Worked example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 629
S
Reporting bugs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
S, True skin factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 209
Resampling Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Save As
Reservoir
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
3D View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Worked example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 V2.3, File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Reservoir geometry, PanMesh input . . . . . . . . 262 Files and File Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
areal heterogeneity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Plot file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58
boundary conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287
concave angles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271 Screen
delete reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
dip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Screen Size, plot size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
drawing the outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
import a map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 SEA
internal boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269 File format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 573
internal no-flow boundary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 275 Selecting Points
layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Auto Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
move axes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Dataprep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
move node . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
node editing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 287 Semi-log plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 273 Send as E-mail . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
template import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
User Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 Separator
Index
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
669
Index
Sf, Fracture face skin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209 Slope of line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
Shift Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Slug test
Shifting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Storage coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Test type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
Show Marker Text, Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 Smoothing
Shut-in pressure, estimated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161
Minimise end effect . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Simplified (C-and-n) method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354 Weight basis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Simulate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375 Weighting shape . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Advanced . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 387, 470 Window span . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Auto Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381 Smoothing constant
Numerical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 395 Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
PanFlow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Derivative . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Quick Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Solid model view, PanMesh reservoir image . . 402
Simulated data
Flowrates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 Solution
Pressure overlay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 GOR
Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 482 The solution GOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Test design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484 Model
Simulation Adv Sim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Flow Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Create own . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488
Time steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149 Space/tab delimited columns, import . . . . . . . . 132
Worked example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 606
Speed option, Adv Sim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 389, 478
Single fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
Speed option, PanFlow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 393
Single phase
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Speed up, plotting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223 Spherical flow
Single-point test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356 Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517, 555
Set-up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357 Plot button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Size, plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63 Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Splicing Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166, 167
Skin
Factor Spr . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 509
in PanMesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298 Pseudo-radial skin factor equation .507, 509, 514,
Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 209, 213 516, 518, 519, 527, 551, 556, 557
Pseudo-radial . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 209, 213 Spr, pseudo-radial skin factor . . . . . . . . . . 209, 213
Rate-dependent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204, 209 Square-root plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Varying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204
Stabilisation
Mechanical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 298
Pressure drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 499 Time to (C-and-n) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Rate-dependent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Stabilised flowing pressure
Vs Flowrate plot C-and-n method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 546
Stabilization
Worked example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 616
Flowrate (C-and-n) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Skin pressure drop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 541 Start values, Auto Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Skip column, import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Start/end, Quick Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Slant well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Status bar, PanMesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 424
PanMesh input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Stb Lin button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Slanted well model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
STB Log button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
Index
Slider’s method, buildup test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
670
Index
Storativity ratio Test Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Adv Sim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 503, 528, 543 Adv Sim output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 484
from log-log plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Fall-off test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
Straight Line Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28 Flow Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Flow Rate Advisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Sub-layers, PanMesh input . . . . . . . . . . . 261, 287 Flowrates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 473
Material properties . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295 Injection wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
interference test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 638
Sub-sea pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Interfering wells . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
Superposition functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 PanWizard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 51
Principal well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Testing Time Advisor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52
From EPS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 Time formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
SvQ button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347 Test Overview
Symbol weight, plots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
Different skins and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
System Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33 Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316, 339
Quick Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
T Test Period
T/L Lin button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127, 128
Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 586
T/L Log button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
Selection for analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318, 339
T/W Lin button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449 Test types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 181
T0 button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 Testing Time Advisor
Tabular format equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 534, 563
Rel perm data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 201 Tf button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Rel perm dialog box (gas/oil) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 202
Thickness, sub-layer, for PanMesh . . . . . . . . . 288
TCX file
Create own . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Three-layerhomogeneousreservoirwithinternalcrossflow
Hints on generating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 489 257
Save . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478 Ticks, plot axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Template Tidal filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
PanMesh input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284 Maritime tide table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80, 81 Sub-sea pressure gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
TPR import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135 Tide
Test Table
Interference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Tidal Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Slug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 Apply, tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309, 310
Lag tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Tide table
Maritime . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
Mean tide height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Tile button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 358
Index
671
Index
Time Toolbar
Formats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137, 141 Data Edit Plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
24 hr update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134 Dataprep
Function Apply tidal filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Auto Flow Periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173
Constant rate history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Calculate Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Equivalent drawdown time . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Calculate tidal lag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Full history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Confirm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
No history . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Copy & Paste tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Copy Resample & Paste Column . . . . . . 166
Use Horner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 Copy, Resample & Create . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Varying rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Copy, Resample & Paste . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Into drawdown, LIT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 352 Delete data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Mark button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373 Difference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Pseudo-time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Exact point rate change . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
to detect boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535, 563 Group flow periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
to semi-steady state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535, 563
Transformation option . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Initialise data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Nearest point rate change . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Time formats
Noise Threshold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Data import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134, 137
Test Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 Number of points . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165
Pressure Gradient Threshold . . . . . . . . . 173
Time-stepped Wellbore Storage model . . . . . . 194
Rate change from intersection . . . . . . . . 172
Title, plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Reduce data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Tool buttons Shift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Shifting data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
Dataprep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Tidal filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Deliverability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 41 Undo last delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164
Quick guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39 Ungroup flow periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Tool Tips Zoom in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19, 44 Zoom out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Flow arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413, 418
Options
Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
Dataprep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
PanMesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 418
About PanMesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 420
Colour contour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409, 418
Flow arrows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413, 418
Go . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406, 418
Horizontal cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Pause . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407, 418
Select a point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411, 420
Solid Model view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407, 418
Vertical cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
View damage zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
View wellbore only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Wire frame view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
Print PanMesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413
Index
Total Compressibility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 199
672
Index
TPR file . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 Units
TPR header, gauge data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Change unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115, 116
Conversions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113, 114
TR Lin button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 Create system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Define new unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116
TR Log button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453 Edit existing unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Transfer Edit system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
Rate Change edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Select system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
Rates, history match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 475 Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
Test Design edit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Unloading, minimum flowrate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 564
Transmissibility Unzoom
across a fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Panmesh Drawing Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
between compartments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507
vertical, between layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210 Uo (Oil Viscosity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Tuning Use EoS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 237
Anchored . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232 Use Horner, time function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Free . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 232
Parameters User
Condensate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Selected type-curve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Supplied flow model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 478
Turbulent skin factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 328 User Guide Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348 Section 1 - basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
in PanMesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 299 Section 2 - dataprep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Section 3 - analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Tw Lin button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448 Section 4 - advanced simulation . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Two-cell compartmentalised model . . . . . . . . . 217 Section 5 - other information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Section 6 - examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Analysis type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322
User Guide, on-line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
Type Curve Equation
Radial Composite . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 User Menu, PanMesh input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Type-curve Boundary Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Clear Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Analysis Close Reservoir . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Equations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 558 Drawing Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 281
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346 Graph Scales . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Change stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Internal No-Flow Boundaries . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Create own . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 488 Key Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Export . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 Map Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Extensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 565 Node Dialog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
File structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567 Pen Colour . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282
Match button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Region Colours . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Matching tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370 Remove Regions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Methods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 Sketch Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 280
Start again . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 370
Starting stage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 U-Shaped faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 216
User-selected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368 Uw (Water Viscosity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
Worked example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 609
U V
Ug (Gas Viscosity) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225, 236 Valid test period check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317
Undo tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Vaporizing volume ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244
Ungroup Flow Periods Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Variable, Auto Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 384
Index
673
Index
Varying Rate Weighting points for Auto Match . . . . . . . . 361, 382
Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334 Weighting shape
Creating rate data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
Group flow periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 179
Quick Match . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379 Well
Ungroup flow periods . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180 Active, inactive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Varying Skin . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204 Add new . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Change name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Vertical cut, PanMesh reservoir image . . . . . . 403 change name . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Vertical Fracture - Infinite Conductivity Model . 207 Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189
Copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Vertical Fracture Model Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126, 128
Finite conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Delete . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Limited height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Flow Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
Uniform flux . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208 Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Co-ordinates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Vertical Fracture model
Inter-well distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Infinite conductivity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Vertical Mesh Refinement in Adjacent Layers . 296 Offset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213
Vertical permeability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209, 213 Radius . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
Vertical thickness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Worked example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 592
Vertical well
Principal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 195
Flow models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207
Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189 Well and reservoir description
Vertical well, PanMesh input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Analytical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
Numerical . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
VFP table for production forecasting . . . . . . . . 460 Well Configuration, PanMesh input . . . . . . . . . 291
VFP Table Import . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25 Wellbore Storage
View coefficient . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Co-ordinates, plot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 coefficient equations . . . . . . . . . . . 505, 534, 563
Data File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137 duration of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192
Design 3D . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290 Models
In Analysis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319
View data file for import
In Dataprep . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 191
Non-spreadsheet style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
Spreadsheet style . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131 In PanMesh . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 294
Recognition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Viscosity time to end of . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 535, 563
Condensate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245 Varying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192, 193, 204, 205
Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Wellbore, PanMesh reservoir image . . . . . . . . 404
Volatile oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247
Welltest
Volume factor, gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Data
Analysis overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
W Preparation overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Water Design
Salinity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 Adv Sim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 470
Saturation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 198 Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Single Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184, 223 Wet-stream
Water cut . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226
Water/gas ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236 Condensate . . . . . . . . . . . . . 244, 349, 351, 352
Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349, 351, 352
Web-site . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Window span
Weight basis
Index
Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162
Smoothing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 Wire frame view, PanMesh reservoir image . . . 402
674
Index
Wizard
Help . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44
Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
WT Lin button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
X
X, Y co-ordinates
Exact Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Xf, Fracture half-length . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209
Z
Z-factor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Zoom
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 332
In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Tool . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Panmesh Drawing Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Zoom, PanMesh reservoir image . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Index
675

Pan Sys UG

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Pan Sys UG

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

EPS PanSystem User Guide

EPS PanSystem User Guide

Edinburgh Petroleum Services Ltd

(C) Copyright EPS Ltd

ALL RIGHTS RESERVED

EPS PanSystem User Guide

Edinburgh Petroleum Services Ltd,

Chapter 2 - "File Menu Options"

Chapter 3 - "Edit Menu Options"

Section 2: Data Preparation

Chapter 6 - "Gauge Data"

Chapter 8 - “Well and Reservoir Description (Numerical)"

Chapter 9 - "Tide Table"

Section 5 - Other Useful Information

What Users Should Know

Far East Office:

Users will find information on:

1.1. PanSystem Installation

• Intel or compatible 486 or Pentium-based chip.

Figure : 1.1.2 - 1 Installation Status Bars

1.Percentage of space left on the drive that PanSystem is to be installed onto.

Figure : 1.1.2 - 2 Copying Files Status Box

• regedit for Windows 95/98/2000.

• HKEY_CURRENT_USER - This branch links to a section of HKEY_USERS appropriate

1. 1. 3. PANSYS30.INI and the Registry

• Reporting (see “Report Cover Page”, on page 87).

1. 1. 3. PANSYS30.INI and the Registry

• The Registry Editor Help menu.

1. 1. 4. Start-Up Security Error Message

1.2. PanSystem Features

1. 1. 4. Start-Up Security Error Message

1. 2. 1. Preparing and Editing Welltest Data

1. 2. 2. Analysing Welltest Data

1. 2. 2. Analysing Welltest Data

Pressure Axis Time Axis Type of Flow Regime

Semi steady state

Analysis using Advanced Simulation and PanFlow

1. 2. 3. Computing well deliverability and forecasting long-term production

Analysis using the PanMesh Numerical Simulator

1. 2. 3. Computing well deliverability and forecasting long-term

1. 2. 4. Designing Well Tests

1. 2. 5. Preparing Detailed Reports on Welltest Analysis

• System files (.PAN - or .PAX pre-PanSystem version 2.4)

1. 3. 1. Gauge Data Files

24-Jan-96 17:17:00 4199.92 4199.65

1. 3. 3. Tide Table Files (optional)

1. 3. 4. Text-only Report File

1. 3. 5. Word Document Report File

1. 3. 6. Saving Files and File Extensions

1. 3. 4. Text-only Report File

1. 4. Preparing Data For Analysis

1. 5. Using PanSystem For Analysis

Figure : 1.7.0 - 1 Typical PanSystem Screen

- options for data reduction and smoothing

- undo last data reduction or deletion

- confirm data reduction/deletion to file

- display number of points in file/test period

- Copy, Resample and Create a new column in another file

- generate data stream difference column

- exact cursor position for flow period start/end definition

- nearest data point for flow period start/end definition

1. 7. 1. Tool Buttons Quick Reference

- calculate rate column from Rate Changes Table or dP/dt